f^
niH'^ihiuii,
Given By
U. S. SUPT. OF DOCUMENTS
^
"^^yyUe/t
The U.N. and Specialized Agencies Page
Challenges and Opportunities in World
Health: The First World Health Assem-
bly. Article by H. van Zile Hyde,
M.D 391
Assassination of Count Folke Bernadotte,
U.N. Mediator in Palestine:
Statement by Secretary Marshall .... 399
Message From Representative of Secretary-
General to Israeli Foreign Minister . . 399
Preliminary Report From American Con-
sul General at Jerusalem 399
United Nations Charter: A Standard for
Conduct Among Nations. Address by
Secretary Marshall 400
U.N. Documents: A Selected Bibliography . 401
General Policy
American Diplomatic Personnel Detained in
Rumania 403
Freedom of Movement Allowed Mrs. Kasen-
kina and Mr. Samarin: U.S. Note to the
Soviet Embassy on September 9. . . . 408
Science Falls Victim to Communism's Strait
Jacket. Address by George V. Allen. . 409
Communist Strategy in Southeast Asia. . . 410
Incident Involving Seating of Ethiopian
Minister at Meeting of Scientists: Ex-
change of Correspondence Between the
Ethiopian Legation and the Department
of State 413
Evacuation of U.S. Nationals From Hydera-
bad 414
Treaty Information Paga
Disposition of the Former Italian Colonies:
U.S. Position in the Council of Foreign
Ministers 402
Rumanian Nationalization Legislation Con-
sidered Violation of Peace Treaty:
U.S. Note to Rumania Delivered Sep-
tember 7 408
Yugoslavia Pays for Nationalized American
Property 413
Correction in Protocol of Schedule XX of
General Agreement on Tariffs and
Trade 414
Occupation Matters
Displaced-Persons Resettlement Program:
Steps for Admission of Aliens Into U.S. . . 411
DP Commission Staff Departs for Ger-
many 412
Registration of Immigrants to the U.S.
From German and Austrian Zones . . 412
Economic AKairs
Czechoslovakia Settles Lend-Lease Account . 413
The Congress
A Review of the Work of the Eightieth Con-
gress 415
Publications
Foreign Relations of the United States, 1932,
Volumes III and IV 418
Department of State 419
U. S. SOVERNMENT PRtNTlN* OFFlCEi IG4a
420
ii
^ T/Q: r
r
,j/te/ ^eha^imen{/ ,{w t/taie^
THE BERLIN CRISIS:
Communique by U.S., U.K., and France 423
U.S. Note to the Soviet Government 423
Soviet Note to U.S. Government 426
Tri-Partite Aide-Memoire lo Soviet Government . . 427
NO COMPROIMISE ON ESSENTIAL FREEDOMS •
Address by Secretary Marshall to General Assembly ... 432
CONCLUSIONS FROM REPORT BY PALESTINE
MEDIATOR 436
For complete contents see back cover
1
October 3, 1918
.^lENT oj^
OCT 25 1948
^«" o»
e>%e Zl^c/ia/ytnie^ £^ t/lale
bulletin
Vol. XIX, No. 483 • Publication 3295
Oaoher 3, 1948
For sale by tbe Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office
Washington 26, D.C.
Price:
62 Issues, domestic $6, foreign $7.25
Single copy, 16 cents
Published with the approval of tbe
Director of the Bureau of tbe Budget
Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Defabtment
OF State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.
The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.
Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.
The Berlin Crisis
COMMUNIQUE BY U.S., U-K., AND FRANCE
[Released to the press September L'6]
Text of the joint communique isxued by the three
Foreign Ministers in Paris on September 26
Mr. Schuman, Mr. Bevin and Mr. Marshall met
shortly after noon at the Quai d'Orsay to consider
the Soviet note of September 25, 1948, I'elating to
the situation in Berlin, caused by the imposition
and continuance of the Soviet blockade of rail,
road and water communications between Berlin
and the Western Zones of occupation in Germany.
In view of the fact that the Soviet Government
in violation of the understanding between the Four
Powers has chosen to make public unilaterally its
version of these negotiations, the three Ministers,
authorized the following statement :
"The Governments of France, the United States
and the United Kingdom are in agreement that
the Soviet note of September 25 is unsatisfactory.
The Soviet Government fails to provide the assur-
ance requested in the notes from the three govern-
ments of September 22, 19-18, that the illegal block-
ade measures be removed. In addition it demands
that commercial and passenger traffic between the
Western Zones and Berlin, by air as well as by
rail, water and road be controlled by the Soviet
Command in Germany. This demand of the
Soviet Government is restated with emphasis in
the official communique issued in Moscow. More-
over, in I'egavd to currency, the Soviet note is
evasiA'e and does not answer the clear position
stated by the three governments.
"Accordingly, the three governments are trans-
mitting a note to the Soviet Government fully
setting out their position and informing it that in
view of the insistence of the Soviet Government
upon maintaining the blockade and upon the insti-
tution of restrictions on air communications they
are compelled in compliance with their obligations
under the Charter of the United Nations, to refer
the matter to the Security Council."
U.S. NOTE DELIVERED TO THE SOVIET GOVERNMENT
[Released to the press September 27]
The Acting Secretary of State presents his com-
pliments to His Excellency, the Ambassador of
the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics,^ and has
the honor to transmit the following communica-
tion :
1. The Governments of the United States,
France and the United Kingdom, conscious of
their obligations under the Charter of the United
Nations to settle disputes by peaceful means, took
the initiative on July 30, 1948 in approaching the
Soviet Government for informal discussions in
Moscow in order to explore every possibility of
adjusting a dangerous situation wliich had arisen
by reason of measures taken by the Soviet Gov-
ernment directly challenging the rights of the
other occupying powers in Berlin. These meas-
ures, persistently pursued, amounted to a blockade
of land and water transport and communication
between the Western zones of Germany and Berlin
which not onh' endangered the maintenance of the
, forces of occupation of the United States, France
and tlie United Kingdom in that city but also
Ocfober 3, 7948
jeopardized the discharge by those Governments
of their duties as occupying powers through the
threat of starvation, disease and economic ruin
for the population of Berlin.
2. The Governments of the United States, France
and the United Kingdom have explicitly main-
tained the position that they could accept no ar-
rangement wliich would deny or impair the rights
in Berlin acquired by them through the defeat and
unconditional surrender of Germany and by Four-
Power agreements. They were, however, willing
to work out in good faith any practical arrange-
ments, consistent with their rights and duties, for
restoring to normal the situation in Berlin, in-
cluding the problems presented by the existence of
two currencies in that city.
?>. After long and patient discussion, agree-
ment was arrived at in Moscow on a directive to
the four Military Governors under which the re-
strictive measures placed by the Soviet Military
Government upon transport and communications
' Alexander S. Panyushkin.
423
between the Western zones and Berlin would be
lifted simultaneously with the introduction of
the German mark of the Soviet zone as the sole
currency for Berlin under Four-Power control of
its issue and continued use in Berlin.
4. In connection with the lifting of restrictions
and the maintenance of freedom of communica-
tion and the transport of persons and goods be-
tween Berlin and the Western zones, the agreed
directive provided that restrictions recently im-
posed should be lifted. Generalissimo Stalin dur-
ing the discussions personally confirmed that this
meant the removal also of any restrictions imposed
prior to June 18, 1948.
In connection with the currency situation in
Berlin, the Soviet authorities insisted that the
German mark of the Soviet zone be accepted as the
sole currency for Berlin. The three Western
occupying powers declared that they were ready
to withdraw from circulation in Berlin the West-
ern mark "B"' issued in that city and to accept the
German mark of the Soviet zone subject to Four-
Power control over its issuance, circulation and
continued use in Berlin (i.e. in Berlin only and
not in the Soviet zone). After long discussions
Generalissimo Stalin, on August 23, 1948, person-
ally agreed to this Four-Power control and him-
self iDroposed the establishment of a Four-Power
Financial Commission which would control the
practical implementation of the financial arrange-
ments involved in the introduction and continued
circulation of a single currency in Berlin and
which. Generalissimo Stalin specifically stated,
would have the power to control the German
Bank of Emission of the Soviet zone insofar as its
operations with respect to Berlin were concerned.
5. It was with these understandings, personally
confirmed by Generalissimo Stalin, that the agreed
directive was sent to the four Military Governors
in Berlin to work out the technical arrangements
necessary to put it into eflPect.
6. Despite these clear understandings, the So-
viet Military Governor soon made it plain in the
discussions held by the four Military Governors
that he was not prepared to abide by the agreed
dii'ective.
Although the directive called for the unqualified
lifting of the restrictions on transport and com-
munications between the Western zones and Berlin,
the Soviet Military Governor failed to comply.
What is more he demanded that restrictions should
be imposed on air traffic. He endeavored to sup-
port his demand by a false interpretation of a de-
cision of the Control Council of November 30,
1945. Actually during the discussions leading up
to the decision of the Control Council of November,
1945, to establi-sh air corridors the Soviet military
authoi-ities in Berlin had suggested that the traffic
in the corridors should be limited to the needs of
the military forces. Neither the Control Council,
424
however, nor any other Four-Power body accepted
this proposal and the traffic in the corridors has
since been subject only to those safety regulations
which were agreed on a P^our-Power basis. Other
than these agreed safety regulations, no restric-
tions whatsoever have been or are in existence
on the use by aircraft of the occupying powers
of air communications in the corridors between
Berlin and the Western zones of Germany.
In regard to Four-Power control of the German
mark of the Soviet zone in Berlin, the Soviet
Military Governor refused to admit, despite the
agreement in Moscow, that the Financial Commis-
sion should exercise control over the operations
with respect to Berlin of the German Bank of
Emission of the Soviet zone.
Furthermore, with res])ect to the question of the
control of the trade of Berlin, the position of the
Soviet Military Governor amounted to a claim for
exclusive Soviet authority over the trade of Berlin
with the Western zones of occupation and with
foreign countries. This claim was a contradiction
of the clear meaning of the agreed directive to
the Four Military Governors.
7. Even while discussions were in progress, the
Soviet authorities in Berlin tolerated attempts on
the part of minority groups sympathetic to their
political aims forcibly to overthrow the legal gov-
ernment of the city of Berlin, constituted by demo-
cratic elections held under Four-Power super-
vision. On August 30 the representatives of the
three Western occupying powers in Moscow had
drawn Mr. Molotov's attention to the disturbed
situation in Berlin. They suggested that instruc-
tions be sent to the Four Military Governors that
they should do all in their power to preserve a
favorable atmosphere in Berlin, but Mr. Molotov
claimed that such instructions to the Soviet Mili-
tary Governor were unnecessary. Nevertheless,
after that date these attempts to overthrow the city
government increased in violence.
8. On September 14, 1948 the representatives of
the Governments of the United States, France and
the United Kingdom, acting on specific instruc-
tions, called the attention of the Soviet Govern-
ment to the Soviet Military Governor's disregard
of the agreements reached during the Moscow dis-
cussions and requested that he be instructed to
give effect to them.
9. The Soviet Government's reply of September
18, however, upheld the Soviet Military Governor's
position. The Soviet Government further con-
firmed its intention to disregard its commitment
to lift the restrictions imposed on transport and
communications by seeking to impose restrictions
which had not before been in effect.
With respect to trade, the Soviet requirement
that the licensing of trade with Berlin be placed
in the hands of the Soviet military authorities
made plain the Soviet Government's intention to
obtain exclusive control over the trade of Berlin.
Department of State Bulletin
As regards the powers of the Four-Power Fiiiiiii-
eial Commission, the Soviet reply asserted that
the AVestern occupying powers desired to estab-
lish control over all operations of the German
Bank of P'mission. In fact the United States, the
United Kingdom and French Military Governors
sought only to secure the Soviet Military Gov-
ernor's acceptance of the agreed principle tnat the
Four- Power Financial Connnission should control
the operations of the Bank with respect to the
financial arrangements relating to the currency
changeover and to the continued provision and use
of the German mark of the Soviet zone in the city
of Berlin, (i.e. in Berlin only and not in the
Soviet zone). In the light of Mr. Molotov's state-
ments during the discussion of the Soviet reply,
it became clear that no assurance was given that
the Soviet Military Governor would be prepared
to proceed on the previously agreed basis. Thus
in this matter, as in others, the intention of the
Soviet Government was manifestly to impose con-
ditions nullifying the authority of the Western
occupying powers and to acquire complete control
over the city of Berlin.
10. For the Governments of the United States,
France, and the United Kingdom to continue dis-
cussions when fundamental agreements previously
reached had been disregarded by the Soviet Gov-
ernment would have been futile. It would have
been equally fruitless to continue such discussions
in the face of the unmistakable intention of the
Soviet Government to undermine, and indeed to
destroy, the rights of the three Governments as
occupying powers in Berlin as a price for lifting
the blockade, illegally imposed in the first instance
and still unlawfully maintained. The Three Gov-
ernments therefore despatched identical notes on
September 22nd to the Soviet Government. In
those notes after restating their position on the
specific points at issue they asked the Soviet Gov-
ernment whether it was prepared to remove the
blockade measures which it had imposed and
thereby to establish conditions which would permit
a continuation of discussions.
11. The reply of the Soviet Government in its
notes to the three Governments of September 25,
1948 is unsatisfactory.
As regards the introduction and continued cir-
culation and use in Berlin of the German mark of
the Soviet zone, the Soviet Government misrepre-
sents the position of the three Western occupying
powers. The latter have made it clear from the
outset that they do not desire to exei-cise any con-
trol over the financial arrangements in the Soviet
zone of occupation, but are insisting on those con-
ditions only which would provide adequate Four-
Power control over the financial arrangements for
the introduction and continued circulation and use
of the German mark of the Soviet zone as the sole
currency in Berlin.
As regards control of the trade of Bei-lin the
Ocfober 3, 1948
Soviet Government contrary to its previous atti-
tude now states its willingness to agree to the es-
tablishment of Four-Power control over the issu-
ance of licenses for the import and export of goods
provided that agreement is reached on all other
questions. It is clear, after more than six weeks
of discussions, from the Soviet Government's per-
sistent refusal to remove the blockade measures
and its continued insistence on other conditions
which would enable it to destroy the authority
and rights of the United States, France and the
United Kingdom as occupying powers in Berlin.
that this conditional concession is illusory.
As regards air traffic between Berlin and the
Western zones of occupation, the Soviet Govern-
ment, while neither affirming nor withdrawing the
demand for the particular restrictions put for-
ward by the Soviet Military Governor during the
discussions in Berlin and confirmed in its reply of
September 18th, introduces another requirement
to the effect that transport by air of commercial
freight and passengers must be placed under the
control of the Soviet command.
The Soviet Govermnent's note of September 25
therefore not only ignores the request of the three
Governments that the blockade measures should
be removed in order that conditions may be estab-
lished which would permit the continuation of
discussions; it also seeks to impose restrictions on
transport and communications between Berlin and
the Western zones which would place the mainte-
nance of the forces of occupation of the three West-
ern occupying powers and the whole life of the
Berlin population within the arbitrary power of
the Soviet command, thus enabling the Soviet
military authorities to reimpose the blockade at
any moment in the future if they so desired.
12. Accordingly, it is apparent that the Soviet
Government had no intention of carrying out
the undertakings to which it had subscribed dur-
ing the Moscow discussions in August. In the
face of the expressed readiness of the Governments
of the United States, France and the United King-
dom to negotiate with the Soviet Government all
outstanding questions regarding Berlin and Ger-
many as a whole in an atmosphere free from duress,
the Soviet Government has, in fact, persisted in
using duress. It has resorted to acts of force
rather than to the processes of peaceful settlement.
It has imposed and maintained illegal restrictions
amounting to a blockade of Berlin. It has failed
to work out in good faith Four-Power arrange-
ments for the control of the currency of that city.
Even while the Western occupying powers were
seeking agreement on measures to implement the
understandings reached in Moscow the Soviet mili-
tary authorities condoned and encouraged attempts
to overthrow the legally constituted municipal
government of Berlin. These actions are plainly
attempts to nullify unilaterally the rights of the
Western occupying powers in Berlin, which are
425
co-equal with those of the Soviet Union and like
them are derived from the defeat and unconditional
surrender of Germany and from Four-Power
agreements to which the Soviet Government is a
party. Moreover, the use of coercive pressure
against the Western occupying powers is a clear
violation of the principles of the Charter of the
United Nations.
13. Tlie issue between the Soviet Government
and tlie Western occupying powers is therefore not
that of technical difficulties in communications
nor that of reaching agreement upon the condi-
tions for the regulation of the currency for Berlin.
The issue is that the Soviet Government has clearly
shown by its actions that it is attempting by illegal
and coercive measures in disregard of its obliga-
tions to secure political objectives to which it is
not entitled and which it could not achieve by
peaceful means. It has resorted to blockade
measures; it has threatened the Berlin population
with starvation, disease and economic ruin; it has
tolerated disorders and attempted to overthrow
the duly elected municipal govei'nment of Berlin.
The attitude and conduct of the Soviet Govern-
ment reveal sharply its purpose to continue its
illegal and coercive blockade and its unlawful ac-
tions designed to reduce the status of the United
States, France and the United Kingdom as oc-
cupying powers in Berlin to one of complete sub-
ordination to Soviet rule, and thus to obtain abso-
lute authority over the economic, political and
social life of the people of Berlin, and to incorpo- .
rate the city in the Soviet zone.
14. The Soviet Government has thereby taken
upon itself sole responsibility for creating a situa-
tion, in which further i-ecourse to the means of
settlement prescribed in Article 33 of the Charter
of the United Nations is not, in existing circum-
stances, possible, and which constitutes a threat
to international peace and security. In order
that international peace and security may not be
further endajigered the Governments of the United
States, France and the United Kingdom, there-
fore, while reserving to themselves full rights to
take such measures as may be necessary to main-
tain in these circumstances their position in Berlin,
find themselves obliged to refer the action of the
Soviet Government to the Security Council of the
United Nations.
Department of State, Washington
September 26, 191^8.
SOVIET NOTE DELIVERED TO THE U.S. GOVERNMENT
[Released to the press September 27]
On September 26 the Soviet Ambassador in Wash-
ington delivered to the Acting Secretary of State
the following reply of the Soviet Government to
the third-person note of September 22, 19Ii.8
Translation]
1. The Government of the Union of Soviet So-
cialist Republics has acquainted itself with the
note of the Government of the USA of September
22, 1948 concerning the negotiations of the four
powers which have taken place in Moscow and
Berlin on the question of the introduction of the
German mark of the Soviet zone as the sole cur-
rency in Berlin and concerning the removal of the
restrictions on communications, transport and
trade between Berlin and the western zones of
Germany.
In connection with this the Soviet Government
considers it necessary to declare that the position
taken by the Government of the USA not only
does not facilitate but on the contrary complicates
the reaching of agreement concerning the settle-
ment of the situation which has arisen in Berlin
as a result of carrying out of a separate currency
reform and the introduction of a sejmrate currency
in the westei'n zones of Germany and in the west-
ern sectors of Berlin, which constituted an extreme
and most far reaching measure in execution of the
426
policy of partitioning Germany being carried out
by the Governments of the USA, Great Britain
and France.
2. In its note the Government of the USA refers
to three disputed questions which were mentioned
by the Governments of the USA, Great Britain
and France in the aide memoire of September 14
and by the Government of the USSR in the aide . ,
memoire of September 18, 1948. li
The Government of the United States of Amer- "^
ica states that the continuation of the negotiations
on the above-mentioned questions on the present
basis would be useless and considers that in order
to create the conditions which would permit a
continuation of the negotiations, there would have
to be a removal of the temporary transport restric-
tions between Berlin and the western zones which .
were introduced by the Soviet Command for the I'
purpose of protecting the interests of the German
population as well as the economy of the Soviet
zone of occupation and of Berlin itself.
Such a statement of the Government of the USA
is in direct conflict with the agi'eement reached on
August 30 in Moscow between the four govern-
ments (the directive to the Military Governors),
in which it was stated :
"The Governments of France, the United King-
dom, the United States, and the USSR have de-
cided that, subject to agreement being reached
Department of State Bulletin
among the four inilitiiry <rovernors in Berlin for
their practical impleinenlatioii, the following steps
shall be taken simultaneously :
" (a ) Restrictions on communications, transport
and connnerce between Berlin and the western
zones, and also on the movement of cargoes to and
from the Soviet zone of Germany, which have re-
cent h' been imposed, shall be lifted;
"(b) The German mark of the Soviet zone
shall be introduced as the sole currency for Berlin,
and the Western mark B shall be withdrawn from
circulation in Berlin."
From the text of the agreement cited above it
is evident that the four governments agreed during
the negotiations in Moscow on the simultaneous
lifting of restrictions on trade and communica-
tions between Berlin and the western zones and
introduction of the German mark of the Soviet
zone as the sole currency in Berlin. The Soviet
Government insists on this, since the situation
created by the separate measures of the western
powers means that the three governments are not
limiting themselves to their sovereign adminis-
tration of the western zones of Germany but wish
at the same time to administer in currency and
financial matters the Soviet zone of occupation as
well, by means of introducing into Berlin, which
is in the center of the Soviet zone, their separate
currency and thus disrupting the economy of the
eastern zone of Germany and in the last analysis
forcing the USSR to withdraw therefrom.
The Soviet Government considers it necessary
that the agreement reached in Moscow be carried
out and considers that further negotiations can be
successful only in the event that the other three
governments likewise observe that agreement. If
the Government of the USA repudiates the agree-
ment reached on August 30, only one conclusion
can be drawn therefrom : namely, that the Gov-
ernment of the USA does not wish any agreement
between the USSR, the USA, Great Britain and
France for the settlement of the situation in Berlin.
3. Inasmuch as the position of the Governments
of the USA, Great Britain and France on the three
disputed points was set forth in the note of Sep-
tember 22, the Soviet Government considers it
necessary to do likewise :
A) As regards air communication between Ber-
lin and the western zones, the establishment by the
Soviet Command of a control over the transport
of commercial cargoes and passengers is just as
necessary in this case as in the case of railway,
water and highway transport. The air routes can-
not remain uncontrolled, since an understanding
has been reached between the four governments to
the eft'ect that the agreement must envisage the
establishment of a corresjionding control over cur-
rency circulation in Berlin and the trade of Berlin
with the western zones.
B) In the directive to the Military Governors
adopted by the four governments on August 30th
the functions of control by the four power finan-
cial commission of the execution of financial meas-
ures connected with the introduction and circula-
tion of a single currency in Berlin were explicitly
provided for.
The Soviet Government considers it necessary
that this agreement be carried out, including the
maximum reduction of occupation costs in Berlin
and the establishment of a balanced budget in Ber-
lin (not considered up to this time in the Berlin
conversations), which were provided for in that
agreement.
C) The Soviet Government has already ex-
pressed its agreement that trade between Beilin,
third countries and the western zones of Germany
should be placed under the control of the four
power financial commission. The Soviet Govern-
ment now declares its readiness to agree to the
establishment of four power control likewise over
the issuance of import and export licenses, pro-
vided agreement is reached on all other questions.
4. Thus the reaching of agreement about the
situation in Berlin now depends above all on
whether the Governments of Great Britain, the
United States of America and France are seeking
such agreement.
TRI-PARTITE AIDE-MEMOIRE TO SOVIET GOVERNMENT
"1. The Governments of France, the United
Kingdom and the United States having received
and studied reports from their Military Governors
of the discussions in Berlin find it necessary to
draw the attention of the Soviet Government to
the fact that the position adopted by the Soviet
Miltary Governor during the meetings in Berlin
on a number of points deviate from the principles
agreed at Moscow between the four Governments
and contained in the agreed directive to the four
Military Governors. As the Soviet Government
is aware, the terms of this directive were finally
Ocfober 3, J 948
agreed after long and careful consideration, and
after clarifications as to interpretation had been
received from the Soviet Government.
"2. The specific issues on which in the opmion of
the Governments of France, the United Kingdom
and the United States, the Soviet Military Gov-
ernor has departed from the understandings
reached at Moscow relate to: (1) restrictions on
communications, transport and commerce between
Berlin and the western zones; (2) the authority
and functions of the financial commission, and in
particular its relation to the German bank of
427
emission; and (3) the control of the ti'ade of
Berlin.
"3. As to the first, the Soviet Military Governor
has presented a proposal which falls outside the
agreed principle that the restrictions which have
recently been imposed on communications, trans-
port and commerce be lifted. He has proposed
that restrictions upon air traffic, not heretofore
existing, should now be imposed, and in particu-
lar that air traffic to Berlin should be strictly
limited to that necessary to meet the needs of the
military forces of occupation.
"4. As the Soviet Government is aware, the
directive makes no mention of air transport and
this question was not discussed at Moscow. The
directive reads: 'Restrictions on communications,
transport and commerce between Berlin and the
western zones and to and from the Soviet zone of
Germany which have recently been imposed shall
be lifted.' There have been and are no such re-
strictions on air traffic. The purpose of tlie di-
rective is to lift restrictions and not to impose new
ones. The proposal of the Soviet Commander-in-
Chief, therefore, falls outside the scope of the
present discussions and is unacceptable.
"5. Secondly, on the question of the authority
and functions of the financial commission there
should be not the slightest grounds for any mis-
understanding. At the meeting on August 23 at-
tended by Premier Stalin and Mr. Molotov and the
representatives of the Governments of France, the
United Kingdom and the United States, the in-
tention of the directve in regard to the powers of
the financial commission including its power to
control the operations in Berlin of the German
bank of emission was clearly and specifically con-
firmed by Premier Stalin. The Soviet Military
Governor has refused to accept both the meaning
of the dii-ective and the clear understanding: of the
Four Powers reached at Moscow.
"6. Thirdly, there is the question of the control
of the trade of Berlin. The position of the Soviet
Military Governor during the discussions in Ber-
lin in regard to matters relating to the control of
trade between Berlin and the western zones of
Germany amounts to a claim for exclusive Soviet
authority over such matters. Such a claim is a
contradiction of the spirit and meaning of the
directive to the four Military Governors to which
the four Governments gave their approval and is
therefore unacceptable.
"7. In bringing these major points of difference
to the notice of the Soviet Government, the Gov-
ernments of United States, the United Kingdom
and France do not wish to imply that these are the
only points of difference which have arisen during
the conversations in Berlin.
"8. The Governments of France, the United
Kingdom and the United States have understood
clearly the principles agieed to in Moscow and the
428
assurances given by Premier Stalin. Their Mili-
tary Governors in Berlin have acted in accordance
with these principles and assurances. The po-
sition taken by the Soviet Military Governor, on
the contrary, has constituted a departure from
what was agreed in Moscow and strikes at the
very foundation upon which these discussions were
undertaken. Tlie divergencies which have accord-
ingly arisen on these questions are so serious that
the Governments of France, the United Kingdom |
and the United States feel compelled to inquire !
whether the Soviet Government is prepared to j
affirm the understandings outlined herein and to
issue the necessary instructions to the Soviet Mili-
tary Governor, confirming the agreed intention of
the directive in regard to
"(1) the lifting of all restrictions on communi-
cations, transport and commerce imposed after
March 30, 1948, without imposition of any new
air or other restrictions; and
"(2) the control by the financial commission of
the financial arrangements contemplated in the
agreed directive, including control of the opera-
tions of the Bank of emission with respect to Ber-
lin as specifically confirmed by Premier Stalin;
and
"(3) a satisfactory basis for trade between Ber-
lin and third countries and the western zones of
Germany in accordance with an agreement to be
reached between the four Military Governors
which does not involve the unilateral control of
such trade by the Soviet Trade Administration and
which recognizes the rights of the occupying pow-
ers to import in fulfillment of their responsibilities,
and to control the proceeds from, food and fuel for
the use of the Berlin population and industry.
"9. They believe that only if the steps proposed
in the aide memoire are taken would it be possible
for the Military Governors to continue their |
discussions." |
Stalin being out of town and unavailable, this
aide-mernoire was delivered to Mr. Molotov by the
three Western envoys on September 14.
Molotov expressed the view that progress could
be facilitated if, instead of an immediate exchange
of communications at the government level, the
Military Governors were first to prepare an agreed
report of their discussions; and he proposed that
tliey be given two days to do this. The Western
envoys pointed out that the Military Governor had
already found it impossible to agree on such a
joint report. Molotov then reluctantly agreed to
submit the aide-memoire to his Government for
study and reply.
On September 18, Mr. Molotov invited the West-
ern envoys to the Kremlin and handed them the
Soviet Government's reply, which was likewise in
the form of an aide-memoire. The text was as
follows :
Department of State Bulletin
"1. Tlie Government of the USSR has ac-
quainted itself witli the aide memoire dated Sep-
tember 14 hist of the Governments of France, the
United KinL;-doin and the US, wliich gives a unilat-
eral account of the course of discussions between
the four Jlilitary (jovernors in Berlin and which
presents incorrectly the position adopted by
the Soviet Military Govei-nment during those
discussions.
"The Soviet Government believes that considera-
tion of the difference referred to in the said aide
memoire, which arose durin<; the Berlin discus-
sions in regard to the interpretation of the directive
to the Military Governors would have been facili-
tated and expedited had the four Military Gover-
nors submitted to their governments a joint re])ort
with an account of the course of discussions. In
that event the discussions in Moscow would not
have been based on any unilateral communications
but on an accurate statement of the positions
adopted by all four Military Governors both on
]5oints already agreed between them and on points
left outstanding. Since, however, the representa-
tives of the three Governments have refused to
follow that method of discussion, the Soviet Gov-
ernment finds it necessary to reply to the question
raised in the aide memoire.
"The aide memoire of September 14 refers to the
following 3 questions: (1) Restrictions on com-
munications, transport and commerce between
Berlin and the Western zones; (2) the authority
and functions of the financial commission, and in
particular its relation to the German Bank of
Emission; (3) the control of the trade of Berlin.
At the same time it is asserted that the Soviet
Military Governor allegedly deviated from the
understanding reached on these questions in
Moscow.
"The Soviet Government believes this assertion
to be without foundation because during the Ber-
lin discussions the Soviet Military Governor
strictly followed the agreed directive and the clari-
fications which had been given by Soviet Govern-
ment when it was being drawn up iti Moscow.
Study by the Soviet Government of all materials
relating to the Berlin discussions has shown that
the reason for the differences which arose during
the Berlin discussions lies in the desire of the US,
the UK and the French Military Governors to in-
terpret the directive agreed upon in Moscow in a
unilateral manner and to give it an interpretation
which had not been implied when it was being
drawn up and which constitutes a violation of the
directive, and with this the Soviet Government is
unable to agree.
"2. The directive to the four Military Governors
states the following in regard to the first question
referred to in the aide memoii-e of September 14:
'restrictions on communications, transport and
commerce between Berlin and the Western zones
Ocfober 3, 1948
and on the traffic of goods to and from the Soviet
zone of Germany which have recently been imposed
shall be lifted.'
"The concrete proposals submitted by the Soviet
Military Governor on this point are in full con-
formity with the directive and have for their pur-
pose the lifting of all restrictions on communica-
tions, transport and commerce, which have been
imposed after March 30, 1948, as was stipulated
when the directive was drawn up. During consid-
eration of this question the Soviet Military
Governor pointed to the necessity of the other
three Military Governors complying strictly with
the regulations imposed by the Control Coun-
cil's decision of November 30, 1945 on air traffic for
the needs of the occupation forces and this had
never been disputed by any of the Military Govern-
ors since the adoption of these regulations three
years ago. There is no foundation whatsoever for
regarding this justified demand of the Soviet Mili-
tary Governor as an imposition of new restrictions
on air traffic, because these regulations had been
imposed as far back as 1945 and not after March
30, 1948. Nevertheless, the USA has attempted to
deny the necessity of observing the regulations
which had been imposed by the Control Council on
air traffic of the occupation forces and which re-
main in force to this very day.
"In view of the above, the Soviet Government
believes that the position of the Soviet Military
Governor on this question is absolutely correct,
while the position of the USA Military Governor,
far from being based on the agreed directive, is in
contradiction with it. An interpretation to the
contrary might lead to an arbitrary denial of any
decision previously agreed upon by the Control
Council, and to this the Soviet Government cannot
give its assent.^
"3. The directive to the INIilitary Governors also
contains a clear statement regarding the authority
and functions of the Financial Commission and
regarding the German Bank of Emission.
"This directive was drawn up in full conformity
with the preliminary clarifications on this matter
■ The facts with respect to the Control Council's Nov. 30,
194.5, decision are as follows :
During the discussions prior to the establishment of air
corridors in 1945 the Soviet Military Authorities in Berlin
had in fact suggested that the traffic in the corridors should
be limited to the needs of the military forces. The Allied
Control Authority (Allied Control Council) did not accept
this Soviet proposal and the trafiBc in the corridors has
since then been subject only to agreed safety regulations.
No restrictions whatever were in existence on the use by
aircraft of the occupying powers of air communications in
the corridors between Berlin and the Western zones of
Germany on or before Mur. 3il, 1948.
This fact was specifically pointed out to Mr. Molotov by
the British env(jy, Mr. Roberts, inmiediately upon the
receipt and reading of the aide-memoire handed to the
Western representatives by Mr. Molotov on Sept. 18, 1948.
429
made by Premier J. V. Stalin on August 23, and
referred to in the above-mentioned aide memoire.
"It will be seen from the above text that the
authority and functions of the financial commis-
sion and of the German Bank of Emmission are
precisely laid down in the directive, and it was
by this that the Soviet Military Governor was
guided. According to that directive and to the
understanding reached in Moscow by the four
powers, the financial commission should not exer-
cise control over all operations of the Bank of
Emission in regard to Berlin, but only over those
operations of the Bank of Emission in Berlin
which are specifically provided for in paragraphs
(A), (B), (C), and (D) of the directive. The
proposal to establish control of the financial com-
mission over the whole activity of the German
Bank of Emission in Berlin was not accepted dur-
ing the discussion of this question in Moscow be-
cause this would have led to such interference on
the part of the financial commission in matters of
the regulation of currency circulation as is in-
compatible with the Soviet Administration's re-
sponsibility for the regulation of currency
circulation in the Soviet zone of occupation.
"Accordingly, the Soviet Government cannot
agree to the incorrect interpretation of the agreed
directive given in the aide memoire of the Govern-
ment of France, the UK and the USA, and believes
it necessary that the directive should be strictly
followed.
"4. As to trade, the previously agreed directive
is confined to an instruction to the Militai'y Gov-
ernors to work out a satisfactory basis for trade
between Berlin and third countries and the West-
ern zones of Germany. It will be recalled that on
August 23 during the discussions in Moscow, the
Soviet Government submitted a definite proposal
on this subject, but the question was not considered
in detail and was referred to the Militai-y Gov-
ernors for discussion.
"The proposals on this subject made by the
Soviet Military Governor give no reason to assert
that they are a contradiction of the spirit and
meaning of the agreed directive. On the contrary,
the intention of those proposals is to have the
diiective fulfilled in accordance with the agree-
ments reached in Moscow.
"However, for the purpose of expediting the
drawing up of practical ari-angements in Berlin
the Soviet Government proposes that the Military
Governors be given more detailed instructions on
this matter than those contained in the agreed
directive. The Soviet Government agrees to have
trade between Berlin and third countries and the
Western zones of Germany placed under the con-
trol of the quadripartite financial commission,
which control should provide at the same time
for the maintenance of the existing procedure
regarding the traffic of goods in and out of Berlin
under license of the Soviet Military Administra-
tion. The Soviet Government believes that such
an instruction would be of help in the drawing up
of a concrete agreement on matters of trade with
Berlin.
"5. The Soviet Government believes that discus-
sions between the Military Governors in Berlin
can yield positive results only in the event that all
the Military Governors follow strictly the direc-
tives and instructions agreed between the Govern-
ments of France, the UK, the US and the USSR."
The Western envoys, after reading this docu-
ment, stated that they would submit it to their
governmnets for consideration but warned that it
would scarcely be acceptable.
After studying the reply just quoted, the three
governments delivered to the Soviet Embassies in
Washington, London and Paris on September 22,
1948, identical third person notes in the following
text:
"(1) The Government of the United States, to-
gether with the Governments of France and the
United Kingdom, has now reviewed the discussions
which have taken place on the Berlin situation and
which have culminated in the Soviet reply of Sep-
tember 18 to the aide-memoire of the three Govern-
ments of September 14, 1948.
"(2) The three Governments find that the So-
viet unwillingness to accept previous agreements,
to which reference is made in their aide-memoire
of September 14, is still preventing a settlement.
The reply of the Soviet Government in its aide-
memoire of September 18 is unsatisfactory.
"(3) The final position of the three Govern-
ments on the specific points at issue is as follows :
"(A) They cannot accept the imposition of any
restrictions on air traffic between Berlin and the
Western zones.
"(B) They insist that the Finance Commission
must control the activities of the German Bank of
Emission of the Soviet Zone in so far as they relate
to the financial arrangements for the introduction
and continued use of the Soviet zone mark as the
sole currency in the city of Berlin.
"(C) They insist that trade between Berlin and
the Western zones and other countries must be
under quadripartite control, including the issuance
of licenses.
"(4) After more than six weeks of discussion,
the Governments of the United States, France and
430
Deparfment of Stale Bulletin
the United Kinjrdoin feel tliat the Soviet Govern-
ment is now fully iunmainted with the position of
the three Governments, and that further discus-
sions on the present basis woidd be useless.
"(5) It is clear that the difficulties that have
arisen in the attempts to arrive at practical ar-
raufiements which would restore normal conditions
in Berlin derive not from technical matters but
from a fundamental difference of views between
the (xovei-nments of tiie United States, France and
tlie Unitetl Kiniidom, and the Soviet Government
as to the rijxlits and obligations of the occupyinj2
powers in Berlin, their right to have access by air,
rail, water and road to Berlin and to participate in
tiie administration of the affairs of the city of
Berlin. The blockade imposed by the Soviet au-
thorities together with other of their acts in Berlin
are in violation of the rights of the three AVestern
occupying powers.
"(6) Accordingly the Government of the
United States, in agreement with the Governments
of France and the United Kingdom, asks the Soviet
Government whether, in order to create conditions
which would permit a continuance of discussions,
it is now prepared to remove the blockade meas-
ures, thus restoring the right of the three Western
occupying powers to free communications by rail,
water, and road, and to specify the date on which
this will be done.
"(7) The Foreign Ministers of the three Gov-
ernments will be meeting shortly in Paris, and
they will be glad to have the reply of the Soviet
Government as soon as possible."
.Septemier 22, 194S
Publication of the Report on the
Moscow Discussions
In view of the breakdown of the discussions at
Moscow between the representatives of the West-
ern Powers and the Soviet Union, centering u{>on
the Berlin crisis, the Department of State on Sep-
tember 27 released a report on the Moscow dis-
cussions that reviews the events leading to the
breakdown and records the documents in the case.
Section I of the report recalls that the Soviet
Government lias maintained first that its measures
restricting communications, transport, and com-
merce between Berlin and Western Germany were
necessitated by "technical difficulties" and then
that they were "defensive" against conditions
created by the curi-ency reform in Western Ger-
many and Western Berlin. Tlie chronological
record of events, however, from March 30 to Sep-
tember 26, 1948, reveals that many of the Soviet
restrictive measures were imposed months before
the currency reform and that they have been
systematic products of a deliberate coercive pur-
pose rather than the results of "teclinical diffi-
culties".
Section II records the Moscow discussions that
started on July 30, when the three Western Powers,
unable to see either Molotov or Vishinsky, held a
meeting with Deputy Foreign Minister Zorin.
The first meeting with Foreign Minister Molotov
and Generalissimo Stalin took place on August 2.
In the course of events, from the original request
by the Western Powers for discussions on the Ber-
lin crisis to the ultimate breakdowns of negotia-
tions, the following statements, notes, and pro-
posals are reproduced either in part or in full in
the report : The American note of July 6 and the
Soviet reply of July 14 ; the Western request for
discussion with Stalin and Molotov and the U.S.
aide-immoire of July 30; accounts of the meetings
with Zorin on July 30 and with Molotov on July
31 ; the record of the first meeting with Stalin, in-
cluding his proposals. In the drafting meetings
with Foreign Minister Molotov, the initial West-
ern draft of August 6 is printed together with Mr.
Molotov's counter-draft; also printed are Am-
liassador Smith's statement on behalf of the
Western Powers of August 12, Mr. Molotov's re-
action, the Western draft text of August 17, and
Mr. Molotov's counter-draft of August 17.
The following documents relating to the second
meeting with Stalin on August 23 are reproduced :
his statements on August 23; U.S. views tele-
graphed to Ambassador Smith; draft communi-
que and directive of August 27 worked out with
Molotov and Vishinsky; and the directive of
August 30 sent to Military Governors in Berlin.
The technical discussions in Berlin from August
31 to September 7 are commented on briefly. The
text of the new aide-mwrnmre of the Western
Powers delivered in Moscow on September 14 is
printed together with Mr. Molotov's aide-memoire
of September 18 in reply, and the notes delivered
by the three Governments to tlie Soviet Embassies
in Washington, London, and Paris on September
22. The last documents included in the report
include the Soviet note of September 2.5, the com-
nnniique issued in Paris on September 26 by the
Foreign Ministers of France, the United King-
dom, and the United States, and the note delivered
on September 26 by the Acting Secretary of State
in Washington to the Soviet Ambassador.
Copies of The Berlin Crisis: A Report on the
Moscotv Discussions, 19If8, Department of State
publication 3298, may be obtained from the Super-
intendent of Documents, Government Printing
Office, Washington 25, D.C., for 20 cents each.
Ocfober 3, J 948
431
THE THIRD REGULAR SESSION OF THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY, PARIS
No Compromise on Essential Freedoms
ADDRESS BY SECRETARY MARSHALL ON SEPTEMBER 23, 1948
Chairman, U.S. Delegation
[Released to the press September 23]
Mr. President, Fellow Delegates: We are
particularly liappy to meet here in Paris. France
has, through the centuries, nourished the arts and
sciences for the enrichment of all mankind and
its citizens have striven persistently for expand-
ing freedom for the individual. It is entirely
fitting that this General Assembly, meeting in
France which fired the hearts of men with the
Declaration of the Rights of Man in 1789, should
consider in 1948 the approval of a new declaration
of human rights for free men in a free world.
U.N. Charter as Protection for Free Men
Not only is it appropriate that we should have
reaffirmed our respect for the human rights and
fundamental freedoms but that we should renew
our determination to develop and protect those
rights and freedoms. Freedom of thought, con-
science, and religion ; freedom of opinion and ex-
pression; freedom from arbitrary arrest and de-
tention ; the right of a people to choose their own
government, to take part in its work, and, if they
become dissatisfied with it, to change it; the obli-
gation of government to act through law — these
are some of the elements that combine to give
dignity and worth to the individual.
The Charter of the United Nations reflects these
concepts and expressly provides for the promotion
and protection of the rights of man, as well as for
the riglits of nations. This is no accident. For
in the modern world, the association of free men
within a free state is based upon the obligation of
citizens to respect the rights of their fellow citi-
zens. And the association of free nations in a
free world is based upon the obligation of all states
to respect the rights of other nations.
Systematic and deliberate denials of basic
human rights lie at the root of most of our troubles
and threaten the work of the United Nations. It
is not only fundamentally wrong that millions of
men and women live in daily terror of secret
police, subject to seizure, imprisonment, or forced
labor without just cause and without fair trial, but
these wrongs have repercussions in the community
of nations. Governments which systematically
disregard the rights of their own people are not
432
likely to respect the rights of other nations and
other people and are likely to seek their objectives
by coercion and force in the international field.
The maintenance of these rights and freedoms
depends ujion adherence to the abiding principles
of justice and morality embodied in the rule of law.
It will, therefore, always be true that those Mem-
bers of the United Nations which strive with sin-
cerity of purpose to live by the Charter and to
conform to the principles of justice and law pro-
claimed by it, will be those states which are genu-
inely dedicated to the preservation of the dignity
and integrity of the individual.
Let this third regular session of the General
Assembly approve by an overwhelming majority
the Declaration of Human Rights as a standard
of conduct for all ; and let us, as Members of the
United Nations, conscious of our own shortcomings
and imperfections, join our effort in good faith to
live up to this high standard.
Recent Economic and Social Progress
Our aspirations must take into account men's
practical needs — improved living and working
conditions, better health, economic and social ad-
vancement for all, and the social responsibilities
which these entail. The United Nations is pledged
in the Charter to promote "higher standards of
living, full employment, and conditions of eco-
nomic and social progress and development".
The Secretary-General has devoted a consider-
able part of his annual report to the nature of the
progress thus far made in this field. It is evi-
dent from the record that we can be encouraged
by what is being done. The United Nations is
directly engaged in efforts to alleviate the social
and economic disorder and destruction resulting
from the war. The International Refugee Organ-
ization is giving assistance to displaced persons.
The International Children's Emergency Fund is
providing emergency aid to children and mothers
over wide areas. As part of the United Nations
efforts to increase productivity by applying new
and advanced techniques, the Food and Agricul-
ture Organization is broadening the use of im-
proved seeds and fertilizers. The tuberculosis
Department of State Bulletin
pmject jointly sponsored by the World Health
Oriranization and the International Children's
Emerjijency Fund represents another example of
the consti'uctivc work of our organization.
Thi'onirh tiic United Nations we are seeking to
combine our etForts to promote international trade,
to solve the difliculties of foreign excliange, to
facilitate tl\e voluntary migration of peoples, and
to increase the ilow of information and ideas across
national boundaries. Tlie International Trade Or-
ganization charter would establish procedures for
expanding multilateral trade, with the goal of
raising living standards and maintaining full em-
ployment. Tile Conference on Freedom of Infor-
mation was responsible for the conventions made
before this Assembly whicli embody principles and
procedures for expanding the exchange of infor-
mation. It is our hope that the Assembly will
give these conventions thouglitful and favorable
consideration. While the Unitetl Nations and its
related agencies are increasingly helpful in the
economic and social field, primary responsibility
for improving standards of living will continue to
rest with the governments of the peoples them-
selves. International oiganizations cannot take
the place of national and personal etl'ort, or local
initiative and individual imagination. Interna-
tional action cannot replace self-help, nor can we
move toward general cooperation without maxi-
mum mutual help among close neighbors.
Deep Rift Among Nations Must Be Checked
The United Nations was not intended to preclude
cooperative action among groups of states for
common purposes consistent with the Charter of
the United Nations. It has been disappointing
that efforts at economic recovery consistent with
this concept have been actively opposed by some
wiio seem to fear the return of stability and con-
fidence. We must not be misled by those who, in
the name of revolutionary slogans, would prevent
reconstruction and recovery to hold out illusions
of future well-being at the price of starvation and
disorder today.
A year ago I expressed the view to the General
Assembly that "a supreme effort is required from
us all if we are to succeed in breaking through the
vicious circles of deepening political and economic
crisis". I believe that most of us in this organiza-
tion have sought to make such an effort — and that
this is beginning to bring results.
Despite the cooperative action of most nations
to rebuild peace and well-being, tension during the
past year has increased. The leaders of the other
nations are creating a deep rift between their coun-
tries and the rest of the world community. We
must not allow that rift to widen any further, and
we must redouble our efforts to find a common
ground. Let us go back to the Charter, to words
that were solemnly written by the peoples of the
Ocfober 3, 1948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
United Nations while the tragedy of war was
vividly stamped on their minds.
"We the peoples of the United Nations", says
the Charter, are "determined to save succeeding
generations from the scourge of war . . . and for
these ends to practice tolerance and live together
in peace with one another as good neighbors".
Three 3'ears later, we are confronted with the need
to save not only succeeding generations, but also
our own.
The first purpose of the United Nations is to
maintain international peace and security and to
that end all members are pledged to settle their
international disputes by peaceful means and in
conformity with the principles of justice and
international law.
We are pledged to seek an accommodation by
which different cultures, different laws, different
social and economic structures, and different polit-
ical systems can exist side by side without vio-
lence, subversion, or intimidation. An elemen-
tary requirement is that international obligations
be respected and that relations among states be
based on mutual confidence, respect, and tolerance.
How can we establish among governments and
peoples the confidence which is necessary to a just
and stable peace and is basic to the work of the
United Nations? The need at this session of the
General Assembly and in subsequent months is to
achieve, or at least to move nearer, a settlement of
the major issues which now confront us. For its
part, the United States is prepared to seek in every
possible way, in any appropriate forum, a construc-
tive and peaceful settlement of the political con-
troversies which contribute to the present tension
and uncertainty.
I do not wish to deal at this time with the details
of any particular issue, but there are broad lines
along which a just and equitable settlement of each
of these questions might be reached. Some of
these matters are on the agenda of the United Na-
tions, others, such as those dealing with the peace
settlements, are to be dealt with in other forums.
Nevertheless, whatever the forum, as members of
the United Nations, we are all subject to the prin-
ciples of the Charter.
If we want to have peace we must settle the is-
sues arising out of the last war. The Charter was
written with the expectation that the solution of
the problems before the United Nations would not
be made more difficult by long delay in completing
the peace settlements.
Goals Toward Peace
Germany, Japan, and Austria. We should,
therefore, make every effort to achieve an early
and just peace settlement so that Japan and Ger-
many may exist as democratic and peaceful na-
tions, subject to safeguards against the revival of
433
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
military or economic means of aggression, and so
that they may in due course demonstate their qual-
ification for admission to membership in the
United Nations. In Austria our aim is the restora-
tion of its political and economic freedom within
its 1937 frontiers and its immediate admission as
a Member of the United Nations.
Other questions affecting world peace are now
before the United Nations, some of them before
this Assembly. We believe that the ends to be
sought on these matters may be briefly summa-
rized as follows :
Palestine. A Palestine free from strife and the
threat of strife, with both the Jews and Arabs
assured the peaceful development envisaged by
the actions of the General Assembly and the Se-
curity Council ; an early demobilization of armed
forces to permit the return to conditions of peace
and normal living in Palestine; the repatriation of
refugees who wish to return and live in peace with
their neighbors ; economic aid to Jews and Arabs
to restore and strengthen their economic well-be-
ing; the admission of Transjordan and Israel to
membership in the United Nations.
Korea. A unified and independent Korea, ac-
cepted as a member of the United Nations, acting
under a constitution and a government selected
by the Koreans themselves through free elections,
and receiving the economic and political encour-
agement which it will need as it embarks upon its
new life as a Korean Nation.
Greece. A Greece made secure from aggressive
and unlawful interference from without, order-
ing its political life by the democratic process
and by respect for law, enabled to rebuild its
economy and to provide its people the essentials
of a decent life which they have been without for
so long.
Indonesia. A negotiated settlement without
further bloodshed in Indonesia, along the broad
lines of the Renville agreement, providing within
a brief period both the sovereign independence
sought by the peoples of Indonesia and continued
cooperation between them and the people of the
Netherlands.
India and Pakistan. Continuation of the
mediation and negotiation between the great na-
tions of India and Pakistan with respect to
Kashmir, in order that the processes of peaceful
settlement may bring to a conclusion an issue which
has been charged with great dangers.
Atomic Energy. The early adoption of an in-
ternational system for the control of atomic energy,
providing for the elimination of atomic weapons
from national armaments, for the development of
atomic energy for peaceful purposes only, and
for safeguards to insure compliance by all nations
with the necessary international measures of con-
trol.
Armaments. Under adequate and dependable
434
guaranty against violation, a progressive reduc-
tion in armaments as rapidlj as the restoration of
political confidence permits.
Other Problems
Other situations or problems might be men-
tioned, but if constructive steps are taken toward
the settlement of those which have been indicated,
new hope would arise among men and new con-
fidence among the nations of the world. It will
be readily seen that the above pattern is toward
peace. No governments or peoples who work
toward such ends can be held to be seeking war,
or imperialist expansion, or disorder and strife.
Trusteeship. We have noted with particular
interest the report of the Secretary-General on
the work of the nations relating to the millions of
people who are not yet fully self-governing. We
are mindful of the obligations undertaken in the
Chai'ter for the political, economic, and social
development of these peoples. We believe that all
possible assistance and encouragement should be
given to them, to the end that they may play their
full 23art in the family of nations — either as in-
dependent states or in freely chosen association
with other states.
Membership. In our efforts toward political
settlement we must continue working to improve
tlie functioning of the machinery of the United
Nations. We hope that the Security Council will
proceed to recommend during this session of the
General Assembly the admission of additional new
members. There are a number of fully qualified
states, now awaiting admission, whose elevation
has been supported by the United States but has
been blocked for reasons not consistent with the
Charter. The most recent application, Ceylon,
one of the few states to emerge in southern Asia,
has been denied the membership to which it prop-
erly aspires.
Interim Committee. The report of the Interim
Committee on the problem of voting in the Security
Council represents the first comprehensive study
on this vital problem since San Francisco and con-
tains the views of an overwhelming majority of
the members. The woi'k of the Security Council
would be greatly facilitated if the recommenda-
tions of the Interim Committee could be accepted
by the members of the Council.
The Interim Committee itself has worked use-
fully and effectively during the past year and can
continue to render an important service to the
General Assembly. We hope that the Assembly
will agree to its continuation for another year in
order to give us more experience before deciding
whether it should become a permanent part of our
Organization.
Need for U.N. Guard. The United States joins
in expressing great appreciation to those individ-
uals who have served on United Nations missions
Department of State Bulletin
during tlie past year, either as members of national
dele<rations or of the Secretariat. These repre-
seiitati\es in the fickl have served with courage
and devotion to duty. Their service has been given
a purticuhiriy solenui reminder of these condi-
tions by tiie tragic death of Count Folke Berna-
dotte and Colonel Serot at the liands of assassins.
The jjeople of the United States join in tribute to
the man who worked brilliantly and courageously
as the United NutioTis mediator in Palestine. We
pay tribute also to those others who have lost their
lives in the .service of peace.
We believe that the Assembly should give sym-
pathetic consideration to the suggestions of the
Secretarj'-General for the establishment of a small
United Nations guard force to assist United Na-
tions missions engaged in the pacific settlement of
disputes. The fate of the Mediator in Palestine
and the exjjerience of the several commissions
already working in the field have already demon-
strated the need for such a group. This great
world organization should not send its servants
on missions of peace without reasonable protection.
The guards would be entirely distinct from the
armed forces envisaged under article 43 and would
not carry out military operations. They could,
iiowever, perform important services in connec-
tion with United Nations missions abroad not
only as guards but also as observers and as com-
munications and transportation personnel.
Minority Position Self-imposed
Mr. President, one of the principal purposes of
the United Nations, according to article 1, is "to
be a center for harmonizing the actions of nations
in the attainment of the common ends" set forth
in the Charter. The problem of making and keep-
ing the peace involves many governments and
many peoples. On the issues which call for settle-
ment, tlie large powers as well as the small must
submit their policies to the judgment of the world
community. For this purpose appropriate forums
have been established for the adjustment of differ-
ences through the impartial opinions of the inter-
national society. This process has been seriously
hampered by the refusal of a group of nations to
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIALIZED AGENCIES
participate in certain of the imjjortant commis-
sions established by this Assembly, such as the
Balkan Commission, the Korean Commission, and
the Interim Committee.
More important than this boycott, however, is
the disturbing lack of cooperation which the
United Nations has received in its efforts to resolve
such questions as Korea and Greece and to bring
about the international control of atomic energy.
This persistent refusal of a small minority to con-
tribute to the accomplishment of our agreed pur-
poses is a matter of profound concern.
There is no plot among Members of this Organi-
zation to keep any nation or group of nations in
a minority. The minority position is self-imposed.
The record shows that there are no mechanical
majorities at the disposal of any nation or group
of nations. Majorities form quickly in support
of the principles of the Charter. Nations consist-
ently in the minority would be welcomed among
the ranks of the majority — but not at the price of
compromise of basic principle.
Patience in Understanding
The United Nations has sought to promote the
free exchange of ideas on a basis of full reciproc-
ity. The effort is of the greatest political im-
portance. Any government which by deliberate
action cuts itself and its people off from the rest
of the world becomes incapable of understanding
the problems and policies of other governments
and other peoples. It would be a tragic error, if,
because of such misunderstanding, the patience of
others should be mistaken for weakness.
The United States does not wish to increase the
existing tension. It is its wholehearted desire to
alleviate that tension. But we will not compromise
essential principles. We will under no circum-
stances barter away the rights and freedoms of
other peoples. We earnestly hope that all Mem-
bers will find ways of contributing to the lessening
of tensions and the promotion of peace with jus-
tice. The peoples of the earth are anxiously watch-
ing our efforts here. We must not disappoint
them.
October 3, 1948
435
Conclusions From Progress Report of the U.N. Mediator on Palestine
MEDIATION EFFORT
VIII. Conclusions
1. Since I presented my written Suggestions to
the Arab and Jewish authorities on 27 June, I
have made no formal submission to either party
of further suggestions or proposals for a definitive
settlement.^ Since that date, however, I have held
many oral discussions in the Arab capitals and
Tel Aviv, in the course of which various ideas on
settlement have been freely exchanged. As re-
gards my original Suggestions, I hold to the opin-
ion that they offered a general framework within
which a reasonable and workable settlement might
have been reached, had the two parties concerned
been willing to discuss them. They were flatly re-
jected, however, by both parties. Since they were
put forth on the explicit condition that they were
purely tentative, were designed primarily to elicit
views and counter-suggestions from each party,
and, in any event, could be implemented only if
agreed upon by both parties, I have never since
pressed them. With respect to one basic concept
in my Suggestions, it has become increasingly clear
to me that however desirable a political and eco-
nomic union might be in Palestine, the time is cer-
tainly not now propitious for the effectuation of
any such scheme.
2. I do not consider it to be within my province
to recommend to the Members of the United Na-
tions a proposed course of action on the Palestine
question. That is a responsibility of the Members
acting through the appropriate organs. In my role
as United Nations Mediator, however, it was in-
evitable that I should accumulate information and
draw conclusions from my experience which might
well be of assistance to Members of the United
Nations in charting the future course of United
Nations action on Palestine. I consider it my duty,
therefore, to acquaint the Members of the United
Nations, through the medium of this report, with
certain of the conclusions on means of peaceful
adjustment which have evolved from my frequent
consultations with Arab and Jewish authorities
over the past three and one-half months and from
my personal appraisal of the present Palestinian
scene. I do not suggest that these conclusions
would provide the basis for a proposal which
would readily win the willing approval of both
parties. I have not, in the course of my intensive
'Excerpts from U.N. doe. A/648 (part one, p. 29; part
two, p. 23; and part three, p. 11), Sept. 18, 1948. The re-
port wa.s signed by Folke Bernadotte in Rhodes on Sept. IG,
1948.
" Bulletin of July 25, 1948, p. 105.
436
Statement by Secretary Marshall
[Released to the press September 21]
The United States considers that the conclusions
contained in the final report of Count Bernadotte
offer a generally fair basis for settlement of the
I'ale.'^tine question. My Government is of the
opinion that the conclusions are sound and strongly
urges the parties and the General Assembly to ac-
cept them in their entirety as the best possible basis
for bringing peace to a distracted land.
No plan could be proposed which would be en-
tirely satisfactory in all respects to every interested
party. The United Nations has endeavored to
achieve a solution by peaceful adjustment and en-
trusted the task to its mediator. Count Bernadotte.
He enerfietically, courageously, and with a spirit
of complete fairness, we feel, canvassed all the
possibilities and proposed as his last contribution
toward a world of peace a sound basis for settle-
ment. He gave his life to this effort.
The complexities of the problem and the violent
emotions which have been engendered are such that
the details of any plan could be debated endlessly.
As a matter of fact, the debate on this question has
been carried on for years in almost every kind of
public forum. It is our sincere hope that the parties
concerned vvill realize that their best interests and
the interests of the world community will be served
by accepting in a spirit of fair compromise the
judgment of Count Bernadotte.
efforts to achieve agreement between Arabs and
Jews, been able to devise any such formula. I am
convinced, however, that it is possible at this stage
to formulate a proposal which, if firmly approved
and strongly backed by the General Assembly,
would not be forcibly resisted by either side, con-
fident as I am, of course, that the Security Council
stands firm in its resolution of 15 July that mili-
tary action shall not be employed by either party
in the Palestine dispute. It cannot be ignored that
the vast difference between now and last November
is that a war has been started and stopped and
that in the intervening months decisive events
have occurred.
Seven basic premises
3. The following seven basic premises form the
basis for my conclusions :
Return to peace
(a) Peace must return to Palestine and every
feasible measure should be taken to ensure that
hostilities will not be resumed and that harmonious
relations between Arab and Jew will ultimately
be restored.
Department of State Bulletin
The Jewish State
(b) A Jewish State called Israel exists in Pal-
estine and there are no sound reasons for assuming
that it will not continue to do so.
Boundary determination
(c) The boundaries of this new State must
finally be fixed either by formal agreement between
tlie parties concerned or failing that, by the United
Nations.
Continuous frontiers
(d) Adherence to the principle of geographical
homogeneity and integration, which should be the
major objective of the boundary arrangements,
should apply equally to Arab and Jewish terri-
tories, whose frontiers should not therefore, be
rigidly controlled by the territorial arrangements
envisaged in the resolution of 29 November.
Right of repatriation
(e) The right of innocent people, uprooted from
their homes by the present terror and ravages of
war, to return to their homes, should be affirmed
and made effective, with assurance of adequate
compensation for the property of those who may
choose not to return.
Jerusalem
(f) The City of Jerusalem, because of its re-
ligious and international significance and the com-
plexity of interest involved, should be accorded
special and separate treatment.
International responsibility
(g) International responsibility should be ex-
pressed where desirable and necessary in the form
of international guarantees, as a means of allay-
ing existing fears, and particularly with regard
to boundaries and human rights.
Specific conclusions
4. The following conclusions, broadly outlined,
would, in my view, considering all the circum-
stances, provide a reasonable, equitable and work-
able basis for settlement:
(a) Since the Security Council, under pain of
Chapter VIII sanctions, has forbidden further
employment of military action in Palestine as a
means of settling the dispute, hostilities should be
pronounced formally ended either by mutual
agreement of the parties or, failing that, by the
United Nations. The existing indefinite truce
should be superseded by a formal peace, or at the
minimum, an armistice which would involve either
complete withdrawal and demobilization of armed
forces or their wide separation by creation of broad
demilitarized zones under United Nations super-
vision.
(b) The frontiers between the Arab and Jewish
Ocfofaer 3, 1948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
territories, in the absence of agreement between
Arabs and Jews, should be established by the
United Nations and delimited by a technical
boundaries commission appointed by and respon-
sible to the United Nations, with the following
revisions in the boundaries broadly defined in the
resolution of the General Assembly of 29 Novem-
ber in order to make them more equitable, work-
able and consistent with existing realities in Pales-
tine.
(i) The area known as the Negev, south of a
line running from the sea near Majdal
east southeast to Faluja (both of which
places would be in Arab territory), should
be defined as Arab territory ;
(ii) The frontier should run from Faluja north
northeast to Ramleh and Lydda (ooth of
which places would be in Arab territory),
the frontier at Lydda then following the
line established in the General Assembly
resolution of 29 November;
(iii) Galilee should be defined as Jewish ter-
ritory.
(c) The disposition of the territory of Palestine
not included within the boundaries of the Jewish
State should be left to the Governments of the
Arab States in full consultation with the Arab
inhabitants of Palestine, with the recommenda-
tion, however, that in view of the historical con-
nection and common interests of Transjordan and
Palestine, there would be compelling reasons for
merging the Arab territory of Palestine with the
territory of Transjordan, subject to such frontier
rectifications regarding other Arab States as may
be found practicable and desirable.
( d ) The United Nations, by declaration or other
appropriate means, should undertake to provide
special assurance that the boundaries between the
Arab and Jewish territories shall be respected and
maintained, subject only to such modifications as
may be mutually agreed upon by the parties con-
cerned.
(e) The port of Haifa, including the oil refin-
eries and terminals, and without prejudice to their
inclusion in the sovereign territory of the Jewish
State or the administration of the city of Haifa,
should be declared a free port, with assurances of
free access for interested Arab countries and an
undertaking on their part to place no obstacle in
the way of oil deliveries by pipeline to the Haifa
refineries, whose distribution would continue on
the basis of the historical pattern.
(f) The airport of Lydda should be declared a
free airport with assurance of access to it and
employment of its facilities for Jerusalem and in-
terested Arab countries.
(g) The City of Jerusalem, which should be
understood as covering the area defined in the res-
olution of the General Assembly of 29 November,
437
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
should be treated separately and should be placed
under effective United Nations control with maxi-
mum feasible local autonomy for its Arab and
Jewish communities, with full safeguards for the
protection of the Holy Places and sites and free
access to them, and for religious freedom.
(h) The right of unimpeded access to Jerusa-
lem, by road, i-ail or air, should be fully respected
by all parties.
(i) The right of the Arab refugees to return to
their homes in Jewish-controlled territory at the
earliest possible date should be affirmed by the
United Nations, and their repatriation, resettle-
ment and economic and social rehabilitation, and
payment of adequate compensation for the prop-
erty of those choosing not to return, should be
supervised and assisted by the United Nations con-
ciliation connnission described in paragraph (k)
below.
(j) The political, economic, social and religious
rights of all Arabs in the Jewish territory of
Palestine and of all Jews in the Arab territory of
Palestine should be fully guaranteed and respected
by the authorities. The conciliation commission
provided for in the following paragraph should
supervise the observance of this guarantee. It
should also lend its good offices, on the invitation
of the parties, to any efforts toward exchanges of
populations with a view to eliminating trouble-
some minority problems, and on the basis of ade-
quate compensation for property owned.
(k) In view of the special nature of the Pales-
tine problem and the dangerous complexities of
Arab-Jewish relationships, the United Nations
should establish a Palestine conciliation commis-
sion. This commission, which should be ap-
pointed for a limited period, should be responsible
to the United Nations and act mider its authority.
The commission, assisted by such United Nations
personnel as may prove necessary, should under-
take
(i) To employ its good offices to make such
recommendations to the parties or to the
United Nations, and to take such other
steps as may be appropriate, with a view
to ensuring the continuation of the peace-
ful adjustment of the situation in Pales-
tine;
(ii) Such measures as it might consider ap-
propriate in fostering the cultivation of
friendly relations between Arabs and
Jews;
(iii) To supervise the observance of such
boundary, road, railroad, free port, free
airport, minority rights and other arrange-
ments as may be decided upon by the
United Nations;
(iv) To report promptly to the United Nations
any development in Palestine likely to
alter the arrangements approved by the
United Nations in the Palestine settle-
ment or to threaten the peace of the area.
SUPERVISION OF THE TWO TRUCES
V. Some Conclusions Regarding the
Truce Operation
1. The supervision of the truce is a continuing
responsibility and it is neitlier necessary nor de-
sirable at this stage to formulate any definitive
views concerning the operation. The experience
thus far gained in the supervision of two truces
extending over a total period of more than three
months has been very valuable, however, and on
the basis of this experience certain analyses and
conclusions maj' even now be usefully set forth.
2. In assessing in general terms the entire period
of truce, my dual role of Mediator and of super-
visor of truce obsei'vation is an important factor.
Conditions of truce, even though subject to fre-
quent minor and occasional major infractions by
both parties, provide a peaceful basis indispensa-
ble to the task of mediation. At the same time,
organizing and supervising truce observance make
imperative demands on time and staff. I am in-
evitably drawn into the settlement of disputes
arising solely out of the truce, and it may be I'eadily
appreciated that my position and decisions as
truce supervisor cannot, in the minds of the dis-
putants, be easily dissociated from my role in the
more fundamental task of mediation.
3. The situation in Jerusalem has been consider-
ably more tense and difficult during the second
truce than during the first. This fact is due to
a complex of reasons among which are the change
in military dispositions between truces, and the
increased concentration of manpower which ap-
jiears to have taken place there in the interval be-
tween the truces. The special importance which
each side attaches to the status of Jerusalem in a
general settlement of the Palestine problem is, in
the circumstances, a constant influence tending to
heighten the tension there.
4. However, the situation in Jerusalem has
shown recent improvement. The decision of the
Security Council on 19 August fixing the responsi-
bility of the parties under the cease-fire order, a
considerable increase in the number of United Na-
tions Observers stationed there, and intensive
efforts to achieve localized demilitarization agree-
ments, have produced beneficial results. Never-
theless, the conditions in Jerusalem are such that
not even the increased number of Observers now
there could for long maintain the truce in the City
438
Department of State Bulletin
if it slioiild appear likely that a settlement would
be indefinitely deferred.
5. United Nations supervision of the regular
food convoys of Jerusalem has been an important
feature of both truces. The movement of these
convoys involved dithcult negotiation and constant
supervision anil escort. A}iart from some sniping
activity during the early days of each truce, the
convoy .sysieni has worked remarkably well. On
the other hand, persistent efforts to ensure the flow
of water to Jerusalem through the main pipe-lines
have met with failure during both truces, the de-
struction of the Latrun pumping station having
so far nullilied all efforts to solve the problem
during the second truce.
G. The period of the first truce coincided with
the ripening of cereal crops in Palestine. Since
the front lines ran almost entirely through land
belonging to Arab cultivators, a great number of
fields bearing crops was in no-man's land or behind
Jewish positions. Attempts by Arabs to harvest
crops in no-man's land and in the vicinit\' of and
sometimes behind Jewish positions often led the
Jews to react by firing on the harvesters. This
was a major complication during the first truce,
both before and after my ruling of 16 June, and
explains many of the breaches of truce and the
difficulties of truce observation over a wide area.
During the second truce, incidents of this nature
have been relatively few, since the harvest season
for cereal crops is over. The efforts of Observers
in securing local agreements regarding harvesting
of crops undoubtedly saved many crops that would
otherwise have been lost.
7. The fact that in the Negev there is no con-
tinuous front line has been, during both truces, a
special cause of difficulty as a result of the need for
each side to by-pass the other's positions in order
to supply some of its own positions. Convoys
under United Nations supervision largely solved
the problem, though not without friction, during
the first truce. During the second truce a similar
system was proposed, but agreement on conditions
could not be reached with the parties. Conse-
quently, on 14 September I laid down the terms
governing future convoys in the Negev.
8. In considering the effectiveness of the truce
supervision, attention must be paid to two distinct,
though related, aspects of the problem. On the
one hand, there is the problem of observing the
actual fighting fronts, of dealing with incidents
■which may arise there and preventing, if jjossible,
any further outbreak of hostilities. On tlie other
hand, there is the observation which is necessary
over a vast area to check whether or not materials
and men are being moved in a manner to confer
a military advantage contrary to the terms of the
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
truce. As regards the second aspect of this prob-
lem, an important consideration is that the area
under observation covers a very large part of the
Middle East and that the necessity to concentrate
a majority of the limited number of Observers at
my disposal near the fighting fronts restricts the
number available for duties elsewhere. The avail-
ability of an increased number of Observers has
enabled me to ensure a more extensive supervision,
especially in territories outside Palestine.
9. Experience has shown that the more quickly
action can be taken to deal with a local violation,
the more easily incidents are controlled or pre-
vented. It must be admitted that, on occasion,
slowness to act, often because of circumstances be-
yond control, has hampered the operation of the
truce supervision. Although the Secretary-Gen-
eral of the United Nations has given me the fullest
co-operation and every assistance available to him,
it is apparent that the United Nations was not in
position as regards Observer personnel, armed
guards, communications and transportation equip-
ment or budgetary provision to set up rapidly the
elaborate machinery of truce observation required.
10. The second truce differed from the first
principally in the fact that it was ordered by the
Security Council under threat of further action
under Chapter VII of the Charter, and that no
time limit was set. This introduced a new ele-
ment into the situation as compared with the first
truce, in that the second truce involved compliance
with a Security Council order. There is a tend-
ency on each side to regard alleged breaches by
the other side of a truce which has been ordered
by the Security Council as calling for prompt
action by that Council. Both sides now evidence a
sense of grievance and complain that the compul-
sory prolongation of the truce is contrary to their
interests. This feeling is inevitably reflected in
their attitudes toward the Observers and truce
obligations in general. The truce undoubtedly
imjjoses a heavy burden on both sides, but even
so, the burden of war would be heavier.
11. The truce is not an end in itself. Its pur-
pose is to prepare the way for a peaceful settle-
ment. There is a period during which the poten-
tiality for constructive action, which flows from
the fact that a truce has been achieved by interna-
tional intervention, is at a maximum. If, how-
ever, there appears no prospect of relieving the
existing tension by some arrangement which holds
concrete promise of peace, the machinery of truce
supervision will in time lose its effectiveness and
become an object of cynicism. If this period of
maximum tendency to forego military action as a
means of achieving a desired settlement is not
seized, the advantage gained by international in-
tervention may well be lost.
October 3, 1948
439
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGENCIES
ASSISTANCE TO REFUGEES
VI. Conclusions
1. Conclusions which may be derived from the
experience to date are summarized as follows :
(a) As a result of the conflict in Palestine there
are approximately 360,000 Arab refugees and 7,000
Jewish refugees requiring aid in that country and
adjacent States.
(b) Large numbers of these are infants, chil-
dren, pregnant women and nursing mothers. Their
condition is one of destitution and they are "vul-
nerable groups" in the medical and social sense.
(c) The destruction of their property and the
loss of tlieir assets will render most of them a
charge uj^on the communities in which they have
sought refuge for a minimum period of one year
(through this winter and until the end of the 1949
harvest).
(d) The Arab inhabitants of Palestine are not
citizens or subjects of Egypt, Iraq, Lebanon, Syria
and Transjorclan, the States which are at present
providing them with a refuge and the basic neces-
sities of life. As residents of Palestine, a former
mandated territory for which the international
community has a continuing responsibility until
a final settlement is achieved, these Arab refugees
understandably look to the United Nations for
effective assistance.
(e) The temporary alleviation of their condi-
tion, which is all that my disaster relief pro-
gramme can promise them now, is quite inadequate
to meet any continuing need, unless the resources
in supplies and personnel available are greatly
increased. Such increased resources might indi-
rectly be of pei-manent value in establishing social
services in the countries concerned, or improving
greatly existing services. This applies partic-
ularly to general social administrative organiza-
tions, maternal and child care services, the train-
ing of social workers, and the improvement of food
economics.
(f ) The refugees, on return to their homes, are
entitled to adequate safeguards for their personal
security, normal facilities for employment, and
adequate opportunities to develop within the com-
munity without racial, religious or social discrim-
ination.
(g) So long as large numbers of the refugees
remain in distress, I believe that responsibility for
their relief should be assumed by the United Na-
tions in conjunction with the neighbouring Arab
States, the Provisional Government of Israel, the
specialized agencies, and also all the voluntary
bodies or organizations of a humanitarian and
non-political character.
2. In concluding this part of my report, I must
emphasize again the desperate urgency of this
problem. The choice is between saving the lives
of many thousands of people now or permitting
them to die. The situation of the majority of these
hapless refugees is already tragic, and to prevent
them from being overwhelmed by further disaster
and to make possible their ultimate rehabilitation,
it is my earnest hope that the international com-
munity will give all nece.ssary support to make the
measures I have outlined fully etfective. I believe
that for the international community to accept its
share of responsibility for the refugees of Pales-
tine is one of the minimum conditions for the suc-
cess of its efforts to bring peace to that land.
Position on Withdrawing Occupying
Forces From Korea
[Released to the press September 20J
It has been the consistent view of this Govern-
ment that the best interests of the Korean people
would be served by the withdrawal of all occupying
forces from Korea at the earliest practicable date.
This same view was embodied in the United Na-
tions General Assembly resolution of November
14, 1947, in which provision was made for such
withdrawal as soon as practicable after the estab-
lishment of the Korean Government which it was
the intention of that resolution to bring into beings
Had the Soviet Union cooperated in carrying out
the provisions of the resolution of November 14,
1947, the question of troop withdrawal from
Korea would doubtless have been already resolved.
The United States Government regards the ques-
tion of the withdrawal of occupying forces as but
one facet of the entire question of the unity and
independence of Korea. The General Assembly of
the United Nations has taken cognizance of this
larger question, as evidenced by the resolution
referred to above, and may be expected to give fur-
ther consideration to the matter at its forthcoming
meeting.
440
Department of Slate BuUetini
The United States in the United Nations
THIRD REGULAR SESSION OF
The Third Kegular Session of the General
Assembly opened in Paris at the Palais de Chaillot
on September 21. At its first plenary session the
Assembly elected Dr. Herbert V. Evatt (Aus-
tralia) as its President and Paul-Henri Spaak
(Bel<iium) as Chairman of the Political and
Seemity Committee (Committee I).
Secretary Marshall's Address
In his address before the General Assembly on
Sejitenibei' 2o. Secretary of State George C. Mar-
shall, Chairman of the U.S. Delegation, stated that
the United States does not want to inci'ease exist-
ing tension in the United Nations but "we will not
compromise essential principles" and "we will
luuler no circumstances barter away the rights and
freedoms of other peoples. We earnestly hope
that all Members will find ways of contributing
to the lessening of tensions and the promotion of
peace with justice." The Secretary warned that
those nations who are creating a deep rift between
our countries and the rest of the world community
must not be permitted to widen that rift any
further.
Agenda
General debate got under way at the second
meeting of the Assembly on September 23, when
70 agenda items were allocated among the appro-
priate committees. New items approved for the
agenda included the question of extending the
U.N. Appeal for Children through next year;
future of former Italian colonies; Mediator's re-
port on Palestine; creation of U.N. Guard force;
and reparation for those injured in U.N. service.
Andrei Vyshinsky (U.S.S.R.) on September 25
introduced a resolution calling upon the major
powers to reduce all their armaments by one third
within a year. The resolution would liave the
Assembly recommend that an international con-
trol body be established by the Security Council,
where the veto prevails, "for the supervision and
control over implementation of measures for re-
duction of armaments and armed forces and for
prohibition of atomic weapons."
A member of the U.S. Delegation pointed out
that the United States welcomes the emphasis that
the Soviet Union places upon the importance of
the regulation and reduction of armaments. The
development of a necessary basis for a system for
control of atomic energy is the crucial aspect of
the problem of armaments regulation. The Soviet
Union in former discussions in the Atomic Energy
Commission had rejected such a plan. The U.S.
spokesman continued that the position of the
United States on this question has been repeatedly
stated and has been recently confirmed by a vote
of the United States Senate.
On September 28 the General Assembly agreed
Ocfofaer 3, 1948
THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY
to add to its agenda the Soviet proposal, and the
item M-as referred to Committee I.
The United States on September 29 charged the
Soviet Union with action in the Bei'lin situation
constituting a threat to the peace under the mean-
ing of the U.N. Charter, and it requested the
Security Council to consider the case as soon as
possible. Ambassador Austin signed the U.S.
request and sent it to the Secretary-General at the
same time that identical notifications from Great
Britain and France were delivered. In this re-
quest the three Governments draw attention to "the
serious situation which has arisen as the result of
the unilateral imposition by the Government of
the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics of restric-
tions on transport and communications between
the Western zones of occupation in Germany and
Berlin."
On September 30, Ambassador Austin told
Committee I that only international control of
atonuc energy could assure long-time security.
Mr. Austin renewed the U.S. offer to share its
atomic knowledge with the world under an inter-
national control system which would provide safe-
guards against "destructive rivalry in atomic
weapons." The vast U.S. atomic-development
plant, Mr. Austin said, would be placed under an
international agency after that agency is deemed
to be in effective operation. This procedure, ac-
cording to the U.N. Atomic Energy Commission,
is vital to assure against what would amount to
unilateral disarmament by the United States under
a proposal such as that of the Soviet Union
whereby discussion of control plans must await
prohibition and destruction of existing atomic
weapons. Mr. Austin recalled that the Soviet
proposal was studied at length by the Commission
whose majority "reached conclusions which are
briefly described by these words from the Commis-
sion reports : 'completely unrealistic', 'feeble', and
'fundamentally inadequate'."
The Soviet proposal, Mr. Austin explained,
"would allow any nation to carry on scientific
research regardless of dangerous materials or
facilities involved. The U.N. Commission in its
third report declares that in the Soviet proposal
'there appears to be no limit to the clandestine
activities that may take place in laboratories
ostensibly devoted to peaceful work.'
"Should a violation of security be discovered the
international agency must be empowered to pre-
vent its fruition and correct the damage done to
the cause of peace. The Commission provided for
this by holding that judicial or other processes for
the determination of violations and punishments
must be certain and swift. And there must, the
Commission said, be no legal right by veto or other-
wise whereby awilful violator could thwart punish-
ment and evade the consequences of violation."
441
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES
Calendar of Meetings ^
Adjourned during September
Council of Foreign Ministers: Deputies for Italian Colonial Problems .
18th International Geological Congress '
London . . ,
London
Geneva
Oct. 3, 1947-Sept.
1, 1948
1948
Aug. 25-Sept. 1
Aug. 25-Sept. 15
Aug. 30-
Sept. 1-
Sept. 1-4
Sept. 1-10
Sept. 6-14
Sept. 7-16
Sept. 7-20
Sept. 10-
Sept. 13-15
Sept. 20-24
Sept. 20-25
1946
Feb. 26-
Mar. 25-
Ito (International Trade Organization) : Meeting of Interim Com-
mission.
United Nations: Economic and Social Council, Subcommission on
Statistical Sampling.
Ito (International Telecommunication Union) : Meeting of Admini-
strative Council.
UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Or-
ganization) : Expert Conference for High .Altitude Stations.
Sixth International Congress and Exposition of Photogrammetry . .
XXXVII General Assembly of the Interparliamentary Union ....
Geneva
Geneva
Interlaken, Switzerland . .
The Hague
Rome
Utrecht
Denver
Inter-American Conference on the Conservation of Renewable Natu-
ral Resources.
Iro (International Refugee Organization) : Seventh Part of First
Session of Preparatory Commission.
Council of Foreign Ministers: Discussions on the Disposition of Italian
Pre-war Colonies.
Fifth International Conference of Directors of Mine Safety Research
Stations.
Ilo (International Labor Organization): Joint Maritime Commis-
sion.
In Session as of October 1, 1948
Far Eastern Commission
United Nations:
Security Council
Geneva
Paris
Pittsburgh
Geneva
Washington
Lake Success
Lake Success
Lake Success
Salonika and Geneva . . .
Seoul
Geneva and Kashmir . . .
Paris
Lisbon
Military Staff Committee
Mar. 25-
Security Council's Committee of -Good Offices on the Indonesian
Question.
General Assembly Special Committee on the Balkans
Teniporarv Commission on Korea
1947
Oct. 20-
Nov. 21-
1948
Jan. 12-
Security Council's Kashmir Commission
June 15—
General Assembly: Third Session
Sept. 21-
1946
Sept. 3-
1948
Jan. 15-
German External Property Negotiations with Portugal (Safehaven) .
Itu (International Telecommunication Union) :
Provisional Frequency Board
Planning Committee for High Frequency Broadcasting Conference .
International Bank for Reconstruction and Development: Third
Annual Meeting of the Board of Governors.
International Monetary Fund: Third Annual Meeting of the Board
of Governors.
Ilo (International Labor Organization): Technical Tripartite Con-
ference on Safety in Factories.
Who (World Health Organization) : Expert Committee on Tubercu-
losis.
Conference for the Establishment of the International Union for the
Protection of Nature.
Scheduled October 1-31, 1948
Pan American Sanitary Organization:
Meeting of Executive Committee
Second Meeting of Directing Council
Second Meeting of Wool Study Group
Mexico City
Washington
Washington
Sept. 13-
Sept. 27-
Sept. 27-
Sept. 27-
Sept. 30-
Paris
Fontainebleau
Mexico City
Mexico City
London i
Sept. 30-
Oct. 2-3
Oct. 4-16
Oct. 4-6
' Prepared in the Division of International Conferences, Department of State.
442
Department of State Bulletin
Calendar of Meetings — Continued
International Council for the Exploration of the Sea
Second Inter-American Conference on Indian Life
Universal Postal I'nion: Meeting of the Provisional Executive and
Liaison Committee.
Ninth (ieneral Conference on Weights and Measures
Bolivian International Fair
Fourth Pan American Consultation on Cartography
Who (World Health Organization):
Expert Committee on Venereal Disease
Second Session of Executive Board
Fifth Inter-American Congress of Surgery
Itu (International Telecommunication Union): International Con-
ference on High Frequency Broadcasting.
Second Meeting of South Pacific Commission
International Tin Study Group: Third Meeting
Ilo (International Labor Organization): Industrial Committee on
Textiles: Second Session.
Copenhagen
Cuzco, Peru
Bern . . . .
Paris and Sdvrcs .
La Paz
Buenos Aires . .
Paris ....
Geneva . . .
La Paz . . .
Mexico Citv
Sydney . .
The Hague
Cairo . .
Oct. 4-11
Oct. 10-20
Oct. 11-
Oct. 12-21
Oct. 20-
Oct. 15-
Oct. 15-19
Oct. 25-
Oct. 17-21
Oct. 22-
Oct. 25-
Oct. 25-
Oct. 26-
U.S. Delegations to International Meetings
Protection of Nature
The Department of State announced September
22 that Ira Noel Gabrielson, President, Wildlife
Management Institute, Washington, has been des-
ignated Chairman of the United States Delega-
tion to the Conference for the Establishment of the
International Union for the Protection of Nature,
scheduled to be held at Fontainebleau, France,
Sejatember oO-October 7, 1948. Harold Jefferson
Coolidge. Executive Secretary, Pacific Science
Board, National Research Council, has been ap-
pointed to serve as delegate.
This Conference has been called bj' the French
Goverimient in conjunction with the United Na-
tions Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organi-
zation to adopt a final constitution for the Inter-
national Union for the Protection of Nature which
was created provisionally by an international con-
ference convened by the Swiss League for the Pro-
tection of Nature at Brunnen, Switzerland, in
1947.
Wool
The Department of State announced on Sep-
tember 24 tlie United States Delegation to the
Second Meeting of the International Wool Study
Group, scheduled to be held at London. England,
October 4-6, 1948. The Delegation is as follows:
Chairman
Donald D. Kennedy, Chief, International Resources Divi-
sion, L)epartment of State
Adriserx
Rene Lutz. Office of International Trade, Department of
Commerce
Floyd E. Davis, Office of Foreign Agricultural Relations,
Department of Agriculture
Paul O. Nyhus, Agricultural Attach^, American Embassy,
London
Ocfober 3, 7948
The purpose of the meeting is to exchange in-
formation and views regarding the present general
wool situation, to consider any specific problems
that may have arisen since the last meeting held at
London in March and April, 1947, and to discuss
im])rovements in the organization and activities
of the Study Group.
The establishment of the Wool Study Group
was proposed at the International Wool Talks at
London in 1946 when representatives from 13
countries substantially interested in the produc-
tion, consumption, ancl trade of wool reviewed the
world situation of apparel wool. The desirability
of keejjing the world position of wool under inter-
governmental review was unanimously agreed
upon at that meeting.
Cartography
The Department of State announced on Septem-
ber 22 the United States Delegation to the Fourth
Pan American Consultation on Cartography,
scheduled to be held at Buenos Aires, Argentina,
October 15-November 14, 1948. The Delegation
is as follows:
Chairmnn
Robert H. Randall, Bureau of the Budget, Executive OflBce
of the President; U.S. Member and Chairman, Com-
mission on Cartography, Pan American Institute of
Geography and History
Delegates
Lt. Col. Albert G. Foote, Commanding Officer, Aeronautical
Chart Service, Department of the Air Force
Capt. Clement L. Garner ( Retired ) , Former Chief, Division
of Geodesy, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Depart-
ment of Commerce
Charles B. Hitchcock, Assistant Director, American
Geographical Societ.v
Capt. Allen Hobbs, Hydrographer of the Navy, Department
ut the Navy
443
;>cnv/7-;£s and developments
Col. John G. Ladd, Office of Chief of Engineers, Depart-
ment of the Army
Col. Freemont S. Tandy, Chief, Inter-American Geodetic
Survey, Caribbean Defense Command, C.Z.
Marshall S. Wright, Technical Assistant to the Chief, OfiSce
of Plans and Operations, Department of Agriculture
Advisers
Capt. K. T. Adams, Chief, Division of Photogrammetry,
U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Department of
Commerce
Brig. Gen. Paul T. Cullen, Commanding General, 311th
Air Division Reconnaissance, Topeka Air Force Base,
Topeka, Kans.
Harry T. Kelsh, Head, Methods and Standards Unit,
Geological Survey, Department of the Interior
Guillermo Medina, Chief Engineer, Hydrographic Office,
Department of the Navy
Col. William H. Mills, Commanding Officer, Army Map
Service, Department of the Army
Comdr. Elliott B. Roberts, Chief, Division of Geomagnetism
and Seismology, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey,
Department of Commerce
Adviser and Secretary
Andre C. Simonpietri, Special Adviser, Department ol
State
The Fourth Pan American Consultation on
Cartography will be a meeting of the Commission
on Cartography, one of several technical commis-
sions of the Pan American Institute of Geography
and History. The Cartography Commission, es-
tablished by the Institute's Assembly held at Lima,
Peru, in 1941 to further the surveying and mapping
activities of the member governments of the Insti-
tute, provides the medium for the interchange of
knowledge and techniques among the officials of
the American governments working in these fields.
At the Fourth Consultation on Cartography new
developments and techniques in the field will be
considered and the establishment of uniform
standards of accuracy will be furthered. The
meeting will be divided into the following
committees: geodesy, including gravity and geo-
magnetism; topographic maps and aerial photo-
grammetry; aeronautical charts; hydrography,
including tides and special maps; and urban
surveys.
In addition to the committee sessions there will
be an exhibit of instruments and equipment used in
the production of all types of cartographic docu-
ments. This will be the first time that an exhibit
of this nature has been held in connection with the
Consultation. United States manufacturers of
cartographic instruments have been invited by the
Argentine Government to participate in the dis-
play. There will also be the regular exhibit of
map products by member governments which is
always a part of the Consultation.
The Third Pan American Consultation on
Cartography was held concurrently with the
Fourth General Assembly of the Pan American
Institute of Geogi-aphy and History at Caracas,
Venezuela, August-September 1946. Invitations
to participate in the forthcoming Consultation
have been extended by the Argentine Government
to all the American republics and Canada, to the
members of the Commission on Cartography, and
to interested international organizations.
Executive Committee Achievements of ITO Interim Commission
[Released to the press September 20]
The Department of State announced on Sep-
tember 20 that a number of organizational and
procedural agreements were reached at the recent
second session of the Executive Committee of the
Interim Commission of the International Trade
Organization, held at Geneva.
The agenda of the second session consisted of a
number of procedural and organizational matters.
Several recommendations were considered and
agreed upon by the Committee with respect to
such items as the relationship of the Ito, when
established, to other international organizations
and bodies, such as the International Court of
Justice, the International Monetary Fund, and the
Food and Agriculture Organization; the expenses
incurred during preparatory meetings which
drafted the Havana Ito charter; and the prep-
aration of an authentic Spanish text of the Havana
charter for submission to those Spanish-speaking
governments which are members of the Interim
Commission.
The Commission was decided upon last winter
when the charter for an International Trade Or-
ganization, known as the Havana charter, was
drawn up at Havana by a conference at which
some 57 countries participated and which lasted
four and a half months. It was realized at Havana
that it might take a considerable length of time
for the charter to be ratified by the required num-
ber of governments. Therefore the Havana con-
ference, by resolution, established an Interim
Commission to deal with certain administrative
and procedural matters which should be provided
for before the Trade Organization itself would be
established. The 53 member countries of the In-
terim Commission selected 18 of the members as
an Executive Committee to perform tliese tasks.
The use of the Interim Commission technique has
also been adopted by the other specialized agen-
cies set up by the United Nations, such as the health
and refugee organizations.
The 18 countries selected are Australia, the
Benelux countries (acting as a unit), Brazil,
Canada, China, Colomliia, Czechoslovakia, Egypt,
El Salvador, France, Greece, India, Italy, Mexico,
Norway, the Philippines, the United Kingdom,
and the United States. This Executive Commit-
444
Department of State Bulletin
ACTIVITIES AND DEVELOPMBNTS
tee held its first, purely organizational meeting in
Havana directly after the Havana conference and
elected Dana Wilgress, Canadian Minister in
Bern, as Chairman. The second meeting of the
Committee began in Geneva on August 25 and
ended on September 15. All the 18 member coun-
tries were represented. The United States Dele-
gation was headed by Leroy D. Stinebower, Spe-
cial Assistant to the Assistant Secretary of State
for economic affairs.
Plans To Increase Value of General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade
[Released to the press September 22]
The second session of the contracting parties to
the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade,
which opened in Geneva on August 16, completed
its work on September 14. It has laid plans de-
signed to increase further the value of the agree-
ment to the countries already parties, including
the United States, and to enable more countries
to become parties.
Under the general agreement itself, negotiated
in 1947 by the United States and 22 other coun-
tries, each country agrees to certain general rules
for the conduct of its international trade and
grants to all the others a schedule of specific con-
cessions in its tariff treatment of imports, includ-
ing reductions in tariffs, bindings of moderate
rates or of free treatment, reductions or elimina-
tions of preferences, and the like. These con-
cessions cover about one half of total world trade.
Accession of New Countries
The major accomplishment of the meeting just
ended is adoption of procedures for bringing ad-
ditional countries into the agreement as rapidly as
possible through taritT negotiations with them.
On inquiry by the contracting parties it was found
that several countries not yet parties are definitely
interested in early accession. A timetable was ac-
cordingly adopted for negotiations with them.
Requests for concessions are to be exchanged be-
tween the present parties and the new countries
and also among the new countries by January 15,
1949. DeHnitive negotiations are scheduled to
open at Geneva on April 11. 1949. The new coun-
tries which will negotiate are Denmark, the Do-
minican Republic, El Salvador, Finland, Greece,
Haiti, Italy, Nicaragua, Peru, Sweden, and Uru-
guiiy-
So far as the United States is concerned, nego-
tiations will be conducted under the usual trade-
agreement procedure as recently amended by the
Trade Agreements Extension Act of 1948. The
customary notice of intention to negotiate, accom-
panied by announcement of products to be con-
sidered for possible concession by this country,
will be made as soon as the necessary preparatory
work is completed by the interdepartmental trade-
agreements organization.
Oc/ober 3, 1948
Other TariK Negotiations
Except in certain special cases there will be no
reopening of negotiations among the countries
which ai-e already parties to the agreement.
Brazil, however, was granted temporary permis-
sion to establish rates on three items which are
higher than otherwise permitted under the general
agreement, in consideration of the fact that the
Brazilian Congress has applied rates on a number
of other items which are lower than the maximum
permitted by the agreement. Within 60 days the
interested countries are to negotiate a definitive ad-
justment of the concessions involved. Ceylon and
Pakistan were also authorized to renegotiate cer-
tain concessions which each had granted to other
countries. Cuba was granted permission to
renegotiate with the United States the rates of
duty on six items which Cuba is finding it difficult
to apply as originally negotiated, the understand-
ing being that the United States is to receive full
compensation for any modifications agreed to.
These adjustments are to be worked out bilaterally
subject to final action at the time of the negotia-
tions next spring. Any other negotiations among
countries already parties to the agreement are
likelj' to be in the nature of completion of work
which it was not possible to finish at the 1947 con-
ference, none of it involving the United States.
Most-Favored-Nation Treatment for
Western Germany
One of the most important achievements of the
conference was agreement by a substantial number
of countries to extend to Western Germany niost-
f avored-nation treatment with respect to merchan-
dise trade on a reciprocal basis. This undertaking
is incorporated in a separate document, not a part
of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade,
and was opened for signature on September 14.
So far nine countries have signed, and it is ex-
pected that most of the remaining countries repre-
sented at the meeting will sign in the near future.
Modification of General Agreement
Some changes were also made in the agreement
which, it was felt by the contracting parties, were
an improvement over the original text. These
changes were based largely on work done at the
Havana trade conference subsequent to the conclu-
sion of the general agreement.
445
ACTIViriBS AND DEVELOPMENTS
In addition, Chile was accorded an extension of
time, to February 17, 1949, in which to become a
contracting party to the agreement, even though
after negotiating concessions at Geneva Cliile did
not put the agreement provisionally into effect by
June 30, 1948, the time originally set.
Arrangements were made under which the
United States will be free to accord preferences to
imports from the Trust Territory of the Pacific
Islands. Though technically tliis constitutes es-
tablishment of a new preference, it will permit the
working out of a trading arrangement which will
jjromote the advancement of the peoples of the
Trust Territory consistent with United States obli-
gations under this country's trusteeship agree-
ment with the Security Council of the United
Nations.
Cuban-American Trade
IJuring the session just ended, the United States
submitted to the contracting parties under article
XXIII of the general agreement a problem arising
out of an import licensing system applied by Cuba
with respect to a wide range of products, including
raw cotton and cotton, rayon and wool fabrics, and
wearing apparel. Cuba's action liad the effect of
preventing the importation of these products from
the United States and other countries, thus nulli-
fying in considerable part the benefits granted
by Cuba in the general agreement. The contract-
ing parties recommended that Cuba promptly
take steps to relieve the immediate difficulties and
to consult with representatives of the United
States Government at Habana with a view to find-
ing a mutually satisfactory solution of the prob-
lems that have arisen in connection with the Cuban
import controls under Cuban Eesolution 530. On
September 14 the Cuban Government issued a reso-
lution removing restrictions on the importation
of all products except piece-goods remnants and
waste other than industrial. The restrictions on
the importation of these products will be discussed
by the Cuban Government and the United States
Embassy at Habana.
Discussions on Convention for
Foreign Motor Travel
[Released to the press September 20]
To prepare for a new international convention
designed to j^ermit motorists to drive their cars in
foreign countries, the Department of State is hold-
ing informal discussions with interested groups.
The American Association of Motor Vehicle Ad-
ministrators, composed of State officials respon-
sible for issuing drivers' licenses and registration
plates, endorsed the Department's plans at their
annual meeting in Detroit September 10. On
September 21 a meeting of private agencies, in-
cluding motoring associations, bus and truck asso-
ciations, and other highway-user groups, was held
446
in Washington to discuss the matter. In October
representatives of all Federal Government agencies
interested in highway and touring problems will
meet in Washington for the same purpose. Out
of these informal discussions is expected to develop
a list of the main points which the United States
will desire to have included in the proposed world-
wide convention in order to make possible the ad-
herence of this Government, for the benefit of
American motorists.
Final action on the convention will be taken
under the auspices of the United Nations, whose
Economic and Social Council recently authorized
the holding of an international conference for this
purpose before the end of August 1949.
South Pacific Commission Meeting
The Department of State announced on Septem-
ber 15 that the three United States Commissioners
in the South Pacific Commission had arrived at
Washington for a three-day i^eriod of consultation.
Those attending the series of meetings are:
Senior Commissioner: Felix M. Kessing, Profes-
sor of Anthropology at Stanford University.
Commissioner: JMilton Shalleck, lawyer of New
York City.
Alternate Cormnissioner: Karl C. Leebrick, Act-
ing President of the University of Hawaii.
This will be the first meeting at Washington of
of the United States Commissioners, who were ap-
pointed by the President on April 28, 1948. It has
been arranged in order that the Commissioners
may confer with officers of this Government on
matters relating to the South Pacific Commission.
Among problems which the Commissioners will
discuss are items on the agenda of the Second Ses-
sion of the Commission to be convened at Sydney,
Australia, on Octolier 25.
The South Pacific Commission was established
May 1948 as a regional advisory and consultative
body on social and economic matters to the Gov-
ernments of Australia, France, the Netherlands,
New Zealand, the United Kingdom, and the United
States. The territorial scope of the Commission
comprises all those non-self-governing territories
in the Pacific Ocean which are administered by
these participating Governments and which lie
wholly or in part south of the Equator and east
from and including Netherlands New Guinea.
The Commission will be concerned primarily
with subjects which are of every-day concern in
the lives of the people, particularly agriculture
(including animal husbandry), communications,
transport, fisheries, forestry, industry, labor, mar-
keting, production, trade and finance, public
works, education, health, housing, and social
welfare.
Department of State Bulletin
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Bulgaria's Disregard for Obligations Under Peace Treaty and U. N. Charter
[Released to the press September 24]
Text of an aide-memoire delivered September ^3,
1948, to Bulgarian Foreign Minister Kolarov by
the Ajnerican Minister in Sofia, Donald R. Heath
The United States Government has noted that
(lie Minister for Foreign Affairs, in a speeclr in
tlie Sobranje on September 4, is reported to have
staled that Bulgaria has been scrupulous in ful-
filling its obligations under the Peace Treaty, and
to have attributed to the United States the rejec-
tion of Bulgaria's application for membership in
the United Nations.
The Minister for Foreign Affairs is quoted as
saying that '"during the past year Bulgaria car-
ried out and continues to carry out all she con-
tracted under the Peace Treaty"'. On the conti'ary,
from the very moment it signed the Treaty the
Bulgarian Government has prosecuted a syste-
matic and ruthless campaign to obliterate demo-
cratic opposition, in direct disregard of the funchv-
mental principles of freedom which it undertook
by Article 2 to secure. Through abuse of the in-
strumentalities of police power and subversion of
judicial process, the Bulgarian Government has
subjected substantial numbers of the Bulgarian
people whose only crime was a belief in the rights
of man, to involuntary servitude, banishment, con-
centration camps, imprisonment, torture and
e.xecution. It has obliterated the opposition press
and by means of terror stifled free expression. On
the day after it ratified the Peace Treaty the
National Assembly adopted legislation declaring
any attempt to reestablish under any form a po-
litical party which in the last elections, despite
fraud and intimidation, was admitted by the Bul-
garian Government to have polled over one-fourth
of the total vote, to be a crime punishable by life
imprisonment or death. The United States Gov-
ernment and the world was shocked when, one week
after the Treaty came into effect, the Bulgarian
Government performed the judicial murder of
Nikola Petkov.
As regards the reportetl claim of the Minister
for Foreign Affairs that Bulgaria is abiding by
the provisions of the military clauses of the Treaty,
the United States Government refers to its re-
quests to observe the execution of the military pro-
visions of the Treaty, such as Article 12, and to
obtain oiRcially information concerning the size of
Bulgaria's military establishment, which have
been rejected.
The United States Government would be happy
to welcome Bulgaria into the United Nations.
However, the Bulgarian Government has not
sliown itself qualified for membership in that
organization under the provisions of the Charter.
Aside from non-fulfillment of its international
obligations under the Peace Treaty as noted above,
a majority of the Security Council Balkan Com-
mission of the United Nations in which Bulgaria
seeks membership determined that the Bulgarian
Government has supported on its territory guer-
rilla activity directed against Greece, a member
of the United Nations, of which further confirma-
tion, tantamount to an admission of guilt, is appar-
ent in the effort Bulgaria has matle to obstruct the
work of that Commission and of the subsequent
Special Balkan Committee of the General Assem-
bly. In its Supplementary Report of September
10, 1948 to its Annual Report to the General As-
sembly, the Special Balkan Committee, in con-
firming its finding that such Bulgarian support is
continuing, has declared that the conduct of Bul-
garia "has been inconsistent with the pur]:)oses and
principles of the Charter of the United Nations".
In the circumstances, Bulgaria's application has
failed of support not only of the United States but
also of the overwhelming majority of other mem-
bers of the Security Council.
The American Leg.vtion,
Sofia, September 23, 191^8.
Efforts To Assist Near Eastern Refugees
STATEMENT BY ACTING SECRETARY LOVETT
[Released to the press Spptcmber 22]
It will be recalled that the late Count Berna-
dotte. United Nations mediator for Palestine, re-
cently directed an appeal to the United States for
aid to Near Eastern refugees. In response to the
critical nature of this emergency, the Department's
Advisory Committee on Voluntary Foreign Aid is
Ocfofaer 3, 1948
moliilizing American voluntary resources, and sub-
stantial assistance has already been rendered by
church and lay groups. In order to expedite de-
livery in the Near East of urgently needed supplies,
the Department has authorized the American Mis-
sion for Aid to Greece to release certain foodstuffs
and DDT, which will be replenished through
447
THE RECORD Of THE WEEK
monetary contributions from American voluntary
sources.
In Count Bernadotte's last report to the United
Nations he laid particular emphasis on the fact
that aid provided to date is inadequate to meet any
continuing need. It is hoped that the American
people will respond with generosity and sympathy
to this urgent need.
PLANNING COMMITTEE APPOINTED
William L. Batt, Acting Chairman of the Ad-
visory Committee, has appointed a planning com-
mittee composed of representatives of church, edu-
cational, industrial, and lay interests under the
chairmanship of A. L. Warnshuis, in collaboration
with the American Red Cross. The planning
committee, which reports to all interested organi-
zations and groups, is serving as a focal point for
American relief activities. It is now engaged in
the procurement of food supplies and is collabo-
rating with the Christian Rural Overseas Program
in obtaining wheat. It is also stimulating collec-
tions of clothing and blankets through the church
organizations. The Near East Foundation is pro-
viding the planning committee with facilities for
its operations and is serving as a repository for
contributions. To insure its most effective use,
American aid will be coordinated with the efforts
of Sir Rafael Cilento, the mediator's Director of
Relief Operations.
In response to the appeal for voluntary support
a number of gifts in the form of monetary con-
tributions, supplies, and services are being made
available from church and industrial sources. Ad-
ditional assistance is being rendered. The Ameri-
can Red Cross is providing the services of expert
personnel to assist in refugee activities and has do-
nated two ambulances to the Syrian Red Crescent.
It has also made available medical supplies valued
at $50,000 in addition to its earlier contributions
estimated at $450,000.
These efforts to alleviate the critical situation
of the Near Eastern refugees are being pursued
with the unqualified support of the Department of
State. The major portion of these refugees, of
whom 75 percent are women and children, are
now destitute. Thousands are without funds, shel-
ter, or adequate supplies of food, water, and cloth-
ing. Medical and sanitary facilities are too lim-
ited to meet the needs of the present situation.
The Department is hopeful that this great hu-
manitarian problem will meet with the sympa-
thetic response of the American people.
Incident Involving Seating of Ethiopian Minister at Science Meeting
EXCHANGE OF MEMORANDA BETWEEN DEPARTMENT OF
STATE AND THE IMPERIAL ETHIOPIAN LEGATION
[Released to the press September 23]
Imperial Ethiopian Legation
Washinffton, D.C.
September 20^ 19^8
The Imperial Ethiopian Legation acknowledges
the receipt of the memorandum from the Depart-
ment of State dated September 17th, expressing
regret for the incident involving His Excellency
Ras Imru, Minister of Ethioi^ia, on September 13,
1948.
The Legation, while very much appreciative for
the endeavor of the Department to investigate into
the circumstances of the case with a view toward
taking appropriate action, regrets to state that
the information given to the Department of State
by the Organizations and individuals mentioned
in the memorandum, alleging that the Minister
was seated first in the box by mistake and was
subsequently requested to move to the orchestra,
which was assigned to him is incorrect. The ex-
planation in the memorandum of the Department,
therefore, which was based on such information
and tending to justify the indignity and injury
suffered by the Minister, is unacceptable to the
Legation.
The Minister had in his hands tickets bearing
Box Nos. E-2, 4, 6, and 8, issued to him and the
other members of the Legation by the American
Association for the Advancement of Science, of
which corresponding numbers were clearly shown
on the Boxes. His Excellency went direct to the
Boxes marked with the same numbers of the tickets
in his hand and presented his tickets to an usher
who was standing by and who checked the corre-
sponding numbers of the tickets and the boxes and
invited the Minister to choose one of the four seats
mentioned hereinabove. His Excellency took Box
No. 8, and it was from that same Box that he was
told to leave.
For the verification of the fact stated above, and
to enable the Department in its investigation of
the case toward taking appropriate action as de-
manded in the previous note of this Legation,
herewith is enclosed one of the tickets which the
American Association for the Advancement of
Science issued to His Excellency and members of
his Legation for attending the ceremony on 13th
September and which the Minister had in his hand
on that date when the incident occurred.
448
Department of State Bulletin
The Department of State ac-knowleclges the re-
ceipt of the note from the Imperial Etliiopian
Legation, ihited September 20, 19-18, making fiir-
tiier reference to tlie incitlcnt involving the Honor-
able Ras Imrii, Minister of Ethiopia, at Constitu-
tion Hall on September 13, 1948.'
The Depai-tnient, while reiterating its regret for
the embarrassment caused the Minister, wishes to
inform the Imperial Ethiopian Legation that its
further investigations into the case, based on the
information contained in the Legation's note under
reference, confirm that the incident was solely the
result of a series of misunderstandings.
The Department has examined the ticket en-
closed with the Legation's note and finds that it
bears the following inscription, the first two lines
of which are j^rinted and the third line type-
written :
Guest Admission
Box No.
Reserved Seats E-2, 4, 6, 8.
It is apparent that the American Association for
the Advancement of Science used a form guest
ticket for the meeting on SeiDtember 13. In the
case of those Chiefs of ^Mission who were assigned
box seats, the box number was inserted in the
proper place by the Association. In the case, how-
ever, of those Chiefs of Mission who were assigned
orchestra seats, the location of the reserved seats
was typed in below the box reference. Owing to
the Association's failure to delete the reference to
the box, it is quite understandable that the Min-
ister concluded that the seats reserved to him were
in a box rather than on the floor of the auditorium.
Furthermore, this impression was apparently con-
firmed when the usher, after examining the ticket,
unfortunately made the mistake of directing the
Minister to a box seat instead of to the orchestra
seat assigned to him.
The Department's examination of the seating
arrangement employed by the Association confirms
this explanation. The boxes at Constitution Hall
are numbered and bear no letter designation.
E-2, 4, G, S, identify seat locations in the orchestra,
rather tlian box locations.
The Department hopes that the foregoing satis-
factorily explains the cause of the embarrassment
to which the Minister was so regrettably subjected.
Department of State,
Washington, September 22, 191)8
' Bulletin of Sept. 26, 1948, p. 41.3.
' Bulletin of Aug. 15, 1948, p. 211.
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Radiotelegraph Service With Saudi Arabia
Telegram from Secretdry MarshaU to the Ameri-
can Minister at Jidda, J. Rives Childs
[Released to the press September 17]
September 16, 191,8
Please convey to the Minister of Foreign Af-
fairs my felicitations on the opening of direct
radiotelegraph service between the United States
and the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia and express to
him the satisfaction this Government takes in the
establishment of this channel of communications
between our two countries.
In this, the first message to be sent over this cir-
cuit, I wish also to express appreciation for the
assistance rendered by the Legation for the past
several years in bringing this circuit into existence.
Letter of Credence
Egypt
The newly appointed Ambassador of Egypt,
Mohamed Kamel Abdul Eahim Bey, presented his
letters of ci-edence to the President on September
14, 1948. For texts of the Ambassador's remarks
and the President's reply, see Department of State
press release 731 of September 14.
Attaciters of Stephen Haas Apprehended
[Released to the press September 10]
The American Embassy in Cairo has received a
note dated August 22 from the Egyptian Foreign
Office in reply to the Embassy's notes of July 19
and July 24 regarding the death of Stephen Haas.^
After renewing the Egyptian Government's ex-
pression of deep regret for this unfortunate occur-
rence, the note states that three persons believed
responsible for the attack have been apprehended
and charged with the crime before the appropriate
court and that they will receive the punishment
they merit.
Ceylon Appoints First Ambassador to U.S.
In pursuance of an agreement between the Gov-
ernment of the United States of America and the
Government of Ceylon to exchange diplomatic rep-
resentatives at the Embassy level, Felix Cole was
accredited recently as Ambassador of the United
States of America to Ceylon.
The Ceylon (lovernment has now decided, in
consultation with the Government of the United
States, to appoint G. C. S. Corea, presently the
Ceylon Government representative in London as
Ceylon's first Ambassador to the United States.
Mr. Corea is expected to assume the duties of his
new post early in October 1948.
Ocfofaer 3, 7948
449
THE RECORD Of THE WEEK
Italy Expresses Gratitude for
Economic Assistance
[Released to the press by the White House September 17]
Letter from Alcide de Gasperi, President of the
Council of Ministers of Italy, to President Trni-
inan, after the signing of the economic-cooperation
agreement iy Italy and the United States
Rome, July 6, 1948
My dear Mr. President :
In signing the Economic Cooperation Agree-
ment with the Government of the United States,
the Italian Government and people are fully aware
of the gravity and importance of their undertak-
ing. The number and range of recent debates in
political circles and in the press ai-e an indication
of how thoroughly the commitment is appreciated
in this country. We are likewise aware that the
decision taken by Congress is the result of much
consideration and debate by the public opinion of
the United States, and that genuine concern is felt
for the wise administration and best employment
of American aid so generously tendered for the re-
covery of Europe.
My Government is fully appreciative of these
considerations, and it is our resolve that our ob-
ligations under the Economic Cooperation Agree-
ment be discharged in their spirit and in full.
I wish to reassure you that I will devote my per-
sonal attention to the execution of the Agreement,
and will be in close and constant touch with those
of my colleagues and advisers, in and outside the
Cabinet, who are in charge of the Administration
of the Plan. I shall therefore be most grateful,
in the event of general or particular problems
arising which, in your opinion or in that of your
advisers, require special consideration or re-exam-
ination, if you will cause me to be personally in-
formed.
Four years have now elapsed since from this
newly released Capital we set about the mighty
task of rebuilding the country. With the unstinted
help of the people of America, we then repaired
the wrecked fabric of our administration. More
recently we have succeeded in establishing the
democratic method. Now we go forward — again
with your aid — to achieve full recovery both as a
Nation and as a component and complementary
part of world economy.
I feel confident that the concerted effort of so
many wills to work effectively, and the firm de-
sire to collaborate in the joint interests of peace
and the economic welfare of so many millions of
' Bulletin of May 2, 1948, p. 584.
men cannot fail, Mr. President, to carry us through
successfully to our end.
I am, my dear Mr. President,
respectfully yours,
De Gasperi
Letter from President Truman to Premier De
Gasperi
Septemher 16, 19J^8
Dear Mr. President :
Thank you for the letter you wrote to me after
signing the Economic Cooperation Agreement.
Men everywhere participate in and contribute
more effectively to an undertaking when the terms
and purposes are clearly understood and the com-
mitments are freely undertaken. The great
amount of discussion in our respective countries
and the large consensus in favor of the Agreement
augurs well for its success.
The American people support this program
wholeheartedly both for humanitarian and for
practical reasons. In a world growing smaller
day by day, no nation can profit by isolating itself.
Mutual dependence means that your welfare affects
our welfare and vice versa. Therefore, for our
sake, for your sake, and for the sake of all other
like-minded countries, it is our hope that the pro-
gram in Italy and elsewhere will be crowned with
success.
I express my admiration for the will to work
shown by the Italian people in their most difScult
moments. I admire also the sense of moderation
and political maturity shown by your people who
have regained so recently the privileges and re-
sponsibilities inherent in a liberal democracy.
I am certain that with the broad pai'ticipation
in the Recovery Progi'am of all elements in the
Italian nation, with your demonstrated will to
work, and with your political maturity, Italy will
play a significant constructive part in the Euro-
pean Recovery Program.
With cordial greetings, I am
Very sincerely yours,
Harrt S. Truman
No Time Limit on Filing Claims for
Property Loss in Italy
[Released to the press September 9]
The attention of the Department of State has
been called to statements in the press which have
been interpreted by residents of the United States
as indicating that claims of American citizens for
compensation on account of damage to, or removal
or destruction of, property in Italy during the war,
must be filed by September 15,"l9-48.i The De-
partment points out that no time limit has as yet
been fixed for the filing of claims of that character.
450
Department of State Bulletin
THE FOREIGN SERVICE
Facts Relating to Withdrawal of Donald F.
Evving From Legation at Sofia
[Released to the press September 5]
With reference to the report of the Bulgarian
radio coiicerninir the withdrawal from the Ameri-
can Legation in Sofia of Vice Consul Donald F.
Ewing. the following are the facts in the matter.
On July 16, 1948, in response to their request,
Vice Consul Ewing agreed to meet, outside the
Legation, two Bulgarian acquaintances whom he
had previously known in connection with the visa
work of the Legation to which he was assigned but
had not seen in several months. The Bulgarian
secret police arrested the two Bulgarians in Mr.
Ewing"s company, and on the basis of a document
of which the contents are unknown allegedly
"found" in the pocket of one of them and of al-
leged subsequent "confessions" on their part to
the effect that they had been engaging in
'"espionage" for the United States through Ewing,
the Bulgarian Government declared Ewing
yersonn noii grata and requested his recall.
The American Minister protested to the Bul-
garian Government the arbitrary nature of that
(lovernment's action on the basis of a transpar-
ently fabricated maneuver on the part of I3ul-
garian authorities.
Mr. Ewing has left Bulgaria.
Consular Offices at Matamoros and
Agua Prieta To Remain Open
[Released to the press September 21]
The American Consulates at Matamoros and
Agua Prieta, Mexico, will not be closed September
30, as previously announced. These two impor-
tant Foreign Service posts on the United States-
Mexican border will be kept open for at least four
more months, when the question will be re-
examined.
The decision to continue to maintain the posts at
Matamoros and Agua Prieta was reached at a
conference of Department of State and Foreign
Service officials in Washington, whei-e communi-
cations protesting the closing of the posts were
considered. Among those asking that the posts be
maintained were Senators Tom Connally and W.
Lee O'Daniel of Texas; Senators Ernest W. Mc-
Farland and Carl Hayclen of Arizona; Congress-
men Milton H. West and Lyndon B. Johnson of
Texas; Congressman-elect Lloyd Benson of Texas;
the chambers of commerce of Brownsville, San
Benito, Corpus Christi, and Welasco, Tex., and
Bisbee and Douglas, Ariz. ; the Brownsville Rotary
THE FOREIGN SERVICE
Club; and a considerable number of prominent
citizens, including Curtis Vinson of the Browns-
ville /Jerald, Salvador Lova of the Brownsville
Palm-Hat Factory, S. A. Albert Mendelsohn of the
Cananea Consolidated Copper Company, and
Frank Greene of the Greene Cananea Cattle
Company.
Following the conference John E. Peurifoy, As-
sistant Secretary of State for administration, an-
nounced that the Mexican border posts would be
kept open at least temporarily. He said :
'Tt is never pleasant to consider the closing of
one of our posts abroad, particularly ones so long
in existence and in areas so thriving as Matamoros
and Agua Prieta, but it is our clear duty on the
other hand constantly to review all our posts and
maintain only as many as, under available appro-
priiitions, can be properly supported in the per-
formance of their functions as required Ijy law.
"The decision against continuing to maintain
Matamoros and Agua Prieta seemed unavoidable.
It was taken only after long and serious considera-
tion, and with the greatest reluctance.
"As a result of the earnest solicitations offered by
the representatives of Congress and others inter-
ested, however, we have reconsidered the matter
in the hope that these posts may be maintained
without break. At considerable sacrifice else-
where we have succeeded in finding ways and
means of keeping these offices open for at least the
next four months. By that time we should know
more about the future and it will then be appro-
priate to reexamine the situation."
Located across the Rio Grande River from
Brownsville, Tex., Matamoros is an important
center of inter-American commerce. It is joined
to the United States by the connection of the Xa-
tional Railroad Lines of Mexico to two American
railroads, by a recently completed link of the Inter-
American Highway, and by airlines operating out
of a nearby international airjiort. Through Mata-
moros is funneled bus, truck, and automobile traf-
fic serving the commercial and tourist trade be-
tween two nations.
Agua Prieta, located opposite Douglas, Ariz., is
in the midst of a rapidly developing minerals area
and is thus the center of increasing trade between
the United States and Mexico.
THE DEPARTMENT
Appointment of Officer
Arthur B. Berthnld, as Chief of the Bibliography Branch,
Division of Libraries and Reference Services,, effective
September 17, 1948.
Ocfofaer 3, 1948
451
Occupation Matters Page
The Berlin Crisis:
Communique by U.S., U.K., and France . 423
U.S. Note Delivered to the Soviet Govern-
ment 423
Soviet Note Delivered to the U.S. Gov-
ernment 426
Tripartite Aide-M6moire to Soviet Gov-
ernment 427
The U.N. and Specialized Agencies
The Third Regular Session of the General
Assembly, Paris: No Compromise on
Essential Freedoms. Address by Secre-
tary Marshall 432
Conclusions From Progress Report of the
U.N. Mediator on Palestine:
Mediation Effort 436
Statement by Secretary Marshall .... 436
Supervision of the Two Truces 438
Assistance to Refugees 440
Position on Withdrawing Occupying Forces
From Korea 440
The United States in the United Nations . . 441
U.S. Delegation to Protection of Nature
Conference 443
Bulgaria's Disregard for Obligations Under
Peace Treaties and U.N. Charter. U.S.
Aide-M^moire to Bulgarian Foreign Min-
ister 447
Treaty Information
Executive Committee Achievements of Ito
Interim Commission 444
Plans To Increase Value of General Agree-
ment on Tariffs and Trade 445
Discussions on Convention for Foreign Motor
Travel 446
Italy Expresses Gratitude for Economic
Assistance. Exchange of Communica-
tions Between U.S. and Italy 450
Treaty Information — Continued Page
Bulgaria's Disregard for Obligations Under
Peace Treaty and U.N. Charter. U.S.
Aide-M6moire to Bulgarian Foreign
Minister 447
General Policy
Efforts To Assist Near Eastern Refugees:
Statement by Acting Secretary Lovett . . 447
Planning Committee Appointed 448
Incident Involving Seating of Ethiopian
Minister at Science Meeting. Exchange
of Memoranda Between Department of
State and the Imperial Ethiopian Lega-
tion 448
Letter of Credence 449
Attackers of Stephen Haas Apprehended . . 449
Economic Affairs
U.S. Delegations to International Meetings:
Wool 443
South Pacific Commission Meeting .... 446
Radiotelegraph Service With Saudi Arabia . 449
No Time Limit on Filing Claims for Prop-
erty Loss in Italy 450
International Information and Cultural
Affairs
U.S. Delegation to Cartography Meeting . . 443
Calendar of International Meetings. . . 442
The Foreign Service
Ceylon Appoints First Ambassador to U.S . . 449
Facts Relating to Withdrawal of Donald
F. Ewing From Legation at Sofia .... 451
Consular Offices at Matamoros and Agua
Prieta To Remain Open 451
The Department
Appointment of Officer 451
U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE; 1948
V
f 3X3. / ft^o
tJne/ zl}eha^t7}ten(/ xw tnaie^
For complete contents see back cover
•ptRtmeNOENT OF UOUilw*i*
OCT 25 194a
UAe
z/^efi€ivtm,€^ /o£ C/ui^ V^ LI. X JL \D L X X X
Vol. XIX, No. 484 • Publication 3303
Oaoher 10, 1948
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Qovemment Printing Office
Washington 25, D.C.
Price:
C2 issues, domestic $5, foreign $7.25
Single copy, 15 cents
Published with the approval of the
Director of the Bureau of the Budget
Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
OF State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.
The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.
Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.
The Berlin Crisis
U.S. NOTIFIES U.N. OF SERIOUS SITUATION'
29 Septcmhcr J94S
I have the honor, on behalf of the Government
of the United States of America, in a<ireement
with the Governments of the French Republic
and the United Kingdom, to draw your atten-
tion to the serious situation which has arisen
as the result of the unilateral imposition by the
Government of the Union of Soviet Socialist
Republics of restrictions on transport and com-
munications between the "Western Zones of Occu-
pation in Germany and Berlin. Quite apart from
the fact that it is in conflict with the rights of the
Government of the United States of America and
the Governments of France and the United King-
dom with regard to the occupation and adminis-
tration of Berlin, this action by the Soviet Govern-
ment is contrary to its obligations under Article 2
of the Cliarter of the United Nations and creates
a threat to the peace within the meaning of Chap-
ter VII of the Charter.
2. It is clear from the protracted exchange of
notes and the conversations which have taken place
on the initiative of the three governments between
them and the Soviet Government that the three
governments, conscious of their obligation under
the Charter to settle their disputes by peaceful
means, have made every effort to resolve their
differences directly with the Soviet Government.
Copies of the relevant documents are submitted
separately. In particular, attention is drawn to
the summary of the situation which is contained
in the notes of the United States Government and
the Governments of France and the United King-
dom, dated September 2(5/27, 1948, as follows :
"The issue between the Soviet Government and
the Western Occupying Powers is. therefore, not
that of technical difficulties in communications nor
that of reaching agreement upon the conditions
for the regulation of the currency for Berlin.
The issue is tliat the Soviet Government has clearly
shown by its actions that it is attempting by illegal
and coercive measures in disregard of its obliga-
tions to secure political objectives to which it is
Ocfober JO, 1948
not entitled and which it could not achieve by
peaceful means. It has resorted to blockade meas-
ures ; it has threatened the Berlin population with
starvation, disease and economic ruin; it has
tolerated disorders and attempted to overthrow
the duly elected municipal government of Berlin.
The attitude and conduct of the Soviet Govern-
ment reveal sharply its purpose to continue its
illegal and coercive blockade and its unlawful
actions designed to reduce the status of the United
States, the United Kingdom and France as occupy-
ing powers in Berlin to one of complete subordi-
nation to Soviet rule, and thus to obtain absolute
authority over the economic, political and social
life of the people of Berlin, and to incorporate the
city in the Soviet zone.
"The Soviet Government has thereby taken upon
itself sole responsibility for creating a situation,
in which further recourse to the means of set-
tlemen prescribed in Article 33 of the Charter
of the United Nations is not, in existing circum-
stances, possible, and which constitutes a threat to
international peace and security. In order that in-
ternational peace and security may not be further
endangered the Governments of the United States,
the United Kingdom and France, therefore, while
reserving to themselves full rights to take such
measures as may be necessary to maintain in these
circumstimces their position in Berlin, find them-
selves obliged to refer the action of the Soviet
Government to the Security Council of the United
Nations."
3. Accordingly, the Government of the United
States requests that the Security Council consider
this question at the earliest opportunity.
Warren R. Austin
' Note addre.ssed to Trygve Lie, Secretary-General of the
United Nations. Tlie notifications of tiie Governments of
the French Republic, the United Kingdom, and the United
State.s are contained in U.N. doe. S/1020, Sept. 29, 1948;
the annexed documents were distributed separately. The
U.S'. notification was also released to the press in Wash-
ington on Sept. 29, 1948.
455
LIST OF RELATED DOCUMENTS
The documents being submitted to the Secre-
tary-General of the United Nations by the Gov-
ernment of the United States, the Government of
the French Republic and the Government of the
United Kingdom are as follows :
I A. Identic notes from the Governments of the United
States and the United Kingdom addressed to the
Government of the U.S.S.R., dated July G, 194S.
I B. Note from the Government of tlie French Republic
addressed to the Government of the U.S.S.R., dated
July 6, 1948.
II A. Identic notes of the Government of the U.S.S.R.,
dated July 14, 1948, addressed to the Governments
of the United States and the United Kingdom.
II B. Note of the Government of the U.S.S.R., dated July
14, 1948, addressed to the Government of the French
Republic.
III. Aide-memoire delivered to Mr. Zorin on July 30,
1948, by the representatives of the Governments of
the United States, the United Kingdom and the
French Repul)lic.
rV. Oral statement to Premier Stalin made on August 3,
1948, by the United States Ambassador on behalf of
the representatives of the Governments of the
United States, United Kingdom and the French Re-
public.
V. Tlie directive to the four Military Governors in
Berlin agreed to on August 30, 1948, by the Govern-
ments of the U.S.S.R., the United States, United
Kingdom and the French Republic.
VI. Joint report of the conversations of the four Mili-
tary Governors in Berlin by the United States,
United Kingdom and French Military Governors in
Germany, dated September 7, 1948.
VII. Aide-memoire delivered to Mr. Molotov on Septem-
l)er 14, 1948, by the representatives of the Govern-
ments of the United States, United Kingdom and the
French Republic.
VIII. Aide-memoire of the Government of the U.S.S.R., de-
livered to the representatives of the United States,
United Kingdom and the French Republic on Sep-
tember 18, 1948.
IX. Identic notes from the Governments of the United
States, United Kingdom and the French Republic
addressed to the Government of the U.S.S.R., dated
September 22, 1948.
X. Identic notes of the Government of the U.S.S.R.,
dated September 20, 1948, addressed to the Gov-
ernments of the United States, United Kingdom
and France.
XI. Identic notes to the Government of the U.S.S.R.,
from the Governments of France, the United King-
dom and the United States, dated September 20-27,
1948.
Position on Withdrawal of Troops From Korea
EXCHANGE OF NOTES BETWEEN U.S. AND SOVIET GOVERNMENTS
No. 155 [Translation] [Released to the press September 30]
September 18, 194.8
The Minister of Foreign Affairs of the Union
of Soviet Socialist Republics presents his compli-
ments to the Embassy of the United States of
America and requests the following be communi-
cated to the Government of the United States of
America.
The Supreme National Assembly of Korea on
September 10, 1948 addre.ssed itself to the Govern-
ment of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics
and to the Government of the United States of
America with a request for the simultaneous and
immediate withdrawal of Soviet and American
troops from Korea.
The Presidium of the Supreme Soviet of the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, having con-
sidered this appeal of the Supreme National
Assembly of Korea, have recognized as possible
meeting the wish expressed in this appeal and have
given appropriate instructions to the Council of
Ministers of the Union of Soviet Socialist Re-
publics concerning the evacuation of Soviet troops
from northern Korea so that the evacuation would
be concluded at the end of December, 194S.
At the same time the Presidium of the Supreme
Soviet expressed the hope that the Government of
the United States of America will also agree to
evacuate American troops from southern Korea
within this period.
456
The Presidium of the Supreme Soviet of the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics on September
18 informed the President of the Presidium of the
Supreme National Assembly of Korea, Mr. Kim
Doo Bong, of the above decision.
September 28, 1948
The Embassy of the United States of America
presents its compliments to the Minister of Foreign
Affairs of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics
and has the honor to acknowledge receipt of the
Ministry's note no. 155 of September 18, 1948, in
connection with the withdrawal of occupation
forces from Korea. The text of the Ministry's
note was immediately communicated to the United
States Government which has now instructed the
Embassy to state that the United States Govern-
ment has taken note of the decision of the Soviet
Government to evacuate its occupation forces from
Korea by the end of December, 1948.
The Embassy has been further instructed to
state that the United States Government regards
the question of troop withdrawal as part of the
larger question of Korean unity and independence,
concerning which its views will be presented at
the appropriate time by the United States Delega-
tion to the General Assembly of the United
Nations.
Department of State Bulletin
The Struggle for Human Rights
BY MRS. FRANKLIN D. ROOSEVELT >
U.S. Representative to the Commission on Human Rights
I have come this evening to talk with you on one
of the greatest issues of our time — that is the pres-
ervation of human freedom. I have chosen to
discuss it iiere in France, at the Sorbonne, because
here in this soil the roots of hiunan freedom have
long ago struck deep and here they have been
richh^ nourished. It was here the Declaration of
the Sights of Man was proclaimed, and the great
slogans of the French Revolution — libert}', equal-
ity, fraternit}' — fired the imagination of men. I
have chosen to discuss this issue in Europe because
this has been the scene of the greatest historic
battles between freedom and t^yranny. I have
chosen to discuss it in the early days of the General
Assembly because the issue of human liberty is
decisive for the settlement of outstanding political
differences and for the future of the United
Nations.
The decisive importance of this issue was fully
recognized by the founders of the United Nations
at San Francisco. Concern for the preservation
and promotion of human rights and fundamental
freedoms stands at the heart of the United Na-
tions. Its Charter is distinguished by its preoccu-
pation with the rights and welfare of individual
men and women. The United Nations has made
it clear that it intends to uphold human rights and
to protect the dignity of the human personality.
In the preamble to the Charter the keynote is set
when it declares: "We the people of the United
Nations determined ... to reaffirm faith in
fundamental human rights, in the dignity and
worth of the human person, in the equal rights of
men and women and of nations large and small,
and ... to promote social progress and bet-
ter standards of life in larger freedom." This re-
flects the basic premise of the Charter that the
peace and security of mankind are dependent on
mutual respect for the rights and freedoms of all.
One of the purposes of the United Nations is
declared in article 1 to be: "to achieve interna-
tional cooperation in solving international prob-
lems of an economic, social, cultural, or humani-
tarian character, and in promoting and encourag-
ing respect for human rights and for fundamental
freedoms for all without distinction as to race, sex,
language, or religion."
Ocfofaer 70, 7948
This thought is repeated at several points and
notably in articles 55 and 56 the Members pledge
themselves to take joint and separate action in
cooperation with the United Nations for the pro-
motion of "universal respect for, and observance
of, human rights and fundamental freedoms for
all without distinction as to race, sex, language, or
religion."
The Human Rights Commission was given as its
first and most important task the preparation of
an International Bill of Rights. The General
Assembly which opened its third session here in
Paris a few days ago will have before it the first
fruit of the Commission's labors in this task, that
is the International Declaration of Human Rights.
This Declaration was finally completed after
much work during the last session of the Human
Rights Commission in New York in the spring of
1948. The Economic and Social Council has sent
it without recommendation to the General Assem-
bly, together with other documents transmitted by
the Human Rights Commission.
It was decided in our Commission that a Bill of
Rights should contain two parts :
1. A Declaration which could be approved through
action of the Member States of the United Nations in the
General Assembly. This Declaration would have great
moral force, and would say to the peoples of the world
"this is what we hope human rights may mean to all peo-
ple in the years to come." We have put down here the
rights that we consider basic for individual human beings
the world over to have. Without them, we feel that the
full development of individual personality is impossible.
2. The second part of the bill, which the Human Rights
Commission has not yet completed because of the lack of
time, is a covenant which would be in the form of a treaty
to be presented to the nations of the world. Each nation,
as it is prepared to do so, would ratify this covenant and
the covenant would then become binding on the nations
which adhere to it. Each nation ratifying would then be
obligated to change its laws wherever they did not conform
to the points contained in the covenant.
This covenant, of course, would have to be a
simpler document. It coulrl not state aspirations,
which we feel to be permissible in the Declaration.
It could only state rights which cotdd be assured
by law and it must contain methods of imple-
" Address delivered at the Sorbonne, Paris, Sept. 28,
1948, and released to the press on the same date.
457
THB UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZBD AGENCIES
mentation, and no state ratifying the covenant
could be allowed to disregard it. The methods of
implementation have not yet been agreed upon,
nor have they been given adequate consideration
by the Commission at any of its meetings. There
certainly should be discussion on the entire ques-
tion of this world Bill of Human Rights and there
may be acceptance by this Assembly of the Decla-
ration if they come to agreement on it. The
acceptance of the Declaration, I think, should
encourage every nation in the coming months to
discuss its meaning with its people so that they
will be better prepared to accept the covenant with
a deeper understanding of the problems involved
when that is presented, we hope, a year from now
and, we hope, accepted.
The Declaration has come from the Human
Rights Commission with unanimous acceptance
except for four abstentions — the U.S.S.R., Yugo-
slavia, Ukraine, and Byelorussia. The reason for
this is a fundamental difference in the conception
of human rights as they exist in these states and in
certain other Member States in the United Nations.
In the discussion before the Assembly, I think
it should be made crystal clear what these differ-
ences are and tonight I want to spend a little time
making them clear to you. It seems to me there is
a valid reason for taking the time today to tliink
carefully and clearly on the subject of human
rights, because in the acceptance and observance
of these rights lies the root, I believe, of our chance
for peace in the future, and for the strengthening
of the United Nations organization to the point
where it can maintain peace in the future.
We must not be confused about what freedom is.
Basic human rights are simple and easily under-
stood: freedom of speech and a free press; free-
dom of I'eligion and worship ; freedom of assembly
and the right of petition ; the right of men to be
secure in their homes and free from unreasonable
search and seizure and from arbitrary arrest and
punishment.
We must not be deluded by the efforts of the
forces of reaction to prostitute the great words of
our free tradition and thereby to confuse the
struggle. Democracy, freedom, human rights
have come to have a definite meaning to the people
of the world which we must not allow any nation
to so change that they are made synonymous with
suppression and dictatorship.
There are basic differences that show up even in
the use of words between a democratic ancl a totali-
tarian country. For instance "democracy" means
one thing to the U.S.S.R. and another to the
U.S.A. and, I know, in France. I have served
since the first meeting of the nuclear commission
on the Human Rights Commission, and I think
this point stands out clearly.
The U.S.S.R. Representatives assert that they
already have achieved many things which we, in
458
what they call the "bourgeois democracies" cannot
achieve because their government controls the ac-
complishment of these things. Our government
seems jiowerless to them because, in the last an-
alysis, it is controlled by the people. They would
not put it that way — they would say that the
people in the U.S.S.R. control their government
by allowing their government to have certain abso-
lute rights. We, on the other hand, feel that cer-
tain rights can nevei' be granted to the government,
but must be kept in the hands of the people.
For instance, the U.S.S.R. will assert that their
press is free because the state makes it free by pro-
viding the machinery, the paper, and even the
money for salaries for the people who work on the
paper. They state that theie is no control over
what is printed in the various papers that they
subsidize in this manner, such, for instance, as a
trade-union paper. But what would happen if a
paper were to print ideas which were critical of
the basic policies and beliefs of the Communist
government? I am sure some good reason would
be found for abolishing the paper.
It is true that there have been many cases where
newspapers in the U.S.S.R. have criticized officials
and their actions and have been responsible for the
removal of those officials, but in doing so they did
not criticize anything which was fundamental to
Communist beliefs. They simply criticized meth-
ods of doing things, so one must differentiate
between things which are permissible, such as
criticism of any individual or of the manner of
doing things, and the criticism of a belief which
would be considered vital to the acceptance of
Communism.
Wliat are the differences, for instance, between
trade-unions in the totalitarian states and in the
democracies? In the totalitarian state a trade-
union is an instrument used by the govermnent
to enforce chities, not to assert rights. Propa-
ganda material which the government desires the
workers to have is furnished to the trade-unions
to be circulated to their members.
Our trade-unions, on the other hand, are solely
the instrument of the workers themselves. They
represent the workers in their relations with the
government and with management and they are
free to develop their own opinions without govern-
ment help or interference. The concepts of our
trade-unions and those in totalitarian countries
are drastically different. There is little mutual
understanding.
I think the best example one can give of this
basic difference of the use of terms is "the right to
work". The Soviet Union insists that this is a
basic right which it alone can guarantee because it
alone provides full employment by the govern-
ment. But the right to work in the Soviet Union
means the assignment of workers to do whatever
task is given to them by the government without
Department of State Bulletin
an opportunity for the people to participate in the
decision that tlie f^overnnicnt slioiiUl do tliis. A
society in whicli everyone works is not necessarily a
free society and nia}- indeed be a slave society ; on
the other hand, a society in which there is wide-
spread economic insecurit}' can turn freedom into
a barren and vapid ripht for millions of people.
We in the United States have come to realize it
means freedom to choose one's job, to work or not
to work as one desires. We, in the United States,
have come to realize, however, that people have a
ri<ilit to demand that their government will not
allow them to starve because as individuals they
cannot find work of the kind they are accustomed
to doing and this is a decision brought about by
l)ub]ic ojiinion which came as a result of the great
dejiression in which many people were out of work,
but we would not consider in the United States
that we had gained any freedom if we were com-
pelled to follow a dictatorial assignment to work
where and when we were told. The right of choice
would seem to us an important, fundamental
freedom.
I have great sympathj' with the Russian people.
They love their country and have always defended
it valiantly against invaders. They have been
through a period of revolution, as a result of which
they were for a time cut off from outside contact.
They have not lost their resulting suspicion of
other countries and the great difficulty is today
that their government encourages this suspicion
and seems to believe that force alone will bring
them respect.
We, in the democracies, believe in a kind of
international respect and action which is recipro-
cal. We do not think others should treat us
differently from the way they wish to be treated.
It is interference in other countries that especially
stirs up antagonism against the Soviet Govern-
ment. If it wishes to feel secure in developing
its economic and political theories within its terri-
tory, then it should grant to others that same
security. We believe in the freedom of people to
make their own mistakes. We do not interfere
with them and they should not interfere with
others.
The basic problem confronting the world today,
as I said in the beginning, is the jji-eservation of
human freedom for the individual and conse-
quently for the society of which he is a part. We
are fighting this battle again today as it was fought
at the time of the French Revolution and at the
time of the American Revolution. The issue of
himian liberty is as decisive now as it was then.
I want to give you my conception of what is meant
in my country by freedom of the individual.
Long ago in London during a discussion with
Mr. Vyshinsky, he told me there was no such thing
as freedom for the individual in the world. All
freedom of the individual was conditioned by the
Ocfober 10, 7948
THE UN/TED NATIONS AND SPeCIALIZED AGBNCIBS
rights of other individuals. That, of course, I
granted. I said : "We approach the question from
a different point of view; we here in the United
Nations are trying to develop ideals which will be
broader in outlook, whicli will consider first the
rights of man, which will consider what makes
man more free : not governments, but man."
The totalitarian state typically ])laces the will
of the people second to decrees promulgated by a
few men at the top.
Naturally there must always be consideration of
the rights of others; but in a democracy this is
not a restriction. Indeed, in our democracies we
make our freedoms secure because each of us is
expected to respect the rights of others and we are
free to make our own laws.
Freedom for our peoples is not only a right, but
also a tool. Freedom of speech, freedom of the
press, freedom of information, freedom of assem-
bly'— these are not just abstract ideals to us; they
are tools with which we create a way of life, a w^ay
of life in which we can enjoy freedom.
Sometimes the processes of democracy are slow,
and I have known some of our leaders to say that
a benevolent dictatorship would accomplish the
ends desired in a much sliorter time than it takes
to go through the democratic processes of discus-
sion and the slow formation of public opinion.
But there is no way of insuring that a dictatorship
will remain benevolent or that power once in the
hands of a few will be returned to the people with-
out struggle or revolution. This we have learned
by exj^erience and we accept the slow processes of
democracy because we know that short-cuts com-
promise principles on which no compromise is
possible.
The final expression of the opinion of the people
with us is through free and honest elections, with
valid choices on basic issues and candidates. The
secret ballot is an essential to free elections but
you must have a choice before you. I have heard
my husband say many times that a people need
never lose their freedom if they kept their right to
a secret ballot and if they used that secret ballot
to the full.
Basic decisions of our society are made through
the expressed will of the people. That is why
when we see these liberties threatened, instead of
falling apart, our nation becomes unified and our
democracies come together as a unified group in
spite of our varied backgrounds and many racial
strains.
In the United States we have a capitalistic econ-
omy. That is because public opinion favors that
type of economy under the conditions in which we
live. But we have imposed certain restraints; for
instance, we have anti-trust laws. These are the
legal evidence of the determination of the Ameri-
can people to maintain an economy of free com-
459
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
petition and not to allow monopolies to take away
the people's freedom.
Our trade-unions grow stronger because the
people come to believe that this is the proper way
to guarantee the rights of the workers and that the
right to organize and to bargain collectively keeps
the balance between the actual producer and the
investor of money and the manager in industry
who watches over the man who works with his
hands and who produces the materials which are
our tangible wealth.
In the United States we are old enough not to
claim perfection. We recognize that we have some
problems of discrimination but we find steady
progress being made in the solution of these
problems. Through normal democratic processes
we are coming to understand our needs and how
we can attain full equality for all our people. Free
discussion on the subject is permitted. Our
Supreme Court has recently rendered decisions to
clarify a number of our laws to guarantee the
rights of all.
The U.S.S.K. claims it has reached a point
where all races within her borders are officially
considered equal and have equal rights and they
insist they have no discrimination where minori-
ties are concerned.
This is a laudable objective but there are other
aspects of the development of freedom for the indi-
vidual which are essential before the mere absence
of discrimination is worth much, and these are
lacking in the Soviet Union. Unless they are be-
ing denied freedoms which they want and which
they see other people have, people do not usually
complain of discrimination. It is these other free-
doms—the basic freedoms of speech, of the press,
of religion and conscience, of assembly, of fair
trial and freedom from arbitrary arrest and
punishment, which a totalitarian government can-
not safely give its people and which give meaning
to freedom from discrimination.
It is my belief, and I am sure it is also yours, that
the struggle for democracy and freedom is a criti-
cal struggle, for their preservation is essential to
the great objective of the United Nations to main-
tain international peace and security.
Among free men the end cannot justify the
means. "We know the patterns of totalitarianism—
the single political party, the control of schools,
press, radio, the arts, the sciences, and the church
to support autocratic authority ; these are the age-
old patterns against which men have struggled for
three thousand years. These are the signs of re-
action, retreat, and retrogression.
The United Nations must hold fast to the heri-
tage of freedom won by the struggle of its peoples;
it must help us to pass it on to generations to come.
The development of the ideal of freedom and its
translation into the everyday life of the people in
great areas of the earth is the product of the ef-
460
forts of many peoples. It is the fruit of a long
tradition of vigorous thinking and courageous
action. No one race and no one people can claim
to have done all the work to achieve greater
dignity for human beings and greater freedom to
develop human personality. In each generation
and in each country there must be a continuation
of the struggle and new steps forward must be
taken since this is preeminently a field in which to
stand still is to retreat.
The field of human rights is not one in which
compromise on fundamental principles are pos-
sible. The work of the Commission on Human
Eights is illustrative. The Declaration of Human
Eights provides : "Everyone has the right to leave
any country, including his own.'' The Soviet
Eepresentative said he would agree to this right
if a single phrase was added to it — "in accordance
with the procedure laid down in the laws of that
country." It is obvious that to accept this would
be not only to compromise but to nullify the right
stated. This case forcefully illustrates the im-
portance of the proposition that we must ever be
alert not to compromise fundamental human
rights merely for the sake of reaching unanimity
and thus lose them.
As I see it, it is not going to be easy to attain
unanimity with respect to our different concepts
of government and human rights. Tlie struggle
is bound to be difficult and one in which we must
be firm but patient. If we adhere faithfully to
our principles I think it is possible for us to main-
tain freedom and to do so peacefully and without
recourse to force.
The future must see the broadening of human
rights throughout the world. People who have
glimpsed freedom will never be content until they
have secured it for themselves. In a true sense,
human rights are a fundamental object of law and
government in a just society. Human rights exist
to the degree that they are respected by people in
relations with each other and by governments in
relations with their citizens.
The world at large is aware of the tragic con-
sequences for human beings ruled by totalitarian
systems. If we examine Hitler's rise to power, we
see how the chains are forged which keep the indi-
vidual a slave and we can see many similarities in
the way things are accomplished in other coun-
tries. Politically men must be free to discuss and
to arrive at as many facts as possible and there
must be at least a two-party system in a country
because when there is only one political party, too
many things can be subordinated to the interests
of that one party and it becomes a tyrant and not
an instrument of democratic government.
The propaganda we have witnessed in the re-
cent past, like that we perceive in these days, seeks
(Continued on page 466)
Department of State Bulletin
Albania and Bulgaria Continue To Reject UNSCOB
U.S.-BULGARIAN CORRESPONDENCE
[Released to the press September 27]
During the period August-September, there was
an exchange of notes between the Bulgarian
Foreign Office and the U.S. Legation, Sofia, on the
subject of Bulgarian charges that Greek forces
were violating the Bulgarian frontier or taking up
threatening positions in its vicinity. The Bul-
garian note contained statements and allegations
which the Sofia government also forwarded to the
Secretary-General of the United Nations. The
correspondence between the Bulgarian Govern-
ment and the Secretary-General of the United
Nations on this matter has already been published.^
The following is the text of the latest exchange
of notes between this Government and the Bul-
garian Government. This exchange has been com-
municated by the United States to the body im-
mediately concerned with relations between
Greece and the Balkan States, the United Nations
Special Committee on the Balkans.
Note of August 28, 1948, delivered hy the U.S.
Legation at Sofia to the Bulgarian Ministry of
Foreign Affairs, replying to its note of August 18
The Legation of the United States of America
presents its compliments to the Ministry of
Foreign Affairs and has the honor to acknowledge
receipt of the latter's note no. 36014-20-1 of
August IS, bringing to the attention of the Lega-
tion certain allegations as to violations of the
Greco-Bulgarian border by Greek groups, which
information has been submitted to the Security
Council of the United Nations by the Bulgarian
Government together with an energetic protest
and request that the Security Council of the
United Nations take steps to effect the retirement
of Greek troops from the frontier to the interior
of Greece in order to avoid any incidents.
AMiile the Legation is appreciative of the action
of the Ministry in bringing this information to its
attention, it ventures to point out that the appro-
priate agency for the investigation of charges
made against Greece by the Bulgarian Government
would appear to be the United Nations Special
Commission on the Balkans, members of which
are presently in Greece, and who would be availa-
ble for an investigation in connection therewith.
Should this suggestion be not agreeable to the
Bulgarian Government the Legation would be
pleased to make available one or more of its Service
Attaches, perhaps in conjunction with similar
officers of other diplomatic missions here, to carry
out an impartial investigation of the areas named
in the Ministry's note, such investigation naturally
to be in cooperation with the competent Bulgai'ian
authorities.
The Legation would appreciate being advised
as to whether either or both of the suggestions made
above prove of interest to the Ministry.
The Legation of the United States of America
avails itself [etc.]
Note of September 11, 19^8, from the Bulgariam,
Foreign Office to the U.S. Legation at Sofia
In reply to note verhale 498 of August 28, the
Foreign Office has the honor to advise as follows :
Communication made to Legation by circular
note of August 18 was purely informative in nature
in view of fact that concentration of important
Greek troops along Greco-Bulgarian frontier could
have provoked serious incidents and difficulties.
It is for this reason reply of American Legation
somewhat surprised Ministry of Foreign Affairs
and more so because Honorable Mission knows per-
fectly point of view of Bulgarian Government in
regard to Unscob and knows equally well that
Bulgarian Government has declined all demands
for investigation along Greco-Bulgarian frontier
by military attaches of U.S. and Great Britain in
connection with peace treaty considering such in-
vestigations as reflection of sovereignty of state.
ALBANIA'S REPLY TO TRIPARTITE APPEAL
[Released to the press October 1]
The Department has received from the French
Government the text of the remarks made on Sep-
tember 20 by Mr. Hysni Kapo, Deputy Minister
of Foreign Affairs of Albania, in reply to the
demarche made at Tirana on September 13 by the
French Minister on behalf of the United States,
Ocfober JO, J948
the United Kingdom and French Governments
concerning Albanian aid to the Greek guerrillas.^
The reply rejects the French Minister's appeal
that the competent agency of the United Nations,
the U.N. Special Committee on the Balkans, be
1 U.N. press release BAL/376, Sept. 2, 1948.
'Documents and State Papers, September 1948.
461
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
permitted to opeiiite in Albanian territory, while
at the same time, in defiance of logic, it accuses the
United States, Great Britain, and France of usurp-
ing the peacemaking functions of the United Na-
tions. Equally inisatisfactory is the fact that the
reply rejects as well any other type of neutral ob-
servation of Albanian conduct towards the Greek
guerrillas. The language is evasive but the mean-
ing is clear, being underlined by the statement that
Albania "has designated forbidden zones in its
territory."
In effect, Albania asks acceptance, without
demur or inquiry, of its own allegations of good
behavior despite the evidence in the hands of the
U.N. Special Committee of extensive and illegal
Albanian support of guerrilla operations against
the people and Government of Greece, evidence
based in considerable part on eyewitness observa-
tion by U.N. officials.
Following is an unofficial translation of the
Albanian reply :
"1. The Albanian Government is not aware that
France, the United States, and Great Britain have
the right to represent themselves as powers guar-
anteeing peace as stated by the Minister of France.
The Albanian Government considers not only that
such a claim has no foundation in itself but also
that such a claim on the part of France, the United
States and Great Britain is in direct contradiction
with the existence of the United Nations organiza-
tion and with its goals and principles. In its
opinion, such intervention by the three states in
Albano-Greek relations, because of its unilateral
character, can only serve to create or aggi-avate
friction and misunderstandings between the Al-
banians and Greece, or at least to encourage the
move of the aggressors.
"2. The creation of a new International Control
Commission or of any other Commission would
not facilitate the settling of these relations as ex-
perience has already shown that the Balkan Com-
mission not only does not contribute to peace but
on the contrary, as we know, it has served to
woi"sen the relations between Greece and Albania
and Greece's other northern neighbors.
"3. It is necessary to eniphasize again that in
the abnormal conditions existing between Greece
and Albania, it is the Greek Government which is
guilty, although it always tries to shake off the
responsibility for this state of affairs, and that the
Albanian Government has more than once shown
itself ready for the settlement of relations with its
Greek neighbors. With good will on the part of
the Greek Government, the border conflicts could
have been avoided and the situation at the border
would be normal.
"4. The Albanian Government's conduct in re-
gard to the interning and disarming of Partisans
crossing the Albano-Greek border is entirely in
conformity with the rules of international law ; in
addition, the Albanian Government categorically
rejects as absolutely at variance with the facts the
Greek statement that interned Partisans were
armed in Albanian territory and returned to
Greece. The action of the Albanian Government
in giving protection and assistance to Greek
women, children and old people also conforms
exactly to international law. As to movement in
the frontier zone, it is necessary to point out that
Albania, as do also other states, has designated
forbidden zones in its territory, which is an undis-
putable right of a sovereign state."
Documents and State Papers
September 1948
The September issue of Documents and State Papers^ which will be released shortly, will
contain the following items :
U.N. Special Committee on the Balkans :
Comment on Report to the 3rd Session of the General Assembly
The First and Second Interim Reports
The Annual Report to the U.N. and a Supplementary Report
Restitution of Looted Property by Japan
Designation of Successor Organization to Claim Jewish Property
Calendar of International Meetings with Amiotations
Copies of this publication are for sale by the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printing Office, Washington 25, D.C. at 30 cents a copy; subscription price for 12 issues
is $3.00 a year.
462
Department of State Bulletin
The United States in the United Nations
The Berlin Crisis
At the Palais de Chaillot in Paris on October
4, the Security Council debated whether it was
competent to take up the Berlin question. Mr.
Vysninsky (U.S.S.R.) opened the discussion by
denyinjr the Council's competence in the matter
as an overt violation of article 107 of the Charter
as well as of the Potsdam and Yalta agreements.
He denied that the situation in Berlin was a threat
to the i)eace. He further maintained that Berlin
was ])art of the entire question of Germany, for
which the Council of Foreign Ministers was re-
sponsible. He further declared that in reality
there was no blockade of Berlin and that the Soviet
authorities had repeatedly stated that they were
ready to assume responsibility for feeding the
population of Berlin.
Philip C. Jessup, Deputy U.S. Representative
in the Security Council, emphasized that the
actions of the Soviet Union demonstrated that the
Soviet Union was attempting by illegal and co-
ercive measures to achieve political objectives to
which it was not entitled and which it could not
achieve by peaceful means. The real issue, Mr.
Jessup maintained, was whether the only existing
international machinerj^ for the preservation of
the peace can be used to remove a threat to the
peace. In accordance with article 33 of the Charter
the United States, in agreement with the United
Kingdom and France, had made every effort
through direct discussion with the U.S.S.R. to
settle the matter. The Soviet Union's repudiation
of its promises made further discussion futile, and
the three Governments brought the matter to the
attention of the Security Council.
Sir Alexander Cadogan (United Kingdom) fol-
lowed ^Ir. Jessup and supported the United States
Representative.
Warren Austin called the October 4 session to
order but relinquished the presidency for the dura-
tion of the discussion of the Berlin question. Juan
A. Bramuglia (Argentina) presided over the
meeting.
Tlie Security Council voted 9 to 2 to hear the
complaint of the United States, the United King-
dom, and France against the actions of the Soviet
Union in the Berlin blockade as constituting a
threat to world peace and security.
The position of the United States Government
was outlined by Mr. Jessup on October 6, when he
reviewed the development of the Berlin situation.
"The salient feature of the case before the Secu-
rity Council", he said, "is that the Soviet blockade
is still maintained and thus continues in existence
a threat to the peace which it created." He con-
cluded by stating that ''we do not bring this case to
the Securitv Council with anv cut-and-dried
formula for its solution. It is our hope the Se-
curity Council can assist in removing the threat to
peace. Nothing which has happened has changed
our position on that point. The moment that the
blockade is lifted, the United States is ready to
have an immediate meeting of the Council of
Foreign Ministers to discuss with the Soviet Union
any questions relating to Germany."
Atomic Energy
Mr. Tsiang (China) opened the October 1 meet-
ing of Committee I by calling attention to tlie
Atomic Energy Commission's majority proposals,
which were a process of evolution, while the Soviet
Union had not responded to the repeated requests
of the Atomic Energy Commission to furnish con-
crete evidence in support of its proposals. Mr.
Tsiang stated that China stood "solidly behind the
majority plan" and supported the Canadian reso-
lution. Mr. El Khouri (Syria) introduced an
amendment to the Canadian resohition which was
similar to the U.S. June 22 resolution previously
vetoed in the Security Council. Colombia and
Belgium supported the Syi'ian version.
On October 4 Warren Austin again called for
action for effective international control of atomic
energy and questioned whether the Soviet Union
in its new proposal on the question would accept
the international control plan already approved by
a majority of the Atomic Energy Commission.
Mr. Austin pointed out that without effective and
enforceable international control of atomic energy
in the beginning and all the time the world would
have no security from atomic destruction.
In an analysis of the new Soviet proposal . . .
made by Mr. Vyshinsky on October 2 for two con-
ventions— one on prohibition of atomic weapons
and the other on "effective" international control —
which would be signed and put into force simul-
taneously, Mr. Austin said that if this meant the
Soviets approved really effective control, then a
long step had been taken, but he noted that Mr.
Vyshinsky and JNIr. Manuilsky (Ukrainian S.S.R.)
had indicated they still adhere to the narrow na-
tionalist stand they have maintained and would
seek to retain veto right over any control agency
which might be established. If that is the true
interpretation of the language, Mr. Austin said,
"there is a chasm that has yet to be bridged."
Mr. Austin reiterated the U.S. support for the
majority control plan of the Atomic Energy Com-
mission and for the Canadian resolution now
before Committee I. That draft resolution would
have the General Assembly approve the Commis-
sion reports, recommending the international con-
trol system and telling of Soviet opposition to the
inspection and regulation powers the Commission
would accord to a world control agency.
October 10, 1948
463
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES
Toward Revision of the Geneva Convention
BY WILLIAM H. McCAHON
The United States has actively supported the
initiative taken in tlie fall of 1945 by the Interna-
tional Committee of the Red Cross to revise exist-
ing international treaties applicable to prisoners
of war ^ and to bring into being a new convention
establishing liuniane standards of treatment for
civilians in time of war. In the light of experi-
ences of World War II those in the Government
charged with the responsibility of the practical
application of the existing conventions were con-
vinced of the necessity for rather extensive re-
visions of those conventions for the purpose of (1)
bringing them up to date, (2) making them easier
to apply uniformly and less susceptible to different
interpretations, and (3) providing more effective
protection for the categories of persons covered.
It was considered equally important to obtain
through international treaty similar legal pro-
tection for civilians in belligerent and occupied
territories. The generally unsatisfactory stop-
gap measure of attempting to apply the prisoners-
of-war convention to certain categories of civilians
during World War II had pointed up the need
for a separate convention formally defining the
treatment to be accorded such pereons in wartime.
The United States participated in preliminary
informal discussions of this subject at a meeting
of government experts convened at Geneva under
the auspices of the International Committee of
the Red Cross, April 14-26, 1947.^ At that meet-
ing 14 Allied governments were represented, and
considerable progress was made in the formula-
tion of revised and new draft conventions. The
Seventeenth International Red Cross Conference
which took place at Stockholm August 20-30, 1948,
and in which 49 governments and 51 national Red
Cross societies participated, offered an opportunity
for continuance of these discussions on a some-
what broader scale, and represented another step-
ping-stone toward the ultimate objective — the
formal signing by governments of new conven-
tions.
The United States sent a Delegation to the
Stockholm conference which included Government
representatives from the Department of State, the
three military services, the Department of Justice,
' The two Geneva conventions of 1929 relative to tlie
treatment of prisoners of war and tlie wounded and sick,
and the Hague convention of 1907 relative to maritime
warfare (commonly referred to as the hospital ships
convention).
^For an account of this meeting by Albert E. Clatten-
burg, Jr., see Bulletin of June 22, 1947, p. 1205.
464
and the Post Office Department. In addition,
members of the American Red Cross delegation to
the conference participated in the convention re-
vision discussions. Basil O'Connor, president of
the American Red Cross, served as chairman of
both delegations. While there were many other
matters of interest to the Red Cross world before
the conference, the United States Government
Delegation confined its activities almost entirely
to the work of the Legal Commission, which was
charged with the responsibility for reviewing and
making recommendations witli respect to the sev-
eral draft conventions under considei\ation. The
working drafts submitted to the conference had i
been prepared by the International Committee J
of the Red Cross on the basis of the recommenda-
tions coming out of the earlier meeting at Geneva.
Thirty governments and 32 Red Cross societies
took part in the work of the Legal Commission,
the first meeting of which took place the morning
of Saturday August 21. On the motion of the
United States, it was agreed to set up immediately
three technical subcommissions to make possible a
detailed study of each of the draft conventions.
The election of subcommission chairmen and other M
organizational details were completed at this
morning session so that the subcommissions were
able to start their deliberations the afternoon of
the same day to consider respectively (I) the
treatment of the sick and wounded and the estab-
lishments devoted to their care including hospital
ships; (II) the treatment of prisoners of war; and
(III) the treatment of civilians.
With the exception of Sunday, these subcommis-
sions met daily through Friday, August 27, and
then returned the following day to a plenary ses-
sion of the Legal Commission for reporting and
obtaining ajjproval of their findings and recom-
mendations. Finally, the accomplishments of the
Legal Commission were formally api:)roved at a
plenary session of the conference on August 30,
the last day of the conference.
In view of the volume of the work entailed in
reviewing article by article each of the draft con-
ventions, it became obvious early in the discussions
tliat if the task before the Legal Commission were
to be accomplished within tlie time allotted, eni-
IJhasis must be placed on obtaining in the subcom-
missions agreement on the substantive text of each
article. This procedure was generally followed.
Considering the large number of governments and
Red Cross societies represented and their varying
Department of State Bulletin
intpiTsts. the degree of agreement reached was
remarkable.
Substantial portions of the United States draft
position on all four of the conventions were ac-
cepted as presented. This position had been
formulated by the Interdepartmental Prisoners
of War Committee in whose work the representa-
tives of the Departments of State, Army, Navy,
Air Force, Justice, Treasury, Post Office, and the
American Ketl Cross had participated in prejiara-
tion for this meeting. The only major point on
which the United States recommendation did not
prevail was in connection with the discussion in
Subcommission I concerning the status to be ac-
corded doctors, chaplains, and medical corps men
attached to the armed forces, if they fall into the
hands of the enemy. Opposition was encountered
to the United States position that such personnel
be treated as i:)risoners of war. The opposition
based its stand primarily on traditional grounds,
holding that the language of the present conven-
tion which states that if captured such personnel
"shall not be treated as prisoners of war"', should
be retained; that to do otherwise would be a step
backward and would have the effect of placing a
stigma on medical personnel. Additionally the
fear was expressed that the proposed change might
adversely affect recruitment of doctors for the
armed forces. In supporting its position the
United States Delegation stressed the following
considerations: (1) that practical experience has
shown it to be administratively impossible to ex-
empt such personnel from prisoners-of-war status,
and consequently, to endeavor to do so would only
invite violations; (2) that by giving such personnel
the status of prisoners of war they are thereby
accorded fuller protection under the conventions
than they might otherwise receive; and (3) that
medical and spiritual services rendered by such
personnel are more than ever necessary in circum-
stances of capitivity in ministering to the need of
their comrades, and if they were to share the same
lot it would serve as a morale builder for their own
men. In addition, the United States Delegation
made it clear that it was not recommending the
detention of such personnel as prisoners of war
indefinitely or in numbers greater than the situa-
tion warranted, but on the other hand it strongly
believed that a detaining power should have the
right for practical as well as humanitarian reasons
to detain a sufficient number of captured doctors,
chaplains, and medical corps men to insure ade-
quate care for wounded and sick prisoners of war.
The United States Delegation maintained that all
such pei-sonnel not being used for this purpose
should be repatriated promptly, that the profes-
sional status of those detained should be recog-
nized and respected, and that the detaining power
under the convention should provide adequate
Ocfober 10, 7948
ACTIVITIES AND DEVELOPMENTS
facilities, supplies, and equipment for their use
in caring for the wounded and sick.
Although it is unfortunate that agreement on
this point could not be reached at this conference,
it is apparent that the objective of the proponents
of both views is basically the same, that is, to obtain
the maximum amount of protection for this cate-
gory of personnel while at the same time providing
for the adequate care of the wounded and sick.
Consequently, it is confidently hoped that a sat-
isfactory formula acceptable to both sides can be
found without too much difficulty in subsequent
discussions of representatives of the interested
governments.
Foremost among the revisions supported by the
United States which were concurred in by the con-
ference were the following: (1) a complete i-e-
wording of the article concerning food which, in
essence, provides that the food ration of prisoners
of war shall be sufficient in quantity, quality, and
variety to keep prisoners in good health, and pre-
vent loss of weight or the development of nutri-
tional deficiencies; (2) a new and simplified for-
mula regarding the employment of prisoners of
war which among other things prohibits their use
for mine clearance and disposal work ; (3) prompt
repatriation of prisoners of war after the cessation
of hostilities ; (4) a provision permitting transfers
of prisoners of war among allies provided the re-
ceiving government is a party to the convention,
and placing on both governments involved in the
transfer equal responsibility in seeing that the
treatment received by prisoners of war following
their transfer is in accordance with the terms of
the convention; (5) the extension of the applica-
tion of the prisoners of war and civilian conven-
tions to civil wars provided the dissident party
agrees for its part reciprocally to apply the terms
of those conventions; (G) definition of the con-
ditions which must be met by partisan forces if
they ai'e to be accorded treatment as prisoners of
war and entitled to protection of that convention ;
and (7) improved identification markings for hos-
pital ships including night lighting.
While none of the decisions reached at this con-
ference are formally binding upon the participat-
ing governments, the degree of agreement reached
through open discussion on certain of the more
contentious articles augers well for the future. It
is recognized that much additional work lies ahead,
but it is now believed by those in the Government
who have been closest to the problem that, as a
result of the progress made to date, further pre-
paratory meetings on the subject are unnecessary
and would serve only to delay matters. It is hoped
therefore that the next step will be the convocation
early next year of a formal diplomatic conference
of governments for the purpose of final drafting
and the signing of new conventions.
465
ACTIVITIES AND DBVBLOPMENTS
Representatives to Weights and
Measures Conference
[Released to the press September 30]
The Department of State announced on Septem-
ber 30 that the United States will be represented
at the Ninth General Conference of the Interna-
tional Bureau of Weights and Measures scheduled
to be held at Paris and Sevres, France, October
12-21, 1918, by Dr. Edward U. Condon, Director
of the National Bureau of Standards, U.S. De-
partment of Commerce, and Dr. Eugene C. Crit-
tenden, Associate Director of the National Bureau
of Standards.
This Conference is being held under the pro-
visions of the treaty known as "the convention of
the meter" which was signed at Pai'is on May
20, 1875, and to which the United States Govern-
ment is a party. This treaty provided for an or-
ganization of three parts : the International Com-
mittee, the General Conference, and the Inter-
national Bureau of Weights and Measures. This
organization is responsible for all joint work of
adhering countries on the problems of metrology.
The meetings of the General Conference are
held at six-year intervals, for the purpose of deal-
ing with mattei-s of international agreement af-
fecting measures of length and weight, electrical
measurements, temperature measurements, and
units of photometric measurement. The meeting
scheduled for October 1939 was postponed owing
to the outbreak of war; consequently, since the
last meeting was held in 1933, the conference has
an unusually important agenda of topics to con-
sider.
The National Bureau of Standards has been in
charge of important technical jireparatory work
of the Conference in earlier meetings of specialized
committees meeting in advance of the General
Conference.
Reports to be considered at the Conference in-
clude the results of recent international compari-
sons of the national prototype meter bars and the
national prototype kilograms, standardization of
the use of wave lengths of light as a means of
precision length measurement, jiroblems con-
cerned with the adoption of the absolute system
of electrical units for general use, adoption of a
new definition of the unit of light intensity, re-
vision of the international temperature scale, and
other matters related to the fundamental basis
of precise measurements as used in science and
industry.
Struggle for Human Rights — Conlinxied from page 460
to impugn, to undermine, and to destroy the lib-
erty and independence of peoples. Such propa-
ganda poses to all peoples the issue whether to
doubt their heritage of rights and therefore to
compromise the principles by which they live, or
try to accept the challenge, redouble their vigi-
lance, and stand steadfast in the struggle to main-
tain and enlarge human freedoms.
People who continue to be denied the respect to
which they are entitled as human beings will not
acquiesce forever in such denial.
The Charter of the United Nations is a guiding
beacon along the way to the achievement of human
rights and fundamental freedoms throughout the
world. The inunediate test is not only the extent
to which human rights and freedoms have already
been achieved, but the direction in which the world
is moving. Is there a faithful compliance with
the objectives of the Charter if some countries con-
tinue to curtail human rights and freedoms in-
stead of to promote the universal respect for an
observance of human rights and freedoms for all
as called for by the Charter?
The place to discuss the issue of human rights
is in the forum of the United Nations. The
United Nations has been set up as the common
meeting ground for nations, where we can con-
sider together our mutual problems and take ad-
vantage of our differences in experience. It is
inlierent in our firm attachment to democracj' and
freedom that we stand always ready to use the
fundamental democratic procedures of honest dis-
cussion and negotiation. It is now as always our
hope that despite the wide differences in approach
we face in the world today, we can with mutual
good faith in the principles of the United Nations
Charter, arrive at a common basis of under-
standing.
AVe are here to join the meetings of this great
international Assembly which meets in your
beautiful capital city of Paris. Freedom for the
individual is an inseparable pai't of the cherished
traditions of France. As one of the Delegates
from the United States I pray Almighty God that
we may win another victory here for the rights
and freedoms of all men.
466
Department of Stale Bulletin
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Agreement Between the United States and the United Kingdom
Proposing International Committee on Scrap
[Released to the press October 1]
Annoiuicenient was made on October 1 by the
Department of State of the signing in Washing-
ton of an agreement with the United Kingdom
I^roposing the establishment of an international
committee to recommend allocations of iron and
steel scrap available for export from Erp coun-
tries including the Bizonal Area of Germany.
The agreement also provides for the immediate
allocation from the Bizonal Area of 500,000 tons
of scrap each to the United States and to the
United Kingdom and 225,000 tons for distribu-
tion to other deficit countries at uniform prices to
be established by the U.S.-U.K. military gover-
nors. It is hoped that the total quantity to be
shipped from the Bizonal Area in the next 12
months will be about 2,000,000 tons or more. All
scrap shipped from Germany will be in excess of
the legitimate requirements of the Bizone steel in-
dustry. Much of the scrap available in the Bizonal
Area consists of rubble material from wrecked
industrial plants, railway installations, abandoned
ships, etc.
Since the end of the war little commercial scrap
has been imjiorted to the United States from Ger-
many. As a result of the recent currency reform
and the signing of this agreement, it is expected
that Germany will now make a substantial con-
tribution toward relieving the serious scrap short-
age existing in this country as well as in Europe.
The text of the agreement which follows was
embodied in an exchange of notes on September
30, 1948, between the two Governments.
AGREEMENT ON FERROUS SCRAP
I. Proposal to OEEC Countries on Allocation
Machinery
A proposal will be put before the members of the
Organization of European Economic Cooperation ttiat an
ad hoc Committee be established in Paris consisting of
representatives of Oeec members and the United States
as a full member. It is proposed that this Committee, al-
though outside the jurisdiction of the Oeec Council,
.should work in clcjse cooperation with it and its com-
mittees. The functions of the Committee shall be to
make recommendations to the Governments of the
countries participating in the Oeec, including the Bi-
zonal Area of Germany and the French Zone, on the dis-
tribution of scrap exports from those countries. Final
decisions with respect to exports will be made, however,
by the Governments of the exporting countries. In the
Bizonal .\rea decisions will be made by the US and UK
Military Governors suljject to the provisions of Article
III of this Agreement.
II. Instructions to Military Governors
Identical instructions shall be .sent to the US and UK
Military Governors in Germany as follows:
1. It is the desire of the Governments of the United
States and United Kingdom that the total collection and
exi)ort of scrap from the Bizonal Area, after providing
for the legitimate requirements of the German steel in-
dustry, be maximized.
Initial Autliori:ntio>is Outside of Future Allocations
2. The existing authorization (approved May 1.'?, 1948)
of 000,000 tons (namely 200,000 tons to the United States,
.300.0(X) tons to the United Kingdom and 100,000 tons to
other countries) is confirmed.
H. In addition there will be the following supple-
nieiitarv authorizations :
(a) 100,000 tons to the United States, to bring the United
States share to parity with the above-mentioned United
Kingdom share of 300.000 tons ;
(b) 75,000 tons to the United Kingdom as a final ship-
ment of booty scrap without payment ;
(c) 7.5,000 tons to the United States, to correspond to (b)
above, but not free of payment.
4. The above total authorizations of 375,000 tons to
the United States, 375,000 tons to the United Kingdom
and 100,000 tons to other countries shall not be charged to
future allocations, and the two Military Governors shall
implement these authorizations immediately.
Export Availahilities from Bizonal Area
5. The US and UK Military Governors shall inform
the ad hoc Committee, promptly after its establishment
and from time to time thereafter, of the anticipated volume
of scrap exports from the Bizonal Area. It is hoixnl that
this figure for the year ending October 1, 1949, will be
1,000,000 tons or more, over and above the 850,000 tons
authorized above outside of future allocation.?.
Interim Authorizations Chargeahle Against Future
Allocations
6. As an advance against contemplated early allocations
within the framework of the regular allocating procedure,
there shall also be authorized a further 12.5,000 tons to the
United States, 125,000 tons to the United Kingdom and
125,000 tons to other countries, such quantities to be
charged against future allocations. The two Military
Governors shall also implement these authorizations
immediately.
7. In the event that no recommendation is made by the
ad hoc Committee before October 31, 1948, further interim
authorizations shall be made on that date and on the last
Ocfober 10, 7948
467
THE RECORD OF THE WBBK
day of each month thereafter in the ratio of 2-2-1 for the
United States, the United Kingdom and other countries,
respectively, until such time as the regular allocation
procedure is in operation.
Impletuetitation of Allocations
8. In implementing this Agreement, the US and UK
Military Governors shall determine among other matters :
(a) whether to implement allocations by control over
contracts or control over exports or both ;
(b) vfhether, if control over exports is adopted, the
Joint Export-Import Agency may approve contracts w'ithin
agreed limitations in excess of the total outstanding alloca-
tions of any country ;
(c) whether, in appropriate cases, contracts shall pro-
vide for delivery of scrap within specified short periods in
order to prevent undue tying up of allocations in individual
long-term contracts ;
(d) whether and in what manner to instruct Jeia to
take precautions to satisfy itself as to the competence of
contracting parties to implement the terms of the contract.
Effective Date of Foregoing Authorizations
9. All scrap exported subsequent to the date of this
Agreement shall be charged against the foregoing authori-
zations.
Booty Scrap
10. There shall be no further exports of booty scrap
after the date of this Agreement except for the 75,000 tons
authorized under paragraph II 3 (b) above.
Price
11. The price of scrap with appropriate differentials for
loading points, quality of scrap, etc., shall be uniform for
all foreign buyers, and shall be set from time to time by
the US and UK Military Governors under such procedures
as they may establish.
Special Measures
12. If the US and UK Military Governors consider that
adequate quantities of exportable scrap cannot be obtained
without special measures, they are authorized to approve
the recovery of scrap by such measures. Scrap recovery
under such arrangements, if approved, may be outside
regular allocations but subject to such special allocations
as the US and UK Military Governors may determine
after consultation with the ad hoc Committee.
Direct Recovery of Scrap
13. Nothing in this Agreement shall preclude operations
by non-German organizations for the recovery of scrap
from disarmament and other sources not readily accessible
to German scrap merchants provided such operations are
carried on in a manner acceptable to the US and UK Mili-
tary Governors and that all recoveries of scrap (other
than the 75,000 tons of booty scrap mentioned above) are
paid for at prices established by the US and UK Military
Governors and are within either the regular or the special
allocations determined by the US and UK Military
Governors.
VS-UK Scrap Control Authority
14. The US and UK Military Governors shall set up
a US-UK scrap control authority in which each shall
appoint a coordinator to supervise and control the collec-
tion and export of ferrous scrap. This control authority
shall be subject, through whatever organization the Mili-
tary Governors may determine, to the jurisdiction of the
Bipartite Board. .
III. Reservation of Fusion Agreement
Nothing in this Agreement shall be deemed to modify
the arrangements set forth in the Fusion Agreement of
December 2, 1946 as amended liy the Agreement of Decem-
ber 17, 1947. Questions which may arise with respect to
scrap exports under the present Agreement wUl be re-
solved as contemplated in paragraph 5 of the Agreement
of December 17, 1947, having regard also to the provisions
of paragraph 3 (a) of the latter Agreement.
Policy on Commercial Fishing in Pacific Island Trust Territory
JOINT AGENCY APPROVAL
[Released to the press September 29]
The Department of State announced on Sep-
tember 29 the policy of this Government relating
to commercial fishing operations in the United
States Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands. The
policy was approved by the Departments of State,
Army, Navy, Air Force, and Interior as a guide
to the administration of the Trust Territory and
will have the effect of opening the area to com-
mercial fishing. Rich fishery resources, particu-
larly tuna, are available in the waters around this
Territory in an area as large as the continental
United States. The Territory, itself, contains
scarcely as much land area as the State of Dela-
ware. Several commercial fishing companies have
shown interest in beginning fishing operations im-
468
mediately. It is possible that an industry can be
built on the fishery resources that will eventually
pay a considerable part of the administrative cost
of the Territory.
Fishing operations will be under the strict con-
trol of the High Commissioner of the Trust Terri-
tory in order that the welfare of the native inhabi-
tants can be safeguarded and the harvesting of the
resources can be undertaken along adequate con-
servation lines.
Fishing opportunities will be equally available
to the fishiiig enterprises of all nations except that
the High Commissioner will have discretion in
excluding enterprises for reasons of security or for
the purpose of carrying out the obligation to pro-
mote the advancement of the inhabitants.
Deparfmenf of State Bulletin
TEXT OF POLICY DIRECTIVE
[Released to the press September 29]
A. With a view to cooperating in the effort to
increase world food production and in order to
improve the local economy and to obtain informa-
tion needed for conservation of fishing resoui'ces
of the area, the territorial waters surrounding the
Trust Territory, except those parts closed for
security reasons, should be open to the commercial
fishing enterprises of all nations on a non-discrimi-
natory basis, except that whenever a country denies
rights with respect to fishing and ancillary opera-
tions needed and desired by the local inhabitants
of the Trust Territory, the Government of the
Trust Territory may, if necessary to obtain those
rights, deny that country rights in the Trust
Territory.
B. The administering agency, in collaboration
■with the Fish and Wildlife Service of the Depart-
ment of the Interior, shoidd conduct research as
soon as possible with a view to establishing con-
servation regulations. Fishing grounds within
the territorial waters found to be necessary for the
local economy should be reserved exclusively for
the use and benefit of the local inhabitants.
C. Immediate steps should be taken to foster the"
development of aquatic resources, including locally
owned and operated commercial fishing, bait cul-
ture, and ancillary commercial industries.
D. With respect to canning and other fish-proc-
essing industries, the administering agency should
give priority to the development of locally owned
and operated enterprises.
E. The administering agency may. under such
conditions, as may be agreed upon by the interested
departments, grant permission for the establish-
ment and maintenance of shore facilities to out-
side canneries and other fish-processing industries
provided that, in determining whether such per-
mission shall be gi-anted and in establishing the
conditions under which such permission is to be
granted, the interests of the local inhabitants shall
be paramount.
F. Annual licenses should be required of all
commercial fishing vessels operating within terri-
torial limits or operating out of local ports.
Licenses to nonlocal fishing vessels should be
granted on the understanding that they are sub-
ject to revocation or modification wherever se-
curity interests or the interests of the inhabitants
so require. Licensees should be required to fur-
nish such statistical information regarding fishing
operations as the administering agency, in col-
laboration with the Fish and Wildlife Service,
shall deem appropriate.
G. Local inhabitants should be employed in the
October 10, 1948
complement of a fishing vessel or canning or other
ancillary industry licensed for operation in a
Trust Territory to the maximum extent consonant
with efficient operations. Regulations should be
issued prescribing minimum and nondiscrimina-
tory wages and standards of working conditions
and otherwise protecting locally hired personnel.
The employment of noidocal personnel in shore
establishments should be subject to regulations by
the government of the Trust Territory.
H. Except as provided in paragraph A above,
and subject to the right of the High Commissioner
of the Trust Territory of the Pacific, within estab-
lished governmental policy to exclude any indi-
vidual or group of individuals for reason of se-
curity, and the obligation to promote the advance-
ment of the inhabitants, the principle of nondis-
crimination on the basis of nationality shall be ob-
served in the implementation of the foregoing
principles and shall apply to all aspects of com-
mercial fishing and ancillary operations and the
regulation thereof in the Trust Territory.
Two U.S. Citizens Held Incommunicado in
Hungary Released
[Released to the press September 27]
American citizens Paul Ruedemann and George
Bannantine, president and technical adviser re-
spectively of Maort. an American-owned affiliate
in Hungary of the Standard Oil Company (New
Jersey ) , have been released from detention by the
Hungarian authorities following vigorous United
States representations both at Washington and at
Budapest to the Hungarian Government and, ac-
companied by an officer of the American Legation
at Budapest, arrived in Vienna at 11 : 30 a.m. on
September 26.
Mr. Ruedemann and Mr. Bannantine were taken
into custody by the Hungarian police on the night
of September 18 and held incommunicado until
their release on September 25. The United States
Government considers the allegations made against
these two men by the Hungarian authorities and
by the officially controlled Hungarian press and
radio involving "economic sabotage" were wholly
unfounded. These arrests followed a long series
of encroachments by the Hungarian authorities on
the rights of Maort, wliich have now cidminated
in the seizure of the company under a decree issued
by order of tlie Cabinet Council on September 24
and published in the Official Gazette on Septem-
ber 25.
469
THE RECORD OF THE WBEK
Economic Cooperation Agreement
With Portugal Signed
Statement hy Acting Secretary Lovett
[Released to the press September 29]
A bilateral agreement in connection with the
European Recovery Program was signed with the
Portuguese Government on September 28 at Lisbon
by Ambcassador MacVeagh and the Portuguese
Foreign Minister.' Although the Portuguese Gov-
ernment is receiving no financial aid under the
European Recovery Program, they have given
their firm support to the program from the very
beginning. The signing of the Erp agreement
and the cordial remarks of the Portuguese Foreign
Minister on that occasion have shown again the
spirit of good will and cooperation of the Portu-
guese Government in participating in the huge
task of European reconstruction.
Department of State To Have Full Direction
of Voice of America Programs
[Released to the press September 30]
Preparation and broadcasting of those Voice of
America programs which had previously been
handled by the National Broadcasting Company
and Columbia Broadcasting System under con-
tract with the Department of State, were under-
taken by the Department beginning October 1.
In making the announcement, George V. Allen,
Assistant Secretary of State for public affairs, said
' For text of the agreement, see Department of State
press release 788 of Sept. 29, 1948. For text of a similar
agreement witii Italy, see BtTtxETiN of July 11, 1948, p. 38.
Identical notes between the two Governments were
exchanged relating to niost-favored-nation treatment for
areas under military occupation. With the exception of
the following paragraph this exchange Is similar to the
understanding with the U.K. which was printed in the
BiiLLETiN of July 11, 1948, p. 43 :
"1. For such time as the Government of the United
States of America participates In the occupation or con-
trol of any areas in western Germany, the Free Terri-
tory of Trieste, the Government of Portugal will apply
to the merchandise trade of such area the provisions
relating to the most-favored nation treatment of the
merchandise trade of the United States of America set
forth in the Commercial Agreement signed June 28, 1910,
or for such time as the Governments of the United States
of America and Portugal may both be contracting parties
to the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade, dated
October 30, 1947, the provisions of that Agreement, as now
or hereafter amended, relating to the most-favored-nation
treatment of such trade. It is understood that the under-
taking in this paragraph relating to the application of the
most-favored-nation provisions of the Commercial Agree-
ment shall be subject to the exceptions recognized in the
General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade permitting de-
partures from the application of most-favored-nation
treatment; provided that nothing in this sentence shall be
construed to require compliance with the procedures sjieci-
fied in the General Agreement with regard to the applica-
tion of such exceptions."
470
the transfer of functions was effected under agree-
ment between the Department and the radio net-
works following their decision to withdraw from
programming activities in the field of interna-
tional broadcasting.
The two networks were preparing and broad-
casting Voice of America programs in English,
Spanish, Portuguese, French, Italian, German,
Annamese, Malayan, and Siamese.
The Department's International Broadcasting
Division, which has charge of Voice of America
operations, will continue to lease short-wave trans-
mitting facilities of private companies, including
those of NBC and CBS.
The broadcast output to Latin America was
reduced October 1 to 2 hours and 45 minutes daily
from the previous 4 hours and 45 minutes' sched-
ule. Daily Far Eastern programs of 15 minutes
each in Annamese, Malayan, and Siamese, which
had been prepared by CBS up to October 1, were
discontinued. European schedules will remain
virtually intact with broadcasts continuing in Bul-
garian, Czech, English, French. German, Greek,
Hungarian. Italian, Polish, Rumanian. Russian,
Serbo-Croat, Slovak, Slovene, and Spanish.
Broadcasts will continue to the Far East in
Chinese, Korean, Russian, and English, and to
Latin America in English, Portuguese, and
Spanish.
The Voice of America will increase certain exist-
ing broadcasts and will inaugurate programs in
additional languages as soon as an adequate staff
can be recruited. The output to Europe was given
added impetus October 3 when the relay of Voice
of America programs through the British Broad-
casting Corporation facilities was increased from
9 to 101/2 hours daily.
Ambassador Butler To Represent President at
Cuban Inauguration
[Released to the press October 1]
Robert Butler, United States Ambassador to
Cuba, has been named Special Ambassador to
represent the President at the inauguration of Dr.
Carlos Prio Socarras, President-elect of Cuba, on
October 10, 1948. Members of his special mission
will be Admiral Louis E. Denfeld. United States
Navy, Lt. General Matthew B. Ridgway, United
States Army, Major General Willis F. Hale,
United States Air Force, and officers of the United
States Embassy at Habana.
Air Transport Agreement With Bolivia
[Released to the press September 30]
The Department of State on September 30 an-
nounced that an air-transport agreement between
the Governments of Bolivia and the United States
was signed in La Paz on September 29, 1948.
Department of Sfofe BuWet'in
Tlie ajjreement is of tlie so-callod Benmula type,
upon wliicli is based the great niajority of the 3G
bihiteral air ajjreements of the United States. The
a<rreenient jirants trallie rights to United States
air lines at La Paz. C'ochabamba, Santa Cruz.
Robore. Oruro, and Puerto Suarez. A route for
Bolivian air lines is to be agreed upon when
Bolivia is ready to operate a service to the United
States.
Complete text of the agreement will be an-
nounced later.
U.S. Vessels Sailingto Arctic in Support of
Canad!an-U. S. Joint Weather Station Program
[Released to the press September 28]
It was announced in Ottawa and Washington on
June 4 that three U.S. Navy and Coast Guard ves-
sels, with Canadian representatives aboard, would
shortly be sailing to Canadian Arctic waters in
support of the joint weather-station program
which is being carried out by the Governments of
Canada and the United States.
These three sliips — The U.S.S. Edhto, icebreaker,
the U.S.C.G. Eastwind., icebreaker, and the U.S.S.
Wyandot, cargo vessel, have now returiied to
Boston.
During the summer they resnpplied the joint
weather stations established in 1947 at Eureka
Sound, EUesmere Island, and at Resolute Bay,
Cornwallis Island. They also made a preliminary
investigation of the possibility of establishing a
further joint station in the vicinity of Winter
Harbour. Melville Island. In the course of recon-
noitering a site for an additional joint station on
Ellesmere Island, the Edhto and the Eastwind
managed to reach, via Robeson Channel, the Cape
Sheridan area at the north of that island. This
area in the extreme north of Canada was the scene
of the activities of the British explorer, Sir George
Xares. in 1875-1876 and of the subsequent activi-
ties of the United States explorer. Admiral Peary,
in 1905-1906. The supply mission came across
Xares' and Peary's cairn and, as is usual on north-
ern expeditions, Peary's notes found in the cairn
were replaced by appropriate documents. The
Edhto and the Emtmind returned to the Atlantic
coast through Fury and Hecla Strait, between the
Melville Peninsula and Baffin Lsland.
The ships which participated in the supply mis-
sion were under the command of Capt. George J.
Dufek, U.S.X., embarked in the Edisto. The
Edisto was commanded by Commander E. C. Fol-
ger. U.S.N. ; the Wyandot by Capt. J. D. Dickey,
U.S.X. : and the Eastwind by Capt. J. A. Flynn,
U.S.C.G. Among the principal Canadian repre-
sentatives who participated in the supply mission
were J. Ivor Griffiths of the Meteorological Divi-
sion, Department of Transport, and Capt. Albani
Ocfober JO, 7948
THE RECORD OF THE V/EIK
Chouinard, master of the Department of Transport
icebreaker Sau/rel.
Records of Nares and Peary Canadian
Arctic Expeditions Found
[Keleased to the press September 30]
Announcement was made on September 28 of the
recent return to Boston of the ships which partici-
pated in the resupply of the Canada-United States
weather stations in the Canadian Arctic.
While near Cape Sheridan, on the north coast of
Ellesmere Island, a landing party from the supply
mission located a cairn which contained records of
two famous Arctic expeditions. The first was that
of Sir George Xares, of the Royal Xavy, whose
ship, the Afert, sailed north, in 1875, between
Canada and Greenland, to Cape Sheridan. In
July, 1876, after exploring the Ellesmere coast
westward to Cape Alfred Ernest, Nares' expedi-
tion left a record of its activities in a cairn near
,Cape Sheridan. While on a polar expedition,
Admiral Robert E. Peary, the U.S. explorer, subse-
quently visited the same region in 1905-1906 and,
as usual among Arctic explorers, he opened Nares'
cairn, took the original note, left a copy of it in the
cairn, and added a record of his own activities.
When at Cape Sheridan, the recent supply mis-
sion again opened the cairn, removed the notes in
it and left copies of them together with a note on
the 1948 visit.
The texts of the notes brought back this summer
are given below :
Copy of Original Document Left by Admiral
Rohert E. Peary at Cape Sheridan
Cape Sheridan, tSeptcmher 5th, 1905.
The Peary Arctic Club's Ship "Roosevelt"
arrived here from New York at 7. a.m. and made
fast to the ice foot under the point of the cape
awaiting the turn of the tide to proceed to Cape
Hecla.
Tlie Roosevelt left New York July 16th., Sidney,
Cape Breton, July 2('>tli, arrived Cape York Au-
gust 7th, and left Etah August I7th. Her last
stopping place was the icefoot south of Cape Union
which she left at 3 : 30 this morning.
Personally visited the Alert's Cairn at Floberg
Beach and took there from Alert's Record, copy of
which accompanies this. Roster of the Roosevelt's
Company is also enclosed.
R. E. Peart, U.S.N.
Com.manding the Expedition
Copy of E.M.S. Alert's Record Left in 1876
Arctic Expedition. 25th Jidy-1876
H.M.S. "Alert", at Floe-berg Beach (Lat. 82° 27'
North. Long. 61° 22' West)
H.M.S. "Alert" wintered off this coast: inside
the grounded ice 1875-1876. H.M.S. "Discovery,"
471
THE RECORD OF THE WBEK
her consort, passed the same winter in a well shel-
tered harbour in Lat. 81° 44' North, Long. 65° 5'
West.
The sledge crews after a very severe journey
over the ice succeeding in attaining Lat. 83° 20'
30" N. No land has been sighted to the North.
Another division explored the coast line to the
Northward and Westward to Lat: 82° 23' N.
Long : 84° 56' W. Cape Columbia the northermost
Cape being in Lat 83° 7' N. Long. 70° 30' W.
Sledge parties from the "Discovery" have ex-
plored the Greenland Shore for some distance to
the Northward and Eastward, but the result of the
examination is not yet known to me.
Scurvy attacked nearly all the men employed in
sledge traveling. Two deaths have occurred :
Niels. C. Peterson from the effects of a severe
frostbite (which necessitated a part of each foot
being amputated) followed by exhaustion and
scorbutic taint: — and George Porter, Gunner
K.M.A. who died from scurvy and general debility
when absent on a sledge journey ; and was buried
on the floe in Lat, 82° 41' N.
The ice in the Polar Sea broke up on the 20th
July, — when it permits us to move, the "Alert" will
proceed south and join company with the "Dis-
covery"; both ships will then sail for Port Foulke,
and most probably thence to England.
G. S. Nares,
Captain R.N.
Commanding Arctic Expedition
Control of Foreign Assets in U.S. Ended
[Released to the press by the Treasury Department September 30]
Secretary Snyder announced on September 30
the close of more than eight years of activity by the
Treasury in the field of controlling foreign assets
in the United States. The program started by the
Treasury Department almost a decade ago is to be
carried through to its ultimate liquidation by the
Department of Justice pursuant to a Presidential
transfer of jurisdiction.
Plans for this transfer, which is effective as of
midnight, September 30, were made by the inter-
ested departments in February and were at that
time approved by the National Advisory Council
and communicated to the Congress. Accordingly,
the Treasury Dej^artment regulations setting
forth the organization and procedures of Foreign
Funds Control, and other related regulations
promulgated in 1942, are being revoked. These
regulations are being superseded by new regula-
tions similar in scope issued by the Department of
Justice.
Treasury participation in this field began with
the freezing order of April 1940, issued at the time
of the German invasion of Norway and Denmark.
The scope of the order was gradually expanded
until by 1941 it covered China and Japan as well
472
as all the countries of continental Europe, except
Turkey. A 1941 census revealed that the Treasury
Department was then controlling foreign assets in
the United States worth more than eight billion
dollars.
A primary aim of the freezing control was to
prevent nationals of the invaded countries of Eu-
rope from being despoiled and forced under duress
to transfer to the Axis powers their claims to
American assets. The freezing controls also served
in many ways as a weapon of economic warfare to
hamper the financial and commercial activities of
our World War II enemies. 1
The elimination of restrictions on ti'ansactions I
and the gradual unblocking of foreign assets be-
gan shortly after the end of actual hostilities. The
elimination of these controls has been handled so
as to maintain the major objectives for which they
were instituted. Unblocking of property has pro-
ceeded on a basis which has preserved the ability
of the United States to vest assets actually belong- ,
ing to enemies. The procedures now in effexit for %
unblocking foreign assets in the United States '
have also been developed with a view toward assist-
ing in the imi^lementation of the European Recov-
ery Program.
I
Proclamation on Revision of a
ILO Convention |
The President on August 30, 1048, issued his
proclamation of the Final Articles Revision Con-
vention, 1946, which was adopted at the Twenty-
ninth Session of the International Labor Confer-
ence at Montreal on October 9, 1940. That con-
vention is designed to revise partially the conven-
tions adopted by the General Conference of the
International Labor Organization at its first 28
sessions for the purpose of making provision for
the future discharge of certain chancery functions
entrusted by those conventions to the Secretary-
General of the League of Nations and introducing
therein certain further amendments consequential
upon the dissolution of the League of Nations
and the amendment of the Constitution of the
International Labor Organization. The Final »
Articles Revision Convention, 1946, entered into 1
force with respect to the United States on June
24, 1948, the date of deposit with the International
Labor Organization of the instrvnnent of ratifica-
tion thereof on the part of the United States.
The Opportunity of the National Commission <
The Assistant Secretary for public affairs,
George V. Allen, made an address before the i
UNESCO National Commission meeting which was
held in Boston on September 27. For the text of
Mr. Allen's address on the opportunity of the
National Commission, see Department of State
press release 777 of September 27, 1948.
Department of State Bulletin
Freedom of Information
STATEMENT BY SECRETARY MARSHALLi
Tlie theme of National Newspaper Week, "Your
Riglit To Know Is The Key To All Your Liber-
ties'", emjihasizes a fundamental freedom which
our Government is activelj' seeking to encourage
throughout the world — freedom of the people to
know the truth.
Half of the World's population lives under some
form of censorship today. Denied access to the
facts, people in countries where censorship and
government control of the press exist can base
their judgments only on half-truths or false in-
formation fed to them by those in control. Cen-
sorship and press control are the first and most
important steps in the subjugation of people by a
dictator.
Americans should keep constantly in mind that
no people have lost their liberties so long as their
press remains free.
It is also a vital concern of ours to see that the
barriers to the flow of information are reduced
and, as far as possible, eliminated. This is an es-
sential to the world peace which we are seeking.
Our Government is making every effort,
through the United Nations, to reduce these bar-
riers between countries. In the Commission on
Human Rights, in the Economic and Social Coun-
cil, in the General Assembly, at the recent Confer-
ence at Geneva on Freedom of Information, and in
Unesco, we have pressed for active considera-
tion of freedom of information during the past 18
months. Progress has been difficult, yet it is
encouraging.
A heavy responsibility rests with the press and
other organs of information to aid in this impor-
tant work. In their best traditions, it is for them,
in the language of the United Nations, "to seek
the truth without prejudice and report the facts
without malicious intent".
Surplus Property Agreements on Educational Exchange With
United Kingdom and New Zealand Signed
United Kingdom
The United Kingdom signed on September 22
an agreement under the Fulbright act with the
United States, putting into oj^eration the i^rogram
of educational exchanges authorized by Public
Law 584, Seventy-ninth Congress. The signing
took place in London, with Foreign Minister
Ernest Bevin representing the United Kingdom
and U.S. Ambassador Lewis Douglas representing
the United States. The agreement was signed in
the presence of Senator J. W. Fulbright of Arkan-
sas, sponsor of the act.
The agi-eement provides for a United States
Educational Commission in the United Kingdom
to assist in the administration of the educational
program financed from certain funds resulting
from the sale of surplus property to that country.
The present agreement provides for an annual
progi-am of the equivalent of $1,000,000 in British
pounds for certain educational purposes. These
l^urposes include the financing of "studies, re-
search, instruction, and other educational activi-
ties of or for citizens of the United States of
America in schools and institutions of higher
October 10, 7948
learning located in the LTnited Kingdom or the
colonial dependencies, or of the citizens of the
United Kingdom and colonies in United States
schools and institutions of higher learning located
outside the continental United States . . . in-
cluding payment for transportation, tuition, main-
tenance and other expenses incident to scholastic
activities; or ftirnishing transportation for citi-
zens of the United Kino:dom and colonies who de-
sire to attend United States schools and institu-
tions of higher learning in the continental United
States . . . whose attendance will not deprive
citizens of the United States of America of an op-
portunity to attend such schools and institutions."
The Commission in the United Kingdom will
consist of 12 members, the honorary cliairman of
which will be the U.S. Ambassador to the United
Kingdom. The members of the Commission will
include 7 citizens of the United States and 5 mein-
bers from the United Kingdom and the colonial
dependencies.
' Made on Oct. 1, 1948, in connection with observance of
National Newspaper Week (Oct. 1-8, 1948), and released
to the ijress on the same date.
473
THE RECORD OF THE WBCK
New Zealand
On September 13 New Zealand also signed an
agreement with the United States, under the Ful-
bright act.
The signing took place in Wellington, with
Prime Minister Peter Fraser representing tlie
Government of New Zealand and American Minis-
ter Robert Scotten representing the United States.
It was the fifth agreement signed under the act,
previous arrangements having been made witli tlie
Governments of China, Burma, the Philippines,
and Greece.
The agreement with the New Zealand Govern-
ment establishes the United States Educational
Foundation in New Zealand to administer certain
funds resulting from the sale of surplus property
to that country, and provides for an annual
program of at" least $115,000 in New Zealand
pounds for certain educational purposes.
The Foundation in New Zealand will have an
eight-man Board of Directors, the honorary chair-
man of which will be the principal officer in charge
of the United States diplomatic mission in New
Zealand. The members of the Board will be three
officers of the U.S. Legation in New Zealand, two
citizens of the United States resident in New Zea-
land, and three nationals of New Zealand, one of
whom shall be prominent in the field of education.
Information about specific opportunities for
American citizens to pursue study, teaching, or
reseai-ch in the two countries will be made public
in the near future. Further inquiries about those
opportunities and requests for application forms
should be addressed to the following three
agencies: Institute of International Education,
2 West 45th Street, New York 19, N. Y. (for
graduate study) ; United States Office of Edu-
cation, Washington 25, D.C. (for teaching in na-
tional elementary and secondary schools) ; and
Conference Board of Associated Research Coun-
cils, 2101 Constitution Avenue, Washington 25,
D.C. (for teaching at the college level, for post-
doctoral research, and for teaching in American
elementary and secondary schools in New Zealand
and the United Kingdom and colonies).
Previous agreements have been signed witli the
Governments of China, Burma, the Philippines,
and Greece.^
Brazilian Cultural Leader Visits U.S.
Joao da Silva Monteiro, President of the Board
of Directors of the Uniao Cultural Brasil-Esta-
dos Unidos, Sao Paulo, Brazil, has arrived in the
United States for a three months' visit under the
travel-grant program of the Department of State.
Mr. Monteiro will observe various aspects of the
' Bulletin of Mar. 21, 1948, p. 388 ; Apr. 11, 1948, p. 488 ;
and May 16, 1948, p. 654.
474
economic and cultural life of this country and
study problems of educational exchange between
Brazil and the United States. Particularly in-
terested in rural life on small farms, he plans to
spend a week on such a farm in New England as
part of his visit here, gathering material for a
report to be published in Brazil on "The Educa-
tion and Pi'ogress of a Country Through Rural
Free Delivery Service".
Mr. Monteiro has been a member of the Board
of Directors of the Uniao Cultural for six years
and has served as president for the past two years.
This cultural center was founded in ID-'JS to foster
better understanding between Brazilians and
North Americans. It currently enrolls over
4,000 students of English, has the largest circulat-
ing library of books in English in Brazil, and
sponsors various cultural programs interpreting
North American and Brazilian cidture.
Brazilian Philosopher Visits U.S. ^
Joao Cruz Costa, professor of philosophy, Uni- I
versity of Sao Paulo, Sao Paulo, Brazil, has ar- 1
rived in Washington to act as Consultant for the '
Library of Congress and observe the work of sev-
eral eastern universities. He is here under the a
grant-in-aid program of the Department of State l|
at the request of the Library of Congress.
He is at present preparing for publication a
study on positivism, a subject on which he is plan-
ning to do research while at the Library of Con-
Visit of Chilean Historian
Dr. Eugenio Pereira Salas, professor of Ameri-
can history at the University of Chile, recently ar-
rived in Washington, where he is to serve as visit-
ing professor of Latin American history at the
American University during the 1948 fall semester
under the travel-grant pi'ogram of the Depai'tment
of State.
Dr. Pereira is the President of the Instituto
Chileno-Norteamericano de Cultura in Santiago.
This organization, a bi-national cultural society
which is assisted by the Department of State, is
devoted to promoting a better luiderstanding be-
tween Chile and this country.
Language Professor To Teach in Haiti
William Leonard Schwartz, associate professor
of Romanic languages at Stanford University, has
left Washington to begin a six months' assignment
as visiting professor of English at the University
of Haiti under the travel-grant program of the
Department of State.
Department of State Bulletin
THE FOREIGN SERVICE
Rules of Precedence Relating to Foreign
Service and Government Officers '
r.y viitiu' of the iiutlioiity vfsted in mo by section 1752
of tlip Hrvised Statutes (22 U. S. C. 182), anil as l'n>si(lent
of tlip United States, and in the interest of the orderly
conduct abroad of the foreign-afl'aii-s functions of the
United States, I hereby prescribe the foUowins rules gov-
erniiig precedence anions officers of the Foreign Service
and oUict>rs or accredited representatives of other Govern-
ment agencies :
1. In the country to which he is accredited, the chief of
the diplomatic mission sliall take precedence over all of-
ficers or accredited representatives of other Executive
departments or establishments.
2. In the al)sence of the titular head of the mission, the
charge d'affaiies ad interim shall take precedence over
all officers or accredited representatives of other Executive
departments or establishments.
.". At a diplomatic mission the ofiHcer who takes charge
in the absence of the chief of mission sliall always take
precedence next in succession to the chief of mission : Pro-
ridrd. That unless the chief of mission is absent, sucli
officer shall, consonant with the hist sentence of section
100 (a) of the Foreign Assistance Act of 1048 (Public
Law 472, SOth Congress), and during the continuance in
force of such Act, take precedence after the chief of
special mission.
4. Military, naval, and air attaches .shall take preced-
ence next in succession after the counselors of embassy or
legation or, at a post where the Department of State has
deemed it unnecessary to assign a counselor, after the
senior secretary. Military, naval, and air attaclK^s shall
take precedence among themselves according to their re-
spective grades and seniority therein.
n. Attach<^s who are not officers of the Foreign Service
and who are not covered by section 4 shall take precedence
with but after military, naval, and air attaches.
G. Officers of the Foreign Service below the rank of
counselor shall take precedence among themselves as the
Secretary of State may direct ; but they shall take preced-
ence after military, naval, and air attaches and attaches
who are not officers of the Foreign Service, except when
the provisions of section 11 hereof are applicable and such
officers of the Foreign Service are also assigned as diplo-
matic officers.
7. Assistant military, naval, and air attaches shall
take precedence next after the lowest ranking second
secretary. At a post to which there is no second secre-
tary assigned, assistant military, naval, and air attache's
shall take precedence as a group among the officers of the
Foreign Service of rank equivalent to second secretaries
as the chief of mission may direct. Assistant military,
naval, and air attach<5s shall take precedence among them-
selves according to their respective grades and seniority
therein.
8. Assistant attaches who are not officers of the Foreign
Service and who are not covered by section 7 shall take
precedence with but after assistant military, naval, and
air attaches.
9. Except as provided herein no extra precedence shall
be conferred upon an Army, Naval, Marine, or Air Force
officer because of his duties as attach^ to a diplomatic
mission,
10. At ceremonies and receptions where the members of
the mission take individual position, and in the lists fur-
nished foreign governments for inclusion In their (lii)lo-
matlc lists, precedence shall follow the ranking indicated
in the preceding sections.
October 70, J 948
11. At ceremonies and receptions where the personnel
of diplomatic missions are present as a body, the chief
of mission, or charg6 d'alTaires ad Interim, accomixinied
by all officers of the Foreign Service Included in the
diplomatic list, shall be followed next by the military,
naval, and air attaches and assistant attaches, and other
attaches and assistant attaches who are not officers of the
Foreign Service, formed as distinct groups In the order
determined by their respective grades and seniority.
12. In international conferences at which the American
delegates possess plenipotentiary powers, the senior coun-
selor of embassy or legation attached to the delegation
shall take precedence immediately after the delegates,
unless otherwise instructed by the Secretary of State.
13. In the districts to which they are assigned, consuls
general shall take precedence with but after brigadier
generals in the Army, Air Force, and Marine Corps and
commodores in the Navy ; consuls shall take precedence
with but after colonels In the Army, Air Force, and Marine
Corps and captains in the Navy ; officers of the Foreign
Service commissioned as vice consuls shall take preced-
ence with but after captains in the Army, Air Force, and
Marine Corps and lieutenants in the Navy.
14. Officers of the Foreign Service with the title of
consul general, consul, or vice consul shall take precedence
with respect to medical officers of the Public Health Serv-
ice a.ssigned to duty in American consular offices as fol-
lows: consul general before medical director; consul with
but after medical director : vice consul with but after
senior assistant surgeon: Provided; That this regulation
shall not oijerate to give precedence to any medical officer
above that of the consular officer in charge.
15. This order supersedes Executive Orders No. 8356
of March 2, 1940, and No. 8377 of March 18, 1940 (3 CFB
Cum. Supp. 024, 032).
Harry S. TRUiiAN
The White Hou.se
September l), 19^8
Fifteen Hundred Persons Complete Foreign
Service Examinations
[Released to the press September 30]
Approximately 1,500 young men and women in
18 cities in the United States and 70 cities abroad
completed on September 30 the rigid three-day
written examination which is the first step to-
ward entrance into the Foreign Service of the
United States as a Foreign Service officer.
A total of 1,960 persons were designated to take
the examination, which is the second regular test
to be given since the end of World War II. How-
ever, only about 1.500 of the number designated
have actually presented themselves at the 88 ex-
amining, offices scattered throughout the world.
The facts concerning the current examination
differ in many respects from those relating to pre-
war examinations. For example, the number of
persons examined this year is almost four times
the number in 1941, the year of the last prewar
' Ex. Or. 9998, 14 Fed. Reg. 5359.
475
THE FOREIGN SERVICE
examination, wlien 440 persons took the tests.
Formerly, also, the examinees tended to be clus-
tered on the two coasts of the United States. This
year, large numbers have been designated in cities
in all regions of the country, 58 persons having
been designated to be examined in Atlanta, 165 in
Chicago, 62 in Dallas, 37 in Denver, 87 in St. Louis.
In addition, 145 persons residing abroad, most of
them already in the Foreign Service in other cate-
gories than Foreign Service officers, applied to take
the examinations. These include 1 person at
Moscow, 9 in Seoul, 13 in Berlin, 1 in Mombasa,
1 in Reykjavik, 2 in Montevideo, and 3 in Montreal.
To pass the written examination — which covers
many different subjects, including international
law, economics, history, government, and maritime
law — the examinee must make an average grade of
at least 70 percent. In prewar tests, the percent-
age of those taking the examination who made this
grade varied from 18.6 percent to 19.7 percent.
Those who pass the written tests must undergo an
oral examination before being classed as eligible
for appointment as a Foreign Service officer. An
average grade of 80 percent on both the written
and oral examinations is passing. Those making
this average before the war constituted from 6.8
percent to 9.3 percent of the total designated candi-
dates. Thus, in 1941, 440 persons took the exami-
nations. Of that number, 77 jJassed the written
test, and 37 passed both the written and oral
examinations.
Test Program Conducted for International
Health information
The Foreign Service of the United States, in
cooperation with the United States Public Health
Service, is conducting a te.st program in the field
of international health information. The test is
being conducted through a Public Health attache,
Dr. Morris B. Sanders, who has been assigned to
the American Embassies at Paris, Brussels, and
The Hague, with residence at Paris.
Intended as an aid both to Europe and the
United States, the future of the program depends
upon the availability of funds and the successful
development of the initial effort in harmony with
the work of the World Health Organization of the
United Nations, of which the United States is a
member.
Dr. Sanders, a member of the United States
Public Health Service Reserve and a recognized
expert in problems of anesthesia and oxygen and
in the field of aviation medicine, received instruc-
tions outlining the following as his duties in
Europe :
1. Dissemination of United States Public Health
and medical developments within assigned coun-
tries and reporting upon current developments
and thinking in those countries;
476
2. Collection of and reporting on available in-
formation from those countries on : health condi-
tions; current medical research and opj^ortunities
for United States research abroad; public-health
administrative practices and tecluiiques and their
results; prevalence of diseases of particular inter-
est to the United States; extent of health-insur-
ance programs; and developments in sciences
related to health and medicine;
3. Familiarizing himself with administration
and technique of national health services abroad;
4. Ascertaining the research progi'ams and
activities of scientific institutions and organiza-
tions in the field of health ;
5. Attending and, when appropriate, partici-
pating in conferences and congresses in health and
related fields ;
6. Identifying himself with the public health
and medical-research life of the comitries of
assignment.
Closing of Consular Offices and
Opening of New Offices
[Released to the press September 23]
Five more American consulates and one vice
consulate are being closed in a continuing stream-
lining of Foreign Service posts throughout the
world. The posts to be closed are Tahiti, Society
Islands ; La Guaira. Venezuela ; Cartagena, Colom-
bia; Martinique, French West Indies; Cocha-
bamba, Bolivia; and the combined Fort William-
Port Arthur post in Canada.
The closing of these six Foreign Service of-
fices brings to 17 the number of American con-
sular offices closed in various parts of the world
since January 1, 1948. Some were closed because
of a lessening of work caused by shifting world
conditions, some because the volume of work did
not justify their cost, some because they had been
wartime emergency posts.
One, at Changchun, China, was closed for poli-
tical considerations because it was in an area with
few American interests and surrounded by Chinese
Communist-controlled forces. Another, at Vladi-
vostok, was closed by the United States following
the shutting down of Soviet consulates in this
country by the U.S.S.R.
An additional reason for the closing of these
consular offices has been the necessity of utilizing
budgeted funds for opening and staffing with ex-
perienced personnel new posts in areas now con-
sidered vital to American interests.
Some of those closed have been or will be sup-
planted by consular agents ; the work of the others
will be transferred to nearby offices. Thus, the
volume of business to be done on behalf of United
States interests by the Foreign Service should not
be seriously affected.
Department of State Bulletin
Fourteen new Foreign Service offices were
establislied in the fiscal year 1948 and two more —
important enough to be missions, Tel Aviv, Israel,
and Seoul, Korea — have been established in recent
months. In addition, reports to the State De-
l)artment indicate a growing need for the opening
of still more American consular offices in the fu-
ture, particularly in the Mediterranean ai'ea and
in the Xear East.
The posts recently opened are sending repre-
sentatives of the United States back into areas
which have regained their prewar importance for
this country and into regions newly important be-
cause of a wealth of strategic materials, an in-
crease in shipping, or the establishment of new
means of corannniications. Three — at Lahore, Tel
Aviv, and Seoul — were brought into being because
of the birth of new nations, Pakistan, Israel, and
Korea.
The posts recently established follow :
Bergen, Norway; Bratislava, Czechoslovakia;
Cebu, Philippines; Curitiba, Brazil; Dar es
Salaam, Tanganyika; Elisabethville, Belgian
Congo; Haifa, Palestine; Kobe, Japan; Kuala
Lumpur, Malayan Union; Lahore, Pakistan; Ni-
cosia, Cyprus; Puerto Cortes, Honduras; Tripoli,
Libya ; Venice, Italy ; Tel Aviv, Israel ; and Seoul,
Korea.
The full list of posts eliminated since January
1, in addition to the six now in process of closing,
is as follows :
Fredericton, N.B., Canada ; Changchun, China ;
St. Stephen, X.B., Canada; Hull, England; Gre-
nada, British West Indies; Port Limon, Costa
Rica; Antigua, British West Indies; Plymouth,
England; Sarnia, Ontario, Canada; La Ceiba,
Honduras ; and Vladivostok, U.S.S.R.
Sale of Surplus Combat Materiel
A list uf surplus combat materiel sold to foreign
governments by the Department of State in its
capacity as foreign-surplus disposal agency during
April, May, June, and July 1948 and not previously
reported was contained in Department of State
press release 664 of August 17, 1948.
THE DEPARTMENT
Schedule of Fees by Interim Office for
German Affairs ^
Septemher 3, 104B.
Public Notice No. DA-121, effective August 10,
1948, established an Interim Office for German
Affairs in the Division of Protective Services,
Office of Controls, Department of State.
The Interim Office for German Affairs is au-
thorized to prescribe from time to time such fees
as nuiy be deemed appropriate for any services
rendered. The following schedule of fees is here-
by established :
Natube of SsatvicE
Travel Document Service
Execution of application for travel document and
military-entry permit $2.00
Issuance of travel document 10. 00
Amendment or verification of a travel document 2. 00
Renewal of travel document 5.00
Execution of affidavit in regard to German birth iu
connection with application for travel document 1. 00
Notarial and Other Miscellaneous Services
Administering an oath and certificate thereof 2.00
Aelinowledgment of a deed or power of attorney, or
similar service, including one or more signatures,
with certificate thereof, for each copy 2. 00
Certifying to official character of a notary or other
official 2. 00
For taking depositions, executing commissions or
letters rogatory, where the record of testimony
including caption and certificate does not exceed
.500 words (excluding punctuation) 2.00
For each additional 100 words or fraction thereof . 50
Certifying to the correctness of a copy of, or extract
from, a document, official or private 2. 00
Recording unofficial documents in Interim Office
upon request (for every 100 words or fraction
thereof) 1. 00
Obtaining copy of German public document (exclu-
sive of local charges of foreign officials and cer-
tification by United States Consul) 2.00
The fees received by the Interim Office for Ger-
man Affairs shall be covered into the Treasury as
miscellaneous receipts.
This notice shall become effective immediately
upon publication in the Federal Register.
Approved: September 2, 1948.
For the Secretary of State.
[seal] John F. Peurifoy,
Assistant Secretary.
PUBLICATIONS
Foreign Relations of the United States, 1932,
Volume I, Released
[Released to the press October 2]
The Department of State on October 2 re-
leased Foreign Relations of the United States,
1932, volume I, General. This volume deals en-
tirely with multilateral subjects which do not
properly fall under separate country headings.
' 13 Fed. Reg. 5382.
Ocfober 10, J 948
477
PUBLICATIONS
The Foreign Relations record of American diplo-
macy for 1932 is contained in five volumes.
Volume II, The British Commonwealth, Europe,
the Near East and Africa, and volumes III fnd IV,
The Far East, have already been published.
Volume V, The A^nerican RepuMcs, will be ready
for publication in the near future.
The year 1932 is the first for which the mass of
documentation in the Department files is so great
that an expansion of the number of regular annual
volumes to five has been necessary. The reason
for this increase in diplomatic documentation is
primarily the development of those interna-
tional tensions which within a few years led to the
outbreak of World War II.
The central problem presented m the vohime
now released is that of negotiations for disarma-
ment, the subject treated in the first 574 pages of
documents. Efforts of the United States, with
considerable support from the British, to bring
about international agreement for reduction m
military forces failed of success in the face of the
German demand for military equality and the
French fear of disarming without other effective
guarantees of security. There were warnings even
then, before seizure of power by the Nazis, that
the spirit which dominated Germany in 1914 was
reviving, but the American Government was not
in a position at that time to pledge its aid to main-
tain peace or security in Europe.
Efforts for an adjustment of war-debt payments
are also extensively treated in this volume. Other
sections contain papers on preliminaries to the
London Economic Conference, the proposed eco-
nomic confederation of the Danubian states, ten-
sion over the Polish Corridor and Danzig, and a
number of technical and economic subjects.
A preface by the editor explains the principles
which guide in the compiling and editing of
Foreign Relations, and names the Department
officers responsible for the preparation of the 1932
volumes.
Copies of Foreign Relations of the United
States, 1932, volume I (cxv, 979 pages), may be
purchased from the Superintendent of Documents,
Government Printing Office, Washington, D. C,
for $3 each.
Other Publications
For Kale by the Siiprrintendent of Dornmentu, Government
Printing Office, Washington 25, D.C. Address requests
direct to the Superintendent of Docinuents. except in the
case of free puhlicutions, u-hich miiij he obtained from the
Depariment of State,
American Dead in World War II. Treaties and Other
Interaational Acts Series 1720. I'ub. 3113. 10 pp. 50.
Agreement Between the United States and France —
Signed at Paris Oct. 1, 1047; entered into force Oct.
1, 1917.
478
Liquidation of German Property in Sweden: Allocation
of Proceeds. Treaties and Otlier International Acts Series
1731. I'ub. 3153. 4 pp. 50.
Understanding Between the United States and
Fi-jiuce— Effected by exchange of notes dated at Wash-
ington July 18, 1040 ; entered into force July 18, 1946.
Education: Cooperative Program in Ecuador. Treaties
and Other International Acts Series 1749. Pub. 3191.
24 pp. 10(f.
Agreement Between the United States and Ecuador
Extending and Modifying Asreenient of Jan. 22,
1945— Effected by exchange of notes signed at Quito
Oct. 2 and Nov. 14, 1947 ; entered into force Nov. 14,
1947, effective from Jan. 22, 1948.
Mutual Aid Settlement. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1750. I'ul). 3102. 30 pp. 150.
Agreement and Exchanges of Notes Between the
United States and the Netherlands— Signed at Wash-
ington May 28, 1947 ; entered into force May 28, 1047 ;
Agreement Between tlie United States and the
Netherlands Indies- Signed at Washington May 28,
1047 ; entered into force May 28, 1947 ; and Memoran-
dum of Arrangement Between the United States, the
United Kingdom, and the Netherlands— Signed at
Washington" May 28, 1947; entered into force May
28, 1947.
Proceedings and Documents of the United Nations Mone-
tary and Financial Conference. Bretton Woods, New
Hampshire, July 1-22, 1944. Vol. I. International Organ-
ization and Conference Series I, 3. Pub. 2860. 1126 pp.
$3.50.
Includes principal substantive documents showing the
work of the three commissions of the Conference.
The material in this volume outlines the proce<lures
which led to the Articles of Agreement of both the
International Monetary Fund and the International
Baidv for Reconstruction and Development. Volume
II will contain additional substantive documents, lists
of docimients and symbols, and a comprehensive index
to both volumes.
Italy: Establishment of Four Power Naval Commission,
Disposal of Excess Units of Italian Fleet, and Return by
Soviet Union of United .States and British Warships on
Loan. Treiities and Other International Acts Series 1733.
Pub. 3155. 6 pp. 5^.
Protocol Between the United States, the Union of
Soviet Socialist Republics, the United Kingdom of
Great Britain and Northern Ireland, and France —
Signed at Paris February 10, 1947; entered into force
February 10, 1947.
American Dead in World War II; Sites in Italy for Estab-
lishment of aiilitary Cemeteries. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 1743. Pub. 3183. 3 pp. 50.
Agreement Between the United States and Italy Modi-
fying the Agreement of September 13 and 26, 1946 —
Effected by exchange of notes dated at Washington
December IS, 1947, and January 21, 1948 ; entered into
force January 21, 1048 ; And Un<lerstanding Between
the United States and Italy Amending the agree-
ment <if December 18, 1947, and January 21, 1948 —
Effected hv exchange of notes dated at Washington
March 24 and April 19, 1948; entered into f<irce April
19, ]94,S.
United States Educational Foundation in Greece. Trea-
ties and Other International Acts Series 1751. Pub. 3193.
39 pp. 150.
Department of Slate Bulletin
Agreement Between the United States and Oreece —
Signed at Athens April 23, 104S; entered intn force
April 23, 194S.
Air Transport Services. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1753. I'ub. 3198. 13 pp. 5<t.
Agreement Between the United States and Paraguay —
Signed at Asuncii'in February 2S, 19-17 ; entered into
force Febrnary IC, 1948.
Regulation of Production and ."Marketing of Sugar. Trea-
ties and Other International Acts Series 1755. I'ub.
3213. 5 pp. 5^.
Protocol Between the United States and Other Gov-
ernments Prolon^ring the International Ai;reement of
May 6, 1937— Signed at Ixmdon August 29, 1947;
ratification advised by the Senate of the Unitetl States
April 28, 1948; ratified by the President of the United
States May 14, 1948 ; ratification of the United States
deposited in the Archives of the Government of the
I'nited Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ire-
land May 25, 1948; proclaimed by the President of the
United States .Time 1, 1948 ; eliCective September 1, 1947.
Military Obligations of Certain Persons Having Dual
Nationality. Treaties and Other International Acts Series
17.5t!. Pull! 3214. 4 pp. 5c.
Agreement Between the United States and France —
Effected by exchange of notes signed at Paris Febru-
ary 25, 1948 ; entered into force February 25, 1948.
Publications of the Department of State. July 1, 1948.
Pub. 3219. 12 pp. Free.
A semiannual list cumulative from January 1, 1948.
Air Service: Transfer and Maintenance of Radio Range
and SCS 51 Equipment. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 17r.»;. Pub. 3234. 6 pp. 5^.
Agreement Between the United States and the United
Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland —
Effected by exchange of notes signed at London May
8 and July 31. 1946 ; entered into force July 31, 1946.
Documents and State Papers.
60 pp. 30^.
August 1948. Pub. 3236.
Contains articles on freedom of the air; America's in-
terests in Hungarian struggle for Independence ; and
the problem of voting in the Security Council.
Economic Cooperation with France Under Public Law
472 — SOth Congress. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 17s;^. Pub. 3251. 59 pp. 1.5.;'.
Agi-eement Between the United States and France —
Signed at Paris June 28, 1948 ; entered into force July
10, 1948.
Presidential Elections. Provisions of the Constitution and
of the United States Code. Pub. 3261. 12 pp. 5<l.
Progress Report on Human Rights. International Organi-
zation and Conference S'eries III, 13. Pub. 3262. 16
pp. lOi*.
An analysis of the accomplishments of the United
Nations Commission on Human Rights through the
two years of its existence showing the status of the
declaration and covenant of htuaan rights as drafted
in the Commission.
The Berlin Crisis: A Report on the Moscow Discussions.
1948. Kuroi)ean and Britisli Commonwealth Series 1.
Pul). ;'.29S. (;l pp. 20C.
October 10, 1948
A review of the events lending to the Berlin crisis
including documents showing stages of diplomatic
discussion.
No Compromise on Essential Freedoms. International
Organization and Conference Series III, 16. Pub. 3299.
13 pp. Free.
Address by Secretary of State, George C. Marshall,
before the General Assembly of the United Nations,
Paris, September 23, 1948.
THE CONGRESS
Trade Agreements Program : Testimony before the Sub-
committee on TarilTs and Foreign Trade of the Committee
on Ways and Means, House of Representatives, SOth Cong.,
2d sess.. on the Operation of the Trade Agreements Pro-
gram. May 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8, 1948. vi, 542 pp.
Structure of the United Nations and tlie Relations of
the United States to the United Nations: Hearings be-
fore the Committee on Foreign Affairs, House of Repre-
sentatives, SOth Cong., 2d sess. May 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, 12, 13,
14, 1948. vi, 591 pp. [indexed.]
The International Wheat Agreement : Hearings before
a Subcommittee of the Committee on Foreign Relations,
United States Senate, SOth Cong., 2d sess., on the ratifi-
cation by the United States Government of the Interna-
tional Wheat Agreement. May 14, 15, and 17, 1948. iii,
226 pp. [Department of State, pp. 29-37.]
War Claims Commission : Hearings before a Subcom-
mittee of the Committee on the Judiciary, United States
Senate, SOth Cong., 2d sess., on H. R. 4044, an act to amend
the Trading with the Enemy Act, as amended ; to create
a commission to make an inquiry and reiwrt witli respect
to war claims; and to provide for relief for internees
in certain cases. Feb. 17, 19. Mar. 9, and May 11, 1948.
iii, 250 pp. [Department of State, pp. 21-27, 223-29.]
Investigation of Questionable Trade Practices : No. 32,
Hearings before the Subcommittee To Investigate Ques-
tionable Trade Practices of the Committee on Public
Works, House of Representatives, SOth Cong., 2d sess.,
pursuant to H. Res. 403, a resolution to authorize and
direct the Public Works Committee, or any subcommittee
thereof, to make a study of conspiratorial or otlier ques-
tionable practices. Part 1, Jan. 5, 26, Feb. 26, Mar. 30, 31,
Apr. 19, June 3, 4, Aug. 10, 194S. iv, 528 pp. [Department
of State pp. 323-341.]
Investigation, Disposition of Surplus Property : Hear-
ings before the Surplus Property Subcommittee of the
Committee on Expenditures in the Executive Department,
SOth Cong., 2d sess., pursuant to H. Res. 90 and H. Res.
100. Part 7 : Hearings on exportation of surplus ma-
terials to foreign governments, leasing of aircraft by the
Department of the Air Force, di.sposal of Lend-Lease ma-
terials originally purchased for U.S.S.R. Mar. 24 and 25,
Apr. 15. 1948. iv, 124 pp. [Department of State, pp. 2095-
2104, 2135-48.]
Reorganization Plan No. 1 of 1948 : Hearings before
tlie Committee on Expenditures in the Executive Depart-
ments, House of Representatives, SOth Cong., 2d sess., on
H. Con. Res. 131, Feb. 5, 6, and 7, 1948. iv, 332 pp.
.\mending Section 32 (A) (2) of the Trading with the
Enemy Act. H. Rept. 1842, SOth Cong., 2d sess., to ac-
company H. R. .5960. 4 pp.
Amending Section 33 of the Trading with the Enemy
Act. H. Rept. 1843, SOth Cong., 2d sess., to accompany
H. R. 6110. 3 pp.
Protecting the United States Against Un-American and
Subversive Activities. H. Rept. 1844, SOth Cong., 2d sess.,
to accompany H. R. .5852. 14 pp.
Final Report on Foreign Aid of the House Select Com-
mittee on Foreign Aid, pursuant to H. Res 296, a resolu-
tion creating a Select Committee on Foreign Aid. H. Rept.
1845, SOth Cong., 2d .sess. xvi, 8S3 pp.
479
'£enM'
The U.N. and Specialized Agencies Pag«
The Struggle for Human Rights. Address by
Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt 457
Albania and Bulgaria Continue To Reject
Unscob:
Summary of U.S.-Bulgarian Correspond-
ence 461
Albania's Reply to Tripartite Appeal . . . 461
The U.S. in the U.N 463
The Opportunity of the National Commis-
sion 472
Occupation Matters
The Berlin Crisis:
U.S. Notifies U.N. of Serious Situation . . 455
List of Related Documents 456
Position on Withdrawal of Troops From
Korea. Exchange of Notes Between
U.S. and Soviet Governments 456
Economic Affairs
Representatives to Weights and Measures
Conference 466
Policy on Commercial Fishing in Pacific
Island Trust Territory:
Joint Agency Approval 468
Te.xt of Policy Directives 469
U.S. Vessels Sailing to Arctic in Support of
Canadian-U.S. Joint Weather Station
Program 471
Records of Nares and Peary Canadian Arctic
Expeditions Found 471
Control of Foreign Assets in U.S. Ended . . 472
General Policy
Two U.S. Citizens Held Incommunicado in
Hungary Released 469
Sale of Surplus Combat Materiel 477
Ambassador Butler To Represent President
at Cuban Inauguration 470
Treaty Information
Toward Revision of the Geneva Convention.
Article by Wilham H. McCahon .... 464
Treaty Information — Continued Page
Agreement Between U.S.-U.K. Proposing
International Committee on Scrap . . . 467
Economic Cooperation Agreement With Por-
tugal Signed 470
Air Transport Agreement With Bolivia . . . 470
Proclamation on Revision of Ilo Conven-
tion 472
Surplus Property Agreements on Educational
Exchange With United Kingdom and
New Zealand Signed 473
International information and
Cultural Affairs
Department of State To Have Full Direction
of Voice of America Programs 470
Freedom of Information. Statement by
Secretary Marshall 473
Surplus Property Agreements on Educational
Exchange With United Kingdom and
New Zealand Signed 473
Brazilian Cultural Leader Visits U.S. . . . 474
Brazilian Philosopher Visits U.S 474
Visit of Chilean Historian 474
Language Professor To Teach in Haiti . . . 474
The Department
Schedule of Fees by Interim Office for German
Affairs 477
Publications
Foreign Relations of the United States, 1932,
Volume I, Released 477
Other Publications 478
The Foreign Service
Rules of Precedence Relating to Foreign
Service and Government Officers . . . 475
Fifteen Hundred Persons Complete Foreign
Service Examinations 475
Test Program Conducted for International
Health Information 476
Closing of Consular Offices and Opening of
New Offices 476
The Congress 479
%<yrvt^mwt(y}^
WllUam H. McCahon, author of tlie article on the Inter-
national Committee of the Red Cross, is Special Assistant to the
Chief of the Division of Protective Services, Office of Controls,
Department of State. Mr. McCahon served as Technical Adviser
on the U.S. Delegation to the Seventeenth International Red
Cross Conference.
¥!
U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1949
tJne/ ^eha^t^nteni/ y(w t/taie^
PROGRESS OF U.N. IN PARIS • Statements by the
President and Secretary Marshall ........ 483
DISCUSSION IN THE SECURITY COUNCIL OF THE
BERLIN CRISIS • Statement by Philip C. Jessnp . . 484
FIRST CONGRESS OF THE INTERNATIONAL
THEATRE INSTITUTE • Article by Rosamond Gilder . 488
For complete contents see back cover
Vol. XIX, No. 485
October 17, 1948
^ENT Ofr
tes
U. S. SUPERIt-n'EKOENT OF pOUUMtNlS
DEC 2 1948
«.*^,wy*. bulletin
Vol. XIX, No. 485 • Pdblication 3314
Oaober 17,1948
For sale by the Superinterdent of Documents
U.S. Oorernmcnt rrintinf Oflice
Washinglon 26, D.C.
PniCK:
62 Issues, domestic $5, foreign $7.25
Single copy, 16 cents
Published with the approval of the
Director of the Bureau of the Budget
Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
or State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.
ThelDepartment of State BULLETIN,
a^iveekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.
Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
Third Regular Session of the General Assembly
Discussions on Progress of U.N. in Paris
STATEMENT BY THE PRESIDENT
[Released to the press by the White House October 9]
General Marshall has returned to Washington
at my request to report to me on the progress of
the work of the various United Nations bodies in
Paris. I had a long talk with him this morning,
and again this afternoon. He gave me a detailed
picture of what has been taking place in Paris, and
we discussed questions relating to the future
course of this Government in the various matters
at issue.
With regard to the report published in this
morning's press concerning a possible journey of
Chief Justice Vinson to Moscow, the facts are as
follows : On last Tuesday, when I communicated
with Secretary Marshall, I told him of my continu-
ing great desire to see peace firmly established in
the world, and of my particular concern at this time
over the attitude taken by the Soviet representa-
tives regarding the atomic problem. I said that
I was wondering whether their attitude did not
reflect a misunderstanding in the minds of the
Soviet leaders so serious, from the standpoint of
world peace in general, that we would be remiss if
we left undone anything that might conceivably
serve to dispel it. I asked the Secretary whether
he felt that a useful purpose would be served by
sending to Moscow Chief Justice Vinson, in an
effort to make the Soviet leaders understand the
seriousness and sincerity of the feelings of the
people of the United States about these matters.
Secretary Marshall described to me the situation
which we faced in Paris, and, in the light of his
report and the possibilities of misunderstanding
to which any unilateral action, however desirable
otherwise, could lead at present, I decided not to
take this step.
My talk with Secretary Marshall has been grati-
fying to me. I was glad to hear his report of the
unity which has prevailed between ourselves and
the French and British representatives in Paris in
all phases of the handling of the Berlin crisis, and
of the earnest efforts being made by the Security
Council and the General Assembly of the United
Nations to find solutions to many of the other prob-
lems which have been troubling people everywhere.
I was glad to be able to assure him of the determi-
nation with which people in this country are sup-
porting our efforts to find the road to peace.
STATEMENT BY SECRETARY MARSHALL
[Released to the press October 9]
At his press conference on October 9 Secretary
of State George C. Marshall said :
"The President called me home to go over with
him the intimate details of what had happened in
Paris. The daily events had been reported by
radio. We settled on this week end as being the
time most convenient to both of us to get together.
I did not know until I got off the plane this morn-
ing of the statements in the press regarding the
matter of Chief Justice Vinson making a direct
approach to Generalissimo Stalin.
Due to his very special position in this matter,
the President had been deeply concerned by the
intransigent attitude of the Soviet Government
during the debate of the atomic problem of the
past ten days. He called me late Tuesday after-
Oc/ofaer U, 1948
noon to a teletype conference and discussed with
me the proposal of sending Justice Vinson direct
to Moscow. After discussing the matter with him
by teletype, the President decided it would not be
advisable to take this action. Tlie matter was then
dropped. I had called to my attention in Paris
and since my arrival here several statements in the
press or by radio to the effect that there was a
split between the President and the Secretary of
State regarding important matters of foreign rela-
tions. There is no foundation for this. As a
matter of fact, the policy to be followed by our
Delegation in the current meeting of the United
Nations General Assembly and of the Security
Council was decided upon by the President before
I left for Paris and has been the basis for the
implementation by our delegates of the American
483
THE UNITBD NATIONS AND SPECIAUZED AGENCIES
position in the conferences in Paris. Such state-
ments can do no good and they certainly can do
a great deal of harm and I deplore them.
My plans at present are a little indefinite but
I will probably return tomorrow night to Paris.
The issues being discussed there are highly im-
portant and it is important that I be present."
Asked whether this Government had reached a
position of reopening discussions of the German
question with the Soviet Union, Secretary Marshall
said:
"We are perfectly ready to enter into negotia-
tions with the Council of Foreign Ministers on the
Berlin question, on the German question, if and
provided first, the blockade is raised."
In this connection the Secretary was asked
whether this willingness on the part of the United
States to reopen negotiations permitted or ex-
cluded talks with the Foreign Ministers simultane-
ously with the lifting of the blockade. Secretary
Marshall replied: "Yes, it precludes that. The
blockade must be lifted before we meet."
Discussion In tiie Security Council of the Berlin Crisis^
STATEMENT BY PHILIP C. JESSUP
Deputy U.S. Representative in the Security Council
[Released to the press October 8]
The United States Government has sought by
peaceful means to remove the threat to peace
created by the Soviet Union, which, while it re-
mains, is the insuperable obstacle to free nego-
tiation. Our very resort to the Security Council
is a further use of the same peaceful means and is
directed to the same end. The United States will
be no party to encouraging or submitting to prac-
tices which would make a mockery of the Charter.
Secretary Marshall also declared in his address :
"For its part, the United States is prepared to seek
in every possible way, in any appropriate forum,
a constructive and peaceful settlement of the po-
litical controversies which contribute to the pres-
ent tension and uncertainty." I say expressly that
this statement includes continued readiness of the
United States to negotiate with the Soviet Gov-
ernment in any appropriate forum regarding any
issue outstanding between it and the United States
Government. The term "any appropriate forum"
includes the Council of Foreign Ministers. But
what we are now discussing is tliis barrier to nego-
tiations— this threat to the peace created by the
Soviet blockade of Berlin. The appropriate
forum for discussion of the threat to peace is this
Security Council. We are here to discuss it.
What constitutes a "threat to peace" as that term
is used in article 39 ? A threat to peace is created
when a state uses force or threat of force to secure
' Excerpts from Mr. Jessup's statement made before the
Security Council on Oct. 6, 1948. In this statement Mr.
Jessup reviewed the development of the Berlin blockade
and the breakdown of the discussions at Moscow between
representatives of the Western Powers and the Soviet
Union. For this material see The Berlin Crisis, A Report
of the Moscoic Discussions, 1948, Department of State
publication 3298.
484
compliance with its demands. Acts of the Soviet
Government in illegally obstructing by threat of
force the access of three Western Powers to Ber-
lin creates a threat to peace.
The Soviet Union may pretend it cannot under-
stand why it can be charged with threat or use
of force against the United States, France, i^nd
the United Kingdom when a primary consequence
of its action falls directly and intentionally upon
the civilian population of Berlin for whose well-
being the three Western occupying powers are re-
sponsible. That an effort should be made to de-
prive two and one-half million men, women, and
children of medicines, food, clothing, and fuel, to
subject them to cold and starvation and disease,
may seem to some a small matter. But to us, the
welfare of people committed to our charge is a
matter of serious concern. We cannot be callous
to the sufi'ering of millions of people in any coun-
try, much less when we have responsibility for
them as an occupying power.
Today the daily living requirements of these
2,500,000 people, two thirds of the population of
Berlin, are being met by the combined efforts of
the British and American air forces; 250 planes
are supplying the western sectors of Berlin with
food, coal, and other essentials. Efforts of thou-
sands of American and British and French men
and women have been devoted to the organization
and establishment of an air bridge, which, in one
day, has delivered almost 7,000 tons of supplies
to the land-blocked city. The Security Council,
as well as the population of Berlin, may well re-
gard the air-lift as a symbol of peace and of meth-
ods of a pacific settlement.
But the fact that the courage and ingenuity of
men and women who are participating in this stu-
Deparfmenf of State Bulletin
ponduous achievement saved the people in Berlin
from much of the suffering which the Soviet Gov-
ernment sought to enforce upon them does not
mean the threat to peace is removed. The Mem-
bers of the Council will recall that Marshal So-
kolovsky, in an obvious attempt to counteract the
air-lift, in complete disregard of the directive
as interpreted by Premier Stalin himself, in-
sisted upon new restrictions upon air transporta-
tion between Berlin and the Western zones of Ger-
many. The Soviet Government, in a note of Sep-
tember 25, instead of repudiating Marshal
Sokolovsky's action, added new demands that
air communications should be subjected to the con-
trol of the Soviet command.
Origin of Rights
The United States is in Berlin as of right. The
rights of the United States as a joint occupying
power in Berlin derive from the total defeat and
unconditional surrender of Germany. Article I of
jirotocol on zones of occupation in Germany agreed
to by the Soviet Union in the European Advisory
Commission on November 14, 1944, provides :
"I. Germany, within frontiers as were on De-
cember 31, 1937, will, for purposes of occupation,
be divided into three zones, one of which will be
allotted to each of three powers, and a special Ber-
lin area, which will be under joint occupation by
the three powers."
This agreement (later amended to include
France) established the area of Berlin as an in-
ternational enclave to be jointly occupied and
administered by four powers.
The representatives of commanders-in-chief
adopted, on July 7, 1945, a resolution establishing
tlie Allied Kommandatura for administration of
Berlin. The Kommandatura was to be under the
direction of the chief military commandant, which
post was to be held in rotation by each of four
military commanders. The chief military com-
mandant in consultation with the other command-
ers was to exercise administration of all Berlin
sectors when a question of principle and problems
common to all sectors arose. In order to exercise
supervision of Berlin local government, one or two
representatives from each Allied command were
to be attached to each section of the local German
government.
Implicit in these agreements is the right of each
of the four powers to free access to and egress from
the greater Berlin area. Xot only has this right
been clearly recognized and confirmed by the So-
viet Union by practice and usage for almost three
years, but it has been the subject of written agree-
ments between the respective governments as well
as by their representatives in the Allied Control
Council for Germany. Rights of free access were
Ocfofaer 17, 1948
THB UN/rfD NATIONS AND SPECIALIZeO AGCNCIBS
directly specified in the message from President
Truman to Premier Stalin on June 14, 1945, which
agreed to withdraw back to the prescribed zonal
boundaries those forces which in the course of the
war had overrun part of the territory which later
became the Soviet zone of occupation, provided
satisfactory arrangements for free access by rail,
road, and air to the forces in Berlin could be en-
tered into between the military commanders. I
quote one sentence from the Truman message :
". . . As to Germany, I am ready to have in-
structions issued to all American troops to begin
withdrawal into their own zone on June 21 in
accordance with arrangements between the respec-
tive commanders, including in these arrangements
simultaneous movement of the national garrisons
into greater Berlin and provision of free access by
air, road and rail from Frankfurt and Bremen to
Berlin for United States forces."
Premier Stalin replied on June 16, 1945, accept-
ing this plan excepting for a change in date. Pre-
mier Stalin gave assurances that all necessary
measures would be taken in accordance with the
plan. Correspondence in a similar sense took
place between Premier Stalin and Prime Minister
Churchill. Premier Stalin thus agreed that the
Western occupying powers should have "free access
by air, road and rail" to Berlin. Even in the
Russian language, "free access" does not mean
"blockade".
The four zone commanders met in Berlin on
June 29, 1945, to put the agreement of the Chiefs
of State into force. At this meeting it was agreed
that the Western Powers would withdraw their
forces from the Soviet zone and would have the
use of the Helmstedt-Berlin Autobahn and rail
routes without restriction and subject only to the
normal traffic regulations of the Soviet zone. In
replv to a question from General Clay, Marshal
Zhukov, the Soviet commander, stated : "It will be
necessary for vehicles to be governed by Russian
road signs, military police, document checking, but
no inspection of cargo — the Soviets are not inter-
ested in what is being hauled, how much or how
many trucks are moving." In accordance with
this understanding, the United States, whose
armed forces had penetrated deep into lands of
Saxony and Thuringia, in the Soviet zone, with-
drew its forces to its zone. Simultaneously,
United States garrisoning forces took up their
position in Berlin.
The right of the United States to be in Berlin
thus stems from the same source as the right of the
Soviet Union. Rights of occupying powers are
co-equal as to fi'eedom of access, occupation, and
administration of the area.
Confirmation by Agreements and Usage
It clearly results from these undertakings that
Berlin is not a part of the Soviet zone of occupa-
485
THf UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
tion, but is, by express agreement, an international
enclave. Commitments entered into in good faith
by the commanders of the four zones of occupation,
agreements reached by the Allied Control Author-
ity in Germany, as well as uncontested usage, have
recognized basic rights of the United States in the
joint administration of Berlin and rights of free-
dom of access thereto for the purpose of fulfilling
United States obligations and responsibilities as an
occupying power.
Since July 7, 1945, it agreed that supplies neces-
sary for the welfare of the people of Berlin were a
joint responsibility of the four powers. There
have been a series of quadripartite agreements en-
tered into between July 1945 and April 1948 for
the joint provision of food, solid fuels and electric
IDOwer, and medical supplies.
All agreements, of course, carried with them the
right of access to permit the Western occupying
powers to bring their share of supplies to Berlin.
Pursuant to agreement in the Control Council
establishing train paths, military trains regularly
traversed the Helmstedt-Berlin train route.
There was no inspection by Soviet authorities and
no Soviet permit was required for outgoing ship-
ments from the Berlin area. Proof of identity
through proper documentation was sufficient to
coniply with traffic regulations, whicli during this
period were reasonable and were fully accepted by
the Western Powers. Similarly, personnel of the
United States Military Forces and other United
States officials traveled freely by train or motorcar
over the rail and Autobahn'routes from Berlin to
Helmstedt without Soviet visa.
Air corridors were established between the
Western zones and Berlin with unrestricted flight,
subject, of course, to safety regulations. Three
such corridors were established in November 1945
by Four Power agreement in the Allied Control
Council to augment the single provisional corridor
agreed to in the meeting of the Allied Command-
ers-in-Chief on July 7, 1945. In December 1945
uniform safety regulations were adopted in these
corridors, under which aircraft have operated con-
tinuously since that date. These regulations were
reaffirmed by publication on October 22, 1946, of
the agreed second revision of these flight rules.
In practice, military and civilian airline aircraft
of the three Western Powers used the corridors
for unlimited flight without notification to Soviet
authorities.
Bilateral agreements were made by British and
Soviet authorities concerning barge traffic between
their two zones. Quadripartite arrangements con-
cerning postal traffic, telecommunications and
movement of Germans between the Western zones
and Berlin were concurred in, and carried out
satisfactorily, prior to institution by the Soviet
Union of blockade measures.
There can thus be no question of the legal basis
4a6
for United States rights to free access to Berlin or
of recognition of these rights by the Soviet Union.
Regulation of Traffic
The United States maintains its basic juridical
rights of fi'ee access to Berlin. These are clearly
established and recognized by the Soviet Govern-
ment. As every reasonable and practical person
knows, rail, road, barge, and air traffic must be
subject to some degree of regulation. Let me re-
peat the statement of Marshal Zhukov on June 29,
1945:
"It will be necessary for vehicles to be governed
by Russian roadsigns, military police, and docu-
ments checking, but no inspection of cargo —
Soviets not interested in what is being hauled, how
much or how many trucks are moving."
The United States agi-eed to this position and
we still agree. We do not assert freedom of access
means absence of reasonable regulations, but pre-
caution cannot be distorted to mean imposition of
restrictions to the i^oint where the principle of
free access is completely strangled. The United
States will not permit the Soviet Govermnent to
use the agreed principle of reasonable regulation
as a measure to cloak the threat of force designed
to force the United States to abandon Berlin to
single domination and rule by the Soviet Union.
Development of tlie Berlin Blocl<ade
When the three Western Powers on July 3
formally protested in Moscow against the block-
ade, the Soviet Government's reply of July 14 con-
tained no reference to the previous Soviet explana-
tion that the blockade measures were due to "tech-
nical difficulties". Rather it openly admitted the
blockade was in effect retaliation against actions
of the Western Powers in their own occupation
zones of Germany, empliasizing in this connection
the currency reform of the- Western zones. Now,
for the first time, and in direct conflict with all
agreements to the contrary, the Soviet Government
put forward the claim that Berlin "is a part of"
the Soviet zone of Germany. The Soviet note
ended with the contention that Berlin problems
were inseparably linked with questions involving
the whole of Germany and negotiations would be
effective only if they encompassed the entire Ger-
man situation. Moreover, the Soviet Government
refused to permit the restoration of lines of com-
munication between the Western zones and Berlin,
which restoration was declared by the United
States Government to be a prerequisite for any
negotiations.
Finally, the hollowness of various Soviet pre-
texts for imposition of the Berlin blockade was
completely exposed at the recent meetings of the
four military governors when, in total disregard
of the dii'ective agreed upon in Moscow, the Soviets
demanded measures of permanent control of traf-
Department of Sfafe Bullef'm
fie between Berlin and the West, measures to be
continued even after Western zone currency would
have been removed from Berlin. The Soviet note
of September 22 reinforced this demand and thus
gave final proof, if any were needed, that Soviet
blockade measures are designed to force the three
Western Powers to abandon imder duress their
rightful position in Berlin.
Soviet Attacks on Berlin Municipal Institutions
In addition to the blockade, the Soviet Govern-
ment, to the same end, resorted to other measures
of duress against the Western Powers by attempt-
ing to undermine and sabotage the lawfully con-
stituted city government of Berlin. This govern-
ment had been formed in accordance with the
temporary constitution of Berlin — an instrument
approved by the Allied Control Authority.
United States licensed German publications
were repeatedly confiscated by German Soviet
sector police in direct violation of Control Council
directive number 55. The Soviet licensed press in
Berlin, which of course prints onl}' items approved
by the Soviet authorities, became more strident in
attacks on the Western Powers and the elected
city government of Berlin.
Perhaps most serious, Soviet authorities con-
doned and encouraged public disorders in the
Soviet sector of Berlin.
Discussions With Soviet Government
Indeed, since the very beginning of the Soviet
imposition of the illegal blockade, the United
States Government has made direct, repeated, and
persistent efforts to adjust with the Soviet Govern-
ment the dangerous situation in Berlin.
These efforts were made to obtain the lifting of
the blockade which has created a threat to peace
which the Security Council is now considering.
To achieve this objective, the United States Gov-
ernment was prepared, and is still prepared, to
work out in good faith practical arrangements
which would permit the introduction of the Ger-
man mark of the Soviet zone, under appropriate
Four Power control, as the single currency for
Berlin. However, it was not and is not willing to
yield its rights and obligations regarding Berlin
or Germany under coercive pressure of the Soviet
blockade. It was made clear that the removal of
this coercive pressure would open the door to ne-
gotiations on other outstanding issues regarding
Berlin. This was repeatedly expressed, was and
still is the policy of the United States Government.
The course of the negotiations in Berlin was
characterized by the failure of the Soviet military
governor to abide by the understandings reached
in Moscow. ^
Ocfober 17, 1948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
He proposed new restrictions on transport by
demanding that air trailic be limited to supplying
the needs of the occupation forces in Berlin. No
such restriction heretofore existed or was ever
agreed to. The Directive to the four military gov-
ernors called for the removal of all restrictions,
not the imposition of new ones.
On September 22, the three Western Govern-
ments sent identical notes to the Soviet Govern-
ment in which they set forth their final position
on three issues of principle. In view of the mani-
fest unwillingness of the Soviet authorities to
carry out the agreement reached in Moscow, the
three Western Governments also called upon the
Soviet Government to lift the blockade and to
specify the date on which that would be done. The
illegal blockade had been then imposed for over
three months. Further talk was obviously point-
less. Action by the Soviet Union to cease its at-
tempt to induce compliance by duress was essential.
The Soviet Government made its unsatisfactory
reply on September 25. It went even further
than Marshal Sokolovsky in demanding control
by the Soviet military command over air traffic
between Berlin and the West.
Role of the Security Council
The salient feature of the case before the Se-
curity Council is that the Soviet blockade is still
maintained and thus continues in existence a threat
to the peace which it created.
That is the reason why this case has been brought
before the Council as a threat to peace within the
meaning of chapter VII of the Charter. Con-
sidering the circumstances which confront us it
would have been disingenuous to call the blockade
and its actual, as well as its potential, consequences
by any other name.
However, the fact that this matter comes before
the Council under chapter VII of the Charter does
not mean the Council is precluded from using any
of the machinery of pacific settlement suggested
in any part of the Charter. In this case, as in all
cases that come before it, the Security Council has
the greatest flexibility of action in order to carry
out the primary responsibility conferred upon it
for maintenance of peace.
Mr. President, we do not bring this case to the
Security Council with any cut-and-dried formula
for its solution. It is our hope the Security Coun-
cil can assist in removing the threat to peace. Noth-
ing which has happened has changed our position
on that point. The moment that the blockade is
lifted, the United States is ready to have an im-
mediate meeting of the Council of Foreign Min-
isters to discuss with the Soviet Union any ques-
tions relating to Germany.
487
First Congress of the International Theatre Institute
BY ROSAMOND GILDER
The International Theatre Institute came into
official existence on July 1, 1948. This important
event in world theater was the outcome of more
than two years' work on the part of a large number
of theater workers in more than twenty countries.
Encouraged and assisted by the United Nations
Educational, Scientific and tultural Organization
(UxESCo), theater experts from Europe, Asia, the
United Kingdom, and North and South America
had met at Paris. France, in the summer of 1947
and had laid the foundation of a structure which is
planned as a permanent woi-ld-wide autonomous
organization serving, sustaining, and developing
the theater in every country of the globe.
The concept has its basis in the conviction that
the artists of the world speak a common language
and can serve as valuable agents in obtaining mu-
tual understanding and good will among nations.
As early as November 1946. the creation of a per-
manent International Institute was envisaged by
UxEsco's committees. The project had been car-
ried to completion by Uxesco. not only by the call-
ing of the experts' meeting in 1947 and' the Con-
gress in 1948, but by the untiring efforts of the
theater section of Uxesco"s Paris secretariat where
there has been a permanent focus of continuing
activity through the past two years. Today, as a
result of UxESco's efforts, the theaters of the' world
have a well-organized international body which
every country capable of setting up a national
center within its own borders is invited to join. It
has a progi-am of activities, immediate and long-
range, an active executive committee and, by Janu-
ary 1, 1949. it will have a home of its own.
UNESCO, having fostered this new international
body, will, it is confidently expected, continue to
assist it for the next few years. In the meanwhile,
the Institute will build up its own resources, in-
crease its membership, and become a force in "pro-
moting international exchange in the knowledge
and practice of the arts", as its constitution
succinctly states.
Twenty countries were represented at the First
International Theatre Congress of the Interna-
tional Theatre Institute which was held at Praha,
Czechoslovakia, from June 28 to July 3, 1948.
These were Australia, Austria, Belgium, Canada,
China, Czechoslovakia, Denmark, Egvpt, Finland,
France, Hungary, the Netherlands, Norway, Po-
land, Sweden, Switzerland, the Union of South
Africa, the United Kingdom, the United States,
and Yugoslavia. After a formal opening session
488
at which the host country was represented by the
Minister of Foreign Affairs and the Minister of
Education, and speeches were made by Julian
Huxley, Director General of Unesco, Jindrich
Honzl, director of the National Theatre and head
of the Czechoslovak Delegation, and J. B. Priest-
ley, the British playwright who had been chairman
of the interim committee, the delegates went into
plenary session and elected Mr. Priestley president
of the Congress.
Five days were none too long for the three major
subcommittees into which the Congress resolved
itself to accomplish their tasks. The Committee
on Organization, headed by Emil Oprecht of
Switzerland, guided the draft charter through its
last phases and untangled the various organiza-
tional snarls. The Committee on the Exchange of
Companies, under the chairmanship of Dr. Arnold
Szyfman of Poland, worked out ways and means
to smooth the path of theater groups planning in-
ternational tours. The Committee on Informa-
tion, presided over Dr. Yui Shan^Yuen of China
and Mile. Jeanne Laurent of the French Ministry
of Education, made a host of decisions leading to
the immediate establishment of an information
bulletin and other publications.
When the Congress met in final plenary session
July 1, the following countries, represented by dele-
gates of fully established national centers, voted
the International Theatre Institute into being:
Austria, Belgimn, China, Czechoslovakia, France,
Poland, Switzerland, and the United Kingdom.
An Executive Committee was elected of which
Arman Salacrou, the French playwright, is presi-
dent, and the other members are Erich Nikowitz,
Austrian actor and director; Maurice Huisman,
director of the Belgium National Theatre; S. I.
Hsuing, Chinese author and playwright ; Jindrich
Honzl, director of the National Theatre, Praha;
Kichard Ordynski, Polish director-designer;
Llewellj'n Rees, drama director of the Arts Coun-
cil of Great Britain ; and Emil Oprecht, president
of the Association of Swiss Theatre Directors.
The Executive Committee at its first meeting de-
cided on Paris as the temporary headquarters of
the International Theatre Institute and named
Maurice Kurtz as secretary general, the appoint-
ment to take effect when the Institute moves to
its o.wn quarters in January 1949. It also ap-
pointed an Editorial Committee of four — Rosa-
mond Gilder, Rene Hainaux, Emil Oprecht, and
Kenneth Rae — to work out details of the inf orma-
Deparfment of State Bulletin
tion bulletin which will appear this year and to
phiii for future publications.
The United States was represented at the Praha
Congress by an observer delegation of three. Two
of the delegates, Rosamond Gilder and Warren
Caro, were nominated by the Department of State
while Clarence Derwent, president of Actors'
Equity, represented the American National Thea-
tre and Academy. The American delegates were
active on all the committees. Two of them, Miss
Gilder and Mr. Derwent, had attended the meet-
ing of experts at Paris in 1947 and had taken part
in the formulation of the progi'am and in the
drafting of the charter. The United Kingdom
sent a large delegation representing its newly
founded National Centre. Like the national cen-
ters of France. Belgium, and other countries, the
British Centre was officially organized by the Min-
istry of Education and is supported and financed
by the British Council and the Arts Council, both
of which operate under government subsidies. It
has enlisted the cooperation of such nongovern-
mental agencies as the British Equity and the
League of British Dramatists and has set up head-
quarters in the office of the Joint Council of the
National Theatre and the Old Vic. The French
CeJitre also has the official and financial backing
of the Ministry of Education and the Ministry of
Foreign Affairs and has likewise secured the co-
operation of independent artists' groups and
unions. The Czechoslovak Centre shows a slightly
different organizational pattern in that it is en-
tirely under the direction of the government Min-
istries of Education and Information.
The United States Center, which has already
been established under the joint chairmanship of
Clarence Derwent, president of Actors' Equity,
and Moss Hart, president of the Dramatists' Guild,
will necessarily have a different form. It must be
supported by private funds as no government
agency exists to give it backing. However, the
Center does have the backing of the American
National Theatre and Academy which holds a
charter from the Congress of the United States.
The L^nited States Center of the International
Theatre Institute is. as it were, the foreign-affairs
branch of the American National Theatre and
Academy. It has a separate committee of its own
representing all the theater unions and important
national irroups. professional and nonprofessional.
At its offices at 63 West 44th Street in New York
THE UN/TED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
City, it has already undertaken the duties indi-
cated in the International Theatre Institute char-
ter: it has published a mimeographed Interna-
tional News Bulletin, acted as friend and adviser to
traveling theater students and workers, established
contact with the International Office at Paris and
with other national centers in Europe and else-
where. In addition, it serves as the advisory panel
on dramatic arts for the United States National
Commission of Uxesco. As soon as the delegates
to the First Congress can report to the Conunittee
of the United States Center and to the American
National Theatre and Academj' and can secure the
funds necessary for the L'nitecl States share of the
International Office of the Institute, the American
theater should take its place as an active and force-
ful member of this world movement.
Of what value is the International Theatre In-
stitute to the theater as a whole ? This is a prac-
tical question that J. B. Priestley, the most prac-
tical of idealists, can best answer. In his preface
to the International Theatre Institute report, he
says that the International Theatre Institute —
"will collect and then distribute a great deal of
valuable information : about new plays and pro-
ductions in all countries concerned; about the
stage dimensions, technical resources, seating ca-
pacities of the chief playhouses in all these coun-
tries; about copyright laws, censorship regula-
tions, methods of payment and emplo5-ment in its
member countries. Again it will try to remove the
various obstacles that prevent the successful ex-
change of theatrical companies, to improve trans-
port arrangements for companies touring abroad,
to break through the walls of currency regulations
and customs dues.
"Then, when the Institute is firmly established
and has linked the theatre folk of all nations, it
can proceed to organize festivals and exhibitions,
produce a journal in several languages, create the-
atrical scholarships and fellowships, advise the
newer coimtries on the organization of good the-
atres, and do everything possible (without acting
as financial manager) to assist distinguished the-
atrical comiDanies to cross frontiers, and, if neces-
sary, tour the wide world itself. Finally, the
annual Congi'ess of the Institute will enable the-
atrical workers in all countries to meet and ex-
change ideas and plan joint action."
In all of this it is quite evident that the Ameri-
can theater has much both to give and to receive.
Ocfofaer ?7, 1948
808865 — 18 2
489
The United States in tlie United Nations
Atomic Energy
The atomic issue Tvas referred last week to an
11-nation subcommittee of Committee 1 with in-
structions to study and report on all resolutions
on the question.^ On October 12 the subcommit-
tee, the Soviet Union and the Ukraine dissent-
ing, adopted and sent to the full Committee an
amended Canadian resolution accepting as the
basis for future work the control plan of the U. N.
Atomic Commission but leaving further detailed
work in suspension until the Soviet opposition is
modified.
On October 15 Mr. Osborn during a meeting of
the disarmament subcommittee of Committee 1
called upon the Soviet Delegation to show by an-
swering four specific questions whether or not its
proposal for major power disarmament is sincere.
He asked Jacob Malik, the Soviet Delegate, the
following questions:
Fii-st, whether Soviet leaders would disavow ex-
jiansionism by disbanding their Communist fifth
columns in countries all over the world.
Second, whether the U.S.S.R. would disavow
the use of the veto in implementing inspection and
control of armaments by an international agency.
Third, whether the iron curtain would be with-
drawn so that the world could know what is going
on in the Soviet Union and thus be relieved of
fears glowing out of Soviet secretiveness.
Finally, "Is there not a certain effrontery in the
Soviet Union presenting to this body such a resolu-
tion in the name of a dictatorship which Premier
Stalin himself has described as one based on vio-
lence and not on law?"
The Berlin Situation
On October 15 the Security Council resumed its
consideration of the Berlin question, which the
Western powers charge is threatening world peace
and security.
Acting Council President Juan A. Bramuglia of
Argentina, on behalf of the six neutral nations of
the Council that are attempting to compose the
differences between the Western powers and the
Soviet Union, asked the four powers concerned for
additional information regarding the Bei'lin
blockade.
"Firstly", he said, "we request the representa-
tives of the United States, the United Kingdom,
France, and the U.S.S.R. to explain the initial
imposition of restrictions upon communications,
transport, or commerce between Western Germany
and the Soviet zones, the details of and the present
' Including those of Canada, the Soviet Union, Syria, and
Australia. See V. N. doc. A/C.1/317, Oct. 7, 1948.
490
status of the restrictions. Secondly, we request
them to kindly explain the agreement involved in
tlie instructions given to the military governors of
the four powers in Berlin, and to give the detailed
reasons that prevented their implementation."
The three Western powers promised to submit
careful and comprehensive answers. Mr. Vyshin-
sky refused to coojierate.
Support of ERP
The Norwegian and Netherlands Delegates to
the United Nations on October 13 defended the
European Recovery Program against Soviet at-
tacks. Speaking before the Economic and Finan-
cial Committee, Finn Moe, of Norway, credited the
program with having staved off a European de-
pression and started Europe on its way to recovery.
C. L. Patijn, of the Netherlands, said that the
])rogram "has given us firm ground under our feet
for the first time in Europe's history." He also
noted that the Polish Delegate had spoken of
economic degradation instead of the promised
prosperity. "The truth", he said, "is that the pro-
duction of the 16 countries is showing a marked
increase both in agriculture and industry." Dr.
Patijn stated that the Soviet Union should "hear
liow the vast masses of our workers speak with
deep understanding of the Marshall Plan objec-
tives and awareness of leaders that without it the
standard of living of the workers would decline 25
percent."
Mr. Moe said that it was interesting that the
critics of the Recovei-y Program had no other solu-
tion for Europe's economic ills.
On October 15 the French and British Delegates,
Paul Ramadier and W. Glenville Hall, defended
the European Recovery Program against Soviet
charges. Mr. Ramadier said that Erp is not "a
form of economic slavery but an invitation to knit
the ties that bind together all of Europe."
Genocide
The United States on October 14 called for the
inclusion of political groups among those to be
protected under the proposed United Nations con-
vention on genocide. It asked the Soviet Delegate
for a "complete and frank explanation" for the
Soviet reversal in the matter.
Ernest Gross, of the U. S. Delegation, told the
Legal Committee that the United States sees no
valid reasons for disregarding the Assembly's
resolution of November 11, 1946, and that "pro-
vision for protecting political groups from exter-
mination should be retained in the convention."
The Legal Committee on October 15 voted 20 to
13 to include protection for political groups in the
draft convention.
DeparlmeM of State Bulletin
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES
Second Meeting of Wool Study Group
From October 4 to October 6, representatives
from Argentina, Australia, Belgium, Canada,
Cuba, Czechoslovakia, Dominican Republic,
Egypt, Eire, Finland, France, Iceland, India,
Italy, Netherlands, New Zealand, Pakistan, Po-
land, Switzerland, Turkey, Union of South Af-
rica, United States, United Kingdom, Yugoslavia,
together with observers from the United Nations,
the Food and Agriculture Organization, and the
United Kingdom Dominion Wool Disposals, Lim-
ited, have participated in the second meeting of the
Wool Study Group.
The study group have reviewed changes which
have taken place in the world apparel wool situa-
tion, since the first meeting in April 1947 which
continued a survey begun by the International
Wool Conference in November 1946. They have
heard statements from different delegations about
the position in their respective countries, with spe-
cial reference to any problems arising therein and
to anj- matters of international interest.
The group have noted with satisfaction that esti-
mated world stocks of apparel wool at Jmie 30,
1949 (about 2,750 million pounds greasy weight),
will be no more than two thirds of June 1947;
and that about 75 percent of tliese stocks will be
held commercially, as compared with 55 percent
in June 1947. Stocks of wool in governmental
ownership at June 30, 1949, are expected to be no
more than 660 million pounds or about 22 percent
of the current annual rate of production. The
gi-oup estimated the world stocks of apparel wool
June 30, 1948, at 3,551 million pounds greasy
weight, of which 1,172 million pounds are held
by governments and 2,379 held commercially.
Stocks held by joint oi'ganization have dropped
from about 1,350 million pounds at June 30, 1947,
to 1,029 million pounds at June 30, 1948. Stocks
held by the Commodity Credit Corporation have
dropped from 541 million pounds at October 1,
1946, to less than 100 million pounds by the end of
August 1948.
While the group noted that there will be an esti-
mated excess consumption (3,755 million pounds)
over production (2,965 million pounds) in 1948-
49 of 27 percent (790 million pounds), it was re-
marked that current excess visible consumption
over production was jiartly due to filling up pipe-
lines, esj^ecially in Eurojje, which might be re-
garded as practically completed now. Several pro-
ducing countries indicated that their production
had declined, but the group were reassured by in-
dications from others (and from Australia in par-
ticular) of probable upward trend of production
in future. It was estimated that the total world
wool production in 1948-49 was likely to be be-
tween 2 and 3 percent better than in the preced-
ing year, while numbers of sheep in Australia,
which were 102 million in 1947, were estimated at
104-105 million in 1948.
The group considered there was no immediate
problem in the solution of which international
governmental action was at present necessary or
desirable.
The group also commented on the rise of prices
in wool since April 1947 and on the difference be-
tween considerable rise in price of fine wools as
opposed to the less significant rise in price of lower
grades. It was noticed, however, that there was
already a tendency to reduce the call on supjDlies
of high grade merino wools by an increase in con-
sumption of lower grades. This is already having
effects on prices.
Finally the group agi-eed to continue to meet
from time to time in the present form in order to
review the world wool position.
THE CONGRESS
Providing for Membership and Participation by the
United States in the World Health Organization. H. Kept.
1999, to accompany H. J. Res. 409, 80th Ctong., 2d sess.
10 pp.
World Health Organization. H. Kept 2197, to accom-
pany S. J. Res. 98, 80th Cong., 2d sess. 5 pp.
Foreign Aid Appropriation Bill, 1949. H. Kept. 2173, to
accompany H. R. 6801, 80th Cong., 2d sess. 11 pp.
Making Appropriations for Foreign Aid. H. Kept. 2440,
to accompany H. R. 6-801, 80th Cong.. 2d sess. 10 pp.
Fuel Investigation. Current Petroleum Outlook. Prog-
ress Report of the Committee on Interstate and Foreign
Commerce. H. Rept. 24G0, 80th Cong., 2d sess. ii, 60 pp.
Report on Audit of Export-Import Bank of Washington.
Letter from Comptroller General of the United States
transmitting a report on the audit of Export-Import Bank
October 17, 1948
of Washington for the fiscal year ended June 30, 1947.
H. Doc. 641, 80th Cong., 2d sess. v, 19 pp., with 5 schedules.
Twelftli Report to Congress on Operations of Unkba.
Message from the President of the United States trans-
mitting the Twelfth Quarterly Report of Expenditures
and Operations Under the United Nations Relief and Re-
habilitation Administration covering the period from Apr.
1, 1947, to June 30, 1947. H. Doc. 686, 80th Cong., 2d sess.
iii, 56 pp.
Urgent Needs of the American People. Address of the
President of the United States delivered before a joint
session of the Senate and the House of Representatives,
recommending legislation to check inflation and the rising
cost of living and to meet the acute housing shortage. H.
Doc. 734, 80th Cong., 2d sess. 6 pp. [July 27, 1948.]
491
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Asia Today'
BY W. WALTON BUTTERWORTH
Director, Office of Far Eastern Affairs
Asia today presents a radically different picture
from that vrluch we knew only a few years ago.
In addition to the economic dislocations and dam-
age brought about by the war in the Pacihc. that
war unleashed strong forces, the eventual work-
ings of which it is exti-emely difficult to foresee.
The most readily discernible force at work today
in Asia is nationalism. Its expression has :icen
marked h\ such milestones as the ending of extra-
territoriality in China, the establishment of inde-
pendence for the Philippines and Burma and.
within the British Commonwealth, for India and
Pakistan and Ceylon, and the Linggadjati and
Eenville agreements for the establishment of a
United Statts of Indonesia. The peoples of Asia
are moving, sometimes rapidly, sometimes slowly,
towards a position of full and mature responsibU-
itv for tlieir own affairs. The political emergence
of the countries of Asia has and will continue to
make them increasingly important to the rest of
the world. The picture is complicated, however,
by other forces which have arisen in the wake of
nationalism, taking advantage of the political
cross currents and vacuums which often accom-
pany its initial expression. These forces, out-
standing among which is the Conununist move-
ment, often identify themselves with nationalism
or cloak themselves by exploiting, sometimes with
great effectiveness, the deep-seated economic and
political maladjustments of Asia.
The working of these forces make for a highly
fluid and largely unpredictable situation in Asia
today. However, there are several important fac-
tors in the present situation that should be borne
in mind in any consideration of present and future
economic relations between Asia and the rest of
the world, ily references to these basic factors
will necessarily be greatly oversimplified.
The fijst factor, to which I have already drawn
attention, is that political imrest is a natural conse-
quence of rapid transition from colonial depend-
ency, or partial domination, to independence.
This political unrest r^ults either from the sharp
' Address delivered at the Far East and India Trade
Conference of the Far East-America Council of Com-
merce and Industry, Inc.. in Xew York. N. T., on Oct 6,
1948. and released to the press on October 8, 194S.
' BmiETur of Sept. 28, 1948, p. 410.
492
conflicts of interest between colonial powers and
nationalist forces, or from the exploitation of cul-
tural differences or economic ills for purposes of
aggrandizement. Such exploitation has within it
the seeds of political and economic calamity if the
new nationalist govermnent does not possess suffi-
cient vitality, popular support, and admhiistrative
efficiency to ride out the storm. Organized exploi-
tation of political imrest by Communism is the
greatest single menace in the Asiatic situation.
Just prior to the recent Commtmist-iastigated up-
risings in Java, the Department issued a statement
relating to southeast Asia ^ which read, in part, as
follows :
"To win support and allies in their drive for I
power. Communist leaders have consistently pre- I
tended to champion the cause of local nationalists T
and have attempted to identify communism with
nationalism in the minds of the people of the area.
This scheme worked well, at least untU the Comin-
form's denunciation of the Yugoslav Commimist
leaders as being, among other things, guilty of
nationalism. There is some evidence that sincere
nationalist leaders in southeast Asia, originally
deceived by this device, have now awakened to the
fact that, in Commimist -controlled states outside
the Soviet Union, the nationalism to which they
aspire is regarded as a high crime and grounds for
ruthless interference in the internal affairs of such
states by international Communist organizations."
A second "factor" is a logical corollary of the i
first. It is simply that economic recovery and I
development in most Asiatic countries has been and
may for some time be impeded by continuing poHt-
ical unrest and conflict. The serious balance-of-
payments deficits which confront many Asiatic
countries could be improved somewhat by economic
remedies, but prewar levels of economic activity
cannot be approached until the more immediate
political conflicts which are stifling production
and trade are resolved. In Indonesia, for ex-
ample, there is little incentive for the investment
of capital in productive enterprise or for the re-
lease of inventories for consumption or export until
it is evident that the principal factors of produc-
tion may be estimated with a reasonable degree
of accuracy. This cannot be expected imtil a
Department of State BuUefin
viable arrangement between tlie natiomilist forces
of Indonesia and the Netherlands has been
achieved.
My tliird observation relates more to the long-
range future. The countries of Asia desire sub-
stantial exjjansion of tlieir industrial, transporta-
tion, power, and agricultural facilities. There
are obvious advantages to both Asia and the rest
of the world in a sound development of Asia's
human and natural resources, and in a significantly
increased standard of living for Asiatic peoples.
However, in viewing the possibilities for such
progress, we should not ignore a basic economic
and social characteristic of important areas of
Asia. This characteristic is Asia's serious over-
population in relation to its existing resources and
productivity and the natural tendency of the popu-
lation, with a high birth rate, to increase whenever
economic gains permit it to do so. If this tend-
enc}- continues, there will be great difficulty for
many Asiatic countries in producing more than is
needed for current consumption and the accumu-
lation of domestic capital will be, at best, a slow
process. Since foreign capital usually can be i:>ut
to use only if supplemented by a substantial quan-
tity of domestic capital, it is thus apparent that
there are certain limitations on the extentto which
foreign capital can be expected to assist effectively
in the economic development of Asiatic countries.
One may conclude that, in so far as political in-
stability in Asia results from low standards of
living, such instability will not be easily and
quickly overcome by the progress of industrializa-
tion. Perhaps it can be kept within bounds over
the long run if the governments of Asiatic coun-
tries place at least as much emphasis on social and
political reform in the interest of the agricultural
population as they do on technical progress.
The importance of Asia today is not minimized
by a frank recognition of the difficulties inherent in
the situation. Indeed, the first step in meeting
these difficulties is in understanding them. While
it is true that we cannot expect business as usual
in Asia over the next few, predictable years,
there is hope, I feel, that in the long run the basic
economic needs of the various Asiatic countries
will increasingly assert themselves, and that this
factor may result in the restoration and expansion
of trading relations among the countries of Asia
and between Asia and the rest of the world.
Because of the general absence of large-scale
industrial development in Asia, wartime damage
to capital equipment was minor relative to that in
Europe. Consequently, economic recovery to
prewar levels of activity could be attained rapidly
by most Asiatic countries largely through their
own efforts and with relatively little capital ex-
penditure if present political obstacles were over-
come and if the rest of the world continues to
provide an effective demand for Asia's products.
Ocfober 17, 1948
THB RECORD OF THB WBBK
Importance must be attached, of course, to the
revival of such natural trade relations as exist
among' Asiatic countries and to the possibilities for
a graaual expansion of this trade. The major
long-run economic task of Asia, however, is the
new development of its agricultural and industrial
resources at a rate consistent with the availability
of domestic and foreign capital and with the level
of technical and administrative skills in the area.
^ In this connection, the position of the United
States as the leading exporting and creditor na-
tion of the world should lead to increasingly sig-
iiificant economic relations between the United
States and Asiatic countries. iVnierican commerce
and industry will, of course, continue to have an
active interest in Asia as a source of supply and as
a market. But the growing importance of eco-
nomic recovery and of the development of agri-
cultural and industrial resources of Asiatic
countries ^yill confront the United States with the
problem of how its resources can be made available
to those countries in the required volume.
As Ambassador Grady explained so lucidly be-
fore the Economic Commission for Asia and the
Far East in India last June, even if conditions were
favorable to large government loans, such loans
would fall far short of the magnitude of Asia's
capital requirements. Consequently, he pointed
out, it is necessary that Asiatic count:ries maximize
the use of private foreign capital. I recommend
Ambassador Gi-ady's statement as a persuasive ex-
position of the importance of direct foreign invest-
ment, with particular reference to the important
historical role of foreign capital, chiefly British
and American, in the industrial development of the
United States and Canada without infringement of
national sovereignty. I am sure that private
American capital is available for investment in
Asia, but only if the countries of that area desire
it. Such a desire, if it is to be realized, must of
course be expressed by the creation of conditions
which give prospect of reasonable treatment and
return for foreign capital.
The stringent economic conditions under which
Asiatic countries must continue their efforts
towards recovery and development also make it a
vital necessity that trade and investment be con-
ducted with the greatest possible economy. Im-
porters should be free to purchase in the readiest
and cheapest market; exports should be pushed in
whatever market can offer the best price in terms
of real value; investment should be directed into
industries which over the long run can compete
successfully in the world market without costly
subsidy. This is merely a restatement in plain
language of certain basic economic principles, es-
sentially those embodied in the draft charter for
an International Trade Organization.
The EcA is attempting to give expression to
those principles in the administration of its China
493
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
program. It has arranged that the "project en-
gineer" for each enterprise scheduled to receive
United States aid for replacement or reconstruc-
tion goods represent its client in seeking out the
best prices and deliveries obtainable in today's
world markets. Mr. Stillman of the Eca Mission
in China, and his Chinese associates, should be
commended for the formulation of this procedure,
for it not only should insure the greatest return
for Eca funds in China, but also should encourage
the reestablishment of multilateral trade.
It would seem self-evident from the foregoing
that the economic reconstruction of the countries
of Asia can proceed at a significant pace only with
the progressive resolution of the political problems
besetting the area. Unless these problems be re-
solved, the requisite stability cannot evolve. The
Department of State, without undertaking the role
of a political Atlas for all the world, has tried and
is trying to make its full contribution to the reso-
lution of the essential political conflicts through-
out Asia. The extent to which those efforts have
met with success and failure are, I believe, known
to you all. Necessarily related to the political
efforts of the United States is the substantial eco-
nomic assistance which this Government has ex-
tended to certain Asiatic countries. Such assist-
ance is being supplemented by allocations for
Asia from the funds appropriated by Congress for
European economic recovery. The contribution
which the United States Government economic
aid can make will depend in part on the role of
American business in carrying out expeditiously
the procurement and distribution aspects of our
aid programs. Over the long run, economic re-
covery and development in Asia will depend in
substantial measure upon the contribution which
American industry and finance can make as po-
litical conditions permit. Basically, however,
United States assistance, both public and private,
can, at best, be small in relation to the effort which
must be made by the governments and peoples of
the countries of Asia to help themselves if they
are to attain the success that all of us wish for
them.
Information on improper Treatment off
Americans Detained in Hungary
[Beleased to the press October 7]
Paul Kuedemann and George Bannantine,
American officials of Maort whose release from
custody by the Hungarian authorities was the
subject of an announcement by the Department
of State on September 27, 1948,^ have now returned
to this country. Supplementary information,
which they have already made known to the press,
is available concerning the circumstances of their
recent detention.
494
N Of Oct. 10, 1948, p. 469.
With regard to the so-called "confessions"
which have been attributed to them by the Hun-
garian authorities, Mr. Ruedemann and Mr. Ban-
nantine have affirmed that these statements were,
in fact, prepared by the Hungarian police, that
the contents of the documents are wholly false
and that they copied and signed these "confes-
sions" only under duress. The two men were
placed separately in solitary confinement in under-
gi'ound cells for the first four days and were sub-
jected to long periods of questioning at all hours
of the day and night. On various occasions they
were required to stand with their faces against
the wall and arms upraised until they collapsed.
During this time, they were permitted very little
food and sleep.
The arbitrary detention of these American citi-
zens, the unfoinided allegations made against
them, and the improper treatment which they
received while in custody are characteristic of the
methods employed by police states, where the
rights and dignity of the individual are, in prac-
tice, ignored.
Military Mission Agreement With Argentina
[Released to the press October 6]
There was signed on October 6, 1948, by Robert
A. Lovett, Acting Secretary of State, and Dr.
Jeronimo Remorino, Argentine Ambassador to
the United States, an agi-eement providing for the
detail of officers and enlisted men of the United
States Army as an advisory mission to serve in
Argentina. The agreement is to continue in force
for four years from the date of signature, but may
be extended beyond that period at the request of
the Government of Argentina.
The provisions of the agreement are similar to
those contained in numerous other agreements be-
tween the United States and certain other Amer-
ican republics providing for the detail of officers
and enlisted men of the United States Army,
Navy, Air Force, or Marine Corps to advise the
armed forces of those countries. The provisions
relate to the duties, rank, and precedence of the
personnel of the mission, the travel accommoda-
tions to be provided for the members of the mission
and their families, and other related matters.
THE CONGRESS
Aid to China. Message from the President of the United
States transmitting a proposed program of aid to China.
S. Doc. 120, 80th Cong., 2d sess. 4 pp. [Feb. 18, 1&48.]
Summary of Legislation Enacted by tiie Eightieth Con-
gress, Together With a Preliminary Statement Relative
Thereto Pursuant to the Request of the Honorable Ken-
neth S. Wherry, United States Senator From Nebraska.
S. Doc. 198, 80th Cong., 2d sess. ill, 52 pp.
Department of State Bulletin
The Spotlight of the International Scene ^
BY CHARLES E. SALTZMAN
Assistant Secretary for Occupied Areas
It was suggested that I talk to you about some
of the focal points of trouble in the world today.
This affords me a wide range of topics — much too
wide for treatment in a single talk. It is an un-
happy commentary on human atfairs today that
the trouble spots appear to be more numerous than
those left untroubled. Therefore I shall limit my-
self primarily to a discussion of the Berlin situa-
tion, within the larger context of American foreign
policy. AVhat I shall say is merely a review of
policy statements and background that have al-
ready been made public. The State Department
issued the Wliite Paper last week which reviewed
in considerable detail the course of events with re-
spect to the Berlin situation, and representatives
at the United Nations have made the American
position plain in their statements before the Gen-
eral Assembly and the Security Council. Wliat
I am saying, therefore, is merely a review and a
paraphrase of what has been said.
• ■ ■ • •
In appraising our present situation, it may be
instructive to recall our foreign policy course dur-
ing the past few years. The familiar Von Clause-
witz dictum was that war is an instrument for
carrying out political policy by other than political
means. We might define American foreign policy
since 194.5 as being in a sense the reveree : an effort
to achieve by peaceful means the same objectives
for which we fought the war. Every nation's for-
eign policy is necessarily based on its fundamental
national interest. We fought Germany and Japan
because they threatened our national security —
our right to live and govern oui-selves as we see fit
and to enjoy equal rights with other nations in
world trade and other international relationships.
The paramount aim of our foreign policy today
is still the preservation of our freedom and inde-
pendence, our right to develop and order our own
affairs without domination or interference from
abroad. We can best maintain our independence
and integrity, and develop our own resources in
the best interest of our people, in a peaceful world
community composed of other free and independ-
ent nations, each engaged in pi-oviding the best
life possible for its own people. Therefore, as a
means of achieving our number one objective, we
October 17, 1948
have as a secondary objective the establishment
of a world order conducive to peace and construc-
tive human progi'ess.
Thus we find that the United States and most of
the other countries of the world today are in fun-
damental agreement on the essential objects of
international relationships. We have a common
purpose and a community of interest with the
great majority of the other nations. There are
minor differences, of course, but these are all sus-
ceptible of adjustment by the ordinary processes of
negotiation. The supremely important thing is
that the United States and the majority of other
nations agree on fundamental principles and are
cooperating on hundreds of practical details that
make up the world's business.
International cooperation in overcoming the
suffering and devastation caused by the war and
in constructing a healthy, peaceful world order has
been the keynote of United States policy. Even
while the war was being fought, we took the lead
in the international conferences that resulted in
the creation of Unpra, the Food and Agriculture
Organization, the World Bank, the International
Monetary Fund, and the United Nations itself.
These plans for cooperative action were based
on the assumption, or at least the hope, that the
wartime collaboration of the Allied nations would
continue in the postwar period ; that all the Allies
had a common, constructive, postwar objective and
meant what they said in professing such an objec-
tive. The United States and the other major
Allied powers made every effort to assure the
Soviet Union that we sincerely desired to work
in close cooperation with them after the war. We
went to great lengths to convince the Russians that
our postwar plans did not threaten them in any
way and that the postwar settlements would take
into account the damage suffered by Russia in the
war and its legitimate security requirements.
After the fighting ended, we continued to hope
that the Soviet Union would reciprocate the
friendship and cooperatioii which the United
States and the other Western nations extended in
concrete form and on many occasions. However,
' Address delivered at the University of New Hampshire,
Durham, N. H., on Oct. 7, 1948, and released to the press
on the same date.
495
THE RCCORO OF THE WEEK
it became increasingly evident that Soviet policy
was animated by a spirit of rivalry and antago-
nism and that its primary aim was territorial ex-
pansion and the extension of Communism by
every possible means, regardless of the rights and
wishes of other peoples. It is now perfectly plain
that the policy of the Soviet Union is not based on
a genuine spirit of reciprocity and cooperation,
but on the dogmatic doctrine that conflict between
Communism and the rest of the world is inevitable
and must continue until one of the two rival sy-
stems utterly destroys the other. No matter what
the Communists may say on the cynical grounds
that the end justifies the means, all their acts con-
firm the conclusion that they are determined to
dominate the world and impose their will on all
other peoples.
This is the real and fundamental cause of the
differences that now dangerously divide the world
and imperil peace. It is not merely a struggle for
power between the Soviet Union and the United
States, as some even in this country would have
us believe. It is a contest of wills between the
group of police states directed from the Kremlin
and the free peoples of the world, whom the Soviet
dictators are trying, for whatever reason, to
dominate and control through the instrumentality
of international Communism.
The struggle is now world-wide and intense. It
is a conflict which the United States does not
desire and which we sought by all honorable means
to avoid. But the threat exists, and it jeopardizes
our national security and the fundamental rights
of our people as surely as Hitler did. We have no
recourse but to recognize the challenge and to take
bold measures to meet it successfully.
The record of the past three years shows that
this Government has recognized the threat and
has met it with measures that have achieved a
considerable degree of success. "Various well-
known examples can be cited, such as our support
of Iran, Greece, Turkey, Korea, Austria and, of
course the most outstanding, the Marshall Plan
itself. Our Government has consistently sought
to further the objectives of the United Nations
and to make the Charter the guiding principle
in the conduct of international affairs. It has
initiated steps to help Germany regain the status
of a worthy member of the family of nations, and
has stood firm in Berlin, the most critical point of
contact between the Soviet Union and the Western
powers.
As a result of our efforts, combined with those
of the other Western powers, direct Soviet control
has extended no further than, roughly, the line
reached by the Russian armies in 1945. The free
"BuiiETiN of Oct. 10, 1948, p. 455.
' Bulletin of Dec. 15, 1046, p. 1102.
nations outside the area occupied or dominated
by Soviet troops remain free and are substantially
stronger today than they were a year ago. The
boasted monolithic solidarity of the Communist
regimes of Eastern Europe shows unmistakable
cracks that bear witness to internal stresses that
even the secret police have been unable to elimi-
nate or gloss over.
This, in brief, has been our reaction to the world-
wide storm of which Berlin is the vortex. A more
detailed appraisal of the situation at Berlin and
the events that led to the submission of tliis ques-
tion to the United Nations may be instructive.^
We have been told by some Americans, for ex-
ample, that we could settle all our differences with
the Soviets if only we would sit down around the
conference table and enter into open-minded nego-
tiations. This advice has been reiterated, in spite
of earlier disillusioning experiences around the
conference table. We have found from experi-
ence that it is impossible to deal with the Russians,
like other nations, on a quid fro quo basis. They
take the quid and try to keep the quo.
This observation is substantiated by the record
of our dealiiigs with the Soviet Union in regard to
Germany. The plans for the Four Power occu-
pation of Germany were worked out by the major
Allied powers before V-E Day and were confirmed
and elaborated in the Potsdam agreement of
August 2, 1945. The right of free access of
American personnel and supplies to Berlin was a
requirement of the Four Power agreements and
was sanctioned by usage for three years.
One of the key provisions of the Potsdam agree-
ment stipulated that Germany was to be treated as
an economic unit. It is obvious that unless it were
so treated, no permanent rehabilitation of Ger-
many along sound and peaceful lines would be
possible. The Western powers tried repeatedly
in the Allied Control Council and in the Council of
Foreign Ministers to have this requirement put
into effect, but without success. Instead, it ig
obvious that the economy of the Soviet zone of
Germany has been systematically Sovietized and
that the Soviet zone has become in effect an eco-
nomic appendage of the Soviet Union. These uni-
lateral actions of the Soviet Union have kept Ger-
many divided economically and have placed ser-
ious obstacles in the way of the recovery of Ger-
many to even a subsistence level, not to mention
the laandicap this has imposed on European re-
covery as a whole.
Two years ago, when attempts to accomplish
German economic unity had been made in the Con-
trol Council for more than a year with no success,
the American and British Governments deter-
mined to unify as much of Germany as they could
in the interest of revising the prostrate economy.
So in December 1946 the American and British
zones were merged for economic purposes.^
496
Department of State Bulletin
The United States and Britain also felt that the
Germans must be given progressively greater
responsibility in political affairs to prepare Ger-
many for eventual return to self-govermnent as a
democratic and peaceful nation. Early this year
the United States and Britain consulted in London
with the French, Belgian, Netherlands, and
Luxembourg Governments. Agreement was
reached that, in view of the seeming impossibility
of reaching Four Power agreement on German
imity within any foreseeable future, the western
zones of Germany collectively should be allowed to
establish their own governmental organization,
with which the remainder of Gei-many could sub-
sequently join.*
While tlie London talks were in progress, the
Soviet Delegation left the Allied Control Council
and did not return. This wrecked the Four Power
administration of Germany. Subsequently, the
Soviet Representative withdrew from the Berlin
Kommandatura.
The Western powers, having failed in repeated
efforts to obtain Soviet agi-eement on a Four Power
plan for currency reform for Germany, introduced
a new currency in their zones last June 18. The
Soviets then introduced a new currency in their
zone and tried to apply it to all of Berlin. The
Western powers therefore found it necessary to
introduce their own currency in their sectors of
Berlin."
As early as last March 30, the Soviet authorities
began to apply restrictions to communications and
transportation between the Western zones and
Berlin. These reached a climax on June 23, when
the Soviet authorities halted all rail, highway, and
water transportation. This amounted to a block-
ade of the two and half million Germans and the
Allied personnel in the western sectors of Berlin.
The pretext first given by the Soviets was "tech-
nical difficulties", but they later made it clear that
their real motive was retaliation for the decisions
of the Western powers at the London conference.
The American and British authorities began to
supply their sectors of Berlin by air and have con-
tinued to do so with increasing success. The air-
lift operation has saved the Western sectors of
Berlin from being starved into submission and is
an achievement in which the American and British
peoples can take great pride. But it is an ex-
pensive substitute for normal supply methods.
The Western powers have used the time bought by
the American and British air forces to enter ne-
gotiations for lifting the totally unwarranted
blockade and permitting a resumption of normal
supply by land and water routes.
Efforts of the Military Governors of the
Western powers in Berlin to accomplish this
proved ineffective and the representatives of the
three Western powers in Moscow began a series of
Ocfober 17, 1948
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
conferences with Foreign Minister Molotov and
Generalissimo Stalin in an attempt to effect a
settlement.
The Western powers repeatedly stated that they
were standing firmly on their rights in Berlin —
rights derived from participation in the military
defeat and unconditional surrender of Germany
and confirmed by formal agreements among the
Four Powers. They emphasized that their right
to be in Berlin is "unquestionable and absolute,"
and that "they do not intend to be coerced by any
means whatsoever into abandoning this right."
They made it clear that they regarded the situa-
tion created by the Soviet blockade as extremely
serious but capable of settlement.
The record of the negotiations has been made
public in the White Paper issued recently by this
Government." Mention shall be made only of the
main points. In the meeting with American Am-
bassador Smith and the British and French Eep-
resentatives on August 2, Stalin proposed a settle-
ment based on the simultaneous replacement of
the Western currency with Soviet currency for all
Berlin and the removal of all transport restric-
tions. He also expressed the insistent wish that
the decisions of the London conference on Western
Germany not be carried out, but he did not make
this a condition for settlement of the Berlin situa-
tion. Ambassador Smith made it clear that the
Western powers always were willing to discuss
with the Soviets any problem concerning Ger-
many, pi'ovided we were not doing so under duress,
as in the case of the blockade.
When these proposals were submitted to the
Western governments, they accepted the Soviet
mark as the sole currency for Berlin in principle,
with the proviso that its issue and use be subject
to Four Power control. They also insisted on
Four Power arrangements to cover trade between
Berlin and the Western zones. Otherwise the So-
viets would have practical control of the economic
life of Berlin and might have us at their mercy
there.
The Western representatives in Moscow then
engaged in protracted negotiations with Molotov
on the wording of the draft of a Four Power com-
munique on the proposals. Molotov tried to limit
the transport restrictions to be removed only to
those imposed after June 18. He also tried to
reintroduce the question of the London agreement
on Western Germany, and to leave the proposed
Soviet curi-ency for Berlin and the trade of Berlin
under Soviet control. All these conditions were
contrary to the previous proposals. The discus-
' Bulletin of Mar. 21, 1948, p. 380.
' Bulletin of June 2T, 1948, p. 385.
° See The Berlin Crisis, a Report on the Moscoio Discus-
sions, 1948, Department of State publication 3298.
497
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
sions reached an impasse and the Western rep-
resentatives obtained another meeting with Stalin.
At this meeting, on August 23, the discussion
centered on a directive which the four governments
would send to their military governors in Berlin
for working out the technical details of the prin-
ciples already agreed upon. On this occasion. Am-
bassador Smith obtained confirmation from Stalin
that the transport restrictions to be lifted included
those imposed before as well as after June 18.
Stalin also confirmed the understanding of the
Western powers that the Soviet currency for Ber-
lin would be controlled and supervised by the Four
Powers jointly.
Following another meeting with Molotov on
August 27, in which he again tried vmsuccessfully
to tie the hands of the Western powers with respect
to the London decisions, an agreed directive was
dispatched to the four military governors in
Berlin.
Beginning August 31, the military governors
met daily in Berlin during the week given them to
complete their task. In the words of the Wliite
Paper, "It soon became apparent that Marshal
Sokolovsky (the Soviet Military Governor) was
not ready to honor the understandings reached in
Moscow." He went outside the terms of the agreed
directive and sought to impose restrictions on air
traffic. Despite Stalin's agreement, Sokolovsky
declared he would agree to remove only those
transport restrictions imposed after June 18. He
also sought to subject the currency and trade of
Berlin to exclusive Soviet control. The discus-
sions in Berlin ended in futility and frustration.
The Western powers then delivered an aide-
memoire to Stalin and Molotov in which they cited
the principles agreed upon and the assurances
given during the previous discussions in Moscow,
and contrasted the divergences from them appar-
ent in Marshal Sokolovsky's position. The three
Western Governments asked pointedly if the So-
viet Government was prepared to carry out the
understandings previously reached and to instruct
the Soviet Military Governor to be bound by them.
Molotov's reply upheld the position taken by Mar-
shal Sokolovsky and blamed the Western powers
for the failure of the Berlin discussions. Another
exchange of notes left the matter substantially
unchanged.
On September 26 the three Western Govern-
ments addressed identical notes to the Soviet Gov-
ernment in whicli they reviewed the course of the
negotiations and concluded that the issue between
the Soviet Government and the Western powers
was not difficulties in communication or in cur-
rency regulation.'' "The issue," they declared, "is
that the Soviet Government ... is attempt-
' Bulletin of Oct. 3, 1948, p. 423.
' Bulletin of Oct. 10, 1048, p. 455.
498
ing by illegal and coercive measures in disregard
of its obligations to secure political objectives to
which it is not entitled and which it could not
achieve by peaceful means."
The Western Governments asserted that the
Soviet Government was solely responsible for cre-
ating a situation which rendered impossible fur-
ther recourse to the processes of peaceful settle-
ment specified in article 33 of the United Nations
Charter. They further declared that the situation
created by the Soviet Union constitutes a threat to
international peace and security. The three Gov-
ernments stated that, while reserving full rights
to take any necessary measures to maintain their
position in Berlin, they would refer the action of
the Soviet Government to the Security Council of
the United Nations.
The three Governments on September 29 re-
ferred the matter to the United Nations as a threat
to the peace within the meaning of chapter 7 of the
Charter.^ Article 39, the first article of that chap-
ter, states that:
"The Security Council shall determine the ex-
istence of any threat to the peace, breach of the
peace, or act of aggression and shall make recom-
mendations, or decide what measures shall be
taken in accordance with Articles 41 and 42, to
maintain or restore international peace and
security."
The case presented by the Three Powers lies . |
squarely within the province of the United Na- f
tions, because the issue is whether coercion may be
used by one Member against others in pursuance of
its political objectives in such a way that peace is
threatened. The three Western powers, therefore,
have submitted to the United Nations a matter that
is within its general responsibility. They have
laid their full case before the proper forum, the
Security Council, for its judgment on the merits.
It is well known, of coui-se, that a permanent mem-
ber of the Security Comicil can frustrate the Coun-
cil's action by exercise of the veto power. How-
ever, the three Western Governments have made . >
it clear that they will exhaust every possibility |
and collaborate in every way through United Na-
tions procedures to remove the threat to peace.
The present case places on the Soviet Union a clear
responsibility for demonstrating before the eyes
of the world the extent to which it will honor its
obligations under the Charter.
The painstaking effort of the Western powers to
find a satisfactory solution of the critical Berlin
situation through direct negotiation with the high-
est authorities of the Soviet Union yielded only
bitter disappointment and did not remove the most i
dangerous threat to world peace that now exists. '
But this experience, though exasperating and frus-
trating, confirmed the earnestness of the Western
Department of State Bulletin
powers in seekincr to compose their differences with
the Soviet Union by negotiation, as long as there
is tlie least hope of success. It also emphasized
their unalterable determination not to compromise
on vital principles, nor yield to coercion, nor take
the easy but fatal way of appeasement.
The Moscow-Berlin discussions should clarify
for the American people the nature of the para-
mount problem which this country faces in world
affairs. The record provides a case history of the
enormous difficulties encountered by a peaceful,
democratic government in dealing with an aggres-
sive dictatorship-type government with wholly
different objectives and a wholly different concept
of international relations.
This is a new kind of test for the American
people. "We have responded to the terrible ordeal
of war with a singleness of purpose and a con-
centration of effort that have always brought vic-
tory. But we are engaged now in a struggle that
cannot be settled properly by some quick and de-
cisive action. We are exerting our utmost effort
to avoid war. We hope to win this conflict this
side of war, by patience, calmness, and spiritual
fortitude. Perhaps this will not be possible, but
we shall proceed on the assumption that it is
possible.
The primary lesson of our postwar experience
and particularly of the past few months is that
there is no short cut to the kind of world we want.
We dare not seek the easy way out through wishful
thinking, escapism, or appeasement, lest we drop
through the trap door to oblivion. There is no
magic formula, no man-made miracle, that will
quickly free us of the ever present danger inherent
in the machinations of a ruthless and unrestrained
group who wield great power.
The eyes of the American people should now be
fully opened. We have completed a painful proc-
ess of disillusionment. We know now that the
Soviet rulers have no intention of cooperating in
establishing peace and order in the world. They
have made this abundantly clear by their postwar
behavior. The Soviet Union is the only major
power that has annexed territory as a result of
the war. It has used its special position in eastern
Europe to dominate and exploit smaller countries
and reduce them to the status of satellites. It has
flouted the will of the majority in the United Na-
tions by excessive use of the veto and by boycotting
the Interim Committee of the General Assembly
and the special Commissions for Korea and the
Balkans. It has blocked the majority plan for
the international control of atomic energy, with-
out offering a satisfactory substitute. It used its
dominant role in the recent Danubian conference
to dictate terms that ostensibl}- assure freedom of
navigation but actually give the Soviets absolute
October 17, 1948
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
control over all commerce on the lower Danube.
It delayed and impeded the peace treaties with
the lesser former enemy states and has obstructed
the negotiation of peace settlements with
Austria, Japan and, most conspicuously, Germany.
It rejected an invitation to participate in the Euro-
pean Recovery Program and proclaimed its deter-
mination to defeat that gi-eat* cooperative
enterprise.
The Soviet rulers have thus made it plain that
their real aim is world domination through the
instrumentality of Communism and that they will
stoop to any stratagem of coercion, subterfuge,
duplicity, or double-dealing that serves their pur-
pose. Their aims and their methods are a direct
threat to the national security of the United States.
Forewarned by this knowledge, we must be fore-
armed by an alertness to danger and a readiness to
preserve our security and freedom at all cost. If
we do so, the prospects of peace will be much
greater, since it would then be less likely that any
foreign power would attempt to coerce this and
other countries by force.
This is the ordeal which we and the other free
peoples of our time must endure and survive. It
is a reality which we must face and grapple with —
from which we cannot turn away. The first re-
quirement is that we clearly recognize the danger
and meet it energetically and courageously. We
have what it takes to win if we understand our
problem.
In view of the implications of the problem,
surely nothing is more important today to every
American citizen than to know and understand
what has happened in the world since the end of
World War II and what these events mean to the
United States. It is of utmost importance that
every citizen understand what has happened and
follow as carefully as possible the development of
events from now on in order that we and our
neighboi-s may be in a position to judge for our-
selves whatever may be necessary in our national
interest and to protect our national security. It is
supremely important that we understand, support,
and, if necessary, urge those actions, both domestic
and foreign, which may, as time goes on, best pro-
tect our national security and the world's peace.
I wish some assurance could be given that the
critical situation in Berlin will be resolved peace-
fully and soon. Such assurance cannot be given.
All that the American Government and the other
governments with which it is associated can do is
to assure their citizens that they will do their
utmost to keep the peace by all means consistent
with justice and honor.
I think that is all the American people will ask
of them.
499
Franco-American Negotiations on Motion Pictures
ANNOUNCEMENT OF JOINT DECLARATION
French Foreign Minister Robert Schuman,
Minister of Industry and Commerce Robert La-
coste, and Ambassador Jefferson Caffery signed
on September 16 in Paris a Joint Declaration of
the Government of the United States of America
and the Government of the French Republic on
Motion Pictures.
The French Government in January 1948 re-
quested negotiations looking toward modification
of the Franco- American (Blum-Byrnes) motion-
picture understanding of May 28, 1946, in accord-
ance with its provisions. ^ The negotiations not
having reached a conclusion satisfactory to both
Governments within six months from the request
for negotiations, the Blum-Byrnes understanding,
as provided therein, has expired. Further nego-
tiations resulted in the Joint Declaration of Sep-
tember 16, 1948, the text of which is attached.
The Department of State considers that the
screen quota decided upon by the French Govern-
ment (nve weeks a quarter reserved for the show-
ing of French films) is not inconsistent with the
provisions of article IV of the General Agi-eement
on Tariffs and Trade. The Department also con-
siders that the French Government's decision to
, institute a distribution quota system limiting the
number of foreign feature films dubbed into
French which will be authorized for distribution
annually in the French Union is not inconsistent
with the provisions of articles XII and XIII of
the general agreement in view of the current
French balance-of -payments diflSculties.
JOINT DECLARATION OF THE GOVERNMENT OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
AND THE GOVERNMENT OF THE FRENCH REPUBLIC ON MOTION PICTURES
The Government of the United States of
America and the Government of the French Re-
public have, at the request of the latter, re-ex-
amined certain questions relating to the distri-
bution and exhibition in the French Union of
American motion picture films, and, in particular,
the Franco-American motion picture understand-
ing of May 28, 1946. During these conversations,
the specific problems relating to the distribution
and exhibition of American films in the French
Union have been discussed in the light of the spe-
cial conditions facing the French Government
resulting from its external financial position and
balance of payments and other postwar problems
of economic adjustment. These conversations
have taken place with due regard for the relevant
provisions of the international conventions and
agreements to which both Governments are par-
ties.
I. The French Government has informed the
Government of the United States of America that
in view of the current situation in the French film
industry it is necessary to increase the screen time
' Bulletin of June 9, 1946, p. 999.
' Annexes not printed. For complete text, see Depart-
ment of State press release 746 of Sept. 16, 1948.
500
reserved to films of national origin. The Franco-
American motion picture understanding of May
28, 1946 having exijired in accordance with the
provisions therein, the French Govermnent has
decided, consistent with Article IV of the General
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade of October 30,
1947, to reserve five weeks per quarter for the
exhibition of French films, except as otherwise
noted (Annex A).^
II. The French Government has decided to
make certain modifications in its administrative
regulations regarding the two-year rule, fifteen
situations restriction, and allocation of raw stock
(Annexes B, C and D).
III. In view of the current French external
financial situation and balance of payments, the
French Government has decided to institute a
distribution quota system ( applicable to imported
films which are dubbed in France for distribution
in the French Union) which it considers to be
within the provisions of Articles XII and XIII of
the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade.
Recognizing its obligations under the above-men-
tioned articles of the General Agi'eement, the
French Government undertakes to relax progres-
sively the restriction referred to in this paragraph
as its balance of payments situation improves and
Department of State Bulletin
to eliminate the restriction when conditions no
longer justify its maintenance (Annex E).
Tlie Government of the United States of
America takes note of this decision of the French
Government without prejudice to any rights which
the United States Government may have under
the General Agreement with respect to any action
which the French Government may take to im-
plement this decision.
IV. The two Governments have reached a mu-
tually satisfactory understanding with respect to
the financial problems arising from the distribu-
tion and exhibition in the French Union of Amer-
ican films (Annex F).
V. The arrangements outlined above shall enter
into force retroactively on July 1, 1948, and
shall remain in effect for four years from that
date. Either party may request, within two
months of the expiration of each annual period, a
review of the provisions contained in any of the
annexed documents, except as otherwise provided.
This agreement, however, shall continue in full
force and effect for four years except to the extent
that both parties agree to modifications thereof.
Done at Paris, in duplicate, in the English and
French languages, this sixteenth day of Septem-
ber, 1948.
For the Government of the United States of
America :
Jefferson Caffert
Ambassador Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary
of the United States of America
For the Government of the Kepublic of France :
Robert Schtjman
Minister of Foreign Affairs
of the Rejnthlic of France
Robert Lacoste
Minister of Inditstry and Commerce
of the Republic of France
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Between 500,000 and 600,000 displaced persons
are now concentrated in more than 200 camps
maintained throughout Germany and Austria and
in parts of Italy by the International Refugee Or-
ganization, a unit of the United Nations. In ad-
dition, up to 400,000 others who are homeless out-
side of the camps in Central Europe are also po-
tential applicants for admission into the United
States.
From this group of about a million left homeless
by the ravages of World War II in Europe, 205,000
are to be permitted by law to enter the United
States during the next two years, provided they
can meet qualifications as to skills, ethnic origins,
and time of arrival at their present abodes, and
provided also satisfactory assurances in their be-
half have been provided for employment, housing,
or against their becoming public charges.
The 72 Foreign Service personnel now to pro-
ceed into Germany, Austria, and Italy, evenly di-
vided between visa officers and clerks, are the fore-
runners of a very much larger group which will
be required to implement the displaced-persons
program. A preliminary sum of $250,000 has al-
ready been allocated for the purpose, mostly to
the Foreign Service, by the Displaced Persons
Commission. The rate of spending, it is esti-
mated, will exceed the approjoriation made avail-
able to the Displaced Persons Commission, and
therefore it is expected that a deficiency appro-
priation will be requested of Congress in March of
1949.
The work of providing transportation of dis-
placed persons from Europe into the United States
IS being expedited by a staff of some 20 selectors
and analysts of the Displaced Persons Commis-
sion in the various camps, who have been screen-
ing eligibles fi"om the thousands of cases already
processed by already over-worked American con-
sular staffs.
THE FOREIGN SERVICE
Foreign Service To Assist Displaced Persons
Commission
[Released to the press October 8]
A group of 72 members of the Foreign Service
experienced in visa work are being rushed into
Germany, Austria, and Italy as the result of budg-
etary clearance obtained on October 8 at a meet-
ing of Budget Bureau officials with representatives
of the Department of State and the Displaced
Persons Commission. The arrival of this group
at their new posts in Central Europe is expected
to break the log jam which has been holding up
the displaced-persons program passed by Congress
at the last session.
Ocfofaer 17, 1948
Richard C. Patterson, Jr., Appointed
Ambassador to Guatemala
Appointment of Richard C. Patterson, Jr., of
New York City, as United States Ambassador
to Guatemala was announced on September 29 by
the White House.
Resignation of Dwight Griswold
On September 15 the White House announced the resig-
nation of Dwight Griswold as Chief of the American Mis-
sion for Aid to Greece, effective September 15, 1948. For
the texts of Mr. Griswold's letter to the President and
the President's reply, see White House press release of
September 15, 1948.
Consular Offices
The American Consulate at Plymouth, England, was
closed to the public on September 30, 1948.
501
Executive Order Issued for Administration of
Trade-Agreements Program
On October 5, 1948, the President signed Execu-
tive Order 10004/ prescribing revised procedures
for the administration of the reciprocal trade-
agreements program in accordance with the Trade
Agreements Act of 1934, as amended, and the
Trade Agreements Extension Act of 1948.^ The
new Executive order inchides subject matter here-
tofore covered by three earlier orders which are
revoked.
The new order, in general, continues in effect
earlier practice under the trade-agreements pro-
gram with modifications made necessary by the
Trade Agreements Extension Act of 1948. The
order prescribes procedures to be followed by the
Trade Agreements Committee in concluding trade
agreements; by the Committee for Keciprocity
Information in obtaining the views of interested
persons on agreements ; and by the Tariff Commis-
sion in the event of serious injury or threat of
serious injury to domestic industry.
The Interdepartmental Committee on Trade
Agreements will continue to function as the cen-
tral operating committee, giving effect to the re-
quirement of the Trade Agi-eements Act that the
President seek information and advice from cer-
tain named government agencies before conclud-
ing a trade agreement. Membership in the Com-
mittee will consist of persons appointed by the
Secretaries of State, Treasury, Defense, Agricul-
ture, Commerce, and Labor and by the Adminis-
trator for Economic Cooperation, under the chair-
manship of the representative from the Depart-
ment of State. In accordance with the Trade
Agreements Extension Act of 1948, the Tariff
Commission no longer has a representative as a
member of this Committee, but arrangements have
been made for an observer from the Tariff Com-
mission to attend the meetings of the committee
for the purpose of supplying the information
hereinafter referred to.
The Committee for Reciprocity Information,
which will continue to receive, digest, and circu-
late to the entire trade-agreements organization
the views of interested persons regarding any
phase of proposed or existing trade agi-eements, is
to consist of the same persons as those who are
members of the Committee on Trade Agreements.
The Committee for Reciprocity Information will
' 13 Fed. Reg. 5851.
* Bdixetin of Mar. 14, 1948, p. 351.
502
function under the chairmanship of the represent-
ative of the Department of (Jommerce, and its
offices are being moved to the Department of
Commerce.
The order provides that, as before, the Trade
Agreements Coimnittee shall submit to the Presi-
dent for his approval a list of articles on which
possible United States tariff concessions may be
considered in the negotiation of proposed trade
agreements. Upon approval of the list by the
President, the Trade Agreements Committee pub-
lishes the list and a notice of intention to nego-
tiate. At the same time the Committee for Rec-
iprocity Information announces opportunity for
the submission of written testimony and for sub-
sequent oral testimony concerning concessions to
be offered and granted.
In accordance with the 1948 act, the list is also
to be transmitted to the Tariff Commission upon
being approved by the President, for confidential
report by the Commission as to the minimum
United States duties which are required, in its
judgment, to avoid threat of serious injury to
domestic industry, and as to any United States
import restrictions in addition to those already in
effect, necessary to prevent such injury. In the
course of its investigations, the Commission is to
hold public hearings. Reports of the Commission
are to be completed within 120 days and trans-
mitted to the President for his guidance in ap-
proving concessions to be offered in proposed trade
agreements.
The Tariff Commission is also to furnish to the
interdepartmental trade-agreements organization
factual data relative to production, trade, and con-
sumption of articles under consideration for con-
cession by the United States, and is to supply facts
on probable effects of granting concessions and on
the competitive factors involved.
Similarly, the Department of Commerce is to
submit to the Trade Agreements Coimnittee studies
of the trade and other facts regarding each article
exported from the United States on which the
United States may consider seeking a foreign con-
cession in a trade agreement.
On the basis of all the data available, the Trade
Agreements Committee recommends to the Presi-
dent concessions to be sought or offered. A full
report must also be made by the dissenting mem-
ber or members on any dissent from the Commit-
tee's recommendations.
Department of State Bulletin
In conformity with past practice, each agree-
ment is to contain a niost-favored-nation commit-
ment, and as required in an earlier order, all trade
agreements are to include the comprehensive
escape clause providing that future concessions
may be modified or withdrawn if, as a result of
unforeseen developments and of a concession in
the trade agreement, any article on which a con-
cession has been granted is being imported in such
increased quantities and under such conditions as
to cause or threaten serious injury to domestic
industry. Procedure is also provided, as in an
earlier order, for Tariff Commission investigations
to determine and recommend to the President for
his consideration in the light of the public interest
whether concessions are causing or threatening in-
jurv under this clause.
Both the Trade Agreements Committee and the
Tariff Commission are to keep mformed at all
times of the operation and effect of agreements in
force. At least once a year the Commission is to
submit to the President and to Congress a factual
report on operation of the program.
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
and those countries. A treaty was negotiated with
Haiti for the further Haitianization of the treaty
services, but it was rejected by the Haitian Con-
gress. In Nicaragua assistance was given in the
supervision of an election, following which the
Guardia Nacional was transferred to Nicaraguan
officers and the United States Marines were with-
drawn from the country.
Other subjects treated include an Argentine pro-
posal for an antiwar treaty, trade relations with
Argentina, and claims conventions with Mexico
and Panama.
Foreign Relations of the United States, volume
V, The American Republics, was compiled by
Victor J. Farrar of the Division of Historical
Policy Eesearch, under the direction of E. R. Per-
kins, Editor of Foreign. Relations. Copies of this
volume (979 pages) may be purchased from the
Superintendent of Documents, Government Print-
ing Office, Washington, D. C, for $3.25 each.
THE DEPARTMENT
Volume V of Foreign Relations of the
U.S., 1932, Released
[Released to the press October 9]
The Department of State released on October 6
Foreign Relations of the United States, 1932,
volume V, The American Republics. This volume
completes the Foreign Relations series for 1932.
Diplomatic attention of the United States with
respect to its neighbors to the south in 1932 was
centered in efforts to assist in the adjustment of
conflicts between sister republics. Fighting was
renewed in the Chaco dispute between Bolivia and
Paraguay, with the Commission of Neutrals
headed by Francis White endeavoring to secure
peace through its own good offices and by the co-
operation of the ABCP Republics (Argentina,
Brazil, Chile, and Peru) and the League of Na-
tions. The controversy between Colombia and
Peru concerning Leticia threatened to bring open
warfare. There were also boundary disputes be-
tween Ecuador and Peru and between Guatemala
and Honduras.
To add to the international conflicts there was
political unrest, insurrection, or successful revolu-
tion in Brazil, Chile, Costa Rica, Cuba, El Salva-
dor, Honduras, and Peru. In some of such
disorders Communism played a part. The United
States followed a policy of nonintervention in
these domestic conflicts but was concerned with the
* protection of American rights and the question of
the recognition of new governments.
Documents in the sections on Haiti and Nica-
ragua deal with problems concerning the special
relations then existing between the United States
Ocfofaer 17, J 948
Appointment of Officers
Benjamin M. Hiilley as Chief of the Division of Northern
European Affairs, effective July 25, 1948.
Willard F. Barber as Chief of the Division of Central
America and Panama Affairs, effective September 5, 1948.
G. Fredericli Keinhardt as Chief of the Division of
Eastern European Affairs, effective August 30, 1948.
Jack C. McDermott as Chief of the Division of Inter-
national Press and Publications, effective September 5,
1948.
Richard M. Scammon as Chief of the Division of Re-
search for Europe, effective August 27, 1948.
Walter Wilds as Deputy Assistant Secretary for Occu-
pied Areas, effective October 6, 1948.
PUBLICATIONS
Department of State
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, Govern-
ment Printing Office, Washington 25, D. 0. Address re-
guests direct to the Superintendent of Documents, except
in the case of free publications, which may be obtained
from the Department of State.
Fourth Report to Congress on Assistance to Greece and
Turkey for the period ended June 30, 1948. Economic
Cooperation Series 12. Pub. 3278. 71 pp. 250.
Fourth quarterly report of expenditures and activities
in conjunction with the program for aid to Greece
and Turkey. Appraises the military and economic
.situation in Greece and Turkey at the close of one
year of U. S. aid.
Diplomatic List, September 1948. Pub. 3281. 190 pp.
30(f a copy ; $3.25 a year domestic, $1.50 a year foreign.
Monthly list of foreign diplomatic representatives in
Washington, with their addresses.
503
^jCe^rU^
The U.N. and Specialized Agencies Page
Third Regular Session of the General Assem-
bly:
Discussions on Progress of TJ.N. in Paris:
Statement by the President 483
Statement by Secretary Marshall .... 483
Discussion in the Security Council of the
Berlin Crisis. Statement by Philip C.
Jessup 484
The U.S. in the U.N 490
General Policy
Asia Today. By W. Walton Butterworth . . 492
Information on Improper Treatment of
Americans Detained in Hungary .... 494
The Spotlight of the International Scene.
By Charles E. Saltzman 495
International information and
Cultural Affairs
First Congress of the International Theatre
Institute. Article by Rosamond Gilder . 488
Economic Affairs
Second Meeting of Wool Study Group .... 491
Treaty Information
Military Mission Agreement With Argen-
tina 494
Treaty Information — Continued F«g*
Franco-American Negotiations on Motion
Pictures:
Announcement of Joint Declaration .... 500
Joint Declaration of the Government of
the United States and the Govern-
ment of the French Republic on Mo-
tion Pictures 600
Executive Order Issued for Administration
of Trade-Agreements Program 502
Tlie Foreign Service
Foreign Service To Assist Displaced Per-
sons Commission 501
Richard C. Patterson, Jr., Appointed Am-
bassador to Guatemala 601
Resignation of Dwight Griswold 501
Consular Offices 501
The Department
Appointment of Officers 608
Publications
Volume V of Foreign Relations of the U.S.,
1932, Released 503
Department of State 503
The Congress 491, 494
t
wm^Mmotovi
Rosamond Oilder, author of the article on the First Congress of the
International Theatre Institute, is Secretary of the American National
Theatre and Academy and Secretary General of the United States
Center of the International Theater Institute, and was a member of the
United States Observer Delegation to the theater meeting at Praha,
Czechoslovakia.
V. i. aovuHHiiir nmrm orricii i>4i
tJrie/ ^eha^tmeni/ aw tnai&
DISCUSSION OF THE PALESTINE SITUATION IN
COMMITTEE I • Statement hy Ralph Bunche . . 517
WORLD CONFIDENCE AND THE REDUCTION OF
ARMED FORCES: THE AMERICAN OBJECTIVE •
Remarks by Ambassador Warren R. Austin 511
NORTH PACIFIC REGIONAL AIR NAVIGATION
MEETING OF THE ICAO • Article by Clifford
p. Burton 523
CONSTITUTION-MAKING AT BONN • An Article . . 507
For complete contents see back cover
Vol. XIX, No. 486
October 24, 1948
-*TB»
^»"T O,
•'vr ^,^j,j
I
U.
^^ 2
1348
'eha/yime/nt
y^.^ bulletin
Vol. XIX, No. 486 • Publication 3320
October 24, 1948
For sale by the Superintendent of Docnments
U.S. Govemment Printing Office
Washington 26, D.O.
Peici:
£2 issues, domestic $5, toreign $7J5
Single copy, 15 cents
Published with the approval of the
Director of the Bureau of the Budget
Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
Of State BtJLLETm as the source will be
ftppreciated.
The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
wiational affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
terruitional agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.
Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.
CONSTITUTION-MAKING AT BONN
An Article^
Overshadowed by the more dramatic develop-
ments that are taking place in Berlin, a conclave
of G5 German political leaders is sitting these days
at Bonn on the Khine— a meeting that may rank
in the perspective of history as a much more sig-
nificant event. This "Parliamentary Council", as
it is officially called, is engaged in the task of draw-
ing up a constitution for the government of West-
ern Germany.
These 65 men are the representatives of the 46,-
000,000 Germans who live in the states of the
Western zones of Germany. Assembled in this
gathering are the delegates from Bavaria, Wiirt-
temberg-Baden, Hesse, and the city of Biemen in
the United States zone; North Ehine Westphalia,
Lower Saxony, Schleswig-Holstein, and tlie city
of Hamburg in the British zone; and the Khine
Palatinate, South Baden, and Wiirttemberg-Ho-
henzollern in the French zone. Furthermore, Ber-
lin, the former German capital, is represented by
a delegation of five which may take part in the
discussions but may not vote.
This constitutional convention was solemnly
opened in the presence of leading Allied Military
Government officials and the German ministers
president in the Western zones on September 1,
and is expected to sit at least until the end of Oc-
tober. Its debates are being held in the quarters
of the Pedagogical Academy, a teachers' training
college. It is an ultramodern building located on
the banks of the Rhine, so that the delegates, look-
ing through the window of the main hall, can see
the ships passing up and down on this storied
river.
The significance of the assembly lies in the fact
that it represents the first attempt to reconstruct
Germany- politically since Count Schwerin-Krosig
announced the capitulation of Xazi Germany at
Flensburg on May 7, 1945. It is a coincidence that
this gathering should be held exactly 100 years
October 24, 7948
after the Frankfort Parliament in 1848 had finally
attempted to bestow a democratic constitution on
the people of Germany. And almost 30 years had
elapsed since the Weimar convention drafted the
constitution of the first German republic.
While both Frankfort on the Main and Weimar
are closely associated with the name of Goethe,
the present constitution-makers of German}^ are
meeting in the pleasant Rhine town that is known
throughout the world as the birthplace of Bee-
thoven as well as the seat of an ancient and famous
university. But there is one vital difference be-
tween the Frankfort and Weimar congresses and
the gathering at Bonn. While the earlier conven-
tions represented all of Germany, no delegates
from tlie Soviet zone are permitted by the Russian
authorities to attend the sessions of the Parliamen-
tary Council. Bomi is therefore no German Na-
tional Assembly. Arid although it is the most
important step that has been taken since the war
to obtain the political unity of Germany, the Rus-
sians and their Communist supporters are shouting
from the housetops that the Bonn convention is
"splitting Germany."
The political leaders at Bonn are very sensitive
about this accusation — so sensitive that they are
careful to emphasize the fact that what they are
doing now is laying the foundation of what they
call "a provisional government of a state-frag-
ment" and not the definitive constitution of a
united Germany. This all-German constitution,
they contend, can only be written when the repre-
sentatives from all over the Reich can convene and
when Germany's political sovereignty has been re-
stored. And this constitution, they assert, cannot
' Prepared by John Elliot, Chief, Political Activities
Branch, Civil Administration Division, Omgus. This ar-
ticle is reprinted from the Information Bulletin, of Oct. 5,
1948. of the U.S. Military Government in Germany.
507
be drafted while Germany is under Allied occu-
pation.
This German point of view was aptly expressed
by Dr. Carlo Schmid, eminent professor of polit-
ical science from the University of Tiibingen, in
his address before the Social Democratic Congress
in Dusseldorf early in September. Said Schmid :
"No definitive solution will be sought in Bomi.
All who work there, at least all Social Democrats,
know that only a provisional government can be
created. We will be able to create a state in the
true sense of the word only when an agi'eement of
the four occupying 2:)0wers has been reached con-
cerning an all-German policy. Every other solu-
tion would be bought at the risk of a world
catastrophe."
This fear of leaving themselves open to the
charge of being guilty of "splitting" Germany was
the cause of the protracted debate on nomencla-
ture between the three Allied Military Gover-
nors of Western Germany and the ministers
president of the 11 states. The Germans objected
to calling the document whicli they were sum-
moned to draw up a "constitution" as stipulated
in the London agreement concluded by the United
States, British, and French Governments, which
constitutes the legal basis of the Bonn meeting.
The Germans succeeded in getting the name
changed to "Fundamental Law of a Provisional
Constitution" {Grwidgesetz VorlMwfige V erf as-
sung). Likewise, instead of labeling itself a Con-
stitutional Convention, the Bonn gathering styles
itself a Parliamentary Council.
Finally, the German ministers president ob-
jected to the proposal to have their constitution
ratified at a referendum. They feared that this
would give a binding character to a document — a
distinction which they felt sliould be reserved for
the definitive constitution of Germany. They
pleaded that this charter should be ratified by the
parliaments of the states. The Allied Military
Governors in the end agreed to pass on the German
objections to their respective governments, but no
decision lias as yet been taken on this point.
The delegates to the Bonn convention were
named by the state parliaments according to the
political strength of the political parties repre-
sented in them, in the ratio of one delegate to every
375,000 inhabitants. Hence, the Bonn convention
508
reflects the political division of Germany as re-
corded by the last state parliamentary elections
(these were held in the United States zone in
November and December 1946) , and do not neces-
sarily indicate existing German political thought.
Tlie Bonn convention is made up as follows :
CDU/CSU 27
SPD 27
Liberals 5
Communists 2
Center Party 2
German Party 2
Total 65
It will be seen that the Parliamentary Council
is dominated by tlie two big parties, Christian
Democratic Union bloc (including its sister party,
the Christian Social Union of Bavaria and the
French zone) and the Social Democratic Party.
The Bavarian Party, whicli is today rivaling the
CSU in that state, is not represented at all in the
convention because it did not exist at the time of
the Bavarian elections. It is a party composed
of dissidents from the CSU. It represents extreme
Bavarian home rule, if not separatist elements, and
its failure to have a voice in the convention weak-
ens the federalistic faction.
The Bonn convention has been organized by
these two big parties. Konrad Adenauer, long
time mayor of Cologne and leader of the CDU in
the Britisli zone, was unanimously elected presi-
dent of the Assembly. Its deputy chairman is
Adolph Schonfelder, Social Democratic president
of the Hamburg Biirgerscliaft.
Some of the ablest political figures of contem-
porary Germany are sitting in the Bonn Parlia-
ment. Besides Adenauer, the CDU is represented
by Anton Pfeiffer from Bavaria, who dominated
the Chiemsee meeting which drew up a list of
proposals for the Bonn gathering.
The Social Democratic delegation includes Dr.
Walter Menzel, tlie Minister of the Interior in
North Rhine Westphalia, who has drawn up the
Social Democratic paper on what the new constitu-
tion ought to be; Professor Bergstriisser, an au-
thority on international law who comes from
Hesse; and Carlo Schmid, who next to Dr. Kurt
Scliumacher is probably the dominating figure in
his party.
The Democrats have sent Theodor Heuss, a vet-
[iepat\mQn\ of Sfafe Bulletin
eran German liberal who was formerly Minister
of Education in Wiir(tonibcri>-Baden.
Although tlie Communists have onl}^ two dele-
gates at the convention, one of them is their leader
in Western Germany — Max Reimami. He is an
able and aggressive debater.
Berlin is represented by a delegation consisting
of Paul Liibe, the former Reichstag president;
Ernst Renter, Otto Suhr, speaker of the Berlin
City Council ; Jakob Kaiser, the former CDU lead-
er in the Eastern zone who was deposed from his
office by the Russians; and Dr. Reiff of the Liberal
Democratic Party.
The Communists' attitude toward the conven-
tion was laid down by Reimann in the opening
meeting. They deny that the Bonn convention has
any authority to draft a constitution for Western
Germany. Reimami submitted a motion to the
eifect that the "Parliamentary Council was insti-
tuting discussions on a separate West German
constitution," and warned that the Bonn meeting
■would have disastrous consequences on the Moscow
and Berlin negotiations. After rowdy scenes that
recalled the debates in the prewar German Reichs-
tag, his motion was defeated with only the two
Communists supporting it.
As in the Philadeli^hia Convention of 1787 that
drew up the American Constitution, the principal
issue at stake in the Bonn gathering revolved
around the distribution of power between the cen-
tral government and the states. The London
agreement stipulates that the Western German
government shall be federal in character, but then
what is federalism? The United States Constitu-
tion, as it is interpreted and applied today, would
seem perilously like an Einheits-Staat (unified
state) to James Madison and most of the Philadel-
phia delegates.
The Social Democrats are the champions of a
strong central government. They would like to
see the Western German government have powers
closely analogous to those of the Weimar Republic.
Their views on the subject have been embodied in
a report bearing the name of Walter Menzel, the
SPD minister of the interior in the Government
of North Rhine Westphalia.
The Christian Democratic-Christian Socialist
bloc, on the other hand, wants a central govern-
ment of limited powers with all rights not ex-
pressly given to it reserved to the states. The
Bavarians, in particular, are the exponents of the
states-rights school of thought, and their ideas
have found expression in the so-called "EUwangen
Document" named after the town in AViirttemberg
where this paper was drafted by a group of Ba-
varian politicians last spring.
Generally speaking, it may be said that the
Social Democrats represent the ideas of Alexander
Hamilton so far as central government is con-
cerned, whereas the Christian Democrats embody
the Jeffei-sonian ideas of states' rights.
As the SPD and CDU/CSU are equally bal-
anced in the Bonn convention, the struggle between
the unionists and the federalists is likely to prove
close and tense, with the issue perhaps being de-
cided ultimately by the 11 voters of the minor
parties.
The principal point at issue will probably center
around what body is to raise and distribute the
taxes — the central government or the states.
In the Bismarckian Reich the central govern-
ment could indeed raise revenue from custom du-
ties, but for most of its funds it was dependent
upon the states. But under the Weimar Republic,
the central government levied practically all the
taxes, including income taxes, and distributed part
of these revenues to the states, which were there-
fore rendered financially dependent on Berlin.
This reform, the work of the able Center Party
financial expert, Matthias Erzberger, constituted
what is probably the most important distinction
between imperial Germany and the Weimar Re-
public. Bonn may witness a bitter controversy as
to whether the future Western German government
will adhere to the Erzberger reform or set the
clock back to Bismarck's day.
Some idea of what the future constitution of
Western Germany may contain, or what the chief
issues are that will be fought out before the Bonn
convention, may be gleaned from the majoi-ity
report submitted by the Chiemsee conference.
This was a body of 22 men — two from each state —
appointed by the ministers president to work out
a draft to be laid before the Bonn convention as a
basis for its debates. These delegates met from
August 10-22 in the gorgeous jialace built by King
Louis II of Bavaria upon an island in the middle
of the idyllic Chiemsee.
The Chiemsee experts recommended that the
Western German state should constitute a "state-
Ocfober 24, 1948
509
fragment" {Stoats-Fragment) , not a "full state"
(Vollstaat). This' was done to stress the provi-
sional character of the Western German constitu-
tion.
This solution was chosen as the best of three al-
ternatives. The other two ijossibilities were (1)
creation of a Western State which it was feared
would be tantamount to separation; (2) a forma-
tion of a "German federal republic" with claims
to exerting its authority over all Germany, even
though it was obvious that it could not make its
laws effective in the Russian zone. This alterna-
tive was regarded as being too aggressive in char-
acter and was not seriously considered.
The Chiemsee majority report recommends that
the states shall have control over educational and
cultural affairs but that the central government
shall have far-reaching powers in the matter of
financial legislation. It specifies that the central
government shall have exclusive legislative au-
thority to impose custom duties and shall have pri-
ority in regard to legislation concerning income
and i^roperty taxes as well as sales and consump-
tion taxes.
It is proposed that the union shall have a bi-
cameral parliament. The lower chamber shall be
a Bundestag representing the people, like the
American House of Representatives; while the
Upper House, the Bundesrat, shall consist of rep-
resentatives of the states. Unlike the American
Congress, however, the delegates of the Bimdesrat
shall not be elected by the people, but shall be ap-
pointed by the state governments, as in the Weimar
Republic.
The majority report further recommends that
the executive branch of the government should be
headed by a Bundesjirdsident. He is to be elected
by the joint votes of the two houses of parliament
just as the French president is elected by the Na-
tional Assembly.
The Chiemsee experts propose that the Western
German state should have the cabinet system of
government as is common in Europe, in i^reference
to the American presidential system in which the
chief executive remains in power for a fixed period
of time.
The Chiemsee majority report also suggests that
the West German state should be called the
"League of German States."
The struggle in the Bonn convention between the
510
unionists and the federalists is foreshadowed by
two proposals concerning the text of the preamble
to the constitution. According to one version, all
constitutional jsower emanates from the German
peoiDle, while according to the federalist school of
thought, the source of power resides in the individ-
luxl states. !
Social Democratic headquarters have made it
clear, however, that they did not consider the
Chiemsee report as a document that had to be ac-
cepted or rejected in toto. Fritz Heine, the party's
secretary at Hannover, said that the Chiemsee
paper might well "be thrown in the wastebasket"
although he conceded that some points from it
might be incorporated in the future German con-
stitution. But he declared that the SPD would
never consent to the proposal that the West Ger-
man state should be called a "League of German
States" — a name that doubtless suggested to him
a Confederation rather than a Union.
Coincident with the drafting and ratification
of a constitution for Western Germany, two other
important papers in accordance with the London
agreement will be promulgated. One is the Occu-
pation Statute, which will be decreed by the three
Western jiowers. This document will serve as the
Magna Carta of the people of Western Germany,
defining their rights vis-a-vis the occupying
powers.
The second will be alteration of German state
boundaries which the German leaders had been
authorized to make. It seems likely at present
that only one such change will be made, namely the
amalgamation of Baden and Wiirttemberg. This
merger would be a territorial reform all to the
good, since it would correspond to the claims of
both history and tradition and would create a well
balanced state in southern Germany approximately
equal to Lower Saxony in respect to population.
The work of the Bonn convention bids fair to
be an historic milestone in Germany history. The
creation of a political government for Western
Germany will be an important step towards the
ultimate unification of all Germany. The West-
ern German state will be a magnetic force that will
tend to attract into its orbit the part of Germany
now under Russian rule. In this sense, the West-
ern German state may v.ell i^laj- the same role for
(Continued on page 526)
Department of Sfafe Bulletin
THIRD REGULAR SESSION OF THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY
World Confidence and the Reduction of Armed Forces: The American Objective
REMARKS BY AMBASSADOR WARREN R. AUSTIN'
U.S. Delegate to the General Assembly
I discuss the proposal of the Soviet. Union for a
one-third reduction in the armed forces of the per-
manent members of the Security Council. The
question of the prohibition of atomic weapons,
which is provided for in the plan of the United
Nations Atomic Energy Commission, is now being
considered by a subcommittee of this committee.
Two years ago the General Assembly of the
United Nations recommended that the Security
Council formulate practical measures to provide
for the general regulation and reduction of arma-
ments and armed forces. On February 13, 1947,
the Security Council established for this purpose
the Commission for Conventional Armaments.
It is significant that, in the year and a half of
the Commission's operations, the Soviet Union
found no occasion to introduce this proposal which
we have before us. Furthermore, I call to the at-
tention of this Committee the fact that nine of the
eleven members of the Commission for Conven-
tional Armaments have agreed upon what they
consider the essential principles which should
govern the formulation of proposals for the regu-
lation and reduction of armaments and armed
forces. The Soviet Union has not accepted these
principles. Let us examine these principles in an
effort to determine whether or not the proposal
brought forward by the Soviet Delegate today
meets the standards set by the great majority of
the members of the Conventional Armaments
Commission. They determined that a system of
regulation and reduction of armaments and armed
forces can only be put into effect in an atmosphere
of international confidence and security. Nine out
of eleven report that one example of conditions
essential to security is the establishment of an
adecjuate system of agi'eements under article 43
of the Charter. This position was not limited to
the United Kingdom and the United States as as-
serted by B\-elorussia.
Is the Soviet Union prepared to permit the
United Nations to have effective armed forces on
the basis of the principles considered essential by
the other permanent members of the Security
' Coxmcil ? The actions of its representatives in the
Military Staff Connnittee and the Security Coun-
cil do not indicate this to be the case.
Ocfofaer 24, 1948
Another condition considered essential by the
majority is the establishment of effective, enforce-
able international control of atomic energy. I
hope that the Soviet Union will find it possible to
accept the only system of international control and
I^rohibition which the majority have found ade-
quate.
Another condition essential to world confidence
and security is the conclusion of the peace settle-
ments with Japan and Germany. It is impossible
for any nation to determine its military require-
ments for self-preservation until these conditions
have been accomplished. But can conditions of
confidence and security be created as long as one
of the permanent members of the Security Coun-
cil blocks the formulation of a lasting peace?
Can there be confidence and security when one
of the permanent members of the Security Coun-
cil creates a threat to peace by imposing a land
blockade of Berlin?
Can there be confidence and security when one
of them refuses to participate in the efforts of the
Security Council to remove this threat to world
peace ?
Can there be confidence and security when one
of them frustrates the effoiis of all the other oc-
cupying powers for a pacific settlement of the
dispute ?
I call your attention also to the fact that the
principles considered essential by nine of the
eleven members of the Commission for Conven-
tional Armaments also call for a system of ade-
quate safeguards which, by including an agreed
system of international supervision, would insure
the observance of the provisions of the resolution
or convention by all parties. These, too, must
precede the initiation of any disarmament.
The crucial aspect of this question is the stead-
fast refusal of the Soviet Union, in the study of
atomic-energy control and in the field of conven-
tional armaments, to agree in common with other
members to the opening of its territory to repre-
sentatives of the United Nations so that they might
'Made before Committee I (Political and Security) in
Paris on Oct. 12, 1948, and released to the press on the
same date. Printed also as Department of State publi-
cation 331!).
511
THE UNITBD NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
determine whether the agreements are being
carried out.
Does any member of this committee think for a
moment that the Members of the United Nations
shoukl disarm while the Soviet Union gives no
evidence whatsoever that it is willing to partici-
pate in the world community to the extent re-
quired for the control of atomic energy and the
regulation of armaments?
In its resolution the Soviet Union proposes a
system of supervision and control "within the
framework of the Security Council." The ob-
jective in steering this proposal into the Security
Council, with the veto as the trap door, is too
obvious to permit serious consideration. Such
attitude is an ancient one; the Soviet proposals
for disarmament made in 1927 at Geneva were
really aimed at another objective than disarma-
ment, as shown in a resolution of the sixth congress
of the Communist International :
"The aim of the Soviet proposal was not to
spread pacifist illusions, but to destroy them ; not
to support capitalism by ignoring or toning clown
its shady sides, but to propagate the fundamental
Marxian postulate, that disarmament and the
abolition of war are possible only with the fall
of capitalism. . . ."
I ask again — Why has Mr. Vyshinsky presented
his proposal to this body instead of to the Com-
mission for Conventional Armaments? Could it
possibly be for propaganda effect?
The world situation is too grave to permit any
further play with words. I say this deliberately
after listening to hour after hour of Soviet ora-
tory. In a most revealing manner our Soviet col-
leagues have, during the past two weeks, exposed
to us }iot only the vanity of such word structures
but also their emptiness.
Mr. Vyshinsky has mentioned his aversion to
war. He has, in particular, depicted at great
length the horrors of atomic warfare. He has
freely — very freely — in quoting from one of his
favorite American magazines translated the ex-
pression "technical improvement" into the word
"progress" on the part of the United States in
manufacturing even deadlier atomic bombs than
that used at Hiroshima. He has then proceeded
to wave this distorted example of American in-
ventiveness in the face of dismayed and already
overwrought mankind.
Is it not strange that in this "paean of peace"
he has placed the accent on atomic warfare?
Consistently he has dwelt on the frightful effects
of the ever bigger and better atomic bombs which
he generously attributes to American resourceful-
ness and efficiency. Is it not strange that except
for a word here and a sentence there he has not
placed the accent on war, just plain war? Is it
not curious that, instead of concentrating his ire
512
on that desperately out-of-date ultimate instru-
ment of the policy of nations, he has confined his
highest flights of oratory purely to atomic war-
fare?
I accept the recent challenge of my Soviet col-
league to study Marxian teaching as currently ex-
pounded today in the Soviet Union for the answer.
Aggressive warfare in the Soviet Socialist of-
ficialdom has not yet fallen into disrepute. For
the time being only atomic warfare is to be
dreaded and avoided at all costs. Indeed war it-
self is still a recognized means of achieving a
Comminiist world society.
The Soviet Union for more than a year has
pretended to devote itself to a so-called "peace
offensive". Mr. Vyshinsky has spoken much of
the peaceful intentions of the Soviet Union as con-
trasted to the alleged warlike and aggressive in-
tentions of the United States. Yet by what
evidence are we to judge the peaceful intentions
of the Soviet Union?
In the first place there is a vast Communist
literature which reveals much concerning the in-
tentions of the Soviet Union. If these writings
are outdated, not valid, or do not reiDresent the
policy of the Soviet Union, assurance of that fact,
followed by concrete action, would begin to re-
move the apprehensions felt by many seated about
this table. But until that time we have no re-
course other than to accept as valid the statements
which have been made repeatedly by authoritative
representatives of the Soviet Union.
We hope it is not ti'ue that the Soviet Union
believes and acts on the premise that a conflict
between Russia and the Western World is inevi-
table, and we hope that Mr. Vyshinsky can assure
us that such is not the case.
Yet the History of the Communist Party of the
Soviet Union, a book whose tenth anniversary of
publication was celebrated last month in Moscow,
which has been printed in 62 languages and dis-
tributed in more than 33 million copies, states that
"Lenin has pointed out that war is an inevitable
concomitant of capitalism." This history, which
is taught the length and breadth of the Soviet
Union, teaches that there are just wars, wars
which are waged, for example, "to liberate the
I^eople from capitalist slavery."
In a book jniblished in 1947 entitled The Econ-
omy of the U.S.S.R. During World War II, the
Deputy Premier of the U.S.S.R. and Chief of the
State Planning Commission states as follows :
"Lenin and Stalin warned the Socialist home-
land again of the inevitability of historical battles
between imperialism and socialism and prepared
the peoples of the U.S.S.R. for these battles. Lenin
and Stalin explained that wars which a working
class, having defeated its own bourgeoisie, wages
in the interests of its socialist homeland and
in the interests of strengthening and developing
socialism, are lawful and holy wars. . . .
Department of State Bulletin
'"To proYont the possibility of appeai-ance
within a I'utui'i' period of new imperialist aggres-
sion against the Socialist homeland, and the be-
ginning of a third world war, it is necessary that
the aggressor imperialist eonntries be disarmed
militarily and economically, and that the anti-
imperialist democratic countries rally together.
It should not be forgotten that the capitalist eco-
nomic system abroatl of itself produces aggressive
wars and the leaders of such wars. . . ."
Finally. Mr. Chairman, as recently as Septem-
ber '22, li'-lS, the Soviet newspaper Isvestia stated :
"The capitalist system is doomed to destruction.
However, the downfall of cai)italism will not
come of itself. Capitalism can only be destroyed
in a fierce class struggle."
If the Soviet Union regards those governments
which do not subscribe to Communism as the rep-
resentatives of the "capitalism" it seeks to destroy,
then how can we avoid feeling apprehensive?
When we hear Soviet representatives talk about
the peace offensive, we recall that in April 1948
a Communist Party publication in Paris defined
"final victory over war'' as "victory over capital-
ism". Is this not a ghastly definition of peace?
It is clear that in the Soviet Union war is not
only regarded as inevitable but is actually glori-
fied by its cultural leaders.
Issue no. 44 of the Literary Gazette, which, like
all Soviet publications, carries official sanction,
only two years ago stated the following :
"We do not intend to abandon the war theme.
. . . We must write about war in such a way that
the generation of young Soviet people which come
after us will love arms and be ready for battles
and victories."
Perhaps Mr. Vyshinsky can show us that offi-
cial utterances, some of them made less than a
month ago, were not intended to mean what they
say. Perhaps Mr. Vyshinsky can withdraw the
thesis that a war between the Soviet Union and
the capitalist countries is inevitable and that Com-
munism teaches that our system must be destroyed.
Until he does, however, we cannot ignore the
warnings in the writings of Soviet authorities.
So much for Soviet philosophy and the peace
of mind which it may inspire in their non-Marxist
neighbors.
Xow let us briefly consider whether peace of
mind can be assured by the past actions of the
U.S.S.R.
The aggrandizement of Soviet territory has al-
ready been referred to. Indignantly the Soviet
Delegation has asserted that these annexations had
been effected with democratic consultations of the
populations according to the enlightened standards
of the Soviet Constitution. Does this statement
Ocfofaer 24, 7948
THE UN/rED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZBD ACBNCIBS
stand analysis? Even nioi'c, does it stand the test
of Mr. Vyshinsky's beloved "critique"? Let us
consider eastern Poland. Somehow I seem to
remember that the democratic processes of annex-
ation started in September 19;5i) by a sudden over-
night military offensive against an already
defeated foe. This conquest was conducted in full
harmony and technical cooperation with the
Nazis. The Soviet Union approved by the stroke
of a pen on August 23 of that year the alliance, and
suddenly became a working partner with the oft-
denounced Nazis. And did not Generalissimo
Stalin, after the Nazi-Soviet partition of Poland,
telegraph to Ribbentrop, the Nazi Foreign Minis-
ter: "The friendship of the people of Germany
and the Soviet Union, cemented by blood, has every
reason to be lasting and firm." As to the "demo-
cratic" ratification of the inclusion of this large
part of prewar Poland in the Soviet Union by the
populations themselves, we learn little (and I
think we all would keenly be interested to hear)
about details thereof from the Soviet Delegation.
However, it really should not be necessary to seek
far for enlightenment. Any nation, any individ-
ual with any kind of experience of universal
suffrage does not have to be told a great deal about
the democratic character of elections and plebi-
scites which yield 99-percent results.
The Baltic States also began on their "volun-
tary" road to incorporation by the arrival of the
Red Anny in the fall of 19o9, followed by their
comi^lete takeover after the French campaign of
1940, at a time when there was no question of lib-
erating these small countries from an enemy yoke.
We recall that the entrance of the Latvian Repub-
lic into the Soviet Union was presided over by no
less a person than my distinguished colleague, Mr.
Vyshinsky.
Let us pass on down the years. First, we en-
counter the "great hope", the hope generated in
the bosom of every generous human being when
the embattled Russian people played such a great
part in defeating Nazi German}', when hope was
kindled that the relentless doctrines of Marx and
of Lenin, doctrines of hatred between classes and
also of inevitable strife, had made way for a more
enlightened concept of relations between men and
states.
For a long while most people clung tenaciously
to this hope, unwilling to yield and abandon their
vision that a new Morld, at last better, with un-
limited possibilities for the future, had dawned.
They insisted on disbelieving the evidence. Grad-
ually the realization developed that, indeed, noth-
ing was changed.
Is it really necessai*y to go into details regarding
the domination of Rumania, Poland, Hungaiy,
Albania, Bulgaria, Czechoslovakia, and Yugo-
slavia? Recent events in truly impressive detail
have disclosed that the price of Soviet friendship
is complete subservience to Soviet policy.
513
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAIIZBD ACBNCIES
The satellites of the U.S.S.R. were not alone
to feel the heavy hand of its constant drive for
world power, a drive camouflaged by words ap-
propriated from liberty's lexicon, words of vital
meaning to those who enjoy freedom, but decep-
tive and ineaningless in the Russian policy toward
her satellites.
Cause for disillusionment and alarm also exists
in the Orient, as the distinguished representative
of China gave testimony yesterday. There, too,
Communist directives preach war and bloodshed,
which facts confirm. In a lengthy resolution
adojjted by the sixth world congress of Commu-
nist International at Moscow on September 1, 1928,
the following directive concerning China is f oimd :
"The Communist Party (in China) must every-
where propagate among the masses the idea of
Soviets, the idea of the dictatorship of the prole-
tariat and peasantry, and the inevitability of the
coming revolutionary mass armed uprising."
That "mass armed uprising" preached from
Moscow in 1928 is now in full swing. The people
of Manchuria after long years under Japanese
domination and after having their factories de-
spoiled of equipment by the Soviet Army are now
suffering untold hardships from armed Chinese
Communist forces who are seeking by force to
destroy the constituted authority of China, whose
representatives sit here among us today as fellow
members. These Communist forces have also
penetrated into the heart of China seeking to de-
stroy and despoil. Another dangerous develop-
ment has occurred. The U.S.S.R. obtained as
part of its price for entering the war against
Japan special positions at Port Arthur and Dairen,
Chinese territory, which have been so utilized
effectively to bar China from exercising its legal
authority.
In Korea, where a people of 30,000,000 held high
hopes for complete independence at the end of the
war in the Orient in September 1945, those hopes
have been and are being betraj'ed through Soviet
opposition to any rational solution. That opposi-
tion moreover has been maintained in complete
disregard of a resolution adopted by the General
Assembly on November 14, 1947, providing a fair
and honorable solution of the Korean problem.
Can the Korean people look forward with equa-
nimity to any solution when a large Soviet-trained
armed force awaits in North Korea an oppor-
tunity to march southward ?
The states of western Europe have also been the
victims of this new form of aggression. The Com-
inform was formed so as better to correlate the
work of destruction to be accomplished. At all
costs western Europe nuist not regain its feet, for
should it do so it would successfully resist Com-
munist penetration. At all costs the homeland of
Western civilization must be kept in a constant
514
state of tui'moil and economic chaos. It must be
kept in a state of fear and worry, so as to be unable
to concentrate on the great task of reconstruction.
The economic blood transfusion from the United
States must at all costs be nullified by recurring
strikes and curtailed production. The Commu-
nist Parties of France, Italy, the United Kingdom,
Belgium, the Netherlands, and Luxembourg re-
ceived tlieir orders accordinglj', and with the un-
reasoning discipline which is one of the many ter-
rifying aspects of modern Communism the vari-
ous Communist Parties proceeded to execute this
deliberate plan of sabotage.
Overnight the Communist slogan was no longer
"woi'k and produce" as it had been in the first
post-liberation period. As soon as it became ob-
vious that returning health would protect these
bodies politically against the Communist views
the new slogan became "destroy and wreck."
Perhaps most surprising of all is the complete
brazenness with which these so-called national
parties admit their allegiance to a foreign jjower.
We have had a striking illustration right here
in Paris since this General Assembly convened.
The official Communist organ, Humaniie, on Oc-
tober 1 i^ublished the following statement by the
Politburo : "The people of France will never fight
the Soviet Union." Let us ponder exactly what
this means. A French political party declares
openly that it will never participate in a war
against another nation and this regardless of the
circumstances under which a conflict might de-
velop. For "my country right or wrong" the
Communists of all lands now substitute "the
U.S.S.R. right or wrong."
Are we dreaming? Can such tactics, such ac-
tions, such a record be those of one of the founders
of the United Nations? Harking back to that
day of hope, June 26, 1945, when the Union of
Soviet Socialist Republics signed the Charter,
what a crashing discord in the world's hymn of
peace. Perhaps this apparent contradiction can
best be explained by a quotation from Lenin with
reference to Communist penetration of trade-
unions (Left-wing Communism, an infantile dis-
order) : "It is necessary to be able to withstand
all this, to agree to any and every sacrifice, and
even — if need be — to resort to all sorts of strata-
gems, maneuvers and illegal methods, to evasion
and subterfuges in order to penetrate the trade
unions, to remain in them and to carry on Com-
munist work in them at all costs."
Let us for a few moments refresh our memories
so as better to judge the record against the lofty
purposes so well set forth in the Charter's pre-
amble and first two articles :
WE THE PEOPLES OF THE UNITED NATIONS
DETERMINED
to save succeeding generaticms from the scov/rge of
Department of Sfafe Bulletin
tear, lohich fivice in our lifetime has brought vm-
told sorrow to mankind, and
to reaffirm, faith in fundamental human rights, hi
the dignity and loorth of the human perxon, in the
equal rights of men and women and of nations
large and small, and
to establish conditions under xohich justice and re-
spect for the obligations arising from treaties and
other sources of intertiational law can be main-
tained, and
to promote social progress and better standards of
life in larger freedom,
AND FOR THESE EXDS
to practice tolerance and live together in peace
with one another as good neighbors, and
to unite our strength to maintain international
peace and security, and
to ensure, by the acceptance of principles and the
institution of methods, that armed force shall not
he used, save in the common interest, and
to employ international machinery for the proino-
tion of the economic and social advancement of all
peoples,
HAVE RESOL^'ED TO COMBINE CUB EFFORTS TO ACCOM-
PLISH THESE AIMS.
Accordingly, our respective Governments, through
representatives assemhled in the city of San Fran-
cisco, ioho have exhibited their full powers fownd
to be in good and due form, have agreed to the
present Charter of the United Nations and do
hereby establish an international organization to
he known as the United Nations.
Article 1
The Purposes of the United Nations are :
1. To maintain international peace and security,
and to that end: to take effective collective meas-
ures for the prevention and removal of threats
to the peace, and for the suppression of acts of
aggression or other breaches of the peace, and to
bring about by peaceful means, and in conformity
with the principles of justice and international
law, adjustment or settlement of international dis-
putes or situations which might lead to a breach
of the peace;
2. To develop friendly relations among nations
based on respect for the principle of equal rights
and self-determination of peoples, and to take
other appropriate measures to strengthen univer-
sal peace;
3. To achieve international cooperation in solv-
ing intematianal problems of an economic, social,
cultural, or humanitarian character, and in pro-
moting and encouraging respect for human rights
and for fundamental freedoms for all without dis-
tinction as to race, sex, language, or religion; and
October 24, 1948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
4- To be a center for harmonising the actions
of nations in the attainment of these common ends.
Article 2
The 0 rganization and its Members, in pursuit
of the Purposes stated in Article 1, shall act in Oic-
cordance with the following Principles.
1. The Organization is based on the principle
of the sovereign equality of all its Members.
2. All Members, in order to ensure to all of them
the rights and benefits resulting from jnembership,
shall fulfil in good, faith the obligations assumed
by them in accordance with the present Charter.
3. All Meinbers shall settle their inter national
disputes by peaceful means in such a manner that
international peace and security, and justice, are
not endangered.
4- All Members shall refrain in their interna-
tional relations from the threat or use of force
against the terntoi'ial integrity or political inde-
pendence of any state, or ^V^ any other manner in-
consistent with the Purposes of the United
Nations.
5. All Members shall give the United Nations
every assistance in any action it takes in accord-
ance with the present Charter, and shall refrain
from giving assistance to any state against which
the United Nations is taking preventive or en-
forcement action.
6. The Organization shall ensure that states
which are not Members of the United Nations act
in accordance with these Principles so far as may
be necessary for the maintencmce of international
peace and security.
7. Nothing contained in the present Charter
shall authorize the United Nations to intervene in
matters which are essentially within the domestic
jurisdiction of any state or shall require the Mem-
bers to Submit such matters to settlement under
the present Charter; but this principle shall not
prejudice the a/pplication of enforcement measures
wider Chapter VII.
With complete candor, I shall now speak about
the security situation in which we must consider
the proposal of the Soviet Union for a one-third
reduction of armed forces. In doing so, I quote
from a statement that Secretary of State Marshall
made before the Foreign Affairs Committee of the
House of Representatives of the United States on
May 5, 1948. He said that—
"When universal agreement to the Charter was
achieved, the strength of the major powers in rela-
tion to one another was such that no one of them
could safely break the peace if the others stood
united in defense of the Charter. Under existing
world circumstances the maintenance of a com-
parable power relationship is fundamental to
world security."
To what extent did the United States demobi-
515
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
lize? Let me cite the statement made by Secre-
tary Marshall before the Women's National Press
Club in Washington on July 1, 1947 :
". . . At the end of the war our government
demobilized the greatest concentration of military
power that the world has ever seen. Our ai-med
strength was deployed from the Elbe in Germany
to the Islands of Jai^an. This great array was
demobilized with amazing rapidity until only com-
paratively small garrisons of troops were left on
the necessary occupation duty in tlie principal
enemy countries. No conditions were attached to
this withdrawal. . . . No political parties sub-
servient to United States interests have been left
behind in European countries to attempt conquest
of governments from within. No American
agents have sought to dominate the police estab-
lishment of European countries. No 'joint Amer-
ican-European companies' have been forced upon
reluctant governments. I do not cite this record
as evidence of our peaceful intentions by way of
indulging in national boasting, but merely because
it is true. . . ."
During this period it has become progressively
clearer that serious misconceptions prevail in the
minds of the leaders of the Soviet Union. It is
a misconception to suppose that differing systems
cannot live side by side in peace under the basic
rules of international conduct prescribed by the
Charter of the United Nations. These rules are
obligatory upon all Members.
The United Nations must dispel these miscon-
ceptions of the Soviet leaders. It must bring
about a more realistic view of what is possible and
what is impossible in the relationship between the
Soviet Union and the world at large. This will
restore to international society the equilibrium
necessary to permit the United Nations to function
as contemplated at San Francisco,
The United States realized the need for this
equilibrium. The first necessary step was to in-
sure the freedom and independence of the Mem-
bers of the United Nations. The ability of demo-
cratic peoples to preserve their independence in
the face of totalitarian threats depends upon their
determination to do so. That determination in
turn depends upon the development of a healthy
economic and political life and a genuine sense of
security.
The United States Government, therefore, is
responding to requests to provide economic as-
sistance to various countries in Europe and else-
where. The United States is cooperating with
16 European countries in a recovery program pro-
viding for self-help and mutual aid.
In addition the United States Government is
now considering the steps necessary to bring the
national military establishment to the minimum
level required for international security.
= A/C.l/319of Oct. 10, 1948, and A/C.1/309 of Oct. 1, 1948.
516
Action necessary on the part of the United
States to lestore this balance-of-power relation-
ship may be less onerous than for some other
nations which are already spending a very large
percentage of their national income on arma-
ments. The United States for the fiscal year 1948-
49 is spending only 5.9 percent of its national in-
come for military purposes, despite the fact that
this represents some increase over the low point
since the war. This is to be compared with the
figure of 17 percent for the Soviet Union men-
tioned by Mr. MacNeil the other day.
Gentlemen, I repeat that, until present con-
ditions of world fear and insecurity are rej)laced
by an atmosphere of international confidence and
security, not only will it be impossible to institute
effective systems of control and reduction of arma-
ments but the whole field of international relations
will be subject to continuous discord.
The people of the United States are deeply
interested in the reduction of national armaments
and are prepared to consider most carefully any
io7ia fide proposal for lightening the burden of
armaments. As a matter of fact, however, the
United States disarmed too far and too fast after
the last war. The overriding consideration is the
maintenance of international peace and security.
We know that maintenance of this international
peace and security dejDends upon strength and
resolution of those states who in the final analysis
are prepared to act in support of the world com-
munity against aggression.
Indeed, the security of many nations seated at
this table dejiends upon this fundamental fact.
The world learned from Germany and Japan what
can happen when leading memfjers of the inter-
national community are or are thought to be lack-
ing in strength or resolution. I call upon the So-
viet Union to work with us to reduce world ten-
sion and to dispel the dread and suspicion which
are filling the lives of so many of our peoples and
making our efforts for world organization so dif-
ficult.
Before closing I wish to state that the Delega-
tion of the United States has considered care-
fully and will vote for the resolutions which have
been submitted to this committee by the Dele-
gations of the United Kingdom and Syria.-
Taken together these resolutions are entirely con-
sistent with the ])osition of the United States.
Article 26 of the Charter provides "that — . . . the
Security Council shall be responsible for formu-
lating . . . plans to be submitted to the Mem-
bers of the United Nations for the establishment
of a system for the regulation of armaments."
Despite the fact that the work of this Commis-
sion has continued to be hampered by the dema-
gogic appeals and irresponsible propaganda of
the Soviet Union, the United States believes that
the Commission must proceed with its work.
Department of Stale Bulletin
Discussion of the Palestine Situation in Committee I
STATEMENT BY RALPH BUNCHEi
Acting U.N. Mediator in Palestine
It is with heavy heart that I make this statement
to the Committee today. But for that crime in
Jerusalem committed by a band of despicable gang-
sters it would be Count Bernadotte himself who
would be speaking to you now. The late mediator
was not only my chief but a treasured friend. In
these months since the end of May, I had come to
know him well. He was an utterly honest and
fearless man, completely independent in his think-
ing, and thoroughly devoted to the effort to bring
peace to Palestine. He had no axe to grind, no
vested interest to serve. The views which I wiU
briefly express to you today will, I think, be very
close to the views which Count Bei'nadotte himself
would have expressed had he lived to enjoy the
privilege of sitting with you, a privilege which he
would have greatly appreciated.
The progress report of the late mediator which
is before you as document A/648, sets forth quite
clearly in part one the views of Count Bernadotte
on the mam issues in the Palestine conflict today. -
I need not repeat these views, and the more so since
I am in full accord with them. If I may take the
liberty of doing so, however, I would like briefly
to give some emphasis to what appears to me to be
the inescapable logic of the situation in Palestine
with which this Assembly is now confi'onted.
Since the termination of the mandate on May 15
of this year, there have been three signal develop-
ments in Palestine : — The proclamation of a Jew-
ish state, resort to forceful measures by the Arab
states, and the intervention of the Security
Council.
1. A Jewish state was proclaimed in that part
of Palestine envisaged for the Jewish state in the
resolution of the General Assembly of last Novem-
ber 29. That Jewish state did not come about in
accordance with the processes and procedures fore-
seen in the Assembly's resolution. But it was no
less real because of that and it could confidently
base its right to exist on the fact that the majority
of the Members of the United Nations had en-
dorsed the idea of a Jewish state in Palestine, a
mandated territory and therefore an international
responsibility, moreover, this was no nominal or
paper state. From the very day of its proclama-
tion it had a vibrant reality. It boasted an active
and vigorous government, a national esprit and
cohesion, and a well organized and well trained, if
poorly equipped, army. It was a going concern
Ocfober 24, 1948
from the day of its birth. It was readily apparent
to even the casual observer that the nationalist
spirit of the Jewish inhabitants of this state was
so strong and deeply rooted as to render entirely
illusory any suggestion that a Jewish state in Pal-
estine could be prevented by any means other than
force of sufficient strength to completely crush the
Jewish community. In the five months since its
inception, this Jewish state has consolidated and
strengthened its position, both nationally and in-
ternationally.
2. On the other hand, Arab opposition to the
new Jewish state was so intense as to induce the
Ai'ub states to resort to violent measures. Open
warfare between the newly proclaimed Jewish
state and the states members of the Arab League
broke out coincidentally with the termination of
the mandate and the proclamation of the Jewish
state. This, of course, had not been envisaged by
the resolution of November 29. Until halted by
the two truces achieved through the intervention
of the Security Council, it was warfare as deadly
as it could be made with the limited weapons and
supplies available to the contestants. It was war-
fare brought on by the fact that the Jews had
taken the political offensive on the termination of
the mandate and proclaimed a state, while the
Arab states, in retaliation, took the military of-
fensive and moved their troops into Palestine with
the avowed purpose of protecting the Arab inhabi-
tants of Palestine by crushing the infant Jewish
state. This military effort was exerted not by the
Arabs of Palestine but primarily by the armies of
the Arab states witii the objective of protecting the
Arabs of Palestine from an alleged danger of Jew-
ish domination. It cannot be said that the Arabs
had not given ample warning of their firm inten-
tions in this regard. Their willingness to resort to
this extreme action is an accurate gauge of the in-
tensity of Arab feelings as regards the injustice to
them of a Jewish state in Palestine.
3. By the intervention of the Security Council
the warfare in Palestine has been twice stopped
and at present remains stopped. In fact, the reso-
lution of the Security Council of July 15, 1948,
which ordered both parties to cease fighting, al-
' Made on Oct. 15, 1948, and printed from telegraphic
text.
' For conclusions of the report, see Bulletin of Oct. 3,
1948, p. 436.
517
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
though it makes reference to a truce of undefined
duration, also prohibits any further recourse to
military action as a means of settling the dispute.
The imposed "truce" of July 18 is really a per-
manent cease-fire order. The opposing armies
have now been confronting each other since July
18, but they are forbidden to resume fighting. If
either side should provoke a resumption of hostili-
ties it would have to do so in open defiance of the
order of the Security Council and thereby run the
risk of invoking the threat of sanctions embodied
in the July 15 resolution. The Security Council
order stands and it cannot be assumed that either
side will wish to run the risk of shouldering re-
si^onsibility for open defiance of this order by a
deliberate resumption of hostilities. On the other
hand, this permanent cease-fire order, which is also
described in the resolution as a truce, has been re-
garded by both parties as a truce, and therefore of
temjjorary ratlier than permanent duration.
Moreover, it has been administered and supervised
as a truce. The armies have not been withdrawn
or demobilized. On the contrary, they have been
confronting each other in full battle array, and
alerted for battle, for almost five months now, ex-
cept for the intense fighting during the nine day
interval between the two truces. The strain and
tension are very great, and it is most assuredly not
a situation which can be maintained indefinitely.
The existing truce clearly must be superseded by
something more durable and secure — either a
formal peace or an armistice, either of which would
be more consistent with the Security Council order
than the present precarious truce.
It is unthinkable that Arabs and Jews should be
permitted to resume hostilities in Palestine. The
threat to the peace of the Middle East generally
and even to the world from conflict in Palestine, is
far too great.
There have already been some danger signals
of outside interests in the conflict, which might
render doubtful any assumption that a renewed
conflict could be confined to Palestinians and the
Arab states.
The role of mediator was defined in resolution
186 (S-2) of the General Assembly of May 14,
1948. Among other functions that resolution di-
rected the mediator to "use his good offices to pro-
mote a peaceful adjustment of the future situation
of Palestine". This was the function to which
Count Bemadotte devoted major concentration
from the beginning of his effort in Cairo on May
28, although the supervision of the truce under the
resolution of the Security Council, and more re-
cently, the tragic refugee problem, consumed much
of his time and energy.
In directing his attention towards achieving a
peaceful adjustment of the Palestine situation, the
mediator was confronted with the necessity of
defining the premises upon which his efforts would
518
be based. His decision in this regard was a prac- |
tical one, dictated in large measure by circum- *
stances entirely beyond his control.
Arab repi'esentatives, for example, with whom
he consulted frequently and at great length, con-
stantly emphasized what they would describe as
the historic injustice of the Balfour Declaration,
the terms of the mandate, the mandate itself, the
Jewish nationalist aspirations, and the resolution
of the General Assembly of 29 November on the
one hand, and the fundamental equality and de-
mocracy of an Arab state in the whole of Palestine
on the other. Count Bernadotte, however, quite
rightly in my view, did not regard it as within his
purview to pass judgment upon the validity and
the justice of decisions previously taken by the
international community. On the same grounds,
and, in view of the nature of his terms of reference,
for instance, he did not consider himself to be
rigidly bound by the details of the resolution of
the General Assembly of 29 November but recog-
nized, nevertheless, that its basic conclusions rep-
resented the expressed will of more than two thirds
of the members of the United Nations, and could
not, therefore, be ignored.
It is undeniable, therefore, that in his approach
to the problem. Count Bernadotte was inevitably
influenced by the fact that, Arab opposition not-
withstanding, there had been, especially during
the past 30 years, a progressive recognition by the
international community of a special position for
the Jewish community in Palestine, culminating
in the resolution of 29 November and the procla- ■
mation by the Jews themselves of a state of their f
own in a part of Palestine.
On the other hand, the mediator was not in-
fluenced by that part of the claims of the Jews to
a historic right to Palestine based upon their an-
cient residence in that country and their religious
association with it, rather than formal interna-
tional sanctions. He did not accept, therefore, the
Jewish contention that it was they who were al-
ways called upon to compromise. Since he could
not accept their alleged historical claims to the
whole of Palestine, including Transjordan, he
could not admit the contention that acceptance of
the 29 November resolution constituted a compro-
mise on their part, and that any alteration in the
terms of that resolution not favorable to them
would compound a compromise previously made.*
It was within this milieu that the mediator,
through four months of negotiation of unprece-
dented intensity, strove, by trial and error, through
reason and persuasion and every other honorable
means, to find a common ground upon which the
conflicting parties might meet. This common
ground was never found. That it was not found
was due entirely to the intransigence of the par-
ties. On the fundamental issues, each side re-
mained adamant.
Department of State Bulletin
In view of tliis fact, the mediator was forced to
the conchision that it Mas not now possible, by
means of an intermediary, to bring the two parties
towther and achieve agreement between them.
The Arab representatives steadfastly refused to
meet the Jewish representatives, either in the pres-
ence of the mediator or otherwise, since they con-
sidered any such step as a tacit admission on their
part of the right of the Jewish state to exist.
The mediator, however, did not conclude from
these facts that the problem of Palestine cannot be
solved by peaceful means, or that a basis for agree-
ment between the parties can never be found.
Failure to bring the parties together would, it is
true, preclude any immediate possibility of a tidy,
definitive solution, which is very much to be de-
sired. But there was an alternative which derived
precisely from the very rigidity of the parties who
were at the same time in the predicament of having
to defy the Security Council in order to resort to
the simple expedient of trial by force of arms.
It was with this in mind that the mediator
pointed out in paragraph 10 on page 4 of his re-
port that :
"Although it cannot be said that neither side will
fight again under any circumstances, I am strongly
of the view that the time is ripe for a settlement.
I am reasonably confident that given the perma-
nent injunction against military action issued by
the Security Council, and firm political decisions
by the General Assembly, both sides will acquiesce,
however reluctantly, in any reasonable settlement
on which is placed the stamp of approval of the
United Nations. I do not mean to imply that there
is at the moment bright prospect for formal agree-
ment between the two parties. But, in my opinion,
although such formal agi'eement would be highly
desirable, it is not indispensable to a peaceful set-
tlement at this stage. Wliat is indispensable is
that the General Assembly take a firm position on
the political aspects of the problem in the light of
all the circumstances since its last session, and that
its resolution be so reasonable as to discourage any
attempt to thwart it and to defy the Security
Council order by the employment of armed force."
It was on the basis of this assumption also that
the mediator considered it highly essential that
the question of Palestine come before the General
Assembly at this time and that the political aspects
of the problem be reviewed and unequivocally
pronounced upon in the light of all the relevant
factors.
In my opinion, in the present circumstances, two
needs are uppermost in the most imperative sense.
The first of these needs is a reasonable basis for the
assumption that neither party will again resort to
force in order to make its views prevail and as a
means of gaining its objectives. In this regard,
reason for hope is to be found in the fact that
Ocfofcer 24, 1948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
settlement by force has been tried and has been
checked. I do not find it possible to believe that
either side wishes to resume hostilities or that
either side has found settlement by force of arms a
profitable expedient. Despite the conflict which
has raged in Palestine and despite the gidf which
still divides the antagonists, there is on both sides
a desire and a need for peace arising from the fact
that war is a costly, even disastrous, interruption
in the normal course of development of both Arab
and Jewish communities in the Middle East.
The second of these needs is for the General
Assembly, as the representative body of the inter-
national community, to set forth its position on the
following fundamental political issues affecting
this former mandated territory with regard to
which its responsibility continues :
A. Permanent peace in Palestine.
B. The Jewish state in Palestine.
C. The general configurations of the boundaries
of sucn a state.
D. International guarantee for such boundaries.
E. The future status of Jerusalem.
F. The disposition of the Arab-controlled area
of Palestine.
G. Guarantees for the rights of all inhabitants
of Palestine.
H. The repatriation and resettlement of Arab
refugees.
I. The nature of the machinery to be employed
as a vehicle for continuing United Nations in-
tervention in the problem imtil all of its major
aspects are finally disposed of.
It would not appear essential in this regard that
a detailed plan, a blueprint, be devised for this
purpose. Indeed, any such detailed scheme, in
view of all the developments since last November,
and the present situation in Palestine, might well
be undesirable. Assuming always that the parties
do not again resort to force, it would seem that a
somewhat general treatment of the subject, which
while making clear the position of the United
Nations on major issues woidd leave to the parties
the burden of peaceful adjustment, might have
great merit.
The conclusions set forth in part one of the
mediator's report might well provide a basis for a
general treatment of this kind. These conclusions
represent the constructive deductions which Count
Bernadotte had arrived at on the basis of his ex-
tensive and fruitful consultation on the problem
over a period of four months. He did not presume
to present them as recommendations to any organ
of the United Nations. As the mediator's report
points out in paragi-aph 13 on page 5, these con-
clusions were designed of settlement and concilia-
tion of the differences between the two parties. It
was, indeed, his intention to renew in Paris his
consultations with the representatives of the par-
ties in pursuance of the elusive objective of mutual
519
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
agreement between them. It was his thought that
if the conclusions set forth in the report could not
be accepted by Arabs and Jews as a basis for dis-
cussion they still would be available to the General
Assembly for such use as it might see fit to make of
them. Count Bernadotte harbored no illusions,
that either Arabs or Jews would embrace the con-
clusions in their entirety, nor did he deem it essen-
tial for them to do so, however desirable that might
be. He was convinced, as I am convinced, that the
voice of the United Nations speaks with consider-
able authority in Palestine; this voice, in truth,
was the sole foundation of his effort and his un-
challengeable achievements.
At the appropriate time, should the Committee
desire it, I would be pleased to present a statement
dealing exclusively with the conclusions in the re-
port and giving an explanation and elaboration of
each of them, and also the answer to any question
regarding the report.
The United States in the United Nations
[October 15-22]
The Roll of the United States
George F. Kennan, in his address before the
Herald-Tribune Forum on October 20,' stated that
if we mean business in our determination to make
the United Nations work, we must remember that
we have before us a task "as difficult and as arduous
as any that this country has ever tackled in peace
or in war". If that is our purpose, he said, then
we must shape and align the realities of interna-
tional life so that they "speak for themselves with
an eloquence greater than words — that they con-
vince the skeptical as words have thus far failed to
do, that the road of international collaboration is
after all the fastest, the most practical, and the
safest of the paths of national policy. And where
people are not open to argument on considerations
of the connnon good, then they must be shown that
this same conclusion flows even from the narrowest
and most embittered sense of self-interest, which
it does.
"This is the job we have to do.
"It is not, in reality, a new task, or one that lies
only before us. We have already been deeply en-
gaged in it for a long time.
"And it is not our task alone. It is a responsi-
bility which we share with the other peace-loving
nations of the world. It is entirely fallacious to
regard the differences which now separate the
United States and the Soviet Union merely as a
struggle between those two powers. The conflict
which exists inside the United Nations is not a
conflict between the United States and the
U.S.S.R. It is a conflict between the majority of
the U.N. members, acting in support of the Charter,
and a group of governments who refuse to abide
' For the complete text of Mr. Kennan's address, see
Department of State press release 853 of Oct. 20, 1948.
520
by its provisions or to recognize the over-riding
international obligation which the Charter consti-
tutes.
"We have now reached one of the most compli-
cated and delicate phases of this long and difficult
effort. We have been compelled to place before
the United Nations a matter of great seriousness
which it had proven impossible to compose by
peaceful means outside of the United Nations. We
were aware that this would constitute a severe test
of the organization, and one which we would have
preferred to have spared it. But we had no alter-
natives other than to meet the threat of force with
action in order to break the blockade of Berlin, or
to do nothing at all and thus permit this threaten-
ing situation to develop in an ominous silence and
uncertainty, conducive to every sort of alarmist
speculation and hysteria.
"This is a situation which is easy neither for us
nor for our friends. It is going to take all we
can bring to it in the way of steadiness and under-
standing and mutual confidence. But we must
always understand that on the successful resolu-
tion of it there hangs more than the removal of
restrictions on the supply of a single city; there
hangs the removal of one more great obstacle on
the road to a world in which international organi-
zation can really function."
The Berlin Crisis
A resolution aimed at peaceful solution of the
Berlin crisis was presented to the Security Coun-
cil in Paris on October 22 by six neutral nations
(Argentina, Belgium, Canada, China, Colombia,
and Syria) which have been striving to solve the
problem since it was posed by the United States,
Great Britain, and France.
The text of the resolution follows :
The Security Council having carefully considered the
series of events which have led to the present grave situa-
Department of Sfafe Bulletin
tion in Borlin, coMscioiis of the council's primary respon-
sibility for the maintenance of international peace and
security, and acting in accordance with Article 40 of the
Charter in order to prevent an aKKravation of the situation
in lierlin. in particular, by preparing the way to its settle-
ment, calls upon the four governments who have respon-
sibilities in Germany and in Berlin as the occupying
powers — France, the United Kingdom, the United States
of America and the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics.
1. To prevent any incident which would be of a nature
such as to aggravate the present situation in Berlin,
2. To put into effect, simultaneously, namely on the day
of notification of this resolution to the four governments
concerned, tlie steps required for the fulfilment of points
(a) and (b), which are set forth hereunder;
(a) Immediate removal by all parties of all restrictions
on communications, transport, and commerce between
Berlin and the Western zones of Germany, and the re-
strictions on transport and commerce to and from the
Soviet zones of Germany, it being understood that said
restrictions are the ones applied by the parties after the
first day of March 1948.
(b) An immediate meeting of the four military gov-
ernors to arrange for the unification of currency in Berlin
on the basis of the German mark of the Soviet zone. The
four military governors will fix the conditions for the
introduction, cireulaticm and continued use of the German
mark of the Soviet zone, as sole currency for the whole of
Berlin, and to arrange for the withdrawal of the Western
mark.
All the foregoing to be in accordance ■with the terms and
conditions defined in the joint directive delivered to the
four military governors in Berlin, agreed upon by the four
governments in Moscow, and issued on 30 August, 1948,
and to be carried out under the control of the quad-
ripartite financial commission, whose organization, power*
and responsibilities are therein described.
This measure must be totally fulfilled by the date in-
dicated in Paragraph (c).
(c) The date referred to in the last part of paragraph
(b) .shall be the 20th November 1948.
3. Within 10 days following the fulfillment of the meas-
ures provided for in Section Two, or on such date as is
mutually agreed between the four governments, to reopen
the negotiations in the Council of Foreign Ministers on
all outstanding problems concerning Germany as a whole.
Palestine
The Security Council on October 19 ordered a
halt to the fighting between Israeli and Egyptian
forces over supply routes to the Negev area in
southern Palestine. The Council also reminded
the parties in the Palestine dispute of their obli-
gations under the Council's blanket cease-fire
orders. The last such order, dated August 19, was
unconditional and had no time limit.
Tlie Council met at the request of Acting U.N.
Mediator Ralph Bundle after U.N. truce officials
failed through their own efforts to halt the Negev
clashes.
The resolution adopted by the Council on the
Negev fighting was submitted by Syria and em-
bodied Dr. Bunche's recommendations. The first
part of the resolution, ordering the immediate
cease-fire, was adopted unanimously. The rest of
the resolution was adopted by a 9-0 vote, the
Soviet Union and the Ukraine abstaining.
The resolution calls on both Israeli and Egyp-
tian forces to withdraw from any positions not
October 24, 1948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
occupied at the time of the Negev outbreak, which
began on October 15. Conditions governing the
passage of supply convoys to the Jewish settle-
ments in the Negev are to be set by U.N. truce offi-
cials and both sides are required to negotiate, either
directly or through U,N. truce machinery, any
outstanding problems.
The Council reaffirmed its previous all-Pales-
tine cease-fire orders by adopting unanimously the
joint Chinese-British resolution submitted last
week. It calls on the Palestine parties to enstu-e
the safety of U.N. personnel and their ready access
to all places where their duties require them to go,
including airfields and ports. It also calls on the
parties to do their utmost to bring to justice all
l^ersons assaulting U.N. personnel. A Soviet
amendment accepted by the Council adds that U.N.
observers should not go beyond objective reports
to the Council.
On October 21 Dr. Bunche set Friday noon
(GMT) as the deadline for Israeli and Egyptian
forces fighting in the Negev, Palestine's southern
desert, to cease fire. The Security Council had
previously issued the cease-fire order.
Dr. Bunche transmitted the deadline by cable
simultaneously to the Israeli and Egyptian Gov-
ernments through U.N. Representatives in Tel
Aviv and Cairo.
Atomic Energy Resolution Adopted
Committee I completed its work on the atomic
energy question on October 20 by approving, 41
to 6, with 10 absentions, a four-point Canadian
proposals, as amended, to continue consultations
aimed at establishing an effective system of inter-
national control and outlawing atomic weapons.
This proposal will go to the General Assembly,
where a two-thirds majority is required for
adoption.
The General Assembly
Having examined the first, second and third reports of
the .\tomic Energy Commission which have been trans-
mitted to it by the Security Council in accordance with
the terms of the General Assembly resolution of 24 Janu-
ary 1946:
1. Approves the general findings (part II C) and rec-
ommendations (part III) of the first report and the spe-
cific proposals of part II of the second report of the com-
mission as constituting the necessary basis for establish-
ing an effective system of international control of atomic
energy to ensure its use only for peaceful purposes and
for the elimination from national armaments of weapons
in accordance with the terms of reference of the Aec.
2. Expresses its deep concern at the impasse which has
been reached in the work of the Aec as shown in its third
report and regrets that unanimous agreement has not yet
been reached.
3. Requests the six sponsors of the General Assembly
resolution of the 24th of January. 194G, who are perma-
nent members of the Atomic Energy Commission, to meet
together and consult in order to determine if there exists
a basis for agreement on international control of atomic
energy to en.sure its use only for peaceful purposes and
for the elimination from national armaments of atomic
weapons and to report to the General Assembly results of
their consultation not later than its next regular session.
521
THE UN/TED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZBD AGENCIES
4. Meanwhile the General Assembly calls upon the Aec
to resume its sessions, to survey its program of work, and
to proceed to the further study of such of the subjects
remaining in the program of work as it considers to be
practicable and useful.
The effect of the resolution is to turn the stale-
mated issue of atomic energy control over to the
United States, U.S.S.K., the United Kingdom,
France, China, and Canada to see whether they can
find a basis for agreement between now and the
time when the General Assembly meets for its next
regular session.
The resolution as adopted is a revision of the
proposal originally submitted by Canada and re-
ported out by a special subcommittee. The orig-
inal draft would have left the issue to the five
major powers and Canada to solve the impasse
created by the Soviet Union, and would have di-
rected them to report at the next regular session.
Meanwhile, the Atomic Energy Commission itself
would have been inactive.
In announcing the United States' acceptance of
the wishes of the other nations, Ambassador Austin
emphasized that in agreeing to the revision, the
United States was not retreating from its oft-
stated view that the solution to the control impasse
is outside the Aec's competence and "that other
means of establishing cooperation must be ex-
plored".
Non-Self-Governing Territories
At a meeting of the Trusteeship Council in Paris
on October 18 the United States supported an
Indian resolution calling on states administering
non-self-governing territories to notify the Gen-
eral Assembly of changes in territorial constitu-
tional position or status resulting in discontinuance
of transmission of information called for under
provisions of the Charter.
The resolution was adopted by a vote of 29 to 0,
with 17 abstentions, after a Polish attempt to
broaden the resolution and Belgian efforts to limit
it were rejected.
Terming the resolution "logical and proper."
Francis B. Sayre, U. S. Delegate said:
"The United States now transmits vohmtarily
information regarding the development of institu-
tions of self-government within its territories.
Even in the absence of such a resolution, the United
States would expect to inform the United Nations
of any change in constitutional position and status
of any of its territories as a result of which it be-
lieved it unnecessary in resjject to such territory
to transmit further information under the Charter,
and in so doing to give such accompanying infor-
mation as might be appropriate. In voting for
this resolution, it is the understanding of my Gov-
ernment that transmission of the information re-
quested does not alter the right of each admin-
istering state to determine constitutional position
and status of any particular territory under its
sovereignty".
Cooperation Resolution
The five major powers found themselves in
agreement on October 21 as each expressed support
for a Mexican resolution appealing to the great
powers to "redouble their efforts, in a spirit of
solidarity and mutual understanding, to achieve
in the briefest possible time final settlement of the
war and the conclusion of all peace treaties".
Unqualified support for the resolution was
voiced by the United States, the United Kingdom,
and China. The Soviet Union and France also
endorsed the resolution but suggested rewording.
In addition, seven other nations spoke for adoption
of the Mexican appeal.
The United States was the first of the great
powers to speak out in favor of the Mexican resolu-
tion, the speaker being John Foster Dulles, of the
U.S. Delegation. The statement was Mr. Dulles'
first at a formal meeting of the current General
Assembly.
Mr. Dulles emphasized that although the major
powers have the right of initiative regarding the
peace treaties, this right must be used "affirma-
tively and constructively, and if not so used, the
consequences are of concern to all members of the
United Nations".
522
Department of Stale Bulletin
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES
North Pacific Regional Air Navigation Meeting of ICAO
BY CLIFFORD P. BURTON
The North Pacific Regional Air Navigation
Meeting lield at Seattle, Washington, July 13-29,
19-18, under the auspices of tlie International Civil
Aviation Organization (Icao) was the eighth
in the original series of ten regional meetings
scheduled by Icao to survey aviation facilities
throughout the world. Upon the completion of
the series Icao will have an index of facilities
needed by international civil aviation on all the
important air routes of the world. The remain-
inw regional meetings projected by Icao are the
African - Indian Ocean Meeting and the South-
east Asia Meeting.
The worlt of the regional air-navigation meet-
ings, namely, the provision of safe and adequate
transportation to intei-national travelers, is basic
to all Icao programs in tlie technical field. The
United States as host government provided tlie
international secretariat for the Seattle meeting
with assistance from the technical staff of Icao
at Montreal.
Nine voting countries were present: Australia,
Canada, China, the Netherlands. New Zealand, the
Philil^pines, Siam, tlie United Kingdom, and the
United States. In addition, Chile, tlie Dominican
Republic, Poland, and the Union of Soviet Social-
ist Republics sent observers. International or-
ganizations represented were the International Air
Transport Association, the International Meteor-
ological Organization, and the United Nations.
The main meeting was preceded by a meeting
of a fact-finding group which convened the week
prior to the regional meeting in order to examine
and document operational data for the convenience
and use of the main meeting. The Seattle meet-
ing was the first time such a gi-oup was convened.
Since it proved its usefulness, the pattern will be
made use of at subsequent regional meetings.
Tlie organization employed at the North Pacific
Regional Air Navigation Meeting was similar to
tliat used at previous regional meetings. It con-
sisted of the General Committee, Subcommittee 1
of the General Committee, and technical commit-
tees in the fields of telecommunications and radio
aids, meteorology, search and rescue, air-traffic
control, aerodromes, air routes, and ground aids.
The Creneral Committee did not liandle any sub-
stantive material as all technical matters were
handled by its No. 1 Subcommittee or in the other
technical committees. Clifford P. Burton, Chair-
Ocfofaer 24, 1948
man of the United States Delegation, was elected
Chairman of the meeting, with Colonel Cheng-Fu
Wang of China and Colonel Sphrang Devahdstin
of Siam elected First Vice Chairman and Second
Vice Chairman respectively.
The results of the meeting were quite satis-
factory to the United States as the United States
position, as approved by the interdepartmental
Air Coordinating Committee, was upheld to a high
degree. Specific accomplishments in the technical
fields are given in the brief summary that follows.
Flight Operations. — Problems in connection
with this subject were handled by the No. 1 Sub-
committee of the General Committee. The Com-
mittee recommended slight alterations in the
boundaries of the Icao regions to exclude the
northern portion of Alaska and to extend the
southwestern boundary southward to include the
Philippines and the eastern coast of China (and
Hong Kong). A standard altimeter setting of
29.92 inches of mercury was recommended for the
ocean areas excluding the area approximately 100
miles from the shore line. In these latter areas a
QNH value for altimeter settings will be utilized
for both terrain clearance and altitude separation.
In the field of dimensional units it was agreed that
the yellow table published by Icao would be used
over the land areas of the United States and Can-
ada with an exception thereto in the ocean areas
and the Aleutian chain wherein nautical miles and
knots would be substituted for statute miles per
hour. The subject of publications and manuals
was handled in connection with NOTAM pro-
cedures, and the position of the United States was
upheld in its entirety.
Aerodromes, Air Routes, and Ground Aids. —
The Committee selected regular, alternate, and
supplementary aerodromes required for North
Pacific air routes. Also, certain aerodromes by
class Avere selected for improvements. It recom-
mended that all aerodrome improvements be com-
pleted as rapidly as possible but in no case later
tlian July 1, 1953. The Committee agreed that
obstruction marldng and ground markers should
exist on air routes, that night ligliting should be
provided at all regular and alteinate aerodromes,
and that approach lights should be visible where
instrument landing systems are installed and where
practical at all other regular and alternate
aerodromes.
523
ACTIVITIES AND DEVBIOPMENTS
Ah' Traffic ContruJ. — The Committee recom-
mended the establishment of flight information
regions over most of tlie \yater areas of tlie North
Pacific. Approach and aerodrome control service
■was recommended for those aerodromes where the
traffic density justified their establishment. Dur-
ing the development of supplementary procedures
for this region, the Committee recommended that
action be taken to amend the Soutli Pacific supple-
mentary procedures so as to be consistent with the
North Pacific supplementary procedures.
Telecommunications and Radio Aids to Air
Navigation. — The Committee recommended addi-
tional point-to-point and air-ground aeronautical
communication circuits to take care of meteor-
ology, air-traffic control, and search-and-rescue
requirements. In addition, reconnnendations
were made for additions to the aeronautical radio-
navigation aids to meet the needs of the present
and proposed routes and aeronautical services
operating within the region.
Aeronautical Meteorology. — The Committee re-
viewed the existing system of meteorological tele-
communications and pi'epared detailed recjuire-
ments for the exchange of meteorological informa-
tion between the various meteorological offices
as well as for broadcast to aircraft in flight. The
Committee recommended the establishment of
eight ocean weather ships, the exact location to be
determined in general by the implementing state,
taking into consideration the requirements of the
other technical services such as search and rescue,
telecommunications, and air-traffic control.
'Search and Rescue. — The Committee reviewed
and tabulated the search-and-rescue facilities pro-
vided in the region and recommendations for cer-
tain additions were made to meet the minimum
requirements for the I'egion.
U.S. Delegation to International
Tin Study Group
The Department of State announced on October
13 the composition of the United States Delegation
to the Third Meeting of the International Tin
Study Group, scheduled to open at The Hague on
October 25, 1948. The Delegation is as follows :
Chairman
Donald D. Kennedy, Chief, International Resources Divi-
sion, Department of State
Advisers
Glion Curtis, Jr., American Embassy, The Hague
Carl Ilgenfritz, Vice President, United States Steel
Corporation
Charles W. Merrill, Chief, Metal Economics Brancli, Bu-
reau of Mines, Department of the Interior
Erwin Vogelsang, Chief, Tin and Antimony Section, Non-
ferrous Metals and Minerals Division, Department of
Commerce
524
W. F. McKinnon, Associate Director, Office of Metals Re-
serve, Reconstruction Finance Corporation
Evan Just, Director, Division of Strategic Materials, Eco-
nomic Cooperation Administration
The International Tin Study Group will review
the report of its working party which met at The
Hague in June. It will also review the world
statistical position of tin and discuss common
problems in connection with production, consump-
tion, and trade in tin.
The International Tin Study Group was estab-
lished upon a recommendation of the World Tin
Conference, held at London in October 191G, to
which the principal tin-producing and -consum-
ing countries of the world sent representatives.
The last meeting of the Group — the second — was i
held at Washington, D.C., April 19-24, 1948. |
U.S.-Mexican Fisheries Conference
[Released to the press October 15]
Fisheries problems of mutual interest to the
United States and Mexico will be the subject for
discussion between the two Governments at a con-
ference to be held in Mexico City beginning on
October 25.
In line with its program of advancing measures
designed to conserve fisheries resources of the high
seas the United States is interested in entering into
a joint fisheries-conservation agreement with
Mexico. However, tlie present talks are primarily
of an exploratory nature, it was emphasized, and
delegates are expected to make recommendations fi
for later consideration by the various federal agen- T
cies, interested state governments, and representa-
tives of industry.
The United States and Mexico have several bi-
lateral agreements by which tlie two countries have
harmoniously achieved the solution of specialized
problems in a spirit of friendly cooperation. The
equally outstanding success of the bilateral fish-
eries conventions between Canada and the United
States, by means of which the valuable halibut and
sockeye-salmon fisheries have been conserved and
developed, makes it appear that cooperation in the
sphere of fisheries with our southern neighbor
would also be mutually beneficial.
THE CONGRESS
Report of Activities of National Advisory Council on
International Monetary and Financial Problems. Mes-
sage from the President of the United States transmitting
report of the National Advisory Council on International
Monetarv and Financial Problems covering its operations
from Oct. 1, 1947, to Mar. 31, 1948. H. Doc. T37, 80th Cong.,
2d sess. vi, 56 pp.
Calling on the President for Information Concerning
the Potsdam Agreements and Violations Thereof by So-
viet Russia. S. Rept. 1440, 80th Cong., 2d sess., to accom-
pany S. Res. 213. 11 pp.
Amending the Trading with the Enemy Act. S. Rept.
1619, SOth Cong., 2d sess., to accompany S. 2764. 3 pp.
Department of State Bulletin
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
U.S.S.R. Travel Restrictions for Diplomatic Personnel
SUPPLEMENT TO 1941 LIST
Tlio American Embassy at Moscow has received
a circular note from the Foreign Office, of the
U.S.S.K. The note, dated September 30, 1948,
refers to the Foreign Office note of May 16, 1941,
in terms indicating that the restrictions of that
date are still considered in effect and in supplement
thereto transmits a new and greatly expanded list
on points and localities in or to which travel is
lirohibitfd for members of the staffs of foreign
missions and consulates. For all practical pur-
jposes the list covers the entire territory of the
IJ.S.S.R. Certain omissions, such as points in the
Georgian Kepnblic and Yakutsk, U.S.S.R., are
notable; the principal additions are the newly
acquired territories, such as Sakhalin.
In theory, travel is permitted through certain
areas, but one cannot reach those areas without
crossing forbidden zones.
The restriction to 50 kilometers radius of Mos-
cow is entirely new, not having been included in
the 1941 note. Travel even in this small radius
is subject to so many exceptions — i.e., raiorhs (dis-
tricts) where travel is forbidden even though less
than 50 kilometers distant — that to all intents and
purposes members of the foreign missions are re-
stricted to Moscow city limits.
American correspondents have written stories
about the new restrictions, but their stories have
been held up b}' the Soviet censor.
NOTES OF MAY 16, 1941, AND SEPTEMBER 30, 1948
[Translation]
PEOPLES COMMISS.\RIiT
FOR FOREIGN AFFAIRS
Pr/140
NOTE VERBALE
The People's Commissariat for Foreign Affairs
has the honor to bring to the attention of the
[ . . . Mission] the information that, beginning
with this date, the Government of the U.S.S.R.
has established a procedure whereby the travel on
the territory of the U.S.S.R. of diplomatic and
consular representatives in the U.S.S.R. of foreign
states, as well as of employees of foreign embassies,
legations and consulates, may take place only on
condition that such persons previously inform the
appropriate organs of the People's Commissariat
for Foreign Affairs, the People's Commissariat for
Defense and the People's Commissariat for the
Navy, with regard to trips planned, indicating
the itinerary, the points of stop-over and the
length of travel, so that such trips may be regis-
tered by the above-mentioned organs.
At the same time, the same Decree of the Soviet
Government has declared as prohibited (for
travel) the points and localities in the U.S.S.R.
A note attached to the list reads
' Not here printed.
' List not here printed,
as follows :
Members and employees of embassies, missions and con-
sulates are allowed to travel without notifying in advance
the approjiriate organs of tlie Ministry of Foreign .\ffairs
of the rssu or the Ministry of Armed Forces of the USSR
within a radius of 'iO km. from Moscow, with the exception
of the following raions of Moscow oblast: Dmitrov,
Oc/ober 24, 1948
enumerated in the list which is attached hereto.^
Moscow, May 16, 19-'il.
[To all Embassies and Missions]
Moscow
[Tr.inslation]
MINISTRY OF FOREIGN AFFAIRS
OF THE USSR
No. 1130/Pr.
The Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the USSR
presents its compliments to Embassies and Mis-
sions and has the honor to communicate that after
revision of the list of forbidden points and locali-
ties of the USSR transmitted with note no. 140/Pr.
of the People's Commissariat for Foreign Affairs
of the USSR, dated May 16, 1941, the Government
of the USSR has approved a new list of forbidden
points and localities of the USSR, which is at-
tached hereto.^
Moscow, September 30, 1948
Seal no. 1 of the
Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the USSR.
[To all Embassies and Missions]
Moscow
Zvenigorod, Kuntsevo, Krasnogorsk, Kra-snopolyansk,
Podolsk, Ramensk, Tushiuo, Khimki and Shchelkovo,
where travelling is forl)idden.
As an exception, it is permitted to go to the cities of
Klin and Zagorsk as well as to Yasnaya Polyana (Tula
ohlust), providing the travellers proceed along the main
automobile highway and have notified in advance the
Ministry of Foreign Affairs of tlie USSR or the Ministry
of Armed Forces of the USSR about the trip.
525
THE RECORD OF THE WBBK
Relaxing of Visa Restrictions by
U.S. and Belgium
[Released to the press October 15]
The Belgian Government, as of October 15,
1948, will waive visa requirements, but not pass-
port requirements, for American citizens proceed-
ing to continental Belgium for transit or for a
period of stay not exceeding two months.
The United States, because of existing laws, may
not reciprocate in identical terms. However, the
United States will grant passport visas without
fees and valid for a period of 24 months, instead
of the present 12 months' period of validity of such
visas, to Belgian nationals who are proceeding
to the United States and its possessions for busi-
ness or pleasure purposes, and who are bona fide
nonimmigrants within tlie meaning of the immi-
gration laws, provided the Belgian passport of
each bearer remains valid during the period of
validity of the visa.
and it is now hoped by the two Governments that
it will be possible to reach final agreement within
the near future.
This is the most comprehensive treaty of its kind
that Ireland has undertaken to negotiate with any
country. The provisions of the text now being
put in shape by representatives of the two Gov-
ernments will lay a broad, long-term, contractual
basis for the economic relationships between Ire-
land and the United States and for the fundamen-
tal rights and privileges that the nationals of each
country enjoy in the other. Currently, these are
lai'gely based on treaties concluded between Bri-
tain and the United States during the nineteenth
centuiy. The new agreement is expected to
modernize pertinent features of these old treaties
and to contain also many new clauses that reflect
present-day needs and developments.
The discussions are being pursued in a spirit of
mutual appreciation of the common ideals and out-
look of tlie two nations.
Visas Not Required for Italy
[Released to the press October 5]
The Department of State has been advised that
at the present time the Italian Government does
not require visas of American tourists for travel
to Italy. It has also been advised that as of
November 1, 1948, visas will not be required of
American citizens for visits to Italy either for
business or pleasure.
Since the Registration Act of 1940 requires that
all persons other than American citizens entering
this country must have United States visas, it is
not possible to disjiense with visa requirements in
the case of Italian citizens coming here. However,
as of November 1, the United States will recipro-
cate to the extent of issuing visas gratis for those
Italians coming to this country temporarily for
business or pleasure. These visas will be valid for
a period of 24 months. In the case of Italians
wishing to immigrate to the United States, immi-
gration visas costing $10 will continue to be
required.
Negotiations on Treaty of Friendship
Between U.S. and Ireland Resumed
[Released to the press October 15]
The Department of External Affairs of Ireland
and the American Legation in Dublin announced
on October 15 that negotiations have been resumed
at Dublin for the purpose of concluding a compre-
hensive treaty of friendship, commerce, and navi-
gation between Ireland and the United States.
Exploratory discussions were initiated last May,
526
Constitution-Making at Bonn-
from page 610
-Continued
Germany that the kingdom of Piedmont did in
unifying Italy in the nineteenth century.
It may be regarded as a striking coincidence that
the Bonn convention is meeting on the one hun-
dredth anniversary of the German Revolution of
1848. The Frankfort Parliament that met that
year tried to establish German unity on the basis of
liberty and democracy but failed because of the
political dilettantism of many of the delegates and
because of the lack of vision of the King of Prussia.
German unity was, instead, effected on the basis of
autocracy by the methods of militarism with dis-
astrous consequences not only to the Reich but to
the whole world.
Today the Bonn Parliamentary Council is at-
tempting to make good where Frankfort failed
in establishing German political union on a demo-
cratic foundation. The combined German- Amer-
ican Carl Schurz Memorial Celebration, which was
held in Frankfort just two days after the opening
of the Bonn convention to do honor to the Forty-
Eighters who emigrated to America, was a signi-
ficant reminder of the close and sympathetic in-
terest with which not only United States Military
Government but the American people are follow-
ing the efforts of the men of Bonn to carry this
mission to a successful conclusion.
Department of Stale Bulletin
Double Taxation: Discussions With Greece
[ReleaBed to the press October 14]
Discussions between Ainei"ican and Greek tech-
nical experts looking to the conclusion of treaties
for the avoidance of double taxation and for ad-
ministrative cooperation in prevention of tax eva-
sion with respect to income taxes and to taxes on
estates of deceased persons will be held at Athens
in the latter part of November.
If the discussions are successful and a basis for
agreement is found, they will result in the prepa-
ration of draft treaties which will be submitted by
the negotiators to their respective governments
for consideration with a view to signing.
In preparation for the discussions, the Ameri-
can delegation will welcome conferences with in-
terested parties or statements and suggestions f I'oni
them concerning problems in tax relations with
Greece. Comnumications in this connection should
be addressed to Eldon P. King, Special Deputy
'Commissioner of Internal Revenue, Bureau of
Internal Revenue, Washington 25, D.C.
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
be of the most value if submitted within the next
30 daj-s. All connnunications on these matters
should be addressed to The Secretary, Committee
for Reciprocity Information, Department of Com-
merce, Washington 25, D.C.
The items which will be the subject of rene-
gotiation are given in Department of State press
release 825 of October 11, 1948. The negotiations
may also include consideration of new concessions
on products not now in the respective schedules of
any of the four countries or additional concessions
on products already in such schedules.
Austria Extended Time for Renewing
Trade-Marif Registrations
The extension of time until and including Feb-
ruary 28, 1949, for renewing trade-mark registra-
tions wnth respect to Austria was granted by the
President in proclamation 2816 (13 Fed. Reg.
5927) on October 9, 1948.
Renegotiations of Certain Tariff Concessions
Granted by Brazil, Ceylon, Cuba, and Pakistan
As was indicated in the Department of State
BtTLLETix of October 3, 1948, page 445, it was de-
cided at the second session of the contracting par-
ties to the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade
held at Geneva from August 16 to September 14
that, because of special problems facing Brazil,
Ceylon, Cuba, and Pakistan, certain tariff conces-
sions granted by these countries to the other con-
tracting parties would be the subject of renegotia-
tions.
The purpose of these i-enegotiations is to reach
agreement upon adjustments in the rates of duty
on the items which are listed below for each
country. The renegotiations are to be carried out
initially between the pairs of countries chiefly in-
terested in the particular concessions involved.
However, any modifications in the schedules of
tariff concessions of these four countries agreed
upon during such bilateral negotiations must re-
ceive final approval by all of the contracting
parties.
Any views of interested persons with regard to
these renegotiations should be submitted to the
Committee for Reciprocity Information, which is
the committee established to receive views on
trade-agreement matters. Since it is proposed to
begin initial discussions between each of these
four countries and the United States on products
of primary interest to the United States as soon
as possible, it is suggested that any such views will
Ocfofaer 24, 1948
China Makes Lend-Lease Payment
[Released to the press October 13]
The Department of State announced on October
13 that the Government of China has paid to the
Treasury of the United States $2,824,930.75, repre-
senting the second annual installment on principal
and interest of the lend-lease pipeline agreement
with China.
This agreement, concluded in June 1946, repre-
sented lend-lease material on order by the Chinese
Government at the end of the war, totaling ap-
proximately $51,000,000. The agreement provides
for repayment over a SO-j'ear period at 2% percent
interest.
Appointment of U.S. Member to International
Joint Commission
The Department of State announced on October
11 the appointment by President Truman of Eu-
gene W. Weber, Special Assistant to the Assistant
Chief of Engineers for Civil Works, Department
of the Army, as a member of the United States
Section of the International Joint Commission,
United States and Canada. This appointment
fills the vacancy on the United States Section of
the Commission which has existed since the death
of R. Walton Moore, Counselor of the Department
of State, on February 8, 1941. The Commission
will hold its semiannual meeting in Ottawa, Can-
ada, beginning October 12, 1948.
527
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Belgium and Luxembourg Join in U.S.
Fulbright Plan
[Released to the press October 8]
Belgium, Luxembourg, and the United States
signed on October 8 an agreement under the Ful-
bright act, putting into operation the pi'ogram
of educational exchanges authorized by -Public
Law 584, 79th Congress. The signing took place
in Brussels, with Education Minister Camille
Huysmans rej^resenting the Belgian Government,
the Charge d'Affaires for Luxembourg represent-
ing that country, and Ambassador Alan G. Kirk
representing the United States. It was the seventh
agreement signed under the act, jjrevious agree-
ments having been made with the Governments of
China, Burma, the Philippines, Greece, New Zea-
land, and the United Kingdom.
The agreement provides for a United States
Educational Foundation in Belgium to assist in
the administration of the educational program
financed from certain funds resulting from the
sale of United States surplus property to these
countries. The present agreement provides for
an annual program of the equivalent of $150,000
in Belgian francs for educational purposes. The
program will include the financing of "studies,
research, instruction, and other educational activi-
ties of or for citizens of the United States of
America in schools and institutions of higher
learning located in Belgium, the Belgian Congo,
and Luxembourg, or of the nationals of Belgium,
Belgian Congo, and Luxembourg in the United
States schools and institutions of higher learning
located outside the continental United States . . .
including payment for transportation, tuition,
maintenance, and other expenses incident to
scholastic activities ; or furnishing transportation
for nationals of Belgium, tlie Belgian Congo, and
Luxembourg who desire to attend United States
schools and institutions of higher learning in the
continental United States . . . whose attendance
will not deprive citizens of the United States of
America of an opportunity to attend such schools
and institutions."
Tlie Foundation in Belgium will have an eight-
man Board of Directors, the lionorary chairman of
which will be the United States Ambassador to
Belgium. Members of the Board will consist of
five United States citizens resident in Belgium in-
cluding a representation from the United States
Embassy in Brussels, two citizens of Belgium, and
one citizen of Luxembourg.
In discussing the jirogram in Brussels, Ambas-
sador Kirk said :
"I am very happy about the agreement, because
I believe it will continue the tradition of exchange
'For an account of tlie Commission's first meeting, see
Department of State iiul)lication 3.313.
528
of students between our universities which has re-
sulted in producing many leaders of thought, edu-
cation, and government in Belgium and Luxem-
bourg. Also there has been created an outstand-
ing body of Americans who know and love the
culture of your country. Even more, with the
great interest now being taken by our universities
and private foundations in the United States in
providing fellowships for foreign students, I look
forward to an increasing number of the young men
and women of Belgium and Luxembourg finding
such opportunities in our country. Although the
development of such a program necessarily re-
quires time, its importance is well understood in
educational circles in the United States. This is
definitely not a one-way street, along which only
American traffic will pass.
"During the past year, ten fellowship students
went to the United States for advanced study
under the auspices of the Belgian-American Edu-
cational Foundation. Others were sent by Amer-
ican Rotary, and the American Association of
University Women provided for several students.
There are even cases where the American students
themselves, at some of our universities, have con-
tributed the funds or the expenses of selected
foreign students. This, I sincerely believe, is
only a beginning. The cordial regard which our
countries have for each other will assure that the
two-way street will be well traveled."
Information about specific opportunities for
American citizens to study, teach, or undertake
research in Belgium, Luxembourg, or the Belgian
Congo will be made public in the near future. In-
quiries about these opportunities and requests for
application forms should be addressed to the fol-
lowing three agencies : Institute of International
Education, 2 West 45th Street, New York 19, N.Y.
(for graduate study) ; United States Office of
Education, Federal Security Agency, Washington
25, D.C. (for teaching in Belgian elementary and
secondary schools) ; and tlie Conference Board of
Associated Research Councils, 2101 Constitution
Avenue NW., Washington 25, D.C. (for teaching
at the college level and for post-doctoral research) .
Second Meeting of Educational Exchange
Advisory Commission
Consideration of the basic principles of United
States educational exchanges witli specific refer-
ence to the problems of Eastern Europe and the
Iron Curtain countries was undertaken at the sec-
ond meeting of the United States Advisory Com-
mission on Educational Exchange in a two-day
session, October 18 and 19.^
In addition, the Commission discussed problems
presented to it by George V. Allen, Assistant Secre-
tary of State for public affairs, concerning the dis-
posal of art objects now in this country from oc-
cu^jied countries.
Department of State Bulletin
Sales and Transfers of Nondemilitarized Combat Materiel
[Ueleased to the press October 1-]
List of consimmiated sales of surplus combat
materiel, effected by the Department of State in
its capacity as foreign-surplus disposal agent, dur-
ing the months of February, April, May, July, and
August, 1948, and December 1947, as reported to
the Munitions Division of tlie Department through
October 11, 1948, and not previously announced
is as follows:
Country
Description of mat6riel
Procurement cost
Sales price
Date of
transfer
Brazil . .
China . .
Denmark .
Finland .
Italy . . .
Mexico . .
Netherlands
Norway . . . .
United Kingdom .
Venezuela . . .
Spare parts for aircraft engines
Miscellaneous spare parts for machine guns, armored cars,
and cleaning and preserving materials.
Miscellaneous parts and equipment for aircraft
42 P-47-D Aircraft (militarized)
255 Aircraft engines (for C-46s and C-47s)
Torpedo boat T-19 (non-demilitarized)
5 Minesweepers to Finnish Purchasing Mission (demilitar-
ized).
1 Minesweeper to Italian national (demilitarized) . . . .
Helmets and liners
66 Tank engines — to be demilitarized for scrap
Miscellaneous ordnance equipment
Ammunition
Ex-German freighter, Drau
1 LST for scrap (demilitarized)
Miscellaneous gas masks and repair kit, bayonets, binocu-
lars, carbines, clinometers, machine guns, truck mounts,
helmets and liners.
$22, 648. 70
22, 236. 01
5,093,273. 15
6,781,451.00
3, 798, 547. 50
(')
2, 911,250. 00
582, 250. 00
74, 500. 00
192, 030. 00
1, 877. 00
1, 560. 00
(')
2, 171, 280. 00
63, 507. 91
$1, 132. 44
9, 609. 1 1
891, 322. 80
544, 500. 00
393, 500. 00
5, 000. 00
175,000.00
25, 050. 00
7, 450. 00
60, 000. 00
303. 10
80. 00
422, 500. 00
1,800. 00
7, 206. 01
8/7/48
8/27/48
7/29/48
8/7/48
8/16/48
Feb. 48
5/5/48
4/10/48
8/19/48
8/3/48
8/13/48
8/13/48
7/26/48
12/17/47
8/16/48
I Captured enemy materiel.
« Korea, 1945 to 1948" Released
[Released to the press October 15]
The Depai'tment of State announced on October
15 the issuance of its newest publication, Korea,
IDJfO to lOJfS. This pamphlet reviews the political
developments within Korea from the time of entry
of the U.S. Army forces into that country to the
present, with special emphasis on the period after
March 1947 not covered by the Department's pre-
vious publication, Korea's Imdependence. It con-
tains also a survey of Korean economic conditions
and a supplementary selection of documents.
The pamphlet. Department of State publication
3305, will be sold by the Superintendent of Docu-
ments, Government Printing Office, Washington
25, D.C., for -25 cents a copy with a 25 percent
discount to purchasers of 100 copies or more.
PUBLICATIONS
Department of State
For iulv hii tile tiuiJcriiitendcnt of Documents, (lovcniinciit
Printing Office, Washington 25, D.C. Address requests
direct to tlie Huperintendcnt of Documents, except in the
case of free publications, which may he obtained from the
Department of State.
October 24. J 948
Education: Cooperative Program in Peru. Treaties and
Other International Acts Series 1740. Pub. 3166. 25
pp. 100.
Arrangement Between the United States and Peru —
effected by exchange of notes signed at Lima April 1
and 15, 1944; entered into force April 15, 1944; And
Memorandum of Agreement — Signed at Lima April 4,
1944; effective April 4, 1944: Supplementary Agree-
ment No. 1 — Signed at Lima January 30, 1945 ; en-
tered into force January 30, 1945; Supplement to
Memorandum of Agreement — Signed April 30, 1945;
entered into force April 30, 1045.
Economic Cooperation with Iceland Under Public Law
472 — SOth Congress. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1787. Pub. 3252. 69 pp. 20^.
Agreement Between the United States and Iceland —
Signed at Reykjavik July 3, 1948; entered into force
July 3, 1948. "
Economic Cooperation with Italy Under Public Law 472 —
SOth Congress. Treaties and Other International Acts
Series 1789. Pub. 3253. 55 pp. 15^.
Agreement Between the United States and Italy — •
Signed at Rome June 28, 1948; entered into force
June 28, 1948.
National Commission News, October 1948. Pub. 3292.
10 pp. 10«; a copy ; $1 a year domestic, $1.35 a year foreign.
Prepared monthly for the United States National Com-
mission for UNESCO.
529
Departmental Regulations
THE DEPARTMENT
270.1 Departmental Responsibilities in the Programs
for Acquisition and Use of Foreign Currency and Credit
Assets: (Effective 8-&-4S) Experience with and re-
sponsibility for the use of foreign currency and credit
assets within the Department have crystallized to the
point where the existing arrangements can now be formal-
ized in this regulation.
I General.
A Acquisition and U.se. As a result of the sale of
surplus property abroad and the making of lend-lease set-
tlements, the United States has acquired foreign currencies
and credits amounting to several millions of dollars and is
in a position to acquire substantially more. These foreign
currencies and credits can be and are being employed to
provide funds for the acquisition or improvement of real
property for the Foreign Service ; to promote educational
activities contemplated by the Fulbright Act ; and, in some
instances, to meet current Governmental exi)enses abroad.
B Specific Use. Except for expenses for an adminis-
trative staff, the Fulbright Program is being financed solely
through the use of foreign currency and credit assets
arising from the sale of surplus properties abroad and does
not depend upon current appropriations. For the foreign
buildings program and for Departmental administrative
expenses abroad, foreign currency and credit assets, ob-
tained either from surplus property sales or other sources,
are purchased from the Treasury Department or from such
other Government agency or corporation as may have such
currencies or credits, with funds obtained from current
appropriations specified for these purposes.
II Office and Division Responsibilities. Subject to
the policy determinations and general supervision of the
appropriate Assistant Secretaries and Office Directors, re-
.sponsibilities under these programs are delegated as fol-
lows :
A
will:
Division of Organization and Budget (OB). OB
1 Coordinate Departmental planning for the use
of foreign currencies and credits for the various pro-
grams and allocate available currencies and credits in
accordance with approved plans. The coordinating re-
siKinsibility includes clearance of proiiosals of the Divi-
sion of Foreign Buildings Operations (FBO) and the
Division of Exchange of I'ersons (lEP) for foreign cur-
rencies and credits to be drawn down from foreign
governments and for reservation of foreign currencies
on deposit in the Treasury ; clearance of FBO and lEP
requests for requisitions to foreign governments for cur-
rency draw-downs ; and clearance of FBO requests for
purchases of unreserved currencies from United States
Government agencies.
2 Develop plans and recommendations for use of
foreign currency and credit assets to pay Departmental
administrative expenses abroad.
3 Maintain necessary liaison with and obtain re-
quired clearances from the Bureau of the Budget.
Ascertain through the Bureau of the Budget that pro-
posed plans for use of foreign currency and credit assets
are in accord with the President's over-all program.
4 Review and approve necessary reports to the
Congress or Bureau of the Budget on foreign-currency
and credit-usage programs. lEP will be responsible
for educational-program reports ; FBO for buildings-
program reports ; OB for reports on general administra-
tive expenses.
5 Prepare other consolidated reports as may be I
required ; FBO, lEP, and other olfices concerned supply-
ing OB with any additional information required for
this purpose.
6 Maintain a central record, by country and pro-
gram, showing source, allocation, and utilization of
foreign currencies and credits. As required, OB will
issue reports, based upon this record, for the use of all
interested offices, such as FBO, lEP, Office of the Foreign
Liquidation Comnjissloner (OFLC ). and Office of Finan-
cial and Development Policy (OFD).
7 On request, provide technical advice on budget,
organization, and management matters relating to edu-
cational-foundation operations.
B
Division of Finance (DP). DF will :
530
1 Act as the central drafting and transmitting
point for all requests to draw down foreign currencies as
payments under surjilus property, executive, and lend-
lease agreements.
2 Conduct necessary liaison with the Treasury
Department and other Government agencies and cor-
porations from which foreign currencies may be pur-
chased, regarding specific foreign-currency jmrchase
transactions including liaison with respect to reimburse-
ment from FBO and general administrative appropria-
tions for foreign currencies purchased from whatever
source.
3 Designate dejKisitories for foundation funds.
4 Upon request provide technical advice and assist-
ance in fiscal and accounting matters relating to the
acquisition and use of foreign currency and credit assets.
5 Prepare certification for Fulbright purposes un-
der Treasury Regulation 799.
C Division of Exchange of Persons (lEP). lEP
will:
1 Develop educational programs under the Ful-
bright Amendment to the Surplus Proiierty Act.
2 Draft and negotiate through appropriate Depart-
mental channels, executive agreements with other gov-
ernments establishing educational programs.
3 Initiate requests, through OB, for concurrence
of the Bureau of the Budget for the reservation of for-
eign currencies for the Fulbright Program.
4 Initiate requests, thi'ough OB, for reservation of
foreign currencies by the Treasury Department.
5 Initiate requests, through OB for draw-downs or
transfers of foreign currencies.
6 Initiate requisitions, through DF, for foreign
currencies to be transferred to particular foundations
from Treasury holdings.
7 Supervise, review, and issue regulations govern-
ing educational-foundation operations (including organ-
ization, budget, and fiscal operations).
8 Estatjlish a basis for each foundation to main-
tain adequate current records of its operations.
9 Prepare reports on educational-program activi-
ties for transmission to the Congress, as required by pub-
lic law (60 Stat. 755), and provide information on the
Fulbright Program for inclusion in other Departmental
reports.
D Division of Foreign Buildings Operations (FBO).
FBO will :
1 Develop foreign-buildings programs utilizing
available foreign currencies and credits under public law
(60 Stat. 663).
Departmenf of Slafe Bulletin
ACTIVITIES AND DEPARTMENTS
2 Negotiate, through appropriate Di'purtniental
cliannels, agreements with foreign governmeuts for tlie
acquisition of property.
3 Initiate requests, through OB for reservatious of
foreign currencies by the Treasury Department.
4 Initiate requests, througli OB and DF, for draw-
downs or purchases of unreserved foreign currencies.
5 Initiate requests, through DF, for purchases of
reserved foreign currencies.
G Initiate, through OFLC, instructions authorizing
acceptance of specitic properties as payments in kind
under the provisions of surplus-property and lend-lease
agreements authorizing acceptance of property. FBO
will furnish OFLC with tlie customary Certiticate of
Valuation, stated in terms of United States dollars,
which will he used by OFLC as a basis for acknowledg-
ing the payment by the foreign government and for trans-
fer of funds from the Foreign Service Buildings Fund to
Miscellaneous Receipts (Proceeds of Surplus Property or
proceeds from Lend-Lease Settlements).
7 Prepare reports on utilization of foreign cur-
rency and credit assets in the buildings program as
required.
E Division of Financial Affairs (FN).
1 While the surplus property and lend-lease pro-
grams involve several divisions of OFD, FN is primarily
responsible for the foreign-currency aspects of those
programs. FN will :
a Make the basic economic- and financial-policy
judgments regarding the acceptance of foreign cur-
rencies in lieu of dollar obligations. In those cases in
which economic conditions do not warrant the accept-
ance by the United States of foreign currencies in lieu
of dollars, the office responsible for the program for
which the foreign currency is to be used, may forward
a recommendation to the Under Secretary to accept
the foreign currencies on other grounds.
b Determine whether foreign-currency provisions
will be incorporated in new lend-lease agreements.
c Determine, in applicable cases, the policy with
respect to the drawings of foreign currencies in lieu of
United States dollars under the foreign-currency op-
tion authority.
d Amend, for countries whose economic and
financial prospects warrant it, lend-lease agreements
in order to authorize acceptance of local currency
or payment in kind in lieu of payment in dollar
obligations.
e Conduct necessary liaison with the Treasury
Department and other interested United States Gov-
ernment agencies with respect to foreign financial-
policy aspects of the programs including exchange
rates, convertibility of foreign currencies and ap-
plicability of foreign-exchange control regulations.
f Review and clear proposed FuUiright executive
agreements, certifications for Fulhright purposes un-
der Treasury Regulation 700, proposed reservations
for foreign currencies and credits for Departmental
programs, and draw-downs of foreign currency and
credit assets under surplus-property and lend-lease
agreements for conformance to appropriate aspects
of United States foreign financial policy including
those relating to exchange rates, convertibility of
foreign currencies, and applicability of foreign-ex-
change control regulations.
g Advice OFLC and the War Assets Administra-
tion (WAA) (or its successors) regarding the ac-
ceptance of foreign currency in connection with cash
and credit sales of surplus pioperty which cannot
be made for dollars. Also advise OFLC and WAA (or
its successors) in the formulation of agreement clauses
granting the United States Government the option of
drawing foreign currency in lieu of dollars.
2 The foreign buildings program, with respect to
United States foreign financial-policy aspects, will be
cleared between FBO and FN at the beginning of each
fiscal year. Should it become necessary to make sub-
stantial variations in the original proposal, FBO will
clear the changes in advance with FN.
F Legal Adviser (L). L will review Fulbright
executive agreements for conformance with enabling legis-
lation ; draft and review proposed legislation affecting the
use of foreign currencies and credits ; and furnish neces-
sary legal opinions regarding the use of foreign currencies
and credits under existing legislation.
G Oflice of the Foreign Service (OFS). OFS will
provide advice and assistant to the Office of Educational
Exchange (OEX) on the administrative relationships be-
tween the Foreign Service establishments and educational
foundations.
H Office of the Foreign Liquidation Commissioner
(OFLC). OFLC will:
1 Review and clear instructions pertaining to the
acquisition of foreign currencies and properties as pay-
ments under the provisions of surplus-property agree-
ments, as well as under joint surplus-property and lend-
lease agreements, except that routine acquisitions of
foreign currency made in accordance with agreed pro-
cedures and within established allocations need not be
individually cleared.
2 Maintain accounts necessary to establish records
of pa.vments received and balances due from foreign
governments under surplus-property agreements.
3 Determine the terms of payment, including those
relating to the acquisition of foreign currency and prop-
erty, which will be incorporated in new surplus-property
agreements and in appropriate amendments to existing
agreements. With regard to the acquisition of foreign
currency, OFLC will consult with FN.
Ocfober 24, J 948
531
The United Nations and Page
Specialized Agencies
Third Regular Session of the General As-
sembly:
World Confidence and the Reduction of
Armed Forces: The American Objec-
tive. Remarks by Ambassador War-
ren R. Austin 511
Discussion of the Palestine Situation in
Committee I. Statement by Ralph
Bunche 517
The U.S. in the U.N 520
North Pacific Regional Air Navigation Meet-
ing of IcAO. Article by Clifford P.
Burton 523
Occupation Matters
Constitution- Making at Bonn. An Article .
507
Economic Affairs
U.S. Delegation to International Tin Study
Group 524
U.S.-Mexican Fisheries Conference .... 524
Relaxing of Visa Restrictions by U.S. and
Belgium 526
Visas Not Required for Italy 526
Renegotiations of Certain Tariff Concessions
Granted by Brazil, Ceylon, Cuba, and
Pakistan 527
Austria Extended Time for Renewing Trade-
Mark Registration 527
Appointment of U.S. Member to Inter-
tional Joint Commission 527
Economic Affairs — Continued Page
Sales and Transfers of Nondemilitarized
Combat Materiel 529
General Policy
U.S.S.R. Travel Restrictions for Diplomatic
Personnel:
Supplement to 1941 List 525
Notes of May 16, 1941, and September 30,
1948 525
Treaty Information
Negotiations on Treaty of Friendship Between
U.S. and Ireland Resumed 526
Double Taxation: Discussions W ith Greece . 527
Renegotiations of Certain Tariff Concessions
Granted by Brazil, Ceylon, Cuba, and
Pakistan 527
China Makes Lend-Lease Payment 527
International Information and
Educational Affairs
Belgium and Luxembourg Join in U.S.
Fulbright Plan 528
Second Meeting of Educational Exchange
Advisory Commission 528
Publications
"Korea, 1945 to 1948" Released 529
Department of State 529
The Department
Departmental Regulations 530
The Congress 524
wm^nmdo/M
Clifford P. Burton, Chairman of the United States Delegation
to the North Pacific Regional Air Navigation Meeting, is Chief
of Technical Mission, Civil Aeronautics Administration, Depart-
ment of Commerce.
U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTIN6 OFFICE: Il4t
^"fsr^ /'//3 0
iJAe/ z^eha^y^t^itent/ /(w t/taie^
WHY WE SUPPORT THE U.N. • Address by Amhassador
Warren R. Austin •• 551
U.S. PROPOSES SIX SPONSORING POWERS DIS-
CUSS ATO.AHC ENERGY ISSUES
U.S. ACCEPTS ATOMIC ENERGY RESOLUTION
Statements by Ambassador Warren R. Austin . . • . 535, 539
REVIEW OF ALLIED ACTION ON BERLIN BLOCK-
ADE • Statement by Philip C. Jessup 541
RECOMMEIVDATIONS ON PROBLEMS OF EDUCA-
TIONAL EXCHANGE WITH EASTERN EURO-
PEAN COUNTRIES • Report of the U.S. Advisory
Commission •• 560
For complete contents see back cover
Vol. XIX, No. 487
October 31, 1948
1
^ei«» ci»
U. S. SUPERKOENDENT OF DOCUMtKIf
DEC 2 1948
■*T«» O*
^,%wwy*. bulletin
Vol. XIX, No. 487 • Publication 3322
October 31, 1948
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office
Washington 25, DC.
Pkice:
62 Issues, domestic $6, foreign $7.26
Single copy, 16 cents
Published with the approval of the
Director of the Bureau of the Budget
Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
or State Bdlletik as the source will be
appreciated.
The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
natiorutl affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter'
national interest.
Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
U.S. Proposes Six Sponsoring Powers Discuss Atomic Energy Issues
STATEMENT BY AMBASSADOR WARREN R. AUSTIN IN COMMITEE P
U.S. Delegate to the General Assembly
The resolution of Canada now before the Com-
mittee, provides in paragraph 1 for approval by
the General Assembly of the Atomic Energy Com-
mission's plan of control and prohibition as set
forth in the general findings (part II C) and
recommendations (part III) of the first report,
and the specific proposals of part II of the second
report of the Commission. The plan was de-
veloped by, and we believe has the support of,
all the nations who have at any time served on the
Atomic Energy Commission, with the exception
of the Soviet Union, Poland, and the Ultraine ; in
other words, a majority of 14 states and a minority
of 3.
The Soviets have recently announced that they
would be willing to negotiate simultaneously two
treaties which, as many speakers have already
pointed out, would have to be closely interlocked.
But the Soviet proposal does not alter the condi-
tions necessary for effective control. These condi-
tions remain the same. They are laid down in the
two reports. They have been developed by the
serious work of the delegates of 14 nations. They
have been discussed with the Delegatesof theSoviet
Union for over two years. It would do no good
to repudiate this work and start all over again, if
indeed that were possible. The same facts, the
same necessities, would require the same control.
The facts of the problem, the nature of the fission
process, indeed, the dual nature of U-235 and
plutonium, which may be used either as fuels or
as explosives, remains the same. The United
States believes that the plan and present proposals
of the United Nations Atomic Energy Commis-
sion constitute the necessary basis for establishing
October 31, 1948
effective control of atomic energy and prohibition
of atomic weapons and will vote accordingly for
paragraph 2 of the Canadian resolution, which is
a simple expression of fact. Paragraph 3 of the
Canadian resolution deals with the problem of how
to get negotiations started again, so as to complete
the treaty or convention on which certain work
remains to be done. The Canadian resolution pro-
poses a solution.
A number of other solutions have been suggested
to solve the problem. One proposed solution is
that of the Soviet Union. The Soviets have pro-
posed in their resolution that we repudiate the
work of the past two and a half years and start
all over again under the terms of reference laid
down by the General Assembly in 1946. But the
Soviets interpret these terms of reference in a man-
ner different from the interpretation given by the
majority of the Commission. The Soviets inter-
pret these terms of reference to mean that pro-
hibition and control must be put into effect, si-
multaneously, and that control be simultaneous
on all control activities. Their position was made
perfectly clear in the statements which the Soviet
Delegate, Mr. Malik, made before the Subcommit-
tee. He desired that other nations should agree to
the simultaneous conclusion and bringing into
force of two conventions, one for control and one
for prohibition, and ". . . that the Atomic En-
ergy Commission should resume its work on the
basis of the resolution of the General Assembly of
January 1946". He then said, concerning the sys-
" Made on Oct. 18, 1948, and released to the press on the
same date.
535
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPCCIAIIZED AGENCIES
tern of stages contained in the General Assembly's
resolutions of January 24, 1946, and I quote from
the summary record of his remarks, "that system
of stages had been intended to facilitate the studies
of the Atomic Energy Commission but now the
United Kingdom and the United States had given
the system of stages another meaning: They ex-
tended it to the putting into effect of the system
of control."
Putting together these two statements made by
the Eei^resentatives of the Soviet Union during the
meetings of the Subcommittee, we see that the so-
called concession proposed by the Soviet Union
had attached to it new conditions which were de-
signed to commit the General Assembly to a sys-
tem of control which would prevent the treaty
going into effect by stages as required by the Com-
mission. Such a proposal is not a concession. It is
simply a maneuver designed to provide for the
destruction of atomic weapons in one country be-
fore, and probably a long while before, there had
been any determination of whether or not atomic
weapons existed in another country. By demand-
ing that prohibition be simultaneous with control,
without any gradual steps or stages by which both
prohibition and control would go into effect, the
Soviet proposal would eliminate atomic weapons
and explosives in one country many months, or
perhaps years, before the system of control and
inspection had been able to locate and determine
the existence of atomic weapons and explosives
in certain other countries. Such an arrangement
would, of course, be wholly unacceptable. The
majority of the Atomic Energy Commission have
an entirely different view of the problem.
The majority believe that the terms of reference
of the General Assembly clearly provide and make
possible that the treaty should go into effect by
stages. Moreover, the practical realities in put-
ting controls into effect require time. In the words
of the first report, which is part of the plan of the
Commission: "The treaty or convention should
embrace the entire program for putting the inter-
national system of control and inspection into
effect, and should provide a schedule for the com-
pletion of the transition process over a period of
time, step by step, in an orderly and agreed se-
quence leading to the full and effective establish-
ment of international control of atomic energy".
These stages would, of course, include the step-
by-step elimination of atomic arms coincident with
the step-by-step establishment of control, leading
to the final result of complete control, known
elimination and enforceable prohibition. These
steps or stages have not yet been laid down.
According to the Commission's third report no
useful purpose would be served by trying to deter-
mine the form and timing of stages until the Soviet
Union is ready to take a sincere part in the nego-
tiations on the basis of accepted principles. We
have been through this debate over and over again
in the Atomic Energy Commission in the past two
and a half years. It would not be possible nor
reasonable to go back and start this debate all
over agam.
The Soviet resolution would commit the General
Assembly to a course under which no majority of
sincere men in the Atomic Energy Commission
could develop an effective plan. It is wholly un-
acceptable. Another proposed solution to the
problem of renewing negotiations is that proposed
in the Indian resolution. That resolution pro-
vides that the Atomic Energy Conmiission would
go back to work and complete the drafting of a
treaty on the basis of the work already done.
Those who drafted the Indian resolution hoped at
first that the Soviet Union would cooperate in the
work of the Commission on this basis and included
such a clause in the resolution. But in the Sub-
committee Mr. Malik said on October 11: "The
U.S.S.E. do not agree with the provisions which
is included in the Indian resolution, that there are
indications that the situation which led to the
closing of the work of the Atomic Energy Commis-
sion no longer exists". This clause had therefore
to be omitted. The Indian resolution now means
that the work should go on without the Soviet
Union, but we do not agree that this would be a
solution. Indeed, we believe that in the long run
it would gravely set back the hope of agreement.
In the matters which now remain for discussion,
the political aspects are so important that it would
be impractical and, we believe, harmful to discuss
them except in full and open cooperation among
all the major countries involved, and against the
background of unanimous agreement on the
majority jjlan as thus far developed.
536
Department of Slate Bulletin
Let us consider some of these matters which still
remain to be agreed upon in detail in order to
complete a treaty. There is the matter of sanc-
tions. Under the plan proposed by the Soviet
Union sanctions would be terribly important. The
Soviet plan proposes the operation of nuclear
plants by nations, with an international agency
carrying out periodic inspections to see whether
they are opei'ating within the rules of techno-
logical exploitation agreed upon in the treaty, or
set out by the agency. If these rules were violated,
that is, if a nation made more nuclear fuel than
the rules provided, the international agency would
tlien make a recommendation to the Security
Council. To set the matter right, the Security
Council might have to employ sanctions. Such
infractions by national plants would probably
come up quite often, and sanctions would be con-
tinually and terribly important. Failure of the
Security Council to act because of the veto, which
is probable in certain cases, would create a most
serious situation. Under the plan proposed by
the United Nations Atomic Energy Commission
all plants would be owned and operated by the in-
ternational agency. The quota of nuclear fuels
to be used for peaceful purposes would be defined
in the treaty and the international agency would
be required to carry out these treaty provisions.
Under the Commission plan, major sanctions
would only be required in the case of violations,
such as seizure or refusal of inspection, which
might be expected to occur only at rare intervals.
In an atmosphere of cooperation in the basic ele-
ments of conti'ol, tlie matter of the veto could
probably be worked out quite easily. Further
elaboration of the veto matter by the majority
without Soviet agreement and presented apart
from consideration of the plan as a whole would
tend to confirm present frictions.
Let us examine the matter of stages. Contrary
to what seems to be the impression of the Soviet
Delegates, judging from their remarks before this
Committee, neither the first nor the second report
of the Commission lays down the order of stages.
The order of stages is one of the matters still to be
agreed upon before a treaty can be completed. It
surely is evident that the order of the stages will
be greatly affected by tlie conditions of world secu-
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
rity existing at the time tlie treaty is to go into
effect. For instance, the time at which disposal
of atomic weapons would take place would depend
upon the rapidity with which effective control
could go into effect. This in turn would depend
upon the openness existing between nations at the
time the treaty was signed. If the Communist
states were still a closed system, it would take time
to open them up so that control could become effec-
tive. And make no mistake about it, such opening
up is fundamental to effective control. But if the
Communist states had already opened their borders
to the extent now prevalent in other states, it would
take much less time to establish controls, and dis-
posal of weapons could take place much sooner.
To attempt to lay down stages now when agree-
ment on other matters is so distant would only
increase the suspicions and differences which now
exist.
In the matter of staffing the organization, some
discussions were held in the Commission just prior
to the drafting of the third report. It was quickly
appai'ent that no agreement could be reached on
staffing, until the functions of the international
agency were agreed upon. The Soviet Delegates
themselves stated that further discussions of staff-
ing were useless until agreement was reached on
the functions of the proposed agency. Such dis-
cussions might indeed be harmful, since they would
point up the differences and make later agreement
more difficult.
For these and other reasons we were compelled
to disagree with the point of view advanced in the
Syrian resolution that work in the Commission
might usefully go on, even though the Soviet were
not taking part.
The United States holds firmly to the views so
cogently expressed in the third report that no
further progress can be made at the level of the
Atomic Energy Commission until all the members
of the Conmaission agree to accept, as constituting
the necessary basis for further work, the reports
as approved by the General Assembly. The
United States further believes that since such ac-
ceptance is not now forthcoming, the best, and
probably the only hope of obtaining it is by
consultation among the sponsoring powers. This
is the solution proposed in paragraph 3 of the
Canadian resolution.
Ocfofaer 31, 1948
537
THB UNITBD NATIONS AND SPECMUZED ACENCIBS
It is because we so earnestly seek agreement, be-
cause we still hope for ultimate agreement, how-
ever dim the present prospects, that we strongly
urge this course which would follow from the ac-
ceptance of the resolution now before us in its
entirety.
In taking this position we will no doubt further
increase the suspicions of the Soviet powers as to
our motives. Other nations have said that the
offer of the United States under certain condi-
tions was a generous oifer. But the Soviet Union
have sought other motives to account for our
strange action. The motive they seem unable to
understand is our deep concern for the kind of
world the American people desire to live in. The
American people desire to live in a world where
individual human beings, as well as independent
nations, great and small, have the greatest possible
liberty and freedom consonant with the liberty
and freedom of othei'S. They desire to live in a
world where all men are equal under the law. As
a means to these ends and as an end in itself, they
seek a world in which there is openness among all
nations, freedom to move easily across national
borders, freedom of information, and a free ex-
change of scientific and cultural ideas among the
nations.
That is the kind of world the people of the
United States desire. It is towards that kind of
world that United States foreign policy is oriented
and towards which we are earnestly striving. We
envisage such a world in the field of atomic energy.
It is envisaged by the United Nations Atomic
Energy Commission in the plan which is now pre-
sented to the General Assembly. In the field of
atomic energy no effective control is possible ex-
cept in such a world. Unless we all consider this
matter on the basis of these realities, we are only
laying up dangers for the future.
Over two yeai's ago the United States made an
offer to give up its atomic weapons, its great
plants for making the explosives which are used
in atomic weapons, and for making the nuclear
fuels which may at some later date provide power
for industry, and offered to give up its knowledge
derived at such great expense and from such long
years of study, so that there would no longer be
any secrets in this field, and all its knowledge
would be open to all the world. The United States
made one condition to this offer. It is a serious
condition.
That condition is that there should be set up an
effective, enforceable, international system of con-
trol and prohibition. This is consistent within the
policy by which the Atomic Energy Commission of
the United States is governed. The Atomic
Energy Act of 1946 provides in Section 10 (a) (1)
"That until Congress declares by joint resolution
that effective and enforceable international safe-
guards against the use of atomic energy for de-
structive purposes have been established, there
shall be no exchange of information with other na-
tions with respect to the use of atomic energy for
industrial purposes". In practice the condition
would mean that the world would be thrown open
to a broad exchange of information, to a consider-
able free movement of persons, so that effective,
enforceable control of atomic energy would be
made possible.
These conditions must be fulfilled. Therefore,
the second subparagraph of Section 10 (a) of the
Atomic Energy Act of 1946, would go into effect:
"(2) That the dissemination of scientific and tech-
nical information relating to atomic energy should
be permitted and encouraged so as to provide that
free interchange of ideas and criticisms which is
essential to scientific progress". The United States
does not intend to give up its atomic weapons ex-
cept under a system of control sufficiently effective
to guarantee that other nations do not have, and
cannot secure, these weapons. We believe that the
majority of the nations of the world support us in
this position. We believe that the majority of the
nations want this same kind of open world which
is desired by the United States.
In the light of what I have just said, the situa-
tion in which the Atomic Energy Commission now
finds itself is much more diiiicult than mere dis-
agreement on the details of negotiations. The
situation which has led to the impasse in the
Atomic Energy Commission has been clearly an-
alyzed in the third report of the Atomic Energy
Commission. This analysis is based on the firm
conclusions of the Commission after over 30
months of negotiation. It is an analysis which
honesty and forthrightness require us all to ap-
preciate. It brings us down to the plain realities
538
Deparfment of State Bvlletin
of the situation with which we are faced. This is
not a temporary breakdown in negotiations which
can be remedied b\' further discussions at the level
of the Atomic Energy Commission. This situa-
tion is caused by the refusal of the Soviet Union
to participate in the world community on a co-
operative basis.
Tlio Communist states have set up a closed sys-
tem and over a large area of the world have drawn
an Iron Curtain behind which things go on in
secret, things of which the rest of the world is
properly suspicious. So long as the Communist
states continue this position, effective international
control of atomic energy will be impossible. So
long as tlie Communist states continue this system
of secrecy, the safeguards which other nations
deem indispensable cannot be made effective. So
long as this situation continues, all the world will
be suspicious of Soviet motives and will, of neces-
sity, arm against unlmown dangers.
The Communist states desire to live in a secret
world of their own, behind which, for all we know,
they may arm and prepare their people for war.
We do not desire to live in such a world. That is
the impasse in which the United Nations Atomic
Energy Commission finds itself. This is the im-
TH£ UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
passe which cannot be overcome by the Atomic
Energy Commission. It can be overcome only by
the aroused, the insistent consecution, the moral —
not mechanical — majority of free men who have a
right to insist that they remain free.
The basis on which the M'ork of the Atomic En-
ergy Commission might be resumed should be dis-
cussed, so it seems to us, not in a technical body
such as the Atomic Energy Commission, but in
consultation among the six sponsoring powers
who fii-st proposed to the General Assembly that
this matter be undertaken by the United Nations
and who should now find a means for its continu-
ance. If they find this means, the Atomic Energy
Commission would be immediately reconvened.
But if the sponsoring powers should not be success-
ful, they must report to the General Assembly,
which will then decide what steps should next be
taken.
We believe that this would be the best means of
bringing about that for which we all so devoutly
hope, the reconvening of the Atomic Energy Com-
mission under conditions which will result m the
completion of a treaty acceptable to all nations.
The United States will vote for the Canadian reso-
lution in its entirety.
U.S. Accepts Atomic Energy Resolution
STATEMENT BY AMBASSADOR WARREN R. AUSTIN IN COMMITTEE i>
Mr. President, The United States will acquiesce
in the amended resolution which has now been ac-
cepted by Australia. That is to say, the Canadian
resolution as it shows on A/C.1/340. However, I
want it clear that we adhere to the principles and
policies that we have advocated throughout this
debate. We are not retracing our steps or retreat-
ing from the position that we have stated here
several times. We are fii-mly persuaded that the
report of the Atomic Energy Commission, the
third report, represents the fact when it says:
'Tn this situation the Commission concludes that
no useful purpose can be served by carrying on
negotiations at the Commission level".
Wliy is that so? Well, the Commission states
why it is so, namely, and I am quoting:
"The failure to achieve agreement on the inter-
national conti'ol of atomic energy arises from a
situation that is beyond the competence of this
Commission".
In other words, it is the same deep-seated po-
litical division separating East from West and
the Commission found, after long experience, that
was a constant barrier to accomplishments of
agreement, of cooperation, and collaboration upon
this vital question in the Atomic Energy Commis-
sion. Therefore, it recommended a suspension —
not the kind of suspension which my friend Colo-
' Made on Oct. 19, 1948, and released to the press on the
same date.
October 31, 1948
539
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
nel Hodgson speaks of — that is, indefinitely sus-
pended. On the contrary, it expressly recom-
mended a limitation and it used the word "until".
That is probably why the word "when" was used
in this resolution as it was originally drafted. It
was the appropriate word and referred to the rec-
ommendation of the Commission. Now, this is
what they recommended :
"The Atomic Energy Commission therefore rec-
ommends that until such time as the General As-
sembly finds that this situation no longer exists or
until such time as tlie sponsors of the General
Assembly resolution of 24 January, 1946, who are
the permanent members of the Atomic Energy
Commission, find, through prior consultation that
there exists a basis for agi'eement on the interna-
tional control of atomic energy, negotiations in the
Atomic Energy Commission be suspended."
Now, that is plain English and anybody that in-
terprets that to mean an indefinite suspension is
straining the English language. That is a suspen-
sion only until certain events occur and it contem-
plates something constructive being done. The
resolution offered here and under consideration up
to this point recommended what had the most
promise of accomplishment in it. That is, con-
sideration of those factors which were in the way
of agreement in the place where they have to be
considered, that is, on a higher level entirely.
Now, it developed here that this little undercur-
rent ran through this great Conmiittee — anxiety
that the project of international control was being
given up — indefinitely suspended — and so many
amendments reached toward something that would
give hope and assurance to the world that that was
not going to take place.
Now, believe me, the United States respects the
opinion of its colleagues on this Committee and
when it sees a movement of opinion like that
around this table, it gives attention to it. And,
notwithstanding the fact that we still believe
firmly that the only place where we can unravel
this tangle — the tangled threads — is on a higher
level, nevertheless, we are going to acquiesce in the
obvious feelings of this Committee. "We are going
with you. Don't let anj-body assert that the United
States tries to coerce or force its opinion. I can
give you evidence now, this minute, to the contrary.
We are going to vote for this although we still ad-
here to the opinion expressed in that report of the
Atomic Energy Commission and supported by our
endeavors here with all the strength we have.
Mr. President, I think it would be the gravest
error to slip back to February 1947 and merge con-
trol of atomic-energy studies with conventional
armaments. This is an old fight which was fin-
ished, we thought, in the Security Council in Feb-
ruary 1947, and yet we see it raising its head from
time to time. Just why should we mix this work
all up? Wliy should we set back what has been
gained ? It is a great study that has been carried
forward for thirty months with a definite report of
progress. Now, are we going to give it strength?
Are we going to have it carried on with the moral
approbation of the largest number of coimtries in
the United Nations, or are we going to weaken it in
every way that we can ? For example, put in here
proof of it — the words "in substance" or the words
'"in principle". Weasel words to tear down that
which we are reaching for? We cannot get any-
thing more out of the General Assembly than its
moral power. We must reach for all the moral
strength that we can have to support this very in-
telligent accomplislunent of the Atomic Energy
Commission — for it is the accomplislmient of the
Commission, you understand. The majorit}' rule
obtained there and it is only by the strangest atti-
tude towards democratic principles that we find a
small minority persistently resisting the decision
of the Atomic Energy Commission.
So, we now give our allegiance to this amend-
ment— this amended resolution of Canada here —
pro^aded it is not mangled by amendments or by
some conduct of this Committee that would rob it
of the only thing that there is in it, and, that is,
the moral power of the General Assembly.
540
Department of State Bulletin
Review of Allied Action on Berlin Blockade
STATEMENT BY PHILIP C. JESSUP'
Deputy U.S. Representative in the Security Council
The distinguished representative of the United
Kingdom has given the Council a complete review
of the facts of the complex blockade measures im-
posed by the Soviet Union over a period of months.
These are actions which were designed to deprive
the Western powers of their legal rights in Berlin
and force the German capital into the Soviet eco-
nomic and political system. These are acts which
taken as a whole constitute duress and threat of
force, such as are wholly inconsistent with the obli-
gations imposed on members of the United Nations
by the Charter.
At the very moment in which the Security Coun-
cil is considering the blockade, Soviet authorities
have taken additional steps to tighten it. They
announced in Berlin yesterday that, effective as of
yesterday, all vehicles coming from the Soviet zone
into Berlin must enter thi-ough the Soviet sector.
In other words, as regards vehicular traffic into the
Western sectors of Berlin, a watertight blockade
has now been clamped about the perimeter of the
city. The manner in which these measures have
been taken provides a striking illustration of the
Soviet blockade methods. Suddenly, without
prior warning, a police cordon is thrown around an
area comprising two thirds of Berlin. Instead of
a simple reasonable system of inspection at the
point of entry, a vehicle must detour 40 or 50 miles
in order to enter the city from the east. Instead
of the use of an agreed-upon documentation for the
entry of this vehicle, it must possess unspecified
and unilaterally decreed papers. Its ultimate fate,
should it persist in wishing to enter the West sec-
tors from the Soviet sector, is seizure of the vehicle
and its cargo, including food. We are informed,
indeed, that yesterday patrols of police in the
Soviet sector began inspecting all vehicles trying
to enter the West sectors. One thing emerges
clearly from these announcements and actions : the
blockade not only exists, but is being intensified.
The duress of which we complained and which is a
bar to negotiations is being increased even as the
Security Council deliberates.
There is an aspect of the blockade measures
which I particularly wish to be re-emphasized to
members of the Coimcil. As I pointed out before,
under a series of international agreements the four
occupying powers undertook responsibilities for
the population of the sectors of Berlin committed
to their charge. The blockade is a method used
by the Soviet Union for the expansion of its power
in utter disregard of these joint responsibilities
and with callous indifference to the effect of their
measures upon the population of the Western sec-
tors. I would also remind the Council that it was
not until a month after the blockade was imposed
that the Soviet Union made their offer to supply
food and coal to the Western sector. It was thus
clear that they originally contemplated putting
this pressure on the population in an attempt to
break their spirit, and it was only after the success
of the air lift was demonstrated that the attempt
was made to counter the air lift with the offer of
Soviet supplies.
This is the blockade which Vyshinsky says is
entirely mythical. ,
His contention that there is no blockade has
been amply disproved by facts. The Soviet in-
terpretation will in any event be somewhat dis-
puted by two and one-half million people who are
the direct object of Soviet power politics, who are
faced with a choice between accepting the real and
potential hardships of the blockade or accepting
Soviet political food and political coal and hence
' Made before the Security Council on Oct. 19, 1948, and
released to the press on the same date.
Ocfofaer 37, 1948
541
THB UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
Soviet and Communist political domination.
Tlieir choice has been clear and unmistakable from
the beginning. They have chosen hardship and
freedom. This is a hopeful sign for the future
peace and security of Europe, for the sake of which
the Four Powers undertook the occupation of Ger-
many. Let us not forget that at Potsdam it was
declared that the Allies will take in agreement
together, now and in the future, the other measures
necessary to assure that Germany never again will
threaten her neighbors or the peace of the world.
It is not the intention of the Allies to destroy or
enslave the German people. It is the intention of
the Allies that the German people be given the
opportunity to prepare for the eventual reconstruc-
tion of their life on a democratic and peaceful
basis. That was agreed at Potsdam. The Soviet
Government, using the harsh instrument of the
blockade, has indeed chosen a strange way in Ber-
lin to live up to its agreement to democratize Ger-
man political life. Thanks to the air bridge and
the support given it by Berliners, the Soviet Gov-
ernment has not succeeded in its purpose.
Let us get down to the bare bones of the matter.
There is Berlin, an island in the midst of the Soviet
zone. By international agreement Berlin is a city
under the administration of four countries —
France, the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics,
the United Kingdom, and the United States. It
is not a Russian city. Officials and troops of four
countries are in that city carrying out their duties
in the several sectors assigned to them by interna-
tional agreement. Questions affecting the city as
a whole, under those same agreements, are sup-
posed to be controlled by the four countries acting
together in the Control Council and Kommanda-
tura — two bodies which they set up for that pur-
pose. In 1945 all four agreed that all four should
share in bringing essential supplies of food, fuel,
etc., to Berlin and in distributing those suppUes in
Berlin.
For about three years this island city of Berlin
was administered under these agreements. Then
in 1948, for one reason or another (I shall not now
pause to review the evidence which shows what the
reason was; the varying and inconsistent reasons
advanced by the Soviet command for these re-
strictions have already been revealed) , the Soviet
Union, one of the Four Powers, walked out of
the Control Council and Kommandatura and be-
gan to close the routes to Berlin. All these routes,
by rail, road, and canal, cross the Soviet zone terri-
tory to reach Berlin. The Soviet Army is sta-
tioned all through that territory and therefore is
in the physical position to prevent traffic from
crossing it. They have not the right to prevent
this traffic because they agreed that France, and
the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, the U. K.
and the U. S. should all share in administering
Berlin, and Premier Stalin himself in 1945 agreed
that they had a right to go in and out of Berlin to
and from their own zones. But the Soviet Union
has the physical power and has threatened to use
it. It does not have the same physical power of
control over the air and therefore the three West-
ern Governments are using air lanes. The air lift
has imposed tremendous additional burdens upon
the three Western powers who have exactly the
same right as the Soviet Union to be in Berlin.
But if we three Western countries had been un-
willing to make that effort, we would be default-
ing on our recognized responsibilities for the eco-
nomic and political welfare of the Berlin popula-
tion. It is not unreasonable to assume that the
objective of the Soviet Union is to place the West-
ern powers in a position where they cannot carry
out those responsibilities. It is absurd for the
Soviet Union to argue that there is no blockade
merely because we can still reach our own sectors
of Berlin by air or because they belatedly offered
to supply food in exchange for political control.
One does not need to be an expert on the Charter
to realize that the use of physical power backed by
armed force in an attempt to prevent us from go-
ing where we have a right to be and where we have
international duties to perform, is a violation of
the purposes and principles of the United Na-
tions. If the Soviet Union had complaints against
the three Western countries, the whole system of
the Charter clearly requires them to try to settle
these differences by peaceful means. Did they try
to do so ? They did not.
From the beginning of 1948 until their surface
blockade became complete, they never suggested
that we have a meeting of the Council of Foreign
Ministers to discuss the broad questions of the
542
Department of State Bulletin
future of Germany. From the time they with-
drew from the Control Council in March 1948, they
never suggested negotiations by any other body.
Instead they used the extreme measure of the
blockade.
Some people may think there was no real threat
of force because they did not actually open up on
our trains and trucks and barges with machine
guns and artillery. But let me give you a picture
as presented by an actual case. On June 21, 1948,
United States military train no. 20, under com-
mand of an American officer and carrying one
warrant officer and an interpreter and six train
guards, left Helmstedt en route to Berlin.
Despite the fact that it had complied with all
agreed regulations, the train was stopped at the
Eussian control point. There were three days of
argument during whicli Eussian demands were
frequently altered. Finally the Eussian com-
mandant ordered all U. S. personnel off the rail
property, which he claimed was under Soviet con-
trol and onto guard cars. Two American guards
were forced off the U. S. engine by a Eussian
colonel and two armed Eussian guards. Other
Eussian guards with automatic guns were placed
beside the train in various spots. Soviet guards
rode the train to the border point where they
alighted and the train proceeded back to
Helmstedt.
Now as I pointed out to the Security Council
before, we could have used armed force against
this Soviet threat or we could have meekly sub-
mitted and surrendered our rights and duties in
Berlin, subjecting nearly two and one-half million
Germans to Soviet rule with all that that implies.
Wliat we actually did and are still doing is live
up to our obligations under the Charter of the
United Nations and to try to settle the question
by peaceful discussions while continuing to dis-
charge our obligations in Berlin.
This leads me to the second question which has
been put to us. I quote it :
"We request the repi'esentatives of the U. S. A.,
the U. K., France, and the Soviet Union to explain
circumstantially the agreement involved in the
instructions given to the Military Governors of the
Powers in Berlin and to give the detailed reasons
THE UNtTBD NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZBD ACBNCIES
that prevented the implementation of those
instructions."
The Soviet Government will, however, appre-
ciate that the thiee Governments are unable to
negotiate in a situation which the Soviet Govern-
ment has taken the initiative in creating. Free
negotiations can only take place in an atmosphere
relieved of pressure. This is the issue ; the present
restrictions upon communications between Berlin
and the Western zones offend against this prin-
ciple. "Wlien this issue is resolved, such difficulties
as stand in the way of a resumption of conversa-
tions on lines set out should be removed.
I have already given the Council on October 6 an
outline of the discussions which followed.^ I shall
repeat the essential points.
At the close of the meeting on August 2, Stalin
seemed to meet our point of view. He proposed
that lifting restrictions on transport and commerce
should be carried out simultaneously with the in-
troduction in Berlin of the German mark of the
Soviet zone and the withdrawal from Berlin of
the Western mark "B".
The three Western Governments assumed that
Stalin's proposal was based on the establishment
of Four Power control over currency in Berlin and
therefore could be accepted. Accordingly, in the
next meeting with Molotov on August 6 the three
Western Eepresentatives suggested that a com-
munique should be agi'eed upon by the Four Gov-
ernments which would announce the lifting of the
blockade, the introduction into Berlin of the Ger-
man mark of the Soviet zone as tlie sole currency
of the city, under adequate Four Power control,
and an agreement to hold a Four Power meeting
to consider outstanding questions with respect to
Berlin and Germany. This document will be
found in our White Paper.^ You will note that
it was a simple proposal and, in addition to the
points I have just mentioned, spelled out Four
Power safeguards with respect to currency which
we considered essential.
The Soviets did not accept immediately the
draft communique. Instead, protracted discus-
' Bulletin of Oct. 17, 1948, p. 884.
' Department of State publication 3298.
October 31, 1948
543
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
sions were held between the Four Powers over a
three-week period until the directive was agreed
to on August 30. I think it unnecessai-y to give
here a detailed chronological account of those dis-
cussions. That account is given in the Wliite
Papers which have been published by the United
States Government and by the British Govern-
ment. If you will compare the proposals made by
the Three Powers on August 6 with the agreed
directive, differences between them will be clear.
When agreement was reached on August 30 as
to the terms of the directive, the U.S. Govern-
ment believed that no more than administrative
acts by technical expei-ts in Berlin were required
to carry out the directive. There had been an ex-
haustive discussion on all issues of principle in
the directive. So far as we knew full accord had
been reached. The only thing that remained was
to put into effect the principles agreed upon which
we assumed could be done by the four Military
Governors.
The directive met the points made by the Soviet
Government in Moscow and at the same time was
consistent with the maintenance of our rights in
Berlin.
Stalin gave specific assurances on the question
of Four Power control over currency in the August
23 meeting with Representatives of the three
Western Governments.
As reported by Smith :
"Stalin stated that the German bank of emission
controlled the flow of currency throughout the
whole Soviet zone, and it was impossible to exclude
Berlin from the Soviet zone. However, if the ques-
tion were asked whether it did so without being
controlled itself, the answer was 'no'. Such con-
trol would be provided by the Financial Commis-
sion and by the four Commanders in Berlin, who
would work out arrangements connected with the
exchange of currency and with the control pro-
vision of currency, and would supervise what the
bank was doing."
No unresolved issues of substance appeared to
be involved on August 30 when the directive was
sent to the four Military Governors in Berlin.
But what was our experience in Berlin ?
In answering this question, one needs remember
what the situation was when the discussions be-
gan. The beginning was on July 6 when the three
Governments sent the first notes to the Soviets.
By that time, the Soviet interruption of highway,
railroad, and canal traffic was complete and the
three Western powers had been forced to resort
to the air lift to cany out their acknowledged
duties in Berlin. This was the situation creating
a threat to the peace which still exists, and which
will continue to exist until the restrictions of sur-
face travel are removed. For over three months
we have been trying to remove this threat to the
peace by peaceful means. When direct discus-
sions failed, we tui'ned to the Security Council,
which by the Charter has been given the primary
responsibility for tlie maintenance of interna-
tional peace and security.
We turned to the Security Council on September
29 for exactly the same reason that we entered into
the discussions with the Soviet Government in
July, namely, to remove the threat to the peace.
We did not come to the Security Council in July,
because article 33 of the Charter required us "first
of all" to exhaust the possibility of direct discus-
sion. But the threat to the peace existed in July as
it exists now in October.
In July we wondered whether there were some
detail, some misunderstanding, which caused the
Soviet Government, however improperly and il-
legally, to use force instead of conference. If that
were the case, the diflBculty could be removed. If,
however, as all signs seemed to indicate, the Soviet
Union was using the threat of force to get us out
of Berlin, that was a different matter. So we put
the question to Stalin on August 2 in Moscow.
Smith, of the U. S., spoke for the three Govern-
ments. I want to quote his words which you will
find printed in full in the U. S. White Paper :
"The United States, the United Kingdom and
France do not wish the situation to deteriorate
further and assume that the Soviet Government
shares this desire. The Three Governments have
in mind restrictive measures which have been
placed by Soviet authorities on communication be-
tween the Western zones of Germany and Western
sectors of Berlin. It was the feeling of our Grov-
ernments that if these measures arose from tech-
nical difficulties, such difficulties can be easily
remedied. The Three Governments renew their
544
Departmenf of State Bulletin
offer of assistance to this end. If in any way re-
lated to the currency problem, such measures are
obviously uncalled for, since this problem could
have been, and can now be, adjusted by representa-
tives of the four jDOwers in Berlin. If, on the
other hand, these measures are designed to bring
about negotiations among the four occupying
powers they are equally unnecessary, since the
Governments of the United Kingdom, the United
States and France have never at any time declined
to meet representatives of the Soviet Union to dis-
cuss questions relating to Germany. However, if
the purpose of these measures is to attempt to
compel the three Governments to abandon their
rights as occupying powers in Berlin, the Soviet
Government will understand from what has been
stated previously that such an attempt could not be
allowed to succeed."
Smith went on to say :
"In spite of recent occurrences, the three powers
are unwilling to believe that this last reason is the
real one. Rather they assume that the Soviet Gov-
ernment shares their view that it is in the interest
of all four occupying powers, of the German peo-
ple and of the world in general to prevent any
further deterioration of the position and to find a
way bj- mutual agreement to bring to an end the
extremely dangerous situation that has developed
in Berlin."
The record shows that the Soviet Military Gov-
ernor departed from the directive on three funda-
mental matters of principle. First, he asserted
that the use of the air corridors to Berlin from
the west would be limited to supplying the needs
of the occupation forces; but the directive called
for the lifting of restrictions, not the imposition
of new ones. Second, he maintained that the trade
of Berlin with the Western occupation zones and'
third countries should be controlled exclusively by
the Soviet Military Command, but the directive
provided that a "satisfactory basis" of trade should
be worked out rather than unilateral control.
Third, the Soviet Commander insisted that the
Four Power Financial Commission would not have
the necessary authority with respect to the activ-
ities in Berlin of the German bank of emission
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
despite the explicit understanding to the contrary
reached with Stalin August 23 on this point.
The three Western Governments decided to take
these issues back to Moscow to determine whether
tlie Soviet Government itself was also going to dis-
regard the agreements which had been reached.
However, in going back to Moscow, we did be-
lieve that it was essential to obtain an unequivocal
affirmation by the Soviet Government of the prin-
ciples of the August 30 directive. We were not
prepared to embark on another round of long dis-
cussion which would simply reproduce what had
gone before and which would open for f urtlier dis-
cussion principles previously settled. We wanted
unequivocal answers to the three questions. We
then wanted performance on those answers in Ber-
lin. "Wliat happened when we went back to
Moscow ?
The three Western Governments requested m
their aide-memoire of September 14 that the So-
viet Government affirm the understanding reached
in Moscow concerning those three issues and in-
struct the Soviet Military Governor to carry out
these undertakings. A reply was received by the
three Western Representatives in Moscow on Sep-
tember 18. In that reply the Soviet Government
upheld the jjosition of the Soviet Military Gov-
ernor to the effect that the use of the air corridors
in the future be limited to supplying the require-
ments of the occupation forces in Berlin contrary
to the Control Council decision of November 30,
1945. "Wliile admitting that the trade of Berlin
should be under Four Power control, the Soviet
Government maintained that actual issuance of
export-import licenses should be controlled by the
Soviet military administration. This would have
vitiated Four Power control over trade. The reply
seemed to go back to acceptance of the principle
that the Financial Commission would have author-
ity only over certain activities in Berlin of the
German bank of emission.
It is evident that we did not obtain the simple
affirmation we sought of the agreed principles of
the August 30 directive. Nor did we obtain any
assurance that the Soviet Government would in-
struct the Soviet Military Governor to follow the
directive. In short, we obtained an unsatisfactory
reply. In view of all that had happened before,
Ocfofaer 31, 7948
545
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
we came to the considered opinion that the Soviet
Government was attempting to secure political ob-
jectives to which it was not entitled and which it
could not achieve by peaceful means. We dis-
covered that the talks we were holding were serv-
ing as an excuse to prolong the blockade rather
than as a means of removing it.
Therefore, on September 22, the three Western
Governments sent identic notes to the Soviet Gov-
ernment in which they restated their positions on
the three principal issues and in which they also
asked the Soviet Government to lift the blockade
and specify the date on which it would be done.*
The Soviet reply to this note was received on
September 25.^ It still did not explicitly clarify
all of the points which we had taken back to Mos-
cow. It did not state that the Soviet Government
agreed that commercial freight and passengers
could move to Berlin by air. It did, perhaps,
imply that the air corridors might be used for this
purpose. However, it stated that there must be
control by the Soviet High Command over the
transport of commercial cargoes and passengers.
Tlie Soviet reply thus raised a new question. We
could not agree that the Soviet Command should
exercise such control. We had stated repeat-
edly in Berlin that insi)ection for protection of
currency would be necessary but that it must be
exercised on the basis of agreed quadripartite
regulations.
I want to point out that in the circumstances
existing in Berlin, protection of the currency of
the Soviet zone is wholly unrelated to the volume
of freight or the mmiber of passengers moving by
land, water, or air between the Western zones and
Berlin. Pi-otection for currency of the Soviet
zone, as a practical matter, can be had through
adequate exchange and currency controls as be-
tween the two areas, not through control of tiaffic.
The Governments of France, the U.K., and the
U.S. have always been prepared to agree to reason-
able safeguards for the protection of the Soviet
zone German mark. They have always been and
still are prepared to agree to reasonable regula-
' Bulletin of Oct. 3, 1948, p. 423.
' ma.
' U.N. doc. S/1020, Sept. 29, 1948. -See also Buixetin of
Oct. 10, 1948, p. 455.
tions over traffic. Limitation of and control over
the volume of traffic that moves between the West-
ern zones and Berlin should not be confused with
the wholly separate and unielated question of
currency and exchange control. The Soviets have
used this as one of their excuses for establishing
the blockade and as reason for claiming the right
to impose restrictions on the use of air corridors
for transpoi'tation of freight and passengers. This
is a subterfuge on the part of the Soviets to place
air traffic and Berlin under control of the Soviet
Command.
Because further talks had become manifestly
futile, we informed the Soviet Government that
we were referring the matter to the Security Coun-
cil in our identic notes of September 26-27. We
sent our notification to the Secretary-General of
the United Nations on September 29.^
As you are aware, the Soviet Government sent
a note to the three Western Governments on Oc-
tober 3, even after we had referred the case to the
United Nations. That note is a further illustra-
tion of the tactics which have been pursued by the
Soviet Government throughout these talks. It
suggests for example that the matter of air-traffic
control to prevent illegal currency and smuggling
operations should be capable of mutually satisfac-
tory negotiation but it carefully refrains from
making a definite commitment. It is another ex-
ample of the evasions, and apparent unwillingness
to affirm understandings already reached.
Now we are asked why was it that the whole
matter was not settled on the basis of the directive
of August 30. Stated in another way, the question
is, "Why did the threat to jjeace continue after Sep-
tember 7 when conversations of the four Military
Governors were concluded, or after the 14th of
September when the three Western Governments
wrote the Soviet Government explaining in what
respects Sokolov.sky had refused to live up to the
understanding reached in Moscow?"
A simple and direct answer to the question is
that the threat to peace did not end then because
it was the Soviet blockade measures which caused
the threat to peace and the Soviet Government
refused to lift the blockade. The Soviet Govern-
ment created the threat to peace and the Soviet
Government can remove it.
546
Department of State Bulletin
To sum up, the three Western powers were pre-
pared to discuss practical arrangements to deal
with the currency problem in Berlin or other prob-
lems as long as there was the slightest reason to
believe that the restrictions imjjosed by the Soviet
Government were in any way related to such prob-
lems. But when it became apparent as tlie conver-
sations jjrogressed and particularly after the
Soviet repudiation of the agreed interpretation
of the August 30th directive, that the real Soviet
intention was to force the abandonment of our
rights in Berlin, which Stalin had been informed
was totally unacceptable to the Western powers,
it was obvious that the discussions were doomed
to failure. In our view these discussions prove
conclusively and we so stated in our notes of
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIAUZBD AGENCIES
September 2G-27 that the Soviet Government was
and is attempting by illegal and coercive measures
in disregard of its obligations to secure political
objectives to which it is not entitled and which it
could not achieve by peaceful means. We could
not continue to discuss even on the currency ques-
tion under a clearly established attempt to attain
such objectives by coercion and duress.
In demanding the immediate lifting of the
blockade which constitutes a threat to peace, we
in no way seek to be released from our commit-
ment to carry out the directive of August 30. We
are asking the Security Council to remove the
threat to the peace, not to avoid a discussion with
the Soviet Government, but to make it possible to
engage in discussions free from duress.
Current United Nations Documents: A Selected Bibliography
General Assembly
Non-Self-Governing Territories. Information Transmit-
ted Under article 73e of the Charter. Report of the
Special Committee. A/593, October 1, 194S. 51 pp.
mimeo.
Privileges and Immunities of the United Nations. Report
of the Secretary-General. A/626, September 7, 1948.
9 pp. mimeo.
Headquarters of the United Nations. Report of the Sec-
retary-General. A/627, September 8, 1948. 7 pp.
mimeo.
Report of the Committee on Contributions. A/628, Sep-
tember 7, 1948. 8 pp. mimeo.
Transfer to the United Nations of the Functions Exercised
by the Government of the French Republic Under the
International Agreement of 18 May 1004 and the In-
ternational Convention of 4 May 1910 for the Sup-
pression of the White Slave Traffic, and the Agree-
ment of 4 May 1910 for the Suppression of Obscene
Publications. A/639, September 9, 1948. 35 pp.
mimeo. (Also, A/639/Rev. 1, October 8, 1948.)
Composition of the Secretariat and the Principle of Geo-
graphical Distribution. Report of the Secretary-Gen-
eral. A/652, September 2, 1948. 21 pp. mimeo.
Adoption of the Agenda of the Third Regular Session and
Allocation of Items to Committees. A/653, September
23, 1948. 14 pp. mimeo.
United Nations Guard. Report of the Secretary-General.
A/65G, September 28, 1948. 13 pp. mimeo.
Transfer to the United Nations of the Residual Assets and
Activities of the United Nations Relief and Rehabilita-
tion Administration. Report by the Secretary-Gen-
eral. A/66o, October 4, 1948. 28 pp. mimeo.
Draft Protocol Bringing Under International Control
Drugs Outside the Scojie of the Convention of 13 July
1931 for Limiting the Manufacture and Regulating
the Distribution of Narcotic Drugs, As Amended by
the Protocol Signed at Lake Success on 11 July 1946.
Report of the Third Committee. A/666, October 5,
1948. 7 pp. mimeo.
Reparation for Injuries Incurred in the Service of the
United Nations. Memorandum by the Secretary-
General. A/674, October 7, 1948. 7 pp. mimeo.
OfBcial Records of the Second Special Session of the Gen-
eral Assembly. Volume I. Plenai-y Meetings of the
General A.ssembly. Summary Records of Meetings.
10 April-14 May 1948. sxvi, 47 pp. printed. 750.
Economic and Social Counci
Official Records. Second Year. Fifth Session. From the
S5th meeting (19 July 1947) to the 121st meeting (16
Augu.st 1947). xvi, 4S0 pp. printed. $5.00.
Security Council
Official Records, Third Year. 333rd and 334th Meetings.
13 July 1948. No. 95. 56 pp. printed. 600. 339th
and 340th Meetings. 27 July 1948. No. 98. 50 pp.
printed. 50«;. 343rd Meeting. 2 August 1948. No.
100. 22 pp. printed. 250.
' Printed materials may be secured in the United States
from the International Documents Service, Columbia
University Press, 2060 Broadway, New Y'ork City. Other
materials (mimeographed or processed documents) may
be consulted at certain designated libraries in the United
States.
October 31, 1948
547
United Nations Day
STATEMENTS BY SECRETARY MARSHALL'
With the other members of tlie United States
Delegation, I am attending in Paris the third reg-
ular session of the General Assembly of the United
Nations. For five weeks this has been a period of
extraordinary activity, as we have been dealing
daily with matters of utmost world concern. Make
no mistake about it, what is being done here has a
profound meaning for every American.
It is fortunate, I think, that United Nations Day
is being observed while the General Assembly is in
session. The critical nature of issues we are debat-
ing should cause the people of the world to think
both seriously and realistically about what the
United Nations really is and what people may
rightfully expect it to accomplish in their behalf —
that is, in behalf of world peace.
The most vivid impression I have received in
the past few weeks is the new appreciation of the
indispensable part the organization of the United
Nations has come to play in the affairs of the world
community. I wish I could convey to all of you
at home the stirring sense of reality and vitality
we feel from participating in these meetings.
Certainly no one here doubts that they are part
of an organization engaged in the most important
business in the world today — that is, an intense
effort to save this and succeeding generations from
the scourge of war.
But we realize that the United Nations cannot
hope to succeed unless it boldly comes to grips
with the realities of the world situation. It can-
not exist merely as a symbol above and apart from
human struggle. If the organization is to justify
the hopes of mankind, it must gather strength to
surmount the difficulties, the crises of the world,
and bring about peaceful solutions for them.
The most important fact of international life
today which every country must take into account
is the fact that the United Nations is a living, dy-
namic institution. This does not mean that we
' The first statement was made over the CBS network
on the occasion of the observance of United Nations Day,
Oct. 24, 1948, and released to the press on the same date.
The second statement was made to American students
on the occasion of United Nations Week over the NBC net-
work on Oct. 22, 194S, and released to the press on the same
date.
548
can find solutions for all our complicated inter-
national problems easily and automatically by
referring them to the United Nations, nor does it
mean that we should lose our perspective — or fear
that doomsday is just around the corner if the
United Nations does not ^jrovide quick and satis-
factory solutions. Some of these problems have
already defied the ingenuity of Member Nations
that make up the United Nations, and because the
United Nations is inseparably a part of the real
imperfect world in which it exists it is subject to
the same disabilities and frustrations that beset
the negotiations of its individual members. We
would make a fundamental error if we disregarded
these realities and considered the United Nations
as some short cut to Utopia. There is neither a
short cut nor a Utopia. We live in a human world
with all man's frailties and failings, which I have
come to think are more jironounced in nations
than in individuals.
The United Nations Charter recites specific
limitations which were passed on by the fifty na-
tions that created the organization. The United
Nations is in no sense a supergovernment. It
does not have complete authority over sovereign
nations which compose its membership. They did
voluntarily agree to cooperate within the provi-
sions of the limited authority conferred upon it
by the Charter, but the achievements of the United
Nations are limited to the willingness of various
nations to cooperate. The difficulties, successes,
and failures of the United Nations directly reflect
existing relationships among nations.
The attention of our people has been focused on
political disputes debated in the Security Council
and the excessive use of the veto in that organiza-
tion. This has led to an impatient desire to force
hasty revision or even complete overhauling of
the whole United Nations machinery. Many of
these proposals are unrealistic in that they confuse
cause with effect. They propose cures for symp-
tom instead of for disease. The truth is that the
means for cooperation jDrovided by the United
Nations are not, I repeat, are not inadequate — it
is a lack of genuine desire for cooperation on the
part of certain nations that brings about the pres-
ent feeling of futility and frustration.
Department of State Bulletin
This obstructive attitude or procedure is the
most serious liuiitiition of all, it is the jjreatest
blight on the ellectiveiiess of the United Nations.
It has boon imposed contrary to the wishes of the
majorit_y of the Member nations, and contrary to
understandings reached in San Francisco. Yet
tlie Uiiited Nations unquestionably represents the
maxinium degree of intei'national cooperation
tliat is possible at this time.
The way to increase the cooperative spirit is not
by deliberately destroying the inadequate unity
that now exists, but rather by careful and patient
cultivation of greater unity through the processes
of the United Nations.
Always keep in mind that the United Nations
today provides the forum in which world opin-
ion can be brought to bear on the niost critical
world disputes. In time the cumulative effect of
moral judgments of the large majority of mankind
expressed through the organization will inevitably
exert a powerful influence upon even the most re-
calcitrant government.
THE UNITBD NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZeO ACENCWS
The United States will associate itself with as
much of the world as will sincerely devote its
efforts to the realization of the aims proclaimed in
the Charter of the United Nations. Our govern-
ment is resolved to seek peace and understanding
m accordance with the Charter both inside and
outside the United Nations. We will not allow
misuse of United Nations procedures or obstruc-
tion of our efforts, singly or in concert with other
nations, to dismay or defeat us.
I urge all Americans to observe United Nations
Day in a practical manner by increasing their
knowledge and understanding of the organization,
particularly the Charter. The United Nations
was born out of world disaster and has had to be
nurtured during continuing crises. Given a
reasonable opportunity the United Nations will
grow and develop through other crises to its ma-
turity. That is the way of civilization. There is
no better road — no shorter — in fact, there is no
other road — to lasting peace.
I am addressing you from Paris, where the
United States is taking an active part in the de-
liberations of the United Nations. This meeting
is dealing with serious problems in world affairs,
some of which will affect your personal lives for
years to come.
I wish it were possible for me to meet you per-
sonally, in your gatherings at schools throughout
our country, to impress on j'ou the great impor-
tance of the organization of the United Nations
and the duty you owe to yourself and your country
to help strengthen the United Nations and make of
it a tremendous influence for peace in the world.
The people of our country have just passed
through a terrible war in defense of our right to
live in freedom and to govern ourselves as we see
fit. Great sacrifices were made, hundreds of thou-
sands of lives of our young men given to keep for
us and for future Americans the kind of libeily
and ways of life that have been so wonderfully
developed in America.
Now we are engaged in a great effort to save
succeeding generations from the scourge and hor-
rors of war and to bring progress and prosperity
to the world. Our efforts are centered on the
United Nations, the world's best hope for peace.
We only began this great enterprise three years
ago. We must look to you to carry it forward to
strength and power. You are young. You have
a fresh viewpoint and vigor. Make the United
Nations your own organization by learning all you
can about it, what it is, what its purposes are,
how it operates. Read the Charter and re-read it,
until you understand it as thoroughly as you do
our own Constitution. Identify yourself with the
United Nations and work unceasingly to make it
the means by which you and the young people of
other lands can live together in peace and happi-
ness in the years ahead.
ADDRESS BY GEORGE V. ALLEN'
Assistant Secretary for Public Affairs
I am glad to talk with you tonight about the
United Nations because many people who read the
daily headlines, reporting disputes in the General
Assembly in Paris, are inclined to overlook the
really significant developments now taking place.
Many people are skeptical that any progress can
be made, under present world conditions, towards
the creation of an effective world organization,
Ocfober 37, 7948
but progress is being made toward that end every
day.
Today, in Paris, the spokesmen of the world
are debating ways and means by which nations
can work creatively toward building an effective
' Address broadcast over WRC in Washington on Oct.
22, 1948, and released to the press on the same date.
549
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
peace. A large majority of the hundreds of dele-
gates present are showing more and more clearly,
when the chips are down, that they appreciate the
necessity for preserving the dignity and worth of
the individual, and are aware that an eifective
world organization can only be built on democratic
principles.
In each debate in Paris, this issue is becoming
more clear cut. We are getting down to rock bot-
tom. The question of the control of Berlin is
incidental to the basic question whether anti-
democratic methods of force and coercion shall be
permitted to continue as a means of conducting
international relations. As the various individual
cases are discussed, this basic issue underlying
them all emerges more clearly.
The fact that more and more people of the world
are steadily realizing the fundamental question in-
volved is more important to me than the political
disagreements which are hitting the headlines.
The quarrel is not between the United States and
Russia ; it is between democracy and totalitarian-
ism, between aggression and nonaggression, be-
tween moral and immoral international conduct.
But the political debates in Paris by no means
tell the whole United Nations story. Tlie Security
Council, as "trouble shooter" for the United Na-
tions, receives most of the headlines, but the less
spectacular day-to-day advancements made by the
United Nations and by its specialized agencies in
social and economic fields are perhaps equally
important.
A vast new machinery of international coopera-
tion has come into being since 194:5. A study of
the United Nations organization chart will re-
veal commissions, coimcils, and special agencies
which offer Member Nations a meeting ground to
attack almost every type of common problem,
such as the control of contagious diseases, edu-
cational reconstruction, and many others of equal
importance. Some people think there are too many
such agencies and bureaus, but each is important,
and their constant if quiet endeavors and achieve-
ments add up to a significant total. In §ome of
these agencies, delegates of widely divergent polit-
ical views work in close technical cooperation and
harmony.
This, very briefly to be sure, rounds out the story
I wish to share with you tonight. Let me repeat.
I find strength in the fact that the aims and prin-
ci^jles embodied in the Charter of the United Na-
tions are identical with those of the American
people, and that they express accurately the hopes
of all other democratic peoples. The basic fault is
not in the Charter, but in the fact that some of
its Members continue to employ undemocratic
methods of force and coercion to achieve their
international goals. But the longer the issues are
debated, the more clear it becomes to all the world,
including increasing numbers of people behind the
Iron Curtain, that the basic issue involved is
morality in international conduct against im-
morality, national independence against subservi-
ence to an alien rule, and human liberty against
the subjection of this individual to the dictates of
a ruling clique.
Progress is being made, and with a steadfast
conviction in the superiority of democratic prin-
ciples over any other system of conduct yet de-
vised, we shall succeed in building a world order
which will stand in the noonday sun, strong and
firm on its solid support— the people of the United
Nations.
550
Department of State Bulletin
WHY WE SUPPORT THE UNITED NATIONS
By Ambassador Warren R. Austin '
Today marks the first oflScial, world-wide ob-
servance of United Nations Day, designated by
unanimous reconnnendation of the General Assem-
bly in 1947. On this day people are gathered in
all parts of the world to discuss problems before
the United Nations and to express their determina-
tion, in the words of the Charter, "to save succeed-
ing generations from the scourge of war".
It is fitting that this world-wide testimony to
humanity's greatest hope for peace, the United
Nations Charter, should occur on the day dedicated
to the one Father of all mankind ; it is fitting that
this observance should fall on the day of prayer,
and that mankind's prayers for peace and justice
are rising in unison around the earth.
I feel greatly honored to have a part in Britain's
observance of this universal holiday in Central
Hall, Westminster, in which the organization be-
gan its life. It was the people of this island whose
valor and determination in the darkest hours made
possible the victory from which emerged the
United Nations. Faced, as we now are, with the
certainty that the development of the United Na-
tions will require from all of us much of the same
spirit, I feel especially privileged to observe this
day with people who, in our time, have so dis-
tinctly identified their country with qualities of
faith and courage.
The people of my country cherish the partner-
ship with you that helped create the United Na-
tions. We are united in our desire to see that
partnership grow in collective effort to strengthen
the United Nations.
Today, in the United States, our national elec-
tion campaign is suspended so that people may join
in rallies in every state to manifest support for the
United Nations. It provides us with another op-
portunity to demonstrate that our participation in
the United Nations is based on the national will,
and not on the platform of any one political party.
Both major parties have published pledges to sup-
port the United Nations.
The Democratic platform states: "We support
the United Nations fully and we pledge whole-
hearted aid toward its growth and development."
The Kepublican platform provides : "We believe
in collective security against aggression and in be-
half of justice and freedom. We shall support the
United Nations — the world's best hope in this
direction, striving to strengthen it and promote
its effective evolution and use."
Ocfober 31, 1948
The United States Delegation in Paris is a bi-
partisan delegation and the policies of that dele-
gation have not become the subject of partisan
debate in the election campaign now nearing its
end. Our people are able to observe at close range
the growth of the organization from its beginnings
in the Dumbarton Oaks conversations through the
writing of the Charter, on our Pacific Coast, to
the establishment of its home on our Atlantic
Coast. Our students, editors, political leadere,
and public visit sessions of the. General Assembly,
Security Council, Trusteeship Council, Economic
and Social Council, and other agencies of the
United Nations. They return to their communi-
ties with firsthand reports of how representatives
of 58 nations are progressing with their work.
This all makes the United Nations very real to our
people.
One reason we are glad that the General Assem-
bly is being held in Paris this year is that it is
giving the people of Europe a better opportunity
to visit its sessions, and to feel their intimate rela-
tion to it. There is an inherent basis for the Amer-
ican support of the United Nations. During most
of our history, we have been receiving the sons and
daughters of all nations, and especially from
Europe. We have become a United Nations coun-
try, exemplifying that men of every nationality,
religion, color, and race can live together in peace,
and cooperate for the welfare of all. I would not
imply that we have achieved our ideal. Our ef-
forts to insure the fulfillment of the guaranties of
equal rights must be pursued endlessly, and with
enlightened vigilance. Our own difficulties make
us keenly sensitive to the tremendous task faced
by nations in building the envisioned world com-
munity, and they give us the patience necessary to
reach that goal. Many of these people who came
to the United States were bitter over the wars and
quarrels of Europe. They had turned their backs
on the old world and dreamed of building a new
world in splendid isolation.
Through hard experience the American people
came to realize that in an interdependent world no
nation can escape the consequences of war, and
every nation depends to some extent on world order
for its own social and economic well-being. Once
having reached this conviction, the overwhelming
majority of the American people demanded full
' Address made at Central Hall, Westminster, London,
Oct. 24, 1948, and released to the press on the same date.
551
THE UN/TED NATIONS AND SPECIAUZBD ACENCIB5
United States participation in the United Nations,
and they have supported every measure for
collective security and international economic
cooperation.
I realize what the experience of Europeans has
been. They had high hopes of outlawing war and
building collective security through the League.
They gave support to that first effort to build a
world organization. They were disappointed and
disillusioned when the Senate of the United States
held aloof from the League. Their hopes were
dashed as the League failed to stand by the cove-
nant when Mussolini attacked Ethiopia, when
Japan moved into Manchuria, when the Nazis
seized the Rhineland, then Austria and Czecho-
slovakia.
To my mind the great difference between the
1930's and the present is that then the majority of
the League members were falling apart to become,
one by one, victims of aggression ; while today the
majority of the members of the United Nations are
closing ranks to create a united front against ag-
gression. That difference is so important as to
justify a real hope for the efforts in which we are
now engaged to avoid war.
Our difficulties are so obvious and complex as to
provoke skepticism in some, but they challenge the
great interest and effort of an increasing majority.
Just two days ago, we were greatly strengthened
by the achievements of one day :
The Security Council elected five judges to the
International Court of Justice, the General Assem-
bly did likewise, revealing a high degree of accord
between East and West.
The Political and Security Committee, after
thorough debate, agreed upon the Mexican reso-
lution with unanimity of the 58 members. (The
conference broke into animated applause at this
heart-warming accomplishment.) The resolution
recalled faith in the principles of the Atlantic
Charter; the pledge of the members in the United
Nations and proclaimed that only with continuing
and growing cooperation and understanding
among the three countries which made the Yalta
Declaration, and among all the peace-loving na-
tions, could the higher aspirations of humanity
be realized.
One of the contributions to wider cooperation
was made by the Soviet Union in the Subconmiit-
tee. It initiated paragraph 4 of the Mexican draft
recommending that the powers signatory to the
agreement of December 1945, and the powers
which subsequently acceded thereto, "associate
with them in the performance of such a noble task
(the settlement of the war and the conclusion of
all the peace settlements) the states which sub-
scribed and adhered to the Washington Declara-
tion of January 1, 1942."
552
The Security Council, considering the Berlin
question, by unanimous consent, tabled a reso-
lution winch was proposed by the six neutral mem-
bers. We prayerfully look forward to the con-
sideration of that resolution next week.
As I left Paris for this meeting, I received official
notification, as President of the Security Council,
that its resolution for an immediate and effective
cease-fire in the Negeb, has been obeyed by both
Jews and Arabs.
We do not serve our cause by overestimating
short-run gains, nor by underestimating the long-
range difficulties. But, as we advance toward col-
lective security, step by step we grow more effi-
cient with each succeeding accomplishment.
We created and set in motion the most ambitious
organization for peace ever conceived. We built
up an efficient Secretariat, introduced novel meth-
ods of breaking down barriers of language, de-
veloped fact-finding facilities, and arsenals of in-
formation for combating such ancient causes of
was as disease, hunger, and ignorance. We created
commissions and specialized agencies to deal witli
the whole range of vital problems through inter-
national consultation; the problems of control of
atomic and other weapons of mass destruction ; of
reduction and regulation of armaments ; of human
rights; of finance and trade; of health and nar-
cotics; of food and agriculture; of economics and
emplo3'ment; of education, science, and culture;
of labor standards ; of displaced and stateless per-
sons.
The fact that we have a vast international or-
ganization, this year holding more than 5,000
meetings in various places throughout the world,
enables us to see in bold relief the differences and
tensions between nations as they appear.
I should like to discuss with you frankly these
tensions, to suggest action to relieve them, and thus
hasten the realization of collective security as en-
visaged in the United Nations Charter.
A great part of the tension in the United Na-
tions grows out of the fact that economic and social
instability in the wake of the war has favored the
growth of Communist parties in many countries.
Communist leaders in these countries try to exploit
chaotic conditions to seize power. In those coun-
tries where Commmiists have been able to call
upon the Red Army either for direct help or as an
imminent threat, they have succeeded. It is sig-
nificant that they have succeeded nowhere else.
But, as country after country has fallen under
Soviet domination, and as Communist parties in
other countries have demonstrated their role as
Moscow-directed fifth columns, the black cloud of
fear has spread over all of Western Europe and
has darkened the horizon of the United Nations.
These fears and their causes wei'e laid before the
General Assembly with directness and candor in
Department of State Bulletin
two brilliant speeches: one by Mr. Spaak. Prime
Minister of Belgium ; the other by Mr. Bevin, your
Foreign Minister.
Our failure to support the balance of power
existing at the time the Charter was signed has
been a contributing factor. The rapid demobil-
ization of our armies enabled the Kremlin to ex-
tend its domination, to encourage paralysis rather
than productivity, to spread fear where there
should liave been hope.
We expected, when the Charter was signed at
San Francisco, that force would cease to be the
dominant factor in relations between nations.
This hope sprang from the heart of a nation which
then possessed the gi'eatest concentration of mili-
tary power the world has ever seen. We hoped
and believed that in seeking solutions for postwar
problems, our war-born unity would be main-
tained. And so, our country, like jours, demobil-
ized with reckless velocity. It has been a bitter
and. in many respects, costly lesson.
I believe there will be peace, because this time we
are making perfectly clear, in advance, that we
are not willing to suiamit to extortion as the price
of peace. I believe there will be peace, because of
the firm and determined unity which exists be-
tween our two countries and with France; and
because this unity is receiving sujiport from an
overwhelming majority in the United Nations.
I perceive a new hope arising in the General
Assembly now meeting in Paris. It grows from
the increasing readiness of the many to unite
against the threats and crude tactics of the
few ....
The Member states, and particularly the states
of Western Europe, are speaking plainly and per-
suasively. The kind of tension which results from
knowing the truth and being fearful of the resiUts
of expressing it, has been broken in Paris.
I am persuaded that once the unity of the many
has been demonstrated persuasively to the few,
they will seek constructive solution through col-
laboration. The Second World War might have
been prevented if the aggressors had been con-
vinced at the outset of the eventual unity of the
many defenders. Real unity of the majority and
expression of it in the United Nations, in the pres-
ence of the minority, offers our best hope of even-
tual peaceful settlement.
The United States does not seek to promote uni-
formity in the United Nations. We do not seek
to promote anv' particular political or economic
system in individual Member states. But we do
seek to make it possible for free nations to plan a
peaceful future, in association with others if they
wish, but without fear or coercion. We do seek
the creation of conditions in which nations are able
to safeguard their freedom against aggression. We
do seek the creation of conditions in which the re-
Ocfofaer 31, 1948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGENCIES
sources, skills, and tools of the twentieth century
may freely be employed for the greater benefit of
mankind.
Each nation has the right to choose the method
by which it shall work toward the common objec-
tive. No nation has the right to insist that its
method is the only method. No nation has the
right to undermine the common objective of a
peaceful world providing better life and larger
freedoms for all.
The spirit of hope which I perceive in the Gen-
eral Assembly is based also on the fact that West-
ern Europe in which we meet is now headed to-
ward economic reconstruction and self-reliance.
The European Recovery Program is just begin-
ning to be felt, but signs are unmistakable that the
common effort is succeeding.
You know of the success that is flowing from
your own efforts here in Britain. It is important
to realize that collective effort is producing col-
lective results in steel production. A good yard-
stick of this is provided by Sweden and the Bi-
zonal area of Germany which have exceeded, as
you have, the quotas set for the first six months
of this year. They have surpassed their goals by
18 percent ; Belgium has done the same by 4 per-
cent ; Italy by 2 percent ; Austria by 34 percent.
The Economic Committee for Europe estimated
that steel production for all of Europe this year
will exceed 1947 by 11 million tons, and will ex-
ceed the production cjuota by 4 million tons.
You have cut your trade deficit by over half for
the first six months of this year. Greece reports
great progress in rebuilding its transportation
system. Petroleum refining is on the increase in
France. Harvests are promising, and the in-
creased amount of farm machinery is helpuig to
insure the full realization of crop possibilities.
This is your handiwork. This is the product of
your skills, your management, your patience and
hard work. "We in the United States have assisted
financially and technically in great measure, and
the labor of our workers and our farmers has come
to your support. Nevertheless, it is primarily
your accomplishment. We cannot today predict
the full results, but of this we can be sure : rising
internal strength for the European Members of the
United Nations not only strengthens collective se-
curity, but reduces chaos and misery exploited for
totalitarian aggrandizement.
We have great cause to be encouraged, but we
have little cause to be satisfied. The unity that has
brought us thus far must be strengthened and ex-
tended. I hope the economic and political coopera-
tion now under way in Western Europe can be re-
garded as only the beginning of a movement to-
ward European solidarity.
Plans for collective self-defense contained in the
Brussels pact should be carried forward. The
553
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIAIIZBD AGENCIES
principle of progressively developing regional and
other collective efforts for self-defense, as defined
in the so-called Vandenberg resolution, approved
by our Senate with only three dissenting votes,
should be implemented.
The efforts to strengthen the United Nations
must be continued on many fronts, among them the
inter-American front. It means, also, unrelaxed
effort to restrict the application of the veto, to pro-
vide contingents of armed forces available on call
of the Security Coimcil, to obtain agreement on
an effective, enforcible system for the interna-
tional control of atomic energy. And it means un-
relenting support of economic and social projects
sponsored by the United Nations through special-
ized agencies.
We can do no less if we are to fulfill the solemn
pledges made in signing the Charter at San Fran-
cisco. Nothing has occuri-ed in the intervening
years to change the principles we there espoused.
Nothing can ever occur to change the eternal prin-
ciples animating the Charter. The principle of
the Fatherhood of the Most High and the brother-
hood of man, regardless of race, creed, or religion,
is eternal. The changes which will occur will be
the result of mankind's spiritual progress in his
struggles toward that goal — for perfection alone is
invulnerable.
May the prayers of this day, rising from the
hearts of all mankind, be felt in the United Na-
tions. May we receive from this day's rededica-
tion to the Charter new courage and inspiration
for the long task of building a just, abundant, and
peaceful world.
554
Department of State Bulletin
The United States in tlie United Nations
Palestine
[October 23-29]
The Security Council on October 26 opened de-
bate on Egrypt's charges that Israel was "con-
stantly and increasingly "violating the recent
Negev cease-fire order, but adjourned until Oc-
tober 28 without taking action.
Tlie Palestine situation was taken up at an
emergency session called to weigh Egypt's alle-
gations. Lebanon and Syria also demanded that
the Council order Israel to give up territory gained
in the desert fighting since the most recent out-
break on October 14. Egypt agreed to withdraw
its troops to positions occupied on October 14,
as the embattled contestants were asked to do
bj^ Ralph Bunche, acting U.N. mediator for
Palestine.
Great Britain and China proposed on October
28 that the Security Council consider sanctions
against Israel or Egypt, or both, if they fail to
withdraw their military forces in Palestine's
Negev area to positions occupied before the recent
outbreak of fighting.
The Security Council agreed without objection
to postpone until October 29 a vote on the proposal,
which calls for appointment of a seven-nation
committee to study application of sanctions as
permitted under article 41 of the Charter.
In submitting the sanction proposal. Dr. Tingfu
Tsiang (China) and Sir Alexander Cadogan
(U.K.) stressed the fundamental principle of the
Palestine truce that no military advantage should
accrue to either side. They said the aim was to
stabilize tlie Palestine situation until a final so-
lution could be found.
Ralph Bunche told the Security Council tliat
each side of the Palestine controversy was guilty
of what he termed an effort to "win the war under
the enforced truce". The acting mediator reported
that as a result of the recent outbreak of fighting
tlie dispositions of the opposing troops were such
that an early reopening of hostilities was likely
unless truce lines wei-e reestablished quickly.
Dr. Bundle maintained that what is desperately
needed now is a means of transition fi-om what he
described as a tenuous truce to permanent peace.
The parties themselves do not seem to be able to
accomplish tliis, he asserted. He added :
"The truce in Palestine has now endured almost
five months. During this period, the war has been
held in abeyance by the firm intervention of the
United Nations. But it cannot be reasonably ex-
pected that this phase can endure indefinitely".
He expressed belief that "the critical stage has
now been reached where bolder, broader action is
October 31, 1948
required. Such action should take the form of a
clear and forceful declaration by the Security
Council that the parties be required to negotiate,
either directlv or through truce supervision,
organized settlement of all outstanding problems
of the truce in all sectors of Palestine with a view
to achieving a permanent condition of peace in
place of the existing truce.
"Such negotiation would necessarily aim at
formal peace or, at the minimum, an armistice
would involve either complete withdrawal and de-
mobilization of armed forces, or their wide separa-
tion by the creation of broad demilitarized zones
under U.N. supervision."
On October 29 a five-nation subcommittee of
the Security Council in Paris was set up to con-
sider several amendments to the joint British-
Chinese proposal calling for a study of the pos-
sibility of imposing sanctions in the Palestine
situation.
The subgroup, consisting of the United King-
dom, China, France, Belgium, and the Ukraine,
is not expected to be able to consider all the amend-
ments and prepare a revised resolution before No-
vember 2. After creation of the subcommittee,
the council rejected a Syrian effort to force further
discussion on October 30 and adjourned indefi-
nitely. It will be recalled on the Palestine issue
when the subcommittee notifies the Council presi-
dent that the revised draft is ready. Canada sug-
gested establishment of the subcommittee.
The Berlin Crisis
The Foreign Ministers of the United States,
Great Britain, and France on October 27 re-
affirmed their countries' willingness to carry out
the jiroposals embodied in the resolution by which
the Security Council sought to settle the Berlin
crisis but which the Soviet Union vetoed.
After conferring for an hour, the Western
powers' Foreign Ministers issued tlie following
statement :
"The three Foreign Ministers of the United
States, the United Kingdom, and France con-
sidered the situation produced by the Soviet veto
of the Security Council resolution regarding the
Berlin question.
"As is known, the three Governments accepted
that resolution and declared their readiness to
carry it out loyally, and they stand by their ex-
pressed willingness to be guided by the principles
embodied therein.
"The question is still on the agenda of the Se-
curity Council. The three Governments are ready
to continue to fulfil their obligations and to dis-
charge their responsibilities as members of that
555
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
body, which is still in a position to consider any
development in the situation."
The six neutral nations of the Security Council,
which had been trying for weeks to find an answer
to tlie perplexing Berlin question, submitted on
October 25 a four-point resolution aimed at ami-
cable settlement of the controversy between the
Western powers and the U.S.S..K.1
Nine of the Security Council's 11 members, in-
cluding the Western powers, voted in favor of the
proposal; the Soviet Union and the Ukraine op-
posed the resolution.
The vetoed resolution called on tlie Four Pow-
ers to avoid acts which might aggravate the Ber-
lin situation; lift immediately all restrictions on
commerce, transportation, and communications
between Berlin and the four zones of occupation;
call an immediate meeting of the four Military
Governors in Berlin to arrange for unification of
the city's currency by November 20 ; and convene
the Council of Foreign Ministers to consider the
entire German question within 10 days of fulfil-
ment of the measures called for in connection with
the Berlm issue.
Reduction of Arms
An 11-nation U.N. Subcommittee on October
25 adopted a Belgian resolution which would have
the Security Council direct its Conventional Arm-
aments Commission to continue the study of world
arms reduction, emphasizing the need for an in-
ternational control system for atomic energy use
and for a close check on conventional armaments
of all nations.
The Subcommittee of the Assembly's Political
and Security Committee also rejected a Soviet pro-
posal for one-third arms cut by permanent Mem-
bers of the Security Council and the proliibition
of atomic weapons. The vote was 6 to 2: the
United States, Great Britain, France, Brazil, Bel-
gium, and China voting affirmatively, the Soviet
Union and Poland opposing; Lebanon and Aus-
tralia abstaining.
The Belgian plan was approved paragraph by
paragraph, with the Soviet Union and Poland op-
posing on every vote.
Immediately after the balloting on the two draft
resolutions, the Polish Representative submitted
another proposal which he said would meet gen-
eral agreement. It was a combination of the de-
feated Soviet resolution and a Lebanese plan,
which had earlier been withdrawn. It will be
submitted in writing on Tuesday and acted upon
by the Subcommittee on Wednesday.
The United States was among the nations sup-
porting the Belgian proposal, which in effect re-
placed a French draft previously under considera-
tion, which the United States had sought to amend
to emphasize the need for world control of atomic
energy along with conventional arms regulation.
556
On that score, the Belgian draft accepted today
reads that :
. . . the aim of tlie reduction of conventioual armaments
and armed forces can only be attained in an atmosphere
of real and lasting improvement in international relations,
wliicli implies in particular the application of control
of atomic energy involving the prohibition of the atomic
weapon.
The resolution continues:
But noting on the other hand that this renewal of con-
fidence would be greatly encouraged if states were placed
in possession of precise and verified data as to the level
of their respective armaments ;
The General Assembly
Recommends the Security Council to pursue the study
of the regulation and reduction of conventional armaments
in order to obtain concrete results in Implementing
Article 26 of the Charter as soon as the improvement in
the international atmosphere permits;
Trusts that the Commission for Conventional Arma-
ments, in carrying out its program, will devote its main
attention to formulating proposals for the receipt, check-
ing and publication by an international organ of control
endowed with universally accepted powers, of full in-
formation to be supplied by member states with regard
to their effectives and their conventional armaments;
Invites the Security Council to report to it no later
than its next regular session on the effect given to the
present recommendation with a view to enabling it to
continue its activity with regard to the regulation of
armaments in accordance with the purposes and principles
defined in the Charter.
The Conventional Armaments Commission has
reported that it considered it futile to continue
discussions, since the Soviet Union has refused to
accept the majority wishes on any arms-reduction
plan.
The Polish resolution, hastily offered, calls upon
permanent Security Council Members to take the
initiative by reducing in the course of one year all
land, naval, and air forces, and to implement
measures for arms cuts and for prohibition of
atomic weapons. It would also establish within
the Security Council an international control body
to which full official data on arms and armed forces
of the five major powers would be submitted.
United Nations
The Polish proposal for a reduction in arma-
ments and prohibition of atomic weapons was re-
jected on October 27 by the Subcommittee on Dis-
armament Proposals set up by the U. N. Assembly
Political Committee.
The Polish proposal, backed by the Soviet
Union, was along the lines of the Soviet proposal
turned down earlier during the week by the sub-
committee. The vote was 6 to 2 with France,
Lebanon, and Australia abstaining.
' Bulletin of Oct. 24, 1948, p. 520.
Department of State Bulletin
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES
U.S. Delegations to International Conferences
High Frequency Broadcasting
President Truman approved on October 19 the
nominations of R. Henry Norweb, Special Ambas-
sador, as chairman and George E. Sterling, Com-
missioner, Federal Communications Commission,
as vice chairman of the United States Delegation
to the second session of the International Confer-
ence on High Frequency Broadcasting called by
the International Telecommunication Union. The
Conference is scheduled to open at Mexico City
on October 22. Named by the President to serve
as delegates are :
Francis Colt de Wolf, Chief, Telecommunications Divi-
sion, Department of State
Ernest W. McFarlanti, United States Senator
A. Gael Sinison, Consultant, Communications Liaison
Branch, Department of the Army
Charles W. Tobey, United State Senator
Fred H. Trimmer, Chief, Facilities Planning Branch,
Division of International Broadcasting, Department
of State
The other members of the United States Delega-
tion are as follows:
Advisers
Edward Cooper, Secretary, Senate Committee on Inter-
state and Foreicn Commerce
Louis E. DeLaFIeur, Assistant Chief, Frequency Alloca-
tion and Treaty Division, Federal Communications
Commission
Mucio Delgado, Chief, Radio Prosram Branch, Division of
International Broadcasting, Department of State
Raymond L. Harrell, Telecommunications Attach^, Amer-
ican Embassy. Habana, Cuba
Perry Harten, Chief, Stndio Operation, Division of Inter-
national Broadcasting, Department of State
Jack W. Herbstreit, Assistant Chief, Frequency Utiliza-
tion Research Section, Central Radio Propagation
Laboratories, National Bureau of Standards
Howard Hotchner, Assistant Chief, Broadcast Division,
Division of International Broadcasting, Department
of State
Joseph M. Kittner, Assistant to the General Counsel, Fed-
eral Communications Commission
Roger C. Legge, Jr., Propagation Anal.vst, Division of
International Broadcasting, Department of State
Curtis B. I'lummer, Chief. Television Broadcast Division,
Federal Communications Commission
Dudley G. Singer, Attach^, American Embassy, Mexico,
D.F.
A. Prose Walker, Chief, Allocations Section, Television
Broadcast Division, Federal Communications Com-
mission
October 31, 1948
Industry Advisers
Walter E. Benoit, Jlember of the Board of Directors, West-
ingliouse Radio Stations, Inc.
Charles B. Denny. Executive Vice President, National
Broadcasting Company, Inc.
Royal V. Howard, Director of Engineering, National As-
sociation of Broadcasters
George Edward Hughes, Vice President, Director of Inter-
national Broadcasting, Associated Broadcasters Inc.
Walter S. Lemmon, President, World Wide Broadcasting
Foundation
Louis Henry MacDonald, Chief Engineer, World Wide
Broadcasting Foundation
Justin Miller, President, National Association of Broad-
casters.
Don E. Petty, General Counsel, National Association of
Broadcasters
Forney A. Rankin, Executive Assistant to the President,
National Association of Broadcasters
James P. Veatch, Manager, Washington Office of the Fre-
quency Bureau, Laboratories Division, Radio Corpora-
tion of America
Press Liaison Officer
Dorsey Fisher, First Secretary and Public Affairs Officer,
American Embassy, Mexico, D.F.
Secretary of the Delegation
Ellis K. Allison, Division of International Conferences,
Department of State
Special Assistant to the Chairman
Vivian N. Cartwright, Special Assistant to the Chief, Inter-
national Radio Frequencies Section, Division of Inter-
national Broadcasting, Department of State
The first session of the International Conference
on High Frequency Broadcasting held at Atlantic
City, August-October 1947, voted to hold the sec-
ond session of the Conference at Mexico City. It
also established a Planning Committee for the
Conference. The Planning Committee held meet-
ings at Geneva in the spring of this year and at
Mexico City beginning on September 13.
The aim of the forthcoming Conference is two-
fold : the first is to work out a plan of frequency
allocations within the bands of the radio spectrum
set aside for high-frequency broadcasting by the
International Radio Conference at Atlantic City
in 1947, and the second is to agree upon a conven-
tion which would establish an international organ-
ization to have cognizance of high-frequency
broadcasting. The plan drawn up by the Confer-
ence will be forwarded to the Provisional Fre-
quency Board of the International Telecommuni-
cation Union for inclusion in a report to a special
administrative conference which will consider
557
ACTIVITIES AND DEVELOPMENTS
these i-ecommendations to complete the realloca-
tion of the entire radio-frequency spectrum.
The high-frequency (short-wave) broadcasting
is greatly used by many nations for broadcasting
to other countries. It is within these bands that
the Voice of America conducts its broadcasting.
MeteoroSogical
The designation of Norman R. Hagen, meteor-
ological attache, American Embassy, London, as
United States Delegate to the meeting of the
Regional Commission for Asia of the International
Meteorological Organization (Imo) was an-
nounced by the Department of State on October
30. This meeting is scheduled to be held at New
Delhi, India, November 10-17, 1948.
The purpose of the meeting is to promote the
maximum degree of coordination and standardiza-
tion among the meteorological services on the
Continent of Asia. The Asian meeting is of par-
ticular interest to the United States since the U.S.
Weather Bureau operates meteorological stations
and offices in the Pacific which depend upon
weather reports from the Asian area.
Included on the agenda are these topics: (1)
network of stations ; (2) meteorological reconnais-
sance flights over sea areas; (3) times of observa-
tion to be adopted in the region with reference to
the Imo recommendations; (4) marine meteor-
ology; (5) telecommunications; and (6) broad-
casts.
Invitations to attend the forthcoming meeting
have been extended by the Government of India to
those governments "that are members of the
Regional Commission for Asia, and to those bor-
der countries which have expressed their desire to
be represented at the meetings of the Commission.
The Regional Commission for Asia is one of six
such commissions established by the Imo to deal
with meteorological problems on a regional basis.
Semiannual Meeting of International
Joint Commission Held
[Released to the press October 18]
The International Joint Commission met in ex-
ecutive session in the Victoria Building, Ottawa,
Ontario, on October 12 and 13. George Spence of
Regina, Saskatchewan, was acting chairman for
Canada. A. O. Stanley, of Washington, was chair-
man of the United States Section. Commission-
ers Roger B. McWhorter and Eugene Weber, both
of Washington, were also present.
Mr. Weber, who has been recently appointed,
took the oath of office.
Members of the International Columbia River
Engineering Board, composed of members acting
558
for the United States and Canada, were present,
as follows :
Victor Meek, Department of Mines and Resources, Ottawa
F. G. Goodspeed, Department of Public Works, Ottawa
M:ij- Gen. K. C. Crawford, Corps of Engineers, U.S. De-
partment of the Army, Washington
C. G. I'aulsen, Geological Survey, Department of tlie In-
terior, Washington
Victor Meek, chairman of the Canadian Section
of the Board, summarized its progress report for
the preceding six months. He called attention to
the work that has been carried on in British Co-
lumbia, Idaho, and Montana in respect to flood
control on the Kootenay River, drilling operations
for dams, and surveys of potential dam sites. The
report stated that the Corps of Engineers' report
(Seattle District) on the Libby Dam site has been
forwarded to Washington and is under study there
by the Department of the Army.
A report was submitted by the International
Souris-Red Rivers Engineering Board, the mem-
bers of which are as follows :
J. W. Dixon, Bureau of Reclamation, Department of the
Interior, Washington
Maj. Gen. R. 0. Crawford, Corps of Engineers, U.S. De-
partment of the Army, Washington
C. G. Paulsen, Geological Survey, Department of the In-
terior, Washington
Victor Meek, Department of Mines and Resources, Ottawa
A. L. Stevenson, Department of Agriculture, Ottawa
T. M. Patterson, Department of Mines and Resources,
Ottawa
The progress report, which covered the period
Ajiril-September, set forth the studies that are
to be made in connection with the Red River of JL
the North, with a view to flood control. This work ■
will include studies to prevent floods such as those
which have recently done so much damage in the
City of Winnipeg. It was decided that the investi-
gations should cover measures for the elimination
of pollution.
A progress report was also submitted from the
International Waterton-Belly Rivers Engineer-
ing Board, composed of the same members as the
International Souris-Red Rivers Engineering
Board. The report outlined the investigations
that had been conducted in the basins of these
rivers in the United States and Canada, covering
the installation of gauging stations, the activities
of the engineers of both Governments during the
preceding six months, and the collection of data
respecting the present and future uses of the
waters of these streams.
The Commission decided to have further hear-
ings at Detroit, Michigan, on November 15 and 16,
and at Windsor, Ontario, on November 17, 18, 19,
and 20, on the references of the Governments of the
United States and Canada in the matter of the
pollution of St. Clair River, Lake St. Clair, and
Detroit River. A hearing will also be held at Sault
Deparfment of State Bulletin
Ste. Marie, Ontario, on November 22, in regard to
the pollution of St. Mary's River.
The report of the International Souris River
Board of Control in re<!:ard to a number of small
applications from the Province of Saskatchewan
for the use of waters of the Sonris River was dis-
cussed, and the applications were approved by
the Commission.
H. van Zile Hyde Appointed U.S. Repre-
sentative to WHO Executive Board
[Released to the press October 18]
The recess appointment by the President of Dr.
H. van Zile Hyde as United States Representative
to the executive board. World Health Organiza-
tion, was announced on October IS by the White
House.
The President also approved the appointment of
Dr. Wilton L. Halverson, Director of Health of
the State of California, as alternate United States
representative to the second session of the execu-
tive board, which is scheduled to meet at Geneva
beginning October 25. Dr. Hyde, Senior Surgeon
of the United States Public 'Health Service and
Assistant Chief of the Health Branch, Office of
United Nations Affairs, Department of State, and
Dr. Halverson will be accompanied by Howard B.
Calderwood of the Department of State, who will
serve as adviser on the United States Delegation.
All three were members of the United States Dele-
gation to the First World Health Assembly, which
met at Geneva last June.
Informal Participation in Bolivian
international Fair
[Released to the press October 21]
The United States Government will participate
informally through the American Embassy at
La Paz, in the Bolivian International Fair (La
Paz Quatro-Centenary Exposition) and has sent
a number of technical documentary fihns and his-
torical pictures of the United States to La Paz
for display. This exposition, which opened Oc-
tober 20, 1948, and will probably continue until
the end of the year, commemorates the 400th anni-
versary of the founding of the city of La Paz in
October 1548 by Alonso de Mendoza, an officer in
the Spanish A^rmy. Most of the nations with
which Bolivia maintains diplomatic relations have
been invited to exhibit the products of their
industries.
Several American business firms at La Paz have
leased a pavilion at the site of the fair. These
firms with other industrial corporations will ex-
hibit their products in this building known as the
"American Pavilion". A room has been set aside
in this building for the picture display and the
showing of the American Government fihns.
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
U.S.-U.K. Zone of Trieste Admitted to OEEC Membership and
ECA Bilateral Agreement Concluded
[Keleased to the press October 18]
The Council of the Organization for European
Economic Co-operation on October 14 admitted
the U.S.-U.K. zone, Free Territory of Trieste, to
membership in that organization. In addition, an
economic cooperation agreement was concluded
October 17 in Trieste between the U.S. Govern-
ment and the conmiander of the zone. This agree-
ment follows closely the pattern of agi'eements
already concluded between the U.S. Government
and other participating countries, with appropri-
ate modifications to take into account the special
status of Trieste as provided in the treaty of peace
with Italy.
Assistance to the U.S.-U.K. zone of Trieste from
the United States has until now been on a relief
basis, limited to the goods required to assure the
population the necessaries of life and prevent eco-
Ocfober 37, T948
nomic retrogression. Now the zone is embarking
upon a recovery program which will encourage the
rehalDilitation of its economic life. By joining in
cooperative efforts with the other participating
countries the zone will also benefit from the
strengthening of economic relations which were
of such importance to it in the past, and it will be
enabled to make its contribution to European
recovery.
Participation of the U.S.-U.K. zone in the re-
covery program will call for close and continual
consultation between the zone and the Italian
Government to assure that their programs take
into account their common interests and that the
terms of the economic agi-eements concluded be-
tween the zone and Italy under the provisional
regime of the Free Territory are followed.
559
Recommendations on Problems of Educational Exchange
With Eastern European Countries
REPORT OF THE U.S. ADVISORY COMMISSION ON EDUCATIONAL EXCHANGE
Mt dear Mr. Secretary :
The United States Advisory Commission on
Educational Exchange has given consideration, at
the request of the Department of State, to prob-
lems of educational exchange as regards the coun-
tries of eastern Europe. We submit herewith our
recommendations.'
The educational exchange program is based upon
the conviction long held ancl amply demonstrated
by civilized nations that free interchange of per-
sons and ideas between nations is a source of un-
derstanding, enrichment, and progress. Since the
effectiveness of such a program will depend not
only upon its range or extent but also upon the
voluntary and unprejudiced spirit in which it is
conducted, it is obvious that its greatest useful-
ness will be in relation to the free and democratic
countries of the world which are glad to avail
themselves of its reciprocal advantages.
Although this memorandum deals with the
countries of eastern Europe, the Commission
wishes to emphasize that, for reasons which will
be cited, the program of educational exchange will
be more limited in scope and immediate effective-
ness in these barricaded regions of the world than
is the case where normal and friendly contacts
obtain.
The obstacles which have been placed in the way
of educational and cultural exchanges by a number
of the countries of eastern Europe are well known
and need not be detailed. Many efforts have been
made by official and voluntary agencies in this
country to establish exchanges with these countries
but with very few results. In authorizing this
program, the Congress of the United States laid
down in the Smith-Mundt Act the principle that
all official exchanges should be upon a reciprocal
basis. Since for the present most of the eastern
European governments are unwilling to recipro-
' The Commission met for a two-day session on Oct. 18
and 19, 1948. The next meeting is to he held in Wash-
ington on Nov. 1.5, 1948. For a review of the first meeting
of the Commission on Sept. 10, 1948, see Department of
State publication 3313. This report was released on Oct.
19, 1948.
The Commission by resolution recommended that the
Department of State u.se the Library of Congress and the
National Gallery of Art as repositories for recovered cul-
tural ob.iects and works of art looted from the occupied
areas, until these objects can be returned to their rightful
owners at a time to be determined by the Department.
560
cate, it is not recommended that the United States
sponsor government-supported exchanges with
them until their governments give evidence of co-
operation in the mutually helpful and friendly
spirit of the Act. This unwillingness to recipro-
cate will also currently exclude exchange with
these countries under the Fulbright Act which re-
quires negotiations by the governments involved
with assurances that acceptable exchange projects
in both directions can be initiated and carried out.
We have, however, many unofficial opportunities
for contacts and exchange of persons with these
countries. Not only students, scholars, and scien-
tists are involved, but also representatives of the
professions, such as journalism and medicine.
While these exchanges are initiated and sponsored
by voluntary agencies, the Department of State
must make available the necessary travel papers,
and it is often called upon to facilitate the ex-
changes in other ways. Should it do this?
The Advisory Commission, after a full study of
the problem and of the difficulties involved is
convinced that the United States Government
should not close the door to these unofficial ex-
changes, and we so advise the Department of State.
Our reasons for this are several.
lu the first place, it is clear from the evidence
submitted to us, that our experience in these ex-
changes, on the whole, has been a good one. While
some difficulties have been encountered, the ex-
changes with eastern Europe have brought about
the correction of erroneous beliefs about this coun-
try, and a greater appreciation of its institutions,
and a more critical outlook toward totalitarian
regimes.
This practical experience is strongly supported
by certain general considerations. For the United
States to close its doors to all contacts with those
nations with whose philosophy it disagrees would
be to pull down an iron curtain on our own side of
the Atlantic, to adopt a policy which we condemn,
and to lose in world opinion much of the moral
leadership which this country has enjoyed. Many
of our own nationals, furthermore, need upon occa-
sion to visit the countries of eastern and south-
eastern Europe for business, journalistic, schol-
arly or other purposes. We cannot well request
privileges which we in turn deny. These consider-
ations, together with the positive gains which fol-
low from such interchange in the correction of
Department of State Bulletin
THE RECORD Of THE WBEK
misinformation and the removal of prejudices
seem to us to justify the maintenance of a broad
policy of interchange. To cut off contacts with
the totalitarian nations of the world because of
fears as to what niipht happen to democratic insti-
tutions through such contacts would imply a weak-
ness which has no justification in fact. No army
ever burned its bridges except in retreat. The
democratic way of life is not now in retreat.
Such an interchange of persons between the
United States and the countries of eastern Europe
obviously will requii'e careful control.
American officers, responsible for issuing visas
and permission to enter the United States should
satisfy themselves, as far as possible, that indi-
viduals desiring to come to this country have no
subversive intentions, but serious and bona fide
academic, professional, or vocational purposes.
Permits should be for not more than one year,
though subject to renewal.
We do not recommend that the Department en-
courage immature and inexperienced American
students to undertake study under present condi-
tions in eastern Europe. Maturity of judgment
and experience is desirable in order to appraise
critically the instruction received, to profit most
from the total experience, and to avoid personal
episodes. In all cases of Americans permitted to
travel in any of these countries, it is desirable that
they be informed before departure as to condi-
tions that they will encounter. We recommend
tliat the State Department accept the responsibil-
itj' for seeing that this is done. We believe that
restriction of the travel of individuals entering
the country or of Americans going abroad under
the sponsorship of organizations recognized as
subversive is desirable.
A special problem exists with reference to the
holding of international conferences, congresses,
and institutes. Many such meetings are held by
reputable organizations which include as partici-
pants persons with conflicting political views.
Present United States statutes and regulations
governing the entrance of foreign nationals make
it difficult for some of these persons to attend these
meetings. This eliminates the United States as
one of the meeting places for organizations of a
widely international character. This is undesir-
able from many standpoints. We recommend that
a more liberal policy be followed in granting per-
mission to enter for individuals desiring to attend
the reputable meetings of this kind.
Letters of Credence
Sweden
The newly appointed Ambassador of Sweden,
Erik C. Boheman, presented his credentials to the
Ocfober 37, 1948
President on October 20. For texts of the Am-
bassador's remarks and the President's reply, see
Department of State press release 854 of October
20, 1948.
Claims Settlement Agreement Between U.S.,
France, and Australia
[Released to the press October 19]
An agreement was entered into on October 19 by
the United States, France, and Australia setting
forth a procedure for settlement of cargo claims
arising out of the requisitioning by the United
States of the S. S. Marechal Joff?-e, a French vessel
whicli was loading general conunercial cargo in
the Philippines at the time of the Japanese attack
in December 1941. The vessel was taken by the
United States Navy to Australia, where its cargo
was unloaded, and it was then pressed into service
m the interest of the war effort.
Under the agreement which implements a gen-
eral agreement forming part of the lend-lease and
claims settlement with France of May 28, 1946, the
French Government will settle claims of all owners
of cargo landed in Australia and will pay United
States citizens in dollars.^ Australia will turn
over to the French Government the proceeds, in
Australian pounds, of sales of items in the cargo
which they effected after unloading in Australia.
The agreement was signed on behalf of the
United States by Under Secretary Kobert A.
Lovett; by Henri Bonnet, the French Ambassa-
dor, on behalf of France; and by Norman J. O.
Makin, the Australian Ambassador, on behalf of
Australia.
Visit of Secretary Marshall to Greece
Secretary Marshall arrived in Athens on Octo-
ber 16 and was greeted at the airport by Prime
Minister Sophoulis. The Secretary told a press
conference on October 18 that "we are deej^ly con-
cerned in the desire to be of assistance to the re-
habilitation of Greece".
In connection with Secretary Marshall's visit
the following statement was released to the press
in Athens on October 18 :
"The Secretary has been trying to get to Greece
for some time. The United States has assumed
heavy commitments and heavy responsibilities in
this area in which he is officially much involved.
He had planned the trip for last week end but he
left for Washington last Friday.
' Rltixetin of June 9, 1946, p. 994, and June 30, 1946,
p. 1127.
561
THE RECORD Of THE WEEK
"This is a difficult time to leave Paris with Berlin
and the atomic questions being actively discussed
and Palestine coming up shortly.
"It did not appear that a longer wait would offer
a more propitious time for a visit so he decided to
come this week end.
"He is very happy to have even this very brief
visit to Greece."
The Greek Prime Minister accompanied Secre-
tary Marshall to the airport when he departed on
October 18.
Uprising in Korea Reported
[Released to the press October 21]
The Department of State has received a report
from the United States Special Representative to
Korea, John Muccio, that on the morning of Octo-
ber 20 Seoul received reports through Korean
channels of an uprising in the port town of Yosu
in the Cholla Namdo Province.
Mr. Muccio said that exact information was lack-
ing but that it was fairly well established that
while a battalion of the Fourteenth Korean Con-
stabulary Regiment was being mustered for trans-
fer to Cheju-do (an island off the coast) some 40
men mutinied. They were joined by an undeter-
mined number of civilians. A group reportedly
numbering 500 commandeered a train and headed
for Sunchon.
No Americans, military or civilians, have been
in any way involved.
U.S. To investigate IVIexican Cliarges of
Illegal Entry of IVIexican Workers
[ Released to the prees October 19 ]
The Charge d'Affaires of Mexico in Washington
called at the Department on October 18 to express
the concern of the Mexican Government at the
actions which he said were recently taken on the
Mexican border near El Paso by United States
immigration authorities in permitting and facili-
tating the illegal entry of Mexican farm workers
into Texas. The Charge pointed out that this
action was in violation of the agreement entered
into by the Governments of Mexico and the United
States last February 21 ' and had not only caused
surprise in Mexican official circles but was already
creating widespread popular reaction. He pointed
out further that the uncontrolled exodus of so
many workers from northern Mexico represented
serious economic loss to the agricultural produc-
tion of that area and expressed the hope that
' Bulletin of Mar. 7, 1948, p. 317.
" Proclamation 2819, 13 Fed. Reg. 6193.
562
prompt and effective action would be taken by the
United States Government to rectify the matter, j
The Charge said that his Government felt it had I
no other recourse than to consider the agreement of
February 21 as abrogated because of tlie unilateral
action on the part of this Government by certain
United States officials.
Assurances were given to the Mexican Charge
d'Affaires that the matter would be immediately
investigated by the Department in the hope of
either making satisfactory explanations to the
Mexican Government or taking such corrective
measures as seemed necessary. The hope was ex-
pressed to the Mexican Charge that, considering
the traditional and deep feelings of cooperation
and friendship between the two neighboring
countries, everything should be done by both Gov-
ernments to minimize the adverse effects of this
incident. The Department is taking the matter
up officially with other interested agencies of the
Government.
Reciprocal Copyright Relations Between
U.S. and the Philippine Republic
In an exchange of notes dated October 21, 1948,
between Joaquin M. Elizalde, Philipj^ine Am-
bassador at Washington, and Robert A. Lovett,
Acting Secretary of State, there are set forth the
conditions upon which the benefits of the copyright
law of each country will be extended to authors
and copyright proprietors who are citizens of the
other country.
The note from the Philippine Ambassador is ac-
companied by a copy of a proclamation issued on
October 21, 1948, by Elpidio Quirino, Presidem
of the Republic of the Philippines, according copy-
right privileges to authors and copyright proprie-
tors of the United States. The note from the
Acting Seci'etary of State to the Philippine Am-
bassador is accompanied by a copy of a proclama-
tion issued on October 21, 1948, by the President
of the United States pursuant to Public Law 281,
80th Congress (61 Stat. 652), extending to Philip-
pine authors and copyright proprietors the benefits
of the copyright law of the United States."
For texts of the above-mentioned notes and ac-
companying proclamations see Department of
State press release 865 of Oct. 21, 1948.
I
THE FOREIGN SERVICE
Closing of Consular Offices and Reopening of
Office at Martinique
[Released to the press October 18]
A further realigmnent of posts in the Foreign
Service was disclosed on October 18 with the re-
opening of one United States Consulate and the
closing of two others. The one ordered reopened
Department of State Bulletin
is on tlie Fronch-owiied island of Martinique, in
the West Indies. The two scheduled to close down
are in Limerick, Ireland, and Bristol, England.
The decision to abandon the Consulate on Mar-
tinique was based primarilj^ on efforts to effect
budgetary savings, as announced less than a month
ago; but since then I'epresentation made to the
Department of State has brought about a change
in plans. Martinique, it will be recalled, played an
interesting role in the early part of World War II,
when it was the outpost nearest to the United
States of the Vichy government.
While the Consulate at Limerick is being closed,
a small Foreign Service staff is to be retained at
the nearby Shannon Airport, so that services regu-
larly performed for Americans traveling overseas
by air will not be curtailed. Normal business for
Americans at Limerick has gone down since the
end of the war and there are now less than 200 U.S.
citizens residing in the Limerick area.
The Consulate at Bristol is being closed because
a slackening in routine business there seems to
make this an advisable place to cut Foreign Service
exi:)enses at a time of budgetary stringency.
THE DEPARTMENT
Appointment of Officers
William C. Johnstone, Jr., as Director of the Office of
Educational Exchanse, effective AufOist 10, 1048.
Rus.sell L. Riley as Executive Officer of the Office of
Educational Exchange, effective June 23, 1948.
PUBLICATIONS
Department of State
For sale by the Superinteyidcnt of Documents, Oovernment
Printinfj Office, Washington 2.5, D. C. Address requests
direct to the Superintendent of Documents, except in the
case of free piihlieations, which may 6e obtained from the
Department of State.
Report of the United States Library Mission To Advise
on the Establishment of the National Diet Library of
Japan. Far Eastern Series 27. Pub. 3200. 41 pp. 150.
Report submitted to the Supreme Commander for the
Allied Powers, February 8, 1948, ou the services which
an adequate national library may be expected to
render to Japan ; a summary of tlie proposals sub-
mitted by the Mission to the Diet Committees ; and
the text of the National Diet Library laws as enacted
on February 4, 1948.
International Office of Public Health. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 1754. Pub. 3212. 54 pp. 150.
Protocol Between the United States and Other Gov-
ernments— Sisfned at New York July 22, 1946; rati-
fication advi.sed by the Senate of the United States
July 19, 1947; ratified by the President of the United
States July 28, 1947 ; ratification of the United States
dep<isited with the United Nations at Lake Success
August 7, 1947; proclaimed by the President of the
United States May 19, 1948; entered into force Oc-
tober 20, 1947.
Ocfober 31, 7948
Exchange of Official Publications. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 1767. Pub. 3235. 3 pp. 50.
Agreement Between the United States and the Re-
public of the Philippines— Effected by exchange of
notes signed at Manila April 12 and June 7, 1948;
entered into force June 7, 1948.
Cooperative Rubber Plantation Investigations. Treaties
and Other International Acts Series 1771. Pub. 3245.
4 pp. 50.
Agreement Between the United States and Haiti
Amending Letter Agreement of January 24, 1941 —
Effected by exchange of notes, signed at Port-au-
Prince February 3 and 11, 1948; entered into force
February 11, 1948.
Economic Cooperation with Norway Under Public Law
472— SOth Congress. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1792. Pub. 3254. 53 pp. 150.
Agi-eement Between the United States and Norway —
Signed at Oslo July 3, 1948 ; entered into force July
3, 1948.
Economic Cooperation with the Netherlands Under Public
Law 472— SOth Congress. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1791. Pub. 3266. 63 pp. 20(t.
Agreement Between the United States and the Nether-
lands—Signed at The Hague July 2, 1948; entered
into force July 2, 1948.
Selected Publications and Materials Relating to Ameri-
can Foreign Policy. October 1948. Pub. 3304. 25 pp.
Free.
List of Department of State publications relating to
U. S. participation in the United Nations and its
.specialized agencies, to the making of the peace, the
occupation of Germany and Japan, and economic
reconstruction.
Korea, 1945 to 1948. Far Eastern Series 28. Pub. 3305.
124 pp. 250.
A report on political developments and economic re-
sources, with selected documents.
International Educational Exchange; LTnited States Ad-
visory Commission and the Program of the Department
of State. International Information and Cultural Series 3.
Pub. 3313. 10 pp. Free.
Report of the 1st meeting of the U.S. Advisory Com-
mission on Educational Exchange and a brief r^sumfi
of the international exchange program of the Depart-
ment of State.
THE CONGRESS
Foreijrn Aid Appropriation Act, 1949. S. Rept. 1626,
SOth Cong., 2d sess., to accompany H. B. 6801. 17 pp.
Authorizing the Secretary of State To Perform Certain
Consular-Type Fimctions. S. Rept. 1759, SOth Cong., 2d
sess., to accompany H. R. 4330. 2 pp.
Investigation of Federal Employees Loyalty Program.
Interim Report of the Investigations Subcommittee of the
Committee on Expenditures in the Executive Depart-
ments, pursuant to S. Res. 189 (SOth Cong.), a resolution
authorizing the Committee on Expenditures in the Execu-
tive Departments to carry out certain duties. S. Rept.
1775, SOth Cong., 2d sess. lii, 29 pp.
Summary of the Legislative Record of the Eightieth
Congress, Second Session, Together With a Statement
Relative Thereto Pursuant to a Request of the Honorable
Alben W. Barkley, United States Senator From Ken-
tucky. S. Doc. 203, SOth Cong., 2d sess. ii, 38 pp.
563
^<yyvCe^yU6/
The U.N. and Specialized Agencies page
U.S. Proposes Six Sponsoring Powers Discuss
Atomic Energy Issues. Statement by
Ambassador Warren R. Austin in Com-
mittee I 535
U.S. Accepts Atomic Energy Resolution State-
ment by Ambassador Warren R. Austin . 539
Review of Allied Action on Berlin Bloclsade.
Statement by Philip C. Jessup 541
U.N. Documents: A Selected Bibliography . 547
United Nations Day:
Statements by Secretary Marshall- . . . . 548
Address by George V. Allen 549
Why We Support the U.N. By Ambassador
Warren R. Austin 551
The U.S. in the U.N 555
H. van Zile Hyde Appointed U.S. Representa-
tative to Who Executive Board .... 559
Treaty Information
U.S.-U.K. Zone of Trieste to Oeec Member-
ship and EcA Bilateral Agreement Con-
cluded 559
Claims Settlement Agreement Between U.S.,
France, and Australia 561
U.S. To Investigate Mexican Charges of
Illegal Entry of Mexican Workers . . . 562
Reciprocal Copyright Relations Between U.S.
and the Philippine Republic 562
Economic Affairs page
U.S. Delegations to International Con-
ferences:
High Frequency Broadcasting 557
Meteorological 558
Semiannual Meeting of International Joint
Commission Held 558
Informal Participation in Bolivian Interna-
tional Fair 559
international Information and Cultural
Affairs
Recommendations on Problems of Educa-
tional Exchange With Eastern European
Countries. Report of U.S. Advisory
Commission 560
General Policy
Visit of Secretary Marshall to Greece .... 561
Letters of Credence: Sweden 561
Uprising in Korea Reported 562
The Foreign Service
Closing of Consular Offices and Reopening of
Office at Martinique , . . . 562
The Department
Appointment of Officers 563
Publications
Department of State 563
The Congress 563
1
U. S. GOVERNMENT PPINTINS CFFICEi 1948
-K
u/i€/ ^eha'i^tmeni/ .(w t/tate/
SOUND INTERNATIONAL TRADE PROGRAM • By
PaulU.Mtse 578
THE VOICE OF AMERICA • Article by Assistant Secretary
George V. Allen 567
Vol. XIX, No. 488
November 7, 1948
^,«T o.
DEC % ^^
••^^x.. o« •■
«>%e -U^efici/ittme^ ^^ C/ia^ VJf W ± J. \D L x i X
Vol. XIX, No. 488 • Publication 3336
November 7, 1948
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office
Washington 25, D.C.
Peice:
C2 issues, domestic $5, foreign $7J25
Single copy, 15 cents
Published with the approval of the
Director of the Bureau of the Budget
Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and Items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
OF State Bolletin as the source will be
appreciated.
The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.
Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.
THE VOICE OF AMERICA
by Assistant Secretary George V, Allen
At the time of tl\e debates in Congress a year
ajro as to whether there shouhl be a Government
program of foreign information, many people
felt that America was being vilified abroad from
every angle and that we should make some answer
on the short-wave radio. We could not send out
vast quantities of American newspapers and maga-
zines, and American visitors could not go in and
talk with people of many foreign lands. Any
possibility of penetrating certain areas would have
to be by radio through the Voice of America.
The real Voice of America is the voice of the
thousands of newspapers, periodicals, public
speakei-s, public officials, private groups, or indi-
viduals— anyone and everything which, if fused
together by some magic process, would make up
the articulate and composite voice of the 147 mil-
lion people of the United States. If our short-
wave program is to be the true Voice of America,
it will reflect their views, not so much as ex-
pressed in quadrennial elections but in their day-
to-day lives.
Nobody seems to be certain about the origin
of the term "Voice of America", although a man
who runs a short-wave broadcasting station in
Boston claims that he first used it about 1938 in
a private short-wave broadcast to Europe. He
says he just tagged his broadcast the Voice of
America, and it caught on. It is one of those
slogans tliat, by continued use, gets more and
more currency and builds around itself a connota-
tion that makes it hard to discontinue. Many
phrases and terms in the English language are
created, nobody knows quite why or how. When
a phrase achieves currency and is firmly established
it is sometimes beyond changing. The Ameri-
can public has developed the term "Voice of
America".
The purpose of the information program of
the Department of State, of which the Voice of
America is a part, is to assist in achieving the aims
of American foreign policy. The chief aim of
this policy today is the preservation of the demo-
cratic way of life, including notably the preser-
vation of the freedom of the press and the Ameri-
can system of private enterprise and initiative.
The achievement of this goal is the concern of
every American.
Our information service is therefore fighting
every day to preserve and extend the very prin-
ciples which the American press so excellently
exemplifies. We shall continue to fight with every
means in our power.
American journalism and American radio are
far ahead of journalism and radio anywhere else
in the world. They achieved that outstanding
position through the American system of private
enterprise. If that system breaks down, our pre-
eminent position in the world will deteriorate.
The entry of Government into the information
field should not threaten private activities. We
hope we can pool our resources, both of Govern-
ment and of private industry, for the very pur-
pose of preserving private enterprise.
Even though the Government will always have
a responsibility to make its policies known to the
public, its entry into the general-information field
is temporary, dictated by the world situation.
With the triumph of democracy on a broad scale,
it is hoped that private enterprise will in time be
able to perform the general-information functions
entirely and that the activity of all governments
in the field of information will reduce finally to
the vanishing point.
We are awaiting for the day to come when no
air waves of the world are taken up with the
November 7, 1948
567
efforts on the part of one people to propagandize
another. But we live in a realistic world. For
the moment, therefore, since private industry will
not understake this job, Government must send
out American information by radio. This is the
only feasible means for us to reach the people be-
hind the Curtain. Let us be certain that the Voice
of America represents genuine American prin-
ciples— American democracy and liberty and
freedom.
The United States Government did not get into
broadcasting before 1942. Most countries out-
side the United States — certainly most of those
in Europe — have always maintained a govern-
ment monopoly of radio broadcasting, both for
domestic and foreign programs. In Great Brit-
ain, for example, only one organization, the Brit-
ish Broadcasting Company (BBC), broadcasts
both to people inside Britain and to other people
all over the world.
Tlie greatest safeguards to the freedom of in-
formation as agreed to in principle by 35 nations
at a recent meeting in Geneva on freedom of in-
formation is a multiplicity of sources. The radio
listener can hear only one man's view of the truth
or the news if there is only one voice on the air.
Full liberty to tune all over the radio dial is mean-
ingless if only a single program is broadcast. It
takes a multiplicity of ideas and views on a prob-
lem to give the people who are listening the back-
ground necessary for them to form their own
judgments.
But most European countries — all of them with
only one or two minor exceptions — have had gov-
ernment-controlled programs since the beginning
of radio, both for their medium (standard) wave
inside their country and their short-wave pro-
grams going abroad.
Governments which control their broadcasting
systems soon began to use them in the short-wave
bands to project their policies outside their own
territor}', trying to leach into the minds of the
other people and convince them through methods
of propaganda. The first time any government
began to trj', on a larger scale, to convince another
people of its ideas and thoughts was in 1936, when
the Nazi Govenmient of Germany put on a
Russian-language program designed, purely and
simply, to speak in the Russian language to the
Russian people — to reach over the heads of the
Soviet Government and get down to the people
to try to tell them the Nazi story.
Very shortly after that, the Nazis put on pro-
grams in English and French. In 1938 the Brit-
ish and the French systems also began official,
government-sponsored programs in foreign lan-
guages, reaching into the hearts of other countries.
The United States didn't start such an operation
before Pearl Harbor. In 1942 the United States
Government began broadcasting in foreign lan-
guages to foreign peoples. Since 1929, NBC and
CBS had done some short-wave broadcasting from
the United States as a commei'cial venture, but '
they had beamed those programs only to Latin :
America, in Spanish, and had had no government '
support. When the war started, the private com- |
panies could no longer sell advertising on their ]
foreign-language programs, and United States )
stations were about to go off the air. The private |
companies suggested that the Government take :
over the operation for the duration of the war, |
mainly as a war effort but partly as a method to
keep the programs going.
Two separate Government agencies were set up
to do that operation. One, the Office of War In-
formation, under Elmer Davis, was given the re-
sponsibility for broadcasting to the Far East, Eu-
rope, and Africa. An Office of Inter- American !
Affairs, set up under Nelson Rockefeller, was given
charge of the information work in Latin America.
Both organizations — the Owi and the Oiaa —
had many activities in addition to short-wave '
radio programs.
At the end of the war, in the fall of 1945, many
wartime agencies which had been set up for the
prosecution of the war, including 0\\t and Oiaa,
were discontinued. Certain pertinent functions,
however, were lumped temporarily into the De-
partment of State under an Assistant Secretary :
for Public Affairs.
Nobody knew whether the Government was go-
ing to continue to engage in radio broadcasting.
Many people thought that the Government's in-
formation work, a wartime activity, ought to be
cut off at the end of the war. They felt very
genuinely that tliis was a field that should be
reserved for private industry — that American
newspapers and magazines and radio stations
could tell foreigners about the United States a
gi'eat deal better than a Government bureau could.
568
Department of State Bulletin
If private broadcasting companies had been will-
ing, at the time, to broadcast on short wave to
foreign countries, the Government, using the tax-
payers' money, would possibly have been taken
out of the operation immediately. But no private
broadcasting company was willing to engage in
this activity. They couldn't sell nearly enough
advertising to make it pay. During 1941, which
was the last year the private companies under-
took to broadcast programs to Latin America,
each of the two networks, NBC and CBS, lost
about 600 or 800 thousand dollars. Consequently,
we were faced with the fact — shall we have a
Government program or shall we have no short-
wave program at all ?
Many people thought that perhaps it would
be better to have no program at all. They hoped
that some day the private companies would again
resume short-wave broadcasting, when the world
trade situation would be such that people could
sell sufficient goods abroad to justify corporations
in spending money to advertise their goods.
During the war close relations existed among all
the Allies, and there was a natural hope that this
collaboration would continue in peacetime. The
hope was short-lived. Even before last summer,
the air waves coming out of Eastern Europe were
already filled with falsehoods about the United
States. For example, when I was Ambassador to
Iran I listened to vilification and misrepresenta-
tion of American motives day after day after day.
We could have taken the point of view that the
Soviet lies would fall by the wayside ; truth would
out eventually, and we should not even bother to
answer.
However, most of the members of Congress con-
cluded that the time had come Avhen we should
start answering back, giving the truth. They
learned, for example, that the American taxpayer,
since the war, had contributed about 560 million
dollars for the relief and recovery of Poland alone,
in connection with various efforts to put the war-
torn countries of Europe on their feet.
Yet, in "Warsaw the people were being told
every day that the purposes of our effort were im-
perialistic, that Wall Street wanted to get its
tentacles on the economy of this country, and
that the United States was out to expand its con-
trol and domination throughout the world.
Americans began to ask, "Shall we continue to
pour out our money in an effort to bring about
honest reconstruction and the preservation of
democracy and liberty without telling people what
our purposes are? Shouldn't there be some
agency responsible for the job of telling foreigners
what American policy is?" That view prevailed,
and Congress passed Public Law 402 of the 80th
Congress, Iniown as the Smith-Mundt Act, provid-
ing for both an information program and a longer
range educational exchange or cultural-relations
program, to be considered integral parts of the
permanent conduct of the foreign relations of the
United States. The purpose was to let the peoples
of the world know the true aims of the United
States Government and what the American peo-
ple are.
Eight or ten transmitters daily broadcast the
Voice of America Russian program. We have
already identified 18 Soviet transmitters which
the Soviet Government is using in an effort to
"jam" us. The Soviets use more power and effort
and time of their transmitters in trying to jam
us than we use iji sending out the programs.
Their jamming robs them of the use of trans-
mitters that are so much needed for their own
internal and foreign-propaganda woi'k. They
certainly would not devote valuable time of their
transmitters if our progi-ams did not "sting".
One naturally wonders whether our programs
still get through in spite of all their jamming.
There are various proofs, particularly in Eastern
Europe, but also in the U. S. S. R. itself, that they
do get through : Radio ^Moscow, in its own pro-
grams, consistently analyzes the programs of the
Voice of America and tries to refute them; and
if it cannot find arguments, it starts calling
names. The Soviet press and radio, despite the
great amount of jamming, also pay constant at-
tention to our programs.
No law in the Soviet Union at present makes
it illegal for a Russian to listen to a foreign broad-
cast. One reason is that although Radio Moscow
and Pmvda, Izvestia, and all other Soviet news-
papers spend most of their time screaming against
our programs, the Soviet Government tries to pre-
tend that we are having no effect at all — that the
Soviet people are solid and that they cast at every
election 99 percent of their votes for the Govern-
ment. They pretend that our broadcasts would
not convince anybody; thus it would be incon-
Novemfaer 7, 1948
569
sistent if they made it illegal for a person to listen
to us. Furthermore, all sorts of foreign broad-
casts go into Russia. If they banned all listening
to short wave, Russians could not listen to Radio
Warsaw, or Bucharest, or Praha, or even to Radio
Moscow itself, since many Soviet programs are
sent out on short wave to reach all parts of the
Soviet Union.
The Smith-Mundt Act is often referred to as
a turning point in the conduct of our foreign
relations, but this type of activity has always been
carried on by American Government representa-
tives abroad as a normal part of their activities.
The work of an American Consul or Minister or
Ambassador abroad has always been that of ex-
plaining what the United States is trying to do
and what America is like. They meet with the
local press, make public addresses on American
foreign policy, and talk to individuals, and have
done so since the beginning of our history. The
Smith-Mundt Act recognizes in legislation the
fact that information about the United States
and explanations of our policy are an integral part
of the conduct of foreign relations. The act is
the guidebook for our activities at the present time.
The act was signed in January of this year.
Almost immediately thereafter, several com^^
mittees of the Congress began a series of investi-
gations of our oi^eration. Members of the House
Committee on Appropriations discovered the fact
that certain broadcasts in the Spanish language
were being beamed to South America, giving al-
leged background of a very curious sort about
the United States. The broadcasts were a series
of programs, 15 minutes every Wednesday, called
"Know North America".
That series happened to come to light by pure
chance. An investigator of the House Appropria-
tions Committee, acting for Representative Taber,
asked to have a look at some sample scripts which
the Voice of America was sending out. He picked
up a calendar and said, "You can choose your
date— send over scripts for either the 15th, 16th.
or l7th of February". The person who had
handled the request selected entirely by chance the
15th of February. He could have selected the
16th or the I7th. The Know North America
series, which goes out only once a week, happened
to go out on that 15th. If the 16th or the l7th
had been chosen, the series which led to the in-
vestigation might never have come to light.
The subject of the February 15 script was Wy-
oming. It referred to Indian maidens running
foot races "undressed and unf eathered". This led
to prompt demands for scripts on other States.
The one on Texas included a I'emark by a South
American tourist, quoting a passage from John
Gunther's Inside U.S.A. to the effect that Texas
had been born in sin and New England conceived
in hypocrisy.
Both Houses of Congi-ess made an immediate
demand for investigation of why this type of
program was going out, particularly to find out
whether the persons who were sending out this
kind of misrepresentation of the United States
were merely careless, whether they thought they
were amusing, or whether there was a deeper sub-
versive significance in it. Several committees
vied with each other for the privilege of holding
the hearings. Both the House Committee on Ex-
ecutive Expenditures and a joint committee of the
Senate Committee on Foreign Relations and on
Executive Expenditui"es held investigations. Re-
ports issued at the close of those investigations
pointed the finger quite properly at the Depart-
ment of State for not having adequately super-
vised the programs.
The truth of the matter was that the programs
were written in Spanish, and nobody in the De-
partment of State had translated them or, in fact,
even Imew what was in them. One might ask,
"How in the world did a situation of that sort
come about?"
During the evolution of the legislation it was
thought that private industry would not under-
take an extensive short-wave information pro-
gram because it was not commercially feasible.
Government money, therefore, had to be voted for
it to be done. Congress stated clearly that private
industry could do a better job than Goverimient
and could do it more efficiently and more effec-
tively. The State Department, therefore, was put 1
mider strict instructions to use private industry
for short-wave broadcasting to the maximum ex-
tent feasible.
The legislation made provision for contracts to
be made with private broadcasting agencies (NBC
and CBS) that would carry on about 70 percent
of the broadcasting, including all the broadcast-
ing to Latin America. The State Department un-
dertook to do about 30 f»ercent itself, including all
the broadcasts beamed to the Iron Curtain coun-
570
Departmenf of Slate Bulletin
tries of Central and Eastern Europe. Those were
the more delicate areas, and the script writer had
to be in immediate contact with the policy of the
Government and liad to have inside information
in order to be able to do the job. The private com-
panies recosrnized the heavy responsibility of
broadcasting into that area. If they said some-
thing that was not in accord with policy or with
facts, they might cause great mischief. They
were happy to have the State Department un-
dertake the responsibility for Iron Curtain
broadcasting.
The Know North America series was one of
the broadcasts being done by NBC under contract
with the Department of State. Taxpayers' money
was being used to pay for it, but considerable
honest difference of opinion arose between the
private broadcasting companies and the represent-
atives of the Department of State regarding the
extent of the Department's responsibility for su-
pervising those programs.
Some officials of the commercial companies said,
in all honest}', whenever the question of State De-
partment supervision arose during the past year,
that the Govermnent did not know how to run a
broadcast, that private companies had had great
experience in broadcasting and had built up
thi'ough private initiative and energy the gi"eat
American broadcasting systems and Imew a lot
more about this than the Government. They
pointed out that Congress had shown its recogni-
tion of this fact when it had required by law that
private industry be used to the greatest extent
possible.
The chief advantage of the investigations which
Senator Ferguson and his committee held was to
clarify the question of responsibility beyond any
doubt. The Senator indicated that if taxpayers'
money was involved, the State Department had
full responsibility for supervision. But when-
ever we went to the National Broadcasting Com-
pany or the Columbia Broadcasting Company and
said their scripts were not telling the proper story
about the United States and that we felt we should
blue-pencil this or that, they were naturally in-
clined to cry "censorship". They pointed out that
the U.S. Government spends taxpayers' money to
buy the New York Times every day for our offi-
cial United States libraries abroad, but we do not
tell the Times what to say in its columns or edi-
torial page. Most of our libraries have John
Gunther's book, from which the objectional pas-
sages were quoted. Should they tear out the
offending pages?
As a result of the investigations, the private
companies are now telling us :
"All right, you win. We recognize now that
tlie Congress considers the State Department to
have full responsibility for every word that is
said over Voice of America programs, whether
those programs are written by the State Depart-
ment or by a private agency. Congress says that
since taxpayers' money is involved, we can't hide
behind the skirts of any provision of the law stat-
ing that private companies can broadcast more
effectively than the Government. We now recog-
nize what Congress wants you to do about it. But
if that is the way it is, we don't want to have
anything more to do with it."
So they came to us on July the first and said :
"Please take this program back. We don't want
to have it any more. You do 100 percent of the
broadcasting."
Many people have asked the Department
whether it plans to increase the Voice of America
jirogram in the light of the world crisis. In
reality, the Department has more interest in im-
proving the programs that it has, in making them
good, hard-hitting, solid, effective progi-ams, than
in using, for example, more languages such as
Vietnamese. Siamese, Indonesian, Malayan,
Pushtu, and Hindustani.
It has been pointed out that the Department
of State could get ten times more listeners to the
Voice of Ameria broadcasts if entertainment were
featured. The Congress of the United States,
however, did not appropriate money for the pur-
pose of entertainment. The Department would
have an endless job if it undertook the task of
entertaining the two billion peoples of the world.
The Voice of America, therefore, does not include
programs of dance re.coi-ds and other forms of
entertainments. Its principal job is one of in-
formation.
November 7, 1948
571
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
U.S. Urges Acceptance of Draft Resolution on Berlin Crisis
STATEMENT BY PHILIP C. JESSUPi
Deputy U.S. Representative in tlie Security Council
Mr. President, I should also like to pay tribute
to the statesmanship which has produced this draft
resolution which is now before us. Members of
the Security Council who have worked with you,
Mr. President, have themselves borne witness to
the fact that the achievement of this result in the
course of their deliberations was the result of
your leadership in the discussions which have
been going on. We recognize this draft resolu-
tion as the result of an imaginative and a sincere
effort to find a solution to a difficult problem.
The effort has been made in accordance with the
best traditions of the international principles
typified in the Charter of the United Nations.
Since we so regard this resolution, we have re-
ceived it with respect and we have given it careful
study.
j\Ir. President, as I listened also to the views
which were expressed here on Friday by those
who joined in submitting this resolution, I felt
reassured that the intent and purpose of this res-
olution are the same as those which we understand
from studying its text. The resolution is char-
acterized by the spirit of reciprocity and the de-
velopment of a logical progression of ideas. As
we understand the resolution, it contemplates the
following program.
On the clay of the notification of the resolution
to the four Governments concerned, two events
will take place, or in the words of paragraph 2
of the resolution, two steps will be put into effect.
The first step which is mentioned and which is
to be put into effect on the day of the notification
is the reciprocal removal of the restrictions im-
posed since March 1, 1948, by the Soviet Union
and by the three Western Goverimients on com-
munications, transport, and commerce between
Berlin and the Western zones of Germany and to
and from the Soviet zone. Immediately upon the
adoption of this resolution and even before its
'Made in the Security Council at Paris Oct. 25, 1948,
and released to the press by the U. S. Delegation on the
same day.
572
formal notification, the Government of the United
States would be prepared to take steps to assure
compliance on our part with the provisions rel-
ative to the lifting of the restrictions and the
meeting of the Military Governors. We assume
that the brief interval which will elapse between
the adoption of the resolution and its formal
notification will be sufficient to enable all of the
four Governments concerned to issue the necessary
orders.
The second step which is mentioned and which
is to be put into effect on the same day, that is,
the day of notification, is a meeting of the four
Military Governors in Berlin. The purpose of
this meeting is to aiTange for the unification of
currency in Berlin on the basis of the German
mark of the Soviet zone under adequate Four
Power control. The principles which will guide
the four Military Governors in making these ar-
rangements are those agreed upon in Moscow and
embodied in the directive of August 30, 1948.
These meetings are to be concluded not later than
the 20th of November. Under the program out-
lined in the resolution, the Council of Foreign
Ministers will meet on November 30 unless the
arrangements to be made by the four Military
Governors are concluded before November 20, in
which case the Council of Foreign Ministers will
meet at an earlier date, namely, ten days from
the conclusion of the work of the Military Gov-
ernors. However, the Four Powers jointly agree
the meeting of the Council of Foreign Ministers
can be held at any other day.
Mr. President, the United States in a spirit of
accommodation is ready to accept this resolution.
We accept the principles stated in it and would be
prepared to carry it out in full good faith. I
hope, Mr. President, that there is no member of
the Council who will not similarly find in this
i-esolution a reasonable and fruitful program for
the solution of a grave problem.
Lat«r Mr. Jessup said:
Department of State Bulletin
Mr. President, the United States has taken note
of the declaration of the Representative of the
Soviet Union that it proposes to veto the resohition
which has been proposed by six members of the
Security Council.- In the judgment of tlie world,
Mr. President, this was a just and reasonable res-
olution drafted by fair-minded statesmen of six
countries from regions scattered widely all over
the globe. It was proposed by them in the dis-
charge of their responsibilities as members of the
Security Council and in an honest attempt to set-
tle this difficult problem.
The Representatives of France, of the United
Kingdom, and of the United States accepted this
resolution. If the Berlin question is not settled
on the basis of the pro])osition stated in this res-
olution, the responsibility will rest squai'ely and
unavoidably on the Government of the Soviet
Union.
Mr. President, the Representative of the Soviet
Union referred at some length to the so-called di-
rective of August 30. Perhaps he did not bring
out as clearly as might well be done the language
of the preliminary paragraph of that directive
which reads as follows :
"The Governments of France, the United King-
dom, the United States and the USSR have de-
cided that subject to agreement being reached
among the four military governors in Berlin for
their practical implementation the following steps
shall be taken simultaneously."
The directive was thus a decision to proceed to
two simultaneous steps on the basis of an agree-
ment to be reached by the Military Governors.
That agreement was never reached. It was never
reached for reasons which have been amply ex-
plained to the Security Council by the Repre-
sentatives of France, the United Kingdom, and
by myself, and the record has been made fully
available to the Security Council.
But, Mr. President, the question of the direc-
tive is not the i.ssue which is before the Security
Council. Since that point has again been raised,
I feel it is incumbent upon me to refer again to
the communication of the three Governments sub-
mitting this issue to the Security Council and to
quote again two sentences from that communica-
tion of September 29. The communication says :
"The issue between the Soviet Government and
the Western Occupying Powers is, therefore, not
that of technical difficulties of communications nor
that ... of currency for Berlin. The issue is that
the Soviet Government has clearly shown by its
actions that it is attempting b}' illegal and coercive
measures in disregard of its obligations to secure
political objectives to which it is not entitled and
which it could not achieve by peaceful means."
The three Governments lay before the Secui'ity
Council the threat to peace which was created
November 7, 1948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIAUZBD AGENCIES
by the blockade measures imposed by the Soviet
Union.
The argument which we have just heard by the
distinguished Representative of the Soviet Union
is an admission that blockade measures which his
Government has imposed are being used as a
measure of duress.
I listened in vain as he was speaking to any
suggestions in his remarks that he, too, like the
Representatives of the three Western Governments
was approaching this draft resolution in a spirit
of accommodation, in an endeavor to settle the
problem of Berlin. On the contrary, Mr. Presi-
dent, he flat-footedly asserted that they would
continue the threat of their blockade measures
until the Soviet mark was established as the sole
currency, not by free agreement, but under Soviet
dictation.
Mr. President, the main issues which are before
the Security Council have been made very clear
in the proceedings we have had. The resolution
has been laid before us, which was eminently fair
in the effort of six governments which led to its
formulation. It seems to me, Mr. President, that
we must now ask, "Wliat does the Soviet Union
want?"
Does it want a meeting of the Coimcil of For-
eign Ministers to discuss Berlin or the unification
of Germany, which always has been and still is the
aim of the three Western Governments, or to dis-
cuss questions of Germany as a whole ? The Soviet
Government can have such a meeting without the
threat to peace. We told them that before. We
rejjeat that promise. We have indicated our ac-
ceptance of that principle iii our approval of the
draft resolution which was before us.
Does the Soviet Union want the Soviet zone
mark to be establi.shed as the sole currency of Ber-
lin under Four Power control, as Premier Stalin
himself suggested? They can have that without
maintaining the blockade. We have told them so
before and we tell them so again.
Does the Soviet Union want assurances that we
do not want to use Four Power control of the cur-
rency in Berlin to damage or to control the general
economy of the Soviet zone outside of Berlin?
They can have such assurances without threat or
violence. We have made that clear already. We
make it clear again.
Does the Soviet Union want guaranties to pre-
vent the use of transport facilities for black-
market operations in currency in Berlin? They
can have such guaranties without resorting to
duress. Again, it is a matter which we have told
them before we would do, and we are ready to
say so again.
If the Soviet Government will remove all re-
strictions imposed on transportation, communica-
tions, and commerce subsequent to March 30, 1948,
' Bulletin of Oct. 24, 1948, p. 520. See also U. N. doc.
S/1048, Oct. 22, 1948.
573
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
between the Western zones and Berlin, the United
States Government will undertake to provide safe-
guards for the Western mark B and the Eastern
mark of the Soviet zone as presented by the United
States Representative during the course of the
Berlin discussions.
Mr. President, as I understood the distinguished
Representative of the Soviet Union in his remarks
a few moments ago, he argued that blockade meas-
ures which have been imposed by the Soviet Union
were imposed to protect the economy of the Soviet
zone against the Western mark. However, Mr.
President, as I have had occasion to point out to
the Council before, these blockade measures began
in January, reached their fullness in March and
the Western mark was not introduced until June
24. I think it necessary to point out again that
the matter of restrictions on traffic has nothing to
do with the question of safeguards to prevent the
movement of currency. Removal of blockade re-
strictions imposed upon land communications,
land and water communications by the Soviet
Union would restore the normal traffic channels
of supply and transport which are now confined
to the air lift. In effect this would merely substi-
tute the normal ground means of transport for
present air transport.
The United States has never intended to use
currency as a means of adversely affecting the
economy of the Soviet zone. The objective of cur-
rency reform is to improve economic life and not
to destroy it.
Mr. President, if on the other hand the Soviet
Union wants to drive us out of Berlin, where we
have an acknowledged right to be, that result they
cannot get by maintaining their threat to peace.
We have stated that position over and over again,
and that simple fact should now be clear. If the
Soviet Union wants us to work out technical details
of the first four questions I put, under duress of
maintenance of blockade measures, instead of
through the process of free negotiation, again the
answer to that question is "No." In short, Mr.
President, the Soviet Government can get all it
says that it wants without maintaining the block-
ade. With the blockade it can get neither what it
says it wants nor what its actions seem to suggest
it actually does want. It is the blockade which is
the barrier and it is the Soviet Union which can
lift the blockade.
Mr. President, even now in spite of the fact that
the Soviet Union has seen fit to indicate that it
intends to block the efforts of the Security Council
of the United Nations, if it wishes to end the threat
to peace which it created, the Berlin question can
be settled on the basis of the program suggested in
the draft resolution which is now before the Se-
curity Council. Tlie three Western Governments
have indicated their acceptance of the principles
contained in that resolution. If the Government
of the Soviet Union would give reciprocal assur-
ances that that program suggested in that resolu-
tion would be carried out, it can be done.
Current United Nations Documents: A Selected Bibliography^
Security Council
Letter from the Representatives of the United Kingdom
and the United States Dated 6 August 1948 Addressed
to the President of the Security Council Transmitting
the Report of the Administration of the Britisli-
American Zone of the Free Territory of Trieste for
the Period 1 April to 30 June 1048. S/953, August 6,
1948. 36 pp. mimeo.
Committee of Good Offices on tlie Indonesian Question.
Second Report on Political Developments in West-
ern Java. S/9C0, May 10, 1948. 39 pp. mimeo.
Resolution for a Cease-fire Order and Truce Agreement
Adopted by the United Nations Commission for India
and Pakistan on 13 August 1948 and the Commission's
Correspondence witli the Indian and Pakistani Gov-
ernments in Relation to the Resolution. S/995,
September 13, 1948. 33 pp. mimeo.
Documents relating to the Palestine Situation
Cablegram from the United Nations Mediator Addressed
to the Secretary-General Dated 7 August 1948. S/955,
August 7, 1948. 3 pp. mimeo.
Cablegram Dated 12 August 1948 from the United Nations
Mediator to the Secretary-General Concerning the
- Observance of the Truce in Jerusalem. S/9()l, Au-
gust 12, 1948. 4 pp. mimeo.
' Printed materials may he secured in the United States
from the International Documents Service, Columbia
University Press, 29G0 Broadway, New York City. Other
materials (mimeographed or processed documents) may
be consulted at certain designated libraries in the United
States.
574
Telegram Dated 6 September from United Nations Medi-
ator Addressed to the Secretary-General Transmit-
ting Report on Death of French Observers Lt. Colonel
Joseph Queru and Captain Pierre Jeannel. S/994,
September 8, 1948. 6 pp. mimeo.
Cablegram Dated 12 September 1948 from the United
Nations Mediator Addressed to the Secretary-General.
S/909, September 13, 1948. 2 pp mimeo.
Cablegram Dated 27 September 1948 from Ralph Bunehe
to the Secretary-General Transmitting Report Re-
garding the Assassination of the United Nations
Mediator. S/1018, September 28, 1948. 6 pp. mimeo.
Cablegram Dated 30 September 1948 from Ralph Bunehe
to the Secretary-General Concerning Truce Super-
vision. S/1022 October 1, 1948. 3 pp. mimeo.
Cablegram From Chairman of Truce Commission Dated
30 September 1948 Addressed to President of Security
Council. S/1023, October 2, 1948. 2 pp. mimeo.
Cablegram Dated 3 October 1048 from Ralph Bunehe to
the Secretary-General Concerning Truce Arrange-
ments in Jerusalem. S/1024, October 4, 1948. 2 pp.
mimeo.
Report Dated l(i September 19-18 by the United Nations
Mediator on the Observation of the Truce in Pales-
tine During the Period from 11 June to 9 July 1948.
S/102.5, October 5, 1948. 38 pp. mimeo.
Cablegram Dated 14 October 1948 from the Chairman of
the Truce Commission Addressed to the President of
the Security Council Concerning Violations of the
Truce by Arab Forces in Jerusalem. S/1034, Octo-
ber 15, 1948. 1 p. mimeo.
Department of State Bulletin
The United States in the United Nations
Palestine: Security Council orders Negev withdrawal
The Security Council adopted on November -4
an iunended Britisli-Chinese resolution calling- for
withdrawal of Israeli and Egyptian forces from
any positions gained in the Xegev since October 14,
wiien recent hostilities in that area of Palestine
began.
The resolution was approved by a nine-to-one
vote, with the Soviet Union abstaining, after
revisions embodied in a U.S. amendment were
accepted. The Ukraine cast the opposing vote.
The U.S. amendment eliminated from the origi-
nal resolution specific mention of article 41 of the
U.N. Charter, under which noncompliance could
be met by economic sanctions. The amended reso-
lution instead provides that in the event of non-
compliance a seven-nation council committee will
study the situation "as a matter of urgency" and
report to the council "on further measures it could
be appropriate to take under Chapter VII of the
Charter."
Chapter VII includes article 41 and other en-
forcement provisions but the resolution, as now
worded, does not specify what measures would be
considered in the event of the noncompliance. The
original British-Chinese resolution specified meas-
ures under article 41 — the economic sanctions
section.
Israeli Representative Aubrey Eban objected to
both the original and the amended version, claim-
ing that the Negev, awarded to Israel under the
partition resolution adopted by the Assembly last
year, is an integral part of Israel.
The advances in the Negev fighting have been
Israeli advances and the called for withdrawal
would be from positions taken from Egyptian
forces.
Jacob Malik, Soviet Delegate, called for direct
negotiations between Israeli and Egyptian Repre-
sentatives. Representative Eban said this was
acceptable. Egypt, however, supported the
adopted resolution with the comment that it could
be stronger and again asserted that it could not
recognize the Jews as a negotiating party.
In presenting the U.S. amendment, Philip
Jessup pointed out that the council's main task is
to keep the jDeace in Palestine and not to lay down
a settlement and that positions taken by the coun-
cil members on the truce question do not prejudice
positions they may take in the Assembly on the
political settlement problem.
The U.S. amendment si^ecifies that the Negev
withdrawal is being called for without jirejudice to
the rights, claim, or position of the two parties
"or to the position which the members of the
United Nations maj- wish to take in the General
Assembly" on political settlement.
Mr. Jessup, in stressing the truce aspect, said
that the truce mu.st be maintained "until arrange-
November 7, 1948
ments can be made to replace the truce by a more
permanent peaceful settlement".
He characterized council action to maintain the
ti'uce as "a necessary prerequisite to General As-
sembly consideration" whicli "does not prejudice
the result of such consideration in any way".
The resolution calls for establishment of truce
lines in the Negev by Israeli and Egyptian Repre-
sentatives. Failing establishment of these lines
by the two parties, "permanent lines and neutral
zones shall be established by decision of the acting
mediator".
Refugee Aid. The 26-nation Executive Board
of the International Children's Emergency Fund
has allocated $6,000,000 for supplementary relief
of 250,000 child and mother refugees from combat
areas in Palestine. The Program Committee had
recently recommended that $2,200,000 be added to
the $411,000 ])reviously allocated for relief in that
area. However, the Executive Board approved
the larger figure of $6,000,000 on November 5, after
hearing a report on needs of the refugees.
Maurice Pate, Unicef executive director,
pointed out that the organization can help only
children and pregnant and nursing mothers among
the half-million homeless Palestinians. The need
for basic relief, such as the $30,000,000 program
suggested by acting mediator Ralph Bunche, he
pointed out, remains unchanged.
A summary of Unicef activities to date shows
that 155,625 Arab mothers and children up to 15
years old have received aid. No figures are yet
available on the number of Jewish mothers and
children assisted. Relief supplies are being dis-
tributed in camps in Palestine, Syria, Lebanon,
and Trans-Jordan.
Meanwhile, the Assembly's Social, Humanitar-
ian and Cultural Committee, on October 30,
named a 15-member subcommittee to examine all
the proposals regarding Palestine refugees that
have been made so far and to work out a draft
resolution.
Subcommittee members were instructed to con-
sult Secretary-General Lie on the question of ad-
ministering a proposed Palestine refugee relief
fund. The Legal Committee will be asked to give
urgent consideration to the legality of the fund
idea.
In the Social Committee on October 29, Mrs.
Franklin D. Roosevelt introduced a joint Anglo-
American resolution calling for a Palestine refu-
gee aid program budgeted at $29,500,000.
In presenting the resolution, Mrs. Roosevelt
said, "We believe that the acting mediator's esti-
mate of the number of persons for whom relief
should be supplied and the period of time for the
j^rogram both repi'esent a sound basis for action
by the General Assembly. . . .
"It has not been determined whether the
refugee movement has reached its peak nor in
575
-il
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZBD AGENCIES
what degree some of the refugees may be absorbed
during the period of tlie program in the areas in
which they have found refuge. On the basis of
information available it would appear reasonable
to assume that 500,000 persons will require assist-
ance for the period of the program. The period
of time proposed will carry through the next har-
vest. We anticipate that the ^jrogram of relief
will be launched as soon as funds are available
and the necessary organization can be established.
For this purpose December 1, 1948 represents a
realistic date. ... It will be recognized,
however, that this problem lequires an operation
of a character different from normal United Na-
tions activities and that it requires a different
budgetary treatment. Consequently we believe
that the cost of this program should not be made a
part of the United Nations budget. We endorse,
thei'efore, the proposal in the resolution submitted
by the United Kingdom and the United States
that the General Assembly ui'ge all Members of
the United Nations to make as soon as possible
voluntary contributions in kind or in funds suffi-
cient to ensure that the amount of supplies and
^ilnds required are obtained."
Every effort should be made to use all available
volunteer international and local organizations,
Mrs. Roosevelt stated, and recommended that "the
International Committee of the Red Cross, the
League of Red Cioss Societies, and the Interna-
tional Children's Emergency Fund can be particu-
larly helpful because they can readily bring into
service the experienced disaster and I'elief per-
sonnel known to them."
Korea: Commission's Report
The continued concern of the General Assembly
for the attainment of national independence and
unity in Korea is called for in the report of the
Korean Commission, made public on October 30.
The commission's report to the Assembly noted
with regret "the grim reality of a divided Korea,"
with a government in the south set. up as a result of
U.N.-observed elections in May and another in the
north set up "arbitrarily by steps which were not
under international observation". The northern
zone has been under Soviet occupation and the
south occupied by the United States.
In its report, the conuuission stressed the urgent
need for establishing procedures for peaceful
negotiation between the two regimes in Korea,
adding that this "must take place before military
evacuation of the occupying forces abandons
Korea to the arbitrary rule of rival political
regimes wliose military forces might find them-
selves driven to internecine warfare."
The Soviets have unilaterally announced the
beginning of withdrawal of their troops, leaving
their zone in the hands of a Communist-dominated
regime. The United States is turning over admin-
• Documents and State Papers, September 1948.
576
istration of its zone to the newly elected govern-
ment at Seoul.
The re]Dort stressed that the conmiission, follow-
ing the will of the Assembly, has always concerned
itself with Korea as a whole. But this has been
thwarted, tlie report said, by the refusal of Soviet
authorities to allow the commisssion to visit the
Soviet zone or conduct U.N.-observed elections
there — in contrast to the cooperation given by
U.S. authorities in the south.
Immediate unification of Korea is essential if
that country's social, political, and economic well-
being is to be served, the commission held.
Efforts of Korean leaders to achieve this end have
failed largely because of "the tension prevailing
in the international situation", the commission
found.
Atomic Energy: Resolution Adopted
The General Assembly on November 4 over-
whelmingly voted its approval of the atomic con-
trol plan developed over the past two years by the
Atomic Energy Commission.
The vote, on the revised Canadian resolution
previou.sly approved in committee, was 40 to six,
Soviet group opposing. The Soviet proposal was
defeated by the same vote.
Spain: Economic Statistics
The Legal Committee of the General Assembly
on November 2 voted 21 to 14 to delete a portion of
a resolution under debate which would specifically
bar Spain from an international convention on
economic statistics.
Radio Plan Approved
The Assembly Achninistrative Committee on
October 30 adopted a resolution calling on the
Assembly to approve in principle the establish-
ment of a U.N. telecommunications system.
The resolution was submitted jointly by the
United States, the Soviet Union, and France.
If the resolution is approved at a later Assem-
bly plenary session, it will permit the United
Nations to seek shortwave broadcasting frequen-
cies at the current telecommunications conference
being held at Mexico City.
At present, the United Nations depends on the
generosity of U.S. and Canadian shortwave sys-
tems for its transmission time.
Greece: Third Interim Report
In a third Interim Report which was approved
unanimously on October 22, the Special Com-
mittee on the Balkans said that facts which have
come to its notice during this period confirm and
strengthen the conclusions of its General and Sup-
plementary reports.^
This is Unscob's third Interim Report, the pre-
vious two having been sent to the General Assem-
bly on December 31, 1947, and January 10, 1948,
at the time of a large-scale guerrilla attack against
Konitsa in Epirus.
Department of State Bulletin
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES
Calendar of Meetings ^
Adjourned during October
Itu (International Telecommunication Union) : Meeting of Admin-
istrative Council.
IcAO (International Civil Aviation Organization) :
Fifth Session of Council
Legal Committee
International Bank for Reconstruction and Development: Third
Annual Meeting of the Board of Governors.
International IVIonetarj' Fund: Third Annual Meeting of the Board
of Governors.
Ilo (International Labor Organization) : Technical Tripartite Con-
ference on Safety in Factories.
UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organi-
zation) :
Conference to Constitute au International Union for the Protection
of Nature.
Social Tensions Conference
Who (World Health Organization) :
Expert Committee on Tuberculosis
Expert Committee on Venereal Disease
Expert Committee on Pharmacopoeias
Pan American Sanitary Organization:
Meeting of Executive Committee
Meeting of Directing Council
International Wool Study Group: Second Meeting
International Council for Exploration of the Sea
Upu (Universal Postal Union): Meeting of the Executive and
Liaison Committee.
Fourth Pan American Consultation on Cartography
Ninth General Conference on Weights and Measures
Fifth Inter-American Congress of Surgery
Second Meeting of South Pacific Commission
International Tin Study Group: Third Meeting
In Session as of November 1, 1948
United Nations: General Assembly: Third Session
Itu (International Telecommunication Union) :
Provisional Frequency Board
Planning Committee for High Frequency Broadcasting Conference .
International Conference on High Frequency Broadcasting . . . .
Bolivian International Fair
Ilo: Industrial Committee on Textiles: Second Session
Who: Second Session of Executive Board
Scheduled for November 1948
Gatt (General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade) : Meeting of Com-
mittee on Special Exchange Arrangements.
Fag (Food and Agriculture Organization) :
Fourth Session of Council
Fourth Session of Annual Conference
Ilo (International Labor Organization) :
Industrial Committee on Petroleum; Second Session
Preparatory Conference on Labor Inspection in the Asian Countries .
Joint Maritime Commission
Governing Body: 107th Session
Imo (International Meteorological Organization) : Meeting of Regional
Commission for Asia.
Empire Parliamentary Association
West Indian Conference: Third Session
Who (World Health Organization): Expert Committee on Internat-
ional Epidemic Control.
Second Inter- American Congress on Brucellosis
UNESCO : General Conference: Third Session
IcAO (International Civil Aviation Organization) : Southeast Asia
Regional Air Navigation Meeting.
United Nations: Economic Commission for Asia and the Far East:
Fourth Session.
Geneva . .
Montreal .
Lisbon . .
Washington
Washington
Geneva . .
Fontainebleau, France .
Paris
Paris .
Paris .
Geneva
Mexico City . . .
Mexico City . . .
London
Copenhagen . . .
Locarno and Bern
Buenos Aires . . .
Paris and Sevres .
La Paz
Sydney
The Hague . . .
Paris
Geneva . .
Mexico City
Mexico City
La Paz . .
Geneva . .
Geneva . .
Washington
Washington
Geneva . . .
Kandy, Ceylon
Geneva ...
Geneva . . .
New Delhi . .
Hamilton, Bermuda .
Guadeloupe . . . .
Geneva
Mendoza, Argentina
Beirut
New Delhi
Glenbrook, Australia
' Prepared in the Division of International Conferences, Department of State.
November 7, 1948
London Nov. 1-
1948
Sept. 1-Oct. 5
Sept. 7-
Sept. 24-Oct. I
Sept. 27-Oct. 1
Sept. 27-Oct. 1
Sept. 27-Oct. 16
Sept. 30-Oct. 7
Oct. 8-
Sept. 30-
Oct. 1,5-19
Oct. 15-21
Oct. 2-3
Oct. 4-16
Oct. 4r-6
Oct. 4-11
Oct. 11-21
Oct. 12-
Oct. 12-21
Oct. 17-21
Oct. 25-
Oct. 25-
1948
Sept. 21-
Jan. 15-
Sept. 13-
Oct. 22-
Oct. 20-
Oct. 26-
Oct. 25-
Nov. 8-13
Nov. 15-
Nov. 9-
Nov. 15-
Nov. 26-
Nov. 29-
Nov. 15-
Nov. 15-
Nov. 15-
Nov. 15-
Nov. 17-
Nov. 17-
Nov. 23-
Nov. 29-
577
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Sound International Trade Program:
Its Meaning for American Business
by Paul H. Nitze ^
Deputy to the Assistant Secretary for Economic Affairs
At the end of World War II, we were confronted
with a world economy even more seriously out of
joint than most of us then realized. Six years of
struggle had depleted the resources, both financial
and material, of a large segment of mankind. The
apparatus of many countries for the production
and clistribution of goods was in a shambles. In
others it had been seriously distorted to meet the
specialized needs of war. Critical economic dislo-
cations had given rise in many countries to strict
governmental controls over all important economic
activities. Moreover, important changes in the at-
titudes of individuals and governments towards
the problems of trade and economic organization
in general had taken place. The growing economic
and political strength of organized labor and agri-
culture had brought about a situation in which
wage and price adjustments to changing economic
conditions were difficult to make. There had been
a growth of social consciousness and wider claims
upon governments for the welfare of their people,
the avoidance of unemployment, and the provision
of social security.
The combination of these and other factors had
led to an increase of economic planning and na-
tionalization of industry in the domestic field and
of state trading in the field of international trade.
These influences in the main lead away from the
determination of trade channels on the basis of
market considerations and away from the correc-
tion of trade imbalances by internal deflation and
price-level adjustments, as was characteristic of
the nineteenth century systems of trade. For the
private trader and his government, they have
created new problems of increasing importance
which have to be reckoned with.
^ powerful are these factors in today's trading
world, that they have affected even the United
States, where private competitive enterprise flour-
ishes to a greater extent than anywhere else in the
world. Even we have felt the need to control ex-
ports, support many farm prices, engage in gov-
ernment purchasing of certain foodstuffs and raw
materials, and limit the use of scarce materials.
' Address made before the Twentieth Conference on
Distribution, in Boston, Oct. 25, 1948, and released to the
press on the same date.
578
Segments of the American people exert strong
pressures for limitation of imports, for payment
of subsidies, or for other governmental measures
when the operation of the competitive price
mechanism threatens to become painful.
Since the end of the war, and jiarticularly in the
last year, the world has made steady progress in
overcoming some of the most acute material
shortages and in correcting some of the major
trade imbalances. Tliere is still, however, a long
and difficult road ahead.
EXPANSION OF WORLD TRADE
It is in this setting of the world as it is and of
the actual problems that confront us that we must
consider what constitutes a sound international
trade program.
In the nineteenth century^ common principles of
international trade were tacitly understood and ac-
cepted by all countries. Today, however, with the
emergence of new forces and new problems, spe-
cific international agreement is necessary.
I think that businessmen will agree that at least
four basic conditions are necessary for a sound ex-
pansion of world trade: stability; good markets;
fair rules of trade; and procedures for settling
trade disputes.
Let us see whether and to what extent our inter-
national trade program contributes to these objec-
tives.
Stability
Stable conditions of international trade obvi-
ously cannot be achieved easily or overnight. The
uitceitainties of disturbed economic conditions to-
day are enhanced by overshadowing political un-
certainties. But there are positive steps which
can be taken towards this end.
First, there can be judicious assistance to the
building up of the damaged productive resources
and economic machinery of other friendly coun-
tries. Second, there can be international agree-
ment on the objectives and principles which all
would like to see govern international trade.
Third, there can be international action for the
moderation of exchange fluctuation.
The United States had led in working for the
Department of State Bulletin
restoration of imich-nei'dod stability in interna-
tional trade by being one of the chief architects of
the United ^^ations and its specialized agencies,
particularly the International Monetary Fund and
the proposed International 'I'lade Organization,
and by undertaking the European Recovery Pro-
gram. Through tiiese measures we have sought,
by international agreement, to achieve settlement
of ])oliticul problems, to give a connnon direction
to decisions on trade policy, to moderate exchange
fluctuations, and to assist in the restoration of the
basic economies of the Western European democra-
cies. All of these measures help to bring more
stability into the conditions of intei'national trade.
Good Markets
Good markets are basic to sound trade. To be
good markets, they must be accessible and they
must be able to pay for the goods they receive.
Goods can be disposed of by gift or barter deals,
but neither provides what we would consider a
sound market.
Through the European Recovery Program,
European countries are being helped to restore
their production and hence their capacity as sound
markets for each other, for us, and for the rest
of the world.
Loans have been made to other countries through
the Export-Import Bank for the expansion of
necessary facilities which will assist in their eco-
nomic development. The International Bank for
Reconstmiction and Development has been estab-
lished for the same purpose.
A beginning has been made in reaching agi'ee-
ment upon principles designed to promote the
flow of private capital and technical skills into
areas which can use them to foster their produc-
tivity and development, and hence their emer-
gence as good markets as well as good suppliers.
This has been done at Bogota in the e<:-onomic
agreement of Bogota, and at Habana in the Char-
ter for an International Trade Organization.
The reduction of artificial trade barriers also
helps to make good markets. At Geneva last year,
23 nations negotiated for selective reduction of
their tariffs, not only with the United States but
with each other. The result was the General
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade, in which 23
countries reduced tariff rates on some products
and bound rates against increase on other prod-
ucts for about 45.()()0 individual items covering
over one half of the total foreign trade of the
world.
These are major steps toward the sound de-
velopment of good markets.
I have been asked whether the United States,
with only one vote, will not be outnumbered in the
Ito by the many smaller countries and forced to
accept all kinds of things that it does not like. I
do not think we need to be afraid. Such a thing
has not yet happened in any international agency
November 7, 1948
IHi. RECORD Of THE y^ilYt.
with which we work. Such a fear leaves out of
account the strategic position of leadership that
the United States enjoys in the world. As a mat-
ter of fact, many smaller countries are concerned
that the United States and other large countries
will dominate Ito, regardless of the one vote for
each, simply because, in the nature of the case, the
larger countries cannot help having more influence
in world affairs.
The truth is that there are always those who fear
that their country will be outnumbered by other
countries in any kind of an international organiza-
tion. If reason did not overcome this narrow
fear, there would never be organized international
cooperation between sovereign countries. I am
not such a fatalist. I believe that sovereign na-
tions can work together. I do not think that pes-
simistic resignation pays dividends either in busi-
ness or in national success. American life is built
upon a different foundation — faith in our destiny,
courage in the future.
Fair Rules of Trade
I said at the outset that one of the elements that
a businessman wants to see included in a sound
trade program is fair rules of trade. This is what
the Charter for an International Trade Organiza-
tion, agreed upon by representatives of 53 nations
at Habana in March 1948, seeks to provide.
As "World War II drew to a close, many people
in the United States, the British Empire, and
other countries felt that the absence of fair rules
of trade in the decades after the first World War
had contributed significantly to the economic war-
fare that "dried up"' world trade in the 1930's.
Then, each country traded on the basis of the law
of the jungle, and the devil took the hindmost.
As one European statesman put it:
"We competed with one another in devices to
restrict the volume of world trade and then
fiercely competed with one another for a greater
share of that smaller total."
AVith this in mind, we in the Government began
to work, even while hostilities were still going on,
to lay the basis for the establishment of fair rules
of conduct over the widest possible area of trade.
One of the first acts of the Economic and Social
Council of the United Nations was to appoint a
Preparatory Committee of 18 nations to prepare
an agenda for a World Conference on Trade and
Employment, which was finally held at Habana
from November 1947 to March 1948. Representa-
tives of 53 nations there agreed upon the text of
a Charter for an International Trade Organiza-
tion for submission to their respective legislatures.
It is expected that this Charter will be submitted
to our Congress in the next session.
The Charter establishes a code of rules that
countries voluntarily agree to follow with respect
to their trade with each other. These rules cover a
579
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
■wide range of international trade relationships:
Tariffs, quotas, subsidies, foreign exchange, cus-
toms formalities, cartels, commodity agreements,
most-favored-nation treatment, and the interna-
tional aspects of foreign investment, employment,
and economic development. Most of them repre-
sent commitments by governments to refrain from
taking specified governmental actions affecting
trade which they would otherwise be at full liberty
to take.
I won't try to describe these rules in detail, but
I do feel that it would be useful to state in gen-
eral terms what they seek to do. They have two
aspects. They state the agreed general principle
and they indicate how, or to what extent, it must
be applied. Let me illustrate.
Certain important rules can, and therefore
would, come into immediate and full operation
when the Charter enters into force. Rules of this
kind are those requiring simplification of. customs
formalities, the curbing of international cartels,
and many more.
The problem is, however, more complicated with
resisect to others. For example, one of the im-
portant rules is that nations undertake to nego-
tiate for the reduction of tariffs. But, clearly, no
nation will undertake in advance to reduce all its
tariffs or even any particular tariff. Therefore,
the Charter provides that negotiations shall be on
a selective, product-by-product basis, which will
afford adequate opportunity to consider the needs
of individual indtistries and that members shall
be free not to grant concessions on particular pro-
ducts. It also provides an "escape" clause under
which if, as a result of a reduction and of unfore-
seen circumstances, imports increase so as to
threaten serious injury to a domestic industry, the
reduction may be withdrawn.
Another important principle is that nations will
not use quotas to restrict their trade or to discrimi-
nate against the trade of a particular country.
But, clearly, under present conditions very few
countries can apply this rule completely, no matter
how much they may desire to do so. They just
don't have enough foreign exchange to pay for all
the imports their people want. Therefore, they
must keep their imports down to the amount thej'
can pay for and concentrate on the ones they really
need, just as an individual of limited means does
in preparing his family budget. So the Charter
permits the use of quotas to accomplish this
necessary budgeting only as long as a real shortage
of foreign exchange lasts.
Thus, in situations where the agreed principle
cannot be fully put into effect, members are not
asked to do the impossible. They are, however,
obliged to comply to the fullest extent, and at the
earliest moment that they can, and they may be
called to account by other members or by the Or-
ganization if they fail to do so. The conditions
580
under which failure to comply fully with the rules
can be justified are very specifically defined.
I give these illustrations because concern has
been voiced in some quarters that exceptions in the
Charter will have the effect of vitiating the rules
which it lays down. Quite the contrary. The
existence of the exceptions is what makes it pos-
sible for many nations to accept the rules and start
putting them into effect, at least partially, pending
the time when they can do so fully.
Procedures for Settling Trade Disputes
The Ito would provide a permanent mechanism
for the orderly settlement of international eco-
nomic disputes. This permanent feature is im-
portant. We learned from the experience of the
World Economic Conference, in 1927, and the Lon-
don Monetary and Economic Conference, in 1933,
that intermittent intei'national conferences, ac-
companied by broad declarations of principle (as
some people now propose), are not an effective
means of resolving world economic problems, of
avoiding depressions, or averting economic war-
fare. A permanent international agency, operat-
ing on the basis of specific commitments, is a far
more effective instrument for these purposes.
An international body to handle trade must have
flexibility if it is to handle satisfactorily changing
world conditions. Therefore, the Charter, like the
United States Constitution, has a procedure of
amendment and provides for a comprehensive re-
view of its provisions within five years.
Each member of the Ito would have one vot«,
and decisions would, in the main, be by majority
vote. The Organization could not force any coun-
try into any act against its desire. But if a mem-
ber violated a commitment accepted under the
Charter, the Organization could authorize other
members to withdraw from the offender the privi-
leges that all members grant to each other under
the Charter. The right to withhold privileges to
offenders, together with the persuasion exercised
in the Ito forum, plus the force of public opinion,
would constitute the sanctions of the Ito.
FUTURE COURSE
I have given particular emphasis to the Ito in
this discussion of a sound international trade pro-
gram, first, because it is new and less well known
than the othei- facets of our international trade
polic}', and second, because of the very special
potentialities which it has today for the business-
men of the United States. As I have indicated, the
private-enterprise system in which we believe is
now called upon to operate in a very different and
less congenial world than that which existed be-
fore World War I or even between the two world
wars. New and powerful forces are at work which
tend to make it more and more difficult for the pri-
vate trader to do his business abroad. These forces |
Department of Slate Bulletin \
are tlie result of economic adversity, or new philos-
()])liios, or both. This Government has the respon-
sibility of working out with other governments
agreement on principles which will give the maxi-
mum opportunity for the private trader to con-
duct his business and exercise his ingenuity and
ability.
AVe do not guarantee that the measures taken
, or proposed will cure the deep-seated ills of the
I world trading systems overnight. And we do not
[ undertake that they will restore international
j trade completeh^ to private enterprise. The
i changes which have taken place in the world are
too deep for that. But we are convinced that these
i measures are positive steps which will help to
cure those ills, help to eliminate the necessity for
continued assistance to other countries by the
United States, and help to create the conditions
under which private enterprise can have its best
chance.
Let us assume for the moment that we go for-
ward without the Ito. What would be likely to
hapj)en?
I have pointed out that governments are in the
international trade picture more than ever before;
that they have at their disposal new, highly effec-
tive, and ingenious techniques for the control of
trade; and that the cii'cumstances in which their
countries find themselves create powerful demands
for the use of these techniques in the narrow and
short-run national interest. The Charter, basical-
ly, imposes limitations upon the use of those tech-
niques, confining it to cases which all have agreed
are legitimate. If the rules of the Ito are not
accepted, countries will be free to use these con-
trol techniques, not only in the cases j^ermitted by
the Charter, but in all other cases as well.
To be specific : If the rules of the Ito are not
accepted, countries will be free to use quotas as
long as the}' like to limit or change the course
of their trade not oidy for reasons of exchange
shortage, but also for pure protection and political
favor. They will be free to give new preferences
in their tariffs. They will have no obligation
whatsoever to negotiate for the reduction of their
tariffs or for the elimination of their present pref-
erences. They will be free to maintain and in-
tensify confused, complicated, arbitrary, secret,
and obstructive customs regvdations. They will
be under no obligation whatever to do anything
at all about the restrictive practices of interna-
tional cartels. They will be free to take any form
of arbitrary action they desire with respect to
the treatment of foreign capital within their
borders. They will be free to conduct state trad-
ing enterprises in wholly uncontrolled competition
with private enterprise.
Where does the private trader stand in such a
world? And where does his government stand
when he comes to it and asks it to protest on his
November 7, 1948
THE RECOKO OF THE WEEK
behalf against the arbitrary action of some other
government that injures his business? We can
say to the other government that we don't like
what it is doing and that its action hurts our
citizens. And this often produces results. But
we have worked to develop the Ito because we
want to be able to say to that other government
that we are protesting what it has done, not only
because it hurts our citizens, but also because it
violates an obligation which it has assumed not
only to us but to other countries as well. And
we want to be able, if necessary, to call that gov-
ernment to account before those other countries
and before the public opinion of the world. This
will immeasurably strengthen our hand in serving
your legitimate interests.
CONCLUSION
Finally, we cannot get away from the fact that
in today's world political and economic considera-
tions are inextricably interrelated. Political un-
certainties make for disturbed economic condi-
tions. It is brought home to every one of you
each morning as you read your daily paper that
one of the basic factors retarding the world's re-
covery has been the strength and aggressiveness of
international Communism. The economic and po-
litical difficulties which have existed since the war
liave been exploited to the full by the Soviet Union
and its agents abroad.
Every one of the measures which I have de-
scribedj the International Bank, the International
Monetary Fund, the General Agreement on
Tariffs and Trade, the International Trade Or-
ganization, has been open to the Soviet Union. It
has been invited to join in these cooperative ef-
forts to restore world production and world trade.
It has consistently refused to do so. It has op-
posed these efforts. It has inveighed against
them in its press, and over the air, and in the
United Nations. The Ito, for example, which
we regard as a means of promoting and stabilizing
trade by the common effort of all friendly na-
tions on equal terms and for the benefit of all, has
been called by the Soviets an organization to "con-
tribute to the domination of the U. S. A. in world
markets", part of "the drive of American im-
perialism toward world domination". We are
charged with "seeking to open world markets
and sources of raw materials to the further pene-
tration of American monopolies", and through
the Marshall Plan and the Ito "to enslave not
only Europe, but the whole world". Foreign
Trade, the monthly magazine of the Soviet Min-
istry of Foreign Trade, said :
"One of the means of establishing world domina-
tion is the foreign trade program of American
imperialism. This program has found its final
expression in the American proposals for the crea-
tion of an International Trade Organization.
581
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
The objective of these proposals lies in the crea-
tion of a new trade organization of the type which
will make possible the strengthening of the eco-
nomic position of the U. S. A. in the capitalist
world."'
Why this spate of abuse of Ito? Why do the
Eussians use every means at their command to
sabotage the Eui'opean Kecovery Progi'am ? Be-
cause they fear and fight any measure which will
have the effect of strengthening and unifying the
non-Communist world. They fear and fight the
program I have described because to the extent
that it helps to establish stability and sound mar-
kets and fair rules of trade, as it will, so does it
also help to strengthen and unify the non-Com-
munist world to stand against the menace of an
alien ideology and to prove by the acid test of ac-
complishment that the way of the free nations is
the better way.
Position on Provisional Government of Israel
STATEMENT BY THE PRESIDENT
[Released to the press by the White House on October 24]
The Republican candidate for President has
seen fit to release a statement with reference to
Palestine. This statement is in the form of a
letter dated October 22, 1948, ten days before the
election.
I had hoped our foreign affairs could continue
to be handled on a nonpartisan basis without being
injected into the presidential campaign. The Re-
publican candidate's statement, however, makes
it necessary for me to reiterate my own position
with respect to Palestine.
I stand squarely on the provisions covering
Israel in the Democratic Platform.
I approved the provisions on Israel at the time
they were written. I reaffirm that approval now.
So that everyone may be familiar with my posi-
tion, I set out here the Democratic Platform on
Israel :
President Tniman, by granting immediate recognition
to Israel, led the world in extending friendsliip and wel-
come to a people who liave long sought an<l justly deserve
freedom and independence.
We pledge full recognition to the State of Israel. We
aiBrni our pride that the United States, under the lead-
ership of President Truman, played a leading role in the
adoption of the resolution of November 29, 1947, by the
United Nations General Assembly for the creation of a
Jewish state.
We approve the claims of the State of Israel to the
boundaries set forth in the United Nations' resolution
of November 21) and consider tliat modifications thereof
should be made only if fully acceptable to the State of
Israel.
We look forward to tlie admission of the State of Israel
to the United Nations and its full participation in the
international community of nations. We pledge appro-
priate aid to the State of Israel in developing its economy
and resources.
We favor the revision of the arms embargo to accord
to the State of Israel the right of self-defense. We pledge
ourselves to work for the modification of any resolution
of the United Nations to the extent that it may prevent
any such revision.
We continue to support, within the framework of the
United Nations, the internationalization of Jerusalenj and
the protection of the holy places in Palestine.
582
I wish to amplify the three portions of the plat-
form about which there have been considerable
discussion.
On May 14, 1948, this country recognized the
existence of the independent State of Israel. I
was informed by the Honorable Eliahu Epstein
that a Provisional Government had been estab-
lished in Israel. This country recognized the
Provisional Government as the de facto authority
of the new State of Israel. Wlien a permanent
government is elected in Israel it will promptly
be given de jure recognition.
The Democratic Platform states that we ap-
prove the claims of Israel to the boundaries set
forth in the United Nations' resolution of Novem-
ber 29, 1947, and consider that modifications
thereof should be made only if fully acceptable
to the State of Israel.
This has been and is now my position.
Proceedings are now taking place in the United
Nations looking toward an amicable settlement
of the conflicting positions of the parties in Pales-
tine. In the interests of peace this work must go
forward.
A plan has been submitted which provides a
basis for a renewed effort to bring about a peaceful
adjustment of differences. It is hoped that by
using this plan as a basis of negotiation, the con-
flicting claims of the parties can be settled.
With reference to the granting of a loan or
loans to the State of Israel, I have directed the
departments and agencies of the Executive Branch
of our Government to work together in expediting
the consideration of any applications for loans
which may be submitted by the State of Israel.
It is my hope that such financial aid will soon
be granted and that it will contribute substantially
to tlie long-term development and stability of the
Near East.
Department of Slate Bulletin
Brussels Proposals Not Received by United States
Actiiio: Secretary Lovett told his press confer-
ence on October 2Y, that if and when the signa-
tories to the Brussels pact submit North Atlantic
security proposals to the United States, such pro-
posals woukl be considered in the light of the
Vandenberg resolution adopted by the United
States Senate last June.
Mr. Lovett pointed out, however, that such a re-
quest had not been received here, but that if and
when it was received, it would be considered in
accordance with the guiding principles of the
Vandenberg resolution.
That resolution placed the Senate on record as
favoring "progressive development of regional
and other collective arrangements for individual
and collective self-defense in accordance with the
purposes, principles, and provisions of the
Charter'' and '"association of the United States, by
constitutional process, with such regional and
other collective arrangements as are based on con-
tinuous and effective self-help and mutual aid, and
as affect its national security."
It was in accordance with this resolution, Mr.
Lovett recalled, that exploratory talks were ini-
tiated in Washington July 6, between representa-
tives of the Brussels pact countries and the Depart-
ment of State.^
When the conversations were opened, the De-
partment of State described them as "concerning
problems of common interest" in relation to the
Vandenberg resolution. It was pointed out at
that time that no information concerning the sub-
stance of these exploratory talks would be made
public before decisions were reached.
These exploratory talks have been completed,
Secretary Lovett announced, and since they were
informal, no commitments were involved.
The spadework represented by these conversa-
tions, he added, would facilitate further negotia-
tions wlien they are opened. Congressional lead-
ers of both major United States political parties
were kei:»t informed during the conversations, Mr.
Lovett said.
He noted that the Washington conversations
covered a wide variety of subjects, including a
whole era of pacts, and mostly the methods by
which United States security and world peace
could best be obtained. The Acting Secretary
said he did not know who originated the idea of a
North xVtlantic pact, but that the idea of a North
Atlantic community of nations was an old one.
Further comment, Mr. Lovett told the reporters,
would have to await receipt by the United States
of proposals from the Brussels pact countries.
■ BinxETiN of July 18, 1948, p. 70.
November 7, 7948
The following is the telegraphic text of the
communique issued by the five Foreign Min-
isters at the conclusion of their meeting on
October 27:
The Foreign Ministers of the Five Signatory
Powers of the Brussels treaty met in Paris on the
25th and 26th of October, 1948, for the third regu-
lar .session of the Consultative Council.
After examining tlie decisions taken by the five
Defence Ministers at their meeting on 27-28 Septem-
ber 1948, including the setting up of the land, sea
and air command organization of Western Union,
the Council gave its approval to the principles gov-
erning the defence policy of the Five Powers which
are based on the Brussels treaty and on the Charter
of the United Nations.
The Council also made a preliminary study of the
question of North Atlantic security and the con-
versations on this sub.ject which took place in Wash-
ington during the summer.
This examination resulted in complete agreement
in the Council on the principle of a defensive pact
for the North Atlantic and on the next steps to be
taken in tins direction.
The Council approved the suggestions made by the
five Finance Jlinisters on the 7 October 1948. In
order to carry out these suggestions as rapidly as
possible the Council decided to set up a Committee
of Experts to study the financial and economic
questions rai.sed by the organization of the defence
(.)f Western Europe.
The Council next took note of the progress ac-
complished in the social and cultural fields, and
api>roved the reports submitted to it.
As regards the question of European unity, the
Council decided to set up a committee of representa-
tives chosen by the trovernments of the five signa-
tory powers of the treaty of Brussels, consisting
of five French, five United Kingdom, three Belgian,
three Netherlands, and two Luxembourg members.
The object of this committee, which will meet in
Paris, will be to consider and to report to govern-
ments on the steps to be taken toward securing a
greater measure of unity between European
countries.
To this end, the committee will take into con-
sideration all suggestions which have been or may
be put forward by governments or by private organi-
zations. In this connection it will examine the
Franco-Belgian suggestion for the convening of a
European Assembly and the British suggestion re-
lating to the establishment of a European Council
appointed by and responsible to governments for
the purpose of dealing with matters of common con-
cern. This committee will draw up a report for
submission to the Consultative Council at its next
meeting.
Finally, the Foreign Ministers proceeded to a full
exchange of views on various international prob-
lems, certain of which are now being con.sidered in
the United Nations Assembly and the Security
Council.
583
Reparations Program in Western Zones of Germany
THREE POWER STATEMENT '
Since the reparations programs covering the
three Western zones of Germany were published
in October and November 1947,- the European Ke-
covery Program has come into being and is now
vitally affecting the progress of recovery. The
Governments of France, the United Kingdom, and
the United States have therefore had under con-
sideration the desirability of insuring that the
reparations programs are still fully consonant
with the needs of European recovery. It has been
agreed by the three Governments that there is a
need to examine certain portions of the reparations
lists with a view to determining to what extent
some plants on those lists might better serve the
needs of European recovery if left in Germany
than if lemoved and re-erected elsewhere. Pur-
suant to section 115 (f) of the United States
Foreign Assistance Act, a preliminary review of
the lists has already been made by the United
States Government and a list of plants which re-
quire more detailed study has been drawn up.
The further review of these plants will be con-
ducted by the Industrial Advisory Committee of
the Economic Cooperation Administration main-
taining close touch with officials of the other two
Governments concerned, who will cooperate in
every way. It is hoped to complete this review
within a few weeks. Further plants will be made
available to the Inter- Allied Keparations Agency
for allocation as rapidly as possible while this
investigation is in progress.
The review is beuig conducted from the stand-
point of European economic recovery and not with
the object of bringing about any general read-
justment of the reparations programs. It is in-
tended by the Three Powers that subject to what-
ever deletions from the reparations lists may be
agreed as a result of this review the balance of the
reparations programs shall be brought to a speedy
conclusion.
The Struggle for Freedom in Greece
STATEMENT BY HENRY F. GRADY ^
American Ambassador to Greece
Eight years ago today, the entire world was
electrified by an event that has already gone down
as a landmark in history.
On that clay, the Greek people I'ose as one man
and cried "No !" to the powerful invader.
It was the first real check on the aggressive
might that had unleashed the second world war.
Greece has known little peace since that time.
Again today she is engaged in a trying struggle
against what honest men the world over recognize
as the force of evil. Call it militant Pan-Slavism,
call it Eed Totalitarianism, call it Neo-Fascism —
it is the same. It is the force of destruction,
of fanaticism, of chaos.
It is more than ironic that while the Greek
people — with the help of their fi-iends — are seek-
ing with every means to rebuild their country, to
achieve the long-sought peace, to join in the great
' Issiietl by tbe Department of State and the Economic
Cooperation Administration on Oct. 27, 1948, and released
to the press on the same date.
" Not here printed.
' Made in Athens on Oct. 28, 194S, and released to the
press in Washington on the same date.
and inspiring program of recovery which now
animates the rest of free Europe, that at this very
moment the enemy from within and without bends
every effort toward destruction and chaos.
The world may well admire the struggle which
the hard-pressed people of Greece are waging
again toward their freedom, and those who think
the struggle an easy one must be either naive or
ignorant of the facts. We who are here, we who
are on the spot helping the Greeks to retain their
nation and their liberty, heliaing them to remain
in the community of free nations, do not under-
estimate these difficulties, these tremendous ob-
stacles. We are sure that they will be overcome —
and overcome by the Greeks themselves.
On this great day, I would like to make but one
salute — to the Greeks who are waging this great
struggle; chiefly, of course, to those in actual com-
bat against their enemy, but also to all elements
in Greek life which are contributing to this great
national effort.
For again the Greeks are saying "No !" Again
they have made the hard choice. Again they have
chosen freedom.
584
Department of State Bulletin
Twenty-Fifth Anniversary of tlie
Republic of Turkey
Statement hy the President '
On the twenty-fifth anniversary of the found-
ing of the Repu'blic of Turkey, the people of the
United States join nie in extending cordial greet-
ings and best wishes to President Inonii and to the
people of Turkey.
The full significance of this anniversary could
hardly have been foreseen a quarter of a century
ago when tlie Turkish IJepublic was proclaimed.
In America, we were from the beginning filled
with admiration for the resolute struggle of the
Turkish nation to go forward under the indomi-
table leadership of Turkey's first President, Kemal
Atatiirk. We have watched with sympathetic
interest the profound social and cultural reforms
effected in two brief decades. We are happy that
the advancements of science in this air-travel age
have so reduced the distance between our two
countries that we no longer feel remotely sep-
arated. We are still happier that the decision
of the Turkish nation to continue the develop-
ment of democratic institutions and to further
safeguard hmnan rights and liberties is being cai"-
ried out at a time when these ideals — so dear to all
Americans — are being ruthlessly crushed and ob-
literated in many parts of the woi'ld.
The political independence and territorial in-
tegrity of Turkey are of great importance to the
security of the United States and of all freedom-
loving peoples. In conformity with the purposes
and principles of the Charter of the United Na-
tions, I recommended to the American Congress
on Marcli 12, 1947, the extension of assistance to
Turkey and to Greece. This program, as au-
thorized by the American Congress two and one-
lialf months later, has since been extended for a
second year — that is. through June 1949. The ef-
fective way in which Turkish and American
personnel are cooperating on this program is a
further, and most striking, example of the mutual
ties that bind our countries.
I am deeply grateful that during this troubled
postwar period the relations between the United
States and the Republic of Turkey, inspired by a
common ideal for the establishment of security
for all nations through just and lasting peace,
have been strengthened and consolidated.
Double Taxation Convention With
Belgium Signed
(Released to the press October 28]
On October 28, 1948, Robert A. Lovett, Acting
Secretary of State, and Baron Silvercruys, Bel-
gian Ambassador in Washington, signed a con-
vention between the United States and Belgium
November 7, T948
TH£ RECORD OF IHE WEEK
for the avoidance of double taxation and the pre-
vention of fiscal evasion with respect to taxes on
income.
The provisions of the convention are similar in
general to those contained in income-tax conven-
tions now in force between the United States and
tlie United Kingdom, Canada, France, and
Sweden.
The convention provides that instruments of
ratification shall be exchanged and that the con-
vention shall become effective on January 1 of the
year in which the exchange of such instruments
takes place.
Steps Taken To Repatriate
Mexican Workers
[Released to the press October 25]
On October 18 the Mexican Embassy presented
a note to the Department calling attention to cer-
tain irregularities which hud occurred in the vicin-
ity of El Paso in connection with the entry of a
large nuniber of Mexican farm workers and their
employment on farms in Texas and other western
States under conditions other than those prescribed
in the agricultural-workers agreement of Febru-
ary 21, 1948.
In a note dated October 22, the Department ex-
pressed its regret that this incident had occurred
and stated that measures had been taken to correct
the situation. The United States agreed to com-
mence prompt repatriation of the Mexican work-
ers who entered illegally, as required by article 29
of the agreement; to halt further illegal immi-
gration of Mexican farm workers; and to con-
tinue extending to Mexican workers legally in the
ITjiited States the advantages and conditions pro-
vided in the agreement.
The reply of the Mexican Embassy, dated Oc-
tober 23, accepts as satisfactory the American note
and states that the fulfilment of the commitments
set forth therein will bring the incident to a close.
Reaction in the Mexico City press to the Amer-
ican note, which was published in its entirety, was
highly favorable.
It is understood that the Immigration and Nat-
uralization Service has already begun to deport
to Mexico the workers who entered contrary to
the agreement.
Exchange of Notes Between the U. S. and Mexico
October 22, 191^
Sir : I refer further to your attentive note of
October 18, 1948, concerning irregidarities which
have occurred in the vicinity of El Paso in connec-
tion with the entry of certain Mexican farm work-
" Recorded by the Voice of America for delivery on the
occa.sion of the Turki.sh National Holiday, Oct. 29, 1048,
and released to the press on the same date.
585
THE RECORD Of THE WEEK
ers under conditions other than those established
by the exchange of notes of February 21, 1948.
An investigation of the circumstances of this
case confirms that the entry of these Mexican na-
tionals was indeed illegal and that they were not,
as required by Article 29 of the agreement, imme-
diately deported to Mexico. I deeply regret that
these irregularities have occurred.
I am ha'ppy to inform you at this time, however,
that orders have been issued that the Mexican na-
tionals who entered illegally be promptly returned
to Ciudad Juarez. Kepatriation of these workers
has already commenced.
Orders have already been issued to stop all fur-
ther illegal or clandestine immigration along the
border.
Nothing which has happened, of course, will m
any way affect the rights and privileges of the
Mexican nationals who are now legally m the
United States in fulfillment of contracts entered
into under the agreement. They will continue to
enjoy the immunities and prerogatives set forth
in the agreement and individual work contracts
and the existing satisfactory arrangements for
participation of Mexican consuls in discussions of
any misunderstandings which may arise will con-
tin'ue as in the past.
It is my sincere hope that the corrective measures
which have been described above and which will
be carried out to the best of my Government's
ability, will be found satisfactory to your Govern-
ment.
With sincere expressions of profound regret for
the serious instance of non-compliance which has
occurred, I take this opportunity to express my
Government's appreciation for the cooperation
Mexico has given in the past and which I hope will
continue in the future.
I avail myself [etc.] Kobeet A. 'Lo^^TT
Washington, D. C, October m, 1948
Mr. Secretary : I have the honor to acknowledge
receipt of Your Excellency's note of October 22
relative to the irregularities which occurred in the
vicinity of El Paso in connection with the entry
into the United States of Mexican agricultural
workers under conditions other than those ex-
pressed in the exchange of notes of February 21,
1948.
Upon instructions from my Government, I am
pleased to inform Your Excellency that it has
found satisfactory the statements made by the De-
partment of State, as well as the measures adopted
by the American authorities, measures the realiza-
tion of which, already commenced, brings an end
' For test of the decision, see Blixetin of Aug. 3, 1947.
p. 216. For Basic Initial Post-Surrender Directive to Su-
preme Commander for the Allied Powers for the Occupa-
tion and Control of Japan, see Documents and State
Papers of April 1948, p. 32.
586
to this lamentable incident, which has been re-
solved, as was to be expected, in the spirit of jus-
tice, good neighborliness and friendly cooperation
which has always governed relations between
Mexico and the United States.
I avail myself [etc.]
Rafael de La Colixa
Charge iVAifaires ad interim
U.S. Policy in Japan Founded on
FEC Basic Policy Decision
[Released to the press October 28]
With regard to the statement by the Soviet
Ambassador before the Far Eastern Commission
on October 28, which was given to the press, it
should be pointed out that General MacArthur, as
a top United States Commander, holds conferences
in Tokyo with high United States military officers
from time to time and these are purely routine
matters of sole concern to this Government.
With respect to the allegation that the former
Japanese naval base at Yokosuka is being con-
verted into a modern naval base, it may be stated
categorically that this is not true. This base has
beeifused from the beginning of the occupation by
the United States naval forces supporting the Su-
preme Commander for the Allied Powers m car-
rying out the objectives of the occupation— which
it is both necessary and proper for them to do.
Accordingly, the implication that the Far Eastern
Commission decision on the basic post-surrender
policy for Japan is being violated is wholly with-
out foundation.'
American National Red Cross Extends
Relief in Near East
[Released to the press October 24]
The American National Eed Cross has informed
the Department of State that it shares the con-
cern expressed by the Department for the health
and welfare of the victims of hostilities in the
Near East. Accordingly, the Red Cross has ap-
proved an extension of its disaster relief program
to help meet the present emergency in the Near
East. . , , •,
In addition to assistance which it has made avail-
able during recent months, the Red Cross will now
send to the Near East 3,000 blankets, 150,000 yards
of cotton cloth, 5,000 finished garments, 10,000
layette items, and 150,000 cakes of soap. On its
part the National Children's Fund of the Ameri-
can Junior Eed Cross will furnish 30,000 layette
items, educational supplies, and, contingent upon
subsequent determination of need, food for a chil-
dren's feeding program. This additional aid will
increase to approximately $700,000 the material
value of assistance which has been contributed by
the American Red Cross.
The American Red Cross has also announced its
Deparfmenf of Sfafe Bulletin
I
intention to fnrnish the services of three relief
experts to lielp observe the distribution of Ameri-
can Red Cross supplies and to coordinate Ameri-
can Red Cross activities with those of the League
of Red Cross Societies, the International Com-
mittee of the Red Cross, tlie United Nations, and
other orpanizations.
It is prepared also to consider additional re-
quests for relief supplies from its representatives
after they have arrived in the Near East and
have surveyeil tlie need for further assistance from
the American Red Cross.
THE DEPARTMENT
Functions of the Secretary of State in
National Election
[Released to the press October 29]
The Department of State on Monday, Novem-
ber 1, will take the first step in the series of duties
which fall to the Secretary of State in connection
with the election of President and Vice President.
Acting Secretary of State Robert A. Lovett will
send to the Governors of the 48 States a letter
outlining the procedvire laid down in the law for
the receipt and transmission by the Department
of Stat« to the Congress of certificates of the
appointment of the electors of the several states
and of the votes of the electors.
These ministerial duties are assigned to the
Secretary of State, who has been the channel for
communication between the Government of the
United States and the governments of the several
States on these Constitutional matters since the
law of March 1, 1792. The duties of the Secre-
tary of State have remained the same under vari-
ous revisions of the law, which in its present form
is Title 3. Chapter 1, of the United States Code,
enacted as recently as June 25, 1948.
The duties of the Secretary of State in con-
nection with the presidential election are to re-
ceive from the State authorities of those States
two certificates and to transmit them to the Con-
gress. These are :
1. Certificate of the appointment of electors of
President and Vice President from the executive
of each State as well as the list of all other candi-
dates for electors, with the number of votes re-
ceived by all of them. Copies of this certificate
will be transmitted to tlie Speaker of the House of
Representatives and the President j^ro tempore of
the Senate.
2. Certificate of the separate vote of electors of
each State for President and Vice President to be
taken on December 13. with the list of the electors
sent by the electors of each State. A copy of this
certificate is transmitted by the Secretary of State
to the President ]>ro tempore of the Senate, pend-
ing the joint session of the Congress to canvass
the vote on January 6, 1949.
November 7, ?948
The Secretary of State retains the original of
the certificate of the ascertainment of electors and
a copy of the vote of the electors as the official
public record for the National Archives.
PUBLICATIONS
Department of State
For sale hii the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printiiif/ Offlee. Wiisltinyton 25, D. C. Address requests
direct to the Superintendent of Documents, except in the
ease of free publications, which may he otitained from the
Department of State.
Establishment of Diplomatic Relations With the Union
of Soviet Socialist Republics. European and British Com-
monwealth Series 2 (new series). Reprint. Pub. 528.
22 pp. 104.
A literal print of the documents.
UNESCO and You. International Organization and
Conference .Series IV ; United Nations Educational, Scien-
tific and Cultural Organiz<ation 4. Reprint. Pub. 2904.
41 pp. lo<t.
Questions and answers on the bow, what, and why
of your share in UNESCO, together with a six-point
program for Individual action. Revised as of March
1, 1W8.
The Foreign Service of the United States. Department
and Foreign Service Series 1. Reprint. Pub. 2991.
81 pp. 2a(f.
Educational preparation for Foreign Service Officers
and entrance examinations.
Financial and Economic Relations. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 1757. Pub. 3221. 52 pp. 15<f.
Agreements and supjilementary exchanges of notes be-
twe<'n the United States and Ital.y — signed at Wash-
ington August 14, 1947; entered into force August
14, 1947.
Economic Cooperation With Norway Under Public Law
472 — 80th Congress. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1792. Pub. 3254. 53 pp. 15«S.
Agreement between the United States and Norway —
signed at Oslo July 3, 1948 ; entered into force July
3, 1048.
Documents & State Papers, September 1948. Vol. I. No.
0. Pub. 3284. G4 pp. 30(» a copy; $3, 12 issues.
A monthly periodical, supplementary to the Depart-
ment of .State BtrLLETiN, containing doctmieuts and
articles pertaining to international relations and
activities of the State Department and the Foreign
Service.
Diplomatic List. October 194S, Pub. 3310. 195 pp. 30«!
a copy; $3.25 a year domestic, $4.50 a year foreign.
Monthly list of foreign diplomatic representatives In
Washington, with their addresses.
World Confidence and the Reduction of Armed Forces:
The American Objective. International Organization and
Conference Series III, 18. Pub. 3319. 14 pp.
Remarks by Warren R. Austin, U. S. Delegate to the
Third Session of the General A.ssenibly, Paris, Octo-
ber 12, 1948.
587
The United Nations and Page
Specialized Agencies
U.S. Urges Acceptance of Draft Resolution
on Berlin Crisis. Statement by Philip C.
Jessup 572
U.N. Documeuts: A Selected Bibliography . 574
The U.S. in the U.N 575
General Policy
Position on Provisional Government of Israel.
Statement by the President 582
Brussels Proposals Not Received by U.S. . 583
The Struggle for Freedom in Greece. State-
ment by Henry F. Grady 584
Twenty-Fifth Anniversary of the Republic of
Turkey. Statement by the President . 585
Occupation Matters
Reparations Program in Western Zones of
Germany. Three Power Statement . . 584
U.S. Policy in Japan Founded on FEC Basic
Policy Decision 586
Economic Affairs
Sound International Trade Program: Its
Meaning for American Business. Ad-
dress by Paul H. Nitze 578
Economic Affairs — Continued Page
American National Red Cross Extends Relief
in Near East 586
Calendar of International Meetings . . 577
Treaty Information
Double Taxation Convention With Belgium
Signed 585
Steps Taken To Repatriate Mexican Workers.
Exchange of Notes Between the U.S. and
Mexico 585
International Information and
Cultural Affairs
The Voice of America. Article by Assistant
Secretary George V. Allen 567
The Department
Functions of the Secretary of State in Na-
tional Election 587
Publications
Department of State 587
N
>. s. oo>eiiiiEiiT Hiarma ofpicei ii48
tJAe/ ^ehoT^tT^te'yii/ /(w tnate^
ADOPTION OF ATOMIC ENERGY RESOLUTION •
Statement by Warren R. Austin ......••• 602
DISCUSSION OF GREEK PROBLEM • Statements by
John Foster Dulles 607
UNITED NATIONS ECONOMIC COOPERATION •
Article by Norman Burns ...•..••.•• 598
ORGANIZATION OF AMERICAN STATES %• Article
by George N. Monsma 591
For complete contents see back cover
Vol. XIX, No:
November 14, 1948
-t-res o^
„v*"Io.
%e Qe/icvy^ene ^ ^lale J3 111161111
Vol. XIX, No. 489 • Publication 3343
November 14, 1948
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents
tJ.S. Government Printing OfBce
Washington 26, D.O.
Price:
62 issues, domestic $5, foreign $7.26
Single copy, 15 cents
Published with the approval of the
Director of the Bureau of the Budget
Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
OF State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.
The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.
Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.
ORGANIZATION OF AMERICAN STATES
by George N. Monsnia
In the midst of the unsettled world conditions it
is heartening to remember that there is an associa-
tion of nations which has stood the test of almost
60 yeai-s of existence and today is stronger and more
virile than ever before. The Organization of
American States is the oldest organization of in-
dependent, sovereign nations in existence, although
it has been known by various names during these
years. The American Republics are a family of
nations, and, as in all families, there may be some
disagreements and misunderstandings from time
to time, but it is all in the family, and underneath
is the firm ground of family unity.
Before going further in a discussion of this sub-
ject, let us refresh our memories on the countries
comprising the Pan American family of nations.
Beginning with the United States and working
south, we have our neighbor, Mexico, which is the
only Latin American country having a common
border with us. Then the Central American coun-
tries— Guatemala, El Salvador, Honduras, Nica-
ragua, Costa Rica, and Panama. To the east, the
Caribbean countries — Cuba, Haiti, and the Do-
minican Republic. Moving south to the South
American Continent, we have along the north and
west coast Venezuela, Colombia, Ecuador, Peru,
and Chile. On the east are Brazil and Argentina,
with Uruguay and Paraguay in between, and Bo-
livia in the center of the continent.
Four languages are used in these 21 republics —
Portuguese in Brazil, French in Haiti, English in
the United States, and Spanish in the other
countries.
As the United States won its independence from
England under the leadership of George Wash-
ington, so the countries of Latin America gained
their independence from European powers under
such great leaders as Simon Bolivar and San
Martin.
United States Policy
It was early recognized in this country that the
interests of the American Republics are inexorably
tied together by geographic propinquity and com-
mon ideals, such as love of freedom and democratic
aspirations. The United States policy with re-
spect to the other American Republics has devel-
oped through the years in accordance with the ebb
and flow of national and international events of
history. The Monroe Doctrine of 1823 has been
a unilateral doctrine which says in effect that the
United States would consider it dangerous to its
security if European powers were to seize further
territory in or impose further jiolitical control over
any portions of this hemisphere. The Monroe Doc-
trine was a unilateral statement of United States
policy rather than an inter- American pronounce-
ment. The era of multilateral cooperative ar-
rangements between the American Republics such
as we have witnessed during the past 60 years
had not yet arrived.
The basic friendship between the nations of the
Americas weathered the frictions of our period of
"manifest destiny", when the United States was
expanded to the Pacific and when Texas and Cali-
fornia were added to the Union. This basic
friendship has survived in spite of the irritations
and frictions of the early part of the present cen-
tury, when the United States intervened from time
to time in the affairs of the other American
Republics.
The 1930's and 40's have been characterized by
November 14, 1948
591
an intensification and broadening of cooperation
with the other American Republics, with a result-
ant feeling of good neighborliness and good will.
Characteristics of the Inter-American System
If there is a key word for the inter-American
system, if there is a word that can summarize the
attributes of the system, that word is coopera-
tion— cooperation in all of our relations, political,
economic, and cultural. The inter- American sys-
tem possesses numerous characteristics, all of
which together form the pattern of cooperation.
One of these characteristics is solidarity. Inter-
American solidarity is revealed in numerous ways,
but perhaps in no sphere is it more strongly evi-
dent than in the field of common defense. In 1940
at the second meeting of Ministers of Foreign Af-
fairs, at Habana, when World War II had com-
menced in Europe, the American Republics agreed
that an attack by a non-American state upon an
American state would be considered an attack
against all the American Republics and that in the
event of such an attack, the American Republics
would consult, to agree upon measures that should
be taken. The month following Pearl Harbor, the
Foreign Ministers met in Rio de Janeiro to outline
cooperative measures, and the period of the war
was one of unprecedented cooperative activity
among the American Republics. The solidarity of
the otlier American Rejiublics in the matter of de-
fense was further implemented last year by the
signing of the treaty of Rio de Janeiro. In addi-
tion to enunciating the principle that an attack on
one of the American states is an attack on all, the
treaty provides that in case of an armed attack
by any state against one of the American states
within the geographic limits specified in the
treaty or within the territory of an American
state, the contracting parties are obligated to ren-
der immediate assistance, the nature of such assist-
ance to be determined by each state. The con-
tracting parties are also obligated to consult, in
order to determine what collective measures will
be required pf all. In the case of armed attacks
outside of the region defined in the treaty or out-
side the territory of the American Republics, and
in the case of aggression or situations that endan-
ger the peace of America anywhere in the world,
' Bulletin of Sept. 14, 1947, p. 505.
592
there is an obligation on the part of the contract-
ing parties to c.onsult for the purpose of deciding
which of the collective measures specified in the
Charter will be taken by all. Decisions on the
specified collective measures under the treaty will
be made by a vote of a two thirds majority and
will be binding on all states with the one excep-
tion that no state will be required to use armed
force without its consent.
The Rio treaty is a striking example pf the soli-
darity of the American Republics. Eleven nations
have already deposited their instruments of rati-
fication, and several others are now in the process
of ratifying the treaty. It is anticipated that the
necessary ratifications to bring the treaty into ef-
fect (two thirds of the signatory states) will be
deposited before long. The Rio treaty has been
characterized by Senator Vandenberg as ". . .
cheerful, encouraging and happy news in a cloudy,
war-weary world which is groping, amid constant
and multiple alarms, toward the hopes by which
men live. It is good for us. It is good for all our
neighbors. It is good for the world" .^
A second characteristic of the inter-American
system is the recognition and respect for the equal
sovereignty of each American nation. In inter-
American assemblies each country has one vote,
the small as well as the large. There is no attempt
of the larger nations to lord it over the smaller
ones. All members of the system are equally
sovereign.
Going hand in hand with the principle of equal
sovereignty is the principle of nonintervention,
which is a third characteristic of the inter- Amer-
ican system. The American Republics agreed at
Montevideo in 1933 that no state has the right to
intervene in the internal or external affairs of
another American Republic. The United States
scrupulously observes this commitment in its rela-
tions with the other American Republics. Inter-
vention has no place in a cooperative system, such
as the inter- American system.
Consultation is a fourth characteristic of the
system. The American Republics subscribe to the
principle that they should consult in regard to all
matters of mutual concern, and they have been
practicing such consultation for nearly 60 years on
an ever-increasing range of subjects. Consulta-
tion has had special significance in the inter- Amer-
ican system since 1936, when the principle of con-
Department of State Bulletin
sultation was given treaty form. Consultation
between sovereign equals is, of course, the very
antithesis of coercion by a powerful nation of
weaker neighbors.
A further characteristic of the system is the
desire of the American Republics to settle by
peaceful means any disputes which might arise
between them. The inter-American machinery
for peaceful settlement of disputes has its roots
in the Gondra treaty of 1923, which has been am-
plified and strengthened by subsequent agree-
ments.
The inter-American system places great em-
phasis on cooperation for the general welfare. It
is an accepted principle that cooperation among
all the states is necessary for the advancement and
Melfare of the peoples of the Americas. It is
important that there should be a satisfactory
standard of living in all the American Republics.
A standard of living compatible with the dignity
of human personality is imperative not only be-
cause of humanitarian considerations and socio-
logical principles but also because a community
or country which is constantly threatened by des-
titution and poverty becomes a fertile ground for
alien ideologies which may become a threat to the
security of the neighboring nations. On the other
hand, a community with a satisfactory standard
of living is the best insurance against the entrance
of totalitarianism; it is the best assurance of a
continuance of a democratic system.
The United States has cooperated whole-heart-
edly in such multilateral endeavors as the Pan
American Sanitary Bureau, which is the inter-
American health organization. It has also been
active in bilateral programs. Through the Insti-
tute of Inter- American Affairs, the United States
and other American Republics cooperate in health
and food-production programs. Through the In-
terdepartmental Committee on Scientific and Cixl-
tural Cooperation the United States cooperates
extensively in the scientific and technical field,
and in the exchange of students and specialists.
Cooperation among the American Republics for
the improvement of economic and social conditions
is a means for undergirding democracy in the
hemisphere.
A further characteristic of the inter-American
system is the support which it gives to the United
Nations as a regional arrangement under the
November 14, 1948
United Nations Charter. The United Nations
Charter provides that regional organizations shall
have a function in the peaceful settlement of dis-
putes and contemplates that regional arrange-
ments may have certain enforcement functions
under authority of the Security Council. The
American Republics are loyal in their support of
the world organization. They acknowledge that
cooperation between their American neighbors
does not preclude the necessity for cooperation on
a world-wide basis. At the same time, the Ameri-
can Republics recognize that world-wide coopera-
tion does not preclude the close and fruitful rela-
tionship which the American Republics have de-
veloped over the course of years. Very far from
being mutually exclusive, cooperation on a world-
wide basis and regional cooperation in the inter-
American system, supplement one another — the
regional cooperation giving support to world-
wide cooperation in the United Nations.
The American Republics have a long history of
cooperation in economic matters; in fact, the
present-day Pan American Union started as a com-
mercial bureau of the American Republics.
There is at present an Inter-American Economic
and Social Council. Economic cooperation has
its roots in economic interdependence. It is safe
to assume that the coffee you had for dinner today
was made from coffee grown in Brazil or one of
the other American Republics. Many other in-
stances of this kind could be mentioned. On the
other hand, many of the products of New Jersey
and other states of the Union find their way to
South America. Inter-American trade is impor-
tant to the American Republics. Many of the
other American Republics are in need of economic
development, for which they need tools and ma-
chinery. To purchase tools and machinery re-
quires foreign exchange. Problems of this kind
ai-e to be discussed at an Inter- American Economic
Conference in Buenos Aires in the spring of next
year.
Organization of the System
The characteristics of the inter-American sys-
tem find their expression in the organizational
set-up of the system. The agency with which
there is the greatest familiarity in the United
States is the Pan American Union. The Pan
American Union is the permanent organ of the
593
inter-American system which, of course, is far
more extensive than the Union itself.
The organization of the inter-American sys-
tem is depicted on the accompanying chart. The
title, "Organization of Ajnerican States", and the
subtitle, "The International Organization of the
21 American Republics established by the Charter
signed at the Ninth International Conference of
American States, Bogota, Colombia, 1948", appear
on this chart. Wliile the name, "Organization of
American States", was selected in Bogota in the
spring of this year, the organization or association
of American states itself dates back to the First
International Conference of American States held
in Washington in 1889-90. At this conference the
International Union of American Republics came
into being. The present Organization of Ameri-
can States is the lineal descendant, or perhaps it
would be more accurate to say, the reorganization
of the International Union of American Republics
of 1889-90.
One of the main purposes of the Bogota confer-
ence was to work on a reorganization of the inter-
American system. The system had experienced a
spontaneous growth from the days of its inception
and the need was quite generally felt for integi-a-
tion and coordination of the various inter- Ameri-
can organizations and agencies that had developed.
The Bogota conference prepared a charter for the
Organization of American States which provides
an integrated system for the various agencies of
the Organization.
The box at the top of the chart relates to the
Inter-American Conference. This is the supreme
organ of the Organization and decides the general
action and policies of the Organization. All mem-
ber states of the Organization are represented at
the Inter-American Conference and each state has
the right to one vote. The conference will meet
every five years in regular session ; however, spe-
cial sessions may be called with the approval of
two thirds of the governments. There have been
nine inter-American conferences of this type in
the past, beginning with the one in Washington
in 1889-90, the most recent one being at Bogota.
The straight line down from the Inter- Ameri-
can Conference leads to the Council of the Organi-
zation, which is the permanent executive body of
the Organization. The Council is composed of
one representative of each of the member states.
The Council meets at the Pan American Union
building in Washington at regular intervals — in
the past usually once a month, but in the future it
will probably meet twice a month. Many of the
countries are represented by a full-time represen-
tative, with the rank of Ambassador; others have
appointed their Ambassador to Washington to
serve as their representative on the Council. The
Council makes recommendations to the govern-
ments, to the Inter- American Conference, and to
the agencies of the system. It serves as a point of
coordination for the functioning of the whole sys-
tem, and promotes and facilitates collaboration
between the Organization of American States and
the United Nations and other international
agencies. ■
The straight line down from the Council of the
Organization, on the chart, leads to the Pan Ameri-
can Union. The picture in this box of the chart is
the Pan American Union building located on the {
corner of I7th Street and Constitution Avenue in '
Washington, D. C. Visitors in Washington find I
it very interesting and worthwhile to stop at the i
Pan American Union building and see the many
exhibits jjortraying the arts and industries of the
other American Republics, as well as the tropical
garden in the center of the building, and the beau-
tiful Hall of the Americas ; also the Council Room
where the Council of the Organization holds its
sessions and where the committees of the Council
meet.
The Pan American Union had its inception in
1890 when the First International Conference of
American States established it as the Commercial
Bureau of the American Republics. In 1910 its
name was changed to the Pan American Union.
The Pan American Union is the central and perma-
nent organ and general secretariat of the Organiza-
tion. As is indicated on the chart, it has five de-
partments— International Law and Organization,
Economic and Social Affaii's, Cultural Affairs, In-
formation, and Administrative Services. Through
these departments it promotes economic, social,
juridical, and cultural relations among the mem-
ber states. It also does preparatory work for in-
ter-American conferences and serves as secretariat
for the Council of the Organization and various
inter-American conferences. The work of the
Union has expanded to such an extent during the
years of its existence that it is using every avail-
594
Department of State Bulletin
ORGANIZATION OF AMERICAN STATES
The International Organization of the 21 American Republics established by the Charter
signed at the Ninth International Conference of American States, Bogotd, Colombia,l948.
TKE
INTER -AMERICAN CONFERENCE
Supremo Organ of the Organizotion
Decides generol action and policy
THE COUNCIL
OF THE ORGANIZATION
Permonent Executive Body ond
Provisionol Organ ot Consultation
INTER -AMERICAN
ECONOMIC
AND
SOCIAL COUNCIL
INTER-AMERICAN
COUNCIL
OF JURISTS
INTER-AMERICAN
JURIDICAL COMMITTEE
llllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
lllllllilllilllllllllllllllll
THE
PAN AMERICAN UNION
General Secretariat
ot ttie Organization
DEPARTMENT OF INTERNATIONAL
LAW AND ORGANIZATION
DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMIC
AND SOCIAL AFFAIRS
DEPARTMENT OF
CULTURAL AFFAIRS
DEPARTMENT OF
IN FORMATION
DEPARTMENT OF
ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
INTER-AMERICAN
CU LTU R A L
COUNCIL
COM M ITTEE FOR
CULTURAL ACT ION
The Directors of these Departments ore the
Executive Secretaries ot the respective CowKJh.
November 14, 1948
(Courtesy of the Pan American Union)
595
able bit of space in the Pan American Union build-
ing, as well as extra space obtained in other build-
ings in Washington. It is in urgent need of the
additional building which is being constructed at
the present time on Constitution Avenue between
18th and 19th Streets, just across' the street from
its present building.
At the top of the chart and to the left, is a circle
for the Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs. The Meeting of Foreign Minis-
ters considers problems of an urgent nature and
serves as the Organ of Consultation under the Rio
treaty. Any member state may request that a meet-
ing of consultation be called. When such a request
is made, the Council of the Organization decides
whether the meeting sliovdd be held. If an armed
attack occurs within the territory of an American
Republic or within the region specified in the Rio
treaty, the Chairman of the Council of the Organi-
zation must call a meeting of Foreign Ministers
immediately, at the same time calling a meeting of
the Council itself, which is to serve provisionally
as the Organ of Consultation.
Just below the circle on the chart for the Meet-
ing of Ministers of Foreign Affairs is a smaller
circle devoted to the Advisory Defense Committee.
The Advisory Defense Committee is composed of
the highest military authorities of the American
states participating in a Meeting of Foreign Min-
isters when it is acting as the Organ of Consulta-
tion. It is convoked under the same conditions as
the Organ of Consultation in order to advise the
Organ of Consultation on problems of military
cooperation that may arise in connection with the
application of treaties on collective security. The
Committee may also meet under certain other con-
ditions, for technical studies and reports on spe-
cific subjects.
On the right of the chart are also two circles —
the top circle, "Specialized Conferences", refers to
conferences of the American Republics which meet
to consider technical matters or to develop specific
aspects of inter-American cooperation. The eco-
nomic conference to be held in Buenos Aires next
spring is a conference of this type. These confer-
ences are called when the need for them is felt, or
pursuant to provisions in existing inter- American
agreements.
The smaller circle on the right deals with spe-
cialized organizations. These are inter-American
596
organizations which have been established by mu-
tual agreement and have functions with respect to
a given field of common interest to the American
states, such as health, transportation, commerce,
geography, and history. Agreements are to be en-
tered into between the Council and specialized or-
ganizations defining the relations that shall exist
between the respective agencies and the Organiza-
tion of American States.
On the lower part of the chart to either side of
the Pan American Union are boxes containing the
names of three Councils — The Inter-American
Economic and Social Council, the Inter- American
Council of Jurists, and the Inter-American Cul-
tural Council.
The first of these — the Inter-American Eco-
nomic and Social Council — is currently in exist-
ence and has been for several years. Its principal
purpose is the promotion of the economic and so-
cial welfare of the American nations through ef-
fective cooperation for the better utilization of
their natural resources, the development of their
agriculture, commerce, and industry, and the rais-
ing of the standards of living of their people. The
Inter-American Council of Jurists and the Inter-
American Cultural Council are new councils first
provided for in the chai'ter signed at Bogota, al-
though the Inter- American Juridical Committee,
the permanent committee of the Inter-American
Council of Jurists, is a continuation of the Juridi-
cal Committee which has been in existence for sev-
ei'al years in Rio de Janeiro. The Juridical Coun-
cil will serve as an advisory body on juridical
matters, will promote the development and codifi-
cation of international law, and will study the pos-
sibility of attaining uniformity in the legislation
of various American countries. The Cultural
Council will seek to promote free relations and
mutual understanding among the American peo-
ple in order to strengthen their educational,
scientific, and cultural ties and to promote and
coordinate activities in these fields. As in the
case of the Inter-American Economic and Social
Council, all of the American Republics will be
represented on the Juridical and Cultural Coun-
cils. The Council of the Organization has a com-
mittee at work at the present time which is
preparing for the actual establishment of the
Juridical and Cultural Councils.
The foregoing is a summary of the organization
of the inter-American system as contemplated by
Department of State Bulletin
the charter signed at Bogota. The charter is a
treat_v, and hence, will have to be ratified by the
Kepublic's in accordance with their respective con-
stitutional procedures. It will enter into force
among the ratifying states when two thirds of the
signatory states have deposited their ratifications.
However, since the charter is actually a reorgani-
zation of an existing system rather than a com-
pletel}^ new organization, and since all of the
American Republics signed the charter, the Bo-
gota conference felt that there was every reason
for placing the organizational set-up in eti'ect im-
mediately, so that the benefits of the reorganiza-
tion could be attained immediately, without hav-
ing to wait for the necessary 14 ratifications.
The Bogota conference, therefore, passed a reso-
lution which places the organizational set-up of
the charter in effect provisionally and also speci-
fies that the new organs provided for in the char-
ter shall be established on a provisional basis.
The inter- American system is a mighty bulwark
of solidarity in a turbulent world. Here equal
sovereignty is recognized, countries avoid inter-
vention in each other's internal affairs, but con-
sult on matters of mutual interest. Here we have
peaceful settlement of disputes and cooperation
for the general good. Such a system, such an or-
ganization of states, such a free community of
neighboring nations, is a tower of strength to the
United Nations and to the world.
Related Department of State Publications on the American Republics
The following publications may be secured from
the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printing Office, Washington 25, D.C.
Report of Delegation of United States to Inter-
American Conference on Problems of War and
Peace, Mexico City, Feb. 21-Mar. 8, 19i5. Con-
ference Series 85. Pub. 2497. 1946. 371 pp.
550.
Report on the work of the Conference, with ap-
pendixes, including the Final Act of the Con-
ference and draft resolutions presented to the
Conference.
Cultural Centers in the Other American Repub-
lics. By Dorothy Greene and Sherly Goodman
Esman, Department of State. Inter-American
Series [30]. Pub. 2503. 1946. 20 pp. 50.
An explanation of activities and studies in the
cultural centers established in the American
republics by local groups and U.S. nationals.
Sharing "Know-How" — An Inter-American
Achievement. Foreign Affairs Outline No.
14. Inter-American Series 34. Pub. 2949.
1947. 4 pp. Free.
Development of inter-American bilateral scien-
tific and cultural cooperation during and after
the war, effected principally through the Inter-
departmental Committee on Scientific and Cul-
tural Cooperation and the Institute of Inter-
American Affairs.
Cooperation in the Americas: Report of the In-
terdepartmental Committee on Scientific and
Cultural Cooperation, July 1946-June 1947.
International Information and Cultural Series
1. Pub. 2971. 1948. 146 pp. 400.
November 14, 7948
A discussion of the cooperative scientific and
technical projects, the exchange of persons,
and other cultural interchanges between the
Americas.
Inter-American Conference for the Maintenance
of Continental Peace and Security, Quitan-
dinha, Brazil, Aug. 15-Sept. 2, 1947: Report
of the Delegation of the United States of Amer-
ica. International Organization and Confer-
ence Series II, American Republics 1. Pub.
3016. 1948. 225 pp. 400.
A discussion of all phases of the Inter- American
Conference for the Maintenance of Continental
Peace and Security, with ample documentation.
Sovereignty and Interdependence in the New
World : Comments on the Inter- American Sys-
tem. Inter-American Series 35. Pub. 3054.
1948. 32 pp. Free.
An article by William Sanders describing vari-
ous phases of inter- American cooperation as it
has developed during the past 60 years.
Address by the Secretary of State Before the
Second Plenary Session of the Ninth Interna-
tional Conference of American States, Bogota,
Colombia, Apr. 1, 1948. International Organi-
zation and Conference Series II, American Re-
publics 2. Pub. 3139. 1948. 14 pp. Free.
Presenting the U.S. point of view on inter-
American cooperation and organization.
Significance of the Institute of Inter-American
Affairs in the Conduct of U.S. Foreign Policy.
Inter-American Series 36. Pub. 3239. 1948.
19 pp. 150.
A series of articles by Louis J. Halle, Jr., on
inter- American cooperation under the Institute
with emphasis on the fields of agriculture, educa-
tion, and health.
597
UNITED NATIONS ECONOIVIIC COOPERATION
by Norman Burns
Adviser, Office of International Trade Policy
In the midst of World War II, a commission of
the Federal Council of Churches proposed six pre-
requisites of "a just and durable peace". One of
those proposals relates directly to United Nations
economic cooperation. It reads as follows :
"The peace must make provision for bringing
within the scope of international agreement those
economic and financial acts of national govern-
ments which have widespread international re-
percussions."
The commission exjjlained its proposal in a brief
comment :
"Science", it said, "has made it possible for the
world to sustain a far greater population than was
formerly the case and to attain for that population
a high standard of living. But this involves a
large degree of transportation and interchange be-
tween one nation and another. Thus all people
are subject to grave risk, so long as any single gov-
ernment may, by unilateral action, disrupt the flow
of world trade. This is a form of anarchy that
creates widespread insecurity and breeds disorder.
It prompts nations to seek self-sufficiency for
themselves at the expense of others. We do not
here envisage, as presently practical, a condition
of 'free trade'. But the world does require that
the areas of economic interdependence be dealt
with in the interest of all concerned and that there
be international organization to promote this end."
Need for International Economic Cooperation
This trend of thought motivated the creation of
a postwar structure of international economic co-
operation. Thoughtful people had become con-
vinced of the economic interdependence of the
various countries. They had seen from their own
experience how unilateral action by each coinitry,
without adequate regard to the effect of its action
on other countries, had led to economic warfare
that "dried up" international trade in the 1920's
598
and 1930's. They had seen how the mishandling of
the world's economic problems in the interwar
years had created political instability that ren-
dered more difficult the task of maintaining the
peace. They knew that World War II had dis-
rupted world economic life far more than had the
first woi'ld war. The second world war had
lasted for a longer period of time and had de-
stroyed more life and more property over a wider
area of the globe than any previous war. Many
people realized that if our kind of world was to
survive this holocaust, the various countries would
have to cooperate in political and economic mat-
ters to achieve economic recovery as quickly as
possible.
Postwar Progress
Within the short space of three years, the United
Nations have created an operating mechanism for
international economic cooperation — something
they had not been able to do after the first world
war. At times the obstacles seemed almost insup-
erable. Yet when we consider the situation today
in relation to 1945, the accomplishment seems very
great indeed. Within three years after the first
world Mar, the United States experienced the se-
vere depression of 1921; and famine stalked
through many foreign lands. Today the United
States industrial production is two thirds above
that of prewar years ; agricultural jDroduction, one
third above. Canadian and Latin American pro-
duction is substantially higher than before the
war. By the end of 1947, nearly all the European
countries (except Germany) had reached or ex-
ceeded their prewar industrial output, according
to the latest annual report of the International
Fund. Western Germany's industrial output is
now 70 percent of the prewar level. Exports from
the 16 Western European countries iDarticipating
in the European Recovery Progi'am were 30 per-
cent greater in volume in 1947 than in 1946, and
the 1947 volume was only 10 to 15 percent less than
Department of State Bulletin
in 1938. The bread-grain production of Western
Europe in 1948 was about 12 percent below the
1938 vohime, according to the United States De-
partment of Agriculture.
The fact that emerges from these broad com-
parisons is that after the most devastating of all
wars and in the face of determined Communist
attempts to prolong the disruption of war-torn
countries, the non-Communist world had made
gi'eat strides toward economic recovery. The ma-
jor reason for the success thus far achieved lies in
the determination of the non-Communist world to
follow a course of international economic coopera-
tion. The United States has contributed in full
measure to such cooperation. Without United Na-
tions cooperation and United States assistance,
such recovery would not have been possible.
Instruments of U.N. Economic Cooperation
The United Nations economic structure consists
of the Economic and Social Council and the spe-
cialized agencies. The Economic and Social Coun-
cil serves as a forum for the discussion of all eco-
nomic and social matters pertinent to economic
stability and well-being as a basis for peace. It is
composed of 18 Member Countries elected by the
General Assembly for three-year terms. It has
been meeting twice a year (seven meetings to
date) , and its next meeting will be at Lake Success
in February 1949. The United States Representa-
tive on the Council is Willard L. Thorp, Assistant
Secretarj^ of State for economic affairs.
The authority of the Economic and Social Coun-
cil is confined to consultation, discussion, and rec-
ommendation; it has no coercive power. It may
make recommendations, on the basis of majority
vote, to the General Assembly, Member Govern-
ments, the specialized agencies, and, under certain
conditions, to the Security Council. It may con-
sider any kind of economic or social question
brought before it by Governments Members of the
United Nations, or, in certain cases, by nongovern-
mental organizations which have consultative
status with the Economic and Social Council. It
may deal with regional economic problems. It has
called conferences to deal with the conservation of
natural resources, freedom of the press, and the
establishment of the World Health Organization.
Its resolution of February 1946 proposed the call-
ing of an international trade conference to reduce
world-trade barriers and to expand world trade.
This resolution led to the 23-nation General Agi'ee-
ment on Tariffs and Trade, negotiated at Geneva
last year, and to the Havana Charter for an Inter-
national Trade Organization. The Economic and
Social Council is responsible, also, for coordinat-
ing the activities of specialized economic organi-
zations, such as the International Bank, the Inter-
national Fund, the Food and Agriculture Organi-
zation, the International Labor Organization, and
the proposed International Trade Organization.
The International Bank was created in 1945 to
make long-term loans for the reconstruction and
development of member countries. Its total capi-
tal amounts to 8,286 million dollars ; its resources
in terms of gold, dollars, and United States bonds
amount to one billion dollars. It has granted re-
construction loans amomiting to 525 million dol-
lars to France, the Netherlands, Denmark, Lux-
embourg, and Chile. According to a recent press
statement by John J. McCloy, president of the
Bank, the Bank may make further loans up to
478 million dollars within the next six months.
Securities have been sold in the United States
amounting to 250 million dollars, and Mr. McCloy
said that further issues are contemplated. Bank
securities are legally authorized investments for
institutional investors for all national banks, for
commercial banks in 41 States, for savings banks,
and insurance companies in 22 States, and for trust
funds in 28 States.
The International Monetary Fund, a sister or-
ganization of the Bank, was established to reduce
wide fluctuations in exchange rates between dif-
ferent currencies. It advises member countries
in the establishment of exchange rates; it serves
as a continuous forum for consultation on such
problems; it sends technical missions to member
countries, at their request, to help them put their
fiscal affairs in order; and it buys and sells for-
eign exchange. In the period from July 1, 1947,
to April 30, 1948, it bought 544 million dollars of
foreign currencies. Voting power in the Bank and
the Fund is based primarily upon the country's
participating capital. The United States has
33.65 percent of the Bank votes and 30.62 percent
of the Fund votes. The latest annual reports of
the Bank and the Fund contain excellent surveys
of the present world economic situation.
The Food and Agriculture Organization and the
November 14, 1948
599
International Labor Organization have special-
ized economic functions. The former makes rec-
ommendations on world supplies and requirements
of foodstuffs, the latter on world labor conditions.
Like the Bank and the Fund, each has a member-
ship of ajjproximately 50 countries. The Soviet
Union is not at present a member of any of these
agencies except the Economic and Social Council,
where it usually opposes the economic programs
of the non-Communist world. Finland, Poland,
Czechoslovakia, and Yugoslavia are members of
most of the specialized agencies.
The United Nations economic structure is now
virtually complete except for the establishment of
the proposed International Trade Organization.
During the Habana conference last spring, repre-
sentatives of 54 nations agreed upon a draft Char-
ter for an International Trade Organization.
This Charter will be submitted to the legislatures
of the various countries for ratification. It will
be submitted to the United States Congress prob-
ably early next year.
The Charter does two things: it establishes a
code ,of fair-trade rules that countries voluntarily
agree to follow in their trade with each other ; it
proposes an organization to implement the rules
of fair trade and to serve as a forum for the settle-
ment of trade disputes between members. The
Charter seeks to avoid the kind of economic war-
fare between countries that limited world trade in
the 1920's and 1930's.
The United States has actively sponsored this
project, through five years of international dis-
cussions and conferences, for the reason voiced m
the resolution of the Federal Council of Churches,
namely, that when governments are free to take
unilateral action to disrupt the flow of world trade,
the inevitable result is "anarchy that creates wide-
spread insecurity". Cordell Hull, then Congress-
man from Tennessee, proposed the creation of such
an organization during the first world war. His
resolution in the House of Representatives, April
23, 1917, proposed a "permanent international
trade agreement congress" to consider "all inter-
national trade methods, practices, and policies
which in their effects are reasonably calculated to
create dangerous and destructive commercial con-
troversies or bitter economic wars" and "to formu-
late treaty arrangements with respect thereto, de-
signed to eliminate, prevent, and avoid the inju-
rious results and dangerous possibilities of eco-
nomic warfare . . . ".
The Charter rules cover the whole range of in-
ternational trade relationships: tariffs, quotas,
subsidies, foreign exchange, customs formalities,
cartels, commodity agreements, nondiscrimina-
tion, and the international aspects of foreign in-
vestment, employment, and economic develop-
ment.
The basic principles of the Charter are simple.
Countries voluntarily agree t.o follow certain fair
rules of trade. If countries desire to take certain
actions, they must consult with each other. The
Charter rules represent commitments by govern-
ments to refrain from various governmental ac-
tions which they are now at full liberty to take,
that interfere with private trade. Thus the Char-
ter gives greater scope for the development of
trade on the basis of competitive rather than po-
litical considerations. This favors private enter-
prise.
One basic princii^le of the Charter is that coun-
tries should negotiate for the reciprocal reduction
of world-trade barriers. Substantial progress has
already been accomplished under the 23-nation
General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade nego-
tiated at Geneva last year. Under this agreement,
the 23 countries reduced tariff rates on some items
and bound tariff rates against increase on other
items for products accounting for over one half of
the world's total foreign trade. This was the most
comjDrehensive attempt ever undertaken to reduce
world-trade barriers. The general agreement is
already in effect for all the 23 countries except
Chile; it includes the United States, the British
EmjDire countries, France, Belgium, the Nether-
lands, China, and certain Latin American coun-
tries. Next Ajaril 11 more countries (Sweden,
Deninark, Finland, Italy, Greece, Peru, Uruguay,
Dominican Republic, Haiti, El Salvador, and Nica-
ragua) will negotiate with each other and with the
23 nations of the General Agreement for a fur-
ther reduction of world-trade barriers. The
United States will conduct its negotiations in ac-
cordance with the usual Reciprocal Trade Agree-
ments Act. The Soviet Union, although invited,
did not participate in either the trade agreement
or the Charter negotiations. The Soviet Union
has opposed the Charter. Mr. Arutiunian, speak-
ing for the Soviet Union before the Economic and
Social Council, August 11, 1948, claimed that the
600
Department of State Bulletin
International Trade Organization would "exert
pressure on countries practicing state-controlled
trade" and that it would "contribute to the domi-
nation by the U. S. A. of world markets".
The European Recovery Program is not an in-
tegral part of the United Nations structure, but it
complements United Nations economic coopera-
tion. The basic i-eason for the European Recovery
Program was that Western Europe, as a result of
war-dislocations, was unable to support itself. In
19-47, for example. Western Europe's dollar deficit
on current account upon the Western Hemisphere
amounted to 8 billion dollars, according to the In-
ternational Fund. The choice was either for the
United States to extend aid to help Europe restore
its economy quickly or for Europe to restrict its
imports to its means of payment. The latter
meant restriction of European consumption to a
point that would be perilous to the economic and
political stability of Western Europe. The United
States Congress, following a bipartisan policy,
voted 5 billion dollars for the European Recovery
Program in the 12- to 15-month period beginning
April 1948; one half of this amount has already
been authorized for procurement. Paul Hoffman,
Administrator of the progi-am, says that further
assistance will be needed until the summer of 1952,
at which time Western Europe will be on a self-
sustaining basis. But there is an "if" — if world
trading conditions are such as to permit an expan-
sion of world trade.
It is because of this "if" that the ultimate suc-
cess of the European Recovery Program is closely
associated with the United States trade program.
Europe cannot support itself without a flourishing
world trade, because the European economy is
built upon the procurement of raw materials in
some countries and the sale of manufactured prod-
ucts in other countries. The United States Con-
gress recognized this basic situation in the "Eco-
nomic Cooperation Act of 1948", which created the
European Recovery Program, when it required
under the act (section 115) that the United States
cooperate "with other participating countries in
facilitating and stimulating an increasing inter-
change of goods and services among the partici-
pating countries and with other countries and co-
operating to reduce barriers to trade among them-
selves and with other countries".
The International Bank, in its latest annual
report, also emphasizes that in the long run Euro-
November 14, J 948
pean recovery depends upon a large world trade.
It says in this respect :
"Unless the markets for European products can
be broadened and greater freedom of intra-Euro-
pean trade can be attained, the hope for ultimate
European recovery will be dimmed and the oppor-
tunity afforded by Erp will be lost. Trade bar-
riers in whatever form tend to breed productive
inefficiency. They enable inefficient and uneco-
nomic enterprises to survive and prevent efficient
producers from reaching the markets they need
to improve their efficiency and increase their pro-
duction."
Thus the Habana Charter for an International
Trade Organization and the world trade barrier
reduction program of the United States Govern-
ment— ^both of which are instruments to expand
world trade — complement the European Recovery
Program. The recovery progi-am is intended to
put Europe on its feet as quickly as possible; the
United States trade program and the Charter are
intended to establish trade conditions that will
enable Europe to stay on its feet after American
emergency financial aid comes to an end.
Conclusions
United Nations economic cooperation is now a
living reality. It is already functioning as re-
gards the non-Communist world. The United
States has contributed in full measure toward that
recovery, at great cost to the finances and resources
of this country. We did so because we knew that
with our support, the postwar world might re-
cover; without it, no one knew what the future
might hold forth. The real issue was faith in a
way of life.
The path of United Nations economic coopera-
tion has not been easy. One keystone in the struc-
ture— the International Trade Organization — has
not yet been established. In the United Nations
structure, precisely the same as in national govern-
ments, organizations tend to overlap each other.
In the United Nations structure, precisely as in
national governments, some people and some coun-
tries are more interested in words than in deeds.
In the United Nations negotiations, as in national
governments, there are conflicts and differences of
opinion. It is not always easy to make such or-
ganizations work effectively. The United Na-
tions economic organizations can work only if the
601
Member Governments want them to work. The
United Nations organizations were confronted
with postwar economic problems of appalling
magnitude. Communist strategy has been to pro-
long and aggravate these problems.
The problem of the future concerns the relation
of the democratic and the Communist world. In
this situation there are "pluses" for the democra-
cies. Partly as a by-product of the United Nations
activity, public opinion in each country under-
stands more clearly than ever before the nature
of the world's economic and political problems.
This is a plus in the balance. Another plus is
that the democratic countries, notwitlistanding all
difficulties, have shown that they can work to-
gether; they have actually achieved tremendous
progress toward world recovery. Another plus
is American leadership, which, in the future as in
the past, will count heavily in the balance of world
affairs.
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
Adoption of Atomic Energy Resolution
STATEMENT BY WARREN R. AUSTIN >
U.S. Delegate to the General Assembly
We have before us the resolution on atomic en-
ergy ^ adopted by more than a two-thirds vote at
the 165th meeting of the first committee on Octo-
ber 20, 1948.
The resolution approves the general findings
and recommendations of the first i-eport, and the
specific proposals of Part II of the second report
of the Atomic Energy Commission, as constitut-
ing the necessary basis for the control of atomic
energy to insure its use only for peaceful purposes,
and for the elimination from national armaments
of atomic weapons, in accordance with the tenus
of reference of the Atomic Energy Commission.
It requests the six powers who were the sponsors,
on the General Assembly, of the resolution which
resulted in setting up the Atomic Energy Commis-
sion, to consult in order to determine if there ex-
ists a basis for agreement. Meanwhile, it calls
upon the Atomic Energy Commission to resume
its sessions and to proceed with the further study
of such of the subjects remaining in its program
of work as it considers to be practicable and useful.
The United States voted for this resolution in
' Made before the Plenary Session of the General As-
sembly in Paris on Nov. 3, 1948, and released to the press
on the same date.
' See p. 606.
» BULLETIN of Oct. 31, 1948, p. 539.
602
Committee I.^ It will vote for it in this plenary
session. In doing so, it is carrying out the commit-
ment which it made to turn over its atomic weap-
ons, its plants, and all its knowledge in this field,
to an international agency in order that atomic
weapons might be forever prohibited, and that
peaceful uses of atomic energy might be success-
fully developed. To this commitment, it attached
only one condition, namely: that a system of safe-
guards should be set up, such that, when the
United States disposed of its atomic weapons, it
would not be possible for any other nation to make
or use atomic energy for destructive purposes.
We believe that the general principles and spe-
cific proposals of the Atomic Energy Commission,
which have been developed after long discussion,
and with such painstaking care, meet this condi-
tion. Many alternatives have been considered but
none has been found which would contain equal
guaranty of security to all nations.
In this matter, the interest of the United States
is no different from the interest of any other coun-
try. Any weakness in the plan of control which
would allow a possibility of a new threat of atomic
weapons anywhere in the world after the sign-
ing of the treaty, would be disastrous to peace and
security. There is no nation, great or small, which
would be willing to envisage such a possibility.
Department of State Bulletin
We firmly believe that the Soviet Union, when it
has fully coiisitlered all aspects of this situation,
and is read}* to enter into a treaty for control and
prohibition, will demand, as do all other nations, a
phin wliich embodies every possible safeguard.
When that time comes, it seems likely that the
Soviet Union Mill itself insist on the safeguards
embodied in this very plan, which they now so
bitterly oppose.
The resolution before us also calls upon the six
sponsors of the General Assembly resolution of
January 24, 194('>,' who are the permanent members
of the Atomic Energy Commission, to meet to-
gether and consult in order to determine if there
exists a basis for agi-eement on the international
control of atomic energy to insure its use only for
peaceful purposes, and for the elimination from
national armaments of atomic weapons. The
United States shares the view of the majority of
the nations members of the Atomic Energy Com-
mission, as expressed in the Commission's third
report,' that such consultations are necessary. The
impasse in the Atomic Energy Commission is
basically due, not to differences in the technical
details of the plan, but to the refusal of the Soviet
Union to accept, in the words of the third report:
"The nature and extent of participation in the
world community required of all nations in this
field." It is the desire of the United States that
these consultations should be at a high level and
principally concerned with the cause of the Soviet
Union's finding itself at present unwilling or un-
able to take a cooperative part with other nations
in the necessary measures for the maintenance of
peace.
We do not assume that at the very first con-
sultation the great difficulties which separate the
Soviet Union from the countries of the Western
world will be immediately resolved. But we be-
lieve that the time is appropriate for consulta-
tion on these matters. We do very seriously hope
that quiet and mature discussion in an atmosphere
of intelligent deliberation may make for progi'ess
in mutual understanding, and pave the way for
ultimate solutiojis. We believe that the terrible
problem of atomic energy would provide a frame-
work which would keep constantly before the con-
sulting powers the urgent necessity for agreement
on measures which would resolve present difficid-
ties, and which would lift from the hearts of na-
tions the overshadowing fear of atomic warfare.
As an additional step towards attaining this
great objective, the General Assembly in this reso-
lution calls upon the Atomic Energy Commission
to resume its sessions, to survey its program of
work, and to proceed to the further study of such
of the subjects remaining in the progi'am of work
as it considers to be practicable and useful.
After the experience of the past two years in the
Atomic Energy Commission, the United States had
November 74, 7948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
about reached the conclusion that no further con-
crete advance could be made in the Atomic Energy
Connnission itself until some agreement had been
reached on the basic barriers to immediate accept-
ance of a plan of prohibition coupled with effec-
tive control. The attitude of the United States in
this respect was shared by the nine majority mem-
bers of the Atomic Energy Commission when they
voted for the third report. However, in the debate
in Committee I, the Delegates of Syria, of Aus-
tralia, and of India urged that the work of the
Commission be continued in one or another form.
This feeling was expressed by many other dele-
gates, and the United States concurred. We say
now to the General Assembly that we loyally par-
ticipate in the request it is making upon the
Atomic Energy Commission to resume its sessions,
that we will earnestly proceed to the survey of the
program of work of the Commission, and to the
further study of such of the subjects remaining in
the program of work as the Commission, in its dis-
cretion, considers to be practicable and useful.
The United States will do its share to carry out
this mandate of the General Assembly in such a
way as to advance, by every possible means,
toward our common goal of control, and elimina-
tion from national armaments, of this dangerous
weapon.
In making this promise, we are continuing a
policy to which the people of the United States
have been committed since the beginning of the
Atomic Age. On October 27, 1945, the President
of the United States, in his Navy Day address, re-
affirmed the fundamentals of the United States
foreign policy in the new frame of reference of the
atomic bomb. In effect, he told the world that we
hold the bomb and our knowledge of atomic energy
as a "sacred trust", and that in no way did our
possession of such a weapon constitute a threat to
any nation, or make a departure from our basic
foreign policy.
By the end of the first year of the Atomic Age,
the United States had initiated action that :
Led to the creation of the mechanisms for inter-
national consideration of atomic controls;
Devised a detailed plan for the world control of
nuclear energy under an International Atomic De-
velopment Authority representing all of the
United Nations;
Adopted by Act of Congress a strict national
control of all fissionable materials under a civilian
commission ;
Released radioactive materials (isotopes) for
medical, biologic, and scientific research, and
Through its representative to the newly created
' Bulletin of Feb. 10, 1940. p. 198.
' Department of State publication 3179.
603
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGENCIES
United Nations Atomic Energy Commission had
proposed a plan for the international control of
atomic energy.
A notable part of this record is the public policy
declared in the Atomic Energy Act of lOie.*^
That carefully considered legislation primarily
relates to domestic control. However, in the
evolution of policy declared by that act the mag-
nitude and complexity of the task to be met in
international planning and intergovernmental
collaboration, was discovered. Therefore, both
national and international policies of atomic-
energy control were brought close together in the
technical study and political discussion which re-
sulted in the Act. Consequently, we find that this
law, devoted to domestic administration, provided,
in part, in the very first section :
Purpose of Act. It is the purpose of this act to effec-
tuate the policies set out in Section 1. (a) By providing,
among others, for the following major programs relating
to atomic energy.
(2) A program for the control of scientific and tech-
nical information which will permit the dissemination of
such information to encourage scientific progress, and
for the sharing on a reciprocal basis of information con-
cerning the practical industrial application of atomic
energy as soon as effective and enforceable safeguards
against its use for destructive purposes can be devised,
(5) A program of administration which will be con-
sistent with the foregoing policies and with international
arrangements made by the United States, and which will
enable the Congress to be currently informed so as to take
further legislative action as may hereafter be appropriate.
In Section 8 of the same act we find this p^o-
vision :
Any provision of this Act or any action of the Commission
to the extent that it conflicts with the provisions of any
international arrangement made after the date of enact-
ment of this Act shall be deemed to be of no further
force or effect.
In the performance of its functions under this Act, the
Commission shall give maximum elfect to the policies
contained in any such international arrangement.
The declarations of the Atomic Energy Act of
1946 show clearly the intentions of the American
people with respect to the relationship between
domestic and international control of atomic
energy.
More recently, on June 11, 1948, the Senate of
the United States set forth as one of the objec-
tives which the United States Government is par-
ticularly to pursue, the following :
"Maximum efforts to obtain agreement among
member nations upon universal regulation and
reduction of armaments under adequate and de-
pendable guaranty against violations."
International control of atomic energy was con-
sidered "the immediately crucial aspect of the
entire problem of armaments".
' S. Rept. 1211, 79th Cong, (the McMahon bill).
604
These declarations are important because they
represent the will of the American people ex-
pressed by the Congress elected by them. They
provide a clear and continuing mandate for the
carrying out of American policy as established by
the people.
In this brief sketch of early policy development
the General Assembly may perceive the relation
to world safety of the principles and policies con-
tained in the proposed resolution.
In the first meeting of the Atomic Energy Com-
mission, the United States suggested certain prin-
ciples which might be used by the Commission as
a basis for its studies. . During the almost three
years which have followed, other nations have
made important contributions to these principles.
Notably, there have been contributed the pro-
posal that quotas representing the proportion of
nuclear fuel which would be assigned to each na-
tion for peaceful purposes, should be written into
the treaty, and not left to the arbitrary decisions
of the international agency; and, further, the
principle that upon the signing of the treaty, pro-
duction of nuclear fuel should be kept to a mini-
mum necessitated by actual beneficial uses. These
new principles were accepted by the United States,
the first, because it dispelled the charge that the
international agency would be armed with arbi-
trary powers by which it might interfere with the
economic life of other nations, and the second, be-
cause it enormously increases the security of the
world during that considerable period of time
which may elapse before atomic energy finds its
proper place in the world economy for the produc-
tion of power.
The debate in the first committee was concerned
almost entirely with the removal of the threat of
atomic war. We feel that the debate on this reso-
lution would not be complete unless the Assem-
bly gives consideration to the other vital purpose
laid down by the General Assembly in giving the
Atomic Energy Commission its terms of reference,
namely, the development of atomic energy for
peaceful purposes.
The products of nuclear fission can be employed
in nondangerous quantities over a wide range of
scientific activities, from which we may hope for
considerable benefits to mankind. Indeed, benefits
of this sort are already being attained, in part
through the distribution by the United States of
isotopes produced in its plants and laboratories
and made available to all nations who are willing
to publish the results of their work. But the great
field of advance lies in the possibility that large,
and, thus unfortunately, dangerous quantities of
nuclear fuel may be used to produce electricity for
power, and thus open a new era of well-being to
vast numbers of people to whom other power re-
sources are not available. Scientists tell us that
it may take from 10 to 50 years before power from
Deparfment of Sfate BuUefin
nuclear fission can be produced on a basis to com-
jjete, even in a remote region with power produced
from other fuels. The length of time which will
be required for this great peacetime achievement
of science will depend, to a large degree, upon the
free world-wide exchange of information in this
field.
At the present time, progress is being made
slowly by individual nations, limited in their re-
sources and forced to throw over their work a veil
of secrecy which prevents their receiving the help
of scientists from other countries.
Under the proposals now put forward by the
United Nations Atomic Energy Commission,
which are before you for approval, this situation
would be very rapidly improved.
In the plan of the Commission, it is proposed
that scientific research with nondangerous quan-
tities of atomic materials would be carried on
under license in national and private laboratories.
The atomic materials used or produced would be
owned by the agency. The purpose of the license
would be to insure that dangerous quantities were
not involved, that atomic weapons were not devel-
oped, and that all information on the research
and its results were immediately reported to the
agency so that it could be freely interchanged and
made public. There would be no other restrictions
on scientific research with nondangerous quan-
tities of material.
Thus, research in beneficial uses would not be
confined to agency laboratories. The conduct of
such research by nations and individuals would be
promoted and encouraged by the agency which
would be authorized to make available personnel,
materials, facilities, and funds for these purposes.
By such assistance and by publishing all informa-
tion relating to atomic energy the agency would
facilitate international cooperation among scien-
tists and would give an immediate and enormous
impetus to scientific research.
After the establishment of international control,
important peaceful benefits of atomic energy
would be available to all participating nations.
The most immediate of these beneficial applica-
tions is in the field of biology and medicine. A
possible future application is in the development
of atomic power. There are many scientific, tech-
nical, and engineering problems to be solved before
atomic power can become a practical reality.
There are also questions of economic feasibility
which need to be answered. To solve these prob-
lems and answer these questions, the international
agency would promote i-esearch and development
on atomic power in its own laboratories and in
national and private laboratories.
Whenever experimental work on power under-
taken by a nation reaches a point at which further
development would require the use of atomic mate-
rials in dangerous quantities, the agency itself
unequivocal terms. The General Assembly now
November 14, 1948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZBD AGENCIES
would take over such a development in cooperation
and agreement with the nation concerned, and
carry forward the work provided the agency
deemed it to be consistent with the general require-
ments of security. Experimental or pilot plants
would be set up, owned and operated by the agency
in several countries, and the experimental and de-
velopment work done in those plants would be
carried on with the help of scientists and engineers
from many countries. All of the results of such
experimental developments would be freely cir-
culated and published. There would thus be every
prospect for an enormous acceleration of this im-
portant work which holds so much hope for man-
kind.
When and if the time comes that atomic energy
can be used to produce power on an economical
basis, the international agency would, subject to
the requirements of security, make such power
available at the request of any nation ready to
enter into appropriate agreements. Thus all na-
tions, with the minimum of interference in their
economic affaii-s, would enjoy the benefits and the
positive advantages that would arise from the co-
operative development of atomic energy and the
sharing of information, facilities, and personnel.
We know of no way other than the method of
an international agency as now proposed, by which
mankind could hope so soon to derive these full
and important peacetime benefits. Until such a
plan is adopted, the secrecy required to protect not
one nation but all nations against the clandestine
acquisition and ownership of atomic weapons will
remain. This secrecy inevitably acts as a delaying
factor in the advance towards the constructive use
of atomic energy.
We have touched on this matter here because
while this plan and proposal of the Atomic Energy
Commission has as its negative side the necessity of
controlling atomic weapons and prohibiting their
use, it has on its positive side a great constructive
purpose which can be fully attained in no other
way.
Since August 8, 1945, the United States has con-
sistently maintained the view that atomic weapons
must be removed from national armaments. For
over three years, the United States has worked
toward that end. This has been, and still remains,
our consistent purpose. Our offer still stands.
The United Nations Atomic Energy Commission
has labored arduously to set forth in a single plan
those two great objectives of the General Assem-
bly, which were laid down in the terms of reference
to the Commission.
We believe that the General Assembly is now at
the point of taking a critical step towards the im-
plementation of the work of the Commission.
^Miat is needed is that the mandate of the Gen-
eral Assembly should be expressed in clear and
605
THE UNITBD NATIONS AND SPECIALIZBD AGENCIES
unequivocal terms. The General Assembly has an
opportunity to approve this resolution by the
vote of an overwhelming majority of its members.
In doing so, the Assembly would add to the opin-
ion of its Atomic Energy Commission the moral
power of its carefully considered judgment. It
would provide a new lever by which new forces
of cooperation could be activated. It would stim-
ulate the faith of uncounted millions of anxious
Ijeople that the United Nations can and will per-
severe, however complex the differences, to the
pacific solution.
Resolution on Reports of the Atomic Energy Commission ^
The General Assembly,
Having examined the first, second and third
reports of the Atomic Energy Commission which
have been transmitted to it by the Security Council
in accordance with the terms of General Assembly
resolution 1 (I) of 24 January 1946,
1. Approves the General Findings (part II C)
and Eecommendations (part III) of the first re-
port and the Specific Proposals of part II of the
second report of the Commission as constituting
the necessary basis for establishing an effective sys-
tem of international control of atomic energy to
ensure its use only for peaceful purposes and for
the elimination from national armaments of
atomic weapons in accordance with the terms of
reference of the Atomic Energy Commission ;
2. Expresses its deep concern at the impasse
which has been reached in the work of the Atomic
Energy Commission as shown in its third report
and regrets that unanimous agreement has not yet
been reached ;
3. Requests the six sponsors of the General As-
sembly resolution of 24 January 1946, which are
the permanent members of the Atomic Energy
Commission, to meet together and consult in order
to determine if there exists a basis for agreement
on the international control of atomic energy to
ensure its use only for peaceful purposes and for
the elimination from national armaments of
atomic weapons, and to report to the General As-
sembly the results of their consultation not later
than its next regular session :
4. Meanwhile,
The General Assembly,
(JaUs upon the Atomic Energy Commission to
resume its sessions, to survey its programme of
work, and to proceed to the further study of such
of the subjects remaining in the programme of
work as it considers to be practicable and useful.
Current United Nations Documents: A Selected Bibliography'
Trusteeship Council
Report of the Drafting Committee on the Report on the
Administration of New Guinea for the Year 1 July
1946 to 30 June 1947. 17202, July 29, 1948. 19
pp. mimeo.
" Contained in U.N. doc. A/690, Oct. 23, 1948. Adopted by
the First Committee on Oct. 20, 1948.
^ Printed materials may be secured in the United States
from the International Documents Service, Columbia
University Press, 2960 Broadway, New York City. Other
materials (mimeographed or processed documents) may
be consulted at certain designated libraries in the Unitecl
States.
Report on the Adniiinstration of Tanganyika for 1947.
T/204, July 30, 1948. 42 pp. mimeo.
Report on the Administration of South West Africa
for 1946. T/209, August 2, 1948. 10 pp. mimeo.
Non-Self-Governing Territories. Summaries and analysis
of information transmitted to the Secretary-General
during 1947. vii, 509 pp. printed. $4.00.
Atomic Energy Commission
An Internatiunal Biljliography on Atomic Energy.
Scientific Aspects. Volume II. Part III — The
Biological and Medical Effects of High Energy Radia-
tion. Part IV — Isotopes in Biology and Medicine.
(Preliminary Edition). AEC/INF/9, September 17,
1948. mimeo.
606
Department of State Bulletin
Discussion of Greek Problem
STATEMENTS BY JOHN FOSTER DULLES IN COMMITTEE I'
U.S. Delegate to the General Assembly
Continuation of Ballon Commission
We now deal with the substance of the agenda
item: ''Threat to the political independence and
territorial integrity of Greece". Unfortunately,
the threat to Greece is not an isolated fact.
Kather it is part of a larger problem, many phases
of which come before the United Nations.
In Greece, Communists are attempting to over-
throw the Government by violence, and in this
effort they are receiving aid from other countries
that are already Communist controlled. This vio-
lent effort to establish in Greece a Communist gov-
ernment is but part of a general effort to extend
the power of Soviet Communism throughout the
world. The Security Council has been consider-
ing another jDhase of this problem as it dealt with
the coercive measures being taken by the Soviet
Union to extend its power over all Berlin. This
Assembly will deal with another phase when we
take up the agenda item of Korea. Wlierever one
looks, whether it be to Europe, Africa, Asia, or
the Americas, there is apparent the same pattern
of effort — namely the incitement, from without, of
coercion, fear, and violence within to achieve inter-
national political objectives. The manifestations
of this effort differ only as they are adjusted to
meet local situations.
There is nothing surprising about this uniform-
ity, for it reflects what Communists throughout
the world have been consistently taught and what
tliey are being taught today. The Soviet, tliey are
told, will not be safe until the non-Communist
nations have been so reduced in strength and num-
bers that Communist influence is dominant
throughout the world, and that, in such efforts,
the Soviet Communist Party is the "vanguard",
the "shock-brigade" of the world proletariat. It
is furthermore taught that this result cannot be
achieved by peaceful reform but only by metliods
of revolution. Therefore, when througliout the
world, Communists seek to weaken and overthrow
non-Communist governments and use force, coer-
cion, and terrorism, they are only doing what their
foreign leaders have taught them to do.
Of course, under the Charter of the United
Nations, men are entitled to follow the dictates
of their conscience and their reason, and to
November 14, ?948
attempt, by example and persuasion, to bring
others to share their beliefs. That, we believe, is
a human right and fundamental freedom that the
Charter consecrates. But, and this is the essen-
tial, the Charter does not countenance using vio-
lence to achieve international ends. Article 2 (4)
binds all the Members broadly to "refrain in their
international relations from the threat or use of
force". This does not mean that the Charter
attempts to freeze the stattu^ quo. On the con-
trary, throughout its preamble and its articles runs
the theme of a changing world, a world in which
there is "social progress and better standards of
life in larger freedom". (Preamble.) Article 14
gives this General Assembly the authority to "rec-
ommend measures for the peaceful adjustment of
any situation regardless of origin, which it deems
likely to impair the general welfare or friendly
relations among nations". But such adjustment
must be "peaceful".
There is thus a basic contradiction between the
Charter theory of peaceful change, by evolution,
and the Communist doctrine of violent change, by
revolution. And it is because Soviet Communism
teaclies and practices the use of violence that the
United Nations has found it impossible, as yet, to
relieve the peoples of the world from the heavy
burden of armament and the even heavier burden
of fear.
So long as Soviet Conununisra does preach and
practice revolution as a means to destroy the social
order elsewhere and to achieve world-wide politi-
cal ambitions, many are bound to wonder whether
the Communist Governments signed the United
Nations Charter with integrity of purpose. The
United Nations is, however, faced with that prac-
tical situation. Under the circumstances, it must
do what it can to check the threat and use of vio-
lence and thereby to remove the pall of fear which
overhangs the world. Its mean to this end are
inadequate. "Action" is a primary responsibility
of the Security Council, and in the "Security Coun-
cil the Government of Soviet Kussia wields a
power of veto. That, indeed, is why this Balkan
'Made on Oct. 26 and Nov. 5, 1948, respectively, and
rclea.sed to the press on the same date.
607
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECMl/ZED AGENCIES
affair is before the Assembly. The Soviet Union,
by its veto last year, made the Security Council
impotent to deal with it.
The Assembly has, however, great possibilities
if they are properly understood and fully used.
The Assembly can expose the facts and by so doing
can build up a moral judgment so widespread and
so weighty that no nation will igiiore it. Marshal
Stalin said of the League of Nations that "despite
its weakness the League might nevertheless serve
as a place where aggressors can be exposed". He
put his finger on a great power — the power of
exposure. It does not work with precision or with
immediacy, but it is, in the long run, a power to
which all are sensitive for histoi-y has proved that
those who flout it pay, some day, a heavy penalty.
So, in a world where some nations believe in
methods of violence, this Assembly must set itself
the hard task of exposing every such manifesta-
tion and gradually developing a world opinion so
condemnatory of such methods, so disposed to
suppress them, that violent methods will gradually
fall into disuse as ineffectual and dangerous to
those who employ them. Then at last we shall
have a world in which, despite differences, men
will, in the words of the Charter, "practice toler-
ance and live together in peace with one another
as good neighbors".
Greece is a case in point. Last year this Assem-
bly established a Special Committee on the
Balkans, composed of eleven Member States and
charged with two main functions : To be available
to assist Greece and its three northern neighbors
to settle their differences amicably if, happily,
their mood should make this possible and, sec-
ondly, to inform the United Nations and, through
it, the world, regarding the conditions along the
northern Greek frontier.
Unfortunately, the Committee was unable to
perform its first function, for Albania, Bulgaria
and Yugoslavia refused to cooperate with the
Committee. However, the unanimous factual
conclusions of that Committee are now before this
Assembly and these facts ought to be studied and
proclaimed so that all will know.
On the basis of 86 first-hand observation reports,
and through the testimony of more than 700 wit-
nesses, the Committee has found unanimously
that '—
The Greek guerrillas fighting against the Greek
Government have received large aid and assistance
from Albania, Bulgaria, and Yugoslavia and have
been furnished war material and other supplies
from those countries. Great quantities of ai-ms,
ammunition, and other military stores have come
across the border to Greek guerrillas, notably dur-
ing times of heavy fighting.
' See Documents and State Papers, September 1948.
608
The territory of Albania, Bulgaria, and Yugo-
slavia has frequently been used as a base of mili-
tary operations, and the guerrillas have frequently
moved at will across the frontiers for tactical rea-
sons. When the guerrillas are pinned against the
frontier, they fall back across it, using it as pro-
tection, and then reappear elsewhere.
Thus in essence an international border be-
comes a weapon of aggression against those who
respect it.
The i-eports of the Conunittee are replete with
concrete instances of the actual use of Yugoslav,
Albanian, and Bulgarian territory. For example :
On March 1, 1948, there was heavy machine gun
fire from Yugoslavia into Greece, for about five
houi-s during daylight. Another machine gun in
Yugoslavia territory fired into Greek territory for
a period of seven hours, while three men in Yugo-
slav uniforms chatted with the crew of the machine
gun.
On July 11th there was artillei"y fire, on July
12th mortar fire, and on July 18th machine gun
fire from Albania against the Greek national army.
On August 7, 1948, mortar fire was heard from
within Bulgarian territory and on the same day
two of the IJnited Nations observere were actually
wounded by artillery fire from Bulgarian terri-
tory. A plane bearing Bulgarian markings ap-
parently machine-gumied Greek troops on August
17th.
These are but a few of many incidents actually
observed by the United Nations Special Committee
itself and are quite apart from the incidents
reported by witnesses heard by the Committee.
The unanimous factual conclusion of the Spe-
cial Committee is that what has happened "con-
stitutes a threat to the political independence and
territorial integrity of Greece and to peace in the
Balkans". It has happened despite the fact that
the last session of the General Assembly by vote
of 40 to 6 had called upon Albania, Bulgaria, and
Yugoslavia "to do nothing which could furnish
aid and assistance" to Greek guerrillas.
Some might say that, since these are the facts,
the General Assembly resolution has failed.
Such a conclusion is, I submit, totally unjustified.
In fact, the General Assembly has not failed. It
has not, to be sure, achieved immediate obedience
to its will. But the General Assembly was never
given authority to command obedience. It de-
pends primarily on the power of public opinion
and to build that up takes time, patience, and per-
sistence. Already, however, the General Assem-
bly has had an influence. It has had an influence
in promoting aid to Greece. It has had an influ-
ence even along the northern frontier. The rep-
resentative of my Government who served on the
Special Committee believes, and I understand
others believe, that if it had not been for the pres-
Deparfment of State Bulletin
ence of the Special Committee in Greece, the mili-
tary aid given by the northern neighbors of Greece,
■vrould have reached far greater proportions than,
in fact, has been the case. There can, I think, be
no doubt (hat the northern neighbors of Greece
have, in fact, been restrained by the presence of
the Committee and its power of exposure at this
"town meeting of the world".
All governments are sensitive to public opinion
and, however eager they may be to promote vio-
lence to achieve their international ends, they are
reluctant to do so if their conduct exposes them to
the condemnation of world opinion and to the
resistance that that opinion inspires. The record
before us is bad as to the conduct of some nations —
it is dismullj' bad — but it is not fatally bad, for
Greece survives. We can reasonably feel that the
Assembly action of last year has been one of the
indispensable factors that have, so far, preserved
for Greece the integrity and sovereignty which it
was hoped this Organization could secure for all
time for all of its Members.
Greece not only survives but, thanks to its own
efforts and those of the United Nations and of
other friendlj' states, Greece is steadily making
progress in the rehabilitation of the country and
in making good the terrific losses which Greece
suffered when she resisted Nazi aggression and
became its victim. Her army has made great sac-
rifices in bringing security to the Greek people
and resisting the terroristic tactics of the guerrilla
forces. Greek railroads are being rebuilt, the
roads and bridges are being reconstructed, crops
1H£ UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGENCIBS
are increasingly being cultivated, political condi-
tions are stabilizing, and there are being created
these "conditions of stability and well-being
which" the Charter recognizes (article 65) ''are
necessary for peaceful and friendly relations
among nations based on respect for the principle
of equal rights and self-determination of peoples".
I submit that the action of the United Nations
in regard to Greece constitutes not a failure, but a
success. The Members of the United Nations who
have cooperated in this effort can properly be
proud. It is, in my Govermnent's opinion, abun-
dantly clear that this effort to save Greece, which
already has good results, should be carried on to
the complete success that is now in sight. There-
fore, my Government, in conjunction with the
Governments of China, France, and the United
Kingdom, is submitting and supporting a resolu-
tion which, in essence, continues the present Com-
mission with the dual function of observation and
good offices; which calls upon Greece's northern
neighbors to cease and desist from aiding the effort
violently to overthrow the Greek Government ; and
which assures a continuing exposure which will
make it certain that, if there is continued violation
of the Charter, world opinion will gi'ow steadily
more condemnatory, more resolute, and more
potent to restrain aggression.
I hope, however, that events will not take that
course, but that this general debate may demon-
strate the possibility of a peaceful solution con-
sistent with the political independence and terri-
torial integrity of Greece.
Concern for Peace in the Balkans
Mr. Chairman, I wish first to comment on the
attempt of the Soviet Delegation to divert atten-
tion by charging that the United States is develop-
ing Greece as a base for aggression in pursuance
of its goal of "world mastery". That charge was
repeated in chorus by the other Communist-con-
trolled Delegations. Of course, Mr. Chairman, the
United States Delegation denies that charge as
vicious falsehood. But I realize that all govern-
ments always deny aggressive intentions. So, I
invite a more searching test, that of deeds.
Within the last 30 years the United States has
twice been one of the principal victors in world
war. Thereby we became possessed of vast power
beyond our border. Yet, in the course of those 30
years, our national domain has actually contracted,
not expanded. That simple fact speaks, I think,
with significant eloquence.
After AVorld War I we quickly withdrew from
Europe a military force that was tremendous. We
virtually disarmed ourselves. Under the treaties
of Versailles and of Berlin, we took no territory
and no reparation. We were satisfied to have
helped to save the free institutions of Europe.
November 14, 1948
Three years ago the United States had on the
continent of Eui'ope a military force that was one
of the most potent the world has ever known, not
just in numbers, but in its superb quality and its
unmatched mechanized equipment. Our land
forces in Europe consisted of over 3 million com-
bat troops, with more than 14,000 tanks. We had
here more than 17,000 aircraft manned by about
half a million men. Our Navy was operating in
the European theatre more than 5,000 vessels.
What of that i-emains in Europe today? The
merest fragment, perhaps 3 percent. There are
less than 500 men in Greece and not one of these
a combat soldier. We disposed of or destroyed
more than 5 million long tons of military stores in
AVestern Europe and we destroyed here more than
4,000 complete United States aircraft. When we
withdrew, we withdrew cleanly. We organized no
disloyal groups, no fifth columns, to do our will.
Our deeds, Mr. Chairman, are not the deeds of a
nation that is set on world mastery.
It is quite true that the United States has now
checked its program of disarmament. That is not
our preference. It is due to the fact that the defeat
609
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECMt/ZED AGENCIES
of Germany and Japan did not, as we had hoped,
end the fears of the free peoples. Indeed a new
fear now grips them and it is a fear that, unhap-
pily, cannot now be allayed by international organ-
ization alone. That is in part because tlie Security
Council's power to decide is crippled by veto and
its power to act is crippled by lack of military con-
tingents. It is in part because the threat is
deviously contrived.
So long as that is the situation, the United States
intends to be strong. We make no apology for
that, because our strength is not for ourself alone.
It is our purpose so to unite and strengthen the
forces of freedom that they will not have to fear.
In so acting we are, or course, motivated by self-
interest. I do not pretend otherwise. But the
self-interest we are serving merges with the self-
interest of all those who I'enounce methods of vio-
lence, coercion, and terrorism and who, in the
words of the resolution which last Wednesday the
Assembly adopted unanimously, conform their
policies to the Atlantic Charter declaration that
all the men in all the land should live out their lives
in freedom from f ear.^
Our growing national strength no doubt dis-
pleases some; but it does not, I believe, frighten
any. I ask each delegate to search his own mind
and come to his own conclusion as to who and what
his nation fears. I shall be satisfied with a silent
verdict, for I know that some fear even to express
their fear.
The Governments of Albania, Bulgaria, and
Yugoslavia do not like it that the Government of
Greece is getting from abroad military aid that it
requested. But these northern neighbors of
Greece can, if they want, bring that to an end.
Let them comply with the solemn recommenda-
tions of the United Nations Assembly. Let them
end their incitement and shielding of Greek guer-
rillas and Communist rebels and the giving to them
of aid and comfort. Let them resume neighborly
relations with the Greek Government. The Greek
people, who have already endured eight years of
cruel violence, surely want nothing more than to
return to ways of peace and to dedicate their whole
effort to the imperative tasks of reconstruction.
Any Greek Government that maintained a military
establishment for purposes other than indepen-
dence, territorial integrity, and internal security,
would quickly forfeit for Greece the support and
sympathy she now enjoys.
I turn now to consider the Four Power draft res-
olution and in the first instance its acceptance of
the special committee findings that the northern
neighbors of Greece have allowed their territory to
be used by Greek guerrillas and rebels and have
otherwise aided and assisted them. A great effort
has been made here to discredit these findings.
" See p. 614.
610
In fact, the special committee was unanimous in its
factual conclusions and that, in my opinion, ought
to be sufficient. Neither the Assembly nor the first
committee with its large membership and crowded
calendar can undertake, as a court of first instance,
to weigh all the available evidence.
The special committee spent a year in actual ob-
servation. It saw for itself and it talked with
hundreds of people to get their impressions. No
doubt many of the people with whom they talked
were unreliable. The special committee itself says
so. But surely the special committee is better
qualified than we are to decide what weight should
be given to what it saw and heard. To call the
report of the special committee "garbage", as has
been done here, is to insult a competent, hard work-
ing, and conscientious organ of the United Nations,
the members of which have endured much personal
risk and hardship in order to carry out the desire
of the General Assembly that, at this session, it
should have knowledge of the facts through an
agency of its own choosing.
There can be no doubt that — as unanimously
found by the special committee — "the Greek guer-
rillas have received aid and assistance from Al-
bania, Bulgaria, and Yugoslavia ; that they have
been furnished with war material and other sup-
plies from those countries; that they have been al-
lowed to use the territories of Albania, Bulgaria,
and Yugoslavia for tactical operations; . . . ."
The difficult question that confronts us here is not
to decide what the facts are, but to decide what to
do about them.
The debate shows that all of us feel disappointed
that there is not open to this Assembly some quick
and direct method of putting an end to the existing
situation. The Four Power proposal would, in
effect, continue the special committee, with some
clarification of its powers. That is what the spe-
cial committee itself recommends, and it is hard
to see any other course that is open to us.
Of course, if the northern neighbors of Greece
were, in fact, willing to cooperate with this Assem-
bly and with its special committee, that would
make it jDOssible to give the committee a different
and more constructive task. There is, however, no
present basis for planning on that assumption.
The northern neighbors of Greece have heard
moving pleas from Greece and others. So far,
their responses indicate that the Assembly is face
to face with the same hard attitude of noncoopera-
tion as has confronted it up to now.
Nevertheless, in the hope that this attitude may
change, and the Assembly, in this situation, can
serve the charter purpose of "harmonizing the
actions of nations", the Four Powers, which spon-
sor the draft resolution before you, propose to add,
at paragraph 10 (C), an authorization to the spe-
cial committee on its discretion to appoint one or
more persons to use their gooti offices to promote
cooperation with Greece that is sought of Albania,
Department of State Bulletin
Bulgaria, and Yugoslavia. In that vray the As-
sembly will have established means for reconcilia-
tion if developments sliould seem to make that pos-
sible. That, 1 believe, will respond to desires that
have been expressed here in the course of the gen-
eral debate, including also ideas that, we under-
stand, have been expressed by members of the spe-
cial committee, particularlj- the representatives of
Pakistan and Brazil.
The primary dependence of the Assembly will,
however, have to be upon its power to expose what
happens and in that way to influence public opinion
and national action throughout the world. Of
course, tliat process does not give immediate de-
cisive results. Nevertheless, as I pointed out in
my opening statement, the power to expose, the
power to educate public opinion, is, in fact, the
most fundamental of all powers. We can see it
here at work.
There is little doubt that the situation along the
northern frontier of Greece, bad as it is, would be
far worse but for the fact that a United Nations
committee was there to observe and report. Also,
the facts that have been observed and publicly re-
ported have influenced public opinion at least in
the member state for which I speak. In conse-
quence more is being done by the United States to
help Greece than would otherwise be the case.
The representatives of the Soviet Union, Yugo-
slavia, Albania, Bulgaria, Poland, Czechoslovakia,
Byelorussia, and the Ukraine have here devoted
many hours to attempts to discredit the factual
findings of the special committee. Why have they
done so? Because they are afraid to let those
findings go unchallenged. Their conduct here is
unmistakable proof, if indeed proof were needed,
that nations whose conduct threatens the peace do
fear the consequences of exposure.
Therefore, Mr. Chairman, I hope that this As-
sembly will continue to exercise its power of expo-
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
sure and that this year's resolution will be clearer,
in this resi)ect, than was that of last year.
In conclusion, Mr. Chairman, the United States
Delegation believes that the Four Power proposal,
with the addition I have indicated and with per-
haps some changes to reflect constructive criticism,
such as that of the Australian Delegation, consti-
tutes the wisest course we can recommend to the
General Assembly. It is in the main based upon
the reports of the Special Committee for tlie Bal-
kans, which was set up by the General Assembly
last year for the very purpose of providing this
session with findings and recommendations which
would result from study of the situation on the
spot.
The reports before us are the fruits of a difficult
and testing experience. Violent efforts have been
made to divert attention from them and torrents
of abuse, ridicule and sarcasm have been poured
upon them. But, as the general debate draws to
a close, we can see that these findings and recom-
mendations survive as the only solid foundation
for future action. Nothing that has transpired
here would justify this committee in setting aside
the expert views on which the General Assembly
expected us to act and substituting for them some
inexpert improvisations of our own. Therefore,
Mr. Chairman, the United States Delegation
stands on the Four Power resolution which, in
turn, stands on the findings and recommendation
of our special committee. We think that that res-
olution can be improved in some respects by incor-
porating constructive ideas that have emerged in
the course of the general debate. I have never
known a general debate that did not add to the
sum total of our wisdom, and I am glad to pay
that tribute to the debate we now conclude. I3ut
in the main, we shall, I hope, stick to the lines of
action that our special committee has recom-
mended.
U.S. Position on Palestine Resolution
STATEMENT BY PHILIP C. JESSUP'
Deputy U.S. Representative in the Security Council
Mr. President, I wish to speak very briefly about
the position of my Government on the resolution
before us. In the first place, we should like to
suggest certain amendments which we believe
would improve and clarify the resolution. It is
not our purpose to com])licate the situation at this
time but we hope that the proposers of the resolu-
:ion will be able to accept the following suggested
•hanjres.
First, we suggest that the first word of the
fourth paragraph, the word "endorses" be deleted
and there be substituted the words "takes note of".
The purpose of this change is to remove any incon-
sistency between the fourth and fifth paragraphs.
The request of the Acting Mediator was stated in
' Made on Nov. 4, 1948, and released to the iiress on the
same date.
November 14, 1948
611
THE UNITBD NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
somewhat precise terms and, of course, could not
reflect the discussions in the Council on the question
of withdrawal, particularly the views expressed
by the distinguished representative of France.
That discussion has been reflected in the fifth para-
graph. Although it is our view that the fifth and
sixth paragraphs are the operative sections and
the first four are preambulatory in character, nev-
ertheless we believe it would be helpful to remove
any misunderstanding which might arise on that
point.
Secondly, we suggest there be added after the
words "interested governments" in the fifth para-
graph the following-— "without prejudice to their
rights, claims or position with regard to a peaceful
adjustment of the future situation of Palestine or
to the position which members of the Security
Council may wish to take in the General Assembly
on such peaceful adjustment". The purpose of this
suggestion is to separate the issue of the truce from
that of the final settlement. We believe there
should be a clear understanding that the mainte-
nance of a truce has from the beginning been
without prejudice to the final political result and
that we are not intending here in this resolution
to prejuclice in any way the political position of
the parties or of the members of the Security
Council.
Third, we believe that it might be helpful to
substitute the following for the final paragraph :
"Appoints a committee of the Council, consisting
of the five permanent members together with Bel-
gium and Colombia to advise the Acting Mecliator
with regard to his responsibilities under this reso-
lution, and in the event that either party or both
should fail to comply with the preceding para-
graph of this resolution, to study as a matter of
urgency and to report to the Council on further
measures it would be appropriate to take under
Chapter VII of the Charter."
We make this last suggestion in order to afford
the acting mediator an opportunity to consult a
responsible body in connection with the very heavy
responsibilities which are placed upon him by this
resolution. Further, it would allow the commit-
tee to consider the situation in the light of chapter
VII as a whole and would not restrict its work
within the framework of article 41.
The one simple, clear element which has been
constant throughout the tortuous history of the
Palestine question before the United Nations has
been the expressed determination on the part of
the United Nations that, however men might cliffer
about the final political result, such a result must
be reached by peaceful means and not by war.
Today we are talking about a truce ; we are not
talking about the nature of a political settlement.
When we talk about a truce, the parties are not
merely Israeli and Arabs. There is another — and
greater — party of interest, the entire international
612
community — the rest of the world. The interest
of the international community in a peaceful set-
tlement is paramount. Both great powers and
small must confess to this overriding interest.
It is fundamental to the Charter and is the prin-
cipal reason for the very existence of the Security
Council.
The General Assembly expressed itself on this
aspect of the Palestine problem in its resolution of
November 29, 1947, and, more particularly, in its
resolution of May 14, 1948. The Security Council
itself has devoted great effort to a truce, efforts
which are reflected in resolutions of March 5,
April 1. April 17, April 23, May 22, May 29, July
7, July 15, August 19, and October 19 of the present
year. To these efforts have been added the loyal
and devoted effort of the subsidiary bodies of both
the Assembly and the Council which were given
various responsibilities in Palestine. Many Gov-
ernments Members of the United Nations sup-
ported these United Nations actions by strong
counsel to the parties through diplomatic channels.
The result has not been a perfect truce, that no
one can claim ; but the result has not been all-out
war. No one of the parties has found that the
truce has always satisfied their own particular de-
sires; at one time or another, in the variety of local
situations arising in various parts of the country,
all parties have felt the truce as a restraint upon
the temptation to exploit a local or temporary ad-
vantage. But no one can doubt that both Jewish
and Arab peoples have greatly benefited from the
cease-fire, imperfectly observed as it has been. As
those who are immediately and emotionally in-
volved are unwilling to confess such benefits, the
rest of the world community has no doubt of it.
The stake of tlie United Nations in this partic-
ular truce is established not only as a matter of
principle but through the specific contribution
made by the United Nations itself to the mainte-
nance of a cease-fire. Servants of the United Na-
tions, by the hundreds, have exposed themselves
to hardship and danger in order to bring peace
to Palestine. A number have lost their lives.
Many Jews and many Arabs are alive today be-
cause of the disinterested and devoted effort of
these men who have had no other puri:)ose than
to save the peoples of Palestine from war. In
addition, the peace-making efforts of the United
Nations have required a most substantial mate-
rial and financial outlay.
We believe it essential to continue the truce until
arrangements can be made to replace the truce by
a more permanent peaceful settlement. Indeed
without a truce, a peaceful settlement becomes im-
possible. We believe the present resolution is con-
sistent with, and a necessary reinforcement of, the
previous resolutions of the Security Council and
of the General Assembly concerning the truce.
The United States supported each of these earlier
Department of State Bulletin
efforts to maintain a cease-fire in Palestine; we
shall, therefore, support the resolution now before
us wliich we hope will be adopted with the changes
we have suggested.
In conclusion, I wish to repeat that we are dis-
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECfAllZEO AGENCIES
cussing a truce, not a political settlement. Our
action here in the Council is a necessary prereq-
uisite to General Assembly consideration, but does
not prejudice the result of such consideration in
any way.
TEXT OF DRAFT RESOLUTION'
The Security Council,
Having decided ou tlie fifteenth July that, subject to
further decision by the Security Council or the General
Assembly, the truce shall remain in force in accordance
with the resolution of that date and with that of twenty-
ninth May 1948 until a peaceful adjustment of the future
situation of Palestine is reached ;
Having decided on the nineteenth August that no party
is permitted to violate the truce on the ground that it is
undertaking reprisals or retaliations against the other
party, and that no party is entitled to gain military or
political advantage through violation of the truce ; and
Having decided on the twenty-ninth May that, if the
truce was subsequently repudiated or violated by either
party or by both, the situation in Palestine could be recon-
sidered with a view to action under chapter VII of the
charter ;
Endorses the request communicated to the Government
of Egj-pt and the Provisional Government of Israel by the
acting mediator on the twenty-sixth October (S/IO.'JS)
following upon the resolution adopted by the Security
Council on nineteenth October 1948; and
Calls upon the interested governments :
(1) To withdraw those of their forces which have ad-
vanced beyond the positions held on fourteenth October,
the acting mediator being authorized to establish pro-
visional lines beyond which no movement of troops shall
take place ;
(2) To establish, through negotiations conducted di-
rectly between the parties or failing that, through the
intermediaries in the service of the United Nations, perma-
nent truce lines and such neutral or demilitarized zones as
may appear advantageous. In order to ensure henceforth
the full observance of the truce in that area. Failing an
agreement, the permanent lines and neutral zones shall
be established by decision of the acting mediator ; and
Appoints a committee of the Council, consisting of the
tive permanent members together with Belgium and Co-
lombia, to examine urgently and report to the Council on
the measures which it would be appropriate to take under
article 41 of the charter if either party or both should fail
to observe the conditions prescribed in the two subpara-
graphs of paragraph 5 of this resolution within whatever
time limits the acting mediator may think it desirable to
fix.
Resolution on the Palestinian Question
The Security Council
Having in mind the report of the Acting Me-
diator concerning the assassinations on 17 Sep-
tember of the United Nations Mediator Count
Folke Bernadotte and United Nations Observer
Colonel Andre Serot (document S/1018), the re-
port of the Acting Mediator concerning difficulties
encountered in the supervision of the truce (docu-
ment S/1022) ; and the report of the Truce Com-
mission for Palestine concerning the situation in
Jerusalem (document S/1023) ;
Notes with concern that the Provisional Gov-
ernment of Israel has to date submitted no report
to the Security Council or to the Acting Mediator
regarding the progress of the investigation into
the assassinations;
Requests that Government to submit to the Se-
curity Council at an early date an account of the
progress made in the investigation and to indicate
therein the measures taken with regard to negli-
gence on the part of officials or other factors affect-
ing the crime;
Reminds the governments and authorities con-
cerned that all the obligations and responsibilities
November 14, 1948
of the parties set forth in its resolutions of 15 July
and 19 August 1948 are to be discharged fully and
in good faith ;
Reminds the Mediator of the desirability of an
equitable distribution of the United Nations ob-
servers for the purpose of observing the truce on
the territories of both parties ;
Determines, pursuant to its resolutions of 15 July
and 19 August 1948, that the Governments and
authorities have the duty :
(a) to allow duly accredited United Nations
Observers and other Truce Supervision personnel
bearing proper credentials, on official notification,
ready access to all places where their duties require
them to go including airfields, ports, truce lines
and strategic points and areas ;
' The foregoing comments of Dr. Jessup were addressed
to a draft resolution reported by the .Security Council
subcommittee on the Palestine question, which was made
up of Representatives of China, France, the United King-
dom, Belgium, and the Ukrainian Soviet Socialist Re-
public. Only the latter country dissented from the opinion
of the subcommittee in presenting the draft resolution.
' U.N. doc. S/104.5, Oct. 19, 1945, adopted at the 3G7th
meeting of the Security Council on that date.
613
THB UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
(b) to facilitate the freedom of movement of
Truce Supervision personnel and transport by
simplifying procedures on United Nations air-
craft now in effect, and by assurance of safe-con-
duct for all United Nations aircraft and other
means of transport ;
(c) to co-operate fully with the Truce Super-
vision personnel in their conduct of investigations
into incidents involving alleged breaches of the
truce, including the making available of witnesses,
testimony and other evidence on request;
(d) to implement fully by appropriate and
prompt instructions to the Commanders in the
field all agreements entered into through the good
offices of the Mediator or his representatives ;
(e) to take all i-easonable measures to ensure
the safety and safe-conduct of the Truce Supervi-
sion personnel and the representatives of the
Mediator, their aircraft and vehicles, while in ter-
ritory under their control ;
(f) to make every effort to apprehend and
promptly punish any and all persons within their
jurisdictions guilty of any assault upon or other
aggressive act against the Truce Supervision per-
sonnel or the representatives of the Mediator.
Appeal to the Great Powers To Renew Their Efforts To Compose
Their Differences and Establish a Lasting Peace ^
1. Whereas it is the essential purpose of the
United Nations to maintain international peace
and security and to that end it must co-ordinate its
efforts to bring about by peaceful means the settle-
ment of international disputes or situations which
might lead to a breach of the peace,
2. Whereas the United Nations should be a
centre for harmonizing the actions of nations in
the attainment of this common end,
3. Whereas the United Nations cannot fully
attain its aims so long as the recent war remains
in process of liquidation and so long as all the
peace treaties have not been concluded and put
into force,
4. Whereas the Great Allied Powers, which
bore the heaviest burden in the war and whose
common sacrifice and effort were the prime cause
of victory, have reaffirmed, on many solemn oc-
casions, their determination to maintain and
strengthen in the peace that unity of purpose and
of action which has made possible the victory of
the United Nations,
5. Whereas the aforementioned Allied Powers,
which undertook at the second Moscow Conference
responsibility for drafting and concluding the
peace treaties, have not been able, after three years
of effort, to obtain the full realization of their high
mission by building a just and lasting peace,
6. Whereas the disagreement between the said
Powers in a matter of vital importance to all the
United Nations is at the present time the cause of
the deepest anxiety among all the peoples of the
world, and
7. Whereas the United Nations, in the per-
formance of its most sacred mission, is bound to
afford its assistance and co-operation in the settle-
' Contained in U.N. doc. A/694, Oct. 26, 1948.
614
ment of a situation the continuation of which in-
volves grave dangers for international peace,
The General Assembly
1. Recalls the declarations made at Yalta on
11 February 1945 by Churchill, Roosevelt and
Stalin, in which the signatories
"reaffirm our faith in the principles of the
Atlantic Charter, our pledge in the Declaration
by the United Nations, and our determination to
build in co-operation with other peace-loving na-
tions a world order under law, dedicated to peace,
security, freedom and the general well-being of
all mankind",
and proclaim that
"only with continuing and growing co-operation
and understanding among our three countries, and
among all the peace-loving nations, can the high-
est aspiration of humanity be realized — a secure
and lasting peace which will, in the words of the
Atlantic Cnarter 'afford assurance that all the men
in all the lands may live out their lives in freedom
from fear and want' " ;
2. Endorses these declarations and expresses its
convictions that the Great Allied Powers will, in
their policies, conform to the sjjirit of the said
declarations ;
3. Recominends the Powers signatories to the
Moscow Agreements of 24 December 1945, and the
Powers which subsequently acceded thereto, to
redouble their efforts, in a spirit of solidarity and
mutual understanding, to secure in the briefest
possible time the final settlement of the war and
the conclusion of all the peace settlements ;
4. Recomviends the aforementioned Powers to
associate with them, in the performance of such
a noble task, the States which subscribed and ad-
hered to the Washington Declaration of 1 January
1942.
Depattmenf of Stafe Bulletin
The United States in the United Nations
Balkan Committee
The Political and Security Committee adopted
by 48-6 vote on November 10 a resolution con-
demning the aid given to Greek guerrillas by
Yugoslavia. Albania, and Bulgaria and providing
for continuation of the Greek border watch by the
Special Committee on the Balkans. The six op-
posing ballots were cast by the Soviet bloc.
The resolution, submitted jointly by the United
States. Britain, France and China, also calls upon
Greece's nortliern neighbors to cease their support
of the Greek guerrillas and cooperate with Greece
for peaceful settlement of the Balkan dispute in
accordance with previous Assembly recommenda-
tions.
In corollaiy action, the committee also adopted
unanimously an Australian resolution calling for
an immediate meeting in Paris, under Assembly
auspices, of representatives of the four Balkan
states to explore possibilities of agi'eement on
methods to resolve their dilferences.
Both resolutions will be sent to the Assembly for
final action.
Later, the committee began, at Soviet request, a
paragraph-by-paragraph consideration of a Soviet
resolution, and immediately rejected a paragraph
in the resolution calling for dissolution of Unscob.
It also turned down the preamble attacking "for-
eign interference" in Greece.
Two paragraphs of the Soviet resolution, call-
ing upon Greece and her northern neighbors to
establish diplomatic relations and renew frontier
conventions, were approved unanimously.
The adopted resolution on continuation of
Unscob provides that the U.N. body shall "have
its principal headquarters in Greece, and with the
cooperation of the govermnent or governments
concerned, shall perform its functions in such
places as it may deem appropriate for the fulfil-
ment of its mission."
Palestine
Final administrative details of the proposed
$29,000,000, nine-month program for relief of Pal-
estine refugees are now being completed in a sub-
committee of the General Assembly's Social
Committee.
The subcommittee decided on November 10, by a
vote of seven to three, to propose to the Assembly
that the Secretary-General appoint a director of
the relief program and that the Assembly Presi-
dent pick a seven-member committee to advise the
Secretary-General on the program. The group
had previously agreed that the plan for aid to
Middle East refugees — sponsored by the United
States, the United Kingdom, Belgium, and the
Netherlands — would be carried out through a spe-
November 14, 1948
[November 8-13]
cial fund to be made up of contributions from
Member Nations, the fund to be under the direct
supervision of the Secretary-General.
Anticipating a delay in final establishment of
the program, the Assembly's Budgetary Commit-
tee last week approved an advance of $5,000,000
from the working capital to cover the cost of im-
mediate aid. This sum is to be repaid from future
contributions.
Meanwhile, the first shipment of relief supplies
sponsored by the International Children's Emer-
gency Fund has arrived at Haifa from the United
States, aboard the S. S. Skagumy Victory. In this
shipment, the Unicef included 4,540 kilograms of
dried milk, 1,225 kilograms of cod-liver oil, 1,816
kilograms of margarine, and 200 of rice.
Tlie supijlies are to be sent to Haifa, Tel Aviv,
and Nazareth, where they will be distributed to
mothers and children among both Arab and Jew-
ish refugees. Supervising the distribution is Dr.
Jean Mabileau, Deputy Director of Unicef for the
Middle East. Dr.. Mabileau declared, upon the
arrival of the supplies at Haifa, that: "A major
battle has just been won in Palestine. The win-
ners ai'e some 25,000 babies, nursing mothers, and
pregnant women among the Jewish and Arab ref-
ugees living in the Jewish part of Palestine. And
in this battle, there are for once no losers."
Tliis Unicef relief program is in addition to the
more extensive aid project first proposed to the
Assembly by Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt, U.S.
Delegate, and now being worked out in the Social
Committee. This larger program is intended to
cover the almost 400,000 refugees not eligible for
Unicef relief. Still other efforts are being made
in the United States by private organizations, such
as the American Red Cross ancl National Chil-
dren's Fund, to assist 500,000 homeless Palestini-
ans whose plight was brought to world attention
by Ralph Bunche, acting U.N. mediator for Pales-
tine.
On November 10 several more suggestions for
effecting peace in Palestine were added to the No-
vember 9 proposals of Ralph Bunche, acting U.N.
mediator for Palestine. Dr. Bunche asked for an
armistice, for separations of the contending forces
by broad demilitarized zones and for ultimate
withdrawal of and reduction of Jewish and Arab
ai"med forces. He wanted the paities to negotiate
only through the good offices of the mediator.
Dr. Bunche submitted a tentative plan for pro-
visional truce lines later at the first meeting of a
seven-nation subcommittee of the Council.
The committee, appointed by the Council No-
vember 4, comprises the five major powers plus
Belgium and Colombia. At the start of the No-
vember 10 meeting, Dr. Roberto Urdaneta Ar-
belaez of Colombia was elected as chairman. The
615
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIALIZID AGENCIES
task of the committee is to advise Dr. Bunche on
Charter regulations respecting breaches of the
peace and acts of aggression. This committee will
meet again on November 12.
Economic Committee
Willard Thorp, U.S. Delegate to the Assembly
and Assistant Secretary for economic affairs,
again on November 10 emphasized in the Economic
Committee that United States trade policies are
directed toward full cooperation in world recovery.
The statement was in answer to charges made
by Soviet bloc representatives in the committee,
alleging discrimination by the United States in
granting export licenses and in general trade poli-
cies.
In reply to the charge that the volume of
American exports was proof of expansionist char-
acter, Mr. Thorp asked: "Is it exiDansionist to re-
build countries with which we normally compete?"
and added : "We are helping to raise the level of
agriculture in countries which are taking Ameri-
can agriculture products. The people who suffer
because of exports from us are not the receiving
countries. Those who suffer are the American
taxpayers."
On the allegation that one of the foundations of
the recovery program is the United States right
to control export trade of participating countries,
Mr. Thorp said : "We have heard of the lame ef-
fort on the part of the Polish Delegate to find in
bilateral agreements justification for this conclu-
sion. The French Delegate has already refuted
this."
In recalling the recent Danube conference,
which was dominated by the Soviet Union and its
satellites, he noted: "The so-called convention,
while allowing freedom of navigation on equal
terms, makes use of port facilities subject to
agreement with certain transport companies with
no adequate safeguards against discrimination.
In Hungary and Rumania joint shipping com-
panies— half Soviet-owned — have a substantial
monopoly on all port facilities. Without explicit
guaranties of nondiscrimination of the use of
these facilities, the principle of freedom of navi-
gation is meaningless."
Berlin Currency Problem
Secretary-General Tyrgve Lie is making a
study of the currency problem in Berlin. In this
connection he has consulted Mr. Evatt, and will
consult Mr. Bramuglia on his return from London.
The Berlin currency problem is part of the Ber-
lin issue, which was brought before the Security
Council by the United States, France, and Great
Britain. They charged that the Soviet blockade
of the western sectors of the city constituted a
threat to peace.
A resolution was drawn up by the six neutral
members of the Council, calling for the immediate
lifting of restrictions on traffic between Berlin and
the four occupation zones in Germany and provid-
ing procedure for unification of Berlin currency by
November 20.
Tliis resolution, accepted by the three Western
Powers, was vetoed on October 25 by the Soviet
Union and the case is still on the Councirs agenda.
On November 13 Mr. Evatt and Mr. Lie sub-
mitted a communication to the Four Powers con-
cerned asking for immediate conversations to re-
sume negotiations on the present crisis and on the
remaining peace settlement for Germany, Austria,
and Japan.
CORRECTION
Functions of Control of Foreign Assets in United
States Transferred
In the Bulletin of October 10, 1948, page 472,
appeared an item announcing the transfer of func-
tions relating to the control of foreign assets in the
United States from the Treasury Department to
the Department of Justice. The caption, "Control
of Foreign Assets in U.S. Ended", should be
changed to read "Functions of Control of Foreign
Assets in U.S. Transferred".
616
Department of State Bulletin
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES
Members of Tin Study Group To Consider
Advisability of Agreement
[Ueleased to tile press Novemln'r 1]
The Department of State received on Novem-
ber 1 the followin<j statement, released at The
Hague on October 29, 1948 :
"The International Tin Study Group held its
third session at The Hague fi'om the 25th to the
29th of October.
"The group had before it the report of the
Working Party which had met in June. The pur-
port of this report was that it would be appro-
priate and practicable to conclude an international
tin agreement on the lines set out in the report.
"The group modified these proposals in certain
respects and has forwarded to the member govern-
ments a recommendation that after certain pre-
paratory steps have been taken the member gov-
ernments should be asked to inform the Secretary
whether thej^ would be disposed to enter into an
agreement on the broad lines proposed and are
willing to attend a conference to put the agi'ee-
ment into final form and to conclude it. If a
sufficient number of affirmative replies is received,
the Secretary General of the United Nations will
be asked to convene an intergovermnental tin con-
ference next spring".
Chairman of the United States Delectation to
the Tin Study Group was Donald D. Kennedy,
Chief, International Resources Division, Depart-
ment of State.
Ward M. Canaday Becomes U.S. Commissioner
of Caribbean Commission
Ward M. Canaday took his oath of office as
United States Commissioner and Chairman of the
United States Section of the Caribbean Commis-
sion on November 5. The oath was administered
by Stanley Woodward, Chief of Protocol, at the
Department of State in the presence of a large
group of associates and friends. Mr. Canaday was
appointed by the President on October 30, 19i8.
Mr. Canaday will attend the Third Session of
the West Indian Conference, held biennially under
the auspices of the Caribbean Commission, which
will convene in Guadeloupe, F.W.I., on December
1, 1948, and the Seventh Meeting of the Caribbean
Commission, which will be held concurrently
with the West Indian Conference.
Mr. Canaday succeeds Charles W. Taussig of
New York, who died on May 9, 1948. Mr. Taussig
had been appointed by President Roosevelt in
November 14, 1948
March 1942 as United States Co-Chairman of the
Anglo-American Caribbean Commission, which
in December 1945 became the Caribbean Commis-
sion.
The Caribbean Commission, of which France,
the Netherlands, the United Kingdom, and the
United States are members, is a consultative and
advisory body established to encourage and
strengthen social and economic cooperation be-
tween the four metropolitan countries and their
territories in that area.
U.S. Delegation to ILO Textiles Committee
The Department of State announced on October
28 the composition of the United States Delega-
tion to the second session of the Textiles Commit-
tee of the International Labor Organization, which
session opened October 26, at Geneva, as follows :
Government Representatives
Arnold L. Zempel, Associate Director, Office of Interna-
tional Labor Affairs, Deiiartment of Labor
Kene Lutz, CTaief, Textile Section, Textile and Leather
Branch, Department of Commerce
Adviser
Hersey E. Riley, Chief, Branch of Construction Statistics,
Bureau of Labor Statistics, Department of Labor
Employers' Representatives
Herbert H. Schell, President, Sidney Blumenthal and Co.,
Inc., New York, N. Y.
Edwin Wilkinson, Assistant to the President, National As-
sociation of Wool Manufacturers, New York, N. Y.
Workers' Representatives
Anthony Valente, International President, United Textile
Workers of America, Washington, D. O.
Francis M. Schaufenbil, Vice President, United Textile
Workers of America, Lawrence, Mass.
The agenda for the meeting includes: (1) a
general report dealing with action taken in the
various countries to give elfect to the resolutions
of the first session of the Committee, held at Brus-
sels in November 1946; (2) report on recent de-
velopments and events in the textile industry;
(3) discussion of employment problems, with
special reference to recruitment and training; and
(4) problems of industrial relations.
The Textile Committee is one of eight industrial
committee of the Ilo established for the pur-
pose of examining social and economic aspects of
international labor standards in the respective in-
dustries and adopting resolutions for their im-
provements.
617
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Procedure for Transmitting Electors' Certificates
LETTER FROM THE ACTING SECRETARY OF STATE TO THE 48 GOVERNORS
[Released to the press November 3]
Acting Secretary Lovett on November 1, 1948,
sent to the Governors of the 48 States a letter out-
lining the procedure laid down in the law for the
receipt and transmission by the Department of
State to the Congress of certificates of the appoint-
ment of the electors of the several States and of
the votes of the electors.
Following is the text of the letter :
November i, 191^
The Honorable
The Governor of
Sir: The laws of the United States relating to
presidential elections requii'e the performance of
certain duties by State executives, electors of
President and Vice President, and the Secretary
of State of the United States. I send for your con-
venient reference copies of a publication of the
Department of State entitled Presidential Elec-
tions^ containing the relevant provisions of the
Constitution and of the United States Code (Pub-
lic Law 77l-80th Congress). The number of
copies transmitted is sufficient to enable you, if
you so desire, to furnish one to each elector of your
State and to each official having duties in that
connection.
Title 3, Chapter 1. Section 6, United States Code,
provides that the executives of each State shall,
as soon as practicable after the conclusion of the
appointment of electors in such State, communi-
cate bj' registered mail, under the seal of the State,
to the Secretary of State of the United States, a
certificate of ascertainment of the electors ap-
pointed. This certificate shall set forth not only
the names of the electors appointed and the votes
received by each, but .shall also list the names of
all other candidates for elector of President and
Vice President and the number of votes received
by each of them. The Secretary of State of the
United States is required to transmit copies of each
such certificate to the two Houses of Congress. I
shall therefore be grateful if you will be good
618
enough to furnish me with an original and two
exact copies of such certificate.
The law provides that the electors shall meet
and give their votes on the first Monday after the
second Wednesday in December next following
their appointment, i.e. on December 13, 1948, and
that the counting of the electoral votes in Congress
shall proceed on January 6, 1949 (Title 3, Chapter
1, Sections 7 and 15, United States Code).
Title 3, Chapter 1, Section 11, United States
Code, imposes on the electors of each State the
duty of forwarding by registered mail to the Sec-
retary of State of the United States two certificates
of the electors containing the two distinct lists of
the votes of electors for President and for Vice
President respectively, in the form prescribed by
Section 9 thereof.
If no such certificate of vote and list has been
received from the electors of any State by the
President of the Senate or by the Secretary of
State by the fourth Wednesday in December, after
the meeting of the electors shall have been held,
i.e. by December 22, 1948, it is provided that the
President of the Senate, or, if he is absent from
the seat of government, the Seci'etary of State, re-
quest the secretary of state of the State to transmit
by registered mail the certificate and list lodged
with him by the electors of that State to the Presi-
dent of the Senate (Title 3, Chapter 1, Section
12). Under the same conditions, a like demand
shall be made upon the judge of the District in
which the electors shall have assembled for the
certificate and list lodged with him by the electors
of that State (Title 3, Chapter 1, Section 13).
It will be observed that for the performance of
the duties imposed upon the Secretary of State
of the United States by the provisions of law
under consideration it will be necessary that State
executives and electors cooperate promptly and
this cooperation I earnestly request.
Very truly yours,
Robert A. Lo^titt
Department of State Bulletin
Mexican Architects Visit U.S.
Two professors of arcliiU>cture, Alonso Mariscal
and Eugenio Peschard Delgado, of the National
University of Mexico City, have arrived in Wash-
ington to begin a two months' study of American
methods of teaching architecture. Their visit here
is being made under tlie travel-grant program of
the Deitartment of State.
Messrs. Mariscal and Peschard will visit the
schools of architecture of Harvard and Columbia
Universities, tiie Massachusetts Institute of Tech-
nology, the Illinois Institute of Technology, and
the Chicago Art Institute.
THE FOREIGN SERVICE
Assignment of First Social-
Welfare Attaches
[Released to the press November 4]
In June 1948, a public-health attache program
was inaugurated bj' the Department in cooperation
with the Public Health Service of the Federal
Security Agency. The purpose of that program
is to carry public health and medical tlevelop-
ments of the United States to other countries and
to bring their current research and activities in
these fields to this country.
Miss Evelj'n Hersey, graduate of the Pennsyl-
vania School of Social Work, formerly Assistant
to the United States Commissioner of Immigra-
tion and Naturalization and, before that, service
director for the American Committee for Christian
Refugees, has left for her post as social-welfare
attache at New Delhi, India.
Irving J. Fasteau, graduate of the New York
School of Social Work, formerly supervisor of so-
cial service of the State Board of Child Welfare,
New Jersey, and immediately prior to that, Chief
of the UxRRA Mission to Finland, took up his post
as social-welfare attache in the American Embassy
in Paris in May 1948.
The idea of having a few specialists in the field
of social welfare attached to foreign posts at se-
lected points throughout the world originated sev-
eral j-ears ago. The idea grew from a recognized
need of the Department of State and other gov-
ernmental agencies for more technical informa-
tion about social-welfare developments in foreign
countries and a better knowledge of their rela-
tionship to the political and economic conditions
irt those countries. The Federal Security Agency,
with its wide range of Federal social-welfare func-
tions, has been the agencj' most instrumental in
assisting in developing the social-welfare attache
program. Other Federal departments that have
had varying degrees of interest in the program are
the Bureau of Prisons of the Department of Jus-
November 74, J948
THE FOREIGN SERVICE
tice, the Department of Labor, the Office of the
Administrator of the Housing and Home Finance
Agency, and the Bureau of Human Nutrition and
Home Economics of the Department of Agricul-
ture. Nongovernmental agencies, which will find
useful the kind of information which can be pro-
vided by these social-welfare specialists, include
the American Association of Social Workers, the
American Association of Schools of Social Work,
the National Social Welfare Assembly the Amer-
ican Council of Voluntary Agencies for Foreign
Service, Inc., and the American Red Cross.
Although the functions of a social-welfare at-
tache vary according to conditions prevalent at
the particular post, the duties include the following
types of activity :
(1) Providing information for the Department
and other governmental and voluntary agencies
regarding social-welfare developments and con-
ditions in foreign countries. Fields of interest
include: social insurance, financial assistance to
low-income groups, child welfare, care of the phys-
ically and mentally handicapped and tlie aged,
vocational rehabilitation, and treatment of the
delinquent and criminal and the social aspects of
housing.
(2) Informing the Department and other gov-
ernmental and private agencies about both official
and unofficial attitudes in the country to which an
attache is assigned concerning the programs of
international organizations in the social field, par-
ticularly the Economic and Social Council of the
United Nations and its specialized agencies.
(3) Appraising the effect, as well as some of the
welfare aspects of American overseas aid pro-
grams, both governmental and voluntary; facili-
tating and aiding in the coordination of the work
of United States public and private welfare agen-
cies engaged in overseas programs affecting that
country.
(4) Serving as a consultant in the Embassy on
social-welfare problems of United States citizens
and alien dependents of citizens brought to the
attention of foreign jjosts.
At the present time the program is limited to two
attache posts. As the program develops, it is
hoped that, through a positive demonstration of
the efficacy of the services which social-welfare at-
taches may provide, the number may be increased.
The attaches are Foreign Service Reserve officers
and are administratively responsible to the Am-
bassadors of the posts to which tliey are assigned
and to the Director General of the P'oreign Service.
The social- welfare attaches, as is true for the labor
attaches, receive technical guidance from the Divi-
sion of International Labor and Social Affairs lo-
cated in the Office of International Trade Policy
under the Assistant Secretary of State for eco-
nomic affairs.
619
^cm^e/n^
The U.N. and Specialized Agencies Page
United Nations Economic Cooperation. Arti-
cle by Norman Burns 598
Adoption of Atomic Energy Resolution. State-
ment by Warren R. Austin 602
Resolution on Reports of the Atomic Energy
Commission
U N. Documents: A Selected Bibliography . 606
Discussion of Greek Problem. Statements
by John Foster Dulles in Committee I:
Continuation of Balkan Commission ... 607
Concern for Peace in the Balkans .... 609
U.S. Position on Palestine Resolution:
Statement by Philip C. Jessup 611
Text of Draft Resolution 613
Resolution on the Palestinian Question . . 613
Appeal to the Great Powers To Renew Their
Efforts To Compose Their Differences and
Establish a Lasting Peace 614
The U.S. in the U.N 615
Economic Affairs
United Nations Economic Cooperation.
Article by Norman Burns 598
Economic Affairs — Continued
Members of Tin Study Group To Consider
Advisability of Agreement •
Ward M. Canaday Becomes U.S. Commis-
sioner of Carribean Commission ....
U.S. Delegation to Ilo Textiles Committee .
Treaty Information
Organization of American States. Article by
George M. Monsma
General Policy
Organization of American States. Article by
George M. Monsma
The Department
Publications on the American Republics . .
Procedure for Transmitting Electors' Certifi-
cates. Letter From the Acting Secretary
of State to the 48 Governors
Mexican Architects Visit U.S
The Foreign Service
Assignment of First Social- Welfare Attaches .
Page
617
617
617
591
591
597
618
619
619
George N. Monsma, author of the article on the Organization
of American States, is Assistant Chief of the Division of Special
Inter-American Affairs, Office of American Republic Affairs,
Department of State.
U. S. GOVEBKMENT PRINTING 0FFICEM94B
^/i€/ z!/)eha/^tmeni/ /(w tnate^
GENERAL ASSEMBLY CONSIDERS STEPS FOR
REDUCTION OF ARMAMENTS • Statement by
Frederick H. Osborn 630
ANNOUNCEMENT OF INTENTION TO ENTER
TARIFF NEGOTIATIONS 642
NATURAL RESOURCES IN A WORLD OF CON-
FLICT • Article by Paul H. Nitze 623
For complete contents see back cover
Vol. XIX, No. 490
November 21, 1948
■*tes
k«»»» o*
^6 2 1946
«>we z/^efut/yi^e^ ^ C/laie YJ LI 1 1 w L 1 ± JL
Vol. XIX, No. 490 • Publication 3346
November 21, 1948
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Ooveroment Printing OtDce
Washington 25. DC.
Prici:
62 Issues, domestic $5, foreign $7.25
Single copy, 16 cents
Published with the approval of the
Director of the Bureau of the Budget
I^ote: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
or State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.
The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, proindes the
public and interested agencies of
the Government uiith information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the icork of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.
Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative fnaterial in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.
NATURAL RESOURCES IN A WORLD OF CONFLICT
fey Paul H. JSilze
Deputy to the Assistant Secretary for Economic Affairs
There is today widespi'ead concern as to the
adequacy of natural resources to support the
world's increasing population. Malthus has come
back into fashion, and Malthusian gloom per-
vades many of our discussions of trends in other
parts of the world and of the effectiveness of the
international policies we adopt. It will perhaps
give a little perspective to this problem if I recall
a talk I had with Sir Montagu Norman in 1932,
when he was Governor of the Bank of England.
He felt then that the basic problem in the world
was overproduction, that technical advances in
production had been so rapid that -the world as
a whole was experiencing a crisis arising out of al-
most universal overproduction. Moreover, he
thought that such a condition would be chronic
for the foreseeable future.
It seemed to me then, and it seems to me now,
that Sir Montagu's analysis was only a partial
analysis of an extremely complex pattern of inter-
related factors and that he overemphasized the
abundance of resources and ignored the possibil-
ity of a well-functioning economy and a great war,
causing a scarcity of resources. It seems to me
that there is an opposite danger of a partial analy-
sis based on an assumption that this scarcity of
natural resources will be extreme. Oversimpli-
fication is a constant hazard in this infinitely com-
plicated field.
One point is crystal clear, however, and that is
that we should not shy away from the facts. We
should examine such facts as are available to us to
the best of our ability. Then, having ascertained
the facts, or at least as many as we can, we should
develop a positive program of action that holds out
realistic prospects of accomplishment and attempt
to carry it out. Although we must not hesitate to
November 2?, 1948
develop a program and carry it out, we must all the
time maintain a certain degree of humility as to
our ability to foresee how the various interrelated
factors will in fact work themselves out. Unpre-
dicted and unpredictable events abound, especially
when human beings are involved, and this problem
of the relation of man to his resource environment
is just as much a human problem as it is a natural-
resource problem.
Considering first the nonrenewable resources,
one of the hard facts of life is that the minerals
necessary for a highly developed civilization can
be drawn from the earth in only limited quanti-
ties. Some are located at such depths, at such
places, and in such combinations as to make them
extremely difficult or even impossible to obtain.
Furthermore, the minerals that we do know about
and can get at without too much difficulty are dis-
tributed around the world in a haphazard fashion,
from the point of view of human use.
It would be comforting if, once we got minerals
out of the ground, we could keep on using them in-
definitely. But there is much permanent loss,
ranging from total loss, in the case of fuels, to only
slight loss — for example, in the case of lead used
in storage batteries. At present rates of consump-
tion, there is an appreciable drain on the known
mineral resources of the world.
The facts about renewable natural resources are
moie complex, but it seems to be generally agreed
that unless thoroughgoing conservation measures
are widely employed, erosion, soil exhaustion, de-
forestation, lower water tables, silting up of
streams, and related developments will soon bring
results which would be even more serious than the
permanent loss of certain of our mineral resources.
623
Against these broad natural-resource facts we
have the facts of population. The world's popula-
tion increased from 400 millions in the sixteenth
century to some 800 millions in the nineteenth, and
is now estimated at approximately 2,200 millions.
Population growth generally changes only slowly
and as a result of complex factors. A substantial
change in world population trends in the next
few decades is not probable. Even a decline in
the annual increments is unlikely for a consider-
able time to come. By the end of this century, the
world's population may be close to 3 billion people.
The situation is quite different in various parts
of the world. First, there are the countries of in-
cipient population stability, namely the countries
of Western Europe and North America. Second,
there are the countries of transitional growth, in-
cluding the Soviet Union, Eastern Europe gener-
ally, much of Latin America, and Japan. Third,
there are the countries with a high growth poten-
tial, especially China and India.
Certain interesting comparisons can be made
among these three types of countries. The first
and second types each have one fifth of the popu-
lation of the world ; the third type has three fifths.
In type 1, the median age is about 35 years and the
life expectancy at birth is about 60 years ; in type 2,
the median age is about 25 years and the life ex-
pectancy is about 50 ; in type 3, the median age is
about 20 years and the life expectancy is between
30 and 40 yeai'S. These are striking differences.
Birth rates are falling rapidly in types 1 and 2,
but not in type 3. Death rates are low and fairly
constant in type 1, falling rapidly in type 2, and
continuing high in type 3. The likely develop-
ments of the coming years, namely declining birth
rates and low or declining death rates in the more
advanced countries, but mainly declining death
rates in the less developed areas, which already
have well over half the world's population, will
mean a somewhat smaller percentage of the world's
population for the type 1, or, generally speaking,
the western countries, and a somewhat larger per-
centage for types 2 and 3, especially 3. This is a
political-economic fact, or probable fact, that must
always be borne in mind.
It is clear that the United States will gradually
come to have a smaller percentage of the people
of the world. This may make our own problem
of adaptation to limited resources easier than for
the w.orld as a whole, especially in view of the high
productivity of our people.
There is another important aspect of the popu-
lation and resources problem, which is sometimes
overlooked. During the last 100 years or so, pro-
duction and consumption, as well as population,
have increased greatly. At the same time democ-
racy and popular education have advanced rap-
idly. The result has been a tremendous rise in
aspirations for the good things of life, in the mate-
rial as well as the spiritual realm, on the part of
the great mass of people over the world. People
are not satisfied with their present lot. They want
more things to eat, wear, and enjoy now. "Pie in
the sky by and by" seems to have less appeal than
it perhaps once did. Moreover, people in many
countries have sufficient political power to make
their wants felt. Governments are under obliga-
tion to do something to improve the lot of the com-
mon man. Whether the resource base exists for
providing the rapidly increasing popidations with
the high levels of physical consumption they de-
sire is a real question. If not, political stability
will depend to a considerable extent on people ad-
justing their consumption sights to something
within the range of practical possibilities.
Another factor bringing pressure on natural re-
sources is of course the need for military estab-
lishments. War is expensive in terms ,of natural
resources as well as human, and the exhaustible
mineral resources are especially hard hit in this
day of industrialized warfare. The present mo-
ment is not a happy one for predicting an imme-
diate decline in the military drain on resources.
It is too bad that there is not an annual or quin-
quennial volume that lists all the natural resources
of the world and tells where they are and how
much thei'e is of them. Such a volume would
probably not be generally accepted as authorita-
tive and for a very good reason. Natural resource
is in part a relative term. It has meaning only in
the context of the potential use to which we think
the resource can be put. The nitrogen in the air,
the gold in the sea, or the minerals of the core of
the earth are not counted as part of our natural
resources. In a very real sense, resources do not
exist unless we are resourceful enough to find ways
and means of using them. Differences of opinion
as to what resources exist and the technical and
economic possibilities of converting them to man's
i
624
Departmenf of State Bulletin
use are such as to make authoritative cataloging
cliflicult.
The relativity of the concept of "natural re-
sources" must always be kept in mind. For ex-
iun]ile, titanium, which was formerly important
largely because it was an obnoxious impurity in
steel manufacture, has in recent years become an
important substitute for lead in the manufacture
of paint, and now that an economical process has
been found for refining it into a pure metal, tita-
nium ore deposits, once a drug on the market, may
come to have strategic significance.
During the war the Office of Imports of the For-
eign Economic Administration was largely con-
cerned with tlie procurement of strategic matei'ials
abroad and the preclusive buying of materials to
deny them to the enemy. Some consideration was
also given, however, to the foreseeable raw-mate-
rials problems which would arise tluring the peace.
In that connection, our various commodity experts
were asked to estimate the remaining world re-
sources of the various metals and minerals which
they were engaged in procuring. The most com-
petent were generally the most reluctant to set a
figure down in black and white because of the al-
most interminable qualifying footnotes that would
have had to be added to explain exactly what the
figure meant and what it did not mean.
Quite apart from this problem of the relativity
of natural resources are two other stumbling blocks
to adequate knowledge about the quantity of nat-
ural resources. One is that it takes a considerable
amount of high-quality hvunan resources and some
other facilities to collect resource information.
The other, a sad one, is that certain governments
shoot people who divulge even to their own citi-
zens much about resources in their countries.
In spite of these difficulties, one can say some-
thing about the resource position of the world and
the United States. It is convenient to continue
the distinction between renewable and nonrenew-
able resources.
Of the renewable, nothing compares with soils
in importance. The broad fact here is that top-
soil builds up slowly, and through neglect and
careless agricultural practices the world is losing
a great amount of valuable topsoil. We in the
United States, it is believed, take better care of
our land than do people in many countries,
although we are still behind a number of coun-
tries in soil-conservation practice. Despite this,
the war and postwar years have seen tremendous
accomplishments by United States agriculture,
based on improved practices, better seeds, and new
techniques that have made these accomplishments
possible. Without them the United States would
have been in no position to help other countries of
the world avoid mass starvation and the resulting
economic and political chaos.
The most immediate concern of the United
States is the minerals field. In general this coun-
trj' is well endowed with mineral resources. It is
this endowment which has, among other things,
made it possible for the 7 percent of the world's
population in the United States to produce 40
percent of the world's goods. Without this en-
dowment we could not have shipped abroad some
140 million tons of military and other equipment
during the war.
Today there are many shortages of mineral sup-
plies in the United States. The Bureau of Mines
has estimated our commercial mineral reserves in
relation to the 1935-39 annual rate of use. The
United States has no commercial reserves of flake
graphite, quartz crystals, industrial diamonds, tin,
and nickel. Our commercial reserves have been es-
timated at one year for chromite, 2 years for man-
ganese, 3 for asbestos and mercury, 4 for platinum
and tungsten, 7 for vanadium, 9 for bauxite, 12 for
lead, 19 for zinc, and 34 for copper. Since that
time prices have advanced substantially, probably
throwing additional ore into the commercial class.
On the other hand, further depletion has taken
place, and the 1935-39 rate of use has been found
to be at least 30 percent under current annual re-
quirements, even with all the technological im-
provements in consumption that enable us to
stretch our supplies.
The pressures arising from a growing shortage
of high-grade mineral reserves are bound to have
far-reaching effects on our domestic economy, and
to some extent abroad. The case of the imminent
exhaustion of the high-grade Mesabi iron ores is
a good example. Already northern New York
iron mines, once abandoned, are being reopened;
experimental work is going forward rapidly in the
beneficiation of lower grade iron ores; production
from deposits in North Africa is increasing; proj-
ects are under way or under consideration in
Brazil, in Venezuela, and in Liberia. The recov-
November 27, 1948
625
ery of iron and steel scrap has taken on a new
importance, and negotiations have just been com-
pleted with the United Kingdom which should
result in steel scrap moving from Germany to the
United States. Improvements in the steel-making
processes are being stimulated. The problem will
be met, but only by the application of a vast
amount of technical and other energies.
Similarly, in other segments of the metals field,
serious problems are arising that require new tech-
nical developments, the substitution of a more
plentiful metal for a less plentiful, more economi-
cal forms of utilization, and above all a far greater
emphasis upon the recovery of scrap. In the long
run we must reduce the wastage of nonrenewable
resources to an absolute minimum. Such a re-
duction does not necessarily mean a halt in the
increase in our standard of living; but it does
mean a much more intelligent use of the resources
which we have. As an illustration of what can
be done, we remember our amazement and distress
at discovering, just after the war, that Germany
had been able to triple its war production between
1942 and 1945 with no substantial increase in its
raw materials, but just by more efficient use of
those materials. This effort was largely made by
redesign of equipment and new techniques of
production.
Our fuels are used up when they are burnt,
and no recovery as scrap is possible. Fortunately,
our coal reserves are very great, and by and large
those of other countries are also of long life. Our
oil reserves are not in such a happy position, al-
though much has been done to improve extraction
techniques. For the immediate future the rapid
development of Middle Eastern reserves should
ease the tight world petroleum situation. In the
long run the problem would not be so great in the
energy field if water, solar, atomic, or wind sources
could be harnessed in adequate volume. It is clear
that an increase in the energy base of the world
economy is fundamental to sustained large-scale
advance.
Up to this point only passing reference has been
made to the ways of mitigating or actually im-
proving what looks to some like the sad long-run
plight of the human race. Now let us see what are
or might become mitigating factors and how prac-
ticable they would appear to be.
Of the ways in which the seriousness of this
world situation might conceivably be mitigated,
«26
some are not within our power to do very much
about at the present time. One is a rapid decline
in population or even a rapid decline in the rate of
increase of population. Another is large-scale
movements of population. Another is a general
reduction of people's desires for the things of this
world which involve, directly or indirectly, drains
on scarce natural resources. A fourth is a signifi-
cant reduction of the amount of resources going
to military establishments.
There are certain other ways of mitigating the
impact of resource shortages that it is within our
power to do something about. Improved tech-
niques for resource development and conserva-
tion, even on the basis of current knowledge if
widely applied, hold substantial prospects for mit-
igating the problem. The results of such appli-
cation may not be estimated now statistically, but
concern for natural resources would be much less
panicky if existing knowledge were being fully
put to practical use.
To accomplish this result, four basic things seem
to be required. The first is knowledge ; the second
is wide dissemination of that knowledge ; the third
is the appropriate organizational techniques for
efficiently implementing that knowledge; and the
fourth is sufficient capital, or to put it another way,
enough excess of productive effort over current
consumption to enable us to execute the actual
projects involved.
On all four counts, the United States is in a
favorable situation, compared with the rest of the
world. We are fortunate in one further respect,
the freedom from internal barriers within the
United States to a free movement of knowledge, of
people, of goods, and .of the capital necessary for
resource development and conservation.
Optimum conservation and utilization of re-
sources cannot, however, be adequately achieved by
domestic measures alone, either in the United
States or in any other nation. On the interna-
tional front also there are important fields for
action, involving international trade, interna-
tional capital movements, and international
diffusion of scientific and technical knowledge.
Consider trade first. Many of the particular re-
source shortages of the United States are today
being met by imports from abroad. As resources
are further developed in other countries, we hope
that increased imports will be possible. The
United States is today, however, exporting a far
Department of State Bulletin
larger total volume of goods than it imports. This
is true not only in a dollar sense but also in the
sense of the resources that go into the goods pur-
chased with these dollars.
At the time of the congi'essional consideration of
the European Recovery Progi-am, the capacity of
the natural-resource position of the United States
to withstand the drain involved was considered.
After consideration, it was felt that we coidd stand
the drain, and the program was approved. The
point is, however, that there are practical limits to
the extent to which we can export our resources
without receiving comparable imports.
Reflecting our concern on this point, both the
Executive Branch of the Government and the Con-
gress felt it wise to attach to the rendering of eco-
nomic assistance to Europe the condition that the
recipient countries cooperate with us in making
available reasonable quantities of materials ex-
\ pected to be in long-term short supply in the
United States. Again, our stockpiling program is
part of our attempt to insure adequate supplies of
strategic resources in case international trade
should be disrupted by war. In any commodity
agreements we may negotiate, it is obvious that our
special interest will be that available supplies
should be adequate for our needs.
In the long run it is our belief that not onlj' we
but all other countries stand to benefit from a rela-
tively free and equitable exchange of goods in in-
ternational trade. The uneven distribution of re-
sources of each country is to some extent overcome
by such trade. This is a major purpose of the
projected International Trade Organization.
The importance of international trade in this
I whole problem area is also a result of the greater
' international specialization of labor that it makes
possible. Development is thus concentrated on
the most economic resources, with higher living
levels brought about by the resulting greater pro-
ductivity in all areas. Greater jjroductivity may
1 not lessen the total drain on resources, but it cer-
tainly lessens the impact of growing populations
on particular resources. International trade has
never been developed sufficiently to permit us to
judge how large a contribution it could make to
well-being. It is tempting to believe that the dif-
ference in the levels of living between Western
Europe and the United States derives to a very
large extent from the existence of barriers to trade
among the Western European states, in contrast to
the comparative lack of such barriers between the
States of the United States. This belief, of course,
lies behind our strong encouragement of Euro-
pean economic cooperation.
In spite of the importance of international trade,
it is going to be difficult in the coming years to
maintain a large and increasing volimie of inter-
national trade. It will be an uphill struggle, even
with a functioning International Trade Organiza-
tion. Many countries believe that their economic
salvation lies in less, rather than more, trade, be-
cause they think more trade increases their vul-
nerability to instabilities elsewhere, specifically
depressions or wars, and because they think they
can develop themselves internally more rapidly
by insulating themselves to a considerable extent.
In attempting both to insulate themselves from in-
ternational economic instability and to develop as
rajjidly as possible, many countries severely limit
their imports of certain products, compete avidly
for such other imports as steel, machinery, and
equipment needed for industrialization and al-
ready in short supply ; and soon face internal in-
flation which kills their exports, industrial bottle-
necks arising in their extraordinarily complex
economic development, and a desperate need for
large-scale external financial assistance.
Most of these countries are due for disappoint-
ment. True, the Soviet Union — with a tremen-
dous variety of natural resources and an iron
discipline — has achieved a certain degree of au-
tarchy ; but this is no sign that many other coun-
tries— most of them much smaller — can do the
same. By and large, most other countries simply
lack the necessary resources. Also, to their great
credit, they have a much greater concern for the
freedom and aspirations of the individual. It is
to be hoped that these countries will see the eco-
nomic light before they add to their misery by
going down the rugged path toward an autarchy
that is certain to be austere.
The second international approach to the prob-
lem of resource development and conservation is
through larger movements of international capital.
In many countries adequate domestic capital just
is not available to carry out progi-ams which are
clearly indicated as being desirable.
With adequate safeguards, the international
movement of capital benefits both the recipient and
the investor, because it helps to develop new re-
sources and makes possible better utilization of
November 21, 1948
627
existing resources. International capital flow
tends to be accompanied by managerial and tech-
nical skills and the latest technological knowledge
and machinery, and for this reason may contribute
to a wide sector of the economy to which it moves.
Our policy is to encourage tlie maximum free
movement of international investment capital.
We ourselves know the benefits of foreign capital,
for mucli of our early American economic de-
velopment was made possible only by foreign in-
vestors. Today, most of the demands for inter-
national capital are centered on the United States,
and we have made vast sums available to other
countries, either as regular loans, governmental
and private, as direct investments by private cor-
porations, or as gifts.
In general, the field of development of natural
resources seems to us more appropriate for pri-
vate investors than for the United States Govern-
ment, and we have encouraged borrowers to go to
private sources of capital wherever possible. Un-
fortunately, many borrowers are less eager for pri-
vate capital than for governmental capital, al-
though the latter is strictly limited in amount and
in approved uses. As a result of the many bar-
riers to the entry of private capital into other coun-
tries, many countries of the world today have had
and are continuing to have a much smaller flow of
investment capital than they might otherwise re-
ceive. The consequence of this situation, of course,
is that their resources contribute less than they are
able, both because they are relatively undeveloped
and because they are being wastefully developed.
To repeat, we are convinced that both lender and
borrower gain from a wise investment of capital,
and it is our policy to encourage the flow of private
investment capital both in the interest of our own
lenders and in the interest of the economic de-
velopment and wise resource utilization of the bor-
rowing countries.
It is impossible to mention the potential gain
from moving capital across national boundaries so
that it can maximize the productivity of labor and
land in other countries, without touching at least
briefly on the possibilities of moving people so
that they can work with existing resources. It is
fairly clear that some redistribution of people
could raise the productivity of workers and hence
the total world product, both in the primary in-
dustries and in others. Within the United States,
for example, the mobility of our labor force is
one of the great sources of our economic strength. .
There are, however, numerous difficulties in the
way of migration in many parts of the world,
although some measures have been carried out to
bring workers fi'om surplus areas to labor-short-
age areas such as Canada, Australia, and Argen-
tina.
The tliird and potentially most important inter-
national method of progressing toward these goals
is the development, dissemination, and application
of increasingly efficient technology. It is fair to
say that the development of such techniques is far
ahead of their application. This lag in applica-
tion does not mean that we should slow up on de-
velopment, but it underlines the imperative neces-
sity of much more energetic measures to dissemi-
nate technical information on resource utilization
and conservation. Much of this already takes
place through private channels — through the
press, the technical journals, the radio, the educa-
tioiial system, even the movies— and the more that
can be done in this way the better. Certainly, we
should help to destroy all governmental barriers
not only to the free flow of news but also, so far as
security considerations permit, of technical infor-
mation. Capital rarely moves abroad these days
without a substantial store of techiiical informa-
tion and techniques moving with it, so our encour-
agement of capital flow is indirectly an encourage-
ment to the diffusion of technical knowledge. A
very interesting development of the last few years
in this field has been the formation of development
corporations, such as those in Latin America ini-
tiated by the Rockefeller interests, and the group
working in Liberia under the aegis of former Sec-
retary of State Edward Stettinius.
The times call for more than private communi-
cations and private capital, however, and there is
widespread interest in and approval of govern-
mental participation in the international sharing
of one of our greatest resources — our knowledge of
liow best to utilize resources. United States Gov-
ernment funds in this field are administered
through the Interdepartmental Committee on Sci-
entific and Cultural Cooperation. A variety of
technical missions and many interchanges of spe-
cialized personnel take place with the support of
the Committee, one of whose guiding principles is
the need to balance the development of physical
resources with the development of human
resources.
I
628
Deparfment of Sfate Bulletin
Tlie Export-Tniport Bank provides engineers
and technical advice in connection with the loans
it extends. In addition, the Institute of Inter-
American AfTairs has worked out with many of
our neighbors to the south a jointly supported and
jointly operated device called the '"Servicio", to
assist in disseminating technical information and
training, particularly in the health, agricultural,
and educational fields. The Economic Coopera-
tion Act provides specifically for the provision of
technical and engineering assistance to participat-
ing countries in Europe. We are now experiment-
ing with the assignment to our United States Em-
bassies abroad of scientific attaches for the purpose
of facilitating the exchange of scientific informa-
tion and technology. Our Government — unlike
those governments which censor not only the inter-
national transmission of information but even the
expression at home of heterodox scientific opin-
ion— our Government stands squarely behind the
greatest possible development of completely objec-
tive science and technology, and its fullest possible
sharing with other nations, except where security
considerations prevent.
Many of the international organizations in
which the United States participates have been
or will be active in different phases of the dis-
semination of teclinical knowledge; for example,
the Food and Agriculture Organization, the World
Health Organization, the United Nations Educa-
tional, Scientific and Cultural Organization, and
the Organization of American States. The
United Nations, and particularly the Economic
and Social Council, are also active in this field
and coordinate the work of the specialized agen-
cies. It was the Economic and Social Council that
took the initiative in calling the United Nations
Scientific Conference on the Conservation and
Utilization of Resources, scheduled for May 16-
June 3, 1949. This nuiltilateral approach is sup-
plemented and reinforced by the active bilateral
technical assistance programs mentioned above.
Over and above the specific foreign-policy ques-
tions raised by specific resource problems is the
fact that one of the fundamental purposes of our
foreign policy is that the United States play an
appropriate role in establishing political and eco-
nomic peace in the world. In implementation of
that policy, we have given our full support to the
United Nations and to the specialized interna-
tional agencies, including the Monetary Fund, the
International Bank, and the projected Interna-
tional Trade Organization.
We have supplemented these efforts by con-
crete and material assistance to almost all countries
of the world, including the Eastern European
countries, in recovering from the economic dislo-
cations of the war. We have been the leading fac-
tor in halting the advance of that totalitarian ag-
gression that feeds on economic distress and politi-
cal chaos. Currently, our major effort is the task
of completing economic recovery in Europe.
Finally, it is imiDortant to emphasize that the
question of whether the world's resources will be
adequate in the future to provide for essential hu-
man needs is to a large extent a matter of inter-
national relations. If there is no real settlement of
the political and ideological tensions with which
we are now afflicted, a large part of the resources
which may be available will be wasted in main-
taining huge security establishments or in the su-
preme waste of war itself. The full development
of potential resources can occur only if interna-
tional conditions are such as to facilitate the inter-
change of technical knowledge, the flow of goods,
and the transfer of capital.
November 21, 1948
629
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
General Assembly Considers Steps for Reduction off Armaments
STATEMENT BY FREDERICK H. OSBORN IN COMMITTEE M
U.S. Delegate to the General Assembly
The resolution on disarmament before the Com-
mittee refers to the fact that "the reduction of
conventional armaments and armed forces can
only be attained in an atmosphere of real and
lasting improvement in international relations".
In my remarks today, Mr. Chairman, I should
like to discuss what must be done to attain, first,
this "atmosphere of real and lasting improve-
ment in international i-elations" which we all de-
sire, and, second, the facts about armaments in the
world today.
Mr. Chairman, there has been too little analysis
of why there is an atmosphere of fear and dis-
trust in the world today. Soviet Representa-
tives here, like their rulers in the Kremlin, seem
to us to ignore the real causes for the present ten-
sion. They pass over lightly the history of the
past three years. They seem to have forgotten
the shift in their policies which has taken place
since we were so recently comrades-in-arms, fight-
ing side by side in a common cause.
During the war the American people sympa-
thized with the Russian people, as we always have
sympathized with a nation attacked by an aggres-
sor. We gave the Soviet Union every help we
could, without asking any questions.
The people of Russia fought heroically to de-
fend their country. They were told that the war
was a war of defense. They were not told that
the war was about Communism. But after the
war Stalin's interpretation of Communism was
again made a major factor in international rela-
tions. It was only after the war that Soviet
leaders reconstructed the dialectic of the early
days of the revolution and with equal emphasis
in 1947 and 1948 stressed the inevitability of a
struggle between the Soviet brand of Communism
and the so-called capitalist states. Examples of
their present attitude are so numerous that they
might be quoted for hours on end. Let me take
only a single and very recent example. The New
York Times of November 5th carries an article
which states the following: In the current issue
' Made on Nov. 11, 1948, and released to the press on the
same date. Mr. Osborn is the Deputy U.S. Representative
to the Atomic Energy Commission and is on the Commis-
sion for Conventional Armaments.
630
of Bolshevik, organ of the Central Committee of
the Communist Party of the Soviet Union, there
is an extensive article which urges that the foreign
Communist Parties transform themselves into
revolutionary parties dedicated to preparing the
way for armed revolt. According to the author,
Mr. Burdzhalov, this is a return to the original
Leninist doctrine. He quoted Prime Minister
Stalin as saying that the parliamentary struggle
was only a school for organizing the extra-parlia-
mentary revolutionary means of struggle. Mr.
Burdzhalov added that "direction of the revolu-
tionary activities of the masses is the basic activity
of the Communists". I will not go on with the
rest of the article. But it is clear that such pro-
nouncements, in which we may include Mr. Molo-
tov's prediction of a year ago that "all roads lead
to Communism", do not create an atmosphere of
confidence.
Mr. Vyshinslcy himself has not allayed our anx-
iety. He has quoted Lenin on "capitalist encircle-
ment" and impressed upon us that Communism is j
the gravedigger of our so-called capitalism. These j
facts make clear that the Soviet Union is once J
again publicly professing the aim of world revo-
lution.
Behind the tightly sealed borders of the Soviet!
state almost 10 percent of the world's people are!
kept ignorant of what goes on in the outside world.
The people of the rest of the world are disturbed ]
at the thought of what may be going on behind!
this veil of secrecy. They are forced to believe,]
from available information, that the Soviet Un-
ion has far more men imder arms than any otherj
nation.
With this strange background of arms and se-
crecy, the Soviet Union since the war has done!
things which have been bad for international rela- j
tions.
The Soviet Union has forcibly annexed terri-
tory. The Soviet Union has destroyed the hopefull
progress of representative government in the coun-f
tries of eastern and central Europe. The Soviet!
Union has obstructed the negotiations of peace
treaties with Germany and Japan. The Soviet
Union has refused to accept the plan of the United
Nations for the control of atomic energy and the
prohibition of atomic weapons which 46 other na-
Department of Stale Bulletin
tions find acceptable in principle. Soviet Repre-
sentatives have cast 28 vetoes in the Security Coun-
cil, many of which specifically blocked the peaceful
settlement of disputes. Their summary rejection
of the neutrals' plan to settle the Berlin question
is fresh in our memories. There is every evidence
that the Soviet Union is actively trying to prevent
the reconstruction and improvement of living con-
ditions in western Europe.
These actions force us to believe that the Soviet
Union is pursuing the aim of world revolution and
of destroying the economic and political systems
which other peoples have chosen for themselves.
Thus the Soviet Union has created a spirit of in-
quietude in the rest of the world. The inquietude
is made worse when the Soviet Union repeats over
and over things that the rest of the world knows
are not true.
It is pure nonsense to say that the United States
desires to attack the Soviet Union. Any person
who reads history knows that the people are mas-
ters of the government they have established in
the United States; and that the people want peace.
They would not permit a war of aggression. We
constantlj' hear from the Soviet Union that the
American "people" do not control their govern-
ment. "What nonsense ! Certainly after the events
of the past week Mr. Vyshinsky should know be-
yond the shadow of a doubt that the American
people choose their leaders in free, unfettered elec-
tions and that no policy can be pursued which is
not supported and sanctioned by the American
people.
The Russian people themselves have no such op-
portunities to choose their own leaders. When
they do, a milestone in human progress will have
been attained.
In carrying out the mandate of the people, the
United States has taken very specific steps to im-
prove world confidence and to better the chances
for peace.
The United States has offered to give up the
atomic bomb, to turn over all its atomic plants to
an international agency, and to accept the prohibi-
tion of atomic weapons under the conditions of
strict control approved by the overwhelming ma-
jorit}' of this General Assembly.
The United States, believing that lasting peace
demands healthy economic conditions, has put
into effect and is cooperating with the countries of
western Europe in a program of economic recon-
struction and rehabilitation. This cooperative en-
terprise has been closed to no nation and its terms
have been dictated by no nation.
The United States has exerted its efforts to
strengthen the United Nations. We are fully par-
ticipating in all of its agencies. By contrast, the
Soviet Union has refused to participate in most
of the specialized agencies of the United Nations.
I am not trying to fix the blame or credit for
November 21, 1948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
these things. I am only trying to place before
you the facts as they appear to us in the United
States and also apparently to most of the people of
western Europe.
On the basis of these facts, it seems clear that we
will not attain "an atmosphere of real and last-
ing improvement in international relations" as a
prerequisite to disarmament, as required by this
resolution, until the Soviet Union, not only by its
words but in its actions, ceases to threaten the
world with Communist aggression.
I now come to the facts about armaments. A
realistic discussion of disarmament must be based
on consideration of the status of the present pro-
duction of armaments by the different nations as
well as on their arms and armies. Let us consider
first the state of arms production.
Much detail has been published in all the West-
ern nations which shows the amounts of money
now being spent on producing various types of
arms for gi-ound forces and air forces and naval
forces. These sums of money are published in
budgets voted by congresses or parliaments. And
in the Western countries, budgets are scrutinized
meticulously and frequently criticized and con-
tested by elected representatives of the people.
The Western states, after enormous expendi-
tures during the war, have reduced their appro-
priations for the production of arms and for mil-
itary forces to a relatively normal peacetime figure.
I am most familiar with United States statistics.
At the peak of the war years, American military
expenditures were more than 80 billion dollars a
year. Today, three years later, and taking into
account those military expenditures forced upon
us by present conditions of world insecurity, the
United States is spending approximately 13 bil-
lion dollars for defense purposes, or less than one
sixth of the amount during a war year. Alto-
gether, at the present time, the United States is
spending approximately 6 percent of its total na-
tional income on defense.
Tlie reduction in the number of men in our
Army, Navy, and Air Force was even gi'eater:
from more "than 12 million on June 30, 1945, to
well less than a million and a half on December
31, 1947.
Immediately after the destruction of the Japa-
nese and German armies, the overwhelming
weight of American production, which had been
concentrated on our common enemies, was turned
at once to the peacetime uses of the American
people. In addition, the industrial production of
the American worker has provided goods and food-
stuffs to help countries which had been occupied
during the war, in order to restore their peacetime
economies. These deliveries of goods and food-
stuffs abroad were made through the contributions
of the United States to the United Nations Relief
and Rehabilitation Administration, and more re-
cently through the Marshall Plan.
631
THB UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
Such a peaceful use of our productive capacities
was a clear expression of the basic desire of the
people of the United States. This desire remains
unclianged. The American people want to pro-
duce for peace and not for war. But they are not
ready to jeopardize tlieir security. When during
the past three years they realized that other na-
tions remained heavily armed, indeed, appeared to
be rearming, they took the steps necessary for
their own protection. They began diverting some
part of their production to defense. They did so
with reluctance. They did so by necessity, not by
choice. They realize only too well that any such
decision means a corresponding reduction in the
materials available for the economic and social
improvement which is the road to world stability
and to world security.
At the present thne, 04 percent of the total na-
tional income of the United States is directed to
peaceful purposes. This is the productive power
whicli, when turned to other uses, has made the
United States so powerful in two world wars. But
it takes time to turn it from peaceful use into pro-
duction for war. Its present use is clear evidence
of our peaceful intent.
Now let us look for a moment at Soviet produc-
tion of military supplies and at the Soviet armies.
Tlie Soviet Union does not follow the example of
the countries of the Western world in publishing
details regarding the strength of its armed serv-
ices, or of monies spent on armaments. The Soviet
Union does not have a congress or parliament con-
taining an opposition free to analyze, dispute, and
seek confirmation of government figures. We must
therefore use the best published estimates avail-
able.
._ On the basis of such estimates, it appears that
in the Soviet Union approximately 16 percent of
the national income is now turned to munitions
and the support of vast armies ; which is more than
double the proportion spent in the United States,
or, indeed, in other Western European countries.
This is a strange situation. The Kussian people do
not want war. The Soviet leaders do not need to
convince us of that. The Russian worker, like
the American worker, wants peace, security for
his family, and the opportunity to improve his sit-
uation in life. We recognize that the Soviet Union
has made progress in reconstruction and rehabili-
tation since the end of the war. In spite of tlie
iron-clad restrictions placed on the travel of for-
eigners in the Soviet Union, our representatives
there have seen an improvement in living condi-
tions for Soviet citizens. But we know also that
these conditions are not imjiroving more rapidly
because so much of the production of Soviet fac-
tories is going into war materials. This repre-
sents a huge drain away from peacetime improve-
ments.
In order that tlie Soviet worker may accept this
situation, he is kept in the fear and dread of war
632
by the government itself. He depends for his
information upon his government-controlled and
strictly censored press, radio, stage, and cinema.
He hears only the news his rulers wish him to hear.
It is distorted for their own purposes.
When Mr. Vyshinsky makes one of his violent
sj^eeches in a session of this General Assembly,
every word he utters is printed in Pravda, Izvestia,
and the newspapers throughout the vast Soviet
Union. His speech of October 13 took up a large
part of three successive issues of the leading Mos-
cow papers. We have no objection to that — the
verbatim texts of Mr. Vyshinsky's speeches appear
in the American press. But the Soviet citizen
seldom, if ever, gets the chance to read the text of
a speech by a representative of a Western power.
Instead he can read only brief, tendentious, dis-
torted reports of such speeches which effectively
prevent him from getting an accurate picture of
our debates here. As an example of such distorted
and inaccurate reporting, the Moscow papers of
October 13 stated that in Ambassador Austin's
speech of October 12 he had made "a whole series
of slanderous statements founded on the forged
documents of the Hitlerites and used early this
year by the United States State Department".
I need only comment in passing that not one single
sentence of that speech came from a German docu-
ment. Stalin's congratulatory telegram to Rib-
bentrop, which Mr. Vyshinsky implied was a
forged document, was published at the time in
the Soviet press and in Communist newspapere
tliroughout the world, including the issue of De-
cember 28, 1939, of the Daily Worker.
I am sometimes gravely apprehensive, Mr.
Chairman, that the Russian man-in-the-street may
not be the only Soviet citizen holding a warped
and twisted view of the world outside the borders
of tlie Union of Soviet Socialist Republics. My
misgivings arise from statements made in this
committee by Mr. Vyshinsky and by recent public
statements emanating from Moscow. I am led to
wonder whether the rulers of the Soviet Union,
tlie members of tlie Politburo themselves, may not
come to believe the frightening and false propa-
ganda picture of a world wanting to attack their
country. I hope such is not the case, and I am
reluctant to believe it so. I trust that the mem-
bers of the Politburo, if not the Russian people,
will have access to and will read carefully the ver-
batim records of this session of the General As-
sembly. If they are not then convinced of the
good faith of non-Communist nations represented
about this table and of the fact that these nations
are not planning and will not undertake aggressive
war against the Soviet Union, then I say these
gentlemen are blind and impervious to the truth.
The Soviet citizen yearns for a better life. He
would hope that he might live in less crowded con-
ditions, that he might buy better clothes for his
family, more books for his children, and even some
Department of State Bulletin
of (lie motlorn eloctricul appliances — toasters,
irons, and refrigerators, which are beginning to
appear on the shelves of Moscow department
stores. The Soviet citizen would hope that the
millions of political prisoners working in mines
and factories might be replaced by free workers
freely hired. He would hope that he might have
freedom of choice in his work and place of em-
ployment.
But the Soviet Government through all its or-
gans of publicity is telling the Soviet worker that
he cannot have these things because the Western
nations are threatening him with another war.
AVe may well ask, why does the Soviet Govern-
ment tell its people things that no other people,
no other nation, believes to be true? Why is it
that the Soviet Government demands such a ter-
rible sacrifice from the Russian people? Is it
because the rest of the world is even more heavily
armed and therefore is dangerous to the Russian
people ? Again, let us look at the facts as they are
available.
It is our understanding from published figures
which the Soviet l^nion has not denied, that the
Soviet Union has under arms at the present time
forces totaling around four million men, and its
associated states another two million. Taking into
account the proportion between service troops and
combat troops and the size of Soviet divisions, this
number woidd mean considerably more than 250
divisions of combat troops for the Soviet Union
and the states under its control.
The Soviet states apparently have available com-
bat troops at least five times more numerous than
those of all Western European states put together.
And bear in mind that it is combat troops which
are the weapons of conquest and occupation. It
is only the foot soldiers who can conquer, occupy,
and subjugate the territory of neighbors. The
rulers of the Soviet Union know this. They
learned it from the Germans.
A reduction of one third would not change the
disproportion in Soviet armies. So it would not
relieve the anxieties of other nations. If the re-
duction in Soviet armies were to be carried out in
secret behind the Soviet borders it would not re-
move from other nations the element of suspicion
which is such a bar to peace.
Permit me again, Mr. Chairman, to undei-line
one of the most fundamental points in this ]irob-
lem. How can we know which of the nations
should reduce or have reduced their arms by one
third or by one half or by three fourths without
basic knowledge on which to make our decision,
and without real knowledge of what goes on behind
tlie Iron Curtain ? How can we decide the relative
strength of one nation vis-a-vis another, in terms
of numbers of men and types of arms? We must
have basic information.
The Soviet Union seems to look upon this ele-
mentary pi-iiiciple as an evil plot of non-Commu-
November 2 J, 1948
JH£ UNITBD NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
nist states to spy out the Soviet land. The United
States is built on the principle of national sov-
ereignty and no nation asks another to do what it
is not willing to do itself. Information in our
coinitries is already available ; in the Soviet Union
it is not. The Soviet Representatives dare to deny
the existence of the Iron Curtain. But Soviet citi-
zens and diplomats in the United States have al-
ways been free to travel in our countries wherever
and however they like; while the Soviet Union,
except for three or four specified cities, is now
hermetically sealed to the representatives of other
governments as it is to their citizens. Even foreign
diplomats are categorically prohibited from trav-
eling beyond .50 kilometers from Moscow. They
aie not now allowed to set foot in eight districts
within the 50 kilometer radius. They are thus lit-
erally imprisoned within the city limits of Moscow.
The fact that these restrictions were imposed dur-
ing this session of tlie General Assembly unfortu-
nately does not testify to the present desire of the
Soviet Government for cooperation and mutual
understanding.
I repeat, none of us asks the Soviet Union to
do more than our own governments are willing
to do. But we fail to see how progress toward dis-
armament can be made until we all accept the basic,
elementary principles of a mutual exchange and
verification of information.
Let me return to consider that "improvement in
international relations" which I mentioned at the
beginning. How can we bring this about?
By accepting the principles of the Charter of
the United Nations the Soviet Union pledged itself
to cooperation for peace in the world community.
Can it be that the Soviet Union, having signed
the Charter, at the same time believes that war is
inevitable unless some of the members of the
United Nations change their systems of govern-
ment ?
Here then are the realities of the situation. The
Soviet Union is heavily armed; it is at present
kept in a position to carry on an aggressive war
for the continuance of its conquest of the territory
of other nations. The Soviet Union is spending a
larger proportion of its manpower and its re-
sources in preparation for war than are the West-
ern nations. It is the Soviet Union alone that is
carrying on a shrill government-directed propa-
ganda to prepare its people for war. The Soviet
Union alone is working behind a veil of secrecy.
How then can the rest of the world disarm ?
In this situation we meet to consider what steps
might be taken by the General Assembly in the
hope of bringing about a reduction of arms, and
a sense of security among the peoples of the world.
The Soviet proposal for a reduction of one third
in the armaments of the five major powers without
any verification would not bring about this result.
(Continued on page 641)
633
Progress Report on Conditions of Refugees in Near East
[Released to the press November 4]
Ralph Bundle, United Nations acting mediator
for Palestine, on October 18, 1948, submitted to the
United Nations a progress report ^ on the condi-
tions of refugees in the Near East. In his report
he made reference to the statements of the late
mediator, Count Bernadotte, who wrote on Sep-
tember 18:
The choice is between saving the lives of many
thousands of people now or permitting them to
die. The situation of the majority of these hap-
less refugees is already tragic, and to prevent them
from being overwhelmed by further disaster and to
make possible their ultimate rehabilitation, it is
my earnest hope that the international community
will give all necessary support to make the meas-
ures I have outlined fully effective. I believe that
for the international community to accept its share
of responsibility for the refugees of Palestine is
one of the minimum conditions for the success of
its efforts to bring peace to that land.
The acting mediator stated that the situation of
the Palestine refugees is now critical, and the
urgency of the need for assistance has been accen-
tuated. He further stated that, unless adequate
and effective aid comes quickly, the position of the
refugees will become desperate within a few weeks.
In his report he recalled that the figures cited in
September on this situation tentatively placed the
number of Arab refugees at 360,000, and the num-
ber of Jewish refugees at 7,000. He stated that the
figure for Jewish refugees remains the same, but
the figure for Arab refugees must be revised up-
wards to 472,000. The acting mediator called to
the attention of the United Nations the critical
shortage of food, the immediate need for clothing,
and the fact that some 95,000 are without shelter
of any sort.
The report of the acting mediator is borne out by
numerous reports from American missions in the
Near East. The refugees have been dependent up-
on the limited funds which they brought with them
from their homes, and upon the resources of the
governments in the states where they took refuge.
Both of these sources are now almost completely
exhausted. The situation is most critical in Pales-
tine and Transjordan. It is estimated that 84,000
refugees in central Palestine are still without shel-
ter, and roads are lined with people encamj^ed
' U.N. doc. A/6S9, Oct. 18, 1948, and A/689, Add. 1, Oct.
19, 1948.
634
under trees or in the open. Hospital facilities are
totally inadequate to meet the need ; in one area of
Palestine 1^0 suspected cases of typhoid were sent
back from a nearby clinic to sleep under the trees
because of the lack of hospital beds and medicines.
In southwestern Syria, refugees average 20 to a
fair-sized room. The infant mortality rate is high
in this area, and no physician is regularly avail-
able. In many areas, preventive inoculations
against diseases have not been undertaken because
the limited supplies of vaccines must be reserved
to fight actual outbreaks of disease.
The situation is particularly critical because the
refugees include an unusually high proportion of
"vulnerable" groups : it is estimated that 12 percent
consist of infants ; 18 percent are from 3 to 5 years
of age; 36 percent are from 6 to 18 years of age;
over 10 percent are pregnant women and nursing
mothers; and 8 percent consist of aged, sick, and
infirm people. The vulnerable total is, therefore,
approximately 85 percent of the refugee popula-
tion.
With a view to alleviating the increasingly criti-
cal conditions of Palestinian refugees of all com-
munities, the United States Delegation to the
General Assembly, in conjunction with the delega-
tions of the United Kingdom, Belgium, and the
Netherlands, introduced a resolution on October
29, 1948, calling for a United Nations program for
the relief of Palestinian refugees. The acting me-
diator has estimated that a program to meet the
minimum needs of these refugees until the next
harvest is reaped will cost about $30,000,000. The
proposed resolution urges all Members of the
United Nations to make voluntary contributions to
meet this need, and calls upon the specialized agen-
cies and voluntary organizations for supplies and
personnel to assist in relieving the desperate plight
of these refugees. The Department of State is
deeply hopeful that the General Assembly will act
speedily on this resolution.
American voluntary agencies have contributed
supplies and funds for the relief of these refugees
during the past few months and it is hoped that
their efforts will continue to meet with success.
The American Red Cross has already contributed
large quantities of medical supplies and other items
and has recently made a further contribution of
blankets and clothing. The American Appeal for
Holy Land Refugees, with headquarters at the
Near East Foundation, 54 East 64th Street, New
York, is continuing to mobilize American volun-
tary efforts.
Department of State Bulletin
Reports of the United Nations Special Committee on the Balkans'
The General Assembly,
1. Having consiperkd the Reports by the Special
Comniittee established by Resolution 109 (II) :
•2. Having noted the conclusions of the Special
Comniittee and in particular its unanimous conclu-
sion that, despite the aforesaid Resolution of the
General Assembly, "tlie Greek guerrillas have con-
tinued to receive aid and assistance on a large scale
from Albania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia, with the
knowledge of the G<n'ernments of those countries"
and that the (Jreek guerrillas in the frontier zones
liave, as found by the Special Committee :
(1) '"Been largely dependent on external sup-
ply. Great quantities of arms, ammunition and
other military stores have come across the border,
notably during times of heavy fighting. Strongly-
held positions of the guerrillas have protected their
vital supply lines from Bulgaria, Yugoslavia and,
in particular, from Albania. In recent months,
there has been less evidence of receipt of supplies
from Yugoslavia by the guerrillas".
(2) ''Frequently moved at will in territoi-y
across the frontier for tactical reasons, and have
thus been able to concentrate their forces without
interference by the Greek Army, and to return to
Greece when they wished".
(3) "Frequently retired safely into the territory
of Albania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia when the
Greek Army exerted great pressure".
3. Having noted further the conclusions of the
Special Committee that a continuation of this
situation ''constitutes a threat to the political in-
dependence and territorial integrity of Greece and
to peace in the Balkans" and ''that the conduct of
Albania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia has been incon-
sistent with the purposes and principles of the
Charter of the United Nations";
4. Having noted the recommendations submit-
ted by the Special Committee;
5. Considers that the continued aid given by Al-
bania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia to the Greek guer-
rillas endangers peace in the Balkans, and is in-
consistent with the purposes and principles of the
Charter of the United Xations.
6. Calls upon Albania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia
to cease forthwith rendering any assistance or sup-
port in any form to the guerrillas fighting against
the Greek Government; including the use of their
territories as a base for the preparation or launch-
ing of armed action :
7. Again calls upon Albania, Bulgaria and
Yugoslavia to co-operate with Greece in the settle-
ment of their disputes by peaceful means in accord-
ance with recommendations contained in Resolu-
tion 109(11) ;
8. Calls upon Albania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia
to co-operate with the Special Committee in en-
abling it to carry out its functions and upon Greece
to continue to co-operate toward the same end;
9. Recommends to all Members of the United
Nations and to all other states that their Govern-
ments refrain from any action designed to assist
directly or through any other government any
armed group fighting against the Greek Govern-
ment ;
10. Approves the activities of the Special Com-
mittee to date, continues it in being with the func-
tions conferred upon it by Resolution 109(11) and
instructs it :
(a) To continue to observe and report on the
response of Albania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia to
the General Assembly injunction not to furnish
aid to the Greek guerrillas in accordance with Gen-
eral Assembly Resolution 109(11) and the present
Resolution;
(b) To continue to utilize observation groups
witli personnel and equipment adequate for the
fulfilment of its task;
(c) To continue to be available to assist the
Governments of Albania, Bulgaria, Greece and
Yugoslavia in the implementation of Resolution
109(11) and of the present Resolution;
11. Authorizes the Special Committee to con-
sult, in its discretion, with the Interim Committee
(if it is continued) with respect to the j^erform-
ance of its functions in the light of developments;
12. Requests the Secretary-General to provide
the Special Comniittee with adequate staff and
facilities to enable it to perform its functions.
The United States in the United Nations
[November 13-19]
Control of Armaments
The General Assembly declared on November
19 that all nations should possess "exact and au-
thenticated" data on tiie arms and armed forces
of otlier nations and that ''real and lasting im-
provement in international relations" is required
before measures for international disarmament
can be safely instituted.
The world body so declared by adopting the
Belgian resolution on disarmament accepted by
November 21, 7948
the great majority in the Assembly Political Com-
mittee on November 13. The vote in the General
Assembly was 43 to 6 with the Soviet and other
Eastern European countries opposing.
John Foster Dulles, U.S. Delegate, termed the
Belgian resolution a ".sound foundation for the
control of armaments."
• U. N. doe A/C. 1/352, Oct. 26, 1948, draft resolution
by China, France, the U.K., and the U.S.
635
THE UNITBD NATIONS AND SPEC/AUZED AGENCIES
The resolution specifies that a condition for reg-
ulation and reduction of ai-nis and armed forces
is effective atomic controls under which atomic
weapons will be banned. It calls on the Security
Council's Conventional Armaments Commission
to develop disarmament plans to be effected when
the desired improvement in international relations
is brought about and atomic controls are instituted.
It calls for cooperation of all members of that
Commission, which comprises the Security Council
membership.
Under the majority proposal, the Commission's
first task would be the formulation of procedures
for checking and publishing data on national arm-
aments.
Mr. Vishinsky, the Soviet Delegate, re-echoed
his statement of November 13 that the Soviet
Union would submit armaments data only to an
international control agency. The Soviet resolu-
tion, which was rejected by a vote of 38 to 6 on
November 13 by Committee I, however, made no
provision for verification. In past discussions the
Soviet Union has opposed verification by an inter-
national organ of data submitted by individual
governments.
The Soviet proposal also called for prohibition
of atomic weapons under an international control
agency within the framework of the Security
Council. However, this aspect was dealt with
previously when the Assembly decisively endorsed
the Atomic Commission plan for an international
agency with broad powers to supervise all atomic
materials and facilities to insure atomic energy for
peaceful uses only.
Implementation of this atomic plan has been
blocked by Soviet contention that it would usurp
national prerogatives and generally open the way
for interference by the rest of the world, and the
United States in particular, with the Soviet
economy.
Speaking for the Belgian resolution on disarm-
ament, Mr. Dulles emphasized that the first re-
quirement "is the ability to' obtain complete and
accurate, verified and comprehensive" information
on world armaments.
"That ability would itself create confidence and
avoid the present risk that nations will create arm-
aments in order to meet the imagined armaments
of others," Mr. Dulles observed, adding: "Igno-
rance, fear and suspicion can breed an armaments
race that will itself be provocative of war".
Referring to Soviet objections, Mr. Dulles
stated :
"Some nations in the name of sovereignty refuse
to accept international controls. They contend
national promises and national reports ought to
be an acceptable substitution for international con-
trol and international verification. The fact is
national promises and iniverified official reports
will not serve to allay suspicion. Histoi'y has too
636
often proved their unreliability . . . Suspi-
cion and fear will persist unless there are effective
international controls. Any nation that refuses
to do what is in fact necessary to allay fear and
suspicion is itself a contributor to conditions that
breed war."
Palestine Refugee-Aid Plan
A $29,500,000 relief program for the half-mil-
lion Palestine war refugees was approved unani-
mously on November 19 by the General Assembly.
The program, which is based on a proposal made
by the United States, Britain, Belgium, and the
Netherlands, also provides for an immediate ad-
vance of $5,000,000 from working capital to start
supplies flowing to the Near East refugee camps.
The $29,500,000, plus an additional $2,500,000
for administrative and operational expenses,
would be raised through voluntary contributions
from Member and non-Member states, and the
$5,000,000 advance is to be repaid from this total
amount.
The program is to' extend for nine months, end-
ing on August 1, 1949, when the next harvest is
expected to bring improved conditions.
The Assembly also authorized the Secretary-
General to appoint a director for Palestine refugee
relief. He is to be assisted by a seven-member
advisory committee.
Berlin Currency Problems
As the President of the Security Council, Juan
A. Bramuglia, pressed for a solution to the Berlin
controversy by seeking to find agreement for the
currency problem, U.S. Secretary of State Mar-
shall on November 18 summoned to Paris financial
and monetary experts from Washington and
Berlin.
They will assist the U.S. Delegation in prepar-
ing answers to a questionnaire which President
Bramuglia submitted to the Western powers and
to the U.S.S.R. in his latest move to solve the im-
passe over Berlin. The questionnaire asks pri-
marily for technical information on how to obtain
Big Four control of the Soviet mark in Berlin.
Both Mr. Bramuglia and the Secretary-General
have experts examining the currency question. The
United States, hopeful that the studies will be
coordinated in such manner as to avoid duplica-
tion, has expressed willingness to cooperate with
either Mr. Bramuglia or Sir. Lie but has empha-
sized that its prime interest is in the Security
Council's efforts.
As indicated in the August 30 directive agreed
on at Moscow between envoys of the three Western
powers and Soviet leaders, the United States
always has been ready to seek a solution of the
Berlin currency problem. Likewise, the United
States assumes that the introduction of the Soviet
Deparfmenf of Sfafe Bulletin
zone mark as the currency for all of Berlin under
Four Power control is technically feasible.
Assembly Approves Permanent Headquarters
Report
In a plenary meeting, the General Assembly oil
November 18 unanimously approved Secretary-
General Lie's report on establishing pennanent
lieadquarters in New York City and noted with
satisfaction the United States agreement to lend
tlie international organization $65,000,000 for
building.
Interim Committee
The United States on November 17 called for
continuation of the Interim Committee for an-
other experimental year and urged all members,
including the Soviet bloc, to cooperate in the body's
work.
The Interim Committee, set up to expedite and
maintain continuity of Assembh' work between
regular Assembly sessions, has concerned itself
mostly during the past year with studj' of the veto
problem and advising the Korean Commission.
Great Britain. India, the Dominican Republic,
and Ecuador were among others supporting con-
tinuation of tlie Interim Committee and calling for
participation by all members. Poland, however,
reiterated its opposition.
Discussion of the Interim Committee's future
was the first item on the agenda of the new ad. hoc
committee which was created to relieve the Politi-
cal Committee of some of its work. On November
20 the Committee voted 44 to 6 to extend the In-
terim Committee for another year.
Palestine Armistice Proposal
The Security Council on November 16 called on
Israel and the Arab States to draw up an armistice
covering all parts of Palestine. It adopted para-
graph by paragraph a Canadian-sponsored resolu-
tion directing the warring parties to negotiate
directly or througlv United Nations acting medi-
ator, Ralph Bunche, regarding the establishment
of demarcation lines and withdrawal or reduction
of armed forces to insure maintenance of the arm-
istice pending permanent settlement in Palestine.
Eight of the Security Council's member nations
voted for the armistice order, with Syria opposing
the operative part and the U.S.S.R. and the
Ukraine abstaining. Tlie Council rejected a Sy-
rian amendment aimed at extending to Galilee,
in northern Palestine, a previous order for with-
drawal of Israeli forces in the Negev desert area.
Only Syria, China, and Belgium supported this
plan.
The armistice directive was appi'oved after a
Soviet resolution which would have called for
immediate establishment of formal peace in Pales-
tine was rejected.
Philip Jessup, United States Deputy Represent-
November 21, 1948
813314 — IS 3
THE UNITBD NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
ative, termed the Soviet measure not yet practica-
ble; however, he supported the armistice resolu-
tion, terming it the first ti-ansitional step from a
truce to permanent peace.
Committee I Rejects Invitation to North Korea
Delegates
An attempt by the Soviet and Eastern European
countries in Committee I (Political and Security)
to have representatives of the so-called North
Korean Peoples Government invited to partici-
pate in forthcoming discussion of the Korean
question was rejected on November 15 by a vote
of 38-0, with six abstentions.
The Committee supported the contention of the
U.S. Delegate, John Foster Dulles, that the U.N.
Temporary Commission on Korea, as a kind of
"credentials Committee", should be heard first.
Mr. Dulles also reminded committee members that
the U.N. Commission had been denied entrance to
the northern, or Soviet zone of Korea, where the
"Peoples Government" was established through
"elections" which the Commission was not per-
mitted to observe.
A nine-member delegation from the Republic
of Korea whose capital is at Seoul in South Koi'ea
has made a formal request to participate in Com-
mittee and Assembly discussions of the Korean
question.
Balkan States Discuss Greek Dispute
Representatives of Albania, Bulgaria, Yugo-
slavia, and Greece in Paris held their first joint
discussions with U.N. mediators on November 15
in an effort to settle the Balkan dispute through
direct negotiation.
After having met separately with the U.N. offi-
cials on November 12, representatives of Greece
and her three northern neighbors met collectively
with the mediators for the first time. Officials
serving as mediators were Herbert Evatt, Presi-
dent of the General Assembly, Secretary-General
Ti-ygve Lie, and Selim Sarper of Turkey, Rappor-
teur of Committee I.
Trusteeship
The Assembly acted on November 18 on several
resolutions relating to trusteeship of dependent
areas. Two that were approved call on adminis-
tering powers to accelerate progressive develop-
ment toward self-government or independence of
the trust territories under them. Another urges
nations to increase the expenditure for education
of the inhabitants of territories for which they
are responsible and to provide free primary school-
ing for all. A fourth recommends that the Trus-
teeship Council investigate every aspect of the
question of administrative unions between trust
territories and adjacent political entities and sug-
gest any safeguards it deems necessary to preserve
the "distinct political status" of trust territories.
637
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES
U.S. Delegations to International Meetings
ILO: Petroleum
The Department of State announced on Novem-
ber 9 that the following are representing the
United States at the Second Session of the Peti o-
leum Committee of the International Labor
Organization (Ilo) which opened on November 9
at Geneva for a period of approximately ten days.
Government Kepresentatives
Delegates
Arnold I-. Zempel. Associate Director, Office of Inter-
I tional Labor AfCairs, Department of Labor
David E Lonfianecker, Assistant Chief, Petroleum Di-
vision, Department of State
Alternate Delegate and Adviser
Robert E Friedman, Associate Director, Oil and Gas Di-
vision, Department of the Interior
Adviser
Hersev E. Riley, Chief, Branch of Construction Statistics,
Bureau of Labor Statistics, Department of Labor
Employees' Representatives
Delegates
John C Quiltv, Manager of Industrial Relations, Shell
Oil Company, Inc., New York City Pnmmnv
C Francis Beatty, Director, Socony-Vacuum Oil Company,
Inc., New York City
Advisers
Channing Rice Dooley, Training Within Industry Founda-
ValentTie'n" Ludwii' General Manager, Employee Re-
lations Department, Gulf Oil corporation, Pittsburgh,
Jamfs'^W Rees, Assistant Vice President, Pure Oil Com-
R B''RoaperDi°reclor of Safety, Humble Oil and Re-
fining Company, Houston, Tex.
WoBKERS' Representatives
Delegates
Charles A. Evans, Business Representative of Local Union
No. 12, International Union of Operating Engineers,
Los Aneeles, Calif. . ^ .
Alexis E. Laster, International Representative, Inter-
national Union of Operating Engineers, El Monte,
Calif.
The agenda for the meeting includes: (1) a
general report dealing with the action taken in
the various countries to give effect to the resolu-
tions of the first session of the Committee, held at
Los Angeles in February 1947, and recent events
638
and developments in the industry; (2) discussion
of recruitment and training for the petroleum in-
dustry; (3) report on safety and health; and (4)
the problem of industrial relations in the industry
as effecting trade-union organization and recog-
nition, developments in collective bargaining, and
actual methods for handling disputes. .
The Petroleum Committee is one of eight in-
dustrial committees of the Ilo established for the
purpose of examining social and economic aspects
of international labor standards in the respective
industries and adopting resolutions for their im-
provement.
British Parliamentary Association
[Released to the press November 12]
United States congressional representatives to
the British Parliamentary Association meeting
which convened at Hamilton, Bermuda, on Novem-
ber 15 left Washington on November 13.
The chairman of the United States Delegation
is Senator Alexander Wiley of Wisconsin. Also
included are Senators Bourke B. Hickenlooper of
Iowa and Elbert D. Thomas of Utah, all members
of the Senate Foreign Relations Committee, and
Senator J. William Fulbright of Arkansas. The
chairman of the House Dele,gation is Representa-
tive Henry O. Talle of Iowa, the remainder includ-
ing Estes Kefauver of Tennessee, Senator-elect
from that state, and Robert J. Corbett of Pennsyl-
vania. In Bermuda they were met by heads ot
the Bermuda Government and United States con-
sular officials on duty there.
Tliis is the third such parliamentary conference
attended by representatives from all the British
Commonwealth Parliaments and delegates from
the United States Congress which has been held in
the Western Hemisphere. The first meeting took
place during the war in Ottawa, Canada, and
another conference was held again two years ago
in Hamilton, Bermuda.
Heading up the list of British Delegates are
John Wilmot, M.P., former Minister of SiipplJ
from the United Kingdom, Senator J. T. Haig,
K C, leader of the Progressive Conservative Party
in the Canadian Senate, and "Vernon H. Treatt,
KC, leader of the Opposition m New South
Wales, Australia. Delegates are also m attend-
ance from New Zealand, the Union of South
Africa, and Bermuda.
Department of State Bulletin
Air Navigation in Southeast Asia
The Deitartinciit of State announced on Novem-
ber 10 tlie United States Delegation to the first In-
ternational Civil Aviation Organization (Icao)
Regional Air Navigation Meeting for the South-
east Asia Region, convening at New Delhi, India,
November "J;?, 1948, for an approximate duration
of tliree weeks.
C Jut ir)ii tilt
Clifford v. Burton. Chief of the Technical Mission, Civil
Aeronautics Administration, Department of Com-
merce
Vice Chairman
Oscar Bakke, Flight Operations Specialist, Civil Aeronau-
tics Board
Alternates
James F. Angier, Chief of the Foreign Section, Civil Aero-
nautics -Administration
Norman U. Ilawn, Meteorological Attach^, American
Eniba.-isy, London
Victor J. Kayne, Airways Operations Specialist (Icao),
Civil Aeronautics Administration
R. F. Nicholson, Representative, Flight Operations
(la\o). Civil Aeronautics Administration
Lt. Comdr. Clement Vaughn, Jr., Search and Rescue
Agency, United States Coast Guard
Edwin L. White, Chief, Aviation Division, Federal Com-
munications Commission
Advisers
William B. Becker, Operations Division, Air Transport
Association
Gene L. Brewer, Airways Radio Specialist (Icao), Civil
.\eronautics .Administration
Capt. Etheridge Grant, USN, Head, Civil Aviation Branch,
Department of the Navy
Maj. Grove C. Johnson, Civil Liaison Branch, Hq., Mili-
tary Air Transport Service, Department of the Air
Force
Winton E. Modin, representing Aeronautical Radio, Inc.,
and Pan American Airways, Calcutta, India
George L. Rand, airways operations specialist, representa-
tive for International Telecommunications — Icao
retnonal organizations. Civil Aeronautics Adminis-
tration
Capt. .\rthnr Yorra, Chief, International and Interde-
partmental .\dvisory Group, Hq., Air Weather Service,
M.\TS, Department of the Air Force
Sccrctartj of Delegation
Steplien V. C. Morris, Division of International Confer-
ences, Department of State
About 20 governments are attending this meet-
ing which is examining problems of air navigation
and operations in the Southeast Asian region.
The delegates are preparing a plan of aids to navi-
gation and are recommending navigation practices
to raise the standards of civil aviation in the region
to those advocated by the Icao Council. The
meeting is following the usual pattern of regional
meetings of the Icao and the principal committees
formed include aerodromes, air routes and ground
aids, air-traflic control, flight operations, commu-
nications, meteorology, and search and rescue.
The practices and procedures recommended by the
meeting in these fields are being forwarded to the
>»CnV(n£$ AND DEVELOPMENTS
Council of Icao at Montreal for consideration and
approval.
A Fact Finding Group convened at New
Delhi approximately a week prior to the regional
meeting in order to examine and document opera-
tional data for the convenience and use of the main
meeting.
The Southeast Asia meeting is the ninth in
the original series of ten regional meetings
scheduled by Icao to survey aviation facilities
throughout the world. Upon the completion of
the series Icao expects to have an index of
facilities needed by international civil aviation on
all the important air routes of the world.
The preceding regional meeting, the North
Pacific Air Navigation Meeting, was held at Seat-
tle in July. The remaining regional meeting
projected by the Icao is the African-Indian
Ocean Meeting.
Fourth Session of FAO
The President appointed on November 13
Charles F. Brannan, Secretai-y of Agriculture, as
United States Member and Chairman of the
United States Delegation to the Fourth Session of
the Conference of the Food and Agriculture
Organization of the United Nations. This meet-
ing opened in Washington, D.C., on November 15,
1948. Named by the President to serve as Alter-
nate United States Members were : Albert J. Love-
land, Under Secretary of Agriculture; Fred J.
Rossiter, Associated Director, Office of Foreign
Agricultural Relations, Department of Agricul-
ture; and Edward G. Cale, Associate Chief, Inter-
national Resources Division, Department of State.
The President appointed also the following live
congressional advisers to the Delegation: George
D. Aiken, United States Senate- Elmer Thomas,
United States Senate; S. Otis I3]and, House of
Representatives; Harold D. Cooley, House of Rep-
resentatives; and Clifford R. Hope, House of Rep-
resentatives.
Other members of the United States Delegation
as annoiuiced on November 13 by the Acting Secre-
tary of State are as follows :
AdtHsers
Edward W. Allen, United States Commissioner, Interna-
tional Fisheries Commission and International Pacilic
Salmon Fisheries Commission
Andrew W. Anderson, Chief, Branch of Commercial Fish-
eries, Fish and Wildlife Service, Department of the
Interior
Stanley Andrews, Food Agriculture and Forestry Repre-
sentative, Omgus
Miss Persia Campbell, Vice Chairman, National Associa-
tion of Consumers
Wilbert M. Chapman, Special Assistant to the Under Sec-
retary, Department of State
Philip V. Cardon, Administrator, Agricultural Research
Administration, Department of Agriculture
Charles R. Carry, Director, Fishery Products Division,
National Canners Association
November 21, 1948
639
ACTIVITIES AND DBVBLOPMENTS
John H. Davis, Executive Secretary, National Council of
Farmer Cooperatives
Mrs. Ursula Duflfus, Economic, Financial and Communica-
tions Branch, Division of United Nations Economic
and Social Affairs, Department of State
Foster P. Elliott, Associate Chief, Bureau of Agricultural
Economies, Department of Agriculture
Carl N. Gibboney, Deputy Director, Commodities Division,
Office of International Trade, Department of Com-
merce
Tom H. Gill, Society of American Foresters
Albert S. Goss, Master, The National Grange
George Mason Ingram, Acting Chief, International Admin-
istration Staff, Office of United Nations Affairs,
Department of State
Charles B. Jackson, General Manager, National Fisheries
Institute
William A. Jump, Director, Office of Budget and Finance,
Department of Agriculture
William A. Minor, Jr., Assistant to the Secretary, Depart-
ment of Agriculture
Wesley R. Nelson, Assistant Commissioner, Bureau of
Reclamation, Department of the Interior
W. Raymond Ogg, Director, Department of International
Affairs, American Farm Bureau Federation
James G. Patton, President, National Farmers Union
Miss Hazel K. Stiebeling, Chief, Bureau of Human Nutri-
tion and Home Economics, Department of Agriculture
Ralph S. Trigg. Administrator, Production and Marketing
Administration, Department of Agriculture
Lyle F. Watts, Chief, Forest Service, Department of
Agriculture
Oris V. Wells, Chief, Bureau of Agricultural Economics,
Department of Agriculture
Miss Faith M. Williams. Director, Office of Foreign Labor
Conditions, Bureau of Labor Statistics, Department
of Labor
Milburn L. Wilson, Director, Extension Service, Depart-
ment of Agriculture
Technical Secretary
James O. Howard, Head, Division of Foreign Agricultural
Information, Office of Foreign Agricultural Relations,
Department of Agriculture
Executive Secretary
Henry F. Nichol, Division of International Conferences,
Department of State
Since the first three sessions of the Conference
were devoted primarily to problems of organiza-
tion, the Fourth Session should mark an important
step in the direction of devoting tliese annual meet-
ings to discussion on world food problems and to
specific proposals to deal with these problems.
It is expected that 57 member countries and a
number of international organizations will be rep-
resented at the Fourth Session. Also a number of
national organizations have been invited to at-
tend open sessions of the Conference.
The meeting is concerned mainly with: (1) the
world situation relating to tlie production, market-
ing, and consumption of food and agricultural
products, including fish and timber; (2) the tech-
nical activities of the Organization during the past
year and its program of work for 1949; and
(3) major constitutional, administrative, and
financial issues requiring decision by the Confer-
ence, including financial problems and the perma-
nent site of Fao headquarters.
640
In regard to the headquarters site, the United
States Government has recommended Washington
as the permanent headquarters for the Organiza-
tion and has made proposals concerning several
available sites. President H. C. Byrd of the Uni-
versity of Maryland, after consultation with Gov-
ernor William P. Lane, Jr., of Maryland, has
offered a site and assistance in financing a build-
ing on the campus. Copenhagen and Rome have
also made ofi'ers.
UNESCO: General Conference:
President Truman designated on November 10
five United States Representatives and five alter-
nates to the Third Session of the General Confer-
ence of the United Nations Educational, Scientific
and Cultural Organization (Unesco), which con-
vened at Beirut, Lebanon, on November 17.
United States Representatives
George V. Allen, Assistant Secretary of State for public
affairs, and Chairman of the Delegation
Milton S. Eisenhower, President, Kansas State College,
Manhattan, Kans., and Vice Chairman of the Delega-
tion
Luther H. Evans, Librarian of Congress
Waldo G. Leiand, Director Emeritus, American Council of
Learned Societies
Anne O'Hare McCormick, New York Times
Alternates
Kathleen Lardie, Division of Instruction of the Detroit
Public Schools, Detroit, Mich.
W. Albert Noyes, Jr., National Research Council, Wash-
ington, D. C.
Frederick D. G. Ribble, Dean, School of Law, University of
Virginia, Charlottesville, Va.
Joseph Rosier, President Emeritus, Fairmont State Teach-
ers College, Fairmont, W. Va.
George F. Zook, President, American Council on Educa-
tion, Washington, D. C.
Special Adviser to the Chairman
Charles A. Thomson, Director, Unissco Relations Staff,
Department of State
Advisers
Herbert J. Abraham, Assistant Director, Unesco Rela-
tions Staff, Department of State
Esther C. Brunauer, Assistant Director, Unesco Relations
Staff, Department of State
Ben M. Cherrington, Director, Social Science Foundation,
University of Denver, Denver, Colo.
Jolm Duffy Connors, Director, Workers Education Bureau
of America, New York, N. Y.
Samuel De Palma, Division of United Nations Economic
and Social Affairs, Department of State
Frederick Sherwood Dunn, Yale University, New Haven,
Conn.
Frank Grasso, Secretary-Treasurer, United Paperworkers
of America, Washington. D.C.
Michael Richard Hanna, Cornell University, Ithaca, N.Y.
George Keinieth Holland, Counselor on Unesco Affairs,
American Embassy, Paris
Charles M. Hulten, Deputy Assistant Secretary for Admin-
istration, Department of State
Kemlric N. Marshall, Director, Division of International
Educational Relations, United States Office of Educa-
tion
Richard P. McKeon, University of Chicago. Chicago, IlL
Otis E. Mulliken, Division of United Nations Economic
and Social Affairs, Department of State
Departmenf of Stafe Bulletin
Steplit'ii B. L. Penrose, President, American University,
Heirut, Lebanon
George U. Stoddard, President, University of Illinois,
Urbana, 111.
Louise Wright, Director, Chicago Council on Foreign Rela-
tions, Chicago, 111.
Excc-utive Secretary of the Delegation.
Henry J. Sabatini. Division of International Conferences,
Deiiartment of State
In accordance -with the Unesco constitution, the
Executive Board of Unesco, at its meeting at Paris
last February, prepared the draft agenda for the
Third Session of the General Conference. Among
the items on the agenda are: (1) report of the Di-
rector-General on the activities of the Organiza-
tion in 11)48; (2) consideration of reports submit-
ted by member states iit 1948; (3) discussion of
certain items in the program for 1948 and of new
activities proposed for 1949; (4) the Organiza-
tion's budget; (5) matters which have been raised
by member states, the United Nations, or other
specialized agencies; (6) organizational questions
including the National Commissions of Unesco;
(7) election of seven members to the Executive
Board; (8) appointment of the Director-General;
(9) consideration of recommendations of the Exec-
utive Board concerning the admission of new mem-
bers to the Organization; and (10) consideration
of recommendations of the Executive Board con-
cerning the admission of observers of international
nongovernmental organizations to the Third Ses-
sion of the General Conference.
The First Session of the Unesco Conference was
held at Paris in 1946. and the Second at Mexico
City in 1947. Forty-four member countries are
expected to send representatives to the Third
Session.
UNESCO's Executive Board, on which George D.
Stoddard is United States Representative, will
meet at Istanbul prior to the opening of the Beirut
conference.
The Unesco program in the United States is
largely the responsibility of the United States
National Commission for Unesco, established by
law to advise the Department of State on matters
relating to Unesco. Milton S. Eisenhower is
chairman of the National Commission, which is
composed of representatives of 60 national organ-
izations and some 40 members selected as indi-
viduals active in Unesco's fields of education,
science, and culture.
Second Inter-American Congress on Brucellosis
Dr. James H. Steele, Chief of the Veterinary
Public Health Section. States Relations Division
of the United States Public Health Service, was
appointed on November 12 Chairman of the
United States Delegation to the Second Inter-
American Congi-ess on Brucellosis, held at Men-
doza and Buenos Aires November 17-26, 1948.
Dr. C. K. Mingle of the Tuberculosis Eradication
Division of the Bureau of Animal Industry,
November 21, J 948
>»CnVIT(£S AND DEVELOPMENTS
Department of Agriculture, was named delegate.
The Brucellosis Congress, called by the Pan
American Sanitary Bureau, is discussing the epi-
demiology of the disease and proposes measures
for its t'ontrol. Brucellosis, as it affects humans,
is popularly known as "undidant fever" and
''Malta fever". It is transmitted to human beings
throu,gh animals. According to the Department
of Agriculture, the disease among animals results
in monetary losses of approximately 90 million
dollars a year in this country. It has been even
more widespread in some of the Latin American
countries.
The Congress meets first at Mendoza from
November 17-20 for discu.ssions on the control of
the disease; it reconvenes at Buenos Aires from
November 22-26 for sessions on the clinical aspects
and research developments. The First Inter-
American Congress on Brucellosis was held in
October 1946 at Mexico City.
Reduction of Armaments — Continued from page 633
It would perpetuate the present Soviet superiority
in aggressive forces. It would not reduce the
threat of Soviet aggression; it might indeed in-
crease that threat. It would not raise the veil of
secrecy behind which the rulers of the Soviet Union
operate and which constitutes such an injustice to
the Russian people and such a cause of suspicion
among nations.
In this situation the General Assembly should
seek by every possible means a release from the
tensions arising from the factors we have here de-
scribed. In the field of armaments the General
Assembly should develop as rapidly as possible
under the forms and through the agencies set up in
the United Nations for that purpose a plan for the
reduction and control of conventional arms and
armaments. Such a plan should provide a full
system of inspection, verification, and publication
and other safeguards to guarantee against viola-
tion. Having set up such a plan, we may hope
that the moral force of world opinion, together
with the evident advantages of operating within
the law in cooperation with other nations, may
bring the Soviet Union to change its attitude. This
is the proposal embodied in the resolution now be-
fore this committee. The United States will vote
for this resolution and will work loyally toward
carrying otit its purposes.
Real progress toward peace can only be made
by slow, careful steps. I have not despaired and I
hope none of us in this committee has despaired.
The resolution before us takes us one step toward
the control of armaments and toward those other
objectives we all seek. I hoi>e that the unanimity
which came as a breath of fresh air when we ac-
cepted the Mexican resolution, will again come to
us here.
641
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Announcement of Intention To Enter Tariff Negotiations
The Interdepartmental Trade Agreements Com-
mittee issued on November 5 formal notice of the
United States intention to participate in negotia-
tions with 11 foreign countries for reciprocal re-
duction of tariff and other trade barriers, looking
toward accession of those countries to the General
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade concluded at
Geneva on October 30, 1947, by the United States
and 22 other countries. The forthcoming nego-
tiations are scheduled to begin at Geneva on April
11, 1949. Plans for the negotiations were devel-
oped, and the date was set, at the second session
of the contracting parties to the General Agree-
ment, held at Geneva in August and September
of this year. Announcement of these plans was
made on September 22, 1948.'
The 11 countries which have expressed their de-
sire to accede to the General Agreement and to
participate in the forthcoming negotiations are:
Denmark, the Dominican Republic, El Salvador,
Finland, Greece, Haiti, Italy, Nicaragua, Peru,
Sweden, and Uruguay. The countries which par-
ticipated in the 1947 negotiations were : Australia,
Belgium, Brazil, Burma, Canada, Ceylon, Chile,
China, Cuba, Czechoslovakia, France. India, Leb-
anon, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, New Zealand,
Norway, Pakistan, Southern Rhodesia, Syria, the
Union of South Africa, the United Kingdom, and
the United States. All of these countries except
Chile had put the General Agreement into pro-
visional effect by July 31, 1948.
The countries participating in the 1947 negotia-
tions and the additional countries expected to par-
ticipate in the 1949 negotiations together account
for some two thirds by value of total United States
exports and almost three fourths of United States
imports, on the basis of 1947 figures.
The Trade Agreements Committee also made
public on November 5, as required by Executive
Order No. 10,004 of October 5, 1948, a list for each
country with which the United States proposes to
negotiate, of all products imported into the United
States on which possible tariff concessions may
be considered in the negotiations. The practice of
publishing such lists has been followed since 1937.
The procedure to be followed by the United
States Government in preparing for and carrying
out the negotiations is in line with that which has
been followed in previous trade-agreement nego-
tiations, with such modifications as are made neces-
sary by the Trade Agreements Extension Act of
" Bdxletin of Oct. 3, 1948, p. 445.
642
1948. Under section 4 of the Trade Agreements
Act of 1934, as amended, interested persons are
afforded an opportunity to present their views con-
cerning the proposed negotiations. Executive
Order 10,004 designated the Committee for Reci-
procity Information as the agency to receive such
views. The representative of the Department of
Commerce on the Trade Agreements Committee
is the chairman of the Committee for Reciprocity
Information.
The Committee for Reciprocity Information an-
nounced November 5 tliat public hearings will be
held beginning December 7. Applications to be
heard at the public hearings will be received until
November 29, and the application must indicate
the product or products, or other aspect of the ne-
gotiations, regarding which testimony is to be
presented. The closing date for receiving written
briefs and statements will be December 7.
In accordance with the Trade Agreements Ex-
tension Act of 1948 the lists of products on which
possible L^nited States tariff concessions may be
considered have been transmitted by the President
to the Tariff Commission which is required to in-
vestigate, hold hearings, and report to him within
120 days, in regard to each such item, ( 1 ) the extent
to which United States tariffs or other import re-
strictions may be reduced without causing or
threatening serious injury to the domestic indus-
try producing like or similar articles; and (2)
what, if any, additional import restrictions would
be required to prevent such injury.
Since the statute specifically imposes on the Tar-
iff Commission the obligation of holding its own
hearings, parties who wish to be assured that their
information will be considered by the Tariff Com-
mission, must present it directly to the Commission
either at the hearings or in writing before the close
of the hearings.
In order to minimize duplication, arrangements
have been made so that infoi'mation submitted to
the Tariff Commission in written statements and
at public hearings, in accordance with its rules of
practice and procedure, other than that which has
been accepted by the Commission as confidential,
will be made available to the Committee for
Reciprocity Information. Thus, persons wish-
ing to testify only with respect to articles on the
public lists may, but need not, appear before the
Committee for Reciprocity Information. How-
ever, those persons wishing to present information
concerning possible import concessions different
Department of Stafe Bulletin
from that presented to the Tariff Commission or
wishing to present views with respect to export
concessions to be obtained by the United States
should ]iresent their information to the Committee
for Keci))r(K'ity Information.
The hearings to be held by the Tariff Commis-
sion and those to be held by the Connnittee for
Reciprocity Information will run concurrently,
but the hearings relative to particular commodities
will be scheduled so as to avoid conflict in cases of
persons wishing to appear at both hearings.
No United States tariff concession will be made
on any import product not appearing on the lists
made public November 5 unless it is subsequently
included in a supplementary published list. In-
clusion of a given product on such a published list
does not necessarily mean that a concession is to be
made on that proi^uct. Recommendations bj' the
Trade Agreements Committee to the President on
concessions to be offered will not be made until
after the information received through the Com-
mittee for Reciprocity Information and the Tariff
Commission has been studied, together with all
other data available to the trade-agreements or-
ganization. Concessions actually made will, of
course, depend on the outcome of the negotiations.
The lists of possible concession products made
public November 5 are based upon the language of
the Tariff Act of 1930. The published lists do not
include the rates of duty now in effect on the items
THE RECORD Of THE WEEK
enumerated. Those rates are shown in United
States Import Duties {19Jf8) and Supplement 1
thereto, published by the Tariff Commission.
Copies of these documents and of the published
lists of possible concession pi-oducts may be ob-
tained at the Tariff Commission, the Department
of State, the Department of Commerce, and from
the district and regional offices of the Department
of Commerce.
Each new country which completes tariff nego-
tiations with existing contracting parties will ac-
cede, in its own right, to the concessions negotiated
by those contracting parties in 1047. Further-
more, each new acceding country must extend to
all other countries with which it has completed
tariff negotiations, in their own right, all conces-
sions which it negotiates in the forthcoming meet-
ing. In this connection, it should be borne in mind
that such extension of previously negotiated con-
cessions is a bargaining factor in the forthcoming
negotiations.
The General Agreement includes the so-called
escape clause, required by executive order, which
permits the United States to modify or withdraw
a concession if it is found that, as a result of un-
foreseen developments and of the concession, im-
ports are entering this country in such increased
amounts and under such circumstances as to cause
or threaten serious injury to the domestic industry
producing like or similar products.
Procedure To Be Followed by the United States
Committee for Reciprocity Information
Trade- Agreement Negotiation's with Denmark,
Dominican Republic, El Salvador, Finland,
Greece, Haiti, Italy, Nicaragua, Peru, Sweden,
and Uruguay; possible adjustments in preferen-
tial rates on Cuban p'oducts
Submission of Informatiox to the Committee
FOR Reciprocity Information
Closing date for application to be heard, No-
vember 29, 1948.
Public hearings open, December 7, 1948.
Closing date for submission of briefs, December
7, 1948.
Tlie Interdepartmental Committee on Trade
Agreements has issued on this day a notice of in-
tention to conduct trade-agreenier.t negotiations
with each of the following countries: Denmark,
Dominican Republic, El Salvador, Finland,
Greece, Haiti, Italy, Nicaragua, Peru, Sweden,
and Uruguay. Annexed to this public notice are
lists of articles imported into the United States to
be considered for possible concessions in the nego-
tiations with each of the above countries.
It is stated by the Trade Agreements Committee
November 21, 1948
that it is proposed to enter into these negotiations
with a view to the accession of the countries named
above as contracting parties to the General Agree-
ment on Tariffs and Trade. The Trade Agree-
ments Committee has also announced in such notice
that, in the case of an article in one or more of
these lists with respect to which the corresponding
product of Cuba is now entitled to preferential
treatment, a modification of the rate in the negotia-
tions referred to will involve the elimination, re-
duction, or continuation of the preference, perhaps
in some cases with an adjustment or specification
of the rate applicable to the product of Cuba.
The Committee for Reciprocity Information
hereby gives notice that information and views in
writing in regard to the foregoing proposals with
respect to any of the named countries (including
areas for which any of these countries has author-
ity to conduct trade-agreement negotiations) shall
be submitted to the Committee for Reciprocity
Information not later than 12 : 00 noon, December
7, 1948, and all applications for oral presentation
of views in regard thereto, including a statement
as to the import product or products, if any, on
which the applicant wishes to be heard, shall be
submitted to the Committee for Reciprocity Inf or-
643
THE RECORD OF THB WEEK
mation not later than 12 : 00 noon, November 29,
1948.
Such communications shall be addressed to '"The
Chairman, Committee for Reciprocity Informa-
tion, Department of Commerce, Washington 25,
D. C.". Ten copies of written statements, either
typewritten or printed, shall be submitted, of
which one copy shall be sworn to.
Public hearings will be held before the Com-
mittee for Reciprocity Information, at which oral
statements will be heard. The first hearing will
be at 10:00 a. m. on December 7, 1948, in the
auditorium of Department of Commerce Building
at 14th and E Streets, N. W., Washington, D. C.
Witnesses who make application to be heard will
be advised regarding the time and place of their
individual appearances. Appearances at hear-
ings before the Committee may be made by or on
behalf of those persons who have within the time
prescribed made written application for oral pres-
entation of views. Statements made at tlie public
hearings shall be under oath.
Persons or groups interested in import products
may present to the Committee their views con-
cerning possible tariff concessions by the United
States on any product, whether or not included in
any of the lists annexed to the notice of intention
to negotiate which has been issued by the Trade
Agreements Committee, and concerning anv other
matters relating to the proposed negotiations.
Copies of these lists may be obtained from the
Committee for Eeciprocity Information at the
address designated above and may be inspected
at the field offices of the Department of Commerce.
As indicated in the notice of intention to negotiate,
no tariff concession will be considered on any
product which is not included in a list annexed
thereto unless it is subsequently included in a sup-
plementary public list.
Persons or groups interested in export products
may present their views regarding any tariff or
other concessions that might be requested of any
of the foreign governments with which it is pro-
posed to undertake trade-agreement negotiations.
A written statement submitted to the Committee
for Reciprocity Information may relate to articles
contained in one or more of such lists or to other
matters relating to the proposed trade-agreement
negotiations with one or more of the countries
listed above, and oral statements may also relate
to one or more such lists or negotiations, subject
to any scheduling that may be made by the Com-
mittee in advising as to the time and place of in-
dividual appearances.
By direction of the Committee for Reciprocity
Information this 5th day of November 1948.
Edward Yaedley
Secretary, Committee for
Reciprocity Information
November 5, 1948
644
Interdepartmental Committee on Trade Agreements
Trade-agreement negotiations with Denmark^
Dominican Repuilic, El Salvador, Finland,
Greece, Haiti, Italy, Nicaragua, Peru, Sweden,
and Uruguay; possible adjustments in prefer-
ential rates on Cuban products
Pursuant to section 4 of the Trade Agreements
Act approved June 12, 1934 (48 Stat. (pt. 1) 945,
ch. 474) as extended and amended by the Trade
Agreements Extension Act of 1948 (Pub. Law
792 — 80th Cong.) and to paragraph 4 of Execu-
tive Order 10004 of October 5, 1948 (13 F. R.
5853), notice is hereby given by the Interdepart-
mental Committee on Trade Agreements of inten-
tion to conduct trade-agreement negotiations with
each of the following countries, including in eacli
case areas in respect of which the country has
authority to conduct trade-agreement negotia-
tions: Denmark, Dominican Republic, El Salva-
dor, Finland, Greece, Haiti, Italy, Nicaragua,
Peru, Sweden, and Uruguay. It is proposed to
enter into negotiations with these countries with
a view to their accession as contracting parties to
the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade.
There is annexed hereto a list" of articles im-
ported into tlie United States to be considered for
possible modification of duties and other import
restrictions, imposition of additional import re-
strictions, or specific continuance of existing cus-
toms or excise treatment in the proposed trade-
agreement negotiations with each of the above
countries, each of which lists has been approved
by the President and transmitted to the United
States Tariff Commission, pursuant to paragraph
4 of Executive Order 10004. In the case of an arti-
cle in one or more of these lists with respect to
which the corresj^onding product of Cuba is now
entitled to preferential treatment, a modification
of tlie rate in the negotiations referred to will
involve the elimination, reduction, or continua-
tion of the preference, perhaps in some cases with
an adjustment or specification of the rate appli-
cable to the jDroduct of Cuba.
No tariff concession will be considered in the
negotiations with any country on any article which
is not included in the annexed list relative to such
country unless it is subsequently included in a sup-
plementary public list approved by the President
and transmitted to the Tariff Commission. No
duty or import tax imposed under a paragraph or
section of the Tariff Act or Internal Revenue Code
other than the tariff paragraph listed with respect
to such article will be considered for a possible de-
crease, although an additional or separate duty on
an article included in an annexed list, which is
imposed under a paragraph or section other than
that listed, may be bound against increase as an
assurance that the concession under the listed para-
graph or section will not be nullified.
' Not printed.
Department of Sfafe Bulletin
Pursuant to section 3 of the Trade Agreements
Extension Act of 1948, information and views as
to the matters specified in tliat section may he sub-
mitted to the United States Tariff Commission in
accordance with tlie announcement of tliis date is-
sued by tlie Conunission. Pursuant to section 4
of tlie Trade Agreements Act, as amended, and
paragraph C of Executive Order 10004 of October
0, 1048, information and views as to anj' aspect of
the proposals announced in this notice may be sub-
mitted to the Committee for Reciprocity Informa-
tion in accordance with the announcement of this
date issued by that Committee. Arrangements are
being made to coordinate the hearings to be held
by the Tariff Commission and the Committee for
Reciprocity Information in order to facilitate the
THE RECORD OF THB WE£K
convenience of persons desiring to appear at both
hearings. Information and views submitted to
the Tariff Conunission, except those accepted by
the Commission as confidential, will be made avail-
able to the Committee for Reciprocity Information
although, on account of the statutory requirement
as to the investigation by the Tariff Commission,
persons and groups who wish to be assured that
their information and views will be considered by
the Tariff Commission should present them di-
rectly to the Commission.
By direction of the Interdepartmental Commit-
tee on Trade Agreements this 5th day of November
1948.
Woodbury Willougiibt
Chairman, Interdepartmental
Committee on Trade Agreements
U.S. Interest in Revival of Japanese Economy
on Peaceful Self-Supporting Basis
STATEMENT BY MAJOR GENERAL FRANK R. McCOY >
U.S. Representative on the Far Eastern Commission
I have noted the various statements on the sub-
ject of Fec-320 made by the Soviet Ambassador
before the Far Eastern Commission.- I have also
noted his statement released to the press on Sep-
tember 24. In the light of the resolution by the
Soviet Representative and the ensuing discussions
in the Commission, it appears to me desirable at
this juncture to state the views of my Government
on tliis matter.
As will be recalled, the Allies and the Far East-
ern Commission have on several occasions an-
nounced policies dealing with primary and sec-
ondary- war facilities and. in principle, war-sup-
porting industries. Insofar as the peaceful econ-
omy of Japan is concerned, the United States, you
will recall, has never expressed the view that re-
strictions should be placed on peaceful Japanese
production. On the contrary, the United States
has repeatedly advocated measures which would
have the effect of stimulating the early revival of
the peaceful Japanese economy. For example, it
will be recalled that the basic position of my Gov-
ernment on this matter was summarized as far
back as January 21 of this year when I said to this
Commission :
'"My Government believes that the Japanese
Government and people, the Far Eastern Commis-
November 27, 1948
sion and its member states, and the Supreme Com-
mander . . . should take all possible and neces-
sary steps, consistent with the basic policies of the
occupation, to bring about the early revival of the
Japanese economy on a peaceful self-supporting
basis."
It would be highly inconsistent for my Govern-
ment to take any other view when at the same time
it is pursuing in other parts of the world programs
designed primarily to alleviate suffering and to
bring about economic revival. We are making
great efforts to contribute, in cooperation with
other nations, to the raising of economic well-being
and to bring about economic revival wherever
possible.
Accordingly, we welcome that part of the state-
ment of the Soviet Representative which draws
attention to the need for an early Japanese revival
and which indicates support for the policies of the
United States Government.
The second Soviet proposal, as explained by the
Soviet Representative, calls for the establishment
and exercise of international controls over war
' Made on Nov. 11, 1948, at the meeting of the Commis-
sion and released to the press on the same date.
'Not printed.
645
THE RECORD Of THE WEEK
industries in Japan after the treaty of peace comes
into effect. Determination of post-treaty arrange-
ments, as the Commission is aware, falls outside its
terms of reference. I am certain that you are fully
aware how thoroughly the demilitarization of
Japan has been carried out. It should be unnec-
essary to reiterate that the United States is de-
termined that Japan shall not again be able to
undertake aggression.
In conclusion it is the view of my Government
that the Soviet resolution would serve no useful
purpose, would in substance only reiterate Far
Eastern Commission and Allied policy decisions
of long standing, and would in part be beyond the
acceptance of the Far Eastern Commission.
Procedure for Filing War Claims in
U.S. Zone of Germany
[Released to the press November 12]
The Department of State refers to the Joint
State-Army announcement of November 10, 1947,^
regarding the promulgation of Military Govern-
ment law no. 59, an internal restitution law pro-
viding for the restitution of identifiable property
located in the U.S.-occupied zone of Germany (ex-
cluding U.S. sector of Berlin) which was taken
from its rightful owners by the Nazis during the
period from January 30, 1933, to May 8, 1945,
through transactions under duress arising from
discrimination because of race, religion, nation-
ality, ideology, and political opposition to National
Socialism.
All claims under the law must be filed on or
before December 31, 1948. The Office of Military
Government for Germany (U.S.) has informed
the Department of State that no extension of the
filing period provided for in Military Government
law no. 59 has been authorized or is anticipated.
Claimants are not precluded from filing claims
before the deadline by reason of lack of complete
information, since article 58 of this law provides
that the period of limitation shall be deemed to
have been complied with by filing a written state-
ment with —
Zentralanmeldeamt (Central Filing Agency)
Bad Nauheim, Germany
Such a statement need not be under oath but
should contain a description of confiscated prop-
erty, stating as exactly as possible, the time, place,
and circumstances of the confiscation ; and in ad-
dition, so far as is known to the claimant, the
names and addresses of all persons having or
claiming to have an interest in the property.
Claims should not be sent to the Department of
State, to Military Government offices, or to local
German government officials.
' Not printed. Refer to Bulletin of Feb. 8, 1948, p. 185.
Murder of Irving Ross in Austria
Under Investigation
[Released to the press November 1]
The Department has received a preliminary
report from the American Legation at Vienna
concerning the murder of Irving Boss, Assistant
to the Economic Cooperation Administrator for
Austria.
The information in the report is limited to the
fragmentary account given Austrian police by
Miss Dana Sopevina, who was with Mr. Ross at
the time of the attack. Miss Sopevina, who was
gravely injured and is now in an Austrian hos-
pital in the Soviet zone of Vienna, stated that she
and Mr. Ross had attended a dinner party, fol-
lowing which they drove another guest to his resi-
dence in the Soviet zone. On their return they
were accosted in the Soviet zone by four armed
men in Soviet uniform. They were forced to
drive to an outlying district, where both were
badly beaten. Miss Sopevina was thrown from
the car. Ross' body was found by Austrian police
in his car in the Soviet zone early on the morning
of October 31.
Lieutenant General Geoffrey Keyes, the United
States High Commissioner to Austria ; Mr. John
G. Erhardt, the United States Minister; and Mr.
West more Willcox, Chief of the E'ca Mission to
Austria, are cooperating in a thorough investiga-
tion of the case.
Ratification Instruments Exchanged
Between U.S. and Norway
[Released to the press November 9]
Acting Secretary of State Robert A. Lovett and
Wilhelm Munthe de Morgenstierne, Norwegian
Ambassador in Washington, have formally ex-
changed the instruments of ratification of a claims
convention between the United States and Norway
which was signed in Washington on March 2'8,
1940. The convention provides for the disposition
of a claim of the Government of Norway against
the Government of the United States on behalf of
Christoffer Hannevig, a Norwegian subject, and a
claim of the Government of the United States
against the Government of Norway on behalf of
the late (ieorge R. Jones, an American citizen.
The convention provides for an exchange of
pleadings and evidence in relation to the two
claims in the hope that by thus more clearly bring-
ing to light the facts and the law relied upon by
the two Governments in support of their respec-
tive contentions a diplomatic settlement may be
possible. It is further provided that in the event
that such a settlement is not reached the Hannevig
646
Department of State Bulletin
claim shall be submitted to the United States
I Court of Claims for adjudication and the Jones
claim to a sole arbitrator for decision.
The convention entered into force upon the ex-
cliaufje of the instruments of ratification thereof.
The Hannevio; claim arose by virtue of the req-
uisitioninjr by tlie United States of ships under
construction in the three partially completed Han-
nevig shipyiirds in 1!)17. The shipbuilding com-
panies liad bt-en organized as American corpora-
tions by Christoffer Hannevig in 1916 and 1917.
After requisitioning the partially completed ships
the then United States Shipping Board Emer-
gency Fleet Corjioration advanced the capital nec-
essary to complete the financing of the shipyards.
After the three companies were or<;anized into one
corporation known as the Pusey & Jones Company,
relations between that corporation and the Emer-
gency Fleet Corporation became increasingly
complicated. An award was made to the Pusey &
Jones Company in 1920 which the Emergency
Fleet Corporation considered to be just compensa-
tion, but it was not accepted. During the ensuing
litigation Hannevig was adjudged bankrupt and
the Pusey & Jones Company forced into receiver-
ship. The Emergency Fleet Corporation, which
had intervened in the receivership proceedings as
a mortgage creditor, reached a compromise settle-
ment in 1926 with the receivers, which was ap-
proved by the United States District Court for the
District of Delaware. The Pusey & Jones Com-
pany released the Emergency Fleet Corporation
and the United States from all further claims.
Hannevig's case, based upon allegations that the
Pusey & Jones Companj' had not been paid just
compensation, was brougiit to the attention of the
Department of State by the Norwegian Govern-
ment in 1926 and again in 1935. Tiie amount of
the claim was stated as approximately 68 million
dollars.
The claim against Xorway on behalf of the late
George R. Jones is based upon losses amounting
to more than $100,000 suffered by the George R.
Jones Company in connection with several ship-
ments of shoes sent to Norway in 1920 pursuant
to a contract between the company and a Norwe-
gian purchaser. Payment for the shoes was guar-
anteed by a Norwegian bank. The shoes arrived
in Norway at a time when prices were falling and
Norwegian money was depreciating in terms of
dollars. Tlie purchaser refused to accept some of
the shoes on the alleged ground that they did not
conform to sample and were of inferior quality.
The Norwegian bank refused to pay or to admit
liability upon its guaranty. The American com-
pany brought suit against the bank in the Norwe-
gian courts. The lower court decided in favor
of the company but the Supreme Court of Norway
reversed the decision. The company has taken
the ])osition that the decision of the Supreme Court
of Norway constituted a denial of justice.
November 21, 7948
THE RECORD Of THE WBBK
Procedure for Filing Claims With Finland
[Released to the press November 8]
Reference is made to a State Department an-
nouncement of July 15, 1948, concerning claims
for losses caused by transferring so-called German
property in Finland to the Union of Soviet So-
cialist Republics.^
The Department is now in receipt of further in-
formation to the effect that by a decision of the
Ministry of Finance of the Republic of Finland
dated September 24, 1948, the time limit for sub-
mitting claims for losses incurred through the
transfer of German property by Finland to the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics has been ex-
tended to January 24, 1949, in the case of persons
permanently residing abroad and to November 24,
1948, in the case of persons residing in Finland.
If the loss is incurred after September 24, 1948,
claims from persons residing abroad must be sub-
mitted within four months of the date of loss and
claims from persons residing in Finland must be
submitted within two months of the date of loss.
As stated in the Department of State announce-
ment, claims from abroad should be filed through
the Finnish Legations or Consulates, the chiefs of
w'hich are career officers. The offices in the United
States which may receive claims are the Legation
of Finland, 2144 Wyoming Avenue, Washington,
D. C, and the Finnish Consulate General, 53
Broadway, New York, N. Y.
It is suggested that American claimants inform
the Department of any claims which they may file
under the above procedure.
International Commission for Scientific
Investigation of Tuna Recommended
The Department of State announced on Novem-
ber 9 the result of the discussions between officials
of Mexico and of the United States on fishery-
conservation matters of common concern. The
discussions, which commenced October 25 in
Mexico City, wei-e concluded on November 4 with
the signing by both delegations of a joint report to
the two governments in which it was recommended
that there be concluded a convention for the
establislunent of an international commission for
the scientific investigation of tuna.
Tlie joint report of the meeting, which contains
the text of the proposed convention, is included
in Department of State press release 896 of No-
vember 9. The report urges the governments to
establish a joint commission for the investigation
of the tuna resources of the Pacific Ocean with a
' BuLusTiN of Aug. 1, 1948, p. 148.
647
THE RECORD Of THE WEEK
view to maintaining the resource at a level which
will assure a reasonable maximum utilization, year
after year, without depletion. The report con-
cludes that such convention would result in posi-
tive benefit to the fishing industries of both coun-
tries and would contribute to conservation of food
resources.
Visas Not Required for Americans on
Temporary Visits to U.K.
[Released to the press November 12]
Effective November 12, 1948, American citizens
in possession of valid American passports may
enter the United Kingdom of Great Britain and
Northern Ireland without British visas for a tem-
porary period of stay provided they comply with
other laws and regulations of the United Kingdom
concerning the entry, residence, and employment
or occupation of foreigners or travelers.
Statutory and other restrictions preclude the
United States from granting full reciprocity, but
British subjects resident in the United Kingdom in
possession of valid British passports who are eli-
gible to enter the United States as bona fide non-
immigrants will be granted effective November 12.
1948, gratis passport visas, and in cases of qualified
temporary visitors, visas may be valid for 24
months provided the passports of the bearers re-
main valid for that period of time. All other
nonimmigrant passport visas granted British sub-
jects resident in tlie United Kingdom will, as at
present, have a maximum period of validity of 12
months provided the passjjorts remain valid for
that period of time.
This arrangement will be put into effect outside
the United Kingdom for British subjects residing
therein but who are temporarily absent therefrom
and who are proceeding to the United States as
nonimmigrants, as soon as American diplomatic
and consular officers can be notified.
International Joint Commission To Study
Passamaquoddy Power Project
[Released to the press NoTember 9]
The Department of State announced on Novem-
ber 9 that the Governments of the United States
and Canada have agreed to refer certain matters
in connection with the Passamaquoddy Tidal
Power Project to the International Joint Com-
mission, United States and Canada.
The Passamaquoddy Tidal Power Project as
originally proposed in the 1920's would involve
damming Passamaquoddy Bay, on the Maine-New
648
Brunswick border, and Cobscook Bay, which lies
wholly within the State of Maine, and — by means
of a controlled flow between the two basins thus
formed — utilizing the great tidal range in the Bay
of Fundy for the generation of hydroelectric
powei'.
Under the terms of reference which have now
been transmitted to the United States and Cana-
dian Sections of the International Joint Commis-
sion by the United States Department of State and
the Canadian Department of External Affairs, re-
spectively, the Commission is asked to review ex-
isting plans for the project, to report how large
and expensive an investigation would be required
to determine whether any of these or other plans
would be practicable, and to recommend a division
of the expenses of such an investigation between
the two countries. The reference does not ask the
Commission to undertake the investigation, and
both Governments have made it clear that they
are not committed, by the present reference, to any
later reference to the Commission for full investi-
gation of the project itself.
A copy of the terms of reference follows :
Noveviber 9, 1948
Gentlemen : In accordance with Article IX of
the Boundary Waters Treaty of January 11, 1909,
the Governments of Canada and the United States
have agreed to refer to the International Joint
Commission the following matters for joint ex-
amination and advisory report, including recom-
mendations and conclusions :
1. To review existing plans for the construction
of liydro-electric power plants at Passamaquoddy
and Cobscook Bays, arms of the Bay of Fundy,
which are located at the mouth of the St. Croix
Eiver, a boundary stream between the State of
Maine and the Province of New Brunswick.
2. To report on the scope of the investigation
which would be necessary, together with the esti-
mated cost thereof, to enable the Commission to
report whether any of these or other plans for
using these waters is practicable, and is desirable
from tlie point of view of public convenience and
necessity.
3. To report its recommendations as to the basis
on which the costs of the investigation shall be
apportioned to each country.
In the conduct of its examination, and otherwise
in the performance of its duties under this Refer-
ence, the International Joint Commission may uti-
lize such information and teclmical data as has
been acquired by the technical agencies of either
Government or which may become available dur-
ing the course of the investigation, thus avoiding
duplication of effort and unnecessary expense.
Very truly yours,
R. A. LOVETT
Act 171 g /Secretary
Deparfment of Sfafe Bulletin
Fulbright Study Grants Available to 47 U.S. Citizens
Opportunities for 47 United States citizens to
receive grants for study, research, and teaching in
Greece and the Pliilippines under the Fulbright
program were announced on November o by tlie
btate Department and the Board of Foreign
iSchohirsliips.
Candidates for all grants will be selected on the
basis of scholastic and professional achievement.
In addition, grants for research work will be based
on the research project proposed. Persons receiv-
ing grants will normally be expected to remain in
Greece for one academic year. Veterans will be
given preference provided that their qualifications
are appro.ximately equal to those of other candi-
dates.
Greece
The awards will be in Greek currency and vary
in amount with tiie type of grants. Benefits to
students may include tuition, maintenance, and
travel, and those to researchers and teachers may
include travel, maintenance, and a stipend.
Six grants will go to American graduate stu-
dents to study at the American School of Classi-
cal Studies in Athens. Study may be undertaken
in the iields of ancient history, classics and classi-
cal archeology, medieval and modern Greek
history, and literature. Application for these
student grants should be made to the Institute of
International Education, 2 West 45th Street, New
York 19, New York. The closing date for filing
applications for the student grants is December 15,
1948.
Eight research scholar grants are available for
work under the direction of the American School
of Classical Studies in connection with archeolog-
ical excavations of the agora, the ancient market
place in Athens.
Grants are also available to three American col-
lege or university teachers to instruct at univer-
sities and advanced schools in Greece. The follow-
ing fields ai'e available: American life and history
at the Universit}' of Athens and home economics
and rural sociology at the Superior School of
Agriculture. The work of the rural sociologist
will involve field work in cooperation with the
Near East Foundation. Applications for these
grants and for the research-scholar awards should
be made to the Conference Board of Associated
Eesearch Councils, 2101 Constitution Avenue NW.,
Washington 25, D.C.
x\.t least six grants are available for teaching at
American-sponsored secondary schools and junior
colleges in Greece. The teaching opportunit ies are
primarily for instruction in the English language
at the following schools: Pierce College, Athens
College, and Anatolia College. It is likely that
November 27, 1948
opportunities for other fields of instruction may be
available at a later date. Application for these
grants should be made to the Conference Board of
Associated Research Councils, 2101 Constitution
Avenue, NW., Washington 25, D.C.
In addition to the above grants offered to Ameri-
can citizens, it is expected that a number of scholar-
ships will soon be made available to Greek students
attending American schools in Greece, and that a
limited number of travel grants to Greek nationals
will be made to enable the recipients to attend
colleges and universities in the United States.
Philippines
All awards are in Philippine currency. Bene-
fits to students may include tuition, maintenance,
and travel. Reciijients of grants for teaching or
advanced research may be awarded travel, main-
tenance, and a stipend.
Four grants are available for American gradu-
ate students to engage in study or research in the
Philippines. Application blanks for these grants
may be obtained from the Institute of Interna-
tional Education, 2 West 45th Street, New York
19, New York. Closing date for filing apjilica-
tions is December 15, 1948.
Sixteen grants are available for American col-
lege or university teachers to instruct at universi-
ties and advanced schools in the Philippines in the
fields indicated.
University of the Philippines
Economics
Higher education
Political science
Psychology
English
Physics
SiUitnan University
Agriculture
Santo Tomds
Secondary education
Ateneo de Manila
Social science
Biological science
Philippine Women's University
Nutritional chemistry
Educational psychology
Institutional manag;ement
I'hilippine School of Arts arid Trades
Vocational education
Philippine Normal School
English language
Adult education
649
THE RECORD OF THE WECK
Four grants are available for advanced research :
Two at Silliman University in the field of biologi-
cal sciences with emphasis on microphotography,
and two at the University of the Philippines, one
in the field of rural sociology, and the other m the
general field of Far Eastern anthropology.
Applications for the research grants and the
grants to American college or university teachers
should be made to the Conference Board of Asso-
ciated Research Councils, 2101 Constitution Ave-
nue, NW., Washington 25, D.C.
The remainder of the Fulbright program ap-
proved for the Philippines consists of forty travel
grants to enable Filipino students to attend col-
leges and universities in the United States. AH
but six of these grants have been awarded. Four
grants are available for Filipino students to attend
American institutions in the Philippines.
Surplus Property Agreement on Educational
Exchange With France Signed '
The French Government and the United States
Government, represented, respectively, by Messrs.
Schuman and Yvon Delbos on the one hand, and
by Mr Jeflferson Caffei-y on the other hand, signed
on October 2 at the Ministry of Foreign Affairs
an agreement regarding exchanges in the held of
higher education. This agreement prescribes the
methods for applying the Blum-Byrnes agree-
ments of May 28, 1946, and the American law
which resulted from the initiative of Senator Ful-
bright, which provides for the allocation of a por-
tion of the sums in francs owed by the French
Government for war surplus for the purpose of
setting up a program of inter-university relations
between the two countries. The United States
Government has just concluded similar agreements
with Great Britain and Belgium. For the purpose
of carrying out the program in question, the agi-ee-
ment sets up a conunittee, of which the United
States Ambassador is the honorary chairman, to
be composed of six French and six American
members. The funds placed at the disposal of the
committee by the American Government will make
it possible to finance the living expenses of a cer-
tain number of American teachers, students, and
researchers who will come to France to pursue
their work at institutions of higher education ; the
funds will also cover the traveling expenses of a
certain number of French teachers, students, and
researchers who will go to the United States for
a similar purpose. The total amount of the sums
allocated to the carrying out of this plan may
reach a maximum of five million dollars, distrib-
uted over five years.
' Printed from telegraphic text.
650
Colombian Anthropologist Visiting
U.S. Museums
Luis Duque Gomez, Director of the National
Ethnological Institute and of the National An-
thropological Museum, Bogota, has arrived in
Washington for a three months' visit in the United
States under the travel-grant program of the De-
partment of State in cooperation with the Smith-
sonian Institution. Mr. Duque Gomez is inter-
ested in studying museum techniques and Latin
American collections in this country and in encour-
aging specialists and students in the field of an-
thropology' to visit and study in Colombia. After
approximately two weeks in Washington, he will
visit museums in various other cities in the East,
on the Pacific Coast, and in the Southwest.
After completing his visit in the United States,
Mr. Duque Gomez plans to continue his study and
observations for a month in Mexico and Guate-
mala and possibly in other Central American
countries before returning to Colombia next
March.
Appointment of Officers
THE DEPARTMENT
Elbert G. Mathews as Chief of the Division of South
Asian Affairs, effective October 3, 1948.
Final Volume in "Nazi Conspiracy and
Aggression" Series Released
The Department of the Army announced on
October 31 that with the release of a volume con-
taining the high lights of the defense made by
the major Nazi war criminals, as well as their
interrogations by the prosecution, publication of
all the essential documents pertaining to the inter-
national trial at Niirnberg is completed.
The new volume, supplement "B", in the "Nazi
Conspiracy and Aggression" series, is being sold
with supplement "A" as a six-dollar set by the
Superintendent of Documents, Government Print-
ing Office, Washington 25, D. C. Supplement
"A", completed several months ago, contains the
six closing arguments for the Allied prosecution
and prosecution documents introduced in cross-
examination.
This is the eleventh and final volume in the inter-
national trial series. The Department pointed
out that the preceding volumes in the series were
devoted largely to prosecution documents, whereas
the final volume presents the defendants' side of
the case, thus achieving for the series both sides
of this historical record.
The publication includes the texts of defense
counsels' extensive summations of the evidence in
favor of their clients ; the final pleas made to the
International Military Tribunal by each defend-
Department of Stato Bulletin
ant in person at the close of the evidence ; defense
ar^ments challensiinf; the Tribunal's jurisdiction
and the criniiiiiility of aggressive war; and some
of the dociuneiits offered by defendants Hess and
Speer which are possessed of unique significance.
This final volume, like the others in the series,
has been edited by former members of the Ameri-
can prosecution staff at Niirnberg and has been
approved for release by Justice Jackson.
PUBLICATIONS
Department of State
For sale by tlu Superintendent of Doeumrntu, Oovernment
Printing Ufpce. Washington 25, D.C. Address requests
direct to the Superintendent of Documents, except in the
case of free publieutions, icliieh may be obtained from the
Department of Slate.
Inter-American Coffee Agreement. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 1768. Pub. 3247. 18 pp. 100.
Protocol Between the United States and Other Ameri-
can Republics Modifying and Extending for One Year
From October 1, 1947, the Agreement of November 28,
1940, as modified and amended — entered into force
with respect to the United States May 24, 1948, effec-
tive October 1, 1947.
Settlement of Lend-Lease and Reciprocal Aid Accounts
And Intergovernmental Claims. Treaties and Other In-
ternational -Vets Series 17TU. Pub. 3:.:49. 8 pp. 5«S.
Agreement Between the United States and the United
Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland Modi-
fying and Supplementing Agreement of March 27,
194*;— Signed at Washington July 12, 1948; entered
Into force July 12, 1948.
Mutual Aid Settlement. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1779. I'ub. 32G4. 4 pp. 5^.
THE DEPARTMENT
Agreement Between the United States and Yugoslavia
signed at Washington July 19, 1948; entered into
force July 19, 1948.
Economic Cooperation With Ireland Under Public Law
472— 80th Congress. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1788. Pub. 32C9. 42 pp. 15«S.
Agreement Between the United States and Ireland —
Signed at Dublin June 28, 1948; entered into force
July 2, 1948.
Economic Cooperation With Belgium Under Public Law
472— 80th Congress. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1781. Pub. 3279. 55 pp. 15<f.
Agreement Between the United States and Belgium —
Signed at Brussels July 2, 1948; entered into force
July 29, 1948.
Civil Aviation Mission to Ecuador. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 1774. Pub. 3285. 7 pp. 5^.
Agreement Between the United States and Ecuador —
Effected by exchange of notes signed at Quito October
24 and 27, 1947 ; entered into force October 27, 1947.
Economic Cooperation With Sweden Under Public Law
472— 80th Congress. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1793. Pub. 3287. 52 pp. 15«;.
Agreement Between the United States and Sweden-
Signed at Stockholm July 3, 1948; entered into force
July 21, 1948.
National Commission News, November 1948. Pub. 3321.
10 pp. 10(S a copy; $1 a year domestic; $1.35 a year
foreign.
Features the Boston meeting of the United States
National Commission for Unesco.
Mutual Aid Settlement: Joint Installations in the Middle
East. Treaties and Other International Acts Series 1769
Pub. 3248. 10 pp. 54.
Agreement Between the United States and the United
Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland —
Signed at Washington July 12, 1948 ; entered into force
July 12, 1948.
Documents and State Papers for October 1948
Contains the following items:
The Present Status of the Saar
Coordination of European Inland Transport, 1941-4^8
Calendar of International Meetings With Annotations
Copies of this publication are for sale by the Superintendent of Documents,
Government Printing OflSce, Washington 25, D.C, at 30 cents a copy ; subscrip-
tion price for 12 issues is $3.00 a year.
November 27, 1948
651
^^W^^
The U.N. and Specialized Agencies page
General Assembly Considers Steps for Re-
duction of Armaments. Statement by
Frederick H. Osborn in Committee I . . 630
Progress Report on Conditions of Refugees
in Near East 634
Reports of the United Nations Special Com-
mittee on the Balkans 635
The U.S. in the U.N 636
U.S. Delegations to Conferences:
Fourth Session of Fao 639
UNESCO: General Conference 640
Occupation Matters
U.S. Interest in Revival of Japanese Economy
on Peaceful Self-supporting Basis.
Statement by Maj. Gen. Frank R.
McCoy . . ' 645
Procedure for Filing War Claims in U.S.
Zone of Germany 646
General Policy
Murder of Irving Ross in Austria Under
Investigation 646
Economic Affairs
Natural Resources in a World of Conflict.
Article by Paul H. Nitze 623
U.S. Delegations to Conferences:
Ilo: Petroleum 638
British Parliamentary Association .... 638
Air Navigation in Southeast Asia .... 639
Second Inter-American Congress on Bru-
cellosis 641
Procedure for Filing Claims With Finland . . 647
Economic Affairs — Continued Page
Visas Not Required for Americans on Tem-
porary Visits to U.K 648
International Joint Commission To Study
Passamaquoddy Power Project .... 648
International Information and
Cultural Affairs
Fulbright Study Grants Available to 47 U.S.
Citizens 649
Surplus Property Agreement on Educational
Exchange With France Signed .... 650
Colombian Anthropologist Visiting U.S.
Museums 650
Treaty Information
Announcement of Intention To Enter Tariff
Negotiations: Procedure To Be Followed
by the U.S 642
Committee for Reciprocity Information . 643
Interdepartmental Committee on Trade
Agreements 644
Ratification Instruments Exchanged Between
U.S. and Norway 646
International Commission for Scientific In-
vestigation of Tuna Recommended . . 647
Surplus Property Agreement on Educational
Exchange With France Signed .... 650
The Department
Appointment of Officers 650
Publications
Final Volume in Nazi Conspiracy and Aggres-
sion Series Released 650
Department of State 651
I
U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1946
tJAe/ ^ehci^t'r}ten^ ^ tnaie/^
U.S., FRANCE, U.K., AND U.S.S.R. URGED TO SOLVE
BERLIN QUESTION:
Joint Communication From President of General
Assembly and the Secretary-General 655
Text of the U.S. Reply 656
DISCUSSION OF THE PALESTINE SITUATION •
Suxtement by Philip C. Jessup .......... 657
HELPING THE WORLD TO KNOW US BETTER • By
Hotcland H. Sargeant • 672
For complete contents see back cover
U. S. SUK
JAN 10 1349
*^,.,wy^.. bulletin
Vol. XIX, No. 491 • Publication 3352
November 28, 1948
For sale by the Superintendent ot Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office
Wsshlngton 26, D.O.
Price:
62 Issues, domestic $6, foreign $7.26
Single copy, 15 cents
Published with the approval of the
Director of the Bureau of the Budget
Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
or State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.
The Department of State BULLETIN,
a tceekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various pliases of inter-
natioruil affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
terruitional agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.
Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
U.S., France, U.K., and U.S.S.R. Urged To Solve Berlin Question
JOINT COMMUNICATION FROM PRESIDENT OF GENERAL ASSEMBLY
AND THE SECRETARY-GENERAL!
Sir:
November 13, 1948
We have the honor to address this communica-
tion to the chairmen of the delegations of the
powers signatory to the Moscow agreement of 24
December 1945, and to request that it be trans-
mitted to the respective chiefs of government for
their urgent consideration.
On Wednesday 3 November 1948 the General
Assembly of the United Nations sitting in plenary
session at Paris, unanimously adopted an "appeal
to the great powers to renew their efforts to com-
pose their differences and establish a lasting peace".
In this resolution the General Assembly declared
that the disagreement between the great powers
"in a matter of vital importance to all the United
Nations is at the present time the cause of the
deepest anxiety among all of the peoples of the
world ..." and that "the United Nations in
the performance of its most sacred mission is
bound to afford its assistance and cooperation in
the settlement of a situation the continuation of
which involves grave dangere to international
peace".
The resolution then "recommends the powers
signatory to the Moscow agreement of 24 Decem-
ber 1945 and the powers which subsequently ac-
ceded thereto, to redouble their efforts, in a spirit
of solidarity and mutual understanding, to secure
in the briefest possible time the final settlement
of the war and the conclusion of all the peace settle-
ments".
The representatives of all the powers signatory
to the Moscow agreement spoke in unqualified
support of this resolution and voted for it. They
have accepted the recommendation and the world
rightly expects them to take active steps toward
carrying it out without delay.
We believe the first step is to resolve the Berlin
question. This case is still pending before the
Security Council. We believe the history of the
Security Council's consideration of this case dem-
onstrates that it can be solved.
Every day that the deadlock over Berlin con-
November 28, 7948
tinues the danger to the peace and security of all
nations continues undiminished. Fear of another
war is crippling the effort of all nations to repair
the damage of the last war and return once more
to the ways of peace. The work of the General
Assembly and of the United Nations as a whole
in every field of its endeavor is being delayed and
undermined.
It is within the power of the leaders of the
great nations to which this communication is ad-
di-essed to end this danger to the peace.
We therefore respectfully urge upon the Gov-
ernments of France, the Union of Soviet Socialist
Republics, the United Kingdom and the United
States, signatories to the Moscow declaration, the
desirability of immediate conversations and of tak-
ing all other necessary steps toward the solution
of the Berlin question, thus opening the way to
a prompt resumption of negotiations for the con-
clusion of the remaining peace settlements for
Germany, Austria and Japan.
We also believe the great powers should lend
their full and active support to the efforts at
mediation of the Berlin dispute by the president
of the Security Council. For ourselves, we stand
ready to lend all further assistance, such as the
currency study now being made by the United Na-
tions General Assembly which seems most helpful
to the great powers in the solution of the problem.
We await an early reply to this communication
in order that the members of the United Nations
now assembled here in Paris may be informed of
the progress in the implementation of the General
Assembly's unanimous "appeal to the great pow-
ers to renew their efforts to compose their differ-
ences and to establish a lasting peace".
We have the honor to be, sir, your obedient
servants,
Herbert V. Evatt,
President of the General Assernbly.
Trtgve Lie,
Secretary General.
' Printed from telegraphic text.
655
TEXT OF THE UNITED STATES REPLY
[Released to the press November 17]
Hotel d'lena
Paris, France
Noveinher 17, lOI/S
Dear Sirs : , i • i_ . i
I have the honor to transmit the reply which the
President of the United States has asked me to
make to your letter of November 13, 1948.
The Government of the United States endorsed
the resolution approved by the General Assembly
on November 3, 1948 with every desire that its end
and purpose should be accomplished as soon as
possible in the interest of achieving an early settle-
ment of issues still outstanding as a result of the
war and of bringing about a definite peace. Ihe
Government of the United States wants a solution
of the Berlin question. It continues to seek such
a solution through the United Nations. We have
supported the efforts of the Security Council and
its President to remove the danger to the peace
arising from the Soviet blockade of the Western
Sectors of Berlin. I desire to assure you that this
remains our course and objective.
The resolution proposed to the Security Coun-
cil by the Representatives of Argentina, Belgium,
Canada, China, Colombia, and Syria was a sincere
and statesman-like effort to bring about a settle-
ment. The Government of the United States re-
mains ready to carry out loyally this resolution and
stands by its expressed willingness to be guided
by the principles embodied therein. The resolu-
tion was accepted by all of the members of the
Council except the Soviet Union and its member
republic, the Ukraine. It failed to bring about a
settlement only because of the Soviet veto.
The Government of the United States has re-
peatedly affirmed its readiness to engage in con-
versations as soon as the Soviet Union has lifted
the blockade against Berlin so that negotiation
can take place under conditions free from duress.
We again reaffirm this position, which is in accord
with the resolution proposed by the six members
of the Security Council. .
The United States did, at the outset, m accord-
ance with the Charter, resort to direct discussion
with the Soviet Union. These discussions con-
tinued until it became apparent that the illegal
blockade was established by the Soviet Union tor
the purpose of obtaining political objectives to
which it is not entitled. We therefore referred
the question to the Security Council as a threat to
the peace which it still remains. To compromise
the principle of the Charter that force shall not
be used for the attainment of national objectives
would endanger the peace of the world.
There is a basic issue in relation to Berlin— that
is whether or not the Soviet Government can be
permitted to use force, whether by way of blockade,
or of economic pressures involving currency, credit
or trade, or otherwise, to deprive the Western
Powers of participation in the administration of
Berlin.
It is a source of deep regret that up to the pres-
ent, conditions unilaterally imposed have impeded
the fulfilhnent of the purposes of the Assembly
resolution. As has repeatedly been made clear,
both in direct discussion and before the Security
Council, the United States is ready to take part
in the efforts of the Security Council to solve the
Berlin problem, and to participate in any efforts
made to meet the fundamental issues inherent m
this problem which will remove the threat to the
peace and which can be accepted in good faith
by the parties concerned.
' Since this matter is, as you have noted, on the
agenda of the Security Council, copies of your
letter and this reply thereto are being transmitted
by me to the President of the Security Council.
Faithfully yours,
George C. Marshall
«S6
Depattmeni of State Bulletin
Discussion of the Palestine Situation in Committee I
STATEMENT BY PHILIP C. JESSUP'
U.S. Delegate to the General Assembly
Mr. Chairman, I wish to make a preliminary
statement on behalf of my Delegation, reserving
an opportunity to speak again at a later stage in
our discussion. "We are speaking in response to
your desire, Mr. Chairman, to get as many views
before the Committee as early as possible, even
though we shall not be able to express our final
views until we have had an opportunity to study
the statements made by other delegations and,
particularly, to study more carefully tlie resolution
offered by the Representative of the United
Kingdom. -
We seek here in this session of the General As-
sembly a further step in establishing friendly rela-
tions among the governments and peoples of the
Near East. The United States for its jDart wishes
to maintain the historic ties of friendship which
it has had with all these governments and peoples
and to see them reconcile their differences either
by direct discussions among themselves or through
some assistance from the United Nations.
As we see it, there have been three basic objec-
tives which underlie the efforts of the United Na-
tions to find a settlement of the Palestine question.
They are (1) the establishment and maintenance
of peace in that area; (2) the early attainment of
a constructive political settlement which will itself
contribute to stability, and to economic well-being
throughout the Middle East; and (3) reconcilia-
tion between the Arab and Jewish communities in
matters affecting Palestine.
The United Nations has exerted itself both
through the General Assembly and through the
Security Council to reach these objectives. The
first notable action taken by the General Assembly
was the recommendation of November 29, 1947,^
which was based upon the majority report of a
special committee of the Assembly. My Govern-
ment supported that recommendation as a fair
and reasonable settlement of a complicated and
explosive problem.
When it became apparent that the recommenda-
tion of November 29, 1947, would not in fact meet
the situation arising in Palestine upon the termina-
tion of the mandate, the General Assembly ap-
pointed a United Nations mediator to use his good
offices to promote a peaceful adjustment of the
future situation of Palestine. The United States
supported that resolution and had the honor to
support the nomination of Count Folke Bernadotte
as the United Nations mediator.^
That effort of the Assembly is still in process.
We have before us the progress report of Count
Bei-nadotte as well as the oral report to this Com-
mittee by the acting mediator.^
Before turning to the progress report of the
mediator, we should note the strenuous efforts made
by the Security Council to bring about a truce and
to prevent the outbreak of violence and bloodshed
throughout Palestine.
The Security Council adopted a series of resolu-
tions the first of whicli was passed on March 5 " and
the last of which was adopted on November 16.
Under these resolutions and specifically those of
May 29 ' and July IS,** both Arabs and Jews were
called upon, first, to cease fire for a period of four
weeks and then were ordered subsequently to cease
fire indefinitely. No fighting personnel or war
materials were to be imported into the Near East.
On August 19 the Security Council decided, among
other things, that "No party is entitled to gain
military or political advantage through violatJion
of tlie truce". "
Under these resolutions the Security Council
succeeded in establishing conditions of a truce for
Palestine. Under the subsequent resolution of No-
vember 16, the Security Council called upon the
parties to negotiate either directly or through the
' Made on Nov. 20, 1048, and released to the press on the
same date.
= U.N. doc. S/IOSO, Nov. 16, 1948.
' U.N. doc. A/516, Nov. 29, 1947.
* U.N. doc. A/648, Sept. IS, 1948.
"■ Bulletin of Oct. 24, 1948, p. 517.
• Bulletin of Mar. 14, 1948, p. .344.
' Bulletin of June 6, 1948, p. 729.
' Bulletin of July 25, 1948, p. 114.
' U.N. doc. S/9&3, Aug. 20, 1948.
November 28, J948
657
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIALIZBD AGENCIES
acting mediator with a view to the immediate es-
tablishment of an armistice, including the delinea-
tion of permanent demarcation lines and such with-
drawal and reduction of their armed forces as will
insure the maintenance of the armistice during
the transition to permanent peace in Palestine.
No one can seriously doubt that the effort of the
Security Council to maintain a truce has been ex-
erted with persistence and with impartiality. On
some occasions, the action of the Security Council
appeared disadvantageous to one side, on other
occasions to another. The main object was to pre-
vent fighting and in the pursuit of this object the
Security Council properly took no account of the
temporary or local advantages which one side or
the other might have had from a military point
of view.
Fighting has in fact occurred but much fighting
has been stopped. There has not been large-scale
war in Palestine. Even in the midst of high ten-
sion and bitter hatred, the parties themselves have
assisted the Security Council in limiting the scale
and extent of the fighting.
These continuous efforts of the Security Council,
culminating in the declaration of a need for an
armistice on November 16, opened the way for a
further constructive effort by this Assembly to-
ward a lasting political settlement.
I wish to turn, Mr. Chairman, to the progress
report of the mediator which is now before us.
None of us can consider this report without sober
and grateful reflection upon the services of the
man who produced it. Count Bernadotte was a
peacemaker, acting always in the high tradition
of duty and public service. Courage, patience, and
perseverance were not the least of his contributions
to the settlement of the problem before us. He
traveled the length and breadth of the Near East
and did all that he could to persuade Arabs and
Jews to seek the path of peace in the Holy Land.
He has founded a tradition in these opening years
of the United Nations which will represent a
permanent contribution by him to the peace of the
world.
My Delegation wishes to express its regard and
appreciation to his successor, the acting mediator.
We were particularly interested in his opening
statement to this Committee on October 15. We
venture to suggest that all delegates might profit-
ably refresh their memories of the closing sections
of his statement. We believe that statement re-
flected the spirit in which Count Bernadotte ren-
dered his report and makes valuable suggestions
about how it can be used to further a final settle-
ment.
Dr. Bunche issued a challenge to us all with his
statement that "It is unthinkaiale that Arabs and
Jews should be permitted to resume hostilities
in Palestine. The threat to the peace of the Mid-
dle East generally and even to the world from
conflict in Palestine is far too great." This led
him to insist upon the need for an assurance that
neither party will again resort to force in order
to make its views prevail and as a means of gaining
its objectives.
The second need to which Dr. Bunche called our
attention was for the establishment of a General
Assembly position on certain fundamental politi-
cal issues with respect to Palestine. I shall not list
these issues here because they appear in the media-
tor's report which is before us. Our present task
is to consider these issues. We believe there is
great wisdom, however, in Dr. Bunche's observa-
tion that "It would not appear essential in this
regard that a detailed plan, a blueprint, be devised
for this purpose. Indeed", he continued, "any
such detailed scheme, in view of all the develop-
ments since last November, and the present situa-
tion in Palestine, might well be undesirable.
Assuming always that the parties do not again
resort to force, it would seem that a somewhat
general treatment of the subject which, while mak-
ing clear the position of the United Nations on
major issues, would leave to the parties the burden
of peaceful adjustment, might have great merit".
The progress report of the mediator contains
seven basic premises. My Delegation supports the
general principles contained in these basic prem-
ises. We have no doubt but that all present can
accept the first one, namely, that "Peace must re-
turn to Palestine and every feasible measure should
be taken to insure that hostilities will not be re-
sumed and that harmonious relations between
Arab and Jew will ultimately be restored."
The second basic premise is that "A Jewish state
called Israel exists in Palestine and there are no
sound reasons for assuming that it will not con-
tinue to do so". This premise was stated even
more positively by the acting mediator when he
referred to its vibrant reality". The United
States gave prompt and full recognition to the
state of Israel. We are confident that Israel and
its people will continue the remarkable progress
they have already shown in the firm establish-
ment of their governmental institutions, in the
development of their economy, and in the resettle-
ment and rehabilitation of its immigrants. We
invite special attention to that portion of the
statement of the Foreign Minister of the Provi-
sional Government of Israel in which he asked for
the admission of Israel to the United Nations.
The United States looks forward to the admission
of the state of Israel to the United Nations and to
its active participation in our work. To this end,
we hope that the Security Council will be able in
the near future to recommend Israel as a state duly
qualified for membership.
The third basic premise of the mediator was that
"The boundaries of this new state (meaning Israel)
must finally be fixed either by formal agreement
between the jjarties concerned or failing that, by
658
Department of Slate Bulletin
the United Nations". This raises a vital and de-
cisive issue wliich confronts this Assembly. We
must decide, among other things, whether we are
to seek a basis of agreement among the parties or
whetlier we shall try to fix boundaries at this ses-
sion of the Assembly. We shall wish to discuss
this point at a later stage, but our general view is
that we must continue to seek further agi'eement
between the parties rather than attempt at this
time to draw specific boundary lines. We are in-
clined to the view that the Conciliation Commis-
sion which Count Bernadotte recommended
should undertake further effort to bring about a
settlement of boundary questions.
On another point the attitude of my Govern-
ment is clear. The United States approves the
claims of the state of Israel to the boundaries set
forth in the United Nations i-esolution of Novem-
ber 29 and considers that modifications thereof
should be made only if fully acceptable to the
state of Israel. This means that reductions in
such territory should be agreed by Israel. If
Israel desires additions, it would be necessary for
Israel to offer an appropriate exchange through
negotiations.
This brings us to the fourth basic premise of the
mediator, which stressed the principle of geo-
graphical homogeneity and integration, applicable
equally to Arab and Jewish territories.
We have noted from the statements made be-
fore this Committee by the representatives of the
governments concerned, that none of tliem is now
satisfied with the boundaries of the original par-
tition plan. Count Bernadotte believed that mu-
tual exchanges could make them more generally
acceptable and more workable. Clearly, the way
is open for further consideration of boundaries by
the parties and by the United Nations. The
United States believes that the progress report of
the mediator provides a basis for renewed efforts
to bring about a peaceful adjustment of differ-
ences. We hope that by using this report as a
basis of negotiations, the conflicting claims gf the
parties can be settled.
Again, Mr. Chairman, we shall wish to return
later to a more detailed consideration of this part
of our problem, but we believe that an equitable
and workable boundary adjustment can be found
which will meet the essential needs of the parties
and contribute to the peace and development of the
Near East.
The fifth basic premise deals with the repatria-
tion of the refugees who have been driven from
their homes during the recent disorders in Pales-
tine. We believe that they should be permitted
to return to their homes and that adequate com-
pensation should be arranged for the property of
those who choose not to return.
THB UNITBD NATIONS AND SPECIAUZBD AGENCIES
The sixth basic premise is that "the City of Jeru-
salem, because of its religious and international
significance and the complexity of interest in-
volved, should be accorded special treatment".
We accept this premise and will wish to discuss
later some of the detailed problems which are
involved.
The final basic premise deals with international
responsibility with respect to guaranties with re-
spect to boundaries and the maintenance of human
rights. The practical application of this basic
premise will require our careful consideration
since it is obvious that the essential guaranties
which are involved must be those provided, if
possible, by the United Nations itself.
It is not my present purpose, Mr. Chairman, to
make a detailed review of the specific conclusions
contained in the mediator's report. What has
already been said about the basic premises will
indicate a general approach which we take toward
the specific issues discussed in the mediator's con-
clusions.
The United States is in general agreement with
those conclusions, but I have already called atten-
tion to certain principles concerning boundaries,
about which I snail have more to say later. We
have noted that Mr. Shertok's statement indicates
that a workable arrangement for free access
through the port of Haifa and the airport of
Lydda might be found. The mediator's views with
respect to the disposition of Arab Palestine, to
arrangements for the city of Jerusalem, to rights
of access to Jerusalem, to the treatment of the Arab
refugee problem, to the rights of minorities, and
to the establishment of a Conciliation Commission
are, in our view, solid contributions to a settlement.
Mr. Chairman, my Delegation has studied with
much interest the draft resolution submitted by
the United Kingdom. We believe that it contains
many positive and constructive elements which
would bring us substantially nearer the solution
we seek. If we find ourselves unable to accept it
in all its particulars, because of some of the con-
siderations we have already mentioned, we shall
nevertheless continue to give it our careful con-
sideration. The distinguished Kepresentative of
the United Kingdom has presented it with an in-
vitation to amendment, and we might wish to avail
ourselves of this invitation at a later date. Mean-
while, Mr. Chairman, we believe it makes a most
useful contribution to our work and might well be
considered the basis of our common deliberations.
In an effort to assist the work of the Committee
as best we may, we shall try to present more specific
suggestions without delay; meanwhile, we would
welcome the views of other delegations, to all of
which we shall give most attentive interest.
November 28, 1948
659
Discussion off Armistice Resolution in Security Council
STATEMENT BY PHILIP C. JESSUP'
U.S. Deputy Representative in the Security Council
Mr. President, I should like to address my re-
marks particularly to the draft resolution sub-
mitted by the Delegations of Belgium, Canada,
and France. The substance of this resolution is
not futile. It is largely based, as has been noted
by its sponsors, on the proposals made by the act-
ing mediator. In our opinion, it is an improve-
ment upon that original text. The acting
mediator has himself pointed out that he is not
wedded to the particular phraseology of the pro-
posal which he submitted.
I quite agree with the distinguished Representa-
tive of France that at least two of the principal
points noted by the Representative of the Soviet
Union in his amendments to the proposal of the
acting mediator are met in this joint proposal
of the three delegations. In our view, the chief
merit of this proposal is that it looks forward and
not backward. Its philosophy is that we should no
longer ask the parties to continue under an uneasy
truce. This resolution will offer the parties new
hope. Its adoption should give them new confi-
dence in the future.
I would appeal, Mr. President, to the distin-
guished Representative of Syria to recognize that
this is progress and not retrogression. It is not an
abandonment of Security Council efforts, but a
continuation of those efforts. As some of the
previous speakers have pointed out, here is a new
program, a program of armistice and of negotiated
peace. It is of the utmost importance to the par-
ties themselves, to the United Nations, and to all
members of the United Nations that we should
now move forward toward the paramount pui--
pose of securing peace. We should move not
under the shadow of detrimental warfare but in
the light of negotiations and discussions. That
was the United Nations way.
The adoption of this resolution, Mr. President,
would also inspire and assist the efforts of the Gen-
eral Assembly which, as has been noted through
its First Committee, has today begun the consid-
eration of the Palestine question. When the fight-
ing broke out some six months ago, we had to have
some quick decisions. We had cease-fire orders.
We moved into a truce. We have adopted a num-
ber of resolutions relevant to that truce, including
' Made on Nov. 15, 1948, and released to the press by the
U.S. Mission to the U.N. on the same date.
660
as our last action that which we took on November
4. We have found that type of action is not
enough.
The attitude of the United States in regard to
the truce and to repeated resolutions dealing with
it has been made very clear. We summarized that
position on November 4 in this Council. We were
opposed to the use of force as a means of settle-
ment of disputes, and we have supported all of the
steps looking toward a truce, and we will support
this new proposal which has a like but greater
puri:)ose.
I think we must recognize, Mr. President, that
the Security Council under this resolution would
be effecting two transitions. In the first place,
there is a transition from the truce to the armistice,
and secondly, there is a transition from armistice
to permanent peace. In regard to the transition
from truce to armistice, I think this is more than
a change of words. It marks a change in attitude
and a change of attitude can produce an actual
change of facts.
I am not going to try, Mr. President, to avoid
speaking very frankly of what seems to me to be
a very important question which is raised by this
resolution which is placed before us, and that is,
its effect upon the resolution of November 4. I
should like to recall that paragraph 5 of that reso-
lution of November 4 contains two subparagraphs.
Subparagraph (1) refers to withdrawal of forces
and to provisional lines, which the acting mediator
is authorized to establish. I repeat, provisional
lines. The acting mediator in discharge of his re-
sponsibilities under that subparagraph (1) has
consulted with the Committee of the Council, also
appointed by the resolution of November 4. The
resolution which we are now considering, namely
that introduced by the three governments, says
that this resolution is without prejudice to the
actions of the acting mediator regarding the im-
plementation of that resolution of November 4.
As I interpret this resolution, therefore, the ac-
tion which the acting mediator has taken in de-
limiting lines in accordance with that subpara-
graph (1) still stands. Compliance with the reso-
lutions of the Council would require compliance
with that provision in regard to these provisional
lines. But, in subparagraph (2) of the resolution
of November 4, the Council also si^oke of further
negotiations. At that time, we suggested that
Department of Stale Bulletin
those further ne<rotiations should be directed to-
ward the cstablishiiKMit of pernKinout truce lines
and lU'utral or dcinilitarizod zones. The effect of
this now resolution if adopted by the Council
would be to suggest a new direction for those ne-
gotiations. Those negotiations, whether conducted
directly or through the United Nations acting
mediator, would have as their ])urpose not the con-
tinuation of the truce and the delimitation of truce
lines, but the delineation of permanent armistice
demarcation lines. They would have also as their
purpose such withdrawal of armed forces as will
insure the maintenance of the armistice during the
permanent peace in Palestine. In other woi'ds,
they are free to the actual establishment of peace
in Palestine.
Because this new resolution, therefore, passing
from the provisional stage of the truce as it has
been established by the Security Council to a fur-
ther stage on the road to peace, because that is
the intent and purpose and effect of this resolution,
we find it much more satisfactory than the reso-
lution tabled by the United Kingdom at our last
meeting, and we hope very much that the United
Kingdom will itself find that this new approach
is a more satisfactory one to that extension of
the truce which was contemplated by the resolution
which they have tabled.
I think it is clear to all of us, Mr. President, that
THE UNITBD NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
we are not now discussing the actual political
settlement in Palestine, but I think it is equally
clear that we could help pave the way to it. No
one disagrees with the objective of this resolution
introduced by the three members of the Council.
Opinions may and do differ as to the best methods
to use to achieve that objective. For example, the
distinguished Representative of the Soviet Union
has suggested an even bolder course, namely, that
we should move at once into the stage of final peace.
For our part, we do not feel that it is practicable
to move immediately into that stage and we do
think that the intermediate stage of the armistice
is a feasible and necessary step on the way to the
final goal. On the other hand, if I have under-
stood him correctly, the distinguished Representa-
tive of Syria suggested that we could not take
this new step forward along the road to peace
without first perfecting our previous stage of truce.
I find that also an imacceptable position since I
believe that the time has come when we must move
forward out of that truce stage into a more ad-
vanced and hopeful stage.
Therefore, Mr. President, the Delegation of the
United States finds the method proposed in this
resolution of the three governments a well-con-
ceived, a just, and a hopeful plan. We shall vote
for it and we hope that the Security Council will
adopt it this evening.
Third Session of the General Conference of UNESCO
STATEMENT BY GEORGE V. ALLEN'
Chairman of the United States Delegation
In rising to comment, Mr. Chairman, on the re-
port of the Director General, I beg the indulgence
of the General Conference for a few remarks con-
cerning the host country. We Americans feel par-
ticularly close to Lebanon, though separated phys-
ically by many miles of geographic distance.
Many thousands of Lebanese have gone to make
their homes in the United States and in many
other countries of the Western Hemisphere. They
have made good citizens and have enriched our
civilization by their energy, their intelligence, and
their culture. They have taken especial advan-
tage of the opportunities offered for themselves
and their children in the fields of educational and
cultural development. The intellectuals from
Beirut and the peasants from the villages of Mount
Lebanon have alike shown their innate ability for
personal development of the highest order.
It is not difficult for those who know this country
to understand why the individual Lebanese has so
November 28, 1948
great a capacity for mental achievement. The
Lebanese people have never been isolated or in-
sular in their outlook. From earliest times, they
were travelers, colonizers, and merchants. They
instructed the unlettered peoples of the northern
Mediterranean in the use of the alphabet centuries
before the silks of Cathay and the spices of the
Indies began pouring across this land bridge be-
tween Europe and Asia to make Beirut an entrepot
of the world.
Ever creative in its art and architecture, Leb-
anon still reveals its ancient contacts with Egypt
and Arabia on the one hand and with Greece and
Rome on the other. In the valley between the
ranges of the Lebanon moimtains stands that
world-famous temple of Baalbek — the place where
' Made at Beirut, Lebanon, in plenary session on Nov. 19,
1948, and released to the press on the same date. Mr.
Allen is Assistant Secretary for public affairs.
661
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
European motifs in stone were devoted to the Baal,
or Lord, of Bekaa' in a synthesis of East and West
rarely paralleled in any other historic site. Our
host town, founded as the Roman colony of Bory-
tus just before the time of Christ, soon became
famous as the seat of one of the most distinguished
schools of law in the Roman world. "Lux ex ori-
ente" and "lex ex occidente" combined to enrich
the ancient world.
We in America have seen convincing evidence,
from the Lebanese who have come to our shores,
that the modern-day inhabitants of Lebanon re-
tain that same capacity for great achievement
which their ancestors so abundantly demonstrated.
Nor has it been necessary for the people of Lebanon
to leave their own country to demonstrate these
capacities. Many of them have taken advantage
of opportunities for intellectual and cultural ad-
vancement in schools and institutions in their own
country.
I am proud, as an American, that outstanding
among such schools is the American University at
Beirut, which for 75 years has provided classrooms
and instruction not only to Lebanese but to stu-
dents from every part of the Near and Middle East.
That institution, I am also proud to proclaim, has
never been an institution for political or economic
or cultural imperialism. It has maintained the
high standards of academic and intellectual free-
dom which characterize the universities of all
countries where democracy is practiced and where
the minds of men are not encased in a strait
jacket by political dictatorship.
The fact that a liberal institution such as the
American University at Beirut has been able to
continue and to grow through many years of politi-
cal strife in this area is a tribute to the freedom-
loving nature of the Lebanese people and to their
yearning for intellectual development.
I would be less than fair if I did not pay tribute
to the contribution which other cultures, notably
that of France in the field of arts and sciences,
and Britain in the field of government, have made
to this part of the world. But my principal con-
cern is to emphasize not the contribution of
Europe and America to the Near and Middle East,
but the reverse. I wish to acknowledge, on behalf
of the American Delegation, our debt for the con-
tributions we have received from the Middle East,
and our recognition of the capacity and possibili-
ties of this area to contribute much further to the
advancement of knowledge and the betterment of
mankind.
The United Nations Educational, Scientific and
Cultural Organization holds its present meeting
in a land of ancient glory and of future greatness.
At the moment, this area is unfortunately torn
with political difficulties of a tragic nature. The
solution of a specific political problem is not the
immediate concern of Unesco. I know not how
662
the present difficulties of this area will be solved.
But I do know that all of the problems which beset
the world today will be well on the way to solution
if the Unesco concept of the essential oneness
of humanity can be brought nearer to acceptance.
It is to this task that we at this meeting must
address ourselves with every ounce of energy and
urgency we possess.
The General Conference of Unesco meets here
to discharge its constitutional responsibility for
determining the main lines of work of the organi-
zation. But this session of the Conference — and
every session of the Conference — is more than a
business meeting. We meet to rededicate ourselves
to those great principles of intellectual freedom
and mutual understanding which Unesco's con-
stitution proclaims, and on which the advance-
ment of civilization rests. Unesco seeks
through devotion to these principles to liberate
humankind from mutual fear and suspicion, and
to release man's creative energies for the construc-
tive arts of peace. On behalf of the Delegation
of the United States, on behalf of the Government
and of the people of my country, I wish to affirm
our unwavering support for Unesco in the
pursuit of this high aim.
The members of the U.S. Delegation have read
with close attention the report of the Director
General on the work of Unesco during the past
year. The report will be carefully reviewed by i
the Commissions of this Conference and my ob- ' j
servations here will therefore be directed to the ]
work that lies ahead.
The Delegation of the United States endorses
the view of the Executive Board that the program !
of Unesco for 1949 should be a continuation
with only minor modifications of the program ap-
proved last year at Mexico City. We should j
strive for a high degree of continuity and con-
sistency in the program. Moreover, Unesco
must provide basic services of a continuing charac-
ter which will not require reaffirmation by suc-
cessive sessions of the General Conference. At the
same time we must allow for necessary change and i
growth in the program. We may agree that some
activities require expansion or redirection ; others j
will be terminated or discarded. The newly ap- '
pointed Director General should be given full op-
portunity to review the existing program and to ij
submit his considered proposals at the next ses- '
sion. Accordingly, while at this session we re-
frain from major changes in the present program
we may well look to the future and encourage dis-
cussion of new ideas for the guidance of the Direc-
tor General and the Executive Board. In this
connection I am sure we shall wish to give con-
sideration to the imaginative and provocative
suggestions made by Dr. Huxley in his report.
I should like to congratulate Dr. Huxley and
Dr. Laves on the clarity of the 1949 budget esti-
Department of State Bulletin
inafos. It will be well understood that the United
States Delegation, like every other delegation, has
an inescapable res^ponsibility to subject the budget
to the most careful scrutiny. The people of my
country wish to be assured that the hnancial con-
tributions they are making to international organi-
zations are expended for projects which are well
conceived and efficiently executed and which make
definite contributions to the cause of peace. My
colleagues and I hope to give that assurance con-
cerning UNESCO in good faith and with sincere
conviction. The General Conference will do well,
therefore, to examine with particular care the pro-
posed increase in the budget of the Organization
and to ascertain whether certain economies cannot
be achieved without impairing the effectiveness of
the program.
In the view of our Delegation, it is essential that
Unksco should be able to point to a number of
concrete and significant accomplishments. The
report of the Director General gives ample evi-
dence that the Secretariat has done a great deal of
work; it is somewhat less convincing that that
work has yet resulted in concrete accomplishments.
People generally are not interested nor impressed
by an account of committee meetings or confer-
ences that have been held. They are impressed by
finished jobs. I hope that this Conference will set
a good example in one matter within its com-
petence by opening to signature the first con-
vention which UNESCO has drawn up — the
convention to facilitate the exchange of visual and
auditory materials of an educational character.
It is now two years since this convention was
drawn up at Paris, and the Director General was
instructed to circulate it to member countries with
a view to signature. It is high time we brought
this matter to a successful conclusion. Our Dele-
gation considers this to be a critical test of
Unesco's ability actually to accomplish a specific
task.
I wish also at this point to urge that this Con-
ference should state precisely and clearly the aim
and method of each Unesco project. When we
approve a project, let us inform ourselves how it
will be carried out and how it will be followed up,
in order that it may enter into the stream of
popular action. Let its contribution to peace and
welfare be clearly understood by us, if we would
insure that our work be understood and approved
by our people.
UNESCO draws its strength from its association
with the United Nations and the other specialized
agencies, from international voluntary organiza-
tions, from national commissions and cooperating
bodies in each member state, and from the millions
of people who hold Unesco as both a symbol of
the world society they desire and as an instrument
for helping them to realize that aspiration.
The United States Delegation, therefore, be-
November 28, J 948
THE UN/TED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED ACfNCIBS
lieves that it is essential to review relationships
between Unesco and other international organiza-
tions. Unesco may immeasurably augment its
effectiveness by closer cooperation with the United
Nations and the specialized agencies. It must co-
operate at every stage of planning and of execut-
ing projects which are of common concern to other
bodies. I would commend the efforts put forth
during the past year to work out practical methods
of cooperation, but I would urge that the General
Conferences should not fail to review previous
practice in this matter and to lay down policies for
the future.
Alongside the agencies established by govern-
ments to forward international cooperation are
the international organizations created by the vol-
untary efforts of private individuals. Here is
another field where Unesco may multiply its effec-
tiveness many fold by sharing cooperatively its
responsibilities and opportunities. The General
Conference and the Executive Board have given
much thought particularly to Unesco's financial
and administrative relationships with interna-
tional nongovernmental organizations. Nonethe-
less, these relationships are still governed largely
by historical accident and vary, without good
reason, from organization to organization and
from one department of Unesco to another. The
United States Delegation believes that in the com-
ing year Unesco should make a systematic study
of these organizations in order that a consistent
policy may be adopted and that Unesco may fully
utilize their resources for achieving its aims and
carrying out its program.
Mr. Chairman, I want to make it clear that what
I have been saying does not refer merely to the
smooth functioning of administrative machinery.
I am saying that this program of Unesco which we
shall approve must always be viewed as one piece
in a vast program of world-wide cooperative en-
deavor. We believe that people throughout the
world want to work together for peace and would
welcome any opportunity to take part in this
UNESCO program. I urge that all members of this
Conference, as they sit in commissions and sub-
commissions, search out opportunities for these
millions of people to join in this work.
No article in the constitution of Unesco is of
more significance than article 7 under which mem-
ber states undertake to establish national commis-
sions or national cooperating bodies. The United
States has proved in its own experience that a
national commission can be an agency which unites
the organized forces of labor unions, our farm
population, religious and civic organizations, to-
gether with the intellectuals and the savants, in
the service of Unesco. We have from the first in-
cluded representatives of such organizations on
our National Commission. They have been a
source of great strength. They carry the message
663
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
of UNESCO to every town and county in the country.
They make insistent demand that we give them
practical work to do to advance the aims of the
program of this organization.
I must admit that we cannot always give a satis-
factory response to this demand. It is the earn-
est hope of the Delegation of the United States
that the program of Unesco will develop steadily
in the next few years along lines which not merely
allow, but require, the active participation of the
people in all lands. We hope, too, that we can
make a significant start in this direction at this ses-
sion of the General Conference.
I draw particular attention to the fact that the
United States Delegation at the present Confer-
ence includes advisers from those two great organ-
izations of labor in the United States, the Amer-
ican Federation of Labor and the Congress of In-
dustrial Organizations. "We regard adequate la-
bor representation as an indispensable part of any
UNESCO Delegation from the United States.
Understanding among peoples means under-
standing among all the people. Intellectual co-
operation, in our view, must not be confined to
cooperation among intellectuals. "We must bring
Unesco to the masses and the masses to Unesco.
Members of the Conference — Unesco, like every
organ and agency of the United Nations, has a
heavy obligation to contribute, in its own sphere,
to the central purpose for which the whole United
Nations structure was created. This central pur-
pose is the maintenance of peace and the better-
ment of mankind.
UNESCO's role in tliis general task is a vital one.
Unesco is 7iot a luxury or a side issue, as some ob-
servers are inclined to believe. I am convinced
that if Unesco fails, the United Nations itself can-
not succeed. Unesco's particular task is to bring
about better human understanding and sympathy
among all the peoples of the world. I regret pro-
foundly, as I know you do, that circumstances have
prevented Unesco from accomplishing more in this
direction than it has. But I am fully convinced
that Unesco is one of the principal pillars on
which a solid United Nations structure must rest.
I am aware that this view of Unesco's impor-
tance is not universally accepted. Some people, in
my own country as well as elsewhere, are inclined
to think that Unesco's contribution, while desir-
able, is not essential or even of major importance.
Some, including persons as devoted to the United
Nations as you or I, appear genuinely to believe
that if a sufficiently powerful political and mili-
tary organization can be built around the General
Assembly and the Security Council, the question
whether different peoples understand each other
or cooperate will not matter very much, since, they
contend, peace will be maintained by force any-
way. Many of these self-styled "realists" think
that we who are concerned with Unesco aie wast-
ing our time. They believe that understanding
among widely divergent groups and interests is
impossible of achievement and that the only effec-
tive peace machinery is one of force.
My colleagues and I on the United States Dele-
gation emphatically reject that thesis. "We be-
lieve that no political or military organization,
however powerful, can impose a lasting peace un-
less there exists at the same time a considerable
measure of mutual understanding and sympathy
among the peoples of the world. Enough troops
could not be found to accomplish the task unless
they were aided by a large number of people of
good will in whose minds the defenses of peace
had been constructed. Unesco's task is to foster
these defenses of the mind which, once constructed,
are more potent than all the concrete and steel that
can ever be poured.
"We believe, furthermore, that despite the present
outlook the necessary degree of understanding
among men cati be developed and that the vital
challenge to Unesco can be met.
We are equally convinced, however, that human
understanding can be achieved on one, and only
one, basis — that of democracy. And we mean by
democracy that body of concepts of human liberty
and respect for the dignity of the individual per-
sonality which the world has always meant to us.
It has been perverted during recent years by totali-
tarian movements which, in their police-imposed
dictatorships, are the antithesis of democracy, but
we do not intend to abandon the word merely
because othere may seek the advantage of its high
connotation while destroying it in practice.
I do not refer, in speaking of democracy, to
differing concepts or experiments in the production
of wealth. I am not concerned, for example, with
the decision of any people that their coal should be
mined under government rather than private
ownership, or with any other economic experi-
ments which a free people may wish to undertake.
We Americans are attached, by and large, to pri-
vate enterprise, but if any nation can demonstrate
a better method than has yet been found for pro-
ducing wealth and distributing the fruits of a
man's labors, the world will make a path to its
door. Freedom to try new methods is one of the
essential characteristics of democracy itself.
What does concern the United States Delegation
is that human beings everywhere be given full
freedom either to approve or to criticize the eco-
nomic system in force or the administration in
power. Human beings everywhere must enjoy the
basic rights of free speech. Scientists and scholars
must retain intellectual freedom to pursue their
investigations. Creative artists must be free to
express themselves. Ideas must gain acceptance
in the free competition of the market place and not
from tlie dictates of a governmental bureaucracy.
Biological principles may no more be controlled
664
Department of State Bulletin
by political dictatorship today than the discoveries
of Galileo could be altered by religious dogma four
centuries ago. We are prepared, under democ-
racy, to tolerate every idea except intolerance.
The conviction of the United States Delegation
(hut UNESCO can succeed only on the basis of
intellectual freedom is founded not on theory but
on liar<l and bitter e-xjierience. Efforts were made,
following the First World War, to achieve co-
operation among the intellectual leaders of the
workl, and machinery was set up to accomplish
this purpose. High hopes arose for its success.
(Tradually, with the suppression of thought by the
Xazi and Fascist authorities, cooperation and
understanding with scholars and scientists under
these regimes grew progressively more difficult
until it finally became impossible.
After the Second World War, Unesco was
established for the similar but broader purpose
of achieving cooperation and understanding
among all peoples. Its doors have always been
open and will always remain open to those who
subscribe to its purposes. Its success will depend
upon the number of doors Uxesco can keep
open to the free flow of thought and expression
throughout the world.
Despite the varying degrees with which democ-
racy is practiced in the world (and my countrymen
make no claims to Utopia in this respect), Unesco
must continue to strive diligently to bring all
peoples together and to reduce the tensions con-
TH£ UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGENCIES
ducive to war. We regard the condition of the
world today not as a cause for despair, but as a
challenge, to Unesco. Large numbers of govern-
ments and peoples are willing to cooperate,
through Unesco, on the basis of the democratic
principles which motivate its Charter, and prog-
ress corn be made, with steadfastness and courage,
in bringing closer together minds which are now
poisoned with hatred through misunderstanding.
But the minds of men in which the defenses of
peace are built must be free minds. The human
intellect will not be chained, and those who attempt
it today are sowing the wind as recklessly as all
tyrants who have tried it since the world began. It
is strangely difficult for some people to understand
this simple truth of history, but we of Unesco
should. We are the one agency of U.N. where this
principle must be most clearly manifest. The
future progress of Unesco, the United States Dele-
gation is convinced, lies along the path of freedom.
Any other road leads to certain and dismal failure.
Present-day quarrels are caused by bigotry and
ignorance, and are fostered by governments which
tell their people what they must believe and isolate
them against other ideas. The free flow of ideas
is our only salvation and Unesco was created to
bring this about.
Let the mind of man be free, and it will soar to
undreamed heights of majesty. Let people under-
stand each other and they will create a world order
of peace and human betterment.
Current United Nations Documents: A Selected Bibliography'
General Assembly
Third Interim Report of the United Nations Special Com-
mittee on the Balkans. A/692, October 25, 1948. 13
pp. mimeo.
Transfer to the United Nations of Functions and Powers
Exercised by the League of Nations under the Inter-
national Convention Relating to Economic Statistics
Signed at (Jeneva. Report of the Sixth Committee.
.\/713, November 11, 1948. 6 pp. mimeo.
Official Records of the Second Special Session of the
General Assembly. Volume II. Main Committees.
Summary Records of Meetings. 16 April-14 May
1948. xvi, 279 pp. printed. $3.00.
Annex to Volumes I and II. iv, 4.5 pp. printed. 50rf.
Security Council
Letter, Dated 1 November 1948, from the Permanent Rep-
resentative of the FFR of Yugoslavia to the United
Nations, Addressed to the President of the Security
Council Transmitting Annual Report of the Yugoslav
Army Military Government on the Administration of
November 28, 1948
Yugoslav Zone of the Free Territory of Trieste.
S/1066, November 4, 1948. 80 pp. mimeo.
Official Records, Third Year. No. 77, 309th and 310th
meetings, 29 May 1948. 64 pp. printed. 60?;.
Supplement for May 1948. 104 pp. printed. $1.00.
No. 78, 311th meeting, 2 June 1948. 24 pp. printed.
250.
No. 79, 312th and 313tli meetings, 3 June 1948. 29
pp. printed. 30(*.
Supplement for June 1948. 150 pp. printed. $1.50.
No. 97, .337th and 338th meetings, 15 July 1948. 70
pp. printed. 70!*.
No. 99, 341st and 342d meetings, 29 July 1948. 42
pp. printed. 50('.
Supplement for July 1948. 128 pp. printed. $1.2.5.
' Printed materials may be secured in the United States
from the International Dociuuents Service, Columbia
University Press, 2960 Broadway, New York City. Other
materials (mimeographed or processed documents) may
be consulted at certain designated libraries in the United
States.
665
The United States and the United Nations
November 19-26 Four Power Currency Control in Berlin
Trade Discrimination
All effort by Poland to get the General Assembly
to condemn political use of "international trade
discrimination" was defeated in the plenary ses-
sion of November 26 by a vote of 33 to 6, with 8
abstentions. Only the Soviet Union and the other
Eastern European nations cast afiirmatiye votes
for the resolution, which was aimed at discredit-
ing the European Recovery Program.
In arguing for the resolution, identical to one
recently defeated also in the Assembly's Economic
and Financial Committee, the U.S.S R., Poland,
and Czechoslovakia alleged that the United btates
discriminates against Eastern Europe in its allo-
cation of export commodities and is attempting
through the Erp to prevent the gi-owth of East-
West European trade.
Willard Thorp, United States Assistant becre-
tary of State for economic affairs and alternate
delegate to the Assembly, branded the Polish
charo-es "highly inaccurate". He explained that
such controls as the United States still maintains
over exports "are administered to achieve equita-
ble distribution of commodities in short supply,
to make effective our efforts to assist Erp, and m
the interest of our national security".
Recalling Soviet-bloc attacks on Erp in the Eco-
nomic Committee, Mr. Thorp commented that
Erp results "are already so evident, its promise so
great, that those countries which more or less
voluntarily decided not to join this cooperative
effort seem increasingly compelled to explain over
and over again their constantly changing reasons
for their nonparticipation. At the same time,
they complain increasingly that they cannot share
the benefits of this cooperation, that they too can-
not enjoy some of the assistance from the United
States (called 'enslavement' in their new termi-
nology) which they simultaneously attack and
envy".
He accused Poland of trying to gam acceptance
of "new concepts of what constitutes nondiscrinii-
nation in international trade" in direct conflict
with those adopted by 50 nations in framing the
Havana Charter for proposed International Trade
Organization. Wliat Poland was really seeking,
MrTThorp asserted, was "approval of narrow bilat-
eralism in all international trade and rejection of
the multilateralism which alone can assure true
equality among all nations large and small. If
the United States or any other country wished to
practice discrimination, whether for political or
other purposes, then the clearly indicated course
would be for it to base all its trade relations on
bilateralism, for by that means trade pressures
can be most easily applied".
666
The United States, Great Britain, and France
feel that Four Power control of Berlin's currency
will be difficult to exercise in a city in which the
previous unified municipal administration under
Four Power supervision is not fully functioning
at present and is indeed being rapidly diminished.
This feeling was expressed in the Western
powers' joint reply to Security Council President
Juan A. Bramuglia's questionnaire to the four
occupying powers on how quadripartite control
of Berlin's tangled currency might be achieved.
Mr. Bramuglia made the Western nations' reply
public on November 2G along with the Soviet
answer to the questionnaire.
"The representatives of the Western powers are
anxious to provide all possible assistance in your
examination of the Berlin currency problem , the
joint reply notified Mr. Bramuglia. "They are
continuing their study of possible solutions in the
light of current developments in Berlin. If you
or your colleagues desire to enter into technical
discussion on the details to be worked out, our
experts will be at your disposal."
The answers to President Bramuglia's questions
were as follows :
Question 1: "What organizations will exercise
the quadripartite control of the financial arrange-
ments on behalf of the four occupying powers?"
Western powers and the U.S.S.R. agree that a
financial commission composed of representatives
of the four Military Governors should be estab-
lished. The West added that the commission
should be responsible to the Military Governors.
Question 2: "What will be the functions of
these quadripartite control organizations?"
The AVestern powers listed six functions: To
control money, credit, and banking matters; to
control banking and credit institutions to assure
adequate, uniform facilities throughout Berlin
without discrimination; to supervise and control
the arrangements for introduction and continued
use of the East mark as Berlin's sole currency; to
supervise and control the Berlin government's
fiscal policies and budgetary arrangements; to
supervise and control the East mark's introduction
as the sole currency and withdrawal of the West-
ern B mark from circulation in Berlin ; to super-
vise and control issuance of import and export
licenses by the Magistrat.
The Soviets replied only that the commission
should exercise functions envisaged in an agree-
ment reached at Moscow on August 30 between
Western envoys and Soviet leaders. (The direc-
tive never was placed in effect because the Soviet
Military Governor in Berlin insisted on preempt-
ing authority which was not provided for in the
Department of State Bulletin
Moscow agi'ceinent. including control of the air-
lift operated by the United States and Great
Britain.)
Question 3: "Over what operations and in what
area will the quadripartite control be exercised?"
The West answered that quadripartite control
should cover all operations mentioned in the reply
to question 2 and also cover the issuing bank's
operations pertaining to the East mark's introduc-
tion and use as Berlin's sole currency.
The Soviet Union replied that the commission
should insure that there be no discrimination
in the exchange of Western marks, equal treatment
and accessibility to banking and credit facilities
in all sectors of Berlin, observance of guaranties
envisaged in the August 30 directive, maintenance
of net balance of trade between Berlin and the
Western zones and third countries, and provision
of sufficient currency for budgetary purposes and
for occupation costs, and also the balancing of
the Berlin budget.
Qiustion If.- "^^Hiat is the exact working of the
directive that must be issued to bring the quadri-
partite control into operation?"
The West said the four Military Governors
should issue the necessary legislation, explaining
that "in the absence of sufficient agreement with
the Soviet Government upon the content of this
legislation, the Western jiowers have not at this
time attempted to draft it in detail".
The U.S.S.R. said the wording should corre-
spond to the August 30 directive.
Question 5: "How will trade between Berlin
and the Western zones and third countries be con-
trolled, including the issuance of import and ex-
port licenses?"
The Western powers replied that they "should
be able freely to import food and fuel into their
sectors of Berlin in fulfilment of their responsi-
bilities for the health and welfare of the popula-
tion, and should control the proceeds of the sale
in Berlin of these imports". They added that
other trade should be conducted in accordance
with licenses issued by the Magistrat. "The Soviet
authorities would automatically grant transit li-
censes through the Soviet zone in respect of such
trade", they wrote.
The Soviet answer asserted that the proposed
quadripartite commission should control trade
and "should also issue licenses for the import and
export of goods on the basis of observance of the
net balance, excluding the deliver'es of food, fuel,
and electric power intended to supply the Berlin
population in the form of aid".
Palestine
The General Assembly Political Committee on
November 16 named an informal working group
to report on points of similarity in the various
resolutions aimed at a political settlement in Pal-
estine which are now before it. In the group are
XHS UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAIIZED AGENCIES
delegates of U.S., U.K., Australia, Colombia,
Poland, Guatemala, Syria, and the Soviet Union.
The Committee, in adjourmnent until Novem-
ber 27, plans to resume the Palestine debate when
the working group produces a paper "on which
intelligent discussion can continue".
Under consideration now are five separate pro-
posals submitted by the United Kingdom, Aus-
tralia, Colombia, Poland, and the Soviet Union.
In addition, the United States has submitted a
series of amendments altering the original British
text, and the United Kingdom has come forward
with a revised plan designed to meet some of the
U.S. suggestions. Guatemala also introduced an
amendment to a U.S. amendment.
Three of the proposed resolutions — those of the
United Kingdom, Colombia, and Australia — call
for establishment of a conciliation commission
charged with working out a permanent settlement.
The United States, in its amendments, supported
this move, urging that the commission be given
wide latitude in direct mediation of the Palestine
dispute.
Other U.S. -proposed changes in the original
British text would eliminate consideration of the
report of the late Count Folke Bernadotte as the
only basis for settlement, emphasizing that both
the Assembly partition plan advanced last year
and the mediator's proposals offer useful guides
for a negotiated agreement between Israel and
her neighbors.
Acting mediator Ralph Bunche transmitted to
the Security Council and to the Arab Govern-
ments an Israeli letter accepting the Council's No-
vember 16 resolution calling for armistice talks.
The Israeli Government expressed a preference
for direct negotiations with the Arabs, to begin
as soon as possible, but said if this is impracticable,
it is prepared to negotiate through U.N. inter-
mediaries. Dr. Bunche said that Egypt had re-
fused to talk peace either directly or indirectly
until Israeli forces withdraw to the positions they
occupied on October 14, the date when they
launched a successful di'ive to win control of the
Negev desert. Other Arab states have not replied.
The revised British proposal would authorize
the projected commission to consider any terri-
torial settlement "mutually acceptable to the
pai-ties", and suggests that delimitation of fron-
tiers take into consideration both the original
Palestine partition resolution and the Bernadotte
report. However, it calls for a General Assembly
endorsement of "the specific conclusions" of the
mediator as "providing a practical means of giv-
ing effect to the principles" of the partition
resolution.
The Bernadotte report would require the Jews
to give up the southern Negev desert area in ex-
change for all of Galilee. The partition plan
would have awarded Israel the Negev, and as-
signed Western Galilee to an Arab state.
November 28, J948
667
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES
The Eighteenth International Geological Congress
BY ELIOT BLACKWELDER
After having been postponed for eight years,
because of World War II, the Eighteenth Inter-
national Geological Congress met at London, from
August 7 to September 19, 1948. For the past 70
years the geologists of the world have been holding
such conferences at periodic intervals. The first
of these meatings was at Paris in 1878, and the
seventeenth at Moscow in 1937.
Each of the Geological Congresses is a unit, hav-
ing only slender ties with the others. The initia-
tive usually comes from a geological society or
survey bureau of a particular country. The geol-
ogists request their own government to extend an
official invitation to the Congress to hold its next
meeting in their country. After the acceptance of
such an invitation, the local geologists form a gen-
eral organizing committee, which is widely repre-
sentative of all the geologists and members of
closely related professions in the country. This
committee then sets up a practical organization to
prepare for the Congress, to conduct it, and to
issue its reports. Invitations are sent out by the
host government to other countries, as well as to
iniiversities and other scientific institutions, asking
them to appoint delegates to the Congress. At the
opening meeting of the Congi-ess these delegates
meet under the chairmanship of the president of
the preceding Congress or his representative and
elect officers for the current session. Membership
in the Congress is open to all geologists and to
workers in related fields sufficiently interested to
attend.
The formal meetings of the Eighteenth Congress
occupied the last seven days in August 1948. Out
of the 1,756 registered members, more than 1,400
actually attended the sessions. Among them were
delegates from 57 countries, representing also 290
universities and other scientific institutions.
Japan was represented by a geologist from the Su-
preme Commander for Allied Powers, and Ger-
many (British zone) by two eminent German geol-
ogists, whose attendance was arranged by British
geological organizations. Of the 124 members
registered from the Union of Soviet Socialist Ee-
publics, seven came to the Congress — all official
delegates of the Soviet Government. Next to the
United Kingdom contingent, the largest was the
73-man group from the United States. The num-
ber would have been greater but for the difficulty
668
of obtaining transportation. Unfortunately, the
American delegation did not include the leading
officers of the United States Geological Survey or
the Geological Society of America, who were un-
able to attend. In contrast to previous Congresses,
the representation from such geologically impor-
tant countries as Germany, Austria, and Finland
was very small. This was due largely to cur-
rency and travel restrictions. In spite of such
difficulties, however, there were several delegates
from China and India and even one from Burma.
In order to facilitate the presentation of nearly
400 technical papers, the meetings at London were
divided into 12 sections, which met in the Koyal
College of Science, the Royal School of Mines, and
the Royal Geographical Society, all of which were
near the Congress headquarters at the Geological
Survey building at South Kensington. The sec-
tions dealt with such subjects as the geology of the
sea bottom, the geology and ore deposits of lead
and zinc, the chemistry of the earth, the geology
of petroleum, and the effects of earth movements
on organic evolution.
To consider special pi'oblems there were various
standing commissions and temporary committees
which held meetings, reviewing the progress made
in correspondence since the last Congress and lay-
ing plans for carrying on their work during the
interim until the next Congress. Some of the com-
missions made reports and recommendations to
the Council. One of them is working on the prepa-
rations of a geological map of the world, another
on the geological aspects of the early history of
man, and others on still more specialized subjects.
One of the temporary committees considered ways
and means of reviving one of several journals of
geomorphology, all of which had ceased publica-
tion as a result of the war.
Before and after the meetings at London most of
the members took advantage of the numerous ex-
cursions which had been arranged under the guid-
ance of local experts in the various localities. The
British Isles are a classic area for the geologist,
since much of the early development of the science
took place there ; and it is also a region of unusual
geologic interest. Some of the excursions took the
members to Scotland ; others to southern England,
the Lake District, Wales, Ireland, and other dis-
tricts. The excursions had been carefully planned
Department of State Bulletin
in advance, and the participants were supplied
witli special maps and printed jj;uide books. The
fruitful discussions of geologic problems in the
field were, as always, one of the most profitable
parts of the Congress. The opportunities cov-
ered many aspects of geology from the very ancient
rocks of northern Scotland to the Pleistocene for-
mations along the Norfolk coast and their close
link with archeology.
A proposal to establish an International Union
of Geology under the auspices of the United Na-
tions Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organ-
ization (Unesco) was vigorously debated but
finally deferred until the next Congress.
In response to an invitation from the French
Government, the next Congress is scheduled to be
held at Algiers. While the Nineteenth Congress
is unlikely to be as large as the one at London, it
maj' be very instructive to geologists, especially
those who are interested in the more arid regions.
Within the next year or two the Eighteenth Con-
ACTIVITIES AND DEVBLOPMENTS
gress will issue to its members one or more volumes
of reports, containing the papers presented at the
Congress. There will also be a special volume on
the geology and ores of lead and zinc that should
be timely in view of the critical shortage of these
metals which now faces the industrial world, for
the present supplies seem unlikely to last more than
a quarter of a century.
The utility of such conferences as the Interna-
tional Geological Congress are plain enough to
scientists in general. For the progress of geology
it is necessary that geologists of the whole world
meet from time to time to learn what they sever-
ally have been doing and to discuss their results.
It is important that geologists be acquainted with
each other so that they can better evaluate their
own contributions. It is not the main purpose of
the Congress to reach decisions on policies or scien-
tific questions, but rather to promote the inter-
change of facts and ideas, which in turn makes for
general progress.
Conservation of Fishery Resources in Northwest Atlantic To Be Discussed
The Department of State announced on Novem-
ber 15 that in view of the serious depletion of cer-
tain commercially important species of fish in the
Northwest xVtlantic, an international conference
will be convened by this Government in Washing-
ton on January 26, 1949, for the purpose of dis-
cussing the development of means for formal in-
ternational cooperation in the investigation and,
where necessary, the conservation of the fishery
resources in question.
As a result of an informal approach to various
governments to determine the extent of current
international interest in the fisheries of the North-
west Atlantic, invitations to participate at the
January conference have been issued to the fol-
lowing countries : Canada, Denmark, France, Ice-
land, Italy, Newfoundland, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, and the United Kingdom.
In its consideration of the need for international
cooperative action, this Government has, of course,
been particularly interested in the condition of
those species in the Northwest Atlantic area fished
by United States nationals. The backbone of the
New England fishing industry is the otter-trawl
fishery. This fishery brings to port the various
species of very valuable bottom-living fishes. At
the present time, the stocks of these species on the
New England banks are at a relatively low average
level of abundance.
November 28, 7948
The abundance of marketable-sized haddock is
now at an all-time low. In an effort to continue
bringing in haddock to satisfy the large demand,
the industry has been forced to resort to fishing for
immature and baby fish. This development is ex-
tremely unfortunate, for although admittedly it is
increasing the present catch to a certain extent, it is
seriously decreasing the potential production of
this fishery.
Fishing for rosefish has been very heavy in re-
cent years, and the abundance of this fish lias been
gradually reduced to the point where United
States vessels have to steam much farther from
port in order to find commercial quantities. Ten
years ago, even five years ago, the bulk of the catch
of rosefish was taken within 150 miles of Glouces-
ter and Boston, in the Gulf of Maine and South
Channel. Now many vessels are forced to travel
to Sable Island and Banquero Bank, 500 to 600
miles from port, in order to return with a payload.
Catches of halibut have gradually dwindled
through the years until today they constitute an
insignificant quantity. The catches of cod from
the New England banks are likewise reduced and
accordingly an increasing number of lengthy and
expensive trips to the Nova Scotian banks have
become necessary.
The general scarcity of groundfish on the New
England banks has not been disastrous to the fish-
669
ACTIVITIBS AND DEVELOPMENTS
ing industry only because of the very high prices
being paid for fish since the end of the war.
Should a more bountiful supply of meat cause the
price of fish to drop, the value of the United States
groundfish landings, if they remain at the present
low level, may be so small as to have a serious finan-
cial effect upon the domestic industry.
The United States otter-trawl fleet is at present
larger than at any other time in history and, with
protein food so much in demand, indications are
that it will become even larger. In addition, the
fleets of many foreign countries are rapidly ex-
panding operations in an attempt to satisfy the
great world food demand. The North Sea and
other important European fishing areas have
apparently become depleted to such an extent that
they produce only a fraction of former poundages.
It is possible that the depletion of European banks
will result in a shift in the operations of many
European vessels to the Northwest Atlantic. With
the expected heavy exploitation of the fisheries of
the Northwest Atlantic, the question of maintain-
ing the highest possible level of productivity be-
comes increasingly important and urgent. The
I^resent scarcity of fish on the New England banks,
and the probable increase in fishing pressure by
our own and by foreign vessels, indicates the ex-
treme value of providing means for determining if
the decline of the fisheries can be stopped and if
production can be increased in the future. For
example, our fishery biologists are certain that the
protection of small haddock would substantially
increase the future landings.
A great deal of research would of course be neces-
sary to find out how other increases, for haddock
and for other species, could be obtained. To put
into effect any changes which, as a result of such
research, are found to be useful in increasing the
production of these fisheries, some sort of regula-
tion would be necessary inasmuch as voluntary
changes have little chance of success.
The off-shore fishing banks of the Northwestern
Atlantic are fished by nationals of many countries
besides the United States. Tlius, if tne various
New England States, or the Federal Government,
regulated the fishing methods to be used by United
States fishermen, while the other countries were
free to use whatever methods they wished, little
help would be afforded the fisheries. Eegula-
tions, therefore, must be put into effect by agree-
ment of the various countries who, at present and
in the future, fish the banks of the Northwest
Atlantic.
Scientific study of these fisheries, a prerequisite
to any regulations, would also be undertaken best
on an international scale, with a pooling of scien-
tific facilities and the knowledge of fishery experts
of all the interested countries.
' Not printed. For text of the draft convention see at-
tachment to Department of State press release no. 901 of
Nov. 10, 1948.
It is emphasized that the purpose of any regu-
lations which might grow out of scientific study
following an international fisheries agreement
would be to increase the sustained production of
these fisheries. It is not contemplated that any
regulation would be recommended without ade-
quate scientific evidence proving that the proposed
measure will actually serve that purpose.
International interest in certain fisheries of the
North Atlantic Ocean is evidenced by the fact that
for centuries the nationals of North American and
western and southern European countries have
fished portions of this important area. As a re-
sult of such interest, a number of treaties dealing
with accessory rights on shore and in adjacent
waters have been developed and adjusted from
time to time over the years. Until recently, how-
ever, consideration was not given to the desirability
of formal international cooperation in the con-
servation and development of the fishery resources.
The increasing recognition of the seriousness of
the existing and potential depletion of commer-
cially important species of fish in the North At-
lantic resulted in an international conference in
London in 1937. It was at that time considered
feasible to treat the entire North Atlantic as a
single conservation unit. The international con-
vention for the regulation of meshes of fishing nets
and the size limits of fish which was concluded at
this conference was accordingly designed to apply
to the entire North Atlantic.
The 1937 convention did not enter into force and
the British Government, therefore, convened other
international conferences in London in October
1943 and April 1946 to reconsider this general
problem. The United States was represented by
an observer delegation at these international over-
fishing conferences. After discussions with the
other states contiguous to the Northwest Atlantic,
the United States suggested that there were ac-
tually two areas in the North Atlantic which were
readily separable because of the nationals con-
cerned and the problems involved. It was there-
fore proposed that consideration be given to the
desirability of separate treatment for the North-
east and Northwest Atlantic. The agreement of
the 1946 conference to this concept is evidenced by
the fact that the convention which resulted from
the work of the conference set the western bound-
ary of the convention area at 42 degrees west lon-
gitude.
Since it has been agreed that it would be prefer-
able to give separate consideration to the North-
west Atlantic, the United States Government, after
consultations with the interested States of the
United States and the New England fishing in-
dustry, has prepared a draft convention for use at
the forthcoming conference.^ The draft conven-
tion will be used only as a basis for discussion, and
does not necessarily represent the position to be
taken by this Government at the conference.
670
Department of State Bulletin
Ninth International Exhibition of Cinematographic Art
The Niiitli International Exhibition of Cine-
matographic Art was held at Venice August 19-
Sept ember 4, l'J48.
This exhibition, the Festival of Music, and the
Festival of the Theatre composed the "Biennale
of Venice" for 1948 and were under the patronage
of the Italian Government. The purpose of the
exhibition was to give public acknowledgment to
those hlms which testify to a genuine effort toward
progress in this field as a means of artistic expres-
sion and the spread of culture between nations.
Chester A. Lindstrom, Chief of the Motion Pic-
ture Service, Office of Information, Department of
Agriculture, represented this Government at the
exhibition. The United States sent 24 specialized
nontheatrical films for display, 11 of which were
U. S. Government films. Other films were sent
by the American Motion Picture Association.
Twenty nations took part in the exhibition :
Austria, Argentina, Belgium, Czechoslovakia,
Denmark, France, Germany, India, Israel. Italy,
Mexico, Morocco, the i>J^etherlands, Poland,
Sweden, Switzerland, the Free Territory of
Trieste, the Union of South Africa, the United
Kingdom, and the United States.
Although the United States submitted only
about 5 percent of the specialized films, it received
about 8 percent of the awards. These awards
were made by a jury composed of leading artists,
critics, and journalists selected by the president of
the Biennale from among Italian nationals and
persons in no way connected with the production
or exploitation of motion pictures.
Silver medals were awarded to Naval Photog-
raphy in Science (Navy) and Hurricane Circuit
(State). The United States won the second and
third International Grand Prix with The Fugitive
by John Ford and Louisiana Story by Robert J.
Flaherty. The Grand Prix for musical score went
to Max il. Steiner of the United States for his work
in Treasure of Sierra Madre. David O. Selznick's
Duel in the Sun won the "Coppa Cinecitta" (Movie
City Cup) without specification. Walt Disney's
Melody Time and Frenchman Paul Grimault's
Le Petit Soldat tied for the best cartoon.
During the exhibition, the United States Dele-
gate requested a meeting of the various foreign
representatives to discuss and formulate recom-
mendations for the future guidance of exhibition
authorities in setting up film categories. Prior
to the meeting, the United Kingdom and the
United States Representatives drew up a set of
suggested rules and regulations, and at the meeting
these suggestions were presented and, with some
additions and modifications, were adopted.
The categories, as moved on and adopted are :
(1) education (instructional teachers' films for
classroom use, and informational background
films) ; (2) medical films (including teaching
and research films) ; (3) scientific films (for
higher education or research) ; (4) propaganda
films (including industrially sponsored films) ;
(5) entertainment films (made specifically for
children) ; and (6) art films (films of a cultural
type on music, art, literature, and drama).
U.S. Delegation to Preparatory Committee
Meeting of IMCO
On November 19 the Department of State an-
nounced that Huntington T. Morse, Special As-
sistant to the Commission, United States Maritime
Commission, has been named United States Dele-
gate to the second meeting of the Preparatory
Committee of the Intergovernmental Maritime
Consultative Organization (Imco), scheduled to
open at Lake Success, New York, November 30,
1948. John W. Mann, Assistant Shipping Ad-
vi.ser, Department of State, has been named alter-
nate, and John M. Cafes, Jr., Division of United
Nations Economic and Social Affairs, Department
of State, will serve as adviser.
Delegates from the following 12 member coun-
tries of the Preparatory Committee are expected to
attend : Argentina, Australia, Belgium, Canada,
France, Greece, India, the Netherlands, Norway,
Sweden, the United Kingdom, and the United
States.
The Committee was established to function until
the convention on the International Maritime Con-
sultative Organization comes into force. The con-
vention was drawn up at the United Nations Mari-
time Conference at Geneva, February-March, 1948,
to which 32 governments sent representatives. It
will come into force when ratified by 21 countries,
7 of which must have at least one million gross tons
of shipping each. President Truman has trans-
mitted the convention to the Senate with a view
to United States ratification.
The agenda for the second session of the Pre-
paratory Committee includes administrative and
budgetary problems, the planning of a program
for the implementation of the Committee's func-
tions, aJid discussion of the draft agreement be-
tween the United Nations and the Imco. The first
meeting of the Preparatory Committee was held
at Geneva, March 1, immediately following the
Conference which drew up the maritime con-
vention.
November 28, 7948
671
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Helping the World To Know Us Better
BY HOWLAND H. SARGEANT >
Acting Assistant Secretary for Public Affairs
"How can American education best promote
international understanding?" is no ordinary
query. It is a challenge to every one of us who
believes in the vital role American education must
play in the struggle to assure a free and democratic
world. This is a subject which is receiving a great
deal of careful— and I might say prayerful— atten-
tion in Washington. The United States Govern-
ment is currently engaged in one of the most
absorbing and exacting tasks in our history, the
task of decisively defeating a powerful effort to
destroy our way of life and at the same time pre-
serving the peace of the world. It is because we
hope, despite all the difficulties and dangers, to win
this all-important struggle by peaceful means that
education is one of the most effective weapons at
our connnand. If we can succeed in preventing a
resort to arms, we are confident that the peoples
of the world will ultimately choose democracy as
the system that assures them more freedom and
greater material benefits than any other.
Here I want to emphasize that this is a task in
which we all are involved and in which you who
are engaged in foreign trade can play a doubly
important part. The stakes are high. The brunt
of the battle may be borne by the Government, but
like modern war, this is a total effort in which we
are all equally engaged, whether in a commanding
or a supporting role. Whether as Government
officials or businessmen, we must make our maxi-
mum effort in the same cause. We must find how
we can coordinate our respective efforts to greatest
advantage.
The best antidote for Communism is a universal
sense of security and economic well-being. There-
fore, the primary objective of the United States is
the promotion of stability and recovery as the first
prerequisites of a peaceful and prosperous world.
This country is the principal source for the finan-
cial aid and the agricultural and industrial pro-
duction required to restore war-wrecked economies
and build up underdeveloped areas. But if world
recovery achieved by these means is to continue and
' Made before the National Foreign Trade Convention
in New York City, on Nov. 8, 1948, and released to the press
on the same date.
672
yield maximum returns, a third ingredient is in-
dispensable.
Only through the utilization of modern tech-
nical and administrative "know-how", of which
the United States also is the primary source, can
many of the peoples we aid capitalize fully on the
reconstruction and development whicli they are so
eager to carry forward. This third form of as-
sistance is essential to make the first two most
effective. Our partners in this cooperative enter-
prise need to build up a considerable corps of
trained and competent technicians, specialists, and
administrators to carry on the programs once they
are well begun. Otherwise the gains first made
with the impetus of American aid may be lost.
Fortunately, this kind of help is far less expen-
sive than the first two. Although our capital and
production that can be spared for use abroad are
definitely limited, our supply of exportable "know-
how" is proportionately much larger. And even
by the narrow standard of American self-interest,
the benefits, both tangible and intangible, are con-
siderable.
U.S. Experience in the Educational-Cultural Fields
How do we know? Because we have tried it.
For ten years, the United States Government has
engaged in a successful program of educational,
technical, and cultural exchange with the other 20
American republics and the Philippines. This is
the "pilot plant" for what is now becoming the
world's greatest venture in educational exchange
as a means of promoting international understand-
ing, material well-being, and the conditions requi-
site for peace.
That undertaking is made possible by the en-
actment by the Eightieth Congress of the Smith-
Mundt Act, now known as Public Law 402. The
passage of this legislation constitutes congres-
sional recognition that the world-wide struggle be-
tween democracy and Communism makes it imper-
ative that the United States Government conduct
a vigorous information and education program
in support of our foreign policy. In the educa-
tional sphere. Public Law 402 authorizes the De-
partment of State to extend to other parts of the
Department of State Bulletin
world the exchange arranjiements hithei'to limited
lari^oly to the other American republics and the
riiilippines. Anotlier major phase of the educa-
tional exchange program is carried on under
authorization of the Fulbright Act, \yhich makes
proceeds from the sale of surplus equipment abroad
available to facilitate tlic exchange of students,
teachers, and researchers.
Western Hemisphere Program
Let's look first at how the general program in the
Western Hemisphere has operated. I won't bore
you with the statistics, though they are impressive.
The program has developed along several broad
lines. This Government has participated with the
Latin American countries in a number of scientific
and technical projects on a cooperative basis.
These cover a wide range of subjects. The test in
each case is whether the project will further the
aims of both the United States and the country
involved. The usual method of operation is that
this Government provides the services of tech-
nicians and specialists and the other country fur-
nishes the physical facilities, such as land and
buildings, and assigns personnel to work with our
people. The programs have been carried out by
many governmental and private agencies through
the Interdepartmental Committee on Scientific and
Cultural Cooperation and through the Institute
of Inter-American Affairs.
Coffee Pulp
Some specific illustrations may be helpful. For
example, Latin America produces a lot of coti'ee.
The pulpy residue from the cotfee bean was known
to be good feed for cattle, but it remained a waste
product because cattle didn't like the taste of it
and therefore wouldn't eat it. At a cooperative
experiment station in El Salvador, American and
Salvadoi'an researchers mixed other ingredients
with the coffee-bean pulp and evolved a formula
that made the material palatable to milk cows. So
this waste material can now be used as a substitute
for corn. If all the coti'ee pulp in Latin America
were converted to cattle feed, it would provide the
equivalent of about 34 million bushels of corn a
year. This is significant for both the health and
the ecojiomies oi those countries which are now
producing only a small percentage of the milk
their people need.
Civil Aviation
American civil-aviation technicians have been
at work in a number of Latin American countries
for several years, helping them develop airports
and other aspects of their air-transport systems.
We can see how important these pi'ojects are when
we realize that some parts of Latin America have
jumped almost overnight from the era of the ox-
cart to the era of the airplane, because of the
general lack of railroads and highwaj's.
November 28, 1948
THB RECORD Of THE WBEK
Population and Agriculture Census
Amei'ican statistical experts are now in the
countries to the south helping plan for the first
comprehensive hemisphere-wide census of popula-
tion and agriculture to be taken in 1950.
The start of adequate periodic censuses in all
the xVmerican republics, covering population, ag-
riculture, mining, industry, exports and imports,
and other important economic data, is of course
tremendously important to us all.
This kind of practical and effective assistance is
provided only after the otlier government has re-
quested it and after the proposal has been care-
fully examined and approved by this government.
The proportion of the total cost borne by the other
governments has progressively increased. During
the last fiscal year their aggregate contributions
were more than double the contribution made by
the United States.
Exchange of Professors and Specialists
The two-way transfer of knowledge and culture
between this country and the other American re-
publics is accomplished in still other ways. This
Government facilitates the visits of outstanding
professors, specialists, and graduate students of
the other Americas to the United States for work
and study in educational, governmental, and pri-
vate institutions. During the 1947^8 academic
year, nearly 5,000 students from Latin America
were studying in the United States. Of this num-
ber, 162 were given grants-in-aid by our Govern-
ment. Many others who received no dii"ect finan-
cial aid were assisted in countless ways through
the missions abroad, the reception and orientation
centers in this country, and the skilled stall's of
the United States governmental and private agen-
cies working together in this important field.
Similar assistance is provided to enable industrial
and government personnel to come to this country
for on-the-job training. Those who are selected
usually take an orientation course upon their ar-
rival and then are assigned to an educational in-
stitution, an industrial plant, or a government
agency for intensive practical training for several
months.
Not only are we bringing the people of Latin
America — as many as possible — to us. We are
taking ourselves, in some measure, to them. Pro-
fessors, research scholars, and students from the
United States are encouraged and assisted to
travel and work in Latin America. The libraries
and cultural centers maintained partly with the
financial support of this Government throughout
Latin America are focal points of contact between
increasing numbers of the people of those coun-
tries and the United States. The libraries empha-
size reference services and the lending of American
books. The heaviest demand in many places is
for material of a scientific and technical nature.
673
THE RECORD OF THE WEBK
Cultural Centers
Tlie 28 cultural centers are literall;^ that — places
where the peoples of our neighboring countries
gather with Americans resident there, become ac-
quainted with American literature, American
music, American art, hear visiting American lec-
turers, and learn English in classes taught by both
American and local teachers. These classes are
important for several reasons. They are one of
the chief attractions. At Sao Paulo, 5,000 Bra-
zilians are learning English from American text-
books at the center. They, and their counterparts
in other centers, pay for these lessons. The rev-
enue from the classes and other local sources now
provides more than 60 percent of the money for
maintaining the cultural centers, leaving about 40
percent to be paid by this Government. 1 think you
will agree that this substantial degree of local
support entitles the centers to the autonomy they
enjoy by virtue of being controlled by local boards,
usually composed of an equal number of resident
Americans and nationals of the country.
American-Sponsored Schools
The United States Government provides assist-
ance to some 270 American-sponsored schools in
Latin America, and in the case of the independent-
type schools, provides modest financial aid. These
schools offer an American-type education prima-
rily for the children of the countries in which they
are located. In addition they furnish schooling
for children of American residents, thus serving
as an additional means of educational exchange.
This, in brief outline, is the educational-ex-
change program that we have been conducting
with the American republics for the past ten years.
What have we got out of it? Obviously, any-
thing like an exact estimate in dollars and cents is
impossible, though the material benefits have been
considerable. I could cite instances of orders be-
ing placed for American road-building machinery
as a result of a visit of Latin American highway
engineers to this country under Government
auspices. I could point to sales of laboratory and
hospital equipment to Latin American institu-
tions directed by professional people who have
studied in this country as recipients of govern-
ment grants. But these are merely by-products.
I could point to the several million people who
have learned English at the cultural centers. I
could refer to definite economic gains made in cer-
tain regions and countries as a result of coopera-
tive research and demonstrations by teams of
North American and Latin American technicians.
Estimate of the Program
The greatest, most valuable, benefits cannot be
measured because they are intangible. They ex-
ist in the minds of the people who have been in-
fluenced in some degree and in some way by these
674
activities— both our own people and the people of
our neighbors to the south. We know that the ties
of friendship and respect between our countries
have grown immeasurably stronger, because they
are based on greater understanding and more ex-
tensive personal experience.
A representative of the State Department re-
cently made a short visit to the Caribbean and
the upper part of South America. She noted
that in Venezuela the Foreign Minister was a man
who had traveled in the United States in 1944 by
means of a grant by this Government. She found
that tlie director of the National Library had
studied here in 1947 and was applying North
American library techniques in his own country.
The Venezuelan Ambassadors to Colombia, Cuba,
and the Court of St. James are all men who visited
the LTnited States on travel grants in 1943.
This representative found that the present For-
eign Minister of the Dominican Republic had
investigated the universities and state educational
systems of this country on a grant made in 1943.
The director of the Municipal Library at Habana
spent three months at the Hispanic Foundation
of the Library of Congi-ess in 1944 while receiv-
ing a grant. After studying museum management
and techniques here in 1944, a public-spirited Co-
lombian woman returned home to take the lead in
founding the new National Museum and is now
its director.
Perhaps you will say that I am partisan and
that my estimate of the program should be dis-
counted. Let me quote a few of the comments
made at the first meeting of the United States
Advisory Commission on Educational Exchange
by Dr. Jorge Basadre, of Peru. He is now direc-
tor of the Department of Cultural Affairs of the
Pan American Union, and is himself a former
recipient of a travel grant.
Dr. Basadre commended the quality of the
teaching of English in the cultural centers and
observed that, as a result of this activity, among
others : "The dream of a boy or girl in our grow-
ing middle class now^adays is to travel in the
United States." As a consequence of the program
as a whole. Dr. Basadre said : "The United States
has now among the best professional, academic and
specialized groups of Latin America, real friends
who have worked side by side with American sci-
entists, technicians, scholars and administrators,
and who have seen the way Americans live and
how they think."
The effect has been to create in Latin America
a climate of opinion more favorable to the United
States and more enduring, because it is more
broadly based on the personal interests and ex-
periences of a larger element of the population.
The best proof from our own viewpoint of the
practical value of the broad program of educa-
tional exchange with the other American repub-
lics— the ultimate accolade, in my opinion — is the
Department of State Bulletin
decision of the Eightieth Congress to authorize
its extension to tlic rest of the world. And what
the rest of tlie workl — that part which is free to
express an opinion, at any rate — thinks of this
prospect is best measured by the fact that the re-
qiu'sts to this Government for cooperative ex-
change projects are many times greater than can
be mot from our present budgets. The reconunen-
(lation of tlu' Senate Committee on Foreign Re-
lations, rejjorl ing out this legislation last January,
is worth recalling :
". . . the committee believes that the enactment
of the bill is essential if we are to have mutual
understanding between the people of the United
States and the people of other nations which will
serve as a firm and lasting foundation for world
peace."
World-Wide Program Under
Smith-Mundt Act
Some people, even in this country, overlook the
fact tliat the Smith-Mundt Act authorizes a world-
wide educational exchange program on the part
of this Government, but is not an appropriation
act. Therefore, as a practical matter, any large-
scale expansion of the program beyond the West-
ern Hemisphere depends on the future appropria-
tion of funds for that purpose. However, a num-
ber of foreign governments are so eager to take
advantage of the enabling legislation that the ex-
change of persons with other countries has already
begun. Their governments are reimbursing our
government agencies for the services of American
specialists on loan and are paying the way of the
first wave of their specialists sent here for train-
ing.
It is true also that we already have libraries
and reading rooms in a number of other countries
outside this hemisphere, as a result of the wartime
activities of the Owi, and these are being ex-
panded and increased. Please do not think of
these libraries as mere collections of books. That
would be a serious mistake. Libraries are people.
Our librarians are ambassadors of ideas. Through
their work, thousands of people in many countries
have developed the habit of going directly to
United States information libraries — as well as a
high degree of confidence in what they find there.
It is true also that even with our present budget
we are able to cooperate with private institutions
and agencies in effecting an exchange of persons
with a number of countries. The fact is that edu-
cational institutions and private agencies were the
pioneers in this kind of exchange, and when the
Government entered the field as a latecomer it was
primarily as a supplementary and facilitating
agency.
Although the Smith-Mundt Act throws the full
weight of the Government behind this work and
makes possible an increase in its scope in keeping
THE RECORD OF THB WEBK
with the requirements of present world conditions,
we will continue to utilize the experience, the or-
ganization, and the programs of private agencies
to the greatest possible extent. Last year, for ex-
ample, the State Department branch for voluntary
programs assisted some 400 organizations, includ-
ing groups concerned with industrial training of
people from other countries. The Government
will continue to play a supplemental role.
Benefits Under Fulbright Act
The benefits of cooperation between Government
and private agencies are well illustrated by the
initial undertakings under the Fulbright Act.
You will recall that the funds made available by
this act consist only of the currencies of other
countries and do not include dollars. The foreign
exchange funds can be used to finance the studies
of American students and the work of American
teachers and researchers at educational institu-
tions, either American or local, in the countries
which sign the Fulbright Act agreements with the
United States. Foreign nationals studying in
American institutions in other participating coun-
tries also may be aided. Foreign nationals study-
ing, teaching, or doing research in this country,
however, can be aided only to the extent of travel
expenses payable in foreign currencies. To re-
ceive such aid, the recipient must show that he can
maintain himself with dollar funds while in this
country studying at or working in connection with
an approved educational institution.
This Government has now signed Fulbright Act
agreements with eight countries and is working
toward agreements with twelve more. Thus far,
every applicant found eligible for a travel grant
to this country on Fulbright funds has been able
to qualify as to maintenance here, thanks to schol-
arships, grants, and other forms of aid from pri-
vate agencies. This sort of practical cooperation
makes both Government and private funds go
further and swells the flow of the exchange of
persons.
I would hesitate to hazard a guess as to the
number of Americans and other nationals who
will eventually benefit from the Fulbright pro-
gram, but it will run into the thousands. So far,
about half the beneficiaries have been Americans
going abroad and about half, foreign nationals
coming here. We hope that something like this
ratio can be maintained throughout the life of the
program.
Reciprocal Nature of the Educational
Exchange Principle
I want to emphasize this two-way nature of the
educational exchange principle. Perhaps my dis-
cussion of the programs already in effect has given
the impression that the United States is in a posi-
tion to give much more than it receives — that it is
November 28, 1948
675
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
largely a question of exporting our technicians
and Imow-how to other countries. If I have in-
advertently given that impression, let me hasten
to correct it. By its very nature the exchange
program provides benefits to both sides, and if we
in the United States do not take full advantage of
our opportunities, it will be our own fault. We
of all people — we whose culture, science, institu-
tions, even ourselves, ai-e the composite products
of all nations and people — should appreciate how
much we stand to gain through the enrichment of
our own lives by what we can learn from others.
Our whole country will benefit immensely from the
new viewpoint and increased understanding ac-
quired by the thousands of Americans studying
and teaching in other lands under the Fulbright
program, as well as from our contacts with the
thousands of foreign nationals who live among us
for a while.
Primary Aims
Wliat is the real purpose of all this eifort ? Is it
the spread of knowledge and skills — the teaching
of ingenious techniques of which we are justifiably
proud — the cultivation of an insubstantial though
comforting aura of good will ? Is it the stimula-
tion of a greater demand for American products ?
These are worth-while by-products. They are not
our primary aims.
Our paramount purpose, I submit, must be the
cultivation at home and the encouragement abroad
of the living, dynamic spii-it of democracy. We
do not invite these guests into our national home
to indoctrinate them with ready-made opinions or
to spoon-feed them prescribed doses of American
culture or thought. We welcome them so that
they may partake with us, on equal terms, of a way
of life which we believe offers the greatest oppor-
tunities for the growth and development of the
individual, the nation, mankind. We invite them
to experience and to observe American democracy
with an inquiring mind and a discerning eye.
They are free to judge us as they see fit. They are
exposed, as we are, to the clash of contending views.
They may examine our defects, and appraise the
sincerity and vigor with which we strive to correct
them.
In encouraging throughout the world the politi-
cal principles of democracy, education and educa-
tional exchanges are and will continue to be of
tremendous importance. I am personally con-
cerned that the present conflict in the world is a
clash between two political systems. One is based
on democracy, the dignity and freedom of the in-
dividual. The other is based on the police state,
the concentration camp, thought control, and sup-
pression of human liberties. Many of us today
believe that we should maintain and broaden edu-
cational contacts, among both democratic and to-
talitarian nations. For education can lead
676
strongly and vigorously in the ultimate transfor-
mation of the present precarious peace into an
enduring peace.
The United States Advisory Commission on
Educational Exchange, under the chairmanship of
Chancellor Harvie Branscomb of Vand«rbilt Uni-
versity, has been energetically studying this prob-
lem. At its October meeting, the Commission ad-
vised the Secretary of State —
1. The greatest usefulness of educational ex-
change programs will be in relation to the free
and democratic countries of the world, which are
glad to avail themselves of its reciprocal advan-
tages ;
2. Since for the present most of the eastern
European governments are unwilling to recipro-
cate, and the Smith-Mundt Act laid down the prin-
ciple that all official exchanges should be upon a
reciprocal basis, it is not recommended that the
United States sponsor government-supported ex-
changes with them "until their governments give
evidence of cooperation in the mutually helpful
and friendly spirit of the Act" ;
3. But the Department of State should not
close the door to the many unofficial opportunities
for contacts and exchange of persons with these
countries, the Department should facilitate these
exchanges initiated and supported by voluntary
agencies.
The Commission, pointing out that such inter-
change will require careful control, said elo-
quently :
"To cut off contacts with the totalitarian nations
of the world because of fears as to what might
happen to democratic institutions through such
contacts would imply a weakness which has no
justification in fact. No army ever burned its
bridges except in retreat. The democratic way of
life is not now in retreat."
We must never forget the distinction that has
been drawn by Chairman Branscomb — that our
objective is cultural and educational exchange^ not
penetration. The philosophical basis of our effort
is the assumption that the other parties to this
arrangement are as well qualified and as deter-
mined as we are to shape their thinking by the
democratic process. Not by the imposition from
without of preconceived, inflexible dogma, but by
access to information, interpretation and opinion
from a wide variety of sources. We are dedicated,
in our dealings with other peoples as well as with
ourselves, to maintain and defend the free com-
petition of ideas. We are dedicated to guarantee
the individual the right to reach his own conclu-
sions by the process of unfettered reason and the
exercise of his own judgment. The continuous
operation of this process is basic to democracy.
{Continued on page 6S1)
Department of State Bulletin
Oklahoma Submits First Electors' Certificate
[Released to the press November 19]
The Department of State received on November
19 the first certificate of ascertainment of electors
for President and Vice President as a result of the
national election held on November 2.
The first certificate received in Washington is
from Governor Roy J. Turner of Oklahoma and
is dated November 15. The certificate, under the
seal of the State, gives the names of all candidates
appearing on the State ballot to be electors of Pres-
ident and Vice President, and the votes received by
each jjurty's candidates. Certificates which will
by law be received from all States will contain the
same information, so that the 48 certificates from
the States will together show the total national
vote, for President and Vice President, as deter-
mined by the laws of each State.
The lapse of time between the known result of
the election and the preparation of the certificate
of ascertainment of electors is due to the official
accuracy required in the certificate. The election
authorities in the voting units of each State must
be certain of their counts before reporting them to
the State Board of Elections or other officials in
accordance with the State law. The certificate
cannot be made until the records are complete for
each State as a unit. This usually takes several
■weeks. In 1944 the national election was held on
November 7 and the first certificate was received
on November 29, while the last one was delayed
until January.
The purpose of the certificate of ascertainment
of electors is to provide necessary information to
the Congress, which canvasses the votes of electors
and declares therefrom the names of the persons
chosen to be President and Vice President. The
certificate designates, under seal of the State,
the persons chosen by majority vote of the elec-
torate to perform the function of electors. The
electors, who equal in number the delegation of
the State in Congress, will sign and certify their
separate ballots for President and Vice President
at their meetings in each State next December 13.
The Secretary of State will transmit to the
President pro tempore of the Senate and the
Speaker of the House of Representatives copies
of the certificate of ascertainment of electors.^
This provision of the law enables each House of
Congress to assure itself that the ballots for Presi-
dent and Vice President have been cast by the duly
appointed electors.
The certificate of the Governor of Oklahoma
shows that only two parties participated in the
election of November 2 in that State. The Demo-
crats polled 452,782 votes and the Republicans
268,817, a total of 721,599.
TEXT OF CERTIFICATE
STATE OF OKLAHOMA EXECUTIVE DEPARTMENT
Certificate
Whereas, there has been certified to me by the
State Election Board of the State of Oklahoma, as
the result of the final ascertainment, under and in
pursuance of the laws of the State of Oklahoma,
of the general election held in said State, on the
2nd day of November, 1948, to elect Presidential
and Vice-Presidential Electors as provided by the
Constitution and laws of the United States of
America, and
Whereas, from an examination of said certifi-
cate I find that the law covering such election has,
in all things, been observed, and that such election
was duly and regularly held, and
Whereas, it appears that in said election the fol-
lowing named persons, who constitute all the can-
didates for Presidential and Vice-Presidential
Electors, for whose election any and all votes have
been given or cast, each received the number of
^ Bulletin of Nov. 7, 1948, p. 587.
November 28, ?948
677
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
votes set opposite their names for Presidential and
Vice-Presidential Electors, viz :
Name
Tom G. Drake
W. D. Hastings
Johnson D. Hill
S. D. Williams
Oscar E. Wyatt
Ray A. Martin
Johnston Murray
John E. Turner
Floyd W. Ball
Tom C. Greer
Wayne Anderson
Perry P. Brown
Robert E. Lee
Charles C. Hawk
Homer L. Biggerstaff
Thomas G. Jackson
Roy B. Hall
Warren B. Morris
John Adams
John Fry
Politics
Democbats
Votes Received
452,782
• Republicans
268,817
Now, therefore, /, Roy J. Turner, the Governor
of the State of Oklahoma, by virtue of the author-
ity vested in me by law, do hereby declare, pro-
claim and certify that:
Tom G. Drake
W. D. Hastings
Johnson D. Hill
Oscar E. Wyatt
Ray A. Martin
Johnston Murray
John E. Turner
Floyd W. Ball
Tom C. Greer
S. D. Williams
I Democbats
each having received the greatest number of votes
for the ofBces of Presidential and Vice-Presiden-
tial Electors of the State of Oklahoma, are each
and all of them duly elected to such offices, and by
virtue thereof, are entitled to all the rights,
privileges, immunities, and emoluments pertaining
to said offices.
In witness whereof, I have hereunto set my
hand and caused these presents to be attested by
the Great Seal of the State of Oklahoma, this the
15th day of November, in the year of our Lord,
Nineteen Hundred and Forty-eight, and of the
Independence of the United States of America the
One Hundred and Seventy-third.
KoT J. Turner
The Governor of the State of Oklahoma
Attest :
William Cartwright
Secretary of State of the
State of Oklahoma
President Asks for Legislative Programs
[Released to the press by the White House Norember 8]
Text of a letter which the President has sent to
the heads of departments and agencies of the
Government
November 6, 191)8
"Dear
You are requested to submit to me by November
29, 1948, the subjects which you would propose
for inclusion in the State of the Union message
and the Economic Report of the President to be
presented to the Congress in January, 1949, to-
gether with a brief explanation of each subject, its
relationship to the current activities and plans of
the Commission, and the relative emphasis which
you would recommend. You should include any
views which you may care to present at this time
concerning special Presidential messages during
the forthcoming session of the Congress. Your
reply should be forwarded directly to me at the
White House.
You are also requested to submit by November
29, a report on the proposed legislative program
of your Commission. Your report should show
(1) the subject matter of all legislation which you
desire to propose for consideration at the forth-
coming session, (2) the state of readiness of legis-
lative drafts and supporting material, (3) refer-
ence to the bills and House or Senate reports in the
80th Congress concerning the subjects covered in
your program, together with a brief appraisal of
the adequacy of these bills, (4) your views on the
timing of introduction and Congressional con-
sideration, and (5) the names of other depart-
ments and agencies which, in your judgment, are
interested in the same subjects. While these re-
ports should be as complete as possible, supple-
mentary listings may be submitted until December
15, 1948, but it is expected that your legislative
program will be fully developed by that date.
These legislative reports should be forwarded to
me through the Director of the Bureau of the
Budget.. They will not, of course, replace the in-
dividual submissions required by Budget Circular
No. A-19.
Ten copies of your replies to these requests will
be required for use in the Executive Office. The
White House staff, the Council of Economic Ad-
visers, or the Bureau of the Budget may make
additional requests for material or arrange for
discussions with your representatives to whatever
extent may be required.
Very sincerely yours.
678
Department of State Bulletin
Registration Regulations of Polish Securities
Held by Americans
[Released to the press November 19]
The attention of American owners or custodians
of Polish securities issued to bearer prior to Sep-
tember 1, 1939, is called to regulations of the Polish
Government whereby these documents must be
registered prior to March 15, 1949, in the names
of the owners thereof, or become invalid. The
regulations apply to all shares, bonds, notes, and
other evidence of indebtedness except documents
issued to bearer by the Government, documents
issued outside of the country, coupons, bank notes
and other documents payable at sight, and docu-
ments containing a nonannulment reservation.
The uniform text of the pertinent decree-law as
last amended on April 14, 1948, is contained in the
Polish Journal of Laws No. 22, as Item No. 88.
Article (4) thereof provides that the registration
of documents abroad will be conducted by consular
offices of the Polish Government, the locations of
which in the United States are :
49 East Cedar Street, Chicago, 111. ;
1864 National Bank Building, Detroit, Mich. ;
151 East 67th Street, New York, N. Y. ;
49 North Craig Street, Pittsbursh, Pa.
Registration requires the full name, address, and
signature of the owner, his or her nationality,
citizenship, and statement regarding when and
from whom the documents were purchased. The
documents themselves should be presented for the
pertinent information concerning registration to
be noted thereon. If lost or destroyed while in the
possession of juristic persons recognized by public
law, registration may be effected by certificates
issued by such entities on the basis of preserved
books or other written proofs. These certificates
should include an exact description of the lost or
destroyed documents including their serial num-
bers and other pertinent information. Certified
copies of these certificates are to be attached to the
registration records.
The decree-law further provides procedure for
the invalidation of any bearer documents lost,
destroyed, or stolen between September 1, 1939,
and December 17, 1945, if application is made prior
to March 15, 1949. A full description of these
documents with proof of possession and loss must
be presented for final determination by competent
Polish courts to whom lists of registered docu-
ments are to be delivered by the registrars.
Mexico Pays Seventh Annual Claims
Convention Installment
[Released to the press November 19]
Tlie Charge d'Affaires ad interim of Mexico,
Rafael de la Colina, has presented to Paul C.
THE RECORD OF THB WECK
Daniels, Director of the Office of American Re-
public Affairs, the Mexican Government's check
for $2,500,000 (United States currency) repre-
senting the seventh annual installment due to the
United States under the claims convention con-
cluded November 19, 1941. Mr. Daniels requested
the Charge d'Affaires to convey to his Govern-
ment an expression of this Government's apprecia-
tion.
Under the terms of the convention, Mexico
agreed to pay the United States $40,000,000
(United States currency) in settlement of certain
property claims of citizens of the United States
against the Government of Mexico as described
in the convention. Payments heretofore made
amount to $21,000,000. With the present payment
of $2,500,000, the balance remaining to be paid
amounts to $16,500,000 to be liquidated over a
period of years by the annual payment by Mexico
of not less than $2,500,000 (United States cur-
rency) .
Status of Treaties To Avoid
Double Taxation
The Department of State announced on Novem-
ber 15 that discussions will open in Washington
before the end of February between American and
Norwegian teclinical experts looking to the con-
clusion of treaties for the avoidance of double
taxation and for administrative cooperation in
prevention of tax evasion with respect to income
taxes and to taxes on estates of deceased persons.
On November 19 it was announced that similar
discussions are contemplated at an early date be-
tween American and Italian technical experts.
If the discussions are successful and bases for
agreements are found, they will result in the prep-
aration of draft treaties which will be submitted by
the negotiators to their respective Governments
for consideration with a view to signing.
In preparation for the discussions, the American
delegation will welcome conferences with inter-
ested parties or statements and suggestions from
them concerning problems in tax relations with
the two countries. Communications in this con-
nection should be addressed to Mr. Eldon P. King,
Special Deputy Commissioner of Internal Rev-
enue, Bureau of Internal Revenue, Washington
25, D. C.
In effect at the present time are six tax conven-
tions with four different countries — treaties deal-
ing with income taxes with Sweden, France, Can-
ada, and the United Kingdom, and those covering
death taxes with Canada and the United Kingdom.
Treaties for the avoidance of double taxation of
income have been signed with the Netherlands and
November 28, 7948
679
THE RECORD OF THE WBBK
Denmark and approved, with reservations, by the
United States Senate. The treaties have been ap-
proved by the Parliaments of the Netherlands and
Denmark.
A treaty with France, revising the income tax
treaty of 1939, which will remain in effect, and
covering estate taxes in addition, has also been
approved by the United States Senate. Similar
action has not yet been taken by France.
A draft income tax convention with Belgimn,
which was formulated in 19-16, was signed Octo-
ber 28.^ Final agreement on a similar convention
with Luxembourg is anticipated in the near future.
A convention for the avoidance of the double
taxation of incomes by the United States and the
Union of South Africa was signed in December
1946. Another on the double taxation of estates
was signed by the two countries in April 1947.
These two treaties, as well as one with New Zea-
land, are now pending before the United States
Senate Foreign Relations Committee.
General Marras of Italy To Visit United States
[Released to the press November 18]
General Omar Bradley, Chief of Staff, U. S. A.,
who last year visited Ital}-, has now invited Gen-
eral Efisio Marras, Chief of Staff of the Italian
Army, to visit, in turn, the United States.
General Marras will be in the United States for
about 15 days and will visit the principal military
schools and training centers.
Panamanian Journalist and Educator
Visits United States
The Department of State announced on Novem-
ber 19 that Gil Bias Tejeira, prominent newspaper-
man, writer, and educator of Panama, has arrived
for a three months' visit in the United States, dur-
ing which he will visit educational institutions and
observe the functioning of the American press and
radio. His visit has been arranged under the
travel-grant program of the Department.
After two weeks in Washington, Mr. Tejeira
will visit Philadelphia, New York, and Boston. He
has been invited to give addresses at Colgate Uni-
versity and Tipp City, Ohio, and will later visit
Chicago and points in the southwest. The re-
mainder of his itinerary as now planned includes
Chicago, Salt Lake City, the Grand Canyon, San
Francisco and Los Angeles, the Palomar Observa-
tory, points in New Mexico and Texas, and New
Orleans.
^ Bulletin of Nov. 7, 1948, p. 585.
Educational Exchange Program
for 1950 Reviewed
[Released to the press November 16]
An item-by-item review of the State Depart-
ment's plans for educational exchange during the
fiscal year 1950 was undertaken by the United
States Advisory Commission during its two-day
session in Washington on November 15 and 16.
Scrutinizing the various cooperative projects of
scientific, technical, cultural, and educational ex-
change sponsored or assisted by the United States
Government, the Commission commenced review
of the Department's 1950 program plans with a
view to making its recommendations to Congress.
"It is our purpose to determine as nearly as pos-
sible the relative needs for and the relative value
of each phase of the exchange program,'' explained
Dr. Harvie Branscomb, Chairman of the Commis-
sion. "This requires evalntion of the extent and
scope of each operation of the entire program.
And we want to be assured that the governmsnt is
utilizing existing private agencies wherever pos-
sible. We want to be satisfied that we are getting
the maximum value for every dollar spent".
The Commission devoted major attention to
plans this year which call for additional funds to
make possible the extension of cooperative educa-
tional and cultural projects to Europe, the Near
East, and Africa, and the Far East. These proj-
ects were authorized by the Smith-Mundt Act,
which was passed by the last Congress. Promi-
nent among the activities planned in this expan-
sion is an increase in the number of LTnited States
libraries abroad and an enlarged program of ex-
change of students, teachers, and specialists. The
methods by which these programs will be set up on
a two-hemisphere basis received serious study by
the Commission.
Key officials of the Department having respon-
sibility for administration of the exchange pro-
gram attended the sessions to answer queries of the
Commission and to supply technical data. Among
those present were Howland H. Sargeant, Deputy
Assistant Secretary of State, and Dr. William C.
Johnstone, Jr., Director of the Office of Educa-
tional Exchange.
In addition to Dr. Branscomb, Chancellor of
Vanderbilt University, the Commission includes
Mark Starr, Educational Director of the Inter-
national Ladies Garment Workers Union ; Harold
Willis Dodds, President of Princeton Univereity;
Karl Taylor Compton, President of Massachusetts
Institute of Technology'; and Martin P. McGuire,
Professor at Catholic University. Mr. Starr
serves as vice chairman.
The Commission will convene again on Decem-
ber 13 and 14, and it is expected that final recom-
mendations will be forthcoming at that time.
680
Department of Stale Bulletin
U.S. Education Foundation Makes
Plans for 1949
[Released to the press November 18]
Alan G. Kirk. Amprican Ambassador to Bel-
g'nun and Lnxenibcnirg, announced on November
18 that the board of tlie United States Education
Fouiuhition, establislied to carry out student ex-
changes under the Fulbright agreement, has held
its lirst meeting and was able to reach tentative
agreement on its program for the calendar year
1949.
The act was signed by the United States, Bel-
gium, and Luxembourg on October 8.
The Ambassador, who acts as honorary chair-
man, also made public the names of the directors
of the Foundation and its officers. They are: for
the United States, Douglas MacArthur, first secre-
tai-y of the American Embassy, chairman ; Eric
Kocher, labor attache of the American Embassy,
treasurer ; Mrs. Alice R. Hager, press and cultural
attache of the American Embassy; Col. Robert P.
Pflieger, education member; William Burr Gregg,
business member. For Belgium, Gaston Vande
Veegaete, general director for Higher and Second-
ary Education, Ministry of Public Instruction;
Jean Willems, director Belgo-American Educa-
tional Foundation for Luxembourg; Dr. Henri
Loutsch, surgeon, and director of State Veterinary
Research Station in Luxembourg.
The board will open an office in the Fondation
Universitaire, 11 Rue d'Egmont, Bi'ussels, about
the first of the year and has appointed Jacques
Marie-Ghislain van der Belen, secretary, Belgo-
American Educational Foundation, as executive
officer.
The program for exchange of students during
1949 will be submitted to the Secretai'y of State of
the United States for his approval as is required
imder the act. When final negotiations are com-
pleted, public announcement will be made of the
time and place for receipt of applications from
candidates for up to $150,000 in Belgian francs
which will be available each year for the fellow-
ship awards.
American To Teach Public Health Course
at University of Chile
[Released to the press November 18]
Social medicine and public health will be the
subjects of a course of lectures at the University of
Chile to be given by Brigadier General Edgar E.
Hume, U.S. Army, who is visiting Chile for this
purpose at the special invitation of the University
Rector, Sr. Juvenal Hernandez.
General Hume arrived in Chile on November 17
and on November 19 he will open a new 120-bed
November 28, 1948
THE RECORD OF THE WECK
Chilean Army tubercular hospital which will bear
the name of Franklin D. Roosevelt. The institu-
tion, which is located at Guayacan, about 25 miles
from the capital city, Santiago, was constructed
jointly by the Chilean Government and the Insti-
tute of Inter-American Affairs at a cost of $300,-
000, to meet a keenly felt demand for such medical
facilities.
Helping the World To Know Us Better— Coniinued from
page 676
I doubt very much whether anyone, however
gifted, can really teach democracy. It can only
be learned — often by ways we know not of. A
Brazilian industrialist came to this country
recently to study our rural free delivery system,
an institution unknown in Brazil. He lived with
a farm family and observed the life of their com-
munity. He learned the intricacies of R. F. D.
with little trouble. But when I attended a lunch-
eon with him in Washington before he returned
home, the impression that kept recurring to his
mind, with undiminished vividness, was some-
thing we take for granted — the way the trustful
jDostraan leaves letters, newspapers, even packages
in open, unattended country mailboxes, from
which they are taken only by the rightful owner.
To my Brazilian acquaintance that was the
clincher for American character.
By all means, let us open our doors, as wide as
we can, to our neighbors, and invite them to join
with us in the search for truth and understanding.
But let us never swerve from one .steadfast pur-
pose in promoting international understanding —
the encouragement of the spirit and principles of
democracy itself. There is no room for compro-
mise and a middle ground on the basic principles
of democratic freedom. The individual must be
free to choose his religion and confess it openly;
the scientist free to accept unfettered the evidence
of test tube and microscope; the journalist to re-
port the facts as he sees them; and the editor to
comment as he chooses.
Each one of us must remember that to preserve
our own liberties, we must champion the right not
only of our neighbors and fellow countrymen to
be free, but of all humanity to be free. We are
free save in one respect : we are not free to condone
those practices and principles which lead to the
destruction of freedom itself.
So long as the basic purpose of American educa-
tion in promoting international understanding is
firmly rooted in this, our democratic testament,
we need never fear the outcome of a larger and
larger volume of educational exchanges.
681
THE DEPARTMENT
Departmental Regulations
205.2 Development of the Administrative and Budget-
ary Implications of Proposed Program Legislation:
(Effective 9-8-48) This regulation provides for the timely
consideration of the administrative and budgetary impli-
cations of proposed program legislation by the officers con-
cerned and establishes the procedure for the preparation
of legislative proposals.
I Consideration. Frequently, in drafting program
legislation, insufficient attention is given to the eventual
management of the program. Programs can be carried out
effectively and within acceptable time schedules, only if
the enabling legislation and Executive orders are so drawn
as to facilitate, rather than hamper, administration. To
insure this result close working relationships are required
between program proponents, legislative drafting officers,
and the organization and budget staff for the development
of the legislative plan, as well as its eventual execution.
II Proceduke. The procedure for the preparation of
new or modified legislation is as follows :
A When program officers have determined the need
for new or modified legislative authority they will, at that
time and in accordance with DR 205.1, advise C-LC of the
proposals to be made.
B Upon request of C-LC the appropriate staff mem-
bers of the Division of Organization and Budget (OB) will
assist the program officers and the Legal Adviser (L) to
insure that the draft legislation is such as to facilitate ef-
fective and economical administration. OB staff members
will not be concerned with the timeliness or substantive
aspects of proposed program legislation, but will be respon-
sible to the Assistant Secretary-Administration for its or-
ganization, budget, personnel, and related aspects.
Through the organization and budget staff, the technical
advice of other units concerned with general administra-
tion will be secured.
C When legislative proposals involve activities of the
Foreign Service, OB will call upon the Office of the Foreign
Service (OFS) and its divisions for staff assistance neces-
sary to insure that adequate consideration is given to ad-
ministrative problems in the field.
D C-LC will keep OB currently informed as to the
progress of the legislation through the Congress so that
timed and concerted action may be taken, if necessary, to
insure that contemplated changes adversely affecting even-
tual administration are brought to the attention of the
cognizant committees by C-LC.
E When the legislation has been enacted, OB will
assist the program officers (including OFS when foreign
operations are involved) in drafting and clearing any nec-
essary Executive Orders and other required documents on
organization, delegations of authority, program and ad-
ministrative procedures, and the Departmental or Foreign
Service regulations and materials necessary to the admin-
istration of the program.
F If, in its analysis of operations, OB finds that
changes in existing authority of law will facilitate effective
and economical operation of programs, it will propose
changes and, in collaboration with the appropriate pro-
gram officers and L, take appropriate action and secure
clearances through established channels.
205.1 Development of Program Legislation : (Effec-
tive 9-8-48) This regulation defines the responsibility
for recommendations regarding the legislative program of
682
the Department, the consideration of draft legislation by
all interested offices, and the securing of comments on leg-
islative proposals referred to the Department.
I CoNSiDEKATiON OF LEGISLATIVE PROPOSALS. Legisla-
tive proposals which the Office of the Counselor (C) rec-
ommends as to timeliness, relationship to the Department's
total legislative program, appropriateness from the stand-
point of Congressional relations, and consideration of the
interests of affected areas of the Department will be re-
ferred to the Secretary or Under Secretary for decisions
and, if approved, for transmission to the Bureau of the
Budget, the Congress, or the President, as the case may be.
II Proposals for New or Modified Legislation.
When officers have determined the need for new or modi-
fied legislative authority they will, at that time, inform
the Legislative Counsel (C-LC). C-LC, upon receipt of
such information, will insure that the interests of all af-
fected areas of the Department will be considered. C-LC
will advise and assist the officer in discharging his respon-
sibility for the prompt and complete coordination of the
proposals within the Department. For the procedure gov-
erning the development of administrative and budgetary
implications of proposed program legislation, see DR 205.2.
III Proposals Referred to the Department. Legisla-
tive proposals originating outside the Department and re-
ferred to it for comment will be routed to C-LC. C-LO
will obtain the comments from all interested offices before
preparing a statement covering the Department's position
on the proposal.
Appointment of Officers
John M. Allison as Deputy Director of the Office of Far
Eastern Affairs, effective November 1, 1948.
Max W. Bishop as Chief of the Division of Northeast
Asian Affairs, effective November 1, 1948.
PUBLICATIONS
Department of State
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, Oovern-
ment Printing Office, Washington 25, D.C. Address re-
quests direct to the Superintendent of Documents, except
in the case of free publications, which may be obtained
from the Department of State.
Educational Exchanges Under the Fulbright Act. Inter-
national Information and Cultural Series 2. Pub. 3197,
6 pp. lOdt.
Gives background, benefits, and administration of Act
with "supplementary reports" listing members of the
Board of Foreign Scholarships and countries now
participating.
Aspects of United States Participation in International
Civil Aviation. International Organization and Confer-
ence Series IV, International Civil Aviation Organization
2. Pub. 3209. 118 pp.
A collection of 18 recent Bulletin articles on the
subject.
Department of State Bulletin
Economic Cooperation With the French Zone of Occupa-
tion of Germany Under Public Law 472 — 80th Congress.
Treaties and Other luteruational Acts Series 1784. Pub.
3268. 58 pp. 15(t.
AKreenient Hetween the United States and the French
Ziine of Occupation of Germany — Signed at Paris
July 9, 1948 ; entered into force July 9, 1948.
Economic Cooperation With Luxembourg Under Public
Law 472— SOth Congress. Treaties and Other Interna-
tional Acts Series 1790. Pub. 3270. 55 pp. 15«S.
Agreement Between the United States and Luxem-
bourg— Signed at Luxembourg July 3, 1948 ; entered
into force July 3, 1948.
Economic Cooperation With Turkey Under Public Law
472 — SOth Congress. Treaties and Other International Acts
Series 1794. Pub. 3274. 58 pp. 15(f.
Agreement Between the United States and Turliey —
Signed at Ankara July 4, 1948; entered into force July
13, 1948.
International Conference on Safety of Life at Sea. April
23-June 10, 1948. International Organization and Confer-
ence Series I, 6. Pub. 3282. 201 pp. 55^.
Report of the United States Delegation including final
act and related documents.
Challenges and Opportunities in World Health — The First
World Health Assembly. International Organization and
Conference Seiies IV, World Health Organization 2. Pub.
3311. 9 pp. 10<t.
An article by Dr. H. van Zile Hyde, U.S. Representa-
tive, Ksecutive Board, World Health Organization.
Economic Cooperation With Austria Under Public Law
472 — SOth Congress. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1780. Pub. 3265. 63 pp. 200.
THE DEPARTMENT
Agreement Between the United States and Austria —
Signed at Vienna July 2, 1948; entered into force
July 2, 1048.
Economic Cooperation With the United Kingdom — Under
Public Law 472 — SOth Congress. Treaties and Other In-
ternational Acts Series 1795. Pub. 3273. 42 pp. 150.
Agreement Between the United States and the United
Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland —
Signed at Loudon July 6, 1948 ; entered into force
July 6, 1948.
Economic Cooperation With the United States/United
Kingdom Occupied Areas in Germany Under Public Law
472 — SOth Congress. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1785. Pub. 3275. 42 pp. 150.
Agreement Between the United States and the United
States/United Kingdom occupied areas in Germany —
Signed at Berlin July 14, 1948; entered into force
July 14, 1948.
Economic Cooperation With Denmark Under Public Law
472 — SOth Congress. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1782. Pub. 3286. 49 pp. 150.
Agreement Between the United States and Denmark —
Signed at Copenhagen June 29, 1948 ; entered into
force July 2, 1948.
Economic Cooperation With Greece Under Public Law
472 — SOth Congress. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1786. Pub. 3291. 95 pp. 250.
Agreement Between the United States and Greece —
Signed at Athens July 2, 1948; entered into force
July 3, 1948.
Commercial Foreign Policy of the United States. Com-
mercial Policy Series 116. Pub. 3300. 4 pp. 50.
Bulletin reprint.
November 28, 7948
683
^{yrUe/rU^/
The U.N. and Specialized'Agencies Page
U.S., France, U.K., and U.S.S.R. Urged To
Solve Berlin Question:
Joint Communication From President of
General Assembly and the Secretary-
General 655
Text of the U.S. Reply 656
Discussion of the Palestine Situation in Com-
mittee I. Statement by Philip C. Jessup . 657
Discussion of Armistice Resolution in Security
Council. Statement by Philip C. Jessup . 660
Third Session of the General Conference of
UNESCO. Statement by George V. Allen . 661
U.N. Documents: A Selected Bibliography . 665
The U.S. in the U.N 666
U.S. Delegation to Meeting of Preparatory
Committee of Imco ; 671
Economic Affairs
The Eighteenth International Geological
Congress. Article by Eliot Blackwelder. 668
Registration Regulations of Polish Securities
Held by Americans 679
International Information and
Cultural Affairs
Ninth International Exhibition of Cinemato-
graphic Art 671
Helping the World To Know Us Better.
Address by Howland H. Sargeant . . . 672
Panamanian Journalist and Educator Visits
United States 680
Educational Exchange Program for 1950
Reviewed 680
International Information and Face
Cultural Affairs — Continued
U.S. Education Foundation Makes Plans for
1949 681
American To Teach Public Health Course at
University of Chile 681
General Policy
General Marras of Italy To Visit United
States 680
Treaty Information
Conservation of Fishing Resources in North-
west Atlantic To Be Discussed 669
Me.xico Pays Seventh Annual Claims Con-
vention Installment 679
Status of Treaties To Avoid Double Taxa-
tion 679
The Department
Oklahoma Submits First Elector's Certifi-
cate 677
Text of Certificate 677
Departmental Regulations 682
Appointment of Ofiicers 682
Publications
Department of State 682
The Congress
President Asks for Legislative Programs . . 678
m>ri{mAid(yy^
Eliot Blackwelder, author ef the article on the 18th Interna-
tional Geological Congress, is Professor Emeritus of Geology,
Stanford University, and Chairman of the U.S. Geological
Survey Advisory Committee. Dr. Blackwelder served as
Chairman of the U.S. Delegation to the Congress.
0. S. GOVERBKENT PRIRTIKtt OPFICIt If4t
tJAe/ ^eha/i^t'meni/ ,cw t/taie^
FOURTH SESSION OF FAO i~ Address by President
Truman 700
U.S. A:MENDMENTS to U.K. resolution on PAL-
ESTINE • Statement by Philip C. Jessup 687
CONTRIBUTION OF WESTERN EUROPEAN COUN-^__
TRIES TOWARD ECONOMIC RECOVERY . Address
by Assistant Secretary Thorp ^J*. 711
CONTROLS FOR INSPECTING GERMAN INDUSTRY
IN THE RUHR • Statement by SecretarylMarshall . . 703
REORGANIZATION OF GERMAN COAL ANT) IRON
AND STEEL INDUSTRIES • U.S. Zone of Control Law
No. 75 704
For complete contents see back cover
Vol. XIX, No. 492
December 5, 1948
•*TE3
^"''' o»
0. S. SUPERlNlXNUtJif Of DQCVktHlH
JAN 10 1949
<:^
iJ/ie z!/^eha/i(lm€^
^/9ia{e bulletin
Vol. XIX, No. 492 • Publication 3357
December 5, 1948
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office
Washington 26, D.C.
Price:
S2 issues, domestic $S, foreign $7.25
Single copy, 15 cents
Published with the approval of the
Director of the Bureau of the Budget
Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
OF State Bxilletin as the source will be
appreciated.
The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.
Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.
U.S. Amendments to U.K. Resolution on Palestine
STATEMENT BY PH8LIP C. JESSUP IN COMMITTEE |i
U.S. Delegate to the General Assembly
Last Saturday the United States Delegation pre-
sented to the Committee a preliminary statement
of its views on the progress report of the mediator
on Palestine." Today we wish to offer some ad-
ditional views with particular reference to the
United Kingdom resolution.
The United States Delegation supports the pre-
amble of the United Kingdom's draft resolution
as it stands. We fully agree that reference should
be made to the General Assembly's resolutions of
November 29, 1947, and May 14, 1948, as they rep-
resent the previous recommendations of the Gen-
eral Assembly with regard to the Palestine ques-
tion and are fmidamental to our present considera-
tion. We also believe that reference should be
made in the preamble to the progre.ss report of the
United Nations mediator in Palestine because it
sets forth the results of Count Bei-nadotte"s ac-
tivities in Palestine undertaken pursuant to the
General Assembly resolution of May 14, 1948. The
progress report of the mediator is presently the
point of departure for the work of this Committee.
We are likewise in full accord with the United
Kingdom Delegation in believing that specific ref-
erence should be made in the preamble to the reso-
lutions of the Security Council concerning the
truce in Palestine and to the Council's resolution
of November IG concerning the establishment of an
armistice. It will be recalled that the fii'st of
Count Bernadotte's seven basic premises dealt with
the return to peace and that the first of Count
Bernadotte's specific conclusions is framed in the
following language :
"(A) Since the Security Council, under pain of
Chapter VII sanctions, has forbidden further em-
ployment of military action in Palestine as a means
of settling the dispute, hostilities should be pro-
nounced formally ended either by mutual agree-
ment of the parties or, failing that by the United
Nations. The existing truce slioukl be superseded
by a formal peace, or at the minimum, an armistice
which would involve either complete withdrawal
and demobilization of armed forces or their wide
separation by creation of broad demilitarized zones
under United Nations supervision."
December 5, 7948
The United States Delegation is of the opinion
that the Security Council's resolution of November
16 is a long step in the direction of the goal which
Count Bernadotte has described in the first of his
specific conclusions. We hope that the parties will,
in the near future, be able mutually to agree to
the terms of an armistice and rapidly thereafter
to establish a formal peace.
Tlie United States Delegation supports the first
numbered paragraph of the draft resolution of the
United Kingdom Delegation. We consider that
Count Bernadotte made a lasting contribution to-
ward a peaceful adjustment of the future situation
of Palestine and that the acting mediator and his
staff have faithfully continued the work which
CoTmt Bernadotte commenced.
The United States Delegation believes that the
second numbered paragraph of the draft resolu-
tion of the United Kingdom should be given par-
ticularly careful consideration. We fear that if
it is adopted with its present wording, the Con-
ciliation Commission — which is provided for in
the third numbered paragraph — will not have a
sufficiently clear mandate from the General
Assembly.
A member of the Conciliation Commission under
instructions to carry out the will of the General
Assembly under the second numbered paragraph
of the United Kingdom's draft resolution, might
not know, for example, whether the General As-
sembly's resolution of November 29, 1947, was even
to be taken into consideration. The present draft
does not cancel it; nor does the present draft
state that Count Bernadotte's specific conclusions
represent the definitive view of the General As-
sembly. It merely "endorses" them. We recall
Mr. McNeil's analysis on November 18 of the rela-
tionship between the resolution of November 29
and the United Kingdom resolution. He reasoned
that, first, the Assembly had reached the conclu-
sion that Palestine ought to be partitioned ; second,
' Made on Nov. 23, 1948, and released to the press on
tlic same date.
' Bulletin of Nov. 28, 1948, p. 656.
687
THC UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGENCIES
the Assembly liad attempted to strike a just bal-
ance between Arab and Jewish claims; third, it
had become clear before the mandate ended that
the resolution of November 29 would not carry
out the Assembly's intentions; fourth, although
the mediator was not instructed to promote a
peaceful adjustment within the frame\vork of
the resolution of November 29, that resolution
was not repealed by the later resolution of May
14 and the mediator must consequently have felt
that he was obliged to pay particular attention
to the considerations which had led to the As-
sembly's earlier decision. Mr. McNeil concluded
with the view that Count Bernadotte translated
into terms of practical politics the wishes ex-
pressed by the Assembly in November 1947.
It would seem essential to me, therefore, that
the General Assembly now make clear, in any
resolution it passes, the relationship between the
November 1947 resolution and any resolution we
now adopt.
It would seem logical that such relationship
might more appropriately be defined in the tliird
numbered paragraph which establishes a Concil-
iation Commission and defines its functions and
in the fifth numbered paragraph which deals with
the question of boundaries. I shall return to this
subject later. Meanwhile, we would suggest that
the present paragraph 2 of the United Kingdom
draft be deleted.
The United States Delegation suggests that the
draft resolution of the United Kingdom would
be considerably strengthened if there were in-
cluded in it the principle which has already been
established in the Security Council. I refer to the
Security Council's resolution of November 16
which called upon the parties directly involved in
the conflict in Palestine to seek agreement forth-
with, either directly or through the acting medi-
ator on Palestine, with a view to the innnediate
establishment of an armistice including the de-
lineation of permanent armistice demarcation
lines and such withdrawal and reduction of their
armed forces as will insure the maintenance of the
armistice during the transition to permanent
peace.
We are therefore proposing that a new second
numbered paragraph be added which would read
as follows :
"2. Calls upon the governments and authorities
concerned to extend the scope of the negotiations
provided for in the Security Council's Resolution
of 16 November 1948, and to seek agreement by ne-
gotiations conducted either directly or through the
Conciliation Commission with a view to a final
settlement of all questions outstanding between
them." ^
' U.N. doc A/C.1/397, Nov. 23, 1948.
688
It is our opinion that the experience which we
and the peoples directly concerned with Palestine
have gained during the past year clearly indicates
the need for an early assumption by the parties
themselves of responsibility for the achievement of
a peaceful solution of the Palestine problem. It
is not too much to expect the governments and au-
thorities dii'ectly concerned to assume this respon-
sibility. It is not too much to expect that they will
be able to broaden the discussions contemplated by
the Security Council resolution of November Id
to include definitive political arrangements. My
Delegation believes that the United Nations Con-
ciliation Commission contemplated by this draft
resolution can be of genuine assistance in reaching
this objective.
The exjDansion of armistice discussions is im-
perative. For over a year strife has torn the
Holy Land. This conflict has drawn into it many
countries of the Near East. The political and eco-
nomic lives of the peoples of this region have been
disrupted. The previous progress of the states
and peoples of this area has been retarded. It
would be difficult to calculate the loss in any terms.
The United Nations is perhaps in a better position
than any single state or international organization
to halt this deterioration and to make it possible
for the states and peoples again to turn their at-
tention to constructive pursuits. The United
Nations may be able to accomplish this purpose
by calling upon the governments and authorities
concerned to extend the scope of their presently
proposed negotiations.
The United States Delegation supports, in gen-
eral, the third numbered paragraph of the draft
resolution of the United Kingdom but believes, as
I have indicated earlier, that it should be amended
to give more accurate and clearer instructions to
the Conciliation Commission which is established..
It seems essential to us that the Commission's
functions should be enumerated. If a Concilia-
tion Commission is being established, a United
Nations mediator for Palestine appears to us no
longer required in his mediatory capacity. The
Conciliation Commission should, therefore, assume
the functions given to the United Nations mediator
in Palestine by the resolution of tlie General
Assembly of May 14.
The Conciliation Commission should also carry
out the instructions contained in the present reso-
lution and such additional instructions as may in
the future be given to the Commission by the
General Assembly or the Security Council.
Anotlier duty of the new Conciliation Commis-
sion would be the most important one of consult-
ing the governments and authorities concerned
with a view to achieving a final settlement of all
questions outstanding between them. If we call
upon the parties to extend the scope of the nego-
tiations— as is suggested through the addition of
Department of State Bulletin
U.K. DRAFT RESOLUTION OF NOVEMBER 18, 1948 <
The Oeucral Assembly,
Havim! adoptkd oil 29 November 1047 a resolution
CA/510) rcgariling the future government of Palestine
and lU'ovidin:; a plan of partition with eoononiic union ;
11avi.no ADoi'Ticn on 14 May 1!>48 resolution 1S6 (S-2)
empowering a United Nations Mediator in I'alestine to
exercise certain functions including tlie use of his good
offices to promote a peaceful adjustment of the future
situation of I'alestine;
Having ukceivkd and examined the Progress Report
of the United Nations Mediator on Palestine (A/64S)
submitted by the late Count Folke Beruadotte ;
Having taken note of the resolutions of the Secu-
rity Council concerning the truce in Palestine and of
the resolution of 10 November 1948 concerning the
establishment of an armistice by means of negotiations
conducted either directly or through tlie Acting Medi-
ator on Palestine ;
1. Ea-prenscs its deep appreciation of the progress
achieved through the good offices of the late Ignited
Nations Mediator in promoting a peaceful adjustment
of the future situation of Palestine for which cause he
sacrificed his life; and extends its thanks to the
Acting Mediator and his staff for their continued efforts
and devotion to duty in Palestine ;
2. Xotes with satisfaction Part I of the Progress
Report of the United Nations Jlediator and endorses
the specitic conclusions contained in Part I of that
report as providing a practical means of giving effect
to the principles contained in the resolution of 29
November 1947 and as a basis for a peaceful settlement
of the Palestine question ;
3. Establishes a Conciliation Commission consisting
of (three States Members of the United Nations)
which shall have the following functions :
(a) To assume the functions given to the United
Nations Mediator on Palestine by the resolution of the
General Assembly of 14 May 1948;
(b) To carry out the sijecitic functions and direc-
tives given to it by this resolution and such additional
functions and directives as may be given to it liy the
General Assembly or by the Security Council ;
(e) To enter into consultations with the Govern-
ments and authorities concerned with a view to achieve-
ment of a final settlement of all questions outstanding
between them, including in particular tlie questions
dealt with in the General Assembly resolution of 29
November 1947 and in Part I, section VIII, paragraph
4 of the Progress Report of the United Nations Medi-
ator on Palestine ;
(d) To undertake, upon the request of the Security
Council, any of the functions now assigned to the
United Nations Mediator on Palestine or to the United
Nations Truce Commission by resolutions of the Secur-
ity Council ; upon such request to the Conciliation Com-
mission by the Security Council with respect to all the
remaining functions of the United Nations Mediator on
Palestine under Security Council resolutions, the office
of the Mediator shall be terminated ;
4. Insfniets the Conciliation Commission in pursu-
ance of paragraph 3 (c) above to enter into consul-
tations with the Governments and authorities con-
cerned with a view to delimiting the frontiers in Pales-
tine as part of a final settlement, taking into account
the following general considerations, without exclud-
ing any territorial settlement mutually acceptable to
the parties ;
= U.N. doe. A/C.l/394/Rev. 1, Nov. 18, 1948.
(a) That there are important elements common to
both the resolution of the General Assembly of 29
November 1947 and the Progress Report of the United
Nations Mediator on Palestine ;
(b) That the delimitation of frontiers in areas not
covered by (a) aliove should be carried out in the light
of the general equilibrium envisaged in the resoluti(ui
of 29 November, the Mediator's comments thereon in
paragraph 3 (d) of Part I, Se<'tion VIII of his report,
and his sjiecific conclusions in paragraph 4 (b) of the
same section, with a view to contributing to the peace-
ful adjustment of difference between the parties;
."). Endejrses the recommendation contained in para-
graiih 4 (c) of the Mediator's conclusions concerning
the disposition of the territory of Palestine not in-
cluded within the boundaries of the Jewish State or
the City of Jerusalem, and instriu'ts the Conciliation
Commission, in full consultation with the inhabitants of
Arab Palestine, to assist the Governments of the Arab
States Concerned to arrange for the disposition of this
territory in accordance with the aforesaid recommen-
dation ;
C. Resolves that the Holy Places, religious buildings
and sites in Palestine would be protected and free
access to them assured, in accordance with existing
rights and historical practice; that arrangements to
this end should be under effective United Nations super-
vision ; that the United Nations Conciliation Commis-
sion in presenting to the fourth regular session of the
General Assembly its detailed proposals for a perma-
nent international regime for the territory of Jerusalem
should include recommendations concerning the Holy
Places in that territory ; that with regard to the Holy
Places in the rest of Palestine the Commission should
call uixin the political authorities of the areas con-
cerned to give appropriate formal guarantees as to the
protection of the Holy Places and access to them ; and
that these undertakings should be presented to the
General Assembly for approval.
7. Resolves that in view of its association with three
M'orld religions, the Jerusalem area, as defined in the
General Assembly resolution of 29 November 1947,
should be accorded special and separate treatment from
the rest of Palestine and should be placed under effec-
tive United Nations control with the maximum feasible
local autonomy for the Arab and Jewish communities;
invites the Security Council to take further steps to
secure the demilitarization of Jerusalem with the least
possible delay ; and in-itnicts the Conciliation Com-
mission
(a) To take all feasible steps to facilitate the effec-
tive administration of the area, co-ordinating to the
fullest extent possible the organs of self-government
and administration of the Arab and Jewish communi-
ties of the Jerusalem area,
(b) to report to the Security Council for appropri-
ate action any attempt to interfere with its functions
with respect to Jerusalem, and
(c) to present to the fourth regular session of the
General Assembly detailed proposals for a permanent
international regime for the Jerusalem area.
To assist it in carrying out these functions, the Con-
ciliation Commission is authorized to appoint a United
Nations Commissioner for Jerusalem who shall be re-
sponsible to the Commission;
8. Resolves that, pending agreement on more detailed
arrangements among the Governments and authorities
concerning, unimpeded access to Jerusalem by road, rail,
or air should be accorded to all inhabitants of Pales-
{Continued on page 715)
December 5. 7948
689
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
our new paragraph — it will be essential to author-
ize the Conciliation Commission to enter into con-
sultations with the parties with a view to the estab-
lishment of a final settlement of all questions. It
is our belief the scope of the negotiations should
include any matters dealt with in the November
29 resolution and in part I, section VIII, para-
graph 4, of the mediator's report. It seems clear
that there are many questions other than terri-
torial whicli might be the subject of negotiations,
such as Haifa, Lydda, and guaranties of minority
rights.
A further duty of the new Conciliation Commis-
sion would be to undertake upon the request of the
Security Council any of the tasks now assisfiied to
the United Nations mediator or to the United Na-
tions Truce Commission by resolutions of the Se-
curity Council presently in effect. During the
present transition period in Palestine there may
be some overlapping between the existence of a
Conciliation Commission and the continuing ac-
tivities of the United Nations mediator. With the
appointment of the Conciliation Commission by
the General Assembly, the position of the United
Nations mediator will no longer be required to
carry out the instructions of the General Assembly.
The United Nations mediator should, however,
continue the functions which the Security Council
has already entrusted to him for such time as the
Council considers necessary. It may be envisaged
at some near future date, however, that the Secu-
rity Council may request the United Nations medi-
ator to transfer the functions which he is exercis-
ing for it to the new Conciliation Commission. It
is believed that such transfer might take place, for
example, after the provisions of the Security Coun-
cil resolution of November 16 have become effec-
tive.
The United States Delegation is, therefore, pro-
posing that the third numbered paragraph of the
draft resolution of the United Kingdom should be
amended as follows :
".S. Establishes a Conciliation Commission con-
sisting of (three States Members of the United Na-
tions) which shall have the following functions:
"(a) To assume the functions given to the
United Nations Mediator in Palestine by the Reso-
lution of the General Assembly of U May 1948 ;
"(b) To carry out the specific functions and di-
rectives given to it by this Resolution and such
additional functions and directives as may be given
to it by the General Assembly or by the Security
Council ;
"(c) To enter into consultations with the gov-
ernments and authorities concerned with a view
to achievement of a final settlement of all questions
outstanding between them, including in particular
the questions dealt with in the General Assembly
Resolution of 29 November 1947 and in Part I,
Section VIII, Paragraph 4 of the Progress Re-
690
port of the United Nations Mediator in Palestine ;
"(d) To undertake, upon the request of the Se-
curity Council, any of the functions now assigned
to the United Nations Mediator in Palestine or to
the United Nations Truce Commission by resolu-
tions of the Security Council ; upon such request to
the Conciliation Commission by the Security Coun-
cil with respect to all the remaining functions of
the United Nations Mediator in Palestine under
Security Council resolutions, the office of the Me-
diator shall be terminated"; I'
I
We do not believe tliat our amendment is in basic j,
conflict with the third numbered paragraph of the
draft resolution. Our amendment is merely more
specific and contains the general and specific frame-
work of instructions for the guidance of the Con-
ciliation Commission.
The Committee will note that the content of the
fourtli numbered paragi-aph of the United King-
dom draft resolution has been included in para-
graph 3 (D) of our amendment. It would appear,
therefore, that the United Kingdom paragraph
might be deleted.
With regard to the fifth numbered paragraph of
the Unitecl Kingdom draft resolution, the United
States Delegation suggests that in line with our
projjosed amendment calling upon the parties to
negotiate, the Conciliation Commission should be
instructed to enter into consultation with the gov-
ernments and authorities concerned with a view to
delimiting the frontiers in Palestine, taking into
account the following general considerations with-
out excluding any territorial arrangements mutu-
ally acceptable to the parties :
A. That there are important elements common
to both the resolution of November 29 and the
mediator's report.
B. That certain modifications in the tei-ritorial
arrangements of the resolution of November 29
should be considered through negotiations taking
into account part I, section VIII, paragraph 4(B),
of the progress report of the United Nations
mediator in so far as it may contribute to a peaceful
adjustment of differences between the parties.
As I stated on November 20 : "We must decide
point by point whether we are to seek a basis of
agreement among the parties or whether we shall
try to fix boundaries at this session of the Assem-
bly." We are of the opinion that this function
should be left to the Conciliation Commission,
which, under this resolution as amended, could as-
sist the parties in reaching an agreement with re-
gard to a territorial settlement.
The United States Delegation also reaffirmed
on November 20 that "the United States approves
the claims of the state of Israel to the boundaries
set forth in the United Nations resolution of No-
vember 29, and considers that modifications thereof
should be made only if fuUy acceptable to the state
Department of State Bulletin
of Israel. This means that reductions in such
territory sliould be afjreed by Israel. If Israel de-
sires additions, it would be necessary for Israel to
offer an appropriate exchange through negotia-
tions."
It may be noted in this connection that the No-
vember 29 resolution contemplated that almost all
of the Negel) would go to the state of Israel and it
contemplated that Jaffa and western Galilee would
go to an Arab state. If, as now seems probable,
there are to be agreed readjustments of the Novem-
ber 29 boundaries, there should, on the part of all
concerned, be a fair measure of reciprocity and
mutual interest.
There are certain features of the frontiers which
are common both to the November 29 resolution
of the Assembly and to the mediator's report.
There are other features in which the Assembly
resolution and the mediator's report differ. From
statements made before this committee it is evi-
dent that serious differences exist among the inter-
ested parties on this subject. We believe that these
points of difference ought to be settled by processes
of negotiation and conciliation and that the Con-
ciliation Commission can play a valuable role in
assisting the parties in a final delimitation of fron-
tiers. In this connection, my Delegation considers
that, to the extent that the boundaries of the No-
vember 29 resolution need modification, the report
of the mediator provides a useful basis for renewed
efforts on the part of the United Nations to bring
about the necessary adjustments.
The United States Delegation proposes that the
fifth numbered paragi-aph of the United Kingdom
draft resolution be amended to read as follows :
"4. Instructs the Conciliation Commission in
pursuant of paragraph 3 (c) above to enter into
consultations with the governments and authorities
concerned with a view to delimiting the frontiere
in Palestine, taking into account the following gen-
eral considerations, without excluding any terri-
torial settlement mutually acceptable to the par-
ties;
"(a) that there are important elements com-
mon to both the Resolution of the General As-
sembly of 29 November 1947 and the Progress Re-
port of the United Nations Mediator in Palestine;
"(b) that certain modifications in the terri-
torial arrangements of the General Assembly Reso-
lution of 29 November 1947 should be considered
taking into account Part I, Section VIII, Para-
graph 4 (b) of the Progress Report of the
United Nations Mediator in so far as it may con-
tribute to a peaceful adjustment of differences
between the parties;"
Through our amendments to the third and fifth
numbered paragraphs of the United Kingdom
draft resolution we believe that the resolution as
a whole has been strengthened, and that the second
December 5, 7948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGENCIBS
numbered paragraph as jaroposed by the United
Kingdom Delegation is not essential.
Tlie United States Delegation supports the sixth
numbered paragraph of the United Kingdom draft
resolution as providing a means whereby the dis-
position of the territory of Palestine not included
within the boundaries of the Jewish state or the
City of Jerusalem may be accomplished.
The seventh numbered paragraph of the United
Kingdom resolution deals with the Holy Places,
a subject in which the interest of my Government
has frequently been evidenced in the debates in
the General Assembly. We believe that the phrase-
ology suggested in this seventh numbered para-
graph is satisfactory for the accomplishment of
the objectives which we desire to obtain.
The United States Delegation supports the
eighth numbered paragraph of the United King-
dom draft resolution. Under this provision the
Conciliation Commission is instructed to take all
feasible steps to facilitate the effective adminis-
tration of the Jerusalem area, and in so doing to
coordinate to the fullest extent possible the or-
gans of self-government and administration of
the Arab and Jewish communities. The Commis-
sion is authorized to appoint a United Nations
Commissioner for Jerusalem to assist it in carry-
ing out this task. This portion of the resolution
provides further that the Conciliation Commis-
sion shall present to the fourth regular session of
the General Assembly detailed proposals for a
permanent international regime for the Jerusalem
area. We do not believe that a more ambitious
program should be attempted at this time. Dur-
ing the course of the coming year full considera-
tion can be given to the difficult problems of the
maintenance of law and order in Jerusalem and
the cost of administration. It is also our hope
that during the coming year political stability in
the Palestine area will be achieved to the degree
that the responsible authorities of the Arab and
Jewish communities can contribute far more than
they could today to the operation of a special re-
gime for Jerusalem. It is our belief that the
Jerusalem area should be integi'ated, in so far as
is consistent with its special international char-
acter, with the people and institutions of the re-
mainder of Palestine. My Delegation considers
that the General Assembly at its fourth session will
be able to make lasting decisions with regard to
an international regime for Jerusalem as a result
of the proposals which the Conciliation Commis-
sion will present at that time.
The ninth numbered paragraph of the United
Kingdom draft resolution contains an important
concept with regard to access to Jerusalem and
has our full support.
The tenth numbered paragraph of the same
draft resolution is a restatement of the principle
of territorial integrity contained in the Charter,
691
THE UN/TED NATIONS AND SPBCIALIZED AGENCIES
and has our full support in the belief that it
will provide reassurance to the governments and
autliorities concerned with regard to frontiers in
Palestine established through negotiations.
The eleventh numbered paragraph of the
United Kingdom resolution with regard to Arab
refugees has our full support in that it endorses
a principle which all of us recognize and provides
a means whereby this principle may be imple-
mented.
It is our view, however, that reference need not
be made in the resolution itself to the highly tecli-
nical question of compensation for losses inci-
dent to the recent fighting in Palestine. This
problem can be far better dealt with in detail by
the parties concerned, perhaps with the assistance
of a claims commission, having regard to the sug-
gestions made in the mediator's progress report.
The Conciliation Commission under this resolu-
tion will be available to the parties for consulta-
tion in working out this problem. We are, there-
fore, submitting an amended paragraph which
will be substituted for paragi-aph 10, which we
do not believe is necessary. The amended para-
graj^h reads :
"10. Resolves that the Arab refugees wishing
to return to their homes and live at peace with
their neighbors should be permitted to do so at
the earliest possible date and that adequate com-
pensation should be paid for the property of those
choosing not to return ; and instructs the Concilia-
tion Commission to facilitate the repatriation,
resettlement, and economic and social rehabilita-
tion of the Arab refugees and the payment of
compensation;"
The administrative and procedural arrange-
ments set forth in paragraphs 12, 13, 14, and 15
of the United Kingdom draft appear to us to be
sound, and we therefore support these paragraphs
also.
The various amendments suggested by my Dele-
gation have been submitted to the Secretary, and
have been distributed to the members of the Com-
mittee for their consideration. We hope that they
will be hel^Dful in assisting the committee to I'each
a final and valuable conclusion to its consider-
ation of this important item.
DISCUSSION OF PALESTINE QUESTION IN THE SECURITY COUNCIL: RESOLUTION
ESTABLISHING AN ARMISTICE^
The Security Council
Reaffirming its previous resolutions concern-
ing the establishment and implementation of the
Truce in Palestine and, recalling particularly its
Resolution of 15 July 1948 which cletermined that
the situation in Palestine constitutes a threat to
the peace within the meaning of Article 39 of the
Charter ;
Taking note that the General Assembly is con-
tinuing its consideration of the future government
of Palestine in response to the request of the Secu-
rity Council of 1 April 1948 (document S/714) ;
Without prejudice to the actions of the Acting
Mediator regarding the implementation of the Res-
olution of the Security Council of 4 November
1948;
'U.N. doc. S/1080, Nov. 17, 1948; adopted by the Secu-
rity Coiiucil on Nov. 16, 1948.
692
Decides that, in order to eliminate the threat to
the peace in Palestine and to facilitate the transi-
tion from the present Truce to permanent peace
in Palestine, an armistice shall be established in
all sectors of Palestine ;
Oalls upo7i the parties directly involved in the
conflict in Palestine, as a further provisional
measure under Article 40 of the Charter, to seek
agreement forthwith, by negotiations conducted
either directly or through the Acting Mediator on
Palestine, with a view to the immediate establish-
ment of the Armistice including :
(a) the delineation of permanent armistice de-
marcation lines beyond which the armed forces of
the respective parties shall not move ;
(b) such withdrawal and reduction of their
armed forces as will ensure the maintenance of the
armistice during the transition to permanent peace
in Palestine.
Department of State Bulletin
Discussion of the Membership Problem
STATEMENT BY BENJAMIN V. COHEN IN AD HOC POLITICAL COMMITTEE'
U.S. Delegate to the General Assembly
The problem now before us is a familiar one to
the members of this Committee. For the third
year we are confronted with a situation where a
number of applicant states which the General As-
sembly regards as fully qualified for membership
are denied admission because of a veto exercised by
one of the permanent members of the Security
Council. In our view the United Nations was in-
tended to represent a world community of peace-
loving, law-abiding states. It was not intended to
be a mere alliance among the original members to
which they would admit other members only as it
suited their desires or special interests.
It is not necessary to review in detail the discus-
sions on this subject in the Security Council and
in this Committee of the General Assembly. In the
Security Council every effort to secure a recom-
mendation for the admission of qualified member
states has been frustrated by the repeated use by
the Soviet Union of its power to veto. In most
instances no explanation for these vetoes has been
offered which can reasonably be deemed valid
under the provisions of article 4 of the Charter
or within the purposes and principles of the
Charter. Soviet Representatives have gone far
outside the Charter to find reasons for their action.
They have maintained that states lacking diplo-
matic relations with the U.S.S.R., or states whose
behavior during the war might not have been fully
satisfactory to the U.S.S.E., were not, on these
grounds, qiialified for membership. And when the
Se<'urity Council considered and reconsidered the
application of Italy in 1947, a favorable recom-
mendation on the admission of that state was
blocked by the Soviet Union for a reason which
had nothing whatever to do with the qualifications
of Itah' lor membership: namely, because of
Soviet insistence on making the admission of Italy
dependent on the acceptance of other states not
qualified in the opinion of the Security Council for
membership. Thus, the Italian Government and
people, through no fault of their own, have been
denied the representation in this Organization to
which they are fully entitled.
In an attempt to remedy this situation, the Gen-
eral Assembly at its last regular session adopted
December 5, 1948
a series of eight resolutions on the membership
problem. Five of these resolutions recorded the
view of the General Assembly that five of the ap-
plicants— Ireland, Portugal, Transjordan, Italy,
and Finland — are qualified for, and should be ad-
mitted to, membership in the United Nations, and
that opposition to their admission has been based
on grounds not included in article 4 of the Charter.
A sixth resolution expressed the Assembly's opin-
ion that Austria is a peace-loving state within the
meaning of article 4 and, in the case of Austria as
in the other five cases, the General Assembly re-
quested the Security Council to reconsider the ap-
plications of the states concerned in the light of
the Assembly's views.
The seventh and eighth resolutions adopted by
the General Assembly envisaged other action which
might be taken to break the deadlock on the ad-
mission of applicant states to the Organization.
One recommended that the permanent members of
the Security Council engage in consultations with
a view to reaching agreement on the admission of
new members. A fruitless consultation did take
place in April 1948. The other resolution re-
quested the International Court of Justice to ren-
der an advisoiy opinion on certain questions of law
which arose as a result of the Soviet effort to i-ef use
the admission of qualified applicants unless certain
other candidates were accepted.
Since these resolutions were passed, and in part
pursuant to their terms, a number of additional
developments have taken place.
First, shortly before the second special session
' Made on Nov. 22, 194S, and released to the press by
the U.S. Delesration to the third regular sPssion of the
General Assembly on the same date. The ad hoc Political
Conmiittee, upon which all memhers are represented, was
established by the General Assembly on Nov. 15 to con-
sider and report on certain items from among those
rel'erred to Committee 1 liy the General Assembly. Items
to be referred to the nd hoc Committee are: report of the
Security Council; admission of new members; the prob-
lem of voting in the Security Council; advisability of
establishing a permanent committee of the General As-
sembly ; study of metbods for the promotion of interna-
tional cooperation in the political field ; and United Na-
tions guard (an item proposed by the Secretary-General).
693
THB UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
of the General Assembly last April, the applica-
tions of Italy and the other applicant states were
reconsidered in the Security Council at the initial
instance of the Representatives of France, the
United Eangdom, and the United States. Again
there was a Soviet veto.
Second, the Security Council last summer con-
sidered for the first time an application from Cey-
lon. Nine members of the Security Council agreed
that Ceylon was an independent state which ful-
filled the conditions for membership in the United
Nations. But again, the admission of a qualified
applicant was prevented by a Soviet veto.
Third, the International Court of Justice, in re-
sponse to the Assembly's request for an advisory
opinion, held on May 28, 1948, that a member of
the United Nations is not juridicially entitled to
make its consent to the admission of an applicant
state dependent on conditions not expressly pro-
vided for by paragraph 1 of article 4 of the
Charter :
". . . and that, in particular, a Member of
the Organization cannot, while it recognizes the
conditions set forth in that provision to be ful-
filled by the state concernedj subject its affirmative
vote to the additional condition that other States
be admitted to membership in the United Nations
together with that State."
The situation today appears, therefore, to have
reached an impasse. On the one hand, we see the
U.S.S.R. firm and unyielding in its determination
to prevent the admission of duly qualified states to
the United Nations, on grounds which are to us
unconvincing. On the other hand, we see the ma-
jority of the membership of the Security Council
and of the General Assembly standing powerless
before the Soviet veto. This great majority of the
Members of the United Nations is confirmed in its
position by the advisory opinion handed down by
the proper international tribunal. In the circum-
stances, it is hardly surprising that members of
this Assembly should express their deep concern
at this willful and continued frustration of the ma-
jority's desire to take action necessary to give a
moral basis to the right of the United Nations to
speak for the world community of nations.
The United States fully appreciates the strength
of this sentiment in the General Assembly. It is
sympathetic to the desire for remedial action. On
September 17, 1947, the Secretary of State of the
United States declared that, for its part, the United
States was willing to accept, by whatever means
might be appropriate, the elimination of the una-
nimity requirement with regard to the admission
of new members. The United States has main-
tained this position in the studies undertaken by
the Interim Committee on the question of voting
in the Security Council.
Furthermore, my Delegation stated at the last
694
regular session of the Assembly that it would not
exercise its right of veto in the Security Council
to exclude from the United Nations any of the
applicants then under consideration which the
Assembly determined to be qualified for member-
ship.
I call attention to these points because they
still represent the policy of the United States.
The basic question before us here is what the
United Nations can do to contend with the exist-
ing situation. In our view, there are several steps
wliich the Assembly might usefully take at this
juncture.
1. It might take not© of the advisory opinion
of the International Court of Justice and call it
to the attention of the Security Council and of
member states as an authoritative determination
of the rights and duties of members in voting
under article 4 of the Charter. The General
Assembly might also express the view that the
Court's conclusions should be applied in the con-
sideration of membership applications.
2. The General Assembly might reaffirm the
General Assembly resolutions of 1947 requesting
reconsideration by the Security Council of the
applications of Trans Jordan, Ireland, Portugal,
Italy, Finland, and Austria, and might request
renewed consideration of these applications in the
light of the advisory opinion of the International
Court of Justice.
We note that the Delegation of Australia has
introduced resolutions in this sense with regard
to all of these countries except Austria. We will
support these resolutions. The United States will
itself introduce a resolution requesting reconsid-
eration of the application of Austria as it did last
year. We consider Austria to be fully qualified
for membership. We ask that Austria's applica-
tion should be reconsidered and approved.
Certain other proposals for action by the Gen-
eral Assembly will undoubtedly be made in the
course of this debate. The Representative of Ar-
gentina has, as you know, placed on the agenda
a proposal that the General Assembly admit to
membership Italy and every other applicant state
which has received seven or more affirmative votes
in the Security Council.
It seems clear that the underlying jourpose of
the Argentine Government in making this pro-
posal is to express dissatisfaction with Soviet ob-
struction of the admission of qualified applicants.
The United States, of course, shares that dissatis-
faction. The United States has attempted to
reach agreement with all the permanent members
of the Security Council on procedures which
would bring to an end the stalemate on this ques-
tion. We are continuing our efforts to reach
that objective.
But while we seek a purpose identical with that
Department of State Bulletin
of the Argentine Representative, "we are regret-
fully forced to part company with him as regards
the method of procedure which he appears to ad-
vocate. Last j'Car there was a thorough discussion
in this Committee of Dr. Arce's views on the con-
stitutional history of the process of the admission
of new memhers to the United Nations. At that
time, we gave careful consideration to the position
which he presented.
We felt then, and we continue to feel, that the
evidence conclusively supports the view that the
General Assembly caiuiot admit a state without a
prior recommendation of the Security Council.
Both the legislative history of the drafting of
article 4 of the Charter, and the practical con-
struction given to this article by the General As-
sembly and the Security Council in the adoption
of their rules of procedure and in their action on
membership applications, support this thesis.
Our Delegation cannot disregard this weight of
evidence and experience. It cannot agree to any
action of the General Assembly which it does not
consider valid and proper under the Charter.
In this connection it is appropriate to take note
of the proposal contained in the report of the In-
terim Committee that in considering membership
applications in the Securitj' Council, the perma-
nent members agree that a recommendation on the
admission of an applicant state shall be made by
the vote of any seven members of the Council. In
the opinion of my Delegation, this suggestion rep-
resents perhaps the most promising method now
available for dealing with the problem with which
we are confronted. It provides a fair means of
accommodation. It involves no dictation on the
part of any state or group. It requires only a de-
cent respect for the aggregate opinion of the world
comniunit}'.
Other suggestions may be made in this Commit-
tee looking toward the admission of all the present
applicant states with a view to insuring that all
states may become members of the Organization.
We would agree generally that universality of
membership is a highly desirable and proper ob-
jective. We know from experience that the United
Nations cannot function with greatest effective-
ness unless all properly qualified states are coop-
erating in its work.
Our own willingness to accept the judgment of
any seven members of the Security Council as to
the qualifications of applicant states for member-
ship is evidence of our desire for a broadly univer-
sal representation of states in the Organization.
It is indicative of our hope that, through discus-
sion in the Security Council and in the General
Assembly, the members of the Organization may
reach a better understanding of the common re-
quirements for membership. This is the road
along which the United Nations can travel toward
December 5, 7948
TH£ UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
the broadest possible association of sovereign
states. It is the road along which the United
Nations must travel if it is to act effectively in the
name and on behalf of the world community of
nations.
This does not mean that we need or should ig-
nore the rudimentary requirements of article 4 as
essential conditions of membership. To be ad-
mitted into the organized community of nations,
states should, by their conduct prior to admission,
give proof of their readiness and willingness to
eschew force as an instrument of national policy,
to have i-egard and respect for the laws of nations,
and to assist in their development and enforcement.
Any state which possesses the essential attributes
of statehood can readily conform its policies to
the requirements of article 4. But such require-
ments, rudimentary as they are, are not satisfied
by paper assurances that, as of the date of its ad-
mission, an applicant state will accept the obliga-
tions contained in the Charter. The Organization
is entitled to greater proof than this that applicants
will fulfil the obligations of membership.
Let those states regarding whose admission the
majority of the Security Council and the General
Assembly have doubts give tangible proof of their
desire for membership.
Let the Mongolian People's Republic open its
doors to the outside world sufficiently to permit a
real establishment of the facts regarding its
independence.
Let Albania and Bulgaria cease their assistance
to the guerrilla forces in Greece in accordance with
the terms of the General Assembly resolutions in
the Greek question. Let Bulgaria, Rumania, and
Hungary observe the provisions of their treaties of
peace by abolishing the repressive, tyrannical prac-
tices of their Governments. These treaty provi-
sions insuring respect for human rights and funda-
mental freedoms are not old and obsolete provi-
sions from old and obsolete treaties. They are the
provisions incorporated in the peace treaties to
carry out the solemn promises made to the peoples
of these countries by the Allied powers before the
end of the war. The callous disregard and flagrant
violations of these treaties by governments seek-
ing admission into the United Nations cannot be
ignored.
If action is taken to remedy these difficulties, the
serious doubts regarding these states entertained
by our Delegation — and, I believe, by most of the
other Delegations here present — might be mini-
taiized, and their admission to membership ac-
cepted. Let me assure the Assembly that the
United States would not stand in the way of the
admission of any applicant if it wei'e satisfied that
it was qualified for membershij). We will do our
pai't to make the United Nations truly representa-
tive of the world community of peace-abiding,
law-abiding nations.
695
Resolution on Reduction by One Third of Armaments and Armed Forces ^
The General Assembly,
Desirinq to establish relations of confident col-
laboration between the States within the frame-
work of the Charter and to make possible a gen-
eral reduction of armaments in order that human-
ity may in future be spared the horrors of war
and that the peoples may not be overwhelmed by
the continually increasing burden of military
expenditure;
Considering that no agreement is attainable on
any proposal for the reduction of conventional
armaments and armed forces so long as each State
lacks exact and authenticated information con-
cerning the conventional armaments and armed
forces of other States, so long as no convention
has been concluded regarding the tj'pes of mili-
tary forces to which such reduction would apply,
and so long as no organ of control has been estab-
lished ;
Considering that the aim of the reduction of
conventional armaments and armed forces can
only be attained in an atmosphere of real and last-
ing improvement in international relations, which
implies in particular the application of control
of atomic energy involving the prohibition of
atomic weapons ;
Bdt noting on the other hand that this renewal
of confidence would be greatly encouraged if
States were placed in possession of precise and
verified data as to the level of their respective
conventional armaments and armed forces;
Recommends the Security Council to pursue
the study of the regulation and reduction of con-
ventional armaments and armed forces through
the agency of the Commission for Conventional
Armaments in order to obtain concrete results as
soon as possible;
Trusts that the Commission for Conventional
Armaments, in carrying out its plan of work, will
devote its first attention to formulating proposals
for the receipt, checking and publication, by an
international organ of control within the frame-
work of the Security Council, of full information
to be supplied by Member States with regard to
their effectives and their conventional armaments ;
Invites the Security Council to report to it no
later than its next regular session on the effect
given to the present recommendation witli a view
to enabling it to continue its activity with regard
to the regulation of armaments in accordance with
the 23urposes and principles defined by the
Charter;
Invites all nations in the Commission for Con-
ventional Armaments to co-operate to the utmost
of their jaower in the attainment of the above-
mentioned objectives.
Resolutions of the United Nations Special Committee on the Balkans ^
Appointing Conciliators To Meet With Aibania,
Yugoslavia, Bulgaria, and Greece^
The First Committee
Having in mind paragraph 5 (1) of Resolution
109 (II) by which the General Assembly called
upon Albania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia on the
one hand and Greece on the other to co-operate in
the settlement of their dispute by peaceful means,
and to tliat end recommended that they establish
norma) diplomatic and good neighbourly relations
among themselves as soon as possible ;
Having in mind that representatives of the Gov-
'U.N. doc. A/C.1/393, Nov. 1.5, 1948, draft resolution
adopted by Committee I on Nov. 13, 1948.
= U.N. doc. A/C.1/3S.5, Nov. 11, 1948 ; adopted by Ck)m-
mittee I on Nov. 10 and by the General Assembly on Nov.
27, 1948.
696
ernments of Albania, Bulgaria, Greece and Yugo-
slavia are present in Paris during this session of
the General Assembly;
Noting that the United Nations Special Com-
mittee on the Balkans unanimously recommended
that the General Assembly consider ways and
means of obtaining the co-operation of Albania,
Bulgaria and Yugoslavia with the Special Com-
mittee ;
Asks the President of the General Assembly, the
Secretary-General, the Chairman and the Rap-
porteur of the First Committee to act in the capac-
ity of conciliators jointly to convene immediately
in Paris a meeting of representatives of tlie Gov-
ernments of Albania, Bulgaria, Greece and Yugo-
slavia to explore the possibilities of reaching agree-
ment amongst themselves as to the methods and
procedure to be adopted with a view to resolving
present differences between them.
Department of State Bulletin
Continuing UNSCOB
Tlio draft resolution by China, France, the
Unitoil Kinjiilom, and llio United States presented
to (.'onunittee I and printed in the Bulletin of
November i?l. 1!)-1:S, p. 635, was adoi)ted by the
General Assembly on November 27, 1948, except
for the chan<res in the following paragraphs indi-
cated in italic:
8. Calls upon Albania, Bulgaria and Yugo-
slavia to co-operate with the Special Committee in
enabling it to carry out its functions, in part'wrdar
the function, of being available to assist the Gov-
enunents concerned in accordance with article
10 (c) of this resolution,
10. (c) To contimie to be available to assist the
Governments of Albania, Bulgaria, Greece and
im UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZBD AGENCIES
Yugoslavia in the implementation of Resolution
109 (II) and of the present Resolution; and for
this purpose, in its discretion to appoint, and
utilize the services and good offices of one or more
persons whether or not members of the Special
Committee.
11. Decides that the Special Committee shall
have its principal headquarters in Greece, and with
the co-operation of the Government or Govern-
ments concerned, shall perform its functions in
such places as it may deem appropriate for the
fulfilment of its mission.
12. Text of paragraph 11 of the draft becomes
No. 12.
13. Text of paragraph 12 of the draft becomes
No. 13.
The United States in the United Nations
Berlin Currency
The United States, Great Britain, France, and
the Soviet Union have accepted a proposal that
neutral exjjerts study Berlin's currency and trade
problems with a view to recommending i^ossible
settlement of the controversy which has caused the
Western powers to complain that the Soviet-
imposed land blockade threatens world peace.
Juan A. Bramuglia of Argentina who, as presi-
dent of the Security Council during November,
initiated efforts of the council's six member na-
tions which are not parties to the Berlin dispute
to find a solution, reported that the U.S.S.R. had
accepted his proposal for a 30-day survey.
Earlier, the United States. Great Britain, and
France made public their official acceptance in a
statement welcoming the plan for a neutral study
and pledging continued cooperation in attempts to
solve the Berlin problem, while reserving their
position on the study's outcome.
In a joint reply to President Bramuglia, the
Western powers reaffirmed their right to take such
measures as may be necessary to maintain their
position in Berlin pending outcome of the jiro-
posed currenc}' and trade study.
Pointing to the Soviet Union'^ tactics which
have split Berlin into two cities, the three Western
powers stressed that they would have to consider
any resolution which might be submitted to the
Security Council as a result of the general circum-
stances prevailing at that time.
"The three western powers cannot agree that
they should be bound to submit to all Soviet meas-
ures which add to and intensify the Soviet block-
ade or which interfere with the city administra-
December 5, 1948
tion, while the Soviet remains wholly uncommitted
to any restraint", tlie joint reply notified Mr. Bra-
muglia, adding, "The three governments therefore
repeat the reservation of their right, declared to
the Security Council when the Berlin question was
submitted to that body, 'to take such measures as
may be necessary to maintain in these circum-
stances their position in Berlin' pending the out-
come of the further efforts of the President of the
Security Council".
"Little Assembly"
The General Assembly in plenary session on
December 3 voted to extend the life of its Interim
Committee for a second experimental year. The
vote was 40 to 6, the Soviet bloc comprising the
ojiposition.
Boycotted by the Soviet-bloc nations since its
inception, the Interim Committee, the so-called
Little Assembly, was set up to provide continuity
of work between the regular sessions of the Assem-
bly. This action enables the Committee to con-
tinue operations at Lake Success through 1949,
studying problems relating to the maintenance of
peace and security, conducting investigations, and
helping the General Assembly in its work. The
Interim Committee was given the added power of
seeking advisory opinions of the International
Court of Justice, but was again expressly foi'bid-
den to consider matters before the Security Coun-
cil.
Arguments by the Soviet-bloc delegates against
extension of the Little Assembly, on the grounds
that it was an attempt to circumvent the Security
Council and its unanimity rule failed to influence
697
THS UNITBD NATIONS ANO SPBCIAUZED AGENCIES
the General Assembly. These nations have indi-
cated that they will again I'efuse to participate in
the Interim Committee.
Israeli Membership
The Security Council on December 2 referred
to its membership committee Israel's application
for admission to the United Nations. The United
Kingdom served notice immediately that it would
purpose in committee a deferment of action on the
application, and Syria expressed a simihir view.
France and Canada also suggested that the mem-
bership committee should await the final recom-
mendations of the Political and Security Com-
mittee regarding a permanent settlement of the
Palestine problem before passing on the admission
request.
Meanwhile, on December 4, Committee I passed
a resolution establishing terms of reference for a
Conciliation Commission.
Indonesia
The Security Council's Good Offices Committee
in the Indonesian dispute reported on December
2 that direct talks now commencing between
Netherlands and Indonesian Republic Representa-
tives are a "serious and possibly final attempt" to
resolve the political issues between the two parties.
The Committee informed the Security Council
that there is a possibility of a general breakdown
in the cui-rent truce in Indonesia as a result of the
delay in achievement of a political settlement.
The truce was agreed to by both parties last Janu-
ary in the Renville agi-eements which called for
the parties to conduct further negotiations for an
agreement covering Indonesia's political future.
The Committee was instrumental in achieving the
truce and has worked since then to encourage a
political settlement.
The Committee pointed out that the delay in
working out a settlement has stalled economic re-
habilitation in Indonesia as a whole, particularly
in Republican areas, increasing their political diffi-
culties. No political negotiations under Good Offi-
ces Committee auspices have taken place since the
end of last May.
The report noted tliat the Netherlands Repre-
sentatives have been reluctant to consider pro-
posals put forwai'd by U.S. and Australian mem-
bers of the Good Offices Committee, who, along
with a Representative of Belgium, comprise the
three-nation conciliation group.
Freedom of Information
The United States and eight other countries (the
Philippine Republic, China, the Netherlands, Bo-
livia, Sweden, Demnark, France, and Argentina)
have submitted a resolution to the General As-
sembly calling for the convening of a second Con-
ference on Freedom of Information at Lake Suc-
cess.
The proposed Conference would have as its sole
purpose the review of the three draft conventions
and their submission to governments concerned
for accession and ratification. All nations repre-
sented at the first meeting would be invited to send
delegates to the Lake Success meeting.
The conventions were drawn up at Geneva in
April 1948. They include one on gathering and
international transmission of news, another on in-
ternational right of official correction, and a third,
and more general one, on freedom of information.
Italian Colonies
With adjournment of the current Assembly
session tentatively set for December 11, final action
this year by the United Nations on disposition of
the former Italian colonies is deemed unlikely.
The colonies issue was automatically referred to
the Assembly this year, according to the terms of
the Italian peace treaty, when agreement was not
obtained by the Council of Foreign Ministers.
Referred, in turn, to the Political and Security
Committee, discussion of the colonies question may
begin following completion by the Committee of
work on the Palestine issue.
698
Deparlmenf of Stafe Bullefin
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES
Calendar of Meetings ^
Adjourned during November 1948
Ilo (International Labor Organization) :
Industrial Committee on Textiles: Second Session
Industrial Committee on Petroleum: Second Session
Preparatory Conference of Labor Inspection in the Asian Countries .
Who (World Health Organization):
Second Session of Executive Board
Expert Committee on International Epidemic Control
Fourth Pan American Consultation on Cartography
Second Meeting of South Pacific Commission
Gatt (General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade): Meeting of Com-
mittee on Special Exchange Arrangements.
Fad (Food and Agriculture Organization):
Fourth Session of Council
Fourth Session of Annual Conference
Imo (International Meteorological Organization): Meeting of
Regional Commission for Asia.
Empire Parliamentary Association
Second Inter-American Congress on Brucellosis
In Session as of December 1, 1948
L'nited Nations:
General Assembly: Third Session
Ecosoc (Economic and Social Council): Economic Commission
for Asia and the Far East.
German External Property Negotiations With Portugal (Safehaven) .
Ittj (International Telecommunication Union):
Provisional Frequency Board
International Conference on High Frequency Broadcasting . . .
Bolivian International Fair
Ilo (International Labor Organization):
Joint Maritime Commission
Governing Body: 107th Session
UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Or-
ganization): General Conference: Third Session.
IcAO (International Civil Aviation Organization): Southeast Asia
Regional Air Navigation Meeting.
Intergovernmental Maritime Consultative Organization: Meeting of
Preparatory Committee.
Scheduled for December 1, 1948
West Indian Conference: Third Session
Seventh Meeting of the Caribbean Commission
First Pan American Congress of Pharmacy
Iro (International Refugee Organization): Meetings of Executive
Council.
Site
Geneva
Geneva
Kandy, Ceylon . . .
Geneva
Geneva
Buenos Aires ....
Sydney
London
Washington ....
Washington ....
Neve Delhi
Hamilton, Bermuda.
Mendoza, Argentina
Paris ^
Glenbrook, Australia
Lisbon
Geneva
Mexico City . . . .
La Paz
Geneva
Geneva
Beirut
New Delhi
Lake Success . . .
Guadeloupe . . . .
Guadeloupe . . . .
Habana
Rome
Date
Oct. 26-Nov.
Nov. 9-19
Nov. 15-20
Oct. 25-Nov. 15
Nov. 17-21
Oct. 12-Nov. 14
Oct. 25-Nov. 2
Nov. 1-8
Nov. 8-13
Nov. 15-
Nov. 10-17
Nov. 15-24
Nov. 17-26
1948
Sept
Nov.
21-
29-
1946
Sept.
3-
1948
Jan.
Oct.
15-
22-
Oct.
20-
Nov.
Nov.
25-
29-
Nov.
17-
Nov.
23-
Nov.
30-
1948
Dec.
1-
Dec.
1-
Dec.
1-8
Dec.
7-10
' Prepared in the Division of International Conferences, Department of State.
' During the Third Session of the General Assembly, the Security Council is meeting'in Paris.
December 5, 1948
699
Meeting of Fourth Session of tlie Food and Agriculture Organization
ADDRESS BY PRESIDENT TRUMAN'
I am delighted to be here this afternoon and to
have this opportunity of meeting with the Dele-
gates to the Fourth Session of the Food and Agri-
culture Organization of the United Nations. There
could be no more appropriate time for the United
States to be host to a United Nations meeting than
during our cherished Thanksgiving holiday.
Those of you of the Food and Agriculture Or-
ganization know the importance to nearly all na-
tions of the harvest-time celebration. We in the
United States are only one of many peoples who
celebrate the gathering of the harvest each year.
Other peoples have been celebrating in their own
way since ancient times. But there is one feature
of our Thanksgiving celebration to which I should
like to oall your attention.
Our Thanksgiving traditions were begun by
some of the earliest settlers of this country. They
thought of the Thanksgiving holiday as much
more than an occasion for a big dinner, and for
thanks to God that the earth had produced an
abundant harvest. There was another spirit be-
hind the first Thanksgiving dinner. The colonists
invited the Indians to join with them in their
celebration. Around that first Thanksgiving table,
differences were forgotten, and enemies became
friends.
This year our harvest is greater than it has ever
been. We have much to be thankful for.
But thanks for a record-breaking harvest is only
the beginning of our Thanksgiving, just as it was
only a part of Thanksgiving more than 300 years
ago. The real spirit of our holiday is in the sharing
of this harvest, and in a feeling of warm friendship
and good will for others less fortmiate.
That is the same spirit in which the Food and
Agriculture Organization has brought many na-
tions together.
I know that Fag has many problems ahead of
it. Perhaps I should say that the world has many
food problems ahead of it, and the peoples of the
world are counting on Fao for a major part of
the work in solving those problems.
One of the first and most difficult problems is the
rebuilding of nations which suffered heavily dur-
ing the war.
We are making a great deal of headway through
" Made before the Fourth Session of Fao in Washington
on Nov. 24, 1948, and released to the press by the White
House on the same date.
700
the combined efforts of many nations in the Euro-
l^ean Recovery Program.
But rebuilding countries that were once self-
sui^porting and prosperous is not nearly so difficult
as building up the economies of countries where
there is comparatively little to build on. Under-
developed countries offer a challenge to the in-
genuity of those nations which have greater re-
sources.
Fao has clearly recognized the importance of
this problem and the responsibility of all countries
in helping to solve it.
We have found our Agricultural Extension
Service essential to a high level of farm production
in our own country. Through our Extension
Service, we make sure that our farmers learn about
the latest advances in production techniques. This
means furnishing practical information and help
right on the farm. I know that Fao is already
interested in an extension service, but I wish to
emphasize that the United States stands ready to
help in developing such systems in other countries.
Here in the United States, we have also learned
that financial credit is as much a tool of farm
production as is a plow, or a bushel of seed. Our
system for making agricultural credit available to
farmers is one of the keystones of our great farm
I^rogram. It protects every farmer in the owner-
ship of his land and in the planting of his crops.
That is why we have such hopes for the role that
another international agency can play in building
up the agricultural resources of underdeveloped
countries. I refer to the International Bank.
The credit needs of underdeveloped countries are
great, however, and there is room for all kinds of
help. This is a job for private lenders and coop-
eratives as well as for government institutions.
The achievement of our world goal of abundant
food will mean an enlarged flow of commerce in
all directions.
An abundant food supply will tear down many
artificial trade barriers. Some of these barriers
have been erected by those who hoped for protec-
tion against low commodity prices elsewhere, but
this short-sighted move has led to a slow form of
trade strangulation. We must look to food as a
common tool for lowering such barriers. We must
look to it as a sort of international language for
modifying some of the short-sighted policies which
have been hampering the commerce of the world.
A few months ago, I urged the Congress of the
United States to ratify the international wheat
Department of State Bulletin
agreement which woiikl have stabilized the price
and vohiinc of wheat in worhl trade for five years.
Many of the nations repreirented here today par-
ticipated in that ajji^eenient. and many of your
delegates are familiar with its provisions. I re-
gret that this agreement was not ratified, but I
pledge that if another one can be negotiated, I will
send it to the new Congress, which convenes in
Januai'y, for approval.
Moreover, I look to the general pattern of the
wheat agreement as one wliich might be followed
for other commodities. Stability is one of the
foundations of peace. National emotions too often
rise and fall with changes in commodity prices.
We are counting on the Food and Agriculture Or-
ganization to remove some of the instability from
farm production and farm prices arovmd the
world, and thus to remove some of the causes of
international friction.
The United States is happy to join with other
countries in Fao in giving freely of our technical
experience and knowledge in the job of agricul-
tural improvement — making grass grow where it
never grew before, irrigating dry land, developing
crops for special purposes, and combating crop
plagues ancl pests. I can promise you that this
country will continue to send its experts wherever
Fao believes thev are needed.
ACTIVITIBS AND DEVELOPMBNTS
One of the ways to i-estore stability to the world
is to produce plenty of food and see that it is dis-
tributed fairly.
Hunger has no nationality.
Abundance should have none, either.
I hoj^e that every country, old or new, will be-
come a member of the Food and Agriculture
Organization. I should like to see that large
agricultural country, Argentina, become a member.
I wish that the Soviet Union would also join. I
think that if we could discuss with the Russians
our mutual interest in agi'iculture, it would not be
so difficult to discuss our differences in some other
fields. It is most heartening that several Eastern
European nations are members of Fao. I hope
this will continue to be true.
I am very glad to learn that so many delegates
to this session have accepted the invitations of
farm families near Washington to share their
Thanksgiving dinners tomorrow. This is the kind
of simple, human experience which makes for
lasting international good will.
I hope that j'ou will carry back to your homes
our Thanksgiving spirit of thanks to God and
good will to men, and I know that your American
hosts will be the richer for having had you as their
guests. From these solid foundations of personal
friendship and understanding, we can go on to
build the kind of peaceful world we all want.
U.S. Delegations to International Meetings
First Pan American Congress of Pharmacy
The Department of State announced on Novem-
ber 23 that Robert Philipp Fischelis, Secretary of
the American Pharmaceutical Association, has
been named Chairman of the United States Dele-
gation to the First Pan American Congress of
Pharmacy. The Congress is scheduled to be held
at Habana December 1-8, 1948.
Delegates
George F. Arcliambault, Chief, Pharmacy Section, Hospital
Division. Bureau of Medical Services, U.S. Public
Health Service, Inderal Security Agency
Cmdr. William Paul Briggs. MSC, Head, I'h;irmacy Sec-
tion, Professional Division, Bureau of Medicine and
Surgery, Department of the Navy
Don Francke, Editor, Bulletin of the American Society of
Hospital Pharmacists, and Chief Pharmacist of the
University of Michigan Hospital
Edward Burns Geiger, Chief, Pharmacy Division, Depart-
ment of Medicine and Surgery, Veterans Administra-
tion
Col. Othmar Frank Goriup, MSC, Chief, Medical Service
Corps, Department of the Army
Ernest Little. President of the American Pharmaceutical
Association
Justin Lawrence Powers, Editor. Scientific Edition of the
Journal of the American Pharmaceutical Association
The main objectives of the Pharmacy Congress
are to stimulate interchanges and contributions to
December 5, 1948
both scientific and industrial pharmaceutical prog-
ress and to intensify relations and exchange of
information among the pharmaceutical organiza-
tions of the Americas.
This meeting has been organized by the Asocia-
cion Farmaceutica Nacional (National Pharma-
ceutical Association, of Cuba) in cooperation with
a number of Cuban scientific and social organiza-
tions, both private and official.
Fourtli Session of the Economic Commission for
Asia and the Far East
The Department of State announced on Novem-
ber 26 that Myron M. Cowen, American Ambas-
sador to Australia, has been designated as Chair-
man of the United States Delegation to the Fourth
Session of the Economic Commission for Asia and
the Far East, which will begin at Lapstone, New
South Wales, Australia, on November 29.
EcATE is one of the three regional economic com-
missions of the United Nations Economic and
Social Council, the other two being the Economic
Commission for Europe and the Economic Com-
mission for Latin America.
701
ACTIVITIES AND DEVELOPMENTS
EoAFE was established by resolution of Ecosoc
on March 28, 1947, for the purpose of facilitating
concerted action for the economic reconstruction
of the region and raising the level of its economic
activity. The Commission may make or sponsor
studies of economic and technical problems and
development within the area and undertake or
sponsor the collection, evaluation, and dissemina-
tion of data in the area.
In addition to Ambassador Cowen the United
States Delegation will include two officials of the
Department of State: Koswell H. Wliitman, As-
sistant Chief of the Division of Investment and
Economic Development, and Edward E. Rice, As-
sistant Chief of the Division of Philippine Affairs.
Also on the Delegation will be William W. Diehl,
representative of the United States Treasury in
Manila, and other officers from United States Mis-
sions throughout the region.
Mexican Minister of]Foreign Relations Elected
Director General of UNESCO
Jaime Torres Bodet, Minister of Foreign Rela-
tions of Mexico, has been elected Director General
of the United Nations Educational, Scientific and
Cultural Organization for a term of six years, the
Department of State was advised on November 26.
His nomination by the Unesco Executive Board
was confirmed by a vote of 30 to 3 by the General
Conference, which is being held at Beirut,
Lebanon. Sr. Torres Bodet succeeds Dr. Julian
Huxley, world-renowned British scientist.
Assistant Secretary Allen is chairman of the
United States Delegation to the Unesco confer-
ence. In advising the Department of the nomina-
tion of Sr. Torres Bodet, Mr. Allen stated :
"The election of Jaime Torres Bodet is an event
of profound satisfaction to the United States Dele-
gation and the United States Government. It is
a tribute to his coimtry, as well as to him. He
won the gratitude of his countrymen and interna-
tional recognition by his outstanding services as
Minister of Education when he provided the
leadership for a fundamental education program
which has few parallels.
"His achievements since as Foreign Minister
have won the respect and friendship of all nations
seeking closer relationships and better under-
standing. His capabilities as an administrator
and his intellectual leadership, together with his
deep devotion to a peoples movement should be
mvaluable to Unesco and contribute immensely
to the achievement of its goals."
Freedom of the Road
ACTIONS ON ROAD AGREEMENTS
During the three months that elapsed between
the December 1947 and March 1948 sessions of the
Working Party on Short Term Problems, Sub-
Committee on Road Transport, Inland Transport
Committee of the Economic Commission for
Europe, a further step toward freedom of road
transport in Europe was noted by adherence of
the Governments of Austria, Luxembourg, Nor-
way, and the United Kingdom to the agreements
reached at the first session.^ At the second meet-
ing, in December, the Governments of the three
Western zones of Germany, Belgium, France, the
Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland, Italy, Den-
mark, and Czechoslovakia agreed to grant or main-
tain freedom of transit for all road transport of
goods ; the Governments of the three Western zones
of Germany, Denmark, the Netherlands, Sweden,
and Switzerland also agreed to grant or maintain
freedom of movement for all other international
transport of goods which permitted shipments of
goods from one country directly to another; and
the Governments of the three Western zones of
Germany, Belgium, Czechoslovakia, Denmark,
■ Bulletin of Jan. 4, 1948, p. 27.
702
France, Italy, the Netherlands, Sweden, and Switz-
erland were jirepared to maintain all facilities ex-
isting for international passenger transport by
road. These agreements were to become effective
January 1, 1948, and continue for a period of six
months.
At the third session, in March of 1948, it was
agreed that the freedom of transit for all road
transport of goods, all other international trans-
IJort of goods by road, and facilities for interna-
tional passenger transport by road would be ex-
tended through December 31, 1948. Another im-
portant agreement which points to a further
achievement in eliminating restrictions on freedom
of the road was the granting or maintaining of
freedom for international tourist trafKc by road.
The Governments of Austria, Belgium, France, the
Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland, the United
Kingdom, and the three Western zones of Germany
adhered to this agreement, commencing April 1,
1948, and continuing through December 31, 1948.
These agreements all remain subject to the
following conditions :
(Continued, on page 715)
Department of State Bulletin
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
U.S., France, and the U.K. Discuss Controls for Inspecting
German industry in tlie Rulir
STATEMENT BY SECRETARY MARSHALL
[Released to the press November 24]
I believe that everyone recognizes that the great
industrial region of the Ruhr is essential to the re-
covei'y of Europe as well as that of Germany it-
self. Also I believe the American people recog-
nize the justifiable fears of the French that there
should be built up a war potential that might again
menace their peace and freedom.
The United States Government would never
knowingly be involved in any procedure which
in our opinion would reestablish a military menace
through the industrial development of Germany.
I had a long discussion of this general subject last
Friday afternoon with the French Foreign Min-
ister, Dr. Schuman, and with Mr. Hector McNeil,
the Representative of the British Foreign Minister,
Ernest Bevin. Dr. Schuman expressed the con-
cern of the French Government regarding the re-
cent announcement made at Frankfurt by the Mili-
tary Governors of the British and American
occupied zones in Germany regarding the Ruhr.^
The decisions announced by the two Military Gov-
ernors were in keeping with the decisions taken at
the previous London conference and had previ-
ously, at least so far as General Clay was concerned,
been formally approved by this Government.
Nevertheless there was a feeling of deep concern on
the part of the French Government as I have
already stated.
The whole Ruhr issue is one of extreme com-
plexity. It carries in the minds of the French a
threat to their peace and security. It involves
the great problem that this Government has been
facing of providing the lai-ge appropriations to
meet the deficiencies of the German economy, not
only of the American zone but that of the British
and now of the French.
There is another consideration which is some-
what lost siglit of today. At the end of the First
"World War the treaty of peace was concluded
within, I think, ten months of the end of that war.
We are now more than three years past the con-
clusion of the European war and no treaty of peace
is yet in sight. Meanwhile there is an urgent
necessity for the restoration of the economy of
Europe, of Western Europe in particular, for rea-
sons that anyone can understand and also for very
' Printed in this issue, p. 704.
December 5, 7948
special reasons with which you are familiar. At
the end of this last war, ownership in the Ruhr
industries was set aside because of its identification
with large combines and the Nazis. Management
was made responsible solely to the militai-y govern-
ment. It is thus impossible for these plants to
secure loans for the purpose of rehabilitation and
many of them have been operating at a financial
loss which has been made up by subsidies indi-
rectly borne by the United States. Hence, it was
urgently necessary in the interest of Europe to
reorganize the industry under a pattern which
would permit responsible enterprises to be uncler
at least a substantive or responsible ownership.
This is the basic purpose of the trustee plan an-
nounced by the Military Governments. Big com-
bines and property forfeited under the Niirnberg
decisions are to be regrouped into smaller self-
sustaining units which would be capable of com-
peting in the market place. These small enter-
prises would be placed under German trusteeship
which would be responsible for their efficient and
economic operation directly under Allied super-
vision. Assets and liabilities would be determined
and distributed among the enterprises thus formed
so that they may be placed on a sound financial
basis as rapidly as possible. Procedure is much
the same as tliat under bankruptcy proceedings
except that it is being applied to a vast and com-
plex coal and steel industry in one of the great
production centers of the world. Obviously com-
pletion of this procedure will require several years
and it is important that the trustees have a feeling
of continuity of policy during this period.
The United States Government believes that ade-
quate security controls can be maintained and pro-
visions are being made for this pvirpose by the
establislunent of a Security Commission which will
be charged with continued inspection of the Ger-
man industry. It is obvious that the final deter-
mination of the security measures against possible
resurgence of German military power must be in-
corporated in the peace treaty. Security actually
does not become a problem during the period of
military occupation.
The United States Government has already ex-
pressed its willingness to consider further meas-
(Continued on page 715)
703
Reorganization of German Coal and Iron and Steel Industries^
Military Government — Germany, U.S. Zone of Control Law No. 75
Whereas it is the policy of Military Govern-
ment to decentriilize the German economy for the
purpose of eliminating excessive concentration of
economic power and preventing the development
of a war potential
Whereas Military Government has decided that
the question of the eventual ownership of the coal
and iron and steel industries should be left to the
determination of a representative, freely elected
German Government
Whereas Military Government has decided that
it will not allow the restoration of a pattern of
ownership in these industries which would consti-
tute excessive concentration of economic power
and will not permit the return to positions of
ownership and control of those persons who have
been found or may be found to have furthered
the aggressive designs of the National Socialist
Party
Whereas it is expedient that those industries
should forthwith be reorganized with a view to the
promotion of tlie recovery of the German economy
Whereas the Military Governors and Com-
manders-in-Chief of the British and United States
Zones of Occupation have agreed on the measures
to be taken in their respective Zones for these
purposes ; and
Whereas the Military Governor and Com-
mander-in-Chief of the British Zone is i^romul-
gating Law No. 75 in order to give effect to this
agreement
It is therefore ordered:
Article I
Decartelization
1. The enterprises enumerated in Schedule A
of this Law ai-e hereby declared to be excessive
concentrations of economic power or otherwise
deemed objectionable and therefore subject to re-
organization within the purview of Military Gov-
ernment Law No. 56 Prohibition of Excessive
Concentration of German Economic Power. The
^ Released to the press by Omgus in Berlin on Nov. 10,
194S. Law no. 75 will apply to the U.S. Control Area
of Germany. A similar law applicable to the Britisli
Control Area of Germany was issued simultaneously by
British Military Government. It is emphasized that this
Is not necessarily the final version. The law will be
formall.v promulgated within the next few days and It is
possible that minor alterations will be made before final
promulgation.
704
controlling companies in each of these enterprises
shall be put into liquidation forthwith and a
liquidator appointed, or current liquidation pro-
ceedings conhrmed, as the case may be.
2. The title to assets located in the U.S. Zone
owned or controlled by undertakings listed in
Schedule B hereof is hereby declared to be subject
to seizure by Military Government. Pending a de-
termination on their seizure, these assets, if not
already under such control, are hereby placed
under control pursuant to the provisions of Mili-
tary Government Law No. 52. The functions of
exercising the powers of control over such assets
as provided in Law 52 are hereby vested in the
UK/US Coal Control Group.
•
Article II
Reorganization of the Coal Industry
3. The title to assets located in the U.S. Zone
and owned or controlled by undertakings possess-
ing colliery assets as defined in Article XII hereof
is hereby declared to be subject to seizure by Mili-
tary Government. Seizure of such assets shall be
effected by nomination by Military Government or
its designated agency whereupon the assets so
seized sliall be transferred by Military Government
and title thereto vested in companies which shall
be formed for the purpose under German law.
These companies shall be formed by and shall have
for their shareholders such persons of German
nationality as may be designated by or under the
authority of Military Government after consulta-
tion with appropriate German bodies. The per-
sons thus designated shall be known as trustees and
shall hold the shares allotted to them in the com-
panies on behalf of the owners of the collieries and
associated undertakings affected by this article in
accordance with instructions issued by Military
Government.
4. Pending a determination on their seizure, the
assets described in paragraph 3 above, if not al-
ready so subject, are hereby made subject to the
provisions of Military Government Law No. 52.
The function of exercising the powers of control
jH-ovided by Military Government Law No. 52
over such assets is hereby vested in the L^KA^S
Coal Control Group. On completion of the trans-
fer of the title of colliery assets to a new company,
as jjrovided for in paragraph 2 hereof, such assets
shall cease to be subject to the provisions of Mili-
Deparlment of State Bulletin
tiiry Government Law Xo. 52. The reniainiiifi as-
sets of enterprises having colUery assets shall, in
the case of enterprises not enumerated in Schedule
A or Schedule B, cease to be subject to the provi-
sions of Military Government Law No. 52 and
shall, in the case of enterprises enumerated in
Schedule A, be transferred to the liquidator re-
ferred to in Article I hereof who shall disjiose of
them in accordance with the orders of Military
Government.
5. The Deutsche Kohlenbergbau-Leitung shall
be reorganized as an Aktiengesselschaft with the
Deutscher Kohlen Verkauf and Bergbaubedarf
Beschaffungs Zentrale as subsidiary companies.
The Aufsichtsrat of the reorganized Deutsche
Kohlenbergbau-Leitung shall be selected from the
Trustees mentioned in paragraph 3 and as pro-
vided for in Article IV.
6. Military Govermnent will provide by Kegu-
lation for —
(a) the rules governing the formation of com-
panies pursuant to paragraph 3, the allocation of
assets to such companies, the number of trustees,
their powers and duties, their relationship to Mili-
tary Government, to German agencies, to the
companies referred to in paragraph 5 hereof, and
to the previous owners of the affected under-
takings ;
(b) the organization and functions of the com-
panies referred to in paragraph 5, their relation-
ship to Military Government, to German agencies
and to the companies to be formed under para-
graph 3.
Article III
Reorganization of the Iron and Steel Industry
7. The title to assets located in the U.S. Zone,
owned or controlled bj' undertakings listed in
Schedule A hereof and not affected by Article II
hereof and title to the assets owned or controlled
by Roechling-Buderus AG and Buderusche Eisen-
werke-Wetzler, are hereby declared to be subject
to seizure by Military Government. Pending a
determination on their seizure, the assets described
in this paragraph, if not already under such con-
trol, are hereby placed imder control pursuant to
the provisions of Law No. 52. The function of
exercising the powers of control over such assets,
as provided in Law 52, is hereby vested in the
UKAJS Steel Group.
8. A Steel Trustee Association consisting of
German nationals shall be established for the pur-
pose of assisting in decentralizing and reorganiz-
ing the iron and steel industry. The members of
the Association shall be appointed by or under the
authority of Military Government, after consulta-
tion with the appropriate German bodies.
9. Title to the assets declared subject to seizure
by pai'agraph 7 of this law will, upon notice, be
seized by Military Government and, upon seizure,
shall be transferred to and vested in the Steel
December 5, 1948
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Trustee Association or the new companies pro-
vided for in paragraph 10 below.
10. The Steel Trustee Association shall as soon
as possible submit for the ap{)roval of Military
Government plans for the further reorganization
of the Iron and Steel Industry. The plans shall
provide for the formation of new companies (here-
inafter referred to as unit companies) to which
shall be transferred assets seized as provided in
paragraph 8 hereof and may provide for the mer-
ger or amalo;amation of such assets and for the
absorption or additional assets which may include
assets outside the field of the Iron and Steel
Industry.
11. On the approval of the plan for each unit
company, with such modifications as Military Gov-
ernment may direct, the title to the assets affected
shall be transferred to and vested in the new unit
company which shall have as its shareholders such
persons of German nationality as may be desig-
nated by or under the authority of Military Gov-
ernment, after consultation with appropriate Ger-
man bodies. The persons thus designated shall be
known as Trustees and shall hold, in accordance
with regulations or orders issued by Military Gov-
ei'ument, the shares allotted to them on behalf of
the owners of the iron and steel undertakings af-
fected by this Article.
12. On completion of the transfer of the title to
assets to a unit company, such assets shall cease to
be subject to the provisions of Military Govern-
ment Law 52. The remaining assets of the enter-
prises brought under control by paragi-aph 7
hereof shall, in the case of enterprises not enu-
merated in Schedule A or Schedule B, cease to be
subject to the provisions of Military Government
Law No. 52 and shall, in the case of enterprises
enumerated in Schedule A, be transferred to the
liquidator referred to in Article I hereof who shall
dispose of them in accordance with the orders of
Military Government.
13. Military Government will provide by regu-
lation for —
(a) the organization and functions of the Steel
Trustee Association, its powers and duties, its re-
lationship to Military Government, to German
agencies and to the German Iron and Steel Indus-
try, both before and after the formation of unit
companies ;
(b) the rules governing the number of unit com-
panies to be formed, the allocation of assets to such
companies, the number of Trustees, their powers
and duties, their relationship to Military Govern-
ment, to German agencies, to the Steel Trustee
Association and to the previous owners of the af-
fected undertakings.
Article IV
United Nations Interests
14. Except for those enterprises enumerated in
Schedule A, as subject to reorganization within the
70S
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
purview of Military Government Law No. 56, en-
terprises, the share capital of which before 1st
September, 1939 was owned to the extent of more
than 50 per cent by United Nations nationals, shall
not be subject to the provisions of Articles II and
III hereof. Provision shall, however, be made by
regulation for the representation of such enter-
prises on the Aufsichsrat of the reorganized
Deutsche Kohlenbergbau-Leitung.
15. United Nations interests in the Coal and
Iron and Steel Industries acquired before 1st Sep-
tember 1939 may be represented by persons holding
powers of attorney for the owners.
16. The provisions of this Article shall not in
any way limit or affect the powers of the UK/US
Coal Control Group or the Deutsche Kohlenberg-
bau-Leitung, in its present or future form, over
production and distribution in the Coal Industry.
Article V
Liabilities
17. Assets, the title to whicli is seized and trans-
ferred under the provisions of Articles II and III,
hereof, are hereby declared to be free and clear of
all charges and encumbrances.
18. The proceeds which may become available
from the eventual sale of shares in companies
formed under Articles II and III hereof shall be
made over to the undertakings, the assets of which
have been transferred, or their successors in inter-
est, or liquidators, in proj^ortion to the value of the
transferred assets, and shall be available for the
satisfaction of creditors in accordance with their
original rights under the provisions of German
law, provided that Military Government may
order priorities for the satisfaction of debts aris-
ing during the period of Military Government
control.
Article VI
Former Reich and Prussian State Interests
19. Enterprises and holdings of tlie former
Eeich or Prussian State shall be subject to the
provisions of this Law. Interests of the former
Keich or Prussian State in companies formed pur-
suant to this Law shall be represented by the
Trustees referred to in Articles II and III hereof
and shall be dealt with in accordance with the pro-
visions of such regulations and orders as may be
issued under Article XI hereof or other relevant
legislation.
Article VII
Amendments and Repeals
20. Insofar as the provisions of Military Gov-
ernment Law No. 52 or 56 are inconsistent with
the provisions of this Law, this Law shall prevail.
21. This Law, and all regulations and orders
issued thereunder, shall prevail over provisions
of German law inconsistent therewith.
706
Article VIII
Tax Provisions
22. Taxes and other duties shall not be imposed
in connection with any transfer pursuant to Ar-
ticles II and III of this Law, nor shall any taxes
or other duties be imposed in connection with the
formation of new companies as provided herein.
23. The vesting in Trustees of ownership inter-
ests in the companies formed pursuant to Articles
II and III hereof shall not affect the computation
of the tax liabilities of such companies. The as-
sessment of all taxes on such companies shall be
according to the principles of German tax law
which would be applicable to them in the absence
of trustees.
Article IX
Attestation
24. The appropriate German authority shall
register transfers made pursuant to this Law with-
out any attestation upon presentation by Military
Government of a certified list of the assets to be
transferred.
Article X
Penalties
25. Any person violating or evading or attempt-
ing to violate or evade or procuring the violation
of any provision of this Law or of any regulation
or order issued thereunder shall, upon conviction,
be liable to a fine of not more than DM 200,000 or
to imprisonment for not more than five years or
both.
Article XI
Regulations
26. Military Government may from time to time
issue regulations and orders in implementation or
amplification of this Law.
Article XII
Definitions
27. For the purpose of this Law and any regu-
lation or order issued thereunder —
(1) "CoUiei-y assets" shall mean assets located
on or physically connected with a colliery or eco-
nomically essential to the oijeration thereof and
include the following proj^erties and interests of
the coal mining industry —
(a) Coalmines and unworked coal.
"Coal" includes steinkohle, pechkohle and braun-
kohle, together with such other minerals as are
normally mined by colliery undertakings in as-
sociation with the foregoing.
"Mine" includes quarry, opencast, drift and deep
mine workings and borings associated therewith.
(b) Fixed and movable property used for col-
liery activities and the following ancillary activi-
ties : coal carbonization, coal products distillation
Department of State Bulletin
processes allied with colliery activities and proc-
esses associated with briquetting plants, manufac-
tured fuels, hydrofienation plants, synthetic plants,
nitrogen and ammonia plants, plants for the pro-
vision of gas to the gas grids, brick, tile and similar
works ancl j)roperty used for the supply of water
from or to a coal mine.
(c) Property used for generating and trans-
mitting electricitj', consumed exclusively or mainly
in the course of colliery and ancillary activities.
(d) Railways, aerial ropewaj'S, canal waterways
and other fixed and movable property used ex-
clusively or mainly for inland or water transport,
loading, discharging, handling or storing of prod-
ucts of colliery and ancillary activities, or articles
required for colliery or electricity activities and
ancillary activities, when such equipment is used
exclusively for intei'nal transport within the area
of a collier}'.
(e) Fixed and movable property of the colliery
undertaking used exclusively or mainly for the
purposes of the sale or supply by colliery concerns
of products of colliery and ancillary activities.
(f) Fixed and movable property of the colliery
undertaking used for such welfare activities as
hospitals, baths, canteens or for the provision of
benefits for the staff employed in colliery and an-
cillary activities.
(g) Patents in respect of inventions relating to
processes applied in the course of colliery and an-
cillary activities or to production in connection
with these activities anci trade marks used or in-
tended for use in relation to such production.
(h) Stocks of products of colliei-y and ancillary
activities.
( i ) Consumable or spare stores available for use
for colliery and ancillary activities.
(]') Interests of colliery undertakings in dwell-
ing houses and land used to provide housing accom-
modation for the workpeople and staff employed in
colliery and ancillary activities.
( k ) Interests of colliery undertakings in forests,
farms, farming stock and other agricultural prop-
erty, and all land owned by colliery undertakings,
including land to be used for the enlargement of
surface installations and similar activities.
(1) Interests of colliery undertakings in tech-
nical organizations, all organizations engaged in
research for the colliery industry and ancillary ac-
tivities, testing stations designed to secure safety
in mines and in allied activities, and schools and
institutes engaged in training for the mining and
ancillary activities.
(m) Liquid assets, including accounts receivable
and cash in hand which are attributable to the op-
eration of the assets specified herein.
(2) "Coal carbonization and coal products dis-
tillation processes" shall mean the distillation of
coal by any process, and the treatment, rendering
December 5, 7948
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
and distillation of salable products arising from
the distillation of coal.
(3) ''Electricity property" shall mean power
stations, transformers, transmission lines and other
fixed and movable property used in connection
with the generation or transmission of electricity.
(4) "Fixed property" shall mean all buildings,
works, fixtures and fixed machinery and plant and
the sites thereof.
(5) "Movable property" shall mean all movable
machinerj' and plant, wagons and other vehicles,
engines, tractors, vessels, animals and movable
equipment of any kind.
(6) "Undertakings" shall mean enterprises of
any nature whatsoever.
Article Xlll
Effective Date
28. This Law shall become effective in the
Laender of Bavaria, Hesse, Bremen, and Wuert-
temberg-Baden on 10 November 1948.
By Order of Militaet Government
Schedule A to U.S. Military
Government Law No. 75
Enterprises Declared To Be Excessive ConcentTOr
tioiis of Economic Potvcr, or Otherwise Deemed
Objectionable and Therefore Subject to Re-
organisation Within the Purview of —
MiLiTAEY Government
Law No. 56
Prohibition of Excessive
Concentration of German
Economic Power
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
9.
10.
11,
12.
13,
14,
15.
IC,
17,
18
Vereinigte Stahlwerke Aktiengesellschaft
Fried. Krupp
Mannesmannroehren-Werke
J Kloeckner-Werke Aktiengesellschaft
JKloeckner & Co.
Hoesch Aktiengesellschaft
Otto Wolff
(Gutehofi'nungshuette Alrtienverein fuer Berg-
bau und Huttenbetrieb
Gutehoffnungshuette Oberhausen Alitienge-
sellschaft
Ilseder Huette
Eeichswerke Complex
Flick Complex
Thyssen-Bornemisza Group
Stinnes Complex
Rheinisch-Westfaelisches Kohlen-Syndikat
Niedersaechsisches Kohlensyndikat Gesell-
schaft mit beschraenkter Haftung
Rheinisches Braunkohlen-Syndikat Gesell-
schaft mit beschraenkter Haftung
Westfaelische Kohlenhandelsges Gastrock &
Co.
Kohlenhandelsgesellschaft "Hansa,"
meier & Co.
Kohlenhandelsgesellschaft "Mark,"
mann, Schracler & Co.
Kall-
Siep-
707
THE RECORD Of THB WBBK
19. Westfaelisches Kohlenkontor Nalit, Emscher-
mann & Co.
20. Kolilenhandelsgesellschaft "Niederrhein,"
Weyer, Franke & Co.
21. Kohlenhandelsgesellschaft "Westf alia," Wiese-
brock, Schiilte & Co.
22. Kohlenhandelsgesellschaft "Gluckauf" Abt.
Beck & Co.
23. Deutsche Kohlenhandelsgesellschaft Liiders,
Meentzen & Co.
24. Kohlenkontor Weyhenmeyer & Co.
25. Westfaelische Kohlenverkaufsgesellschaft
Vollrath, Week & Co.
26. Kohlenwertstoff A. G.
Schedule B to U.S. Military
Government Law No. 75
Enterprises Declared To Be Subject to Seizure hy
Military Government, the Assets of Which Are
Placed Under Control Pursuant to Military
Government Law No. 52
1. Vereinigte Elektrizitats-und Gewerks-A. G.
2. Eheinisch-Westfaelisches Elektrizitatswerk
A. G.
3. Vereinigte Elektrizitaetswerke Westf alen A. G.
4. Vereinigte Industrieunternehmungen A. G.
OUTLINE OF DECISIONS'
The U.S. and U.K. Military Governors have had
under review the structural reorganization and the
pattern of o^nnership in the coal and iron and steel
industries. The following constitutes an outline
of the decisions which have been reached and which
will be put into operation in the near future and
which are embodied in the laws and schedules
which have been made available to you today.
In the first place the Military Governors wish to
make it clear that the restoration of a pattern of
ownershij) in these industries which would con-
stitute an excessive concentration of economic
power will not be allowed. Nor will the return to
positions of ownership and control of those indi-
viduals who permitted and encouraged the aggres-
siye designs of the national socialist party b^ per-
mitted. Secondly the Board considers the ques-
tion of socialization to be one that is properly
within the competence of a representative freely
elected German Government, the .sovereignty of
which may extend over the whole of Germany or
may be confined to Western Germany only. Ac-
cordingly the Board will not take any action in
regard to the coal and iron and steel industries in
the Combined Area whicli will prejudice a decision
by such future German Government as to the pat-
tern of ownership to be established for those imlus-
tries. At such a time as a representative freely
elected Government either for Germany as a whole
or Western Germany alone is constituted it shall
be at liberty to resolve this question within the
limitations of Military Government policy already
expressed.
The Board considers that in the meantime an
" Released to the press by Omgcs in Berlin on Nov. 10,
19-tS. This statement relative to the U.S. and U.K. plans
for the "Reorganization of German Coal and Iron and Steel
Industries" was issued simultaneously on Nov. 10, 1948, to
German representatives of the Economics Council ; of the
LUnderrat and the Bizonal Executive Committee in Frank-
furt ; of the steel industry and its trade-union leaders at
Diisseldorf ; and of the coal industry and its trade-union
representatives In Essen.
708
interim reorganization of these industries is essen-
tial in the interests of the recovery of the German
economy. Accordingly, the Board has decided to
take certain steps which, without prejudicing the
ultimate settlement of ownership have the purpose
(a) to transfer the custody of the assets in these
two industries and the exercise of ownership func-
tions to German hands (b) to strengthen and im-
prove existing German organizations and to pro-
vide German organizations where none exist and
the need is considered as established (c) to en-
courage a return to a more normal method of work-
ing, under which directors and management will
have the motive and the opj^ortunity to assume
their proper responsibilities and liabilities (d) to
provide or adjust Military Government organiza-
tions in these industries on a Bipartite basis.
In formulating the plan to give effect to these
objectives, The Board has decided that undertak-
ings in the coal and iron and steel industries in
which Allied interests as at 1st September 1939
owned the share capital to the extent of more than
50 per cent should be excluded from the applica-
tion of these decisions.
Enterprises which fell within this definition and
whicli are not subject to reorganization under de-
cartelization legislation will be released from the
control at present exercised by Military Govern-
ment under the provisions of the relevant orders
issued under Law 52 and the owners of such enter-
prises will be at liberty to resume their normal
functions except that in the case of the coal indus-
try the powers of Military Government wliich are
ve'sted in the UIv/US Coal Control Group and the
powers over the production and distribution of coal
allotted by Military Government to the DKBL in
its present or future form shall in no way be lim-
ited or affected by these arrangements.
The following is a summary of the steps which
will be taken in the coal industry.
The colliery undertakings within an established
definition will be withdrawn from their parent
Department of State Bulletin
enterprises nnd set up under new companies to be
formed for the purjiose under German Law. Mili-
tary Govermnent will decide in broad outline the
;!ssets which will be allotted to each new company
and will seize and transfer the title to such assets
to the new companies. In groupini;; these colliery
interests for the future, care will be taken to group
in accordance with the requirements of efficient op-
eration and to avoid undue dislocation.
German nationals will be a]:)pointed as Trustees
for eacli new company by Military Government
after due consultation with the appropriate Ger-
man bodies. Three to five Trustees will be ap-
jiointed per company and will hold the shares of
the company in equal proportion. The shares will
be held on behalf of the owners but the rights of
the owners will be limited to receiving appropriate
proceeds arising from the eventual disposal of the
shares and shall not include the right to influence
or aifect the acts of the Trustee.
Trustees will be responsible to Military Govern-
ment for the efficient discharge of their duties.
The managements of the new companies will be
subject to the over-all authority assigned to the
DKBL. The Trustees will exercise the functions
of ownership except that they shall not distribute
earnings and shall not be entitled to dispose of the
shares or the capital assets of their companies
without the approval of Militarj' Government.
The DKBL and its subsidiary companies the
DKV and BBZ will be formed into Aktiengesell-
schaften. The shares of DKBL will be held by
Military Government, and DKV and BBZ will be
fully owned subsidiaries of the DKBL. Slembers
of the Auf sichtsrat of the DKBL will be appointed
from Trustees of the new coal companies by Mili-
tary Government who will ensure that the consti-
tution of the Aufsichtsrat is broadly representative
and who will arrange for the inclusion of appro-
priate representation of Allied-owned mines in the
Aufsichtsrat.
The reconstitution of the DKBL will be delayed
until a sufficient number of Trustees appointed to
the new coal companies are available for nomina-
tion to the Aufsichtsrat. In the meantime the
DKBL will continue under its present constitution.
Steps of a similar nature will be taken in the
iron and steel industry. In this case the programs
envisaged consist of two phases. In the first
phase a steel trustee association will be formed
consisting of 12 members who will be appointed
by Military Government after due consultation
with appropriate German bodies. The shares of
the new companies which have already been
formed to operate the steel-prodvicing industry will
be transferred to the association and the assets at
present operated by these companies, including as-
sets at present held on lease from the owners, will
be seized by Military Government and the title
thereto transferred to the association.
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
During this phase the association will exercise
the functions of ownership except that it shall not
be entitled to distribute earnings or to dispose of
either the shares or the assets which it holds and
shall be subject to the over-riding authority of
Military Government through the Agency of a
Bipartite Steel Group which will be formed for
the purpose. In the fields of current production
and distribution the association will have advisory
functions only. Other iron and steel-producing
assets as may be approved by Military Government
may also be transferred to the association.
During the first phase the association will have
as its primary task the proposal of measures for
the further reorganization of the iron and steel in-
dustry with the object of combining the assets now
held by the steel producing companies into a fewer
number of companies in order to obtain production
units of optimum efficiency. In fornmlating their
recommendation the association will be at liberty
to propose the inclusion of additional assets of the
former iron and steel and coal complexes in order
to provide sound economic units of a size and range
capable of sustaining the steel fabricating indus-
try in competition with the world markets. Such
additional assets may include colliery assets and
particular attention will be directed to the treat-
ment to be accorded to the iron ore mining indus-
try. The criteria which will govern the proposals
for this further reorganization will be purely
economic and the former ownership groupings
will be ignox-ed entirely.
The second phase envisages the completion of
the formation of new unit companies and the ap-
pointment to them of German nationals as Trus-
tees in a manner similar to that adopted in the coal
industry. At this stage the Trustee association
will cease to exercise the powers of ownership
which will be vested in the hands of the Trustees
for each unit company. The association will then
assume the normal functions of a trade association
except that, for the time being, membership will be
compulsory on the basis that each unit company
will nominate one of its trustees as a member of
the association.
Finally as a complementary step to the reor-
ganizations plans for the coal and iron and steel
industries it has been decided to take action in
these fields in order to apply the decartelization
policy which has been adopted in the Combined
Area. Accordingly the exceptions from the ap-
plication of Ordinance 78 which were made at the
time of promulgation of the decartelization legis-
lation in the case of the coal and iron and steel
industries and the firm of Friedrich Krupji will
be cancelled. The undertakings involved will be-
come subject to the provisions of the implementing
regulations of this Law except that Military Gov-
ernment has decided without further delay to de-
clare a mmiber of the original combines to be
December 5, 1948
709
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
excessive concentrations of economic power or
otherwise to be objectionable. The controlling
companies in each of these enterprises will be jjut
into liquidation or current liquidation proceedings
confirmed as the case may be. The names of con-
cerns which will be dealt with in this manner are
shown in schedule A of the Law.
In conclusion I am instructed to emiDhasize that
the Military Governors have special resiponsilnlity
in regard to the coal and iron and steel industries,
of which they cannot divest themselves at this
stage. These industries, the bulk of which is lo-
cated in the British Zone, have been in the control
of the British Commander-in-Chief. Bj' agree-
ment between them the Military Governors are now
transferring the powers of ownershii^, with certain
qualifications, to German Trustees. The Military
Governors however are retaining certain control
powers. They are bound to do this on account of
international agreements to which their Govern-
ments are party and they are bound to retain a
measure of control until the final disposition of
ownership has been determined. Therefore the
decisions which are being announced to you today
are necessarily decisions of the Military Governors
taken by them in the light of their special responsi-
bilities for these industries.
Before these decisions were reached the views
of the various interested German authorities and
organizations, which are well known to Military
Government, were given full consideration, and,
as far as possible and as far as it is compatible with
Military Govermnent policy, these views have been
incorporated in the plan. The Militaiy Governors
are confident that this development will be wel-
comed by German opinion in general, and look
forward to the whole-hearted cooperation of all
affected Germans in the implementation of the
plan, and to the attainment by joint effort, of the
conmion objective of increased production and an
effective German contribution to the recovery of
Europe as a whole.
U.S. Charges Bulgarian Trials Violate Peace Treaty
After a trial which followed the familiar Iron
Curtain pattern and was predicated on the usual
vague charges and "confessions", severe sentences
have been meted out to a small group of Independ-
ent Socialist deputies led by Kosta Lulchev, who
constituted the last parliamentary opposition to
the Bulgarian Communist Government. The sen-
tences ranged from life imprisonment for one de-
fendant (in absentia) to a minimum of 10 years.
Mr. Lulchev was given 15 years. Accompanying
these prison terms were severe monetary fines.
Prior to the arrests of these men their fate was
foreshadowed by Prime Minister Dimitrov, who
warned them in Parliament on January 12, 1948 :
"If you do not attempt to grow wiser, you will
receive from the people a lesson which you will
remember up to 'St. Peter' ".
In thus terminating the final jDretense of Bul-
garian democracy by eliminating these remaining
elected representatives of the opposition, the Bul-
garian regime has again violated its covenanted
obligation under article 2 of the treaty of peace to
assure its citizens basic fundamental freedoms.
During the trial, the Bulgarian prosecutor en-
deavored to implicate United States official per-
sonnel in Bulgaria in the improper activities
charged against the defendants. The United
States Minister has delivered the following note
to the Bulgarian Foreign Minister in connection
with the prosecutor's assertions :
I refer to accounts of the trial of Kosta Lulchev
and others i^ublished in Otechestven Front, con-
taining statements alleged to have been made in
710
the course of the trial concerning relations of the
defendants with American officials and personnel.
According to those accounts, the prosecution en-
deavored to demonstrate that various conversa-
tions between the defendants and the United States
Political Kepresentative in Bulgaria in 1945 and
1946 constituted treasonable activity. The prose-
cution further alleged subversive involvement with
Bulgarian p)olitical forces on the part of an en-
listed United States soldier.
With regard to conversations between the de-
fendants and the United States Political Eepre-
sentative, the Bulgarian Govermnent is reminded
that Bulgaria was at that time under an Armistice
regime, and when requested, free discussions of
Bulgarian political affairs with representatives of
the Armistice powers was accordingly incumbent
upon Bulgarians. It may be added that no dis-
cussions have taken place between United States
officials and Bulgarian nationals during the Armis-
tice period or subsequently which could be regarded
as improper then or following the conclusion of
peace. As for the prosecution allegation regard-
ing an American enlisted soldier, the absurdity of
the charge should have been apparent. The in-
dividual was a mess sergeant whose duties com-
prised the procurement of food for members of
the Allied Control Commission.
The United States Government, in registering
its objection to these preposterous assertions of
the public prosecutor, takes exception to this irre-
sponsible conduct of a Bulgarian official toward
the United States.
Department of State Bulletin
Contribution of Western European Countries to Economic Recovery
BY WILLARD L. THORP'
Assistant Secretary for Economic Affairs
Three years ago, in 1945, your nation and mine
emerged from one of the greatest cataclysms of his-
tory. The peoples of our countries, of all the
Allies, groped from the darkness of war to the
light of peace expecting something changed, some-
thing new.
The statesmen who were preparing the peace
were not unmindful of this deep-rooted sentiment
among all peoples who stood in the battle lines.
They planned the postwar period with a thorough-
ness which probably has never been equalled before
in history. For example, well before the war's
end tlie concej^t of the United Nations be^an to
take form, with a Charter designed to provide ma-
chinery for the preservation of the peace. The
process of postwar planning did not stop there.
Unkra was blueprinted for the immediate emer-
gency period. The International Bank for Kecon-
struction and Development was mapped out to pro-
vide the capital for long-range recovery. The In-
ternational Monetary Fund and the International
Trade Organization were to guide and guard eco-
nomic health. Other organizations were conceived
to develop international cooperation in specialized
fields, such as the Food and Agriculture Organiza-
tion, the World Health Organization, the United
Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Or-
ganization and the like. In a word, a careful
groundwork was laid and it was hoped that these
new international instruments would serve as a
solid foimdation for the future, that recovery
would not be long delayed, and that the peace
would promise well.
Unfortunately, the difficulties in the way of eco-
nomic recovery, which is the true basis of social
and ultimately of political security, were under-
estimated. The destruction was greater than the
human mind had been able to grrsp. The disloca-
tion was more severe. Markets were disrupted;
noi-mal trade channels were blocked ; the custom-
ary patterns of trade balance and the means of
foreign payment for countries whose economic life
had been built on the expectation of international
trade were destroyed.
As time went on, the interdependence of the re-
covery of the countries in the Western area became
increasingly clear. In other words, the recovery
December 5, 7948
of a country depends not alone on what it would
and could do itself ; it depends also on the behavior
of other countries.
I need not tell you in Belgium this. You were
the first to take bold steps towards economic recov-
ery, and you were in the forefront of those cutting
with a surgeon's knife the impediments to eco-
nomic recovery. You moved forward towards
economic health well ahead of many other coun-
tries, and the limiting factor on your accomplish-
ment in substantial part has come from without
rather than from within. In a word, your inter-
national economic relationships failed to keep pace
with your domestic development, and you suffered
the consequences. Recovery must be a joint
product.
Until about a year ago, the United States dealt
with the problem of assistance for recovery, nation
by nation. There were Unrra, with 70 jDercent
of the cost borne by the United States, and two
subsequent fully U.S.-financed assistance pro-
grams, whose operations were based on country
allocations. There were loans by the United
States Export-Import Bank on a case-by-case
basis, as were the loans by the International Bank.
These separate and individual efforts just did not
seem to be fully effective, and the American Con-
gress became less and less satisfied with the piece-
meal approach to the problem while, concomi-
tantly, in Eui-ope the need for an interdependence
of planning became more and more clear. From
this thinking on both sides of the ocean the Euro-
pean Recovei*y Program was born.
The European Recovery Program is a great
experiment in economic cooperation, and I am sure
that all of us who are involved can be very proud
of it as a demonstration of the finest kind of con-
structive international undertaking. For the
United States, it is, to put it very simply, a matter
of giving you assistance so that you can help and
strengthen yourselves. Unfortunately, although
you and men of good will throughout Western
' An address made before the Rotary Club in Brussels
on Nov. 23, 1948, and released to the press by the U.S.
Delegation to the third regular session of the General
Assembly on the same date. Mr. Thorp is Alternate Dele-
gate of the United States to the General Assembly.
711
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Europe understand our purposes, there are coun-
tries and political groups which have deliberately
misconstrued our aims and are exerting their ut-
most to sap and sabotage the European Kecovery
Program and to poison with vicious lies and violent
charges the atmosphere in which it must accom-
plish its creative effort. Since they chose, or were
directed, not to join in the great effort, they con-
tinually appear to be under a strange compulsion
to justify that decision. To those who knew the
facts, these interpretations of the Erp by its
enemies are clearly in the realm of fiction.
I should like to emphasize the fact that the
European Recovery Program is European. I
mean to say that although the original initiative
was American, the major part has been played, is
being jjlayed, and will be played by the jDartici-
pating European governments. Over a year ago,
the representatives of the 16 European govern-
ments blocked out the fundamental analysis which
underlies the program. They next signed an
agreement defining their joint purposes. They
then set up the Oeec, the Organization for Euro-
pean Economic Co-operation — which is the opera-
tive organ in this field — of which the United States
is not even a member. Through this organiza-
tion the 16 undertake a major part of and all the
initial planning. The United States enters the
picture largely to match the requirements as de-
veloped by the European governments with the
availabilities in the United States and from other
sources. In short, the United States services a
Euroi^ean program. It is the greatest of injus-
tices to the European countries Siemselves to pic-
ture Erp as an American concept — I shall not
insult you by picking up the propaganda word
"plot"- — when it is Europeans who have done so
much to found and imjilement and vitalize the
project.
Now, the peoples of what for the present we
must limit to Western Eui'ope have characteristics
and institutions and traditions in common with
the people of the United States. They have pro-
tective procedures with regard to the development
of their public policies which assure the maximum
of freedom and independence. Thus, those public
policies are arrived at openly. There is public
discussion of current issues. There is a free press.
Multiple political parties represent the various
shadings of opinion. There are free elections,
which )nake it essential for the Government hold-
ing power in trust for the citizens to be responsive
to their will if it wishes to survive. In short, in
Western Europe as in the United States there is an
open, untraimneled, democratic society which both
Americans and Eurojieans wish to preserve as the
principal source of their strength and the surest
armor against interference and domination from
the outside. I mention this because it has been
suggested that your governments, under the pres-
712
.sure of economic necessity, have transferred great
areas of authority and control over your affairs to
the United States. Not only has no government
in Western Europe done any such thing, but from
our side, we in the United States wish the most
independent and strong kind of Europe and one
which will withstand all pressure from without,
preserving for its children that kind of good
society in which alone free men can ho^De to
survive.
Anyone who takes the trouble to read the bi-
lateral agreements setting up the European Re-
covery Program will speedily recognize that the
basic commitments by the European countries are
those which they had already taken among them-
selves in their own organization — to use their best
efforts to achieve recovery, and their obligations to
the United States are primarily directed to pro-
viding assurance that the American assistance will m
be used efficiently and effectively for tlie same pur- "
pose. These agreements are written against the
knowledge that the participating countries of
Western Europe are as jealous as we are in the
United States of their rights and freedoms and
open in their procedures. It is our most earnest
hope that they, as we, will so remain.
Indeed the European Recovery Program clearly
has as its objective not to increase European de-
pendence on the United States but to reduce that
dependence. We are living in a world of shortages.
There are shortages everywhere, but fortunately
American productive machinery which escaped
war's destruction is able to operate at a high level.
It produces goods which are needed in Europe and
which, under the European Recovery Progi'am, are
sent to Europe even though there is no prospect of
payment. It is obvious that this cannot continue
indefinitely. Therefore, the object of this mission
must be not to set up an American monopoly or a
market but to raise European production and ad-
just trade to the point where participating coun-
tries can be self-supporting once more ancl where
any so-called dependence on other areas will
disappear.
I am certain that you know as well as we do in
the United States that one of the most earnest
prayers in the wishful thinking of those who want
the Erp to fail is that our country will run into
another economic crisis and that the workers of
the United States will be without employment with
destructive social consequences. Day after day
this theme has pervaded the propaganda of those
who wish us ill.
Strange to say, however, their prophesies are not
fulfilled, and in order to justify their failure as
social and economic Cassandras they have launched
the comforting thought — to them — that the United
States is sending tremendous shipments of goods
to Europe in order to ward off a crisis. Let me
Department of State Bulletin
say to you Ihat even if all shipments of floods were
to stoj), there would be little more than a i-eadjust-
ment in our economy and certainly no crisis. The
shipments to Europe, althouo;h heavj^ are still onlj^
a small percentage of our total pi-oduction, and we
still have shortages in the United States. There
are tremendous demands upon our industry from
our domestic economy and many ai-eas of the
world other than Europe remain to be served. We
are not seeking markets abroad for surplus goods.
We have no need to expand our trade to maintain
our economy and certainly not on a grant basis.
Moreover — in form as well as volume — Euro-
peans are directing their recovery, and we are
happy to help them to this end too. As you know,
the programing is done by each European coun-
try in the first instance itself and then through the
Oeec with other European countries, and finally
with the United States. This applies to agricul-
ture as well as industry. The United States is
wholl}- sympathetic with the European wish to
place agriculture at the top of all needs and will, so
far as possible, contribute to the expansion of agri-
culture in all European countries. In the indus-
trial field European governments felt that they
could provide a large part of their requirements
and this decision is respected by us.
In a word, it is the ardent wish of all Americans
that agriculture, industry, and trade in Europe
will be stimulated by our aid and will expand
to the outside limits of possibilities in present
conditions.
The principles which underlie the European Re-
covery Program are basic princijjles for economic
progress anywhere in the world. No one can deny
that improved standards of living and steady and
secure employment rest upon increased production,
financial stability, and the expansion of trade.
Xor can one deny that the eH'orts of many countries
working cooperatively can achieve much more than
the same amount of energy exjjended separately
in countries acting in isolation.
Your country and my country have been leaders
in the effort to see that these economic objectives
be steadily pursued not merely in the European
Recovery Progi'am, but in the broader operations
of the United Nations.
I am sure that this is perfectly clear to men
as well informed in economic matters as you must
be, and as I have found your compatriots to be in
the last several years as 1 have worked with them
on many economic problems. I need only mention
with a sense of real appreciation the leadership
which M. Camille Gutt has given to the Interna-
tional Monetary Fund and the part which your
representatives played in developing the Havana
Charter with its program for trade expansion and
the establishment of the International Trade Or-
ganization. In fact, every day in the various
December 5, 7 948
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
phases of the economic program under the United
Nations I sit down with the delegates and experts
of Belgium and find that we can always work hap-
pily and constructively together.
My specialty is the economic phase of our inter-
national responsibility, and as a consequence my
special concern is with economic recovery and the
progress towards constantly higher standards of
living. I have therefore dwelt on the economic
aspects of the postwar and the mai'ch to economic
unity. It cannot be overlooked, however, that
there are clear relationships between economic
health and political stability. They are closely in-
terrelated and while we may say that "Man cannot
live by bread alone", neither can he live without it.
Promises and panaceas seem brightest to the hun-
gry and dissatisfied and dispossessed. Calm heads
do not usually go with empty stomachs. Evolu-
tion instead of revolution takes place only when
the economic atmosphere is one of hope, not fear.
The winning of the great freedoms — freedom in
economic terms, freedom in political terms, free-
dom from war and threat of war — is the para-
mount problem of our time. Some of us, therefore,
are working to promote economic security ; others
in a parallel operation are putting together the
sticks and stones of political security.
I am happy to record that in the last months
there has been a real progress in the direction of
political as well as economic security. There is a
definite trend towards real accomplishment, in
deeds, not only words. Benelux is a growing real-
ity. Under the Brussels pact, to which our Senate
has given a sympathetic accolade, practical steps
have been taken to integrate security measures
through a unified AVestern command. Conversa-
tions are now taking place which will have the
effect of enlarging the scojie of these measures to
the whole Atlantic area. Unity is coming in the
Western world, in short, and the kind of unity that
is the peoples' due. Your distinguished statesman,
Foreign Minister Spaak, has been one of the mov-
ing spirits in this accomplishment and it has been
a privilege to follow the course at close range of
his eminent leadership.
There is, in short, a blueprint today with eco-
nomic aspects and with political aspects and even
with military aspects, from which we can construct
a stronger West. Day by day the graph on this
bluej)rint mounts and achievement is recorded.
The contribution of the United States to this ac-
comiilishment is a small part compared to what
Europeans are doing themselves for themselves.
But what the American people give they give with
the fullest measure of good will and with the sin-
cerest hope that the darkest days of fear and
insecurity will soon be behind and that ahead will
lie a future bright with the promise of prosperity
and the assurance of enduring peace.
713
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Entry Bnto Force o* International Whaling
Convention Proclaimed
[Released to the press November 26]
The international convention for the regulation
of whaling, which was signed at Washington on
December 2, 1946, was proclaimed by the President
on November 19, 1948. The President's procla-
mation is effective from November 10, on which
date the Netherlands Government deposited with
the Department its instrument of ratification of
the convention. Since instruments of ratification
had been previously deposited by the United
States, Australia, Norway, the Soviet Union, the
Union of South Africa, and the United Kingdom,
this action by the Netherlands was the last step
required to bring the convention into force be-
tween those Governments. In addition, Iceland,
which had not signed the convention, has given to
the Department notification of its adherence to the
terms of the convention, and Panama has informed
the Department of its intention to apply the con-
vention provisionally pending definitive approval
in accordance with its constitutional requirements.
These notifications became effective on November
10, 1948, the day oh which the convention entered
into force. . r. •
Advice and consent to the ratification of the
convention on behalf of the United States was
given by the Senate on July 2, 1947.
The principal objective of the convention is to
provide long-range regulation for the whale fish-
eries in order to secure proper and effective con-
servation of whale stocks, to prevent further de-
pletion of certain species of whales which have for
some time been subject to overfishing, and to pro-
mote the orderly development of the whale fishery
with due regard to all pertinent conservation, eco-
nomic, and nutritional considerations. In order
to carry out its purposes and objectives, the con-
vention provides for the establishment of an Inter-
national Whaling Commission composed of one
member from each contracting government. The
Commission is empowered to undertake study and
investigation of the present and future problems of
the whale fishery and, within strictly defined lim-
its, to amend the schedule which is amiexed to the
convention and which contains specific regulations
upon such matters as protected species, open and
closed seasons, open and closed waters, and size
limits. It is anticipated that the first meeting of
the Commission will be held at London in the near
future.
Whaling operations during the forthcoming
Antarctic season, scheduled to open on December
15, 1948, will be governed by the provisions of the
schedule as they now stand, since any new regula-
tions which may be adopted by the Commission
may not become effective prior to July 1, 1949.
Discussions With Ireland on Double Taxation
The Department of State amiounced November
23 that discussions will be opened at an early date
between American and Irish technical experts
looking to the conclusion of treaties between the
two Governments for the avoidance of double tax-
ation and for administrative cooperation in pre-
vention of tax evasion with respect to income taxes
and to taxes on estates of deceased persons.
If the discussions are successful and a basis for
agreement is found, they will result in the prepara-
tion of draft treaties, which will be submitted by
the negotiators to their respective Governments
for consideration with a view to signing.
In preparation for the discussions, the Ameri-
can Delegation will welcome conferences with in-
terested parties or statements and suggestions from
them concerning problems in tax relations with
Ireland. Conmiunications in this connection
should be addressed to Eldon P. King, Special
Deputy Commissioner of Internal Kevenue, Bu- ^
reau of Internal Eevenue, Washington 25, D. C.
J
THE FOREIGN SERVICE
U.S. and Ceylon Exchange Diplomatic
Representatives
Ceylon Ambassador Presents Credentials^
[Released to the press November 24]
The presentation of credentials to President
Truman on November 24 by George C. S. Corea,
first Ambassador of Ceylon to the United States,
gives full effect to the agreement to exchange dip-
lomatic representatives entered into by the United
States and Ceylon shortly after the latter gained
fully self-governing status early this year. The
first American Ambassador to Ceylon, Felix Cole,
presented his letters of credence to Sir Henry
Monck-Mason Moore, the Governor General of
Ceylon, on August 3 this year. It is a source of
satisfaction to this country to have thus inau-
gurated the closer relationship which accompanies
this exchange of ambassadors.
Ambassador Corea has had a wide and extended
career in law, pohtics, and international affairs.
He has held cabinet posts in Ceylon and was Cey-
lon's High Commissioner to the United Kingdom
from 1946 until his present appointment to the
United States.
' For texts of the Ambassador's remarks and the Presi-
dent's reply, see Department of State press release 944 ot
Nov. 24, 1948.
714
Department of Slate Bulletin
U. K. Draft Resolution — Continued from page 6S9
tine; iiiid infitriicts the Conciliation Coiumission to report
ininietiiately to tlie Security Council for appropriate action
liy that organ any attempt by any party to impede such
access ;
9. Recommends to the Security Council that after the
frontiers have been established in accordance with this
resolution tlie Security Council considers, in conformity
with the Charter, any attempt to alter these frontiers by
force as a threat to the peace, breach of the peace, or act
of aggression ;
10. Endomci the principle stated in Part I, section V,
paragraph 7 of the llediator's reiiort and resolves that the
Arab refugees should be permitted to return to their
homes at the earliest possible date and that adequate
compensation should be paid for the property of those
choosing not to return and for property which has been
lost as a result of pillage, confiscation or of destruction ;
and instriiets the Conciliation Commission to facilitate the
repatriation, resettlement, and economic and social re-
habilitation of the Arab refugees and the payment of
compensation, and to enter into contact with the Director
of United Nations Relief for Palestine Refugees ;
11. Authorises the Conciliation Commission to appoint
such subsidiary bodies and to employ such technical
experts, acting under its authority, as it may find neces-
sary to the effective discharge of its functions and re-
sponsibilities under this resolution ;
12. Inst)-uvts the Conciliation Commission to render
progress reports periodically to the Secretary -General for
transmission to the Security Council and to Members of
the United Nations;
1.3. Calls upon all Governments and authorities con-
cerned to co-operate with the Conciliation Commission
and to take all possible steps to assist in the implemen-
tation of this resolution ;
14. Re(iuests the Secretary-General to provide the neces-
sary staff and facilities and to make appropriate arrange-
ments to provide the necessary funds required in carrying
out the terms of this resolution.
Consulate at Suva To Be Closed
[Released to the press November 26]
The United States Consulate at Suva, in the Fiji
Islands, is to be closed December 31, 1948. accord-
ing to an annotmcement by the Foreign Service.
The closing has been ordered primarily for ad-
ministrative reasons, as the amount of business
done there on behalf of Americans in recent times
does not justify the Consulate's continuation dur-
ing a periotl of strict economy. The work of the
office will henceforth be performed by periodically
sending to visit Suva a Foreign Service officer fa-
miliar with conditions in the South Pacific Islands.
Freedom of the Road — Continued from page 702
(a) The road services of countries and occupa-
tion zones granting such facilities shall enjoy equal
privileges in the beneficiary countries;
( b ) The carriers shall respect existing laws and
regulations of a technical or administrative char-
acter now in force.
By the end of May 1948, the Governments of Lux-
embourg and Norway had adhered to the agree-
ments for international passenger transport by
road and international tourist traffic by road.
At the fourth session in May, 1948, the invitation
was renewed for other participating governments
December 5, 1948
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
to accede to the agreements on lifting of restric-
tions on freedom of the road. As a further step to-
ward the desired objective, the governments were
in the process of providing information on their
laws and regulations and agreements in force so
that the Committee would be able to make a study
of the difficulties with which international road
transport is confronted and thereby facilitate a
better approach to the problem.
The fifth session convened October 5, 1948, at
Geneva, Adherences to a one-year extension, com-
mencing January 1, 1949, on freedom of road
agreements to which they are now signatories, were
made by the Governments of Austria, Belgium,
Czechoslovakia, Denmark, France, Italv, Liixem-
bourg, the Netherlands, Norway, Sweden, Switzer-
land, the United Kingdom, France, and the three
zones of Western Germany.
This session recommended that those govern-
ments not yet adhering to the agreement on free-
dom of transport of goods other than in transit
should reconsider their position in order that they
might be able to take favorable action before the
sixth session, in March 1949. In regard to the
international tourist-traffic agreement the Repre-
sentative of Italy reported that a favorable de-
cision from his Government would be received
within a short time. Other accomplishments of
the Working Party toward the ultimate goal of
freedom of the road can be evidenced by approval
of reciprocal annulment of customs duties on gaso-
line carried by commercial and tourist vehicles
throughout Europe and the agreement on the part
of Sweden to liberalize restrictive national laws
covering the movement of commercial vehicles.
The Ruhr — Continued from page 703
ures which maj' need to be taken to insure security
against possible future German aggression. I
stated to Dr. Schuman that this Government was
ready now to welcome French participation in the
control groups established over coal and steel with-
out waiting for the final fusion arrangements. But
the principal consideration is that the final deter-
mination of the security problem of Europe in
relation to the future of the Euhr must await the
terms of the peace treaty which will be conclusive
in the matter.
I might add one more thought to this matter,
which is that it must be very hard for our public
to reach a full understanding of this complicated
problem not only because it is complicated but also
because in the political strife now occurring in
France many things are said — or claimed — to have
a definite political purpose quite apart from the
future of the Ruhr. The present Government has
this additional difficulty to deal with.
' For texts of the Ambassador's remarks and the Presi-
dent's reply, see Department of State press release 93S of
Nov. 23, 1948.
715
I
The United Nations and
Specialized Agencies Page
U.S. Amendments to U.K. Resolution on
Palestine:
Statement by Philip C. Jessup in Committee
1 687
Text of U.K. Draft Resolution 689
Discussion of Palestine Question in the Security
Council: Resolution Establishing an Ar-
mistice 692
Discussion of the Membership Problem. State-
ment by Benjamin V. Cohen in Ad Hoc Po-
litical Committee 693
Resolution on Reduction by One Third of Ar-
maments and Armed Forces 696
Resolutions of the United Nations Special
Committee on the Balkans:
Appointing Conciliators To Meet With Al-
bania, Yugoslavia, Bulgaria, and Greece . 696
Continuing Unscob 697
The U.S. in the U.N 697
Meeting of Fourth Session of the Food and Agri-
culture Organization. Address by Presi-
dent Truman 700
Mexican Minister of Foreign Relations Elected
Director General of Unesco 702
Occupation Matters
U.S., France, and the U.K. Discuss Controls
for Inspecting German Industry in the
Ruhr. Statement by Secretary Marshall . 703
Reorganization of German Coal and Iron and
Steel Industries: Military Government —
Germany,U.S.ZoneofControlLawNo.75 . . 704
Outhne of Decisions 708
Treaty Information
Freedom of the Road : Actions on Road Agreements . 702
U. S. Charges Bulgarian Trials Violate Peace Treaty . 710
Entry Into Force of International Whaling Con-
vention Proclaimed 714
Discussions With Ireland on Double Taxation . 714
Foreign Aid and Reconstruction
Contribution of Western European Countries to
Economic Recovery. Address by Willard
L. Thorp 711
Economic Affairs
U.S. Delegations to International Meetings:
First Pan American Congress of Pharmacy. 701
Fourth Session of the Economic Commission for
Asia and the Far East 701
Calendar of international Meetings . . . 699
The Foreign Service
U.S. and Ceylon Exchange Diplomatic Repre-
sentatives 714
Consulate at Suva To Be Closec 715
U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1948
5-^3
^Ae/ z^eha^tmenl/ m t/taie^
PROPOSAL TO ESTABLISH COMMITTEE TO STUDY
BERLIN CURRENCY PROBLEM 719
DISCUSSION OF ISRAELI APPLICATION TO U.N. FOR
MEMBERSHIP • Statement by Philip C. Jessup . . 723
GERIVIAN AND AUSTRIAN IMMIGRATION OPENED
TO THE UTNITED STATES • An Article 735
For complete contents see back cover
Vol. XIX, No. 493
December 12, 1948
U. S. SUPtKlMti,>>u.i Or UUtU(«U<l!.
JAN 10 1949
bulletin
Vol. XIX, No. 493 • Publication 3365
December 12, 1948
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office
Washington 26. D.C.
Pkice;
62 issues, domestic $6, foreign $7.26
Single copy, 16 cents
Published with the approval of the
Director of the Bureau of the Budget
Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Depaetmknt
OF State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.
The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
natioTuil affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.
Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.
j
Proposal To Establish Committee To Study Berlin Currency Problem
TEXT OF PROPOSAL OF PRESIDENT OF THE SECURITY COUNCIL
[Released to the press December 2]
The President of tlie Security Council, in the
exercise of his powers, lias decided :
(1) To invite the Governments of Belgium,
Canada, China, Colombia, and Syria, each to nom-
inate a financial or economic expert, who, to-
gether with an expert nominated by the Govern-
ment of Argentina, shall meet in Paris, and whose
task shall be to consider and make recommendation
to the President of the Security Council upon the
most equitable conditions, taking into account the
directive of August 30, 19-48, as well as information
concerning events subsequent thereto, for the
agreement among the occupying powers relating
to introduction, circulation and continued use of
a single currency for Berlin under adequate four-
power supervision and import and export regu-
lations in connection with outside trade of Berlin.
(2) To invite the Secretary General to nomi-
nate a financial or economic expert to work with
the committee mentioned in paragraph one above ;
and to coopei'ate fully witli the committee and
supply in addition all information and all the fa-
cilities and statf that the said committee may re-
quire.
(3) The committee is fully empowered to con-
sult with the economic or financial experts repre-
senting each of the four occupying powers in Ber-
lin, and also, if they deem it convenient, with
other economic or financial experts.
(4) This study must be definitely finished
within thirty days as from the date of this reso-
lution. How must the experts carry out its task?
The Commission will fix its plan of work and
immediately after will get in contact with the
iei)resentatives, specialists in economy assigned
by tlie governments of the United States, Great
Britain, France and the U.S.S.R. in order to end
their task within the period established in para-
graph four of the resolution.
AVhich items will the technicians cover in their
studies?
The technicians appointed, acting jointly in
all circumstances. Mill try to arrange with the par-
ties in conflict the adequate terms to enforce the
directives of August 30, 1948, in the matter re-
lated with the introduction in Berlin of the So-
viet mark as well as the control on emission, sup-
ply and circulation of the sole currency, the ade-
quate rules to regulate banking and credit facili-
ties and the exterior trade of Berlin, and the con-
sideration of other subsequent facts which could
bring difficulty to the implementation of the draft
agreements or recommendations.
How will the recommendations submitted to
tlie President of the Security Council be adopted?
The recommendations submitted to the Presi-
dent of the Security Council will be adopted by
the technicians repre.senting the six countries ap-
pearing in paragraph one of the previous reso-
lution, which should meet with the conformity
of the technicians of the United States, Great
Britain, France and the U.S.S.E.
In case of not reaching agreement among the
parties the commission of technicians will submit
to the President of the Security Council a de-
tailed report of the performances carried out,
the studies made, the propositions submitted,
and the causes that on every one of the items pre-
vented from reaching the corresponding agree-
ments.
TEXT OF THREE-POWER REPLY
[Released to the press December 2]
Th-e following communication was handed on
hehaJf of the Governments of the United States of
America, France, and the United Kingdom on
November 30 to Juan Atilio Bramuglia, President
of the Security Council
The Representatives of the United States of
America, France and the United Kingdom wel-
Decembet 12, 1948
come the proposal of the President of the Security
Council to establish a Committee of Neutral Ex-
perts to study the Berlin currency and trade
problems.
In welcoming the proposal to establish the Com-
mittee of Neutral Experts, the three representa-
tives desire to make it clear that they must reserve
entirely the position of their governments as re-
719
THE UN/TED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
gaids any resolution which maj- subsequently be
submitted to the Security Council after the Com-
mittee have reported. Thej' would require to
consider any such resolution in the light of the
Committee's report and of the general circum-
stances prevailing at that time.
The three western powers accepted the proposed
Security Council resolution of October 25 and have
reiterated their willingness to abide by its princi-
ples; the Soviet Union has rejected it. The
Soviet Union during the period since October 25
has consistently and continuously resorted to fur-
ther measures directed against the city adminis-
tration which have brought about an increasing
split in the city.
Tlie three western powers cannot agree that they
should be bound to submit to all Soviet measures
which add to and intensify the Soviet blockade or
which interfere with the city administration, while
the Soviet remains wholly uncommitted to any
restraint. The three governments therefore re-
peat the reservation of their right, declared to the
Security Council when the Berlin question was
submitted to that body "to take such measures as
may be necessary to maintain in these circum-
stances their position in Berlin'' i^ending the out-
come of the further efforts of the President of the
Security Council with which efforts France, the
United Kingdom and the United States have co-
operated and will continue to cooperate.
TRIPARTITE COMMUNIQUE TO COMMITTEE OF EXPERTS'
In the reply recently presented by the three
Western powers to the President of the Security
Council's questions on the Berlin currency problem,
it was pointed out that it would inevitably be diffi-
cult in practice to exercise four-power conti'ol of
curi-ency in a city in which the previous unified
administration under four-power control was not
fully functioning at present and was indeed being
rapidly diminished. In disregard of the expressed
wish of the President of the Security Council that
any steps should be avoided, M'hich would lead to a
complication of the Berlin crisis, developments
instigated by the Soviet command in Germany
have now still further detracted from the unified
character of the city administration.
On the afternoon of 30 November the Soviet au-
thorities countenanced, and indeed encouraged a
series of events in their sector, which have com-
pleted the exclusion of the legal city administra-
tion from its proper seat in the Soviet sector and
from the exercise of its legal authorities in the
areas of Berlin which are under Soviet occupation.
A carefully stage-managed meeting of Commu-
nists and Communist front organizations (includ-
ing a handful of former members from the other
legal Berlin political parties) brought into being
a body for which no legal basis exists, but which
claims to be the provisional government for the
entire City of Berlin.
Although this illegal body will be excluded from
usurping any functions of the legal city govern-
ment as far as the Western sectors of Berlin are
concerned, its existence in the Soviet sector will
' Delivered on Dec. 5. 1948, by tlie Governmeuts of the
United States, the United Kingdom, and France to tlie
Security Council's Committee of Experts on the Berlin
currency problem. Released to the press in Paris on Dec.
6, 1948, and In Washington on Dec. 7, 194S. Printed from
telegraphic text.
720
end all possibility of the legal, unified administra-
tion functioning on a city-wide basis. This is a
development that the Western powers have con-
stantly striven to avoid. It is obvious that the de
facto political division of the city makes the estab-
lishment of a single currency extremely difficult.
The representatives of the Western powers have
assured the President of the Security Council that
they are anxious to provide all possible assistance
in the Council's examination of the Berlin cur-
rency problem. They consider that the experts
who are attempting to work out a plan for the
solution of this problem must take into account the
existing position in Berlin and will find it useful
to be given information on the underlying political
background of the existing division of the city
administration. A chronology of the events which
have taken place since June, 194:8, leading to the
present situation is therefore attached.
[This chronology lists incidents in Berlin since
June M, the details of which have been published.']
The following short historical summary will, it
is hoped, enable it to be more readily understood.
The historical basis and the international agree-
ments setting forth the rights, duties and obliga-
tions of the four occupying powers in Berlin have
been fully stated in the presentation of the Berlin
case to the Security Council and in the White
Papers on the Berlin problem published by the
United States and the United Kingdom Govern-
ments.
In order to establish a democratically elected
government to succeed the administration, which
had been appointed by the Soviet authorities at
the time of their sole occupancy of the city, a
temporary constitution under which the city gov-
ernment was to be returned to elected German of-
ficials was approved by the Allied Coordinating
Conmiittee on 2 August 19-46 and issued by the
Deparfmenf of Sfafe BulleHn
Koiuniamlatiira on l:? August 19-16 to become
effective in October 1946.
The four occupyinjar powers aji;rec(l that elections
for tlie City Assembly under the approved tem-
porar}' constitution should be held in early Octo-
ber, 1916. In these elections the Socialist Unity
part}' (the Soviet-sponsored Communist party)
was decisively defeated, receiving only 19.5 per
cent of the votes.
TheMagistrat (City Council) appointed by the
newly elected Assembly was charged, under the
general control of the Allied Kommandatura, with
the duty of governing the city, and for this purpose
fourteen executive departments were formed. Ger-
man City Councillors, drawn from all the parties
represented in the City Assembly, but with a ma-
jority from the Social Democratic party, were ap-
2)ointed as heads of these departments.
The relationship of the depai'tments of the
Magistrat and of the Magistrat itself to the Allied
Kommandatura was com{)licated. Since unani-
mous apjn-oval of the Allied Kommandatura
was required for any major action taken by the
Magistrat. the Soviet authorities by withholding
their consent could an.d did hamper the conduct
of the city's affairs.
For example, in June, 1917, they opposed the
appointment by the City Assembly and the Magis-
trat of Herr Reuter as Mayor of Berlin. Renter
was a Social Democrat with an outstanding record
as an administrator against whom no serious case
was ever made by the Soviet authorities. Interfer-
ence such as this had an inci'easingly serious effect
tipon the administration of the city and indeed
progressively tended to split it in two.
Soviet methods were not always the same. In
cases where a dejiartment head of the city govern-
ment was a member of the Socialist Unity party,
they took the form of encouraging him to disre-
gard the wishes and instructions of the Magistrat.
whose servant he was. and to issue orders nomi-
nally applicable to the whole city which were ac-
ceptable neither to the Magistrat nor to the West-
ern powers but only to the Soviet authorities. In
self-defense, in such cases, either the Magistrat had
to suspend the head of the department for defying
their orders or the Western powers had to take
measures limiting the authority of the department
in the Western sectors.
A tj'pical example of such Soviet tactics is the
Qase of Berlin's former Police President Paul
Markgi'af, a member of the Socialist Unity party
who consistently pursued a policy contrary to the
wishes of the Magistrat. The Magistrat therefore
sought to dismiss him in March, 1948, subject to
the approval of the Kommandatura. This was
never obtained because on the very day on which
this matter was to be discussed the Soviet element
refused to participate any longer in its activities.
The Magistrat then took the only course open to
December 12, 7948
THB UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
it under the circumstances and suspended Mark-
graf, an act not requiring Kommandatura ap-
pioval. and appointed in his stead as acting Police
President, Dr. Stunnn. This appointment was
subsequently confirmed by the three Western com-
mandants. The Soviet commandant in Berlin re-
fused to recognize the suspension and demanded
Dr. Stumm's dismissal.
]\Iarkgraf continued to occupy the police offices
in the Soviet sector and Dr. Stumm was forced to
establish his headquarters in the Western sectors
of Berlin. Hence, since July, 1948, there have
been two police forces operating in Berlin, the one
in the Soviet sector having no legal basis whatever
and able to operate there only because of the sup-
port of the Soviet authorities.
In other cases where the head of the department
concerned was a member of one of the non-Com-
munist i^arties, intervention by the Soviet author-
ities was even more direct. In such cases, the
Soviet military administration, assuming a power
which it did not have, took unilateral action and
either dismissed the official concerned (an illegal
action whose practical effect was to remove the
Soviet sector from his jurisdiction) or set up a
rival office within his department whose authority
was exclusively recognized in the Soviet sector.
In addition, the Soviet authorities in some cases
went so far as to arrest non-Communist German
officials.
For example, in August, 1948, the Soviet Mili-
tary Administration unilaterally ordered the dis-
missal of the director of the Central Coal Organi-
zation of the Magistrat's Department of Economy.
The Magistrat refused to recognize this Soviet
order, pointing out that such orders were only
valid if approved and duly transmitted by the
four-power Kommandatura. The Soviet Military
Administration thereupon promptly arrested the
director, whose office was located in the Soviet sec-
tor, and appointed its own designee as his successor.
Eailier, on July 26, 1948, the Magistrat had been
ordered by the Soviet authorities to establish a
separate section in the Central Food Office to carry
out the Soviet offer of food rations to all inhabi-
tants of Berlin provided that they registered with
shops in the Soviet sector. The following day
the Soviet authorities informed the personnel of
the Central Food Office that they had one hour in
which to decide whether to work with them on the
Soviet program. The result was a division in
the food office in which Soviet sector food distri-
bution was controlled by the Soviet Military Ad-
ministration while the Magistrat's Central Food
Office continued to have jurisdiction over food dis-
tribution in the Western sectors.
The Soviet authorities also introduced other
measures dividing the Soviet sector from the West-
ern sectors in connection with the blockade of Ber-
lin ; and the City Assembly was obliged long before
721
THE l/N/rCO NATIONS AND SPBCIALIZBD AGENCIES
the events of 30 November to move its headquai'-
ters to the Western sectors because of the Soviet
failure to provide protection against mob demon-
strations organized by tlie Socialist Unity party.
Many of the departments of the Magistrat were
likewise compelled to move to the Western sectors.
The above are examples of Soviet actions ex-
tended over a period of many months to bring
about a piecemeal (and finally a total) division of
the city by constant interference in the normal
processes of the unified German city adminis-
tration. The Western powers, on the other hand,
have constantly maintained a policy of non-inter-
ference with the legitimate and quadripartitely
authorized functioning of the city government. It
has been their conviction that interference is un-
fortunate because (a) it destroys the unity upon
which the constitutional administration of the
city of Berlin depends, and (b) believing as they
do in the basic importance of the role of law in
democratic life, they cannot countenance the sys-
tematic and arbitrary actions of the Soviet Mili-
tary Administration to set aside laws adopted by
by the peoj^le and approved by quadripartite
agreement.
A case in point is the city elections which must
take place during 1948 as pi'ovided by the tem-
porary constitution approved by all four occupy-
ing powers under the terms of which the city
administration has been operating since 1946. Al-
though the Soviet authorities professed agreement
as to the desirability of free democratic elections
throughout Berlin, the Soviet commandant stipu-
lated conditions precedent to the holding of an
election which were known to be unacceptable to
the city assembly.
Tlie purpose of these conditions was clearly re-
vealed when, following their rejection by the City
Assembly, the Soviet authorities forbade the hold-
ing of the elections in the Soviet sector. The
Western Allies, on the contrary, regard the elec-
tions as a purely German matter and as such they
will take place in the Western sectors on December
5, the date arranged by the proper German au-
thorities.
The Soviet authorities have refused to recognize
the validity of the elections on December 5 and
instead have proceeded since November 30 as pre-
viously described to the establishment in the Soviet
sector of an unconstitutional body with no claim
whatever to represent the people of the city of
Berlin or even of the Soviet sector. These de-
velopments pose new and grave problems for the
solution of Berlin's currency difficulties.
These new problems have arisen because of in-
terference on the part of Soviet authorities with
the normal workings of the Berlin constitution;
they could even now be set aside if the Soviet
authorities were to disown the unconstitutional
body created in the Soviet sector on November 30,
1948, and in conformity with the constitution per-
mit elections to be held on a citv-wide basis.
Resolutions on the Special Committee on the Balkans ^
Conventions and Refugees
B. The General Assembly
Recommends that Greece, on the one hand, and
Bulgaria and Albania, on the other, establish dip-
lomatic relations with each other, tlie absence of
which is harmful to the relations between these
countries ;
Recommends the Governments of Greece, Al-
bania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia to renew the pre-
viously operative conventions for the settlement
of frontier questions or to conclude new ones, and
also to settle the question of refugees in the spirit
of mutual understanding and the establishment of
good neighbour relations ;
Furthermore recommends the Governments of
Greece, Albania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia to in-
form the Secretary-General of the United Nations
at the end of six months, for communication to
'Contained in U.N. tioc. A/728, Nov. 18, 1948, and
A/728/Corr.l, Nov. 19, 1948. Parts B and C of the resolu-
tion were adopted by the General Assembly on Nov. 27,
1948. For the text of Part A, see the Bulletin of Dec. 5,
1948, p. 697, and Nov. 21, 1948, p. 635.
722
Member States of the United Nations, of the ful-
filment of the above-mentioned recommendations.
Greek Children
C. The General Assembly
Recommends the return to Greece of Greek chil-
dren at present away from their homes when the
children, their father or mother or, in his or her
absence, their closest relative, express a wish to
that effect ;
Invites all the Members of the United Nations
and other States on whose territory these children
are to be found to take the necessary measures for
implementation of the present reconnnendation ;
Instructs the Secretary-General to request the
International Committee of the Red Cross and the
League of Red Cross and Red Crescent Societies
to organize and ensure liaison with the national
Red Cross organizations of the States concerned
witli a view to empowering the national Red Cross
organizations to adopt measures in the respective
countries for implementing the present recom-
mendation.
Departmenf of Sfate Bulletin
Discussion of Israeli Application for Membership
STATEMENT BY PHILIP C. JESSUP '
Deputy U.S. Representative in the Security Council
Mr. President : I believe that it is quite appro-
priate and useful that j'ou should have called the
Council's attention to the provision of rule 59
which you have just read. This is a statement
of the rule which the Security Council follows
in connection witli matters involving applications
for membership in the United Nations. I should
like to comment also, Mr. President, upon the pro-
visions of rule 60. It is true that under rule 60,
in the normal course of events, it is contemplated
that applications for membership may be received
at any time during the year and that the Security
Council should take action upon such applications
for membership sufficiently in advance of a ses-
sion of the General Assembly to enable its rec-
ommendation to be considered by members of
that l)ody before they meet. However, in the last
paragraph of rule 60, namely, in the fifth para-
graph of rule 60, we read that in special circum-
stances the Security Council may decide to make
a recommendation to the General Assembly con-
cerning an application for membership subsequent
to the expiration of the time limit set forth in the
preceding paragraph. In other words, that they
may deal with applications for membership in
the Council in special circumstances.
It seems to me, Mr. President, that in connec-
tion with the application for membership of the
Provisional Government of Israel the Security
Council is confronted with "special circumstances""
and it is for that reason that I wish to speak upon
this subject even in advance of the normal refer-
ence of this matter to the committee of the Council
in accordance with rule 59 which you have read.
It is well known, Mr. President, that the United
States fully supports and will vote affirmatively on
the application of the state of Israel for member-
ship in the United Nations. It is our hope that
the Security Council will shortly approve this ap-
plication so that the Provisional Government of
Israel can attain favorable action by the General
Assembly and may be admitted as the 59th Member
of the United Nations before the end of the Assem-
bly's present session.
We are all aware, Mr. President, that even while
we are meeting here in the Security Council, the
First Committee of the General Assembly is also
devoting itself to the question of the future situa-
tion of Palestine and that their deliberations are
closely connected with our consideration here of
December 72, 1948
Israel's application for membership. The atti-
tude on the part of my Government in full support
of the admission of the state of Israel in the
United Nations is certainly not a matter which
will cause any surprise to any member of this
Council. Over a year ago the United States gave
its support to the principles of the majority plan
proposed by the United Nations Special Commit-
tee on Palestine. That plan envisaged the crea-
tion of both a Jewish state and an Arab state in
Palestine. We gave our support to the resolution
of November 29, 1947, by which the General As-
sembly recommended a plan for the future gov-
ernment of Palestine involving as one of its ele-
ments the establishment of a Jewish state in part
of Palestine.
Following the proclamation of the independ-
ence of Israel on May 14, 1948, the United States
extended immediate and full recognition to the
state of Israel and recognized the Provisional
Government of Israel as a de facto authority of
the new state. On frequent occasions since that
date American officials, including the President
and the Secretary of State, have affirmed that the
United States looks forward to the admission of
the state of Israel to the United Nations. In the
remarks which I had the honor to make on behalf
of my Delegation in the First Committee of the
General Assembly on November 19th, I invited
the attention of the Committee to the statement
which the Foreign Minister of the Provisional
Government of Israel had made asking for the ad-
mission of Israel to the United Nations, and I then
said on behalf of my Delegation :
"The United States looks forward to the admis-
sion of the state of Israel to the United Nations
and to its active participation in our work. To
this end we hope that the Security Council will be
able, in the near future, to recomanend Israel as a
state duly qualified for membership."
The Charter of the United Nations in article 4
specifies that membership in the United Nations is
open to — and I quote the words of the Charter —
"peace-loving states which accept the obligations
contained in the present Charter and, in the judg-
ment of the Organization, are able and willing to
carry out these obligations". This formulation
' Made before the Security Council in Paris on Dec. 2,
1948, and released to ttie press on tlie same date.
723
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIALIZED AGENCIES
comprises the I'eqiiireaients laid down by the
Cliarter for admission of new inembers to the
United Nations. Reduced to their essence these
requirements are as follows: The political entity
in question must be a state; it must be a ''peace-
loving" state; it must accept the obligations con-
tained in the Charter; and it must be able and will-
ing, in the judgment of the United Nations, to
carry out these obligations. My Government con-
siders that the state of Israel meets these Charter
requirements.
The first question M'hich may be raised in ana-
lyzing this fourth article of the Charter and its
application to the membership of the state of
Israel is the question whether Israel is a "state",
as that term is used in article 4 of the Charter. It
is common knowledge, Mr. President, that while
there are traditional definitions of a state in in-
ternational law, the term has been used in many
different ways. We are all aware that under the
traditional definition of a state in international
law all of the great writers have pointed to four
qualifications :
First : There must be a people.
Second : There must be a territory.
Third : There must be a government.
Fourth: There must be capacity to enter into
relations with other states of the world.
So far as the question of capacity to enter into
relations with other states of the world is con-
cerned, learned academic arguments can be and
have been made to the effect that we already have
among the Members of the United Nations some
political entities which do not possess full sover-
eign freedom to form their own international
policy which traditionally has been considered
characteristic of a state. We know, however, that
neither at San Francisco nor subsequently has the
United Nations considered that complete freedom
to frame and manage one's own foreign policy was
an essential requisite of United Nations' member-
ship. I dwell upon this point, Mr. President, not
because anyone has ever questioned that in this
respect Israel is free and unhampered; in this
respect I believe that there would be unanimity
that Israel exercises complete independence of
judgment and of will in forming and in executing
its foreign policy. The reason I mention the quali-
fications of this aspect of the traditional defi-
nition of a state is to imderline the point that the
term "state"' as used and applied in article 4 of
the Charter of the United Nations may not be
wholly identical with the term "state" as it is used
and defined in classic textbooks of international
law. When we look at the other classic attributes
of a state we find insistence that it must also have
a government. No one doubts that Israel has a
government. I think the world has been par-
ticularly impressed with the way in which the
people of Israel have organized their government
724
and have established a firm system of administra-
tion and of lawmaking under the most difficult
conditions. Although, pending their scheduled
elections, they still modestly and appropriately
call themselves the "Government of Israel", they
have a legislative body which makes laws; they
have a judiciary which interprets and applies these
laws; and they have an executive which carries
out the laws and which has at its disposal a con-
siderable force which is responsive to its will.
According to the same classical definition, we
are told that a state must have a people and ter-
ritory. Nobody questions the fact that the state
of Israel has a people. It is an extremely homo-
geneous people : a people full of loyalty and of en-
thusiastic devotion to the state of Israel.
The argument seems chiefly to arise in connec-
tion with territory. One does not find in the gen-
eral classic treatment of this subject any insistence
that the territory of a state must be exactly fixed
by definite frontiers. We all know that histori-
cally many states have begun their existence with
their f rontieis unsettled. Let me take as one ex-
amj^le my own cormtry — the United States. Like
the state of Israel it had at its origin certain terri-
tory along the seacoast. It had various indeter-
minate claims to an extended territory westward,
but in the case of the United States, that land had
not even been explored and no one knew just where
the American claims ended and where French and
British and Spanish claims began. To the north,
the exact delimitation of the frontier with the ter-
ritories of Great Britain was not settled until many
years later. And yet I maintain, Mr. President,
that in the light of history and in the light of
a practice and acceptance by other states, the
existence of the United States of America was
not in question before its final boundaries were
determined.
Although the foi'mulas in the classic treatises
vary somewhat one from the other, both reason and
history demonstrate that the concept of territory
does not necessarily include precise delimitation
of the boundaries of that territory. The reason
for the rule that one of the necessary attributes of
n state is that it shall possess territory, is that one
can not contemplate a state as a kind of disem-
bodied si^irit. Historically the concept is one of
insisting that there must be some portion of the
earth's surface which its people inhabit and over
which its government exercises authority. No one
can deny that the state of Israel responds to this
requirement.
Similarly, Mr. President, it is the view of my
Government that Israel is a peaceloving nation.
The Jewish community in Palestine which created
the state of Israel expressed its willingness and
z-eadiness a year ago to accept the General Assem-
bly resolution of November 29, 1947. and to co-
operate loyally in carrjdng it out. Members of
the Council in reflecting upon the efforts of this
Department of State Bulletin
bod}' over flio past year to maintain peace in Pales-
tine will rerall the deirree to which the Provisional
(lovernnient of Israel has extended its cooperation
to the implementation of proposals made hy the
Security Council or by the mediator. For in-
stance, when the first truce in Palestine was about
to expire on July 9, 10 18, the Provisional Govern-
ment of Israel indicated its willingness to observe
the truce under substantially the same conditions
as those governing tlie truce then iii existence.
When this proposal, wliich had been made by the
mediator, was not found acceptable by all the gov-
enunents and authorities concerned, the Provi-
sional Government of Israel indicated its willing-
ness to accept a further proposal of the mediator
for an unconditional cease-fire in Palestine for a
period of ten days. Since that date, representa-
tives of the Provisional Government of Israel have
repeatedly made clear in this form, and elsewhere,
their willingness to seek a settlement, through the
processes of negotiation and with appropriate as-
sistance of United Nations mediatory or concilia-
tor}' bodies, of all outstanding problems between
Israel and other governments and authorities.
As to the third of the Charter requirements, the
state of Israel in the terms of its application for
membership has indicated its acceptance of the ob-
ligations contained in the Charter. There is no
reason for the Security Council to question the
solemn assurance of Israel that it does accept the
obligations of the Charter. One of these obliga-
tions is stated in article 25 under its terms, and
I quote them: ''Tlie Members of the United Na-
tions agree to accept and carry out the decisions
of the Security Council in accordance with the
present Charter." If Israel is admitted to the
United Nations, this Charter obligation will be
binding upon Israel just as it is binding upon the
United States and all other Members of the United
Nations.
Article 4 of the Cliarter also requires that a
state which is admitted to membership in the
United Nations be able and willing, in the judg-
ment of the United Nations, to carry out the obli-
gations contained in the present Charter. It is
the judgment of the Ignited States, as one of the
Members of the United Nations, that the state of
Israel is able and willing to carry out the obliga-
tions imposed by the Charter. The willingness of
Israel to carry out these obligations is made clear
in its letter of application for membership. My
Government is also satisfied as regards the ability
of the state of Israel to carry out the obligations
of the Charter. The state of Israel is a function-
ing political entity with firmly established govern-
mental institutions exercising effective internal
administration and able to conduct the foreign
relations of the state. It is clear to me that,
judged by whatever standards of political and so-
cial organization, Israel is able to carry out the
obligations of the Charter of the United Nations
December 72, 1948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
and to assist the United Nations in achieving the
high purposes set forth in the Charter.
Mr. President, as a result of this inspection of
the requirements for membership in the United
Nations as set out in article 4 of the Charter and
of their application to the specific situation of
Israel, my Delegation i-eaches the definite conclu-
sion that the state of Israel is qualified for mem-
bership and that its application should be endorsed
by the Security Council.
There is one other point, Mr. President, to
which I should like to refer since it is a matter
which arises in consideration and in debate on
questions involving applications for membership.
The matter to which I refer is tbe relationship be-
tween action by the Security Council or by the
United Nations upon application for membership
and the problem of recognition of a Government or
State.
We are aware, Mr. President, that there are
Members of the United Nations who do not main-
tain diplomatic relations with other Members of
the United Nations. Full membership in the
United Nations does not necessarily involve bilat-
eral diplomatic relationships among those Mem-
bers.
I think, Mr. President, that confusion has arisen
on this subject of the relationship of the recog-
nition of governments and the admission of states
to membership in the United Nations.
I would like to remind members of the Council
that the same problem has come to our attention
that has caused debate in this body in regard to
the appearance of various political entities at this
table in matters where their affairs have been dis-
cussed. The case of Indonesia comes to mind. We
have had similar debates in regai'd to the seating
of the representatives of the state of Israel at this
table, and I believe, Mr. President, that the Se-
curity Council has fully recognized in that con-
nection through a series of discussions, debates,
and practices that the admission of a representa-
tive to this table and participation in the discus-
sions does not involve the question of recognition
of governments.
Similarly, Mr. President, it is my opinion that
just as the existence of diplomatic relations among
Members of the United Nations on a bilateral basis
is not a feature inherent in full membership in the
organization, so the question of the extension of
bilateral diplomatic recognition or relationships
between a Member of the United Nations and a new
Member of the United Nations is not a question
which lies at the root of action upon application
for membership. Therefore, Mr. President, it
seems to me that that issue is not one which should
confuse our consideration of the applicability of
article 4 of the Charter to any applicant for mem-
bership.
Now, Mr. President, I have discussed the ques-
tion of the application of Israel for membership
725
THE UNITBD NATIONS AND SPBCIALIZBD AGENCIES
in the United Nations in terms of legal analysis
of the provisions of the Charter which are relevant
to this particular suggestion. But I believe, Mr.
President, that we all realize, all of us, members
of the Council and all Members of the United
Nations, that we are dealing here with something
more than questions of legal concepts and of pro-
visions in a document, although we desire and will
be guided by the terms of that instrument.
We are dealing here with a desire of a people
who have laboriously constructed a community,
an authority, and finally a government operating
in an independent state to see the state which they
have thus arduously built take its place among the
Members of the United Nations.
The United States has watched with sympathy
and interest the birth of the state of Israel and the
development of its political and social institutions.
We are looking toward the first general elections
to be held by the state of Israel early in the new
year. We shall await with anticipation the full
development of the state of Israel, of political
institutions and practices in the best of the demo-
cratic tradition.
My Government, Mr. President, supports the
application of the Government of Israel for mem-
bership in the United Nations not merely because
we consider that Israel fulfils the technical re-
quirements of the Charter in this regard, but be-
cause we believe that the state of Israel, its gov-
ernment, and its people will contribute substan-
tially to the work and development of the United
Nations organization.
Finally, Mr. President, as I began with a ref-
erence to the last paragraph of rule 60 of the rules
of procedure of the Council, I wish to close with a
reference to the procedural aspects of this ques-
tion. There is no use, Mr. President, in any of us
avoiding the clear recognition of the fact that we
are approaching the closing days of the session
of the General Assembly. I have already men-
tioned the fact that the First Committee is in the
midst of its consideration of the future situation
of Palestine. Surely, Mr. President, it is of great
importance, it is of great value in reaching that
final adjustment, a peaceful settlement of the Pales-
tinian question, that Israel should take its place
among the Members of the United Nations equally
bouiid by the Charter, equally responsible to the
obligations of the Charter.
It is my opinion therefore, Mr. President, and
the opinion of my Government, that these are spe-
cial circumstances within the meaning of the last
paragraph of rule 60 and that the Security Coun-
cil should so decide and I should hope, Mr. Pres-
ident, that as this matter is automatically referred
to the Committee under rule 60 of our rules of
procedure that you as President would indicate to
that Committee on Admissions the urgency of this
problem and that that Committee will report back
to this body certainly not later than Monday of
next week their conclusions upon this question,
in order that the Security Council may take its
action, and I should hope a favorable action,
which would enable the General Assembly in turn
to approve the application of Israel for member-
ship in this organization.
Thank you, Mr. President.
Resolution Establishing Conciliation Commission for Palestine '
The General Assembly,
Having ADorxED on 29 November 1947 resolution
181 (II) regarding the future government of Pal-
estine and providing a plan for partition with
economic union ;
Having adopted on 14 May 1948 resolution 186
(S-2) empowering a U.N. Mediator in Palestine
to exercise certain functions including the use of
his good offices to promote a peaceful adjustment
of the future situation of Palestine ;
Having RECEI^'ED and examined the progress re-
port of the U. N. Mediator on Palestine (A/648)
submitted by the late Count Folke Bernadotte ;
Having taken noi-e of the resolutions of the
Security Council concerning the truce in Palestine
and of the resolution of 16 November 1948 con-
' Adopted by Committee I on Dec. 4, 1948, by a vote of
25 to 21 with 3 absentees. Printed from telegraphic text.
726
cerning the establishment of an armistice by means
of negotiations conducted either directly or
through the Acting Mediator on Palestine;
1. Expresses its deep appreciation of the prog-
ress achieved through the good offices of the late
U.N. Mediator in promoting a peaceful adjust-
ment of the future situation of Palestine for which
cause he sacrificed his life ; and
Extends its thanks to the Acting Mediator and
his staff' for their continued efforts and devotion j
to duty in Palestine;
2. Estahlishes a Conciliation Commission con-
sisting of (three states members of the United Na-
tions) which shall have the following functions :
(A) To assume, insofar as it considers neces-
sary in existing circumstances, the functions given
to the U.N. Mediator on Palestine by the resolu-
tion of the General Assembly of 14 May 1948 ;
(B) To carry out the specific functions and di-
Department of State Bulletin
rectives <i:iven to it by this resolution and such
additional functions and directives us may bo given
to it bj' the General Assembly or by the Security
Council;
(C) To promote good relations between the
state of Israel, the Arabs of Palestine and the
neighbouring Arab states ;
(D) To undertake, upon the request of the Se-
curity Council, any of the functions now assigned
to tlie U.N. jNIediator on Palestine or to the U.N.
Truce Commission by resolutions of the Security
Council; upon such request to the Conciliation
Commission by the Security Council with respect
to all the remaining functions of the U.N. Medi-
ator on Palestine under Security Council resolu-
tions, the office of the Mediator shall be
terminated ;
3. Decides that the three members of the Con-
ciliation Commission shall be chosen by a commit-
tee of the Assembly consisting of the representa-
tives of China, France, Union of Soviet Socialist
Republics, United Kingdom and United States of
America ;
4. Requests the Commission to begin its func-
tions at once, with a view to the establishment of
contact between the parties themselves and the
Commission at the earliest possible date;
5. Calls upon the govermnents and authorities
concerned to extend the scope of the negotiations
provided for in the Security Council resolution
of IG November 1948 and to seek agreement by
negotiations conducted either through the Con-
ciliation Commission or directly with a view to a
final settlement of all questions outstanding be-
tween them :
6. Instinicts the Conciliation Commission to
take steps to assist the governments and authorities
concerned to achieve a final settlement of all ques-
tions outstanding between them ;
7. Resolves that the holy places, religious build-
ings and sites in Palestine should be protected and
free access to them assured, in accordance with
existing rights and historical practice; that ar-
rangements to this end should be under effective
U.N. supervision, that the U.N. Conciliation Com-
mission in presenting to the fourth regular session
of the General Assembly its detailed proposal for
a permanent international regime for the territory
of Jerusalem should include recommendations con-
cerning the holy places in that territoi-y ; that with
regard to the holy places in the rest of Palestine,
the Commission should call upon the political
authorities of the areas concerned to give appro-
priate formal guarantees as to the protection of
the lioly places and access to them; and that these
undertakings should be presented to the General
Assembly for approval;
8. Resolves that in view of its association with
three world religions, the Jerusalem area, as de-
fined in the General Assembly resolution of 29
November 1947, should be accorded special and
December 12, 1948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPCCIAUZED AGENCIES
separate treatment from the rest of Palestine and
should be placed under effective U..N. control ;
Requests the Security Council to take further
steps to ensure the demilitarization of Jerusalem
at the earliest possible date ;
Instructs the Conciliation Commission:
To present to the fourth regular session of the
General Assembly detailed proposals for a per-
manent international regime for the Jerusalem
area which will provide for the maximum local
autonomy for distinctive groups consistent with
the special international status of the Jerusalem
area ;
The Conciliation Commission is authorized to
appoint a U.N. representative who shall cooperate
with the local authorities with respect to the in-
terim administration of the Jerusalem area ;
9. Resolves that, pending agreement on more de-
tailed arrangements among the governments and
authorities concerned, the freest possible access to
Jerusalem by road, rail or air should be accorded
to all inhabitants of Palestine; and
Instntcts the Conciliation Commission to report
immediately to the Security Council for appro-
priate action by that organ any attempt by any
party to impede such access;
10. Instructs the Conciliation Commission to
seek arrangements among the governments and
authorities concerned which will facilitate the eco-
nomic development of the area, including arrange-
ments for access to ports and airfields and the use
of transportation and communication facilities; in
this connection, the conclusions contained in part
I, section VIII, paragraph 4 (E) and (F) of the
progi-ess report of the U.N. Mediator should be
taken into account;
11. Endorses the conclusions stated in part I,
section VIII, paragraph 4 (I) of the progress re-
port of the U.N. Mediator in Palestine, and
Resolves that the refugees wishing to return to
their homes and live at peace with their neigh-
bours should be permitted to do so at the earliest
practicable date, and that compensation should
be paid for the property of those choosing not to
return and for loss of or damage to property
which under principles of international law or
in equity should be made good by the govern-
ments or authorities responsible ; and
Instructs the Conciliation Commission to fa-
cilitate the repatriation, resettlement and eco-
nomic and social rehabilitation of the refugees and
the payment of compensation and to maintain
close relations with the director of the U.N. relief
for Palestine refugees, and through him with the
appropriate organs and agencies of the U.N. ;
12. Authorizes the Conciliation Commission to
appoint such subsidiary bodies and to employ such
technical experts, acting under its authority, as it
may find necessary to the effective discharge of
its functions and responsibilities under this reso-
lution.
727
THB UNITBD NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGENCIES
The Conciliation Commission will have its offi-
cial headquarters at Jerusalem. The authorities
responsible for maintaining order in Jerusalem
will be responsible for taking all measures neces-
sary to ensure the security of the Commission.
The Secretary-General will provide a limited num-
ber of guards for the protection of the staff and
premises of the Cormnission ;
13. Instructs the Conciliation Commission to
render progress reports periodically to the Sec-
retary-General for transmission to the Security
Council and to members of the U.N. ;
14. CaUs upon all governments and authorities
concerned to cooperate with the Conciliation
Commission and to take all possible steps to assist
in the implementation of this resolution ;
15. Requests the Secretary-General to provide
the necessary staff and facilities and to make ap-
propriate arrangements to provide the necessary
funds required in carrying out the terms of this
resolution.
The United States in tlie United Nations
[December 4-12]
U.N. Recognizes Republic of Korea
The General Assembly passed on December 12
the resolution approved by the Political and Se-
curity Committee on December 8 which "declares
that there has been established a lawful^govern-
ment (the Government of the Kepublic of Korea) " ;
this action recognizes the "South Korean Govern-
ment" and also urges the continuation of the work
of the Temporary Commission. The resolution
further recommends the withdrawal of occupation
forces from Korea as early as practicable.
The resolution follows closely the draft sub-
mitted by the United States, China, and Australia
on December 6 to Committee I, but which was
amended by Canada in the discussion before the
General Assembly.
The United Nations Temporary Commission
on Korea, established by the General Assembly
in November 1947, will continue to seek means
for bringing about the unification of Korea and
the integration of all Korean security forces. The
Commission is to proceed to Korea within 30 days
of adoption of the resolution, and according to the
resolution, will observe the withdrawal of the
occupying forces.
The debate on Korea began in Committee I on
December 6 with the question of participation of
Korean representatives in connnittee discussions.
The Soviet bloc efforts to seat representatives of
the North Korean regime were rejected by 34 to G
with 8 abstentions ; on the other hand, a Chinese
resolution inviting participation without vote by
representatives of South Korea was approved by
39 to 6 with 1 abstention. China replied to a Czech
proposal for North Korean participation on the
grounds that, since elections in the north had not
been supervised by the U.N. Commission, to invite
North Korean representatives would have a bad
psychological effect throughout Korea. The
728
United States supported China and recalled that
the General Assembly last year decided to invite
only "duly elected representatives of the Korean
people".
John Foster Dulles stated the U.S. position on
Korea before Committee I on December 7; he
pointed out that the Republic of Korea, whose
capital is at Seoul in the southern or U.S. zone, was
established through free, U.N.-observed elections
last May. By contrast in the northern or Soviet
zone Mr. Dulles said "there has been brought into
being a Communist-controlled regime that asserts
pretensions to govern all Korea and that threatens
to back those pretensions by force and violence".
He urged adoption of the joint resolution and
pointed out that the United Nations cannot con-
sider its task completed. "Further measures are
required", he said. "First of all, the United Na-
tions ought to put the seal of legitimacy on what
lias been done under its auspices. The Government
of the Republic of Korea needs that in order to
maintain its prestige and authority at home and
abroad. ... In the second place, we believe
that the United Nations should continue a com-
mission on Korea in order to help the new Govern-
ment of Korea to end the wartime military occu-
pation of Korea. ... In the third place, we
believe that the United Nations Commission should
help the Korean people to reunite and to end the
economic dislocations, the fears of civil war, that
now gravely disturb the life of the people. As in
the case of" Greece, Communist elements seek, by
violence, to impose their will and there is danger
that these efforts will be supported in one form
or another by neighboring Communist regimes.
. . . We also believe the United Nations com-
mission may be able through good offices to help
break dowii peacefully the barrier to friendly
intercourse caused by the present division of
Korea."
Department of Sfofe BuWei'in
Genocide Convention
All iiiiernatioiinl convention on genocide outhnv-
h\<X mass extermination of religious, racial, and
national groups was adopted by the General As-
sembly on December 9.
President Herbert Evatt termed approval of the
convention as an epoch-making event and a ''sig-
nificant advance in the development of interna-
tional criminal law". Mr. Evatt urged that it "be
signed by all states and ratifieil by all parliaments
at the earliest date in order that basic human
rights may be given the protection of international
law for the sake of social progress and interna-
tional peace". The convention was opened for sig-
natui'e on December 11.
Ernest Gross, U.S. Delegate, announced that the
United States was prepared to sign the convention
and expressed the hope that all member states
would do likewise. The convention was adopted
by a vote of 55 to 0, with only Costa Rica, El Sal-
vador, and the Union of South Africa absent.
Of the two resolutions adopted relating to the
implementation of the convention and applying to
it, one urged extension of its provisions to depend-
ent territories as soon as possible and the other
asked that the International Law Commission
stud}' the desirability and possibility of establish-
ing a Criminal Chamber of the International Court
of Justice.
Human Rights
Committee III (Social, Humanitarian, and Cul-
tural) approved on December 7 a universal decla-
ration of human rights, two and one-half years
after detailed work first began on the document.
The vote was 29 to 0, with 7 abstentions. Also
approved was an amended French resolution call-
ing for wide publicity for the declaration, to in-
clude its reading in schools and publication in all
languages as well as a New Zealand proposal ask-
ing the Economic and Social Council to give
priority to preparation of a draft convention on
human rights.
The declaration was further approved when the
(Teneral Assembly voted its adoption on December
10 by a vote of -±8 to 0, with 8 abstentions, with one
amendment by the United Kingdom incorporated.
Assembly Asks Security Council to Reconsider
Membership Applications
In a series of resolutions approved at a plenary
session on December 8 the General Assembly
called upon the Security Council to reconsider the
applications of 1:2 nations for membership in the
United Nations. The Assemblj' placed particular
emphasis on the applications which have been
vetoed by the U.S.S.R., after having been ap-
proved by the required majority of the Security
Council's members.
The Assembly asked the Security Council to
review the Soviet-vetoed requests of Austria,
December 12, 1948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
Ceylon, Ireland, Finhnul, Italy, Portugal, and
Traiisjordan, along with the applications of Al-
bania, Bulgaria, Hungary, Rumania, and the
Mongolian Peoples' Republic, which failed to get
the necessary majority when brought before the
Council.
Prior to voting, Benjamin Cohen, U.S. Dele-
gate, told the Assembly that the United States
would not veto the application of any nation which
is approved by seven of the 11 members. "We
cannot abdicate our own judgment", Mr. Cohen
said, "but we will not, on matters of membership,
put our judgment above the judgment of the world
community of nations. We shall not falter in our
efforts to insure the admission of every qualified
state to this organization."
Mr. Cohen expressed the U.S. support of
Ceylon's application but added that the United
States would support the application of any
nation that could fulfill the requirements of the
Charter. The United States, he said, would sup-
port the requests of Bulgaria, Hungary, and
Rumania when those nations could show that they
are living up to their obligations under the treaties
of peace. Albania, he indicated, could expect U.S.
acceptance when it could show that Bulgaria and
she are complying with the General Assembly
resolutions calling for cessation of aid to the Greek
guerrillas ; the Mongolian Peoples' Republic would
have to prove it is truly independent before it
would receive U.S. support.
The Assembly also approved an Australian reso-
lution asking all Security Council members to act
in accordance with an advisory opinion of the
International Court of Justice which said that
consent to the admission of an applicant may not
be dependent imon conditions other than those
specified in the Charter.
Four-Power Veto Proposal
After a week of debate Connnittee I approved
on December 4 by a vote of 33 to 6 with 4 absten-
tions, a resolution recommending that the General
Assembly ask the Security Council to limit use
of the voting privilege which the U.S.S.R. has
employed to obstruct the work of that body.
The resolution proposed by the United States,
the United Kingdom, France, and China, lists 35
kinds of decisions as procedural and therefore not
subject to the rule of the unanimity of the per-
manent members. It also asks those members not
to use the veto on proposals which have been ap-
proved by any seven members of the Council and
recommends that the veto be used as little as pos-
sible on all other proposals. The only negative
votes cast on the resolution were those of the Soviet
Union and the Ea.stern European countries.
In completing discussion on Security Council
voting procedure, the committee did not pass an
Argentine proposal that a special general confer-
ence be called to amend the Charter to abolish the
729
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
veto. The vote on this question was 12 for and
23 against. A Soviet resolution affirming that the
rule of unanimity is an important condition to
maintaining peace and security was defeated by
23 to 6 with 9 abstentions. Final action on this
item of the agenda was the defeat of an Australian
proposal limiting use of the veto to occasions when
there has been a breach of the peace, aggression,
or a threat to the peace, by a vote of 22 to 9 with
10 abstentions.
Aid for Underdeveloped Nations
Four proposals aimed at giving new economic
and technical aid to Jieedy nations have been
adopted by the General Assembly as recommended
by Committee II (Economic and Financial).
One jDroposal, intended to focus attention on the
problem of economic life in the underdeveloped
areas of the world urged the Economic and Social
Council and the specialized agencies to give
"further and urgent consideration to the whole
problem of economic development" of handicapped
countries.
Another urged the Economic and Social Council
to expedite its consideration of establishing a
Middle East Economic Commission similiar to
those already formed for Europe, Latin America,
and the Far East.
A third resolution called for the provision of
technical assistance to countries in need of it by
such means as United Nations organized interna-
tional teams of experts to advise nations on their
economic development programs.
A fourth resolution requested the International
Labor Organization to examine the most appro-
priate means of gaining admission to the world's
technician training centers of apprentices and
workers from countries lacking enough technicians
and specialists for their adequate economic devel-
opment. All tlie recommendations were given ap-
proval at the December 4 session of the General
Assembly.
UNAC Extended Tlirough 1949
On December 8 the General Assembly by a vote
of 32 to 0 with 5 abstentions extended the United
Nations Appeal for Children for another year.
The resolution defined the appeal as "a world-
wide voluntary appeal for non-governmental con-
tributions to be used for the benefit of children,
adolescents and expectant and nursing mothers
without discriminations on account of race, re-
ligion, nationality or political belief."
In continuing the Unac, the General Assembly
specified that "proceeds of the collections in each
country shall be for the benefit of the U.N. Inter-
national Children's Emergency Fund." The idea
for the appeal originated in a resolution approved
by the Assembly in December 1946, urging the
Secretary-General to explore the possibility of
world-wide voluntary contributions of "one day's
730
pay" to aid the Icef. Thereafter the Economic
and Social Council established the Unac to assist
in raising funds. Last month, contributions had
reached $30,755,841.
Conciliation Commission for Palestine
On December 11 the General Assembly passed
an amended resolution establishing a Conciliation
Commission for Palestine consisting of three
states. China, France, the U.S.S.E., the U.K., and
the U.S. wei'e named to submit a proposal for the
membership of the commission.
Relief for Palestine Refugees
Stanton (xriffis, U.S. Ambassador to Egypt, was
appointed by the Secretary-General as Director
of the United Nations Relief for Palestine Refu-
gees. The appointment was made public in Paris
on December 4. The refugee-aid program ap-
proved by the General Assembly, will cover the
period from December 1, 1948, to August 31, 1949 ;
it consists of $29,500,000 for aid and $2,500,000 for
administrative expenses.
Isreali Membersliip
The membership committee of the Security
Council referred on December 7 back to the Coun-
cil with no recommendations the application of the
Provisional Govermnent of Israel for membership
in the United Nations.
Spanish Made a Wori<ing Language
Spanish has been adopted as a working lan-
guage by the General Assembly. Meeting in a
glenary session on December 7 a proposal to make
panish a working language along with English
and French was adopted by a vote of 32 to 20 with
5 abstentions.
Agenda Items Pending
To be discussed at the next regular session of
the General Assembly are : proposed conventions
on freedom of information, disposition of the pre-
war Italian colonies in Africa, and a resolution on
the marital rights of women introduced by Chile.
Adjournment
The General Assembly adjourned its present ses-
sion the night of December 11-12 and will recon-
vene in New York on April 1, 1949. The follow-
ing is the text of the resolution on adjournment
adopted :
"The General Assembly decides that the present
session in Paris adjourn on 11-12 December, 1948,
and that a second part of the session be held at the
headquarters of the United Nations in New York
to complete consideration of the items on the
agenda, the resumption in New York to take place
on 1 April, 1949."
Department of State Bulletin
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES
Eighth World's Poultry Congress
BY W. D. TERMOHLEN
The Eighth World's Poultry Congress was held
at Copenhagen August 20-27, 1948. The Con-
gress, the first held since the end of World War II,
resulted in the re-establishment of international
cooperation, which had been so beneficial to the
world's industry since the First World's Poultry
Congress was held at The Hague in 1921.
Representatives of 35 countries, representing all
areas of the world, met to discuss problems and
the results of scientific work and practical experi-
mentation which have occurred since the Seventh
Congress, held at Cleveland, Ohio, in 1939. From
the 35 countries represented, there were almost 900
persons present, nearly 90 of whom were from the
United States. Twenty-one countries were repre-
sented by official delegations; these were: Aus-
tralia. Austria, Belgium, Canada, Czechoslovakia,
Denmark, Eire, Finland, France, Italy, the Nether-
lands, New Zealand, Norway, Pakistan, Poland,
Spain, Switzerland, Turkey, the Union of South
Africa, the United Kingdom, and the United
States.
To the poultrymen of Europe the Congi-ess was
of inestimable value for the reasons so aptly ex-
pressed by Kristen Bording, Minister of Agricul-
ture for Denmark, who said in his welcoming re-
marks at the opening of the Congress :
"Since the holding of the Seventh World's Poul-
try Congress in Cleveland, Ohio, in 1939, the poul-
trymen have had to work under very difficult condi-
tions. To the European countries the great war
meant not only difficult times with declining pro-
duction, scarcity of feeding material, and destruc-
tion of the machinery of production, but also that
each country was shut off from intercourse with
other countries and with our friends outside
Europe".
World's Poultry Congresses provide the setting
for the triennial meetings of the World's Poultry
Science Association, a world-wide organization of
people engaged in the poultry industry activities.
One of the principal objects of this Association is
to facilitate in all possible ways the exchange of
knowledge and experience among persons in all
parts of the world who are contributing to the ad-
vancement of the poultry industry by teaching, ex-
periments, research, demonstrations, organization,
or any other constructive manner to promote the
extension of knowledge. Professor James E. Rice.
December 12, 1948
formerly head of the Poultry Department of Cor-
nell University, a member of the United States
Official Delegation and president of the World's
Poultry Science Association since 1939, in compli-
menting the Danish Committee and Congress offi-
cials for the excellent manner in which the Con-
gi-ess had been organized and operated said :
"This Congress has unquestionably brought ma-
terial assistance to the poultry industry, especially
of Europe, and has made possible the extension
of enlightenment, better living, happiness, and the
appreciation of the democratic way of life to many
peoples throughout the world. This Congress
will be a milestone in the history of the world's
poultry industry".
The Congress was officially opened in the Town
Hall August 20, by His Highness, Prince &iude,
brother of His Majesty, King Frederik IX. In
the afternoon the exlaibit held in the Forum
Building .was opened by Prince Knude. The ex-
hibit consisted of 34 educational and commercial
exhibits and 1,544 live birds including chickens,
turkeys, ducks, geese, and pigeons. The entire ex-
hibit depicted the poidtry industry of Denmark
and its progress and development.
On August 21, the opening plenary session was
held in the Broadcasting House. Five general
papers or reports were presented on subjects of
nutrition, incubation, breeding, disease, and mar-
keting by representatives from Sweclen, the United
Kingdom, and the United States. Beginning
August 23 and continuing through August 26, five
sectional meetings were held daily in the Congress
Building. The subject matter covered in these
meetings was as follows : section 1 — nutrition and
physiology; section 2— genetics and incubation;
section 3 — organization, breed, and development of
the poultry industry ; section 4 — marketing, public
service, et cetera ; and section 5 — diseases and their
control. The sectional meetings filled to capacity
the meeting rooms, and in comiection with most of
the 132 papers presented there was good discussion.
The official languages of the Congress were Eng-
lish, Danish, and French. Most of the papers were
presented in English, and well over 90 percent of
the Congress members participating spoke and
understood English. The complete text and
resume of all 137 general reports and sectional
papers were included in the Official Report, volume
I, of the Congress.
731
ACTIVITIES AND DBVBiOPMENTS
The closing plenary session was held on August
27. In addition to the appropriate resolution of
thanks, there were unanimously passed three reso-
lutions proposing activities to be carried on by the
World's Poultry Science Association through
representative committees. These resolutions cov-
ered the following : study of practical uniform in-
ternational standards and grades for eggs and
poultry and uniformity of containers which could
be useful throughout the world ; study of a uniform
method for reporting results of egg-laying contests
to afford more intelligent and helpful use of such
reports throughout the world ; and third, calling to
the attention of the proper authorities the need for
uniformity of method in making vitamin D chick
assays. The Congress was adjourned by the presi-
dent of the Congi'ess, W. A. Kock, Denmark,
consultant in the Ministry of Agriculture of that
country.
The chairman of the United States Delegation,
W. D. Termohlen, Director, Poultry Branch, Pro-
duction and Marketing Administration of the
United States Department of Agriculture, was
elected president of the World's Poultry Science
Association for the three-year (1949-51) term.
Other Americans elected as officers of the Associa-
tion were : Professor James E. Rice, honorary past
president; Dr. G. F. Heuser, who continues as
secretary-treasurer ; and Dr. O. B. Kent, Dr. M. A.
Jull, Professor E. M. Funk, Dr. H. H. Alp, J. W.
Kinghorne, and Dr. H. S. Wilgus, who were elected
members of the Council.
Third North American Regional
Broadcasting Conference Scheduled
On November 18 the Department announced that
the Thii'd North American Regional Broadcast-
ing Conference (NARBA) is scheduled to be con-
vened in Canada, probably at Ottawa or Montreal,
on September 13, 1949. Accordingly, there is need
to begin formulating the United States proposals
for this Conference as soon as possible.
The results of the forthcoming North American
Regional Broadcasting Conference are very closely
related to the implementation of the domestic poli-
cies of the United States Government in the stand-
ard broadcasting field. Accordingly, the Depart-
ment of State has requested the Federal Communi-
cations Commission, which is the arm of the Gov-
ernment having primary interest in this field, to
assume the leadership for the preparatory work.
The Fee has agreed to undertake these duties and
plans to call a general meeting of the interested
Government and industry people for this purpose.
International Joint Commission Hearings
on Pollution of Boundary Waters
[Released to the press November 29]
In accordance with notice of hearings published
by the International Joint Commission, the hear-
ings on pollution of the Detroit River, Lake St.
Clair, St. Clair River, and St. Marys River were
resumed in Detroit, Michigan, on November 15,
1948. The hearings were conducted by the follow-
ing representatives of the United States and Cana-
dian Sections of the Commission :
United States Section
A. O. Stanley, Chairman
Eugene Weber, Commissioner
Jesse B. Ellis, Secretary
William R. Vallace, Counsel
Canadian Section
George Spence, Acting Chairman
Elizabeth M. Sutherland, Acting Secretary
K. J. Burbridge, Counsel
United States Section, Board of Technical Advisers
L. M. Fisher, sanitary engineer, Office of Chief of Engi-
neering Activities, U.S. Public Health Service, Wash-
ington, D.C., Chairman
M. Le Bosquet, U.S. Public Health Service, Cincinnati,
Ohio
732
Ralph Palange, U.S. Public Health Service, Detroit, Mich.
L. P. Oeming, Michigan Stream Control Commission,
Lansing, Mich.
John M. Hepler, Michigan State Sanitary Engineer
Canadian Section, Board of Technical Advisers
George Ferguson, Consultant, Department of National
Health and Welfare, Ontario Department of Health,
Ottawa, Chairman
W. R. Edmonds, Department of National Health and Wel-
fare, Ottawa
Dr. A. E. Berry, Ontario Department of Health, Toronto
A. V. DeLaporte, Ontario Department of Health, Toronto
The hearings began with the testimony of Allen
T. Carlisle, city engineer for the city of Port
Huron, Michigan, from which it appeared that
raw sewage from the city was being dumped into
the St. Clair River. Evidence was presented that
the city had issued bonds in the sum of $1,400,000
for the construction of a sewage-disposal plant
and intercepting sewers, but that on account of in-
creased costs of labor and materials the city had
not proceeded with the construction of this plant.
Reference was made to court proceedings brought
by the State of Michigan to require the city of
Port Huron to construct these disposal facilities,
which are now awaiting decision by the Supreme
Court of Michigan.
Department of State Bulletin
Evidence was also given by representatives or
officers of the following nnniicipalities: Marys-
ville, St. Clair. St. Clair Shores. Marine City,
Algonac, New Baltimore, Pontiac, Mt. Clemens,
Dearborn. Melvindale, Kiver Ronge. Eoorse,
Wyandotte, Riverview. and Trenton, Michigan.
L. A. Danse described the action taken by Gen-
eral Motors Corporation to prevent industrial
wastes from its several plants from entering
boundary waters. T. Ledyard Blakeman, execu-
tive director of the Detroit Regional Planning
Commission, described its proposals for disposing
of sewage and industrial wastes.
Representatives of the Lake Carriers Associa-
tion of Cleveland, Ohio, presented a statement on
behalf of the owners of a large percentage of ships
operated on the Great Lakes respecting the dis-
posal of sewage, garbage, and other waste prod-
ucts from their vessels while operating in bound-
ary waters. Further investigation of means for
disinfecting or disposing of these materials on
land were discussed, and further efforts at elimi-
nation of this source of pollution were promised.
A letter received from Harvey Campbell, vice
president of the Detroit Chamber of Commerce,
proposed that steps be taken to obtain water for
the city and neighboring commtniities from Lake
Huron.
On Novenilier 17 the hearings were transferred
to the City Hall, Windsor, Ontario, Canada, and
statements were received from a number of Cana-
dian industries and municipalities that were con-
tributing to the pollution of these boundai-y
waters. Representatives appeared on behalf of
salt, oil, gas, synthetic rubber, and chemical in-
dustries. Statements were also presented regard-
ing materials dumped in the boundary waters or
their tributaries by sugar-beet factories, canning
factories, breweries, distilleries, and a company
processing animal fats.
Representatives of the following municipalities
also testified regarding their sewage-disposal prob-
lems and measures for remedying the existing
situation: Sarnia, Point Edward, Wallaceburg,
Chatham, Windsor, xVmherstburg, Corruna, Moore
Township, Courtright, Port Lambton, Belle River,
Tecnmseh, and Riverside.
The Commission also received important evi-
dence regarding the extent of the pollution from
representatives of the following Canadian organ-
ACTIVITIES AND DEVELOPMENTS
izations : Ontario Federation of Commercial Fish-
ermen, Port Dover; Ontario Federation of
Anglers and Hunters, Windsor; Essex County
Sportsmen's Association, Windsor; Wallaceburg
Rod and Gun Club, "Wallaceburg; and Kent
County Sportsmen's Association, Chatham. The
killing of ducks and fish in boundary waters on
account of their pollution with oil and other dele-
terious substances was described, and the assist-
ance of the Commission in preventing the destruc-
tion of these valuable natural resources was
earnestly requested.
The Commission adjourned its sessions to Sault
Ste. Marie, Ontario, Canada, where evidence was
received on Monday, November 22, regarding pol-
lution of the St. Marys River. Evidence was re-
ceived from representatives of the following
corporations: Union Carbide Division of Union
Carbide and (^arbon Company; Northwestern
Leather Company ; Abitibi Power and Paper Com-
j)any ; Algoma Steel Corporation ; Dominion Tar
and Chemical Company, Ltd.; International
Transit Company ; and Algoma and Hudson Bay
Railway Company. The Mayor and City Engi-
ner of Sault Ste. Marie, Michigan, and the Mayor
and City Engineer of Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario,
presented plans which had been prepared for the
erection of sewage-disposal plants. However, ac-
tion thereon had been deferred on account of the
high cost of labor and materials. Assurance was
given to the Commission that efforts would be
made to terminate the dumping of raw sewage
from these cities into the St. Marys River and to
construct sewage-disposal plants which would take
care of the sanitary and industrial wastes that are
now being dumped into the river.
The Board of Technical Advisers has been re-
quested by the Commission to prepare a report to
the Commission respecting conditions disclosed
by these investigations in order that the Govern-
ments of Canada and the United States may take
appropriate action in respect to the pollution of
these boundary waters, which are covei-ed by the
following provision in article IV of the boundary
waters treaty of January 11, 1909 :
"It is further agreed that the waters herein
defined as boundary waters and waters flowing
across the boundary shall not be polluted on either
side to the injury of health or property on the
other."
December 12, 1948
733
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
[Released to the press December 2]
Text of a Utter of Novelnber 29, 1948, from Vasili
Sokolovsky, Commander in Chief of the Soviet
Occupation Forces in Berlin, to Lucius D. Clay,
ZJ.S. Commander-in-Chief and Military Governor
in Berlin
The Soviet command cannot fail to call your
attention to dangerous acts which are taking place
in the Western sectors of Berlin for the disorgani-
zation and the splitting of German municipal ad-
ministrative agencies and which are supported by
the military commandants of the Western sectors.
As you know, Soviet military authorities in
Berlin indicated the necessity of preserving the
unity of Berlin, which is the capital of Germany,
and insisted on conducting democratic elections for
the whole of Berlin. This proposal was not taken
into consideration. Instead of a single democratic
election for the whole of Berlin, separate local
elections in the Western sectors of Berlin have been
arranged for December 5, elections which will be
conducted not under conditions of democratic
freedom but under conditions of persecution of
democratic organizations and of compulsory
measures.
Views on Soviet Action Prior to Berlin Election
Separate elections in the Western sectors on
December 5 aim at liquidating united municipal
administrative agencies, at creating a separate
magistral in the Western sectors for the uncon-
trolled management of these sectors by Western
military authorities, and at encouraging the activi-
ties of the anti-democratic and openly reactionary
elements of the city.
Moreover, for a long time already, separatist
elements in the Berlin Magistrat who enjoy the
support of certain occupation authorities have
been striving to disorganize the operation of the
Magistrat as a single municipal organization, also
to expel from it the democratic representatives
connected with large masses of the Berlin popula-
tion. This is something to which the Soviet com-
mand cannot consent.
The Soviet command does not intend to encour-
age the actions of the anti-democratic elements of
the Berlin Magistrat toward the splitting of Ger-
man administrative agencies of Berlin, and, as in
the past, will cooperate in preserving the unity of
Berlin and in creating conditions which will in-
sure normal activities for
sentatives in the agencies
govermnent.
all democratic repro-
of the Berlin self-
[Released to the press December 2]
Text of General Clay''s reply of November 30 to
Marshal Sokolovsky. Identical letters were sent
hy Generals Biwn Roiertson and Pierre Koenig
I have received your communication of Novem-
ber 29, 1948 inviting my attention to certain ac-
tions taking place in Berlin preparatoi-y to the
election on December 5 of the Berlin City As-
sembly.
It is my understanding that the competent au-
thorities of the City of Berlin, acting in accord-
ance with the Berlin provisional constitution
which was approved by the four occupying pow-
ers in 1946, are proceeding with elections on De-
cember 5 which are called for after the expira-
tion of the two-year terms of the members of the
City Assembly. The Berlin authorities in due
course had addressed to each of the four com-
mandants advice regarding their purpose to hold
elections obedient to the constitution. The Com-
mandants of the United Kingdom, France and the
United States had of course no objection.
I notice that in the fourth paragraph of your
letter you suggest that separatist elements in the
Berlin Magistrat with the support of certain oc-
cupation authorities have been striving to disor-
ganize its operation as a single municipal organi-
zation. This suggestion is one which neither I
734
nor any unbiased observer of the events of recent
months can accept. The action of the Soviet au-
thorities in permitting the disruption of the City
Assembly by hooligan elements, their arbitrary
dismissal of a number of duly elected city officials
without the consent of the commandants of the
three western sectors, and tlieir abandonment of
the Allied Kommandatura, together with innu-
merable other unilateral breaches of the quad-
ripartite arrangements for Berlin, have demon-
strated the intentions of the Soviet authorities to
divide the city and to prevent the exercise of dem-
ocratic rights and liberties in their own sector.
Moreover, a report has reached me according
to which a clissident City Assembly, acting appar-
ently with the connivance of the Soviet authori-
ties have today proceeded to the illegal election
of certain officers to the Magistrat, in direct con-
travention of the city constitution. If this report
is confirmed, I should be grateful to be informed
whether in fact the illegal action of these persons
was taken with your approval.
For my own part I should add that I continue
to desire to see reestablished at Berlin a situation
corresponding to the accords which were con-
cluded among us and which would permit under
quadripartite control the unrestricted application
of the Berlin constitution which was approved by
the four occupying powers.
Department of State Bulletin
German and Austrian Immigration Opened to the United States
For the liist time since IWl it is possible for an
ordinary resident of Germany or Austria without
close i-ehitives in the United States to register on
a waiting list as a prospective immigrant to
America.
One need not be a German or Austrian national
to register in tliese countries. If a British sub-
ject, for example, is resident there, he may also fill
out a registration form and, if born in Gx'eat
Britain, his name will be placed on the British
quota waiting list.
The resumption of regular immigration is a re-
sult of the Displaced Persons Act which Congress
passed on June 19, Section 12, which directs that
general consular activities in Germany and Austria
be immediately resumed in order that German and
Austrian quotas shall be available for applicants
pursuant to the immigration laws. These laws
provide a German quota of 25,957 per year with an
additional 1,-413 being allotted annually to Austria.
From the time these numbers were established
in 1934 until the present time, the German annual
quota has never been filled, although on the other
hand the quota has never been closed — even during
the war. Throughout all the time of hostilities
Germans and Austrians residing outside of their
homelands continued to go to America as regular
immigrants. Thus many refugees from the Nazi
regime found a new home in a free land.
Moreover, since the postwar reopening of Amer-
ican consular offices in Germany and Austria,
the quotas have been used for persons entitled to
preference visas — that is, parents of American
citizens, husbands of American women, skilled
agriculturists, and wives and unmarried minor
children of legal residents of the United States.
German and Austrian girls entering the United
States as financees have also used up portions of
the quotas. All together, some 15,000 Germans
have entered the United States on immigrant visas
since the end of hostilities.
Unfortunately for the thousands of Germans
and Austrians now desiring to immigrate, the
quota numbers have not been accumulating. Any
of the 27,370 numbers granted under our quota
system which are not used within a fiscal year are
lost and cannot be utilized later. Thus the maxi-
mum number of German and xVustrian born im-
migrants who can enter America this fiscal year —
or any fiscal year — is 27,370.
In reality, because of another provision of the
Displaced Persons Act, only about half this many
native-born Germans and Austrians will enter
December 12, 1948
America during 1949 and 1950. The same Section
12 which directs the resumption of I'egular imrai-
gi'ation from Austria and Germany also directs
that for the next two years 50 percent of the Ger-
man and Austrian quotas be used for persons of
German ethnic origin who were born in Poland,
Hungary, Czechoslovakia, Rumania or Yugoslavia
and who on July 19, 1948 were residing in Ger-
many or Austria.
This is a radical departure from previous Amer-
ican immigration laws. In nearly every other in-
stance, a prospective immigrant to the United
States must obtain a quota number from the quota
of the country in which he was born regardless of
his nationality present or past. Ordinarily, a
person born in Czechoslovakia who has resided
most of his life in Austria and who indeed posses-
ses Austrian nationality must nevertheless travel
to America under the Czech quota. Section 12
puts this provision of the Immigration Act of 1924
aside and for a period of two years permits ethnic
Germans, more usually called Volksdeutsche, to
travel to America under the German and Austrian
quotas, even though they M'ere not actually born
in Germany or Austria.
As soon as the provisions of the Displaced Per-
sons Bill were known, the Department of State
diiected that American consular offices in Germany
and Austria make preparations to accept regis-
tration for immigration to the United States.- A
date was established and kept secret upon which
the announcement was to be made that residents of
Germany and Austria could once again apply for
a place on the waiting list of persons desiring to
travel to America foi' permanent residence.
On Sept. 17, Mr. Marshall M. Vance, supervisory
consul general for Gei'many, held a press confer-
ence in Frankfurt and made public the details of
the new program. It was carefully announced
that if a resident of Germany or Austria desired
to apply for immigration, he must write a letter
of request to the appi'opriate American consular
office, enclosing in his letter a stamped self-
addressed envelope in which a blank registi-ation
form could be returned to him.
In spite of these explicit instructions, thousands
of would-be immigrants began to gather early on
the morning of Monday, Sept. 20, before the doors
^Article prepared by James S. Sutterlin, U.S. Vice
Consul, Frankfort. This article is reprinted from the
Information Bulletin of Nov. 2, 194S, of the U.S. Military
Government in Germany.
' Bulletin of Sept. 26, 1948, p. 411 and Oct. 17, 1948.
p. 501.
735
THE RECORD OF THE WEEIf
of the consulates in Germany and Austria. In-
terest in immigration proved intense, and during
the first week approximately 150,000 written re-
quests for registration forms were received in the
six offices in Germany and the two offices in Aus-
tria. This was no surprise to consular officers,
however, who providently had had 2,000,000 regis-
tration forms printed.
The question is often asked "What chance has
one of the thousands of persons who have written
in for registration forms to travel to the United
States within the foreseeable future?" The an-
swer is "That depends."
If he was not among the first to have returned
his completed registration form, then he has a
long wait, perhaps a matter of years. Approxi-
mately 25 percent of the several thousand mailed
requests to the American Consulate in Stiittgart
for registration forms are not being considered
because they failed to conform with specified pro-
cedure. The commonest mistake has been failure
to enclose with the request for registration a self-
addressed, stamped envelope in which the regis-
tration form can be returned to the intending
immigrant.
If a person submits an incorrect request he must
then resubmit it in the proper manner. If he has
no one willing to j^ay the cost of his transportation,
he will have to wait until the time when the
Deutsche mark can be used to purchase transporta-
tion; and if he cannot find someone who will be
answerable for his support in the United States,
of if he is seriously unsound either in body or
mind, or if he has been or is a member of a move-
ment hostile to the United States Government, he
might as well give ujd any thought of immigration
to the United States.
On the other hand, if he was among the first
to return a completed registration form by mail
to the appropriate consular office, if he has friends
or relatives in the United States who are willing
to vouch for his support and who are in addition
willing to finance his journey, if he is soimd in
body and mind, and if he is not considered a se-
curity threat to the well-being of the United States
and its people, his chances are good for beginning
a new life in America.
U.S. Protests Hungarian Seizure off American Oil Interests
NOTE TO HUNGARIAN MINISTRY FOR FOREIGN AFFAIRS
[Released to the press Deceinlier 2]
Text of a note delivered iy the American Legation
in Budapest to the Hungarian Ministry for For-
eign Affairs under date of November 30, 1948, .
with reference to the Hungarian-American Oil
Coinpany (Maort)
The Legation of the United States of America
presents its compliments to the Hungai'ian Min-
istry for Foreign Affairs and has the honor to refer
to Decree No. 9,960/1948 Korm.,i whereby the
Hungarian Government has taken over the man-
agement, including the control of all assets and
rights, of the Hungarian-American Oil Company
(M^iORT) and the Maort Gas Trading Company,
American-owned subsidiaries of the Standard Oil
Company (New Jersey).
The Legation is authorized to inform the Min-
istry for Foreign Affairs that the Government of
the United States, viewing this action of the Hun-
garian Government as wholly arbitrary and im-
warrantable, (1) reserves all rights on its own
behalf and on behalf of its nationals with respect
to the status and property of M-\ort and the lat-
ter's subsidiary the Maort Gas Trading Company
and (2) holds the Hungarian Government re-
sponsible for the continued operation of the af ore-
' Not here printed.
736
said Comi^anies and for the value of the assets of
the Companies as of September 25, 1948, the date
on which the Decree in question was published and
came into force.
With reference further to the action of the Hun-
garian Government in this matter, the Government
of the United States has taken note of the charges
of "industrial sabotage" which the Hungarian
Government has made against the owners and
officials of Maort and caused to be publicized in
the "Report of the Hungarian Ministry of Home
Affairs on the Maort Sabotage" (Grey Book) as
well as in the officially controlled Hungarian press.
These charges are compounded of various asser-
tions to the effect that the owners and officials in-
creased oil production during the recent war, thus
assuring significant support for the German war
machine ; that they decreased production after the
war to hinder Hungary's economic development
for political reasons and did this with the knowl-
edge and under the direction of American Mission
officials in Hungary ; that they carried out this
"sabotage" on the financial side by improper ex-
penditures and management, against the Hunga-
rian planned economy by disregarding instruc-
tions of the National Planning Office and by pre-
venting the purchase of necessary equipment and
the repair of machinery, on the "technical side by
Department of State Bulletin
drillinc: exploratory wells at unpromising sites,
hindering research, and improperly completing the
wells, and. as reganls the construction of the Lispe-
Budapest natural gas pipeline, by placing every
possible obstacle in the way of the project.
These allegations against the ^ood faith and
operations of the management of Maort have been
fully and conclusively refuted by the Standard
Oil Company (New Jersey) in its memorandum
entitled "Standard Oil Company (New Jersey)
and Oil Production in Hungary by Maort: 1931-
1948," a copy of which is enclosed for the atten-
tion of the Slinistry for Foreign Atfairs.
The Legation is instructed to inform the Min-
istiT for Foreign Affairs that the Government
of tlie United States emphatically rejects as false
and malicious in their entirety the charges of
"sabotage" which the Hungarian authorities have
made against the owners and officials of Maort.
Moreover, the United States Government regards
these allegations as having been politically moti-
vated to serve the purposes of Communist propa-
ganda and to feign grounds for bringing the Com-
panies under Conununist State control. In at-
tempting to develop its fraudulent case against
Maort, the Hungarian Government has played up
as primary evidence the alleged "confessions" of
Mr. Paul Ruedemann and Mr. George Bannantine,
American officials of the Company. However, the
facts in this connection attested by sworn state-
ments made by the two men upon their release from
Hungarian police custody, are now well-known.^
The truth concerning these ''confessions," which
were so hastily publicized in the obviously pre-
fabricated Hungarian "Grey Book" and elsewhere,
is (1) that they were prepared by the Hungarian
police, (2) that their contents are wholly false, and
(3) that force and duress were em})loyed against
Mr. Ruedemann and Mr. Bannantine to compel
them to copy in longhand and sign the documents.
From these circumstances alone, the conclusion is
also warranted that the "confessions" obtained by
the Hungarian authorities from Dr. Simon Papp
and other Hungarian emploj'ees of Maort are
likewise of a spurious character and were exacted
by the usual police state methods.
The Government of the United States also
deems it appropriate, relative to the principal ac-
cusation made by the Hungarian authorities
against Maort concei-ning the decreased rate of
crude oil production, that the Legation should not
only aflirm the fact that I\Iaort consistently ad-
hered to a policy of rational exploitation in the
interest of conserving the oil resources of Hun-
gary but should also draw attention to the fact
that both the Secretariat of the Hungarian Su-
preme Economic Council and the experts of the
Hungarian Ministry for Industry in the middle
of 1947 recognized the necessity for reducing the
rate of Maort oil production. Thus, in a mem-
orandum of the Ministry for Finance, dated July
December 12, 1948
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
8, 1947, which was presented as an item on the
agenda of the Supreme Economic Council on
July 9, it was reported that
"according to the recommendation of the secretar-
iat of the Supreme Economic Council, oil produc-
tion of 636,000 tons should be reduced by 10 per-
cent, whereas the experts' opinion of the Minis-
try for Industry stated the necessity of reducing
the production of 600,000 tons by 16 percent. A
reduction by 16 percent is imperatively indicated
by the status of the crude oil resources of Hun-
gary."
It was further reported in the memorandum
that
"if the production is not reduced by 16 percent,
the following conseciuences will ensue :
"a.) 50 percent or 3,500,000 tons of the country's
crude oil resources totalling 7,000,000 tons cannot
be utilized.
"f.) During the course of the coming 3 years
the output of oil is expected to decrease by more
tlian the 16 percent reduction envisaged at present.
Without the 16 percent reduction production will
decrease more rapidly and will be reduced before
long by 25 to 30 percent.
"Recommendation: On the above grounds it is
absolutely indispensable to reduce the annual pro-
duction of 600,000 tons by 16 percent."
Even more explicit than the foregoing was the
original statement of the interdepartmental com-
mittee of experts that
"on the basis of gross production during the period
during January 1 through May 31. 1947 (256.695
tons) the production during the course of 12
months amounts to 600,000 tons.
"In the opinion of the experts, if necessary in-
vestments are effected, the present level of pro-
duction may be maintained; however, in this case
an approximate quantity of 3,500,000 tons of the
crude oil resources would remain in the earth and
would be forever lost whereas with rational ex-
ploitation this quantity would be available. The
above quantity is six times as much as the present
annual production."'
Finally, in the original report of the Secretariat
of the Supreme Economic Council it is stated that
"in the opinion of the experts of the Ministry of
Industry, in the interest of rational exploitation
the gross production of 600,000 tons should be re-
duced by 16 percent, which means an annual gross
production of 500,000 tons and an annual net pro-
duction of 428,000 tons."
It is evident in the light of the essential facts
set forth above — facts which are supplemented
r.ULT.ETiN of Oft. 17. 1948, p. 404.
737
THE RECORD OF THB WEEK
by many pertinent details in the Standard Oil
Company's extended account of Maort's opera-
tions— that the charges of "sabotage" brought by
the Hungarian Government against the owners
and officials of Maort cannot be sustained, are
therefore inadmissible, and cannot, as pretended
by the Hungarian Government, serve as justifi-
cation for that Government's action in taking
over the management of the Maoet properties.
In these circumstances, the Government of the
United States looks upon the Hungarian Govern-
ment's course and manner of proceeding in this J
matter as an encroachment upon American rights
and interests in Hungary, for which the Hun-
garian Government must bear full legal and ^
financial responsibility. ■
The Legation avails itself of this opportunity m
to renew to the Ministry the assurances of its most , |
distinguished consideration.
Enclosure :
Copy of memorancUim by Standard Oil Company (New
Jersey) entitled "Standard Oil Company (New Jersey)
and Oil Production in Hungary by Maort: 1931-1948.'"
Double Taxation Conventions Witii Denmarit and the Netlieriands Ratified
On December 1, 1948, Acting Secretary of State
Lovett, the Ambassador of Denmark, Henrik de
Kauffmann, and the Ambassador of the Nether-
lands, E. N. van Kleffens, in Washington, forinally
exchanged the instruments of ratification of the
conventions with Denmark and the Netherlands
for the avoidance of double taxation and the pre-
vention of fiscal evasion with respect to taxes on
income. The Netherlands convention was signed
in Washington on May 6, 1948, and the one with
Denmark on April 29, 1948.
Denmark
It is provided in the convention that upon the
exchange of instruments of ratification the con-
vention shall have effect (a) in the case of United
States tax, for the taxable years beginning on or
after the first day of January of the year in which
such exchange takes place, and (h) in the case of
Danish tax, for the taxable years beginning on or
after the first day of April of the year in which
such exchange takes place. Accordingly, upon
its entry into force with the exchange of instru-
ments of ratification, the convention became effec-
tive retroactively on and from January 1, 1948,
with respect to United States taxes and retro-
actively on and from April 1, 1948, with respect
to Danish taxes. These dates are fixed in con-
formity to the fiscal systems of the respective
countries.
As specified in article I, the taxes to which the
convention is made applicable are {a) in the case
of the United States, the Federal income tax, in-
cluding surtaxes, and (h) in the case of Denmark,
the national income tax (including the war pro-
fits tax), the intercommunal income tax, and the
communal income tax.
The purpose of the convention, like that of ex-
isting income-tax conventions of the United States
with Canada, France, Sweden, and the United
Kingdom, is the elimination, so far as practicable,
of double taxation which otherwise would result
from the imposition and collection of taxes upon
' Not printed.
738
the same income. The convention also establishes
certain procedures for the exchange of information
and for administrative cooperation between the
two countries in relation to taxation, with a view
to the prevention of fiscal evasion. The conven-
tion contains provisions for the exemption in one
or the other of the two countries of certain types of
income. Likewise, the principle of the United
States tax-credit system is adopted in the conven-
tion on a reciprocal basis.
A proclamation of the convention will be issued
by the President. The English and Danish texts
of the convention will be printed in the Treaties
and Other International Acts Series published by
the DejDartment of State. Meanwhile, the English
text may be found in Senate Executive H, 80th
Congress, second session.
A United States reservation to the convention
which rejected article XII was accepted by the
Danish Government.
Netherlands
It is provided in the convention that it shall
become effective on the first day of January in
the year last preceding the year in which the ex-
change of instruments of ratification takes place.
Accordingly, upon its entry into force with the
exchange of instruments of ratification, the con-
vention became effective retroactively on and from
January 1, 1947.
As specified in article I, the taxes to which the
convention is made applicable are (a) in the case
of the United States, the Federal income taxes,
and (b) in the case of the Netherlands, for the
application of specified provisions, the income tax
and the Netherlands taxes credited against it, the
corporation tax and the Netherlands taxes credited
against it, the property tax, the tax on fees of
directors and managers of corporations, the capital
accretions tax, and the extraordinary capital tax.
The purpose of the convention, like that of
existing income-tax conventions of the United
States with Canada, France, Sweden, and the
{Continued on page HG)
Department of State Bulletin
Cooperative Exchange Programs Under the Smith-Mundt Act
BY WILLIAM C. JOHNSTONE, JR.'
If our essential freedoms are to prevail, if other
peoples are to have the opportunity to enjoy their
fruits, we in America must act more effectively to
increase the knowledge of our principles and of
the institutions founded on them among other
peoples. And we nmst act more effectively to
provide greater opportunities for people from
other nations to come here and see for themselves.
Only when ideas and knowledge are exchanged
across national boundaries — only when peoples of
different nations meet face to face and become
acquainted with each other can international un-
derstanding be developed as a fomidation for
peace.
These facts of international life have long been
recognized. Now, however, we are confronted
with the fact that national boundaries are increas-
ing!}- becoming barriers to exchange of ideas and
knowledge. More and more people ai'e barred
from understanding America's intentions and ex-
periencing our freedoms. AVe can no longer af-
ford to observe passively the rapidly shrinking
area of freedom throughout the world. We must
actively combat the forces that would chain men's
minds by dogmas. Our attack demands the con-
certed effort of all groups in our society — both
citizen and government.
Fortunately, the American people are taking
positive action.- Now for the first time in our his-
tory we are engaged in a comprehensive, coopera-
tive progi-am on a world-wide scale with the
objective of building mutual understanding among
I peoples. This program was clearly and boldly
1 laid down in the Smith-Mundt Act, passed l)y
Congress in January 1948. This law authorized
the Department of State in cooperation with pri-
vate agencies, to undertake an information and
educational exchange program throughout the
world designed to tell the story of American life
and institutions bj^ means of j^ress, radio, and mo-
tion pictures, and to provide for the two-way
J exchange of persons and materials in the educa-
' tional, cultural, scientific, and technical fields. It
is this latter program with which I am directly as-
sociated— the educational exchange program —
which I should like to discuss with you for the
next few minutes, for I believe that a quick look
at the current and planned activities in this field
will serve to underline the increased responsibili-
ties which will naturally accrue to higher educa-
tion as well as government.
December 72, 1948
As of today we are operating 64 United States
Libraries abroad, and it is anticipated that by
the end of the current fiscal year we will have 83
libraries in 52 countries. These are small libraries
designed to provide for the people of other coun-
tries a cross section of all aspects of American life
through selected books, pamphlets, and other ma-
terials. Located in the principal cities all over
the world, they are free and open to anyone who
wants to know about the United States. American
staff" members are ready to answer all sorts of
questions — and believe me they do ! Teacher's
come into these libraries and are able to get ac-
curate information for presentation in their class-
rooms. Professors come to read American profes-
sional journals to find out what their colleagues
in the United States are doing. Scientists come
to acquaint themselves with the latest develop-
ments in the United States. There is not a single
library in which some of the regular visitors are
not government officials of the country in which
the library is located. They find valuable ex-
perience in all of the developments of American
government which often gives them a clue to some
problems with which they are immediately con-
cerned.
And so they come in all walks of life — often
with very simi)le questions — a dairy farmer wants
to subscribe to an American dairy farming maga-
zine; an exporter wants to know about advertising
in American periodicals ; a dentist wants to know
how he can purchase American dental equipment.
But these questions — simple as they are — illustrate
a great desire to use American know-how and very
often lead to an interest in many other aspects of
American life. Our overseas officers utilize this
interest by arranging for film showings, exhibits,
concerts, and lectures in the libraries. Thus the
natural interest of people abroad about all things
American is gradually turned into a better under-
standing of American ways and institutions.
Ten years ago in Latin America we began to
give aid to a new kind of institution — new at least,
in American relations with foreign countries. As
' Address made before the Regional Conference on
Higher Education, National Education Association, in New
York City on Dec. 3, 1948, and released to the press on the
same date.
' For additional information on the program see Coop-
eration in the Americas (Department of State liublication
2971), and Intirnntirmal Education Exclianyc (Depart-
ment of State publication 3312).
739
THE RECORD OF THE WEEIf
part of the Good Neighbor Policy, we have assisted
local cultural institutes founded by the joint efforts
of resident Americans and nationals of the country
who have dedicated themselves to sponsoring pro-
grams of cultural interchange toward the end of
creating improved understanding among peoples
of the Western Hemisphere. Today there are 28
of these cultural institutes in the Latin American
countries. They have attracted people in all walks
of life to their English teaching classes and to their
exhibits, lectures, music, and other activities. I
should like to cite an example which I feel is typi-
cal of the impact of this activity.
Recently an eminent Brazilian engineer came
to this country for the first time, mider a State
Department grant, for a three months' tour of the
country. He was primarily interested in agricul-
tural clevelopments in Brazil. For a number of
years he has been president of our cultural center
in Sao Paulo, and his interest in and knowledge of
the United States is quite extensive. Before he
left this country he was asked what was the out-
standing thing he found. His answer would amaze
the average American, for he named our rural free
delivery service. It was his contention that this
service provided by our Government was not only
a means of educating a people, a means by which
they could keep in contact with their friends, but
also an evidence of our democracy. He was sur-
prised to find that farmers in outlying rural re-
gions were able to receive their mail in open, un-
locked mail boxes. He is taking back that idea to
his country.
In Latin American countries American-spon-
sored schools have been established. At first they
were started to provide an American education for
the children of American residents, private and
public officials in the country. (Tradually. they
were opened to the children of the people of the
country itself. We have provided aid in various
forms to these schools and in each country they
stand as an example of American education. In
one country, for example, the whole educational
system is undergoing a revision because of the ad-
vanced methods and techniques used in the Ameri-
can school. Under the Smith-Mundt Act, we pro-
pose to extend this aid to schools and American-
sponsored educational institutions throughout the
world.
By far the largest effort, however, is being put
into interchange of persons between the United
States and other countries. Here again we have
been carrying on a program in Latin America for
ten years. During World War II, the State De-
partment was authorized to carry on this program
with China and with certain countries of the Near
and Middle East. Therefore, we have a consider-
able experience now when we propose to extend
this program to the whole world. This is the kind
of a program in which cooperation of government
and private organizations is particularly essential
740
to its success. It involves two types of exchanges —
interchange of scientific and technical personnel
between the United States and other countries and
interchange of teachers, scholars, and students. In
carrying out its responsibilities in exchange of
scientific and technical personnel, the State De-
partment works through an Interdepartmental
Committee on Scientific and Cultural Cooi^eration
composed of representatives of the other federal
agencies. This program provides for the exchange
of scientific and technical personnel, the detail of
American governmental experts from many of our
government agencies in Washington to other
countries to assist them in a variety of specialized
problems. It involves the training of government
officials from other countries and bringing younger
persons here to be trained in a particular specialty
to go back to their own countries to put into prac-
tice the results of their American experience. Let
me cite some examples.
Several years ago there was an outbreak of
l^oliomyelitis in Ecuador. The Ecuadoran Gov-
ernment asked the United States to send an
orthopedic surgeon to work with their public-
health administration there and a technician from
our Children's Bureau in the United States to fol-
low up this oi'thopedic surgeon in organizing hos-
pital techniques for getting the children suffering
from this disease back on their feet. After this
children's specialist had been seen on the streets of
the capital for a number of months, her work was
reported in the newspapei'S. She was approached
one day by a taxi driver, who doffed his hat and
said : "Sehorita, my fellow taxi drivers want to tell
you how grateful we are for the work you are
doing for the children of my country. They asked
me to tell you that if any time of day or night you
need a taxi, they are at your service". Appre-
ciation comes in strange unexpected ways, but it is
no less important because of this.
Incidentally, this Children's Bureau specialist
stayed on to reorganize the national school of
social service in Ecuador and trained most of the
faculty. Only last June the school graduated its
first class of 17 specialists, most of whom will go
to work for the Ecuadoran Government to attack
the problem of poliomyelitis.
A number of years ago El Salvador requested
our assistance in developing her agriculture, of
which coffee is the principal commodity. Our
scientists, under a mutual agreement with the
Salvadoran Government, set up an agricultural
experiment and demonstration station in 1942.
One of the results of its work was the development
of a dairy feed from the waste pulp of the coffee
bean. When mixed with banana leaves and other
products to make it palatable, the cattle will eat
it, and it serves as a substitute for a large per-
centage of corn in their balanced ration. The re-
sult of this discovery is that we have added a dairy
feed to the hemisphere equal in quantity, the De-
Deparfment of State Bulletin
I
parlnicnt of A<:ric'ultiU'e estimates, to 34 million
buslicls of corn yearly. This is important to the
economy of all coffee-producing countries, and in-
ternationally noteworthj' in view of the world-
wide short aire of corn and other feed grain.
The way in which the various agencies of our
government ai'e brouglit to bear on a specific prob-
lem is well illustrated by the preparations made
for tlie 1950 census of the Americas. This census
rei)resents the first systematic survey of its kind
and promises to yield important results. The
Bureau of the Census of the Department of Com-
merce, with assistance from the Bureau of Agri-
cultural Economics of the Department of
Agriculture, the National Office of Vital Statistics
of the Federal Security Agency, and the Bureau
of Labor Statistics of the Department of Labor,
has developed a coordinated program for giving
technical assistance to officials and agencies in the
Latin American countries for taking the censuses
of population, agriculture, industry, business, and
mining.
In the integration of census work it is strength-
ening the statistical staff of the governments of
the countries concerned. To implement this pro-
gram American Government agencies have sent
one or more consultants to each of the other Ameri-
can republics. More than 100 technicians from
other American republics have been awarded
grants to come to the United States and work with
our government agencies for advanced study and
training. Many of these have returned to their
own countries and now hold responsible posts in
this field in their countries. Special trainees have
been sent at the expense of their own government,
and by 1950 more than 200 men and women in the
other American republics will have received
special census training.
It is in the field of academic exchanges that the
cooperative nature of our educational exchange
program becomes most apparent. In this pro-
gram private institutions in the United States,
the State Department, foreign governments and
private institutions in foreign countries join in a
cooperative undertaking which has as its purpose
the exchange of ideas and knowledge and the crea-
tion of a better understanding of the United
States by peoples abroad and of a better under-
standing of other countries by Americans.
This whole program of academic exchanges has
been further stimulated by the existence of the
Fulbright Act under which proceeds from the sale
of American surplus property abroad in foreign
currencies are earmarked under an agreement be-
tween the LTnited States and the comitry concerned
for educational pur])oses. Twenty-four countries
are eligible to participate un<ler this act. AVe
have signed agreements with eight and four pro-
grams are now in operation. We expect that
twenty countries will have program operations
going by the end of this fiscal year. Because of
December ?2, 1948
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
the existence of the Fulbright Act and foreign
currency funds available in these twenty coun-
tries for purposes of academic exchanges, it will
enable us to plan not a one-year program but a
two-, three- or four-year program of exchanges.
However, academic exchanges will not be confined
to the countries participating in the Fulbright
program. The new authorization under the
Smith-Mundt Act provides for carrying out on
a world-wide ba.sis the exchange program which
has been limited for the past ten years to the West-
ern Hemisphere.
I do not think it necessary to justify the value
of exchange of students, teachers, and scholars to
this distinguished audience. The immediate re-
sults as well as the long-term effects are plainly
evident. Let me cite two examples.
Two years ago we were asked if we could facili-
tate the visit of a young doctor from Iraq to this
country for purposes of medical research. It was
possible to arrange a two-year grant for thirty-
year old Dr. Suad Niazi, and he was awarded a
tuition fellow.ship at the University of Minnesota
to do research toward the doctor of philosophy
degree in medicine. A little over a month ago, at
the October meeting of the Clinical Congress of
the American College of Surgeons in Los Angeles,
Dr. Niazi announced the discovery of a test for
cancer which may by early diagnosis save thou-
sands of lives. This test has proved 90 percent ac-
curate in diagnosing G2 varieties of cancer. Be-
cause he is here on a two-year gi'ant, he will have
the opportunity to conduct further research in
this most vital problem in medicine, and it is his
hope that he can find much more of value in the
attack on the disease of cancer. The small invest-
ment which was made in his study in the United
States both by the government and by a private
university has been justified a hundred times by
the discovery which this brilliant young doctor
has made.
Two and one half years ago, the State Depart-
ment assisted in the development of an idea of ex-
change of teachers between Great Britain and the
United States at the primary and secondary level.
This was an official undertaking on behalf of the
British and American Governments in which as-
sistance of private organizations was gladly given
in a cooperative undertaking wliich involved not
only private organizations but our public school
systems in forty of the forty-eight states. This is
the third year of an exchange of teachers program
administered by the United States Office of Edu-
cation at the request of the State Department.
More than a hundred American teachers have
taught in Great Britain and a hundred English
teachers have taught in the schools of the United
States. The results of this are often startling.
A woman teacher, for instance, from the schools
of Oklahoma City was assigned to teach in a slum
district in the industrial town of Leeds, in Eng-
741
THE RECORD Of THE WBEK
land. It may have been a cliscoura<2;ing prospect
to the woman who had been used to the fine physi-
cal equipment of the Oklahoma City Schools.
However, she was not discouraged and because
she represented America as well as her school, it
was not long before the city of Leeds and Okla-
homa City began to get acquainted. As a result
of her efforts school children in both cities began
exchanging letters and teachers began exchanging
ideas. Again, as a result of the visit of an English
teacher to a small town in Texas, 1,700 Texas
school teachers and 1,700 British teachers have
now begun a steady correspondence with the ex-
change of ideas, materials, and books. Such
exchanges can only result in a far better under-
standing of each others' problems in the countries
concerned.
I believe that one of the unique features of
this Government's undertaking is its cooperative
aspect. The basic legislation authorizing this
program enjoins the State Department to utilize
the facilities, the services, and the advice of private
agencies and institutions throughout the country.
But it goes still further. It provides for two
advisory commissions — one to advise on our in-
formation policy abroad and the other to advise
on our educational exchange policies and pro-
grams. These two commissions, appointed by the
President and composed of distinguished private
citizens who serve without pay, not only recom-
mend and advise to the Secretary of State quar-
terly on the conduct of these worlcl-wide programs,
but are required to report twice yearly to the
Congress on what the State Department has done
to put into effect their recommendations. By the
establishment of these commissions the public in-
terest is officially recognized in the conduct of
foreign relations in an entirely new way. The
keen interest already evident on the part of mem-
bers of the commissions is a healthy sign. It is
heartening assurance that this unique approach is
a step toward making representative goverimient
even more representative.
I have described some of the educational ex-
change activities of the State Department and
the proposed plans to expand these activities to
new areas under terms of the Smith-Mundt Act.
I hope that you have not gained the erroneous
impression that the role of government is an
exclusive or dominating one. Nothing could be
further from the truth. The act itself not only
defines the limits of governmental participating
but specifically urges that fullest use be made of
private facilities. In fact, the act is so devised
as to permit the government to encourage and
assist private agencies and institutions to expand
rather than diminish their activities. Those di-
rectly responsible for conduct of the program
affirm this policy. Mr. George V. Allen, Assistant
Secretary of State for public affairs, recently re-
742
affirmed the opinion that "government's role
should remain supplemental .... and that it
should be limited to those fields where private
industry cannot or does not wish to enter." The
support of a wide variety of private agencies
and institutions as well as the support of the public
generally is vital to the success of this undertak-
ing. Your Government needs — your Government
welcomes this support.
Fellowships for Research and Study In
Other Americas Available
[Released to the press November 30]
Opportunities for a limited number of Amer-
ican graduate students to obtain fellowships from
the United States Government for study or re-
search in the other American republics were an-
nounced on November 30 by the Department of
State and the United States Office of Education.
The two programs under which these grants-in-
aid are offered are :
1. The travel and maintenance grant program.
These grants are supplementary in nature and
awarded to students who have obtained grants-in-
aid, veteran benefits, scholarships, fellowships, or
travel grants from private organizations and insti-
tutions, or who have limited funds of their own.
Grants cover a minimum period of six months to
a maximum of one year and may be renewed when
desirable and necessary to the completion of work
begiui, provided funds are available for such ex-
tension. The amounts of the awards will vary
with the individual needs of the students and the
cost of living in the country in which study is to
be undertaken. Applicants should write to the
Division of International Educational Relations,
American Republics Branch, United States Office
of Education, Washington 25, D.C. The final date
for receipt of applications for these fellowships
is March 15, 1949. Selections will be made in
April 1949, and notification of awards will be made
as soon as possible thereafter.
2. Fellowships for United States graduate stu-
dents under the Buenos Aires convention. Under
this program, two graduate students are exchanged
each year between the United States and each of
the republics signatory to the convention. This
year the following countries have indicated that
they will receive students from the United States :
Brazil, Chile, Colombia, Costa Rica, the Domini-
can Republic, Haiti, Honduras, Mexico, Paraguay,
Peru, Venezuela. Transportation to and from
the host country is paid by the United States Gov-
ernment. The host government pays tuition and
a monthly allowance. Grants are for one year of
study or research. Api^licants should write to
Department of State Bulletin
the Division of International Educational Rela-
tions, American Republics Branch, United States
Otlicc of Education, Washington 25, D.C. The
final date for receipt of applications is January
1, 1949.
Qt/aJificaflon.s : In order to apply students should
have the following qualifications for either pro-
gram : United States citizenship, a B.A. or its
equivalent, the initiation or completion of some
graduate study, a satisfactory knowledge of the
language of the host country, good health, moral
character, intellectual ability, and a suitable plan
of stndy or research approved by his supervisor
or adviser. All other considerations being equal,
students under 35 years of age and veterans will
be given preference.
Mineral-Geologic Survey Program
With Brazil Extended
[Released to the press November 30]
The Department of State announced on Novem-
ber 30 that a cooperative niineralogical-geological
survey program between the Governments of
Brazil and the United States has been extended
for a ten-year period.
The American Embassy at Rio de Janeiro in-
formed the Department that the program, origi-
nally established in 1940, was extended by agree-
ment between the Embassy and the Brazilian
Foreign Office on November 26, 1948.
The general purposes of the cooperative pro-
gram are as follows:
(a) to appraise the mineral resources of Brazil,
both as regards those which now constitute a part
of the trade between the United States of America
and Brazil as well as those which may in the future
enter into this trade;
(&) to prepare geologic, topogi-aphic, and other
maps which may be used as a scientific basis for
the development of Brazil's mineral resources ;
(c) to encourage the exchange of scientific
knowledge and techniques between the two coun-
tries, particularly as regards aerial geologic
mapping, topographic mapping, economic geology,
and ground water and mineralogical investiga-
tions;
(d) to make technological investigations as to
the industrial use of Brazilian mineral ores, both
for internal consumption as well as for purposes
of export trade;
(e) to study the problems connected with
prospecting, research, mining, processing, and
combustion of Brazilian coals.
The new agi'eement is to remain in effect for a
period of ten years from the date of its entry into
force — that is, ten years from November 26, 1948.
It may be terminated by either of the Governments
December 12, 7948
THE RECORD OF TH£ WEEK
on 60 days' written notice. The implementation
of the agreement will be carried forward by the
Bureau of Mines and the Geological Survey of the
Department of the Interior on behalf of the Gov-
ernment of the United States of America and by
the Departamento Nacional da Prodn(,'ao Mineral
of tlie Ministry of Agriculture of the Government
of the United States of Brazil. Salaries and ex-
penses of personnel of the respective agencies win
be paid by the agencies. Transportation costs oi
U.S. personnel in Brazil will be defrayed by ine
Government of Brazil,
Diplomatic Relations Between
U.S. and Peru Continued
[Released to the press November 21]
The United States Government has decided to
continue normal diplomatic relations with Peru.
It has therefore instructed the American Ambas-
sador in Peru, Harold H. Tittmann, Jr., to reply
to a note dated October 31 addressed to him by the
new Peruvian Government.
This decision is in line with resolution no. 35
adopted at tlie Bogottl conference early this year.
This resolution states that continuity in diplo-
matic relations is desirable and that the establish-
ment, maintenance, or renewal of diplomatic rela-
tions with a i^articular government does not in any
way imply any judgment as to the domestic policy
of such a government.
The note received by Ambassador Tittmann
states that the new Government of Peru will
scrupulously observe that country's international
obligations. It also expi'esses a hope that the
traditional cordial relations between our two coun-
tries will continue. Our note in reply expresses
satisfaction over these statements made by the
Government of Peru.
President of Cuba Visits United States
President Carlos Prio of Cuba arrived in Wash-
ington on December 8 for a visit in the United
States. President Prio was honored at a dinner
given by President Truman at the Blair House, and
during his stay in Washington visited points of
interest in the surrounding area. The members
of the Council of the Organization of American
States entertained him at a special luncheon meet-
ing on December 9 and the Acting Secretary of
State gave a dinner for him on the same evening.
On December 10 a luncheon was given by the Na-
tional Press Club and following a visit to the
Naval Academy at Annapolis, the Ambassador of
Cuba and Seiiora de Belt held a reception in honor
of the Cuban President. Mr. Belt was scheduled
to depart from Washington on December 11 for
New York and to leave for Habana the following
day.
743
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Mexican Zoologist Visits United States
Jose Alvarez del Villar, professor of zoologj' at
the National School of Sciences, National Poly-
teclinic Institute, Mexico, D.F., recently arrived in
Washington as the recipient of a grant-in-aid
under the travel-grant program of the Department
of State in cooperation with the Fish and Wildlife
Service of the Department of the Interior. After
a short visit in Washington, he will go to La Jolla,
California, for approximately two months of re-
search at the Scripps Institution of Oceanography,
where he will collaborate with Dr. Carl L. Hubbs
in completing for publication a monograph on the
fresh-water fishes of northeastern Mexico. His
itinerary will also include Chicago, Urbana, and
New York. He will remain in the United States
until the end of February 1949.
U.S. and Canada Agree on 1948 Program for
Canadian Potato Crop
Through an exchange of notes completed on
November 23, 1948, the United States and Canada
entered into an agreement whereby the Canadian
Government will institute a price-support and ex-
port-permit program for the 194:8 Canadian potato
crop. Under this program there will be no further
exports of table-stock potatoes to the United States
and the program will be designed to channel ex-
ports of certified seed potatoes into seed outlets
only in the United States. The agreement was
reached following a series of conferences between
Canadian officials and officials of the United States
Departments of State, Agriculture, and Treasury
(including the Customs Bureau).
Restriction of export of seed potatoes will be
accomplished by the Canadian Government
through an exjDort-permit system. The export per-
mits for seed potatoes will be issued to Canadian
shippers on a time-schedule basis, designed to
direct shipment of Canadian certified seed potatoes
into those states where there has been a traditional
demand for certified seed potatoes for actual use
for seed, and only during a short period immedi-
ately preceding the normal planting date. Before
obtaining such permits Canadian exporters will be
required to prove that they have firm orders from
bo7ia -fide users of Canadian seed potatoes in the
United States and that their sales contracts contain
a clause restraining the buyers from diverting to
other destinations or uses.
In connection with the institution of such a pro-
gram by Canada, the United States indicates that
it will not hereafter imjiose any quantitative limi-
tations or fees on the 1948 crop of Canadian
potatoes.
In Canada's prompt and effective cooperation
with the United States in this matter another in-
744
stance has been provided of the readiness of the
two countries to take joint action to meet problems
of mutual concern. Canada, in entering into this
agreement, has assisted the United States ma-
terially by recognizing the adverse effect which
unrestricted imiaorts of Canadian potatoes would
have on the United States potato programs.
For text of the exchange of notes, see Depart-
ment of State jDress release 954 of November 26,
1948.
U.S. Invited To Convene a Conference for
Negotiating International Wheat Agreement
[Releoseil to the press December 3]
Cliarles F. Wilson, Chairman of the Prepara-
tory Committee appointed by the Governments
of the countries which signed the International
Wheat Agreement last March, announced that the
Committee met in Washington on December 3
and agi-eed to invite the Government of the United
States to convene a conference in Washington on
January 25, 1949, for the purpose of negotiating
an International Wheat Agreement.
The countries represented on the Preparatory
Committee are Australia, Benelux (Belgium, the
Netherlands, and Luxembourg), Brazil, Canada,
Egj'pt, France, India, the United Kingdom, and
the United States.
Proclamations Relating to Migratory Bird
Treaty Act
The President has issued the following proc-
lamations : Closed Area Under the Migratory Bird
Treaty Act, Massachusetts, on October 18, 1948;
Modification of Closed Area Under the Migratory
Bird Treaty Act, Oregon, on October 20, 1948 ; and
Amendment of Regulations Relating to Migratory
Birds and Game Mammals on October 30, 1948,
and on November 5, 1948. For texts of these proc-
lamations see 13 Federal Register 6115, 6191, 6465,
and 6549 respectively.
Letters of Credence
New Zealand
Sir Carl Berendsen, K.C.M.G., presented his
ci-edentials to the President as Ambassador of New
Zealand on December 1. For texts of the Ambas-
sador's remarks and the President's reply, see De-
IDartment of State press release 967 of December
1, 1948. Since July 12, 1944, Sir Carl had served
as Minister to the United States.
Department of State Bulletin
i
Ratifications of Chinese Commercial
Treaty Exclianged
[Released to tlic press November 30]
Ratifications of the treaty o,f friendship, com-
merce, and navigation between the United States
and China were exchanged at Nanking on Novem-
ber oO. Under its own provisions, the treaty be-
came effective on the day on which the ratifications
were exchanged.
This treaty was signed at Nanking on November
4, 1946, ratified by the Chinese Government on
November 11, 1946, and agreed to by the United
Stales Senate on June 2, 1948.
This is the first comprehensive commercial
treaty to be conchided by either Government since
the war. The United States and China signed
their first treaty of peace, amity, and commerce
in 1844. The present treaty is basically similar
to treaties of friendship, commerce, and naviga-
tion now in force between the United States and
various other countries. It is believed to offer
an adequate basis for the development of cultural,
business, and trade relations to the mutual advan-
tage of the two countries. The treaty contains
articles relating to rights of individuals and cor-
THE RECORD OF THB WEEK
porations; exchange of goods; navigation; and
general matters.
Under its own provisions the treaty will remain
in effect for five years from the day it comes into
force, and will remain in force thereafter subject
to termination on one year's notice by either
government.
Madame Chiang Kai-shek Arrives in U.S.
A United States naval transport plane was
made available to Madame Chiang Kai-shek at her
request for transportation for her and a small
party to Wasliington in connection with the criti-
cal situation in China. Madame Chiang departed
from Shanghai on November 28 and arrived in
Washington on December 1.
Change in Name of the Netherlands
East Indies
Effective September 20, 1948, the Netherlands
East Indies (Netherlands Indies) is to be known
as Indonesia. The cliange in nomenclature is em-
bodied in the revision of the constitution of the
Kingdom of the Netherlands.
Caribbean Commission Releases Two Technical Studies
The Industrial Development of Puerto Rico and the
Virgin Islands of the United States
A publication entitled Itidusfrial Development
of Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands of the
United States dated July 1948 is now available.
The report contains chapters on the following sub-
jects : background of Puerto Rican economy ; na-
tional income; balance of payments; exports and
imports; fiscal structure of the Puerto Rican Gov-
ermnent ; Government influence on industry ; man-
power, wages, hours, and working conditions;
sources of fuel and power; transportation and
conununications; sources of materials; growth of
production; expansion of existing industries; new
enterprises; capital for industrial development.
The Sugar Trade of the Caribbean
The first of a series of bulletins on external trade
of the Cai'ibbean, The Sugar Trade of the Cartb-
hean, was released on November 13 by the
Caribbean Commission.
According to the Commission's release, the
major conclusions which emerge from the statistics
[uesented for the trade in sugar and its by-prod-
ucts during the years 1935-1945 may be summar-
ized as follows:
December ?2, 7948
Despite the war, exports of sugar had increased
by 1945 as compared with 1935 by one tenth in
volume and by two fifths in value. At the height
of the war, in 1942, exports declined by 3 per-
cent in volume and, in 1940, were 6 percent below
the 1935 figure in value. The French Islands were
a notable exception to this rule, while, at the other
extreme, the increase was steady and virtually un-
interrupted in Barbados and Jamaica.
Largely as a result of the war, exports of rum
increased considerably. By 1944 they had dou-
bled in quantity and were five and a half times
as much in value. Tlie increase was nothing short
of phenomenal in Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands,
Barbados, Trinidad, and Tobago.
Exports of molasses experienced a considerable
decline. They reached their lowest point in 1943,
when they were only one fifth in volume and one
third in value as compared with the exports for
1935.
The total value of exports of sugar and by-prod-
ucts increased by more than one half during the
period under review.
The increase of exports of rum effected a con-
siderable change in the relative importance of
sugar and rum in the total exports of sugar and
by-products. Fi-om one fourteenth of the total
745
THE FOREIGN SERVICE
exports of sugar and by-products in 1935, exports
of rum increased to one quarter in 1943 and three
tenths in 1944. Exports of sugar, more than four
fiftlis of the total exports of sugar and by-products
in 1935, declined to two thirds in 1944.
The comparative increase in export prices of
raw sugar, 27 percent by 1945, was over-shadowed
by the comparative increase in import prices of
refined sugar, 164 percent by 1945.
With the restriction of imports during the war,
refining of sugar was developed to a considerable
extent, not only to meet local needs but also to
supply the needs of the nonsugar-producing Carib-
bean territories. The increase was particularly
noticeable in the case of Barbados and Jamaica,
whereas in Puerto Rico substantial quantities of
refined sugar have regularly been exported.
An interesting sidelight on the rum trade is the
considerable exchange that takes place between the
sugar-producing areas. However, the market for
Jamaica rum is, in the most literal sense of the
phrase, the world market.
These two publications may be procured from
the Secretary General, Caribbean Commission,
Kent House, Port-of-Spain, Trinidad, B.W.I., for
$1.50 and $1.00 respectively.
Double Taxation — Continued from page 738
United Kingdom, is the elimination, so far as prac-
ticable, of double taxation which otherwise would
result from the imposition and collection of taxes
upon the same income. The convention also es-
tablishes certain procedures for the exchange of
information between the two countries in relation
to taxation with a view to the prevention of fiscal
evasion. Through liberal and reciprocal use of
the method of eliminating double taxation
through exemption at source, the convention with
the Netherlands conforms closely to the i^attern
of the income-tax convention between the United
States and the United Kingdom. Likewise, the
principle of the United States tax-credit system is
adopted in the convention on a reciprocal basis.
Tlie convention contains special provisions rep-
resenting a unilateral concession on the part of
the Netherlands, relating to the Netherlands
capital-accretions tax and Netherlands extraor-
dinary-capital tax and granting substantial bene-
fits to American citizens and certain other persons
who were formerly Netherlands residents.
A proclamation of the convention will be issued
by the President. The English and Dutch texts
of the convention will be printed in the Treaties
and Other International Acts Series published by
the Department of State. Meanwhile, the English
' For texts of the Ambassador's remarks and the Presi-
dent's reply, see Department of State press release 938 of
Nov. 23, 1948.
746
text may be found in Senate Executive I, 80th
Congress, second session.
The convention was ratified by the United States
subject to three reservations, which were accepted
by the Government of the Kingdom of the Nether-
lands and which read as follows :
1. The Government of the United States of
America does not accept article XI of the conven-
tion relating to gains from the sale or exchange of
capital assets.
2. The Government of the United States of
America does not accept article XIII of the con-
vention relating to United States taxation of the
undistributed earnings, j^rofits, income, or surplus
of a Netherlands corporation.
3. The Government of the United States of
America does not accept article XIV of the con-
vention relating to settlement of unpaid United
States income-tax liability unless there be elim-
inated therefrom (a) references now appearing
therein to article XIII and (b) any language
which might prevent the taxation by the United
States of capital gains, if any, taxable under the
revenue laws of the United States for the respec-
tive years in which such gains were realized.
THE FOREIGN SERVICE
U.S. and Afghanistan Raise Diplomatic
Missions to Embassy Status
Afghan Ambassador Presents Credentials ^
[Released to the press November 24]
The Afghan Legation in Washington was
elevated to Embassy status on November 23,
when the Ambassador Sardar Mohamed Naim
Khan presented his letters of credence to the
President.
The Government of Afghanistan indicated its
willingness to exchange Ambassadors on March 18,
1948, and our mission in Kabul became an Em-
bassy, with Ely E. Palmer as the first Ambassador
of the United States on June 5.
Diplomatic relations between the two countries
were established on May 4, 1935, when the first
American Minister presented his credentials to the
King of Afghanistan. The first Afghan Minister
to the United States was received by the President
on June 4, 1943.
Consular Offices
The American Consulate at Cochabamba, Bo-
livia, was closed to the public on October 29, 1948.
The American Vice Consulate at La Guaira,
Venezuela, was closed to the public on November
22, 1948. The vice consular district for La Guaira
has been assigned to Caracas. A Consular Agent
assumed charge at La Guaira.
Deparfmenf of State Bulletin
PUBLICATIONS
Department of State
For sale hp the Siipcrintiiidnit of Donunrnt.i. Oovcrtiincnt
Priniino Office, Washiniiton 2'), D.C. Address refjuests
direct to the Superintendent of Doeuinents, except in the
ease of free pultlieutinns, tchieh may be obtained from
the Department of State.
International Telecommunication Conferences. Atlantic
City, New Jersey. May-Oit(>l)er lt^47. Inteniatiimal Or-
ganization ami Confereuce Series I, 4. I'ub. 3177. 192
pp. 40<*.
Report of tlie United State.s Delegations to the In-
ternational Radio Conference, tlie International Tele-
couinuinication Conference, and the International
Conference on High Frequency Broadcasting, with
selected documents.
80th Congress and the United Nations. International
Organization and Conference Series III, 17. Pub. 3302.
66 pp. 35^.
An itemized discussion, with pertinent appendixes,
of all legislation regarding the United Nations con-
sidered and passed during the two sessions of the
80th Congress.
Settlement of Pecuniary Claims Against Yugoslavia.
Treaties and Other International Acts Series 1803. Pub.
3307. 9 pp. 5?».
Agreement between the United States and Yugo-
slavia, and Accompanying Aide-Memoire and Notes —
Signed at Washington July 10, 1948; entered into
force July 19, 1948.
Diplomatic List, November 1948. Pub. 3342. 198 pp. 300
a copy ; $3.25 a year domestic, $4.50 a year foreign.
Monthly list of foreign diplomatic representatives
in Washington, with their addresses.
Current United Nations Documents: A
Selected Bibliography'
Security Council
OfBcial Records, Third Year :
No. 101, 344th meeting: 4 August 1948. 27 pp.
printed. 25^.
No. 102, 34.'^tli and 34eth meetings : 10th August 1948.
41 pp. printed. 40(*.
No. 103, 347th meeting : 12 August 1948 ; 348th and
34;>th meetings : 13 August 1948. 46 pp. printed.
SO^".
No. 104, 350th meeting: 16 August 1948. 19 pp.
printed. 200.
No. 107, S53rd, 3.54th and 35oth meetings : 19 August
1948. 56 pp. printed. 600.
■ No. 108, 356th meeting: 30 August 1948. 11 pp.
printed. 10(f.
Supplement for August 1948. 107 pp. printed.
$1.65.
Economic and Social Council
Official Records : Third Year, Seventh Session. Supple-
ment No. 6. Report of the Ad Hoc Committee on
Genocide. 5 April to 10 May 1948. E/794. 19 pp.
printed. 20^.
Trusteeship Council
Resolutions Adopted by the Trusteeship Council during its
Third Session from 16 June to 5 August 1948. 7 pp.
printed. 100. T/215.
Visiting Mission to the Trust Territory of Ruanda-Urundi
under Belgian Administration. Report - Annex IV :
Petitions. T/217/Add.l, 31 October 1948. 82 pp.
mimeo.
' Printed materials may be secured in the United States
from the International Documents Service, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 2960 Broadway, New York City. Other ma-
terials (mimeographed, or processed documents) may be
consulted at certain designated libraries in the United
States.
December 12, J948
747
The United Nations and
Specialized Agencies Page
ProiJosal To Establish Committee To Study
Berlin Currency Problem:
Text of Proposal of President of the Secur-
ity Council 719
Text of Three-Power Reply 719
Tripartite Communique to Committee of
Experts 720
Resolutions on the Special Committee on the
Balkans:
Conventions and Refugees 722
Greek Children 722
Discussion of Israeli Application for Member-
ship. Statement by Philip C. Jessup . 723
Resolution Establishing Conciliation Com-
mission for Palestine 726
The U.S. in the U.N 728
U.N. Documents: A Selected Bibliography . 747
General Policy
U.S. Protests Hungarian Seizure of American
Oil Interests. Note to Hungarian Min-
istry for Foreign Affairs 736
Diplomatic Relations Between U.S. and Peru
Continued 743
President of Cuba Visits United States ... 743
Letters of Credence: New Zealand 744
Madame Chiang Kai-shek Arrives in U.S. . . 745
Change in Name of the Netherlands East
Indies 745
U.S. and Afghanistan Raise Diplomatic Mis-
sions to Embassy Status 746
Treaty Information
International Joint Commission Hearings on
Pollution of Boundary Waters .... 732
Double Taxation Conventions With Den-
mark and the Netherlands Ratified . . 738
Mineral-Geologic Survey Program With Bra-
zil Extended 743
Treaty Information — Continued Page
U.S. and Canada Agree on 1948 Program for
Canadian Potato Crop 744
U.S. Invited To Convene a Conference for
Negotiating International Wheat Agree-
ment 744
Proclamations Relating to Migratory Bird
Treaty Act 744
Ratifications of Chinese Commercial Treaty
Exchanged 745
Economic Affairs
Eighth World's Poultry Congress. Article
by W. D. Termohlen 731
Third North American Regional Broadcasting
Conference Scheduled 732
International Information and
Cultural Affairs
Cooperative Exchange Programs Under the
Smith-Mundt Act. Address by William
C. Johnstone, Jr 739
Fellowships for Research and Study in Other
Americas Available 742
Mexican Zoologist Visits United States . . . 744
Occupation Matters
Views on Soviet Action Prior to Berlin Elec-
tion. Exchange of Letters Between
Marshal Sokolovsky and General Clay . 734
German and Austrian Immigration Opened to
the United States 735
The Foreign Service
Consular Offices 746
Publications
Caribbean Commission Releases Two Tech-
nical Studies 745
Department of State 747
1
i
W. D. Termohlen, author of the article on the Eighth World's
Poultry Congress, is Director of the Poultry Branch of the Pro-
duction and Marketing Administration of the Department of
Agriculture, and was Chairman of the United States Delegation
to the Congress.
U. S. GOVERNHEKT PRINTING OFFICE; 194S
tBS3.
^Ae/ ^eha^t^teni/ ,€^ tHai&
GENERAL ASSEMBLY ACTION ON HUMAN RIGHTS
AND GENOCIDE:
Statement by Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt .... 751
Statement by Ernest A. Gross 755
U.S. POSITION ON UNANIMITY PRINCIPLE OF
THE CHARTER • Statement by Benjamin V. Cohen . 761
AMERICA'S ANSWER TO COMMUNIST PROPA-
GANDA ABROAD • By Douglas Schneider .... 772
REPORT ON THE FIRST SESSION OF THE GENERAL
COUNCIL OF IRO • Article by George L. Warren . 765
For complete contents see back cover
Vol. XIX, No. 494
December 19, 1948
W. S. SUPERINTENDENT Of UUtutaLNi*
JAN 10 1949
^ '^' ' , .^., bulletin
Vol. XIX, No. 494 • Publication 3374
December 19, 1948
%/ne ^e/ia/yi^ent yO£^ ^yiciCe
For sale by the Superintendont of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Oi33c8
Washington 26, D.O.
Price:
62 Issues, domestic $6, foreign $7.26
Single copy, 16 cents
Published with the approval of the
Director of the Bureau of the Budget
A'ote; Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citetion of the Department
or State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.
The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government toith information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
terruitional agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.
Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.
General Assembly Adopts Declaration of Human Rights
STATEMENT BY MRS. FRANKLIN D. ROOSEVELT'
U.S. Representative to the General Assembly
The long and meticulous study and debate of
which this universal Declaration of Human Rights
is the product means that it reflects the composite
views of the many men and governments who have
contributed to its formulation. Not every man
nor every government can liave wliat he wants in
a document of this kind. There are of course par-
ticuhir provisions in the declaration before us with
which we are not full}' satisfied. I have no doubt
this is true of other delegations, but taken as a
whole the Delegation of the United States believes
that this is a good document — even a great docu-
ment— and we propose to give it our full support.
The position of the United States on the various
parts of the declaration is a matter of record in the
Third Committee. I shall not burden the As-
sembly, and particularly my colleagues of the
Third Connnittee, with a restatement of that po-
sition here.
Certain provisions of the declaration are stated
in such broad terms as to be acceptable only be-
cause of the limitations in article 29 providing for
limitation on the exercise of the rights for the pur-
pose of meeting the requirements of morality,
public order, and the general welfare. An ex-
ample of this is the provision that everyone has
the right of equal access to the public service in
his country. Tlie basic principle of equality and
of nondiscrimination as to public employment is
sound, but it cannot be accepted without limita-
tions. My Government, for example, would con-
sider that this is unquestionably subject to
limitation in the interest of public order and the
general welfare. It would not consider that the
exclusion from public employment of persons
holding subversive political beliefs and not loyal
to the basic principles and practices of the con-
stitution and laws of the country would m any
way infringe upon this right.
Likewise, my Government has made it clear in
the course of the development of the declaration
that it does not consider that the economic and
social and cultural rights stated in the declaration
imply an obligation on governments to assure the
enjoyment of these rights by direct governmental
action. This was made quite clear in the Human
Eights Commission text of article 23 which served
as a so-called "umbrella" article to the articles on
economic and social rights. We consider that the
principle has not been affected by the fact that
December 19, 7948
this article no longer contains a reference to the
ai'ticles which follow it. This in no way affects
our whole-hearted support for the basic principles
of economic, social, and cultural rights set forth
in these articles.
In giving our approval to the declaration today,
it is of primary importance that we keep clearly
in mind the basic character of the document. It is
not a treaty ; it is not an international agreement.
It is not and does not purport to be a statement
of law or of legal obligation. It is a declaration
of basic principles of human riglits and freedoms,
to be stamped with the approval of the General As-
sembly by formal vote of its members, and to serve
as a common standard of achievement for all
peoples of all nations.
We stand today at the threshold of a great event
both in the life of the United Nations and in the
life of mankind, that is the approval by the Gen-
eral Assembly of tbe Universal Declaration of
Human Rights recommended by the Third Com-
mittee. This declaration may well become the in-
ternational Magna Carta of all men everywhere.
We hope its proclamation by the General As-
sembly will be an event comparable to the procla-
mation of the Declaration of the Rights of Man
by the French people in 1789, the adoption of the
Bill of Rights by tlie people of the United States,
and the adoption of comjaarable declarations at
different times in other countries.
At a time when there are so many issues on
which we find it difficult to reach a common basis
of agreement, it is a significant fact that 58 states
have found such a large measure of agreement in
the complex field of human rights. This must be
taken as testimony of our common aspiration first
voiced in tlie Charter of the United Nations to lift
men everywhere to a higher standard of life and
to a greater enjoyment of freedom. Man's desire
for peace lies behind this declaration. The reali-
zation that the flagrant violation of human rights
by Nazi and Fascist countries sowed the seeds of
the last world war has supplied the impetus for
the work which brings us to the moment of
achievement here today.
^ Made on Dec. 9, 1948, and released to the press on the
same date. For related material see Progress Report on
Human Riphts (Department of State pub. 3262) and An
International Bill of Human Rights (Department of State
pub. 3055).
751
THE UNITBD NATIONS AND SPCCIALIZED AGENCIES
In a recent speech in Canada, Gladstone Murray
said:
"The central fact is that man is fundamentally
a moral being, that the light we have is imperfect
does not matter so long as we are always trying to
improve it ... we are equal in sharing the
moral freedom that distinguishes us as men. Man's
status makes each individual an end in himself.
No man is by nature simply the servant of the state
or of another man . . . tlie ideal and fact of
freedom — and not technology — are the true dis-
tinguishing marks of our civilization."
This declaration is based upon the spiritual fact
that man must have freedom in which to develop
his full stature and through common effort to raise
the level of human dignity. We have much to do
to fully achieve and to assure the rights set forth
in this declaration. But having them put before
us with the moral backing of 58 nations will be
a great step forward.
As we here bring to fruition our labors on this
Declaration of Human Rights, we must at the same
time rededicate ourselves to the unfinished task
which lies before us. We can now move on with
new courage and inspiration to the completion of
an international covenant on human rights and of
measures for the implementation of human rights.
In conclusion I feel that I cannot do better than
to repeat the call to action by Secretary Marshall
in his oiDcning statement to this Assembly :
"Let this third regular session of the General
Assembly approve by an overwhelming majority
the Declaration of Human Rights as a standard
of conduct for all ; and let us, as Members of the
United Nations, conscious of our own shortcom-
ings and imperfections, join our effort in good
faith to live up to tliis high standard."
TEXT OF THE UNIVERSAL DECLARATION OF HUMAN RIG
PREAMBLE
Whereas recognition of the inherent dignity and
of the equal and inalienable rights of all members
of the human family is the foundation of free-
dom, justice and peace in the woi'ld.
Whereas disregard and contempt for human
rights have resulted in barbarous acts which have
outraged the conscience of mankind, and the ad-
vent of a world in which human beings shall enjoy
freedom of speech and belief and freedom from
fear and want has been proclaimed as the highest
aspiration of the common people.
Whereas it is essential, if man is not to be com-
pelled to have recourse, as a last resort, to rebel-
lion against tyranny and oppression, that human
rights should be protected by the rule of law.
Whereas it is essential to promote the develop-
ment of friendly relations between nations.
Whereas the peoples of the United Nations have
in the Charter reaffirmed their faith in funda-
mental human rights, in the dignity and worth
of the human person and in the equal rights of
men and women and have determined to promote
social progi-ess and better standards of life in
larger freedom.
Whereas member states have pledged them-
selves to achieve, in cooperation with the United
Nations, the promotion of universal respect for
and observance of human rights and fundamental
freedoms.
Whereas a common understanding of these
rights and freedoms is of the greatest importance
for the full realization of this pledge
'Approved by Committee III on Dec. 6, 1948.
752
Now therefore
The General Assembly
Proclaims this universal declaration of human
rights as a common standard of achievement for
all peoples and all nations, to the end that every
individual and every organ of society, keeping
this declaration constantly in mind, shall strive
by teaching and education to promote respect for
these rights and freedoms and by progressive
measures, national and international, to secure
their universal and effective recognition and ob-
servance, both among the peoples of member states
themselves and among the peoples of territories
under their jurisdiction.
Article 1. All human beings are born free and
equal in dignity and rights. They are endowed
with reason and conscience and should act towards
one another in a spirit of brotherhood.
Article 2. J. Everyone is entitled to all the
rights and freedoms set forth in this declaration,
witliout discrimination of any kind, such as race,
color, sex, language, religion, political or other
opinion, national or social origin, property, birth
or other status.
3. Furthermore no distinction shall be made on
the basis of the political, jurisdictional or interna-
tional status of the country or territory to which a
person belongs, whether it be independent, trust,
non-self-governing or under any other limitation
of sovereignty.
Article 3. Everyone has the right to life, lib-
erty and the security of person.
Article 4. No one shall be held in slavery or
servitude; slavery and the slave trade shall be
prohibited in all their forms.
Article 5. No one shall be subjected to torture
Deparfment of Sfate Bulletin
or to cruel, inhuman or degrading treatment or
punislinient.
Article G. Eveiyone has the right to recogni-
tion everywhere as a person before tlie hvw.
Article 7. All are equal before the law and are
entitled without any discrimination to equal pro-
tection of tiie laws." All are entitled to equal pro-
tection against any discrimination in violation of
this declaration and against any incitement to
such discrimination.
Article 8. Everyone has the right to an etTec-
tive remedy by the competent national tribimals
for acts violating the fundamental rights granted
him by the constitution or by law.
Article 9. No one shall be subjected to arbi-
tral y arrest, detention or exile.
Article 10. Everyone is entitled in full equality
to a fair and public hearing by an independent
and imi)artial tribunal, in the determination of his
rights and obligations and of any criminal charge
against him.
Article 11. /. Everyone charged with a penal
offense lias the right to be presumed innocent until
proved guilty according to law in a public trial
at wliicli he "has had all the guarantees necessary
for his defense.
2. Xo one shall be held guilty of any penal of-
fense on account of any act or omission which did
not constitute a penal offense, under national or
international law. at the time when it was com-
mitted. Nor shall a heavier penalty be imposed
than the one that was applicable at the time the
penal offense was committed.
Article 12. No one shall be subjected to arbi-
trary interference with his privacy, family, home
or correspondence, nor to attacks upon his honor
and reputation. Everyone has the right to the
protection of the law against such interference or
attacks.
Article 13. 1. Everyone has the right to free-
dom of movement and residence within the borders
of each state.
2. Everyone has the right to leave any country,
including his own, and to return to his country.
Article 14. 1. Everyone has the right to seek
and to enjoy in other countries asylum from per-
secution.
2. This right may not be invoked in the case of
prosecutions genuinely arising from non-political
irimes or from acts contrary to the purposes and
principles of the United Nations.
Article 15. 1. Everyone has the right to a na-
tionality.
2. No one shall be arbitrarily deprived of his
nationality nor denied the right to change his na-
tionality.
Articij; 10. 1. Men and women of full age, with-
out any limitation due to race, nationality or
religion, have the right to marry and to found a
family. They are entitled to equal rights as to
marriage, during marriage and at its dissolution.
December 19, 1948
THi UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIAUZBD AGENCIES
2. Marriage .shall be entered into only with the
free and full consent of the intending spouses.
3. The family is the natural and fundamental
group unit of society and is entitled to protection
by society and the state.
Article 17. J. Everyone has the right to own
property alone as well as in association with
others.
2. No one shall be arbitrarily deprived of his
l^roiDerty.
Article 18. Everyone has the right to freedom
of thought, conscience and religion ; this right in-
cludes freedom to change his religion or belief,
and freedom, either alone or in community with
others and in public or private, to manifest his
religion or belief in teaching, practice, worship
and observance.
Article 19. Everyone has the right to freedom
of opinion and expression; this right includes
freedom to hold opinions without interference
and to seek, receive and impart information and
ideas through any media and regardless of
frontiers.
Article 20. 1. Everyone has the right to free-
dom of peaceful assembly and association.
2. No one may be compelled to belong to an
association.
Article 21. 1. Everyone has the right to take
part in the government of his country, directly
or through freely chosen representatives.
2. Everyone has the right of equal access to
public service in his country.
3. The will of the people shall be the basis of
authority of government; this will shall be ex-
pressed in periodic and genuine elections which
shall be by universal and equal suffrage and shall
be held by secret vote or by equivalent free voting
procedures.
Article 22. Everyone, as a member of society,
has the right to social security and is entitled to
realization, through national effort and interna-
tional cooperation and in accordance with the
organization and resources of each state, of the
economic, social and cultural rights indispensable
for his dignity and the free development of his
personality.
^\jjTicLE 23. J. Everyone has the right to work,
to free choice of employment, to just and favor-
able conditions of work and to protection against
unemployment.
2. Everyone, without any discrimination, has
the right to equal pay for equal work.
3. Everyone who works has the right to just and
favorable remuneration insuring for himself and
his family an existence worthy of human dignity,
and supplemented, if necessary, by other means of
social protection.
4. Everyone has the right to form and to join
trade unions for the protection of his interests.
Article 24. Everyone has the right to rest and
7S3
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
leisure, including reasonable limitation of work-
ing hours and periodic holidays with pay.
Aeticle 25. 1. Everyone has the right to a
standard of living adequate for the health and
well-being of himself and of his family, including
food, clothing, housing and medical care and
necessary social services, and the right to security
in the event of unemployment, sickness, disability,
widowhood, old age or other lack of livelihood in
circumstances beyond his control.
2. Motherhood and childhood are entitled to
special care and assistance. All children, whether
born in or out of wedlock, shall enjoy the same
social protection.
Article 26. 1. Everyone has the right to edu-
cation. Education shall be free, at least in the
elementary and fundamental stages. Elementary
education shall be compulsory. Technical and
professional education shall be made generally
available and higher education shall be equally
accessible on the basis of merit.
2. Education shall be directed to the full de-
velopment of the human personality and to the
strengthening of respect for human rights and
fundamental freedoms. It shall promote under-
standing, tolerance and friendship among all
nations, racial or religious groups, and shall
further the activities of the IJnited Nations for
the maintenance of peace.
3. Parents have a prior right to choose the kind
of education that shall be given to their children.
Article 27. 1. Everyone has the right freely to
participate in the cultural life of the community,
to enjoy the arts and to share in scientific advance-
ment and its benefits.
2. Everyone has the right to the protection of
the moral and material interests resulting from
any scientific, literary or artistic production of
which he is the author.
Article 28. Everyone is entitled to a social and
international order in which the rights and free-
doms set forth in this declaration can be fully
realized.
Article 29. 1. Everyone has duties to the com-
munity in which alone the free and full develop-
ment of his personality is possible.
S. In the exercise of his rights and freedoms,
everyone shall be subject only to such limitations
as are determined by law solely for the purpose of
securing due recognition and respect for tlie rights
and freedoms of others and of meeting the just re-
quirements of morality, public order and the gen-
eral welfare in a democratic society.
3. These rights and freedoms may in no case be
exercised contrary to the purposes and principles
of the United Nations.
Article 30. Nothing in this declaration may be
interpreted as implying for any states, gi'oups or
persons any right to engage in any activity or to
perform any act aimed at the destruction of any of
the rights and freedoms set forth herein.
754
Closing of General Assembly
Excerpts From, Statement hy Ambassador
Warren R. Austin
On the occasion of the closing of the present ses-
sion of the General Assembly at Paris, I am con-
vinced that tlie gains made were appreciable and
real. I feel that, by reason of the debates, and the
positions taken by 58 nations, the prospects for
world peace have improved.
The general issue is more clearly defined to be
between a bloc of Soviet States, and the great
majority of Members of the United Nations, which
are determined to keep their peoples free, and to
preserve the blessings of liberty. It is not con-
vincing, after repeated and consistent majority
decisions with only the Communist bloc for oppos-
ing minority, to assert that the issue is between
the United States and the U.S.S.R. The proba-
bility of war is reduced by the recognition and
consolidation of the facts. The possibility of
agreement is increased by knowledge of where we
stand.
The Charter expressly bases security upon col-
lective action, and provides for the inherent right
of self-defense collectively, as well as severally.
The unity by agi'eement of all peace-loving states
in the General Assembly on all the major policies
put in issue, is a condition in world politics tending
to prevent aggression. This is solid gain toward
pacific methods of settlement of disputes.
Ad Hoc Political Committee Resolution on
Admission of New Members'
Recalling that eight members of the Security
Council in August 1947 supported a draft resolu-
tion recommending the admission to tlie United
Nations of Austria, at such time and under such
conditions as the General Assembly might deem
appropriate, but that no recommendation was
made to the Assembly because of the opposition of
one of the permanent members; * * * and
Recalling resolution 113 (II) H of 17 Novem-
ber 1947 requesting the Security Council to recon-
sider the application of Austria ; and
Noting from the report of the Security Council
that, since none of its members has changed its de-
cision with regard to this application, the Security
Council has adjourned its discussion on the matter
indefinitely ;
The General Assembly
Reiterates its opinion that Austria is a peace-
loving State within the meaning of Article 4 of
the Charter, and consequently
Requests the Security Council to reconsider the
application of Austria, in the light of this ex-
pression of opinion of the Assembly and of the
advisory opinion of the International Court of
Justice of 28 May 1948.
' Excerpts from U.N. doe. A/AC. 24/.30, Nov. 27, 1948 ;
adopted by Ad Hoc Committee on Nov. 27.
Deparfmenf of Sfafe Bullefin
General Assembly Adopts Convention on Genocide
STATEMENT BY ERNEST A. GROSS'
Alternate U.S. Representative to the General Assembly
The draft convention on genocide wliich is now
before this Assembly is the end product of two
years of careful and arduous work. It will be
recalled that in December 19-16 the General Asseni-
bly, by unanimous vote, affirmed that genocide is
a crime under international law which the civilized
world condemns and for the commission of wliich
principals and accomplices are punishable. The
unanimous vote in the General Assembly on this
matter in itself reflected the determination of the
peoples of the United Nations, whatever their race,
creed, or nationalit}-, to assure that the barbarism
which had so recently shocked the conscience of
mankind would never again take place.
The General Assembly in 1946 called for the
preparation of a convention on genocide which
would define the offense more precisely and pro-
vide enforcement procedures for its repression and
punishment. The draft of such a convention, pre-
pared initially by an ad hoc committee of the
United Nations, has been patiently and exhaus-
tively discussed by the Sixth Committee of this
Assembly. The United States Delegation is pre-
pared to sign the convention, representing the
fruits of the labor of the Sixth Committee and
confidently hopes that all member states will do
likewise.
It seems to the United States Delegation that in
a world beset by many problems and great diffi-
culties, we should proceed with this convention
before the memory of recent horrifying genocidal
acts has faded from the minds and conscience of
man. Positive action must be taken now. My
Government is eager to see a genocide convention
adopted at this session of the Assembly and signed
by all member states before we quit our labors here.
Tlie denial of the right of existence of entire
Imman groups is the subject matter with which this
convention cleals. The task of the legal committee
has been to reduce to specific and workable terms
the general objective of outlawing actions which
have that purpose and effect. The convention re-
sponds to the recommendations of the General As-
sembl}' in its resolution of December 11, 1946, that
international cooperation be organized between
states with a view to facilitating the speedy pre-
vention and punishment of the crime of genocide.
The United States Government has been one of
many which have been honored to cooperate in this
work. In our view, the draft convention provides
a basis upon which all members of the United
Nations may agree.
December 19, 1948
At the conclusion of the labors of the Sixth
Committee the Delegate of the Soviet Union an-
nounced the intention of his delegation to propose
upon the floor of the General Assembly amend-
ments to the draft convention. On behalf of the
United States Delegation, I voiced our concern,
and indeed alarm, at this procedure. Certain dele-
gations, including my own, which believed that
improvements could be made in the draft conven-
tion prior to its final adoption by the Sixth Com-
mittee, moved the Committee for reconsideration
of certain articles of the convention. Amendments
to the draft were made only after the committee,
by a two-thirds vote, had agreed to reconsider the
points involved.
The Delegate of the Soviet Union strenuously
objected when these proposals for reconsideration
were made and the Soviet Delegate did not himself
move for reconsideration of any of the provisions
of the draft convention. The grounds upon which
the Soviet Delegate objected to efforts to obtain
reconsideration of certain matters in the conven-
tion were that the points had been fully debated,
had been resolved by the committee, and should not
be reopened. Therefore, his failure to submit any
proposals for reconsideration by the committee
was, I think, very properly understood by mem-
bers of the committee as indicating that there were
no changes in the draft convention which the
Soviet Delegation desired to bring to the attention
of the Sixth Committee for reconsideration and
action. Accordingly, the members of the Com-
mittee, who had labored for many weeks in the
preparation of the draft convention, were deprived
of an opportunity to consider and debate any mat-
ters which the Soviet Delegation considered rele-
vant to a request for reconsideration.
The United States Delegation believes, and
respectfully submits to the members of the As-
sembly, that the course now adopted by the Soviet
Delegation of proposing amendments upon the
floor of the General Assembly is a procedure which
is bound to have obstructive consequences. Al-
though, of course, the Soviet Delegation is acting
within its formal rights in taking this action, such
a procedure threatens to reopen in the full body
of the General Assembly, the whole debate upon
issues which were carefully considered and re-
' Made before the General Assembly on Dec. 9, 1948,
and released to the press on the same date. Mr. Gross is
Legal Adviser to the Secretary of State.
755
THB UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGENCIES
solved in weeks of effort in the Sixth Committee.
My delegation feels that it is its duty to call this
to the attention of the Assembly and to express the
hope that we will not be led into reargument of
these complex questions in this forum.
I conclude my remarks by again expressing the
hope that the draft convention in the form in which
it has been submitted by the Sixth Committee will
receive the unanimous support of all member states
and that the convention will be signed prior to the
rising of this part of the third regular session of
the General Assembly.
RESOLUTION OF APPROVAL AND TEXT OF CONVENTION ^
The General Assembly,
Approves the annexed convention on the pre-
vention and punishment of the crime of genocide
and proposes it for signature and ratification or
accessioii in accordance with its Article XI.
ANNEX
Convention on the prevention and punishment of
the crime of genocide
The contracting parties,
Having c»NsinERED tlie declaration made by the
General Assembly of the United Nations in its
resolution 96 (1) dated 11 December 1946 that
genocide is a crime under international law, con-
trary to the spirit and aims of the United Nations
and condemned by the civilized world;
Eecognizing that at all periods of history geno-
cide lias inflicted great losses on humanity; and
Being convinced that, in order to liberate man-
kind from such an odious scourge, international
cooperation is required;
Herehy agree as hereinafter provided :
Article I, The contracting parties confirm that
genocide, whether committed in time of peace or
in time of war, is a crime under international law
which they undertake to prevent and to punish.
Article II, In the present convention, genocide
means any of the following acts committed with
intent to destroy, in whole or in part, a national,
ethnical, racial or religious group, as such:
(a) Killing members of the group;
(b) Causing serious bodily or mental harm to
members of the group ;
(c) Deliberately inflicting on the group con-
ditions of life calculated to bring about its physical
destruction in whole or in part;
(d) Imposing measures intended to prevent
births within the group ;
(e) Forcibly transferring children of the group
to another group.
Article III, The following acts shall be punish-
able:
(a) Genocide;
(b) Conspiracy to commit genocide;
" Adopted on Dec. 9, 1948 ( U.N. doc. A/7G0, Dec. 6, 1948) ;
printed from telegraphic text.
7^6
(c) Direct and public incitement to commit
genocide ;
(d) Attempt to commit genocide;
(e) Complicity in genocide.
Article IV, Persons committing genocide or any
of the other acts enumerated in Article III shall
be punished, whether they are constitutionally re-
sponsible rulers, public officials, private individ-
uals.
Article V, The contracting parties undertake
to enact, in accordance with their respective con-
stitutions, the necessary legislation to give effect
to the provisions of the present convention and, in
particular, to provide effective penalties for per-
sons guilty of genocide or any of the other acts
enumerated in Article III. Jj
Article VI, Persons charged with genocide or «!
any of the other acts enumerated in Article III
shall be tried by a competent tribunal of the state
in the territory of which the act was committed,
or by such international penal tribunal as may
have jurisdiction witli respect to those contracting
jjarties which shall have accepted its jurisdiction.
Article VII, Genocide and the other acts enu-
merated in Article III shall not be considered as
political crimes for the purpose of extradition.
The contracting parties pledge themselves in
such cases to grant extradition in accordance with
their laws and treaties in force.
Aktk'le VIII, Any contracting party may call
upon the competent organs of the United Nations
to take such action under the Charter of the United
Nations as they consider appropriate for the pre-
vention and suppression of acts of genocide or any
of the other acts enumerated in Article III.
Article IX, Disputes between the contracting
parties relating to the interpretation, application
or fulfillment of the present convention, including
those relating to the responsibility of a state for
genocide or any of the other acts enumerated in
Article III, shall be submitted to the Interna-
tional Court of Justice at the request of anj' of
the parties to the dispute.
Article X, The present convention, of which
the Chinese, English, French, Eussian and Span-
ish texts are equally authentic, shall bear the date
of . . .
Article XI, The present convention shall be
open until 31 December 1949 for signature on be-
liepat\m&ni of State Bulletin
half of any member of the United Nations and
of any iion-nieniber state to which an invitation
to sijxn lias been addressed by the General As-
sembly.
Tlie present convention shall be ratified, and the
instninients of ratification shall be de]K)sited \Yith
tlie Secretary General of the United Nations.
After 1 January 1950 the present convention
may be acceded to on behalf of any member of
tlie United Nations and of any non-member state
wliicli has i-eceived an invitation as aforesaid.
Instruments of accession sliall be deposited with
the Secretary General of the United Nations.
Article XII, Any contracting party may at
any time, by notification addressed to the Secre-
tary General of the United Nations, extend the
application of the present convention to all or any
of tlie territories for the conduct of whose foreign
relations that contracting party is responsible.
Article XIII. On the day when the first 20
instruments of ratification or accession have been
deposited, the Secretary General shall draw up a
proces-verhal and transmit a copy of it to each
member of the United Nations ancl to each of the
non-member states contemplated in Article XI.
The present convention shall come into force on
the DOtli day following the date of deposit of the
20th instrument of ratification or accession.
Any ratification oi- accession effected subsequent
to the latter date shall become effective on the 90tli
day following the deposit of the instrument of
ratification or accession.
Article XIV, The present convention shall re-
main in effect for a period of ten years as from
the date of its coming into force.
It shall thereafter remain in force for successive
periods of five years for such contracting parties
as have not denounced it at least six months before
the expiration of the current period.
Denunciation shall be effected by a written noti-
fication addressed to the Secretary General of the
United Nations.
Abticle XV, If, as a result of denunciations,
the number of parties to the present convention
should become less than IG, the convention shall
cease to be in force as from the date on which the
last of these denunciations shall become effective.
Article XVI, A request for the revision of the
present convention may be made at any time by
any contracting party by means of a notification
in writing addressed to the Secretary General.
The General Assembly shall decide upon the
steps, if any, to be taken in respect of such request.
Article XVII, The Secretary General of the
United Nations shall notify all members of the
United Nations and the non-member states contem-
plated in Article XI of the following :
(a) Signatures, ratifications and accessions re-
ceived in accordance with Article XI ;
(b) Notifications received in accordance with
Article XII ;
December 19, J948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGENCIES
(c) The date upon which the present conven-
tion comes into force in accordance with Article
XIII:
(d) Denunciations received in accordance with
Article XIV :
(e) The abrogation of the convention in accord-
ance with Article XV;
(f) Notifications received in accordance with
Article XVI.
Article XVIII, The original of the present con-
vention shall be deposited in the archives of the
United Nations.
A certified copy of the convention shall be trans-
mitted to all members of the United Nations and
to the non-member states contemplated in Article
XL
Article XIX. The present convention shall be
registered by the Secretary General of the United
Nations on the date of its coming into force.
[ANNEX] B
Resolution relating to the study hy the Inter-
national Law Commission of the question of an
international cnminal juris diction.
The General Assembly,
Considering that the discussion of the conven-
tion on the prevention and punishment of the
crime of genocide has raised the question of the
desirability and possibility of having persons
charged with genocide tried by a competent inter-
national tribunal,
Considering that, in the course of development
of the international community, there will be an
increasing need of an international judicial organ
for the trial of certain crimes under international
law,
Invites the International Law Commission to
study the desirability and possibility of establish-
ing an international judicial organ for the trial of
persons charged with genocide or other crimes
over which jurisdiction will be conferred upon that
oi-gan by international conventions;
Requests the International Law Commission in
carrying out this task to ]iay attention to the pos-
sibility of establishing a criminal chamber of the
International Court of Justice.
[ANNEX] C
Resolution relating to the application of the con-
vention on the prevention and jyunishment of
the crime of genocide with respect to dependent
territories.
The General Assembly reconnnends that parties
to the convention on the prevention and punish-
ment of the crime of genocide which administer
dependent territories, should take such measures
as are necessary and feasible to enable the pro-
visions of the convention to be extended to those
territories as soon as possible.
757
U.S. Urges Continuation of Temporary Commission on Korea
STATEMENT BY JOHN FOSTER DULLES IN COMMITTEE I'
Acting Chairman, U.S. Delegation to the General Assembly
This committee now takes in hand the matter
of securing the independence of Korea. ^ That is
a momentous task and it is an exciting task — for
it is a task of creation. Five years ago the war
victors promised independence and unity to the 30
million people of Korea. But, as in other cases,
the victors have not been able to redeem their
promises, so the United Nations has had to take
up the task.
Last year we made a good beginning. Then,
this Assembly voted, 43 to 0 with 6 abstentions,
to establish a United Nations Temporary Com-
mission on Korea. It was given a mandate to
consult, on our behalf, with the '"elected represent-
atives of the Korean people" and "to observe that
the Korean representatives are in fact duly elected
by the Korean people and not mere military ap-
pointees in Korea". The commission was also
authorized to supervise the establishment of a
Korean Government, on the basis of elections to
a national assembly, which, in turn, would establish
a national government. That government, it was
contemplated, would set up its own national se-
curity forces : would dissolve all military or semi-
military formations not included therein; take
over the functions of government from the mili-
tary commands and civilian authorities of north
and south Korea and arrange with the occupying
powere for the complete withdrawal from Korea
of their armed forces. Thus, independence would
become a reality.
The members of the commission have worked
well and hard under most difficult conditions.
TVe now have before us their reports and we have
heard from their rapporteur. "We also have the
report of the Interim Committee regarding its
consultation in February of this year witlf the
United Nations Temporary Commission on Korea.
The reports are in certain respects most gratify-
ing. In other respects they are disheartening.
The disheartening feature of the reports, to men-
tion them first, is that in the area of Korea north
of the 38th parallel, which constitutes the Soviet
zone of occupation, the United Nations commis-
sion was defied. It was not permitted to "travel,
observe, and consult" as the Assembly requested.
It was, indeed, excluded and not allowed to assure
that free elections would be held and the people
of that area permitted to participate in the forma-
tion of a national government. Instead, it seems
758
that in the darkness of that area, closed to United
Nations observation, there has been brought into
being a Communist-controlled regime that asserts
pretensions to govern all Korea and that threatens
to back those pretensions by force and violence.
Already it has incited acts of terrorism and cruelty
that shock all decent people. Yet that regime,
born in obscurity, in defiance of the United Na-
tions, has been recognized by three member states :
the Soviet Union, Czechoslovakia, and Poland, and
is, it seems, supported morally and materially by
the forces in north Korea of the Soviet Union.
It is for the Korean people a dreadful tiling
that after forty years of oppression from Japan,
they should now be threatened with new violence
and terrorism from the north. It is for the United
Nations a disheartening and a disturbing fact that
recommendations of this Assembly, adopted by a
vote of 43 to 0, should be flouted by some of our
Members. This Assembly should not, indeed it
cannot, conceal the gravity of that situation, not
alone for Korea, but for the United Nations itself.
That is the somber aspect of the problem. There
is, however, another and brighter aspect. South of
the 38th parallel, where two thirds of the Korean
people reside, the United Nations commission was
given every facility to travel, observe, and con-
sult as requested by this Assembh'. Furthermore,
under the auspices of the commission, elections
were held which constituted a magnificent dem-
onstration of the capacity of the Korean people
to establish a representative and responsible gov-
ernment. Despite widespread efforts to confuse
and to intimidate, despite the actual murder of
many would-be voters, approximately 80 percent
of the eligible voters registered, and of these, ap-
proximately 95 percent cast ballots.
The result was a balanced assembly, faii'ly re-
flective of the will of the people. The government
created by that Assembly is now in authority; it
is consolidating its position ; it is building up se-
curity forces and local constabulary; it is main-
taining law and order despite the efforts of some
subversive elements ; it is developing the economy
of the country, and in that connection it is re-
ceiving, and will continue to receive, substantial
economic aid from Members of the United Nations.
1 Made on Dec. 7, 1948, and released to the press on the
same date.
'See Korea 19^5 to 1948 (Department of State pub.
3305).
Departmenf of State Bulletin
In sum, there has been established a lawful gov-
ernment having etfective control and jurisdiction
over that part of Korea where the United Nations
Temporary Commission was able to observe and
consult, and in which the great majoritj' of the
people of Korea reside. That government was
based on elections which were a valid expression
of the free will of the electorate in that part of
Korea and it is the only such government in Korea.
The United Nations can be proud of its eflPorts
and of the response of the Korean people, who
have shown that, given the opportunity, they are
willing and able to help themselves.
"We shall, no doubt, hear repeated last year's
glowing statements about conditions in north Ko-
rea which our conmiission was prevented from ob-
serving. The unknown can always be made to
appear glamorous, and that is perhaps whj' north
Korea is a forbidden land so far as United Nations
observation is concerned. It would, however, be
irresponsible for this committee to depend upon
the reports of those who refused to permit of veri-
fication by the United Nations commission sent out
to Korea for that purpose. We do have data, in-
dependently verified by our United Nations com-
mission, that show that there has now come into
being, through a cooperative effort of the United
Nations and the Korean people, a government
under whose auspices the Korean people may at
last realize their oft-promised independence and
unity.
It is, of course, obvious that neither indepen-
dence nor unity are yet fully achieved and the
United Nations cannot consider its task completed.
Further measures are required of us.
First of all. the United Nations ought to put the
seal of legitimacy on what has been done under
its auspices. The government of the Republic of
Korea needs that in order to maintain its prestige
and authority at home and abroad. It would,
indeed, be unthinkable that the United Nations
should in any way disown the consequences of its
own creative progi-am.
In the second place, we believe that the United
Nations should continue a commission on Korea
in order to help the new government of Korea to
end the wartime military occupation of Korea.
There ought to be an observed withdrawal of oc-
cupation forces from all Korea as soon as practical.
And that withdrawal should be a reality so com-
plete and thorough that, in fact, the Korean people
are truly the masters in their o\\n home and not
ruled or terrorized by elements that take their
orders from without.
In the third place, we believe that the United
Nations commission should help the Korean peo-
ple to reunite and to end the economic dislocations,
the fears of civil war, that now gravely disturb
the life of the people. As in the case of Greece,
Communist elements seek, by violence, to impose
their will, and there is danger that these efforts
December 19, 7948
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
will be supported in one form or another by
neighboring Communist regimes. The presence
of a United Nations commission with authority to
observe will deter organized violence and tend to
assure that the peoples of north and south Korea
and their neighbors will, in the words of the
charter, "practice tolerance and live together in
peace with one another as good neighbors." We
also believe the United Nations commission may be
able through good offices to help break down peace-
fully the barrier to friendly intercourse caused by
the present division of Korea.
The Governments of Australia, China, and the
United States are submitting to this committee a
draft I'esolution that, in our opinion, will en-
able the United Nations to move forward along
these lines. I hope that that resolution will re-
ceive overwhelming support. It should, because
the principle involved protects not only Korea, but
all of us. The United Nations here faces a fa-
miliar pattern. We see violence, terrorism, and
internal division being stimulated from without
by those who hope thereby to gain international
objectives.
Every non-Communist government in the world
is, to a greater or lesser extent, subject to these
tactics.
There is one elemental defense, and that is,
through the United Nations, to evidence at least
a moral solidarity with those who in violation of
our Charter are subjected to such threats of
violence.
A distinguished representative of one of the
Communist states said a few days ago before the
plenary assembly, "we know that we are hated
because of our form of government." That is not
the case. What are hated are the methods of coer-
cion, terrorism, and violence that are often em-
ployed by Communist governments and taught to
party members. It may be that the greatest service
that the United Nations can render is to be the in-
strumentality for demonstrating that whenever
those methods are used or threatened internation-
ally, the rest of the world community closes ranks
to prevent the success of these methods by what-
ever peaceful means are available either to the
United Nations as an organization or to Member
States acting pursuant to the Charter.
If that happens, then it may be learned that the
use of force, coercion, terrorism, and violence to
achieve international objectives has consequences
such that those methods cease to be expedient.
That, in turn, may lead all the member nations to
respect their Charter undertaking to refrain in
their international relations from the threat or
use of force. Therein lies, in my opinion, the
greatest hope of peace. So, in the interest of
Korean independence, and also in the interest of
the independence of each of us, let us demonstrate
here solidarity with the newly formed but already
threatened Government of the Republic of Korea.
759
TEXT OF JOINT RESOLUTION '
The General Assembly,
Having regard to its resolution No. 112 of No-
vember 14, 1947, concerning the problem of the
independence of Korea ;
Having considered the report of the United
Nations Temporary Commission on Korea (here-
inafter referred to as the "Temporary Commis-
sion"), and the rejiort of the Interim Committee
regarding its consultation with the Temporary
Commission ;
Mindful of the fact that due to dilRculties re-
ferred to in the report of the Temporary Com-
mission, the objectives set forth in the resolution
of November 14, 1947, have not been fully accom-
plished ; and in jjarticular that unification in Korea
has not yet been achieved :
(1) Approves the conclusions of the reports of
the Temporary Commission;
(2) Declares that there has been established a
lawful government (the Government of the Re-
public of Korea), having effective control and
jurisdiction over that part of Korea wheie the
Temporary Commission was able to observe and
considt and in which the great majority of the
people of all Korea reside; that this Government
is based on elections which were a valid expression
of the free will of the electorate of that part of
Korea and which were observed by the Temporary
Commission ; and that this is the only such Gov-
ernment in Korea ;
{?>) Recommends that the occupying powers
withdraw their occupation forces from Korea as
early as practicable ;
(4) Resolves that, as a means to the full accom-
plishment of the objectives set forth in the reso-
lution of November 14, 1947, a commission on
Korea consisting of be established to
continue the work of the Temporary Commission
and carry out the provisions of the present resolu-
tion, liaving in mind the status of the Government
of the Republic of Korea as herein defined, and
in particular to :
A. Lend its good offices to bring about the unifi-
cation of Korea and the integration of all Korean
security forces in accordance with the principles
laid down by the General Assembly in the Resolu-
tion of November 14, 1947 ;
B. Seek to facilitate the removal of barriers to
economic, social, and other friendly intercourse
caused by the division of Korea ;
* Introduced by the U.S., China, and Australia in Com-
mittee I on Dec 6, 1948, and adopted by the General
Assembly on Dec , 1948 (U. N. doc. A/788).
C. Be available for observation and consulta-
tion in the further development of representative
government based on the freely expressed will of
the people ;
D. Observe the actual withdrawal of the oc-
cupying forces and verify the fact of withdrawal
when such has occurred ; and for this purpose, if
it so desires, request the assistance of military ex-
perts of the two occupying powers ;
(5) Z'ecw^es that the Commission :
A. Shall, witliin thirty days of the adoption of
this resolution, proceed to Korea, where it shall
maintain its seat ;
B. Shall be regarded as having superseded the
Temporary Commission established by the reso-
lution of November 14, 1947 ;
C. Is authorized to travel, consult and observe
througliout Korea ;
D. Shall determine its own procedures ;
E. May consult with the Interim Committee
with respect to the discharge of its duties in the
light of developments and within the terms of this
resolution ;
F. Shall render a report to the next regular ses-
sion of the General Assembly and to any prior spe-
cial session which might be called to consider the
subject matter of this resolution, and shall render
such interim reports as it may deem appropriate
to the Secretary -General for distribution to Mem-
bers ;
(6) Requests that the Secretary-General pro-
vide tlie commission with adequate staff and facili-
ties, including technical advisers as required ; and
authorizes the Secretary-General to pay the ex-
penses and per diem of a representative and an
alternate from each of the States Members of the
commission ;
(7) Calls upon Member States concerned, the
Government of the Republic of Korea, and all
Koreans to afford every assistance and facility to
the commission in the fulfillment of its responsi-
bilities ;
(8) Calls upon Member States to refrain from
any acts derogatory to the results achieved and
to be achieved by the United Nations in bringing
about the complete independence and unity of
Korea ;
(9) Recommends that Member States and other
nations, in establisliing their relations with the
Government of Korea, take into consideration the
facts set out in paragraph (2) of this resolution.
760
Deparfmenf of S/o/e Bulletin
U.S. Position on Unanimity Principle of the Charter
STATEMENT BY BENJAMIN V. COHEN IN AD HOC COMMITTEE'
Alternate U.S. Representative to the General Assembly
The question has been raised as to the basic
attitude of the United States toward the Charter.
I scarcely need reaffirm that the United States
stands by the Charter and that the policy of the
United States is to work under the Charter and to
exert every etlort to make the Charter work as it
was intended to work.
There are certain obligations imposed by the
Charter upon all members of the United Nations,
and there is no right of veto granted by the Charter
which gives any member the right to qualify,
evade, or violate those obligations. For example,
under article 2. all members are obligated to settle
their disputes by peaceful means and to refrain
from the threat or use of force against the terri-
torial integrity or political independence of any
state or in any other manner inconsistent with the
purposes of the United Nations. A permanent
member of the Security Council does not avoid
these obligations by casting a negative vote. The
haw of the Charter, and the right of members to
defend the law of the Charter, cannot be nullified
by a veto.
The fundamental obligations imposed by the
Charter are a part of the law of nations. There
may be honest differences of opinion among the
members as to the application of this law. which
is embodied in the Charter. But such differences
mu.st rest upon something more than the arbitrary
will of a member state. The Charter in article 2
exi)ressly requires every member to fulfil its obli-
gations in good faith.
If a permanent member forcibly destroys the
political independence of a neighboring state,
would anyone seriously contend that the Charter
gave that memljer the right to nullify the law of
the Charter through exercise of the veto? The
veto cannot deprive members of the right to de-
fend themselves, nor take away the right of other
members to come to their aid in defense of the
Charter.
If we agi'ee that the Charter cannot and should
not be nullified by the arbitrary exercise of veto,
then we should welcome and not spurn efforts to
promote agreement among the permanent mem-
bers as to the proper application of the law of
the Charter and as to the exercise of their voting
privileges. Kecognizing that the standards avail-
able to govern our decisions in many cases are
somewhat indefinite, the United States at Dum-
barton Oaks and San Francisco accepted the
December J9, 7948
principle of unanimity among the permanent
members as a means of developing and making
more certain the law of the Charter. It was then
thought impractical to make, on any other basis,
many important decisions affecting international
jieuce and security, particulai-ly those involving
obligatory participation in enforcement action.
But we accepted the principle of unanimity as
a means and not an end, and we insisted that the
Charter should not permit a permanent member
of the Security Council to be a judge in a dispute
to which it was a party. Tlie suggestion of Presi-
dent Roosevelt, to which several of the Soviet
speakers have referred, was an effort to reconcile
the ideas advanced by the United States at Dum-
barton Oaks with the unqualified acceptance of
the unanimity principle urged by the Soviet Union.
We are not attempting in the joint draft reso-
lution to alter the unanimity principle as it was
incorporated in the Charter. We are trying to
find ways and means of making the unanimity
principle work. The working of the unanimity
principle requires an honest and good faith effort
on the part of the permanent members to reconcile
and reduce to a minimum their differences. Such
an effoi-t should make possible agreement on those
essentials necessary to vindicate our common in-
terests in peace and security.
Tlie unanimity principle must not be confused
M'ith the practice of veto. As the Representative
of the United Kingdom has indicated, the unani-
mity principle is not a matter of voting but is the
spirit of understanding and tolerance that makes
action possible even without the need of a formal
vote. The practice of veto is the very reverse of
the unanimity principle. The veto does not fulfil
but frustrate the unanimity principle. The veto,
instead of leading to agreement and accord, high
lights and aggravates differences and conflicts. It
contributes to wars of nerves, cold wars, the un-
foreseeable situations which may get beyond the
control of any of the parties and threaten the peace
of the whole world.
We cannot accept the idea that, if unanimity
fails, the will of one, however arbitrary, prevails
over the will of many, however reasonable. We
want a united front, but how, pray, can we have
a united front when it is offered to us only on
' Hade on Dec. 2, 194S, and released to the press by the
U.S. Delegation to the General Assembly on the same date.
761
THE UNITBD NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
condition that we accept the will of the most
intransigent member?
Much has been said in the debate of the Four
Power statement at San Francisco.^ This was a
statement, not a contract. It was not made a part
of the Charter, or adopted, or accepted by the
Members when they ratified the Charter in accord-
ance with their constitutional processes. It was
not more nor less than it purported by its words
to be : a statement by the Four Powers of "their
general attitude toward the whole question of
unanimity of permanent members in tlie decisions
of the Security Council". If it were proper for
them to make such a statement of their attitude
at San Francisco, in light of their work on and
study of the draft Charter, it should be equally
proper for the permanent members to make a re-
statement of their attitude in light of the experi-
ence derived from working under the Charter. If
it would be proper for the permanent members of
the Security Council to make such a statement, it
is equally proper for the General Assembly to
recommend to the permanent members how, in the
opinion of the Assembly, in the light of experi-
ence, the principle of unanimity should be given
effect in order to carry out the purposes and prin-
ciples of the Charter.
The Four Power statement of San Francisco
indicated that certain designated questions should
be regarded as procedural. The statement made
it clear that the enumeration of procedural ques-
tions which it contained was not exclusive. It
is not, in our judgment, improper or inconsistent
with our obligations under the Charter or under
our commitments to other nations to suggest, as
was suggested by the Interim Committee and as
is proposed in the joint draft resolution, that the
Assenibly should recommend to the Security Coun-
cil that designated questions which in the judg-
ment of the Assembly are procedural should be
so treated by the Security Council.
The Four Power statement indicated that it was
not expected that there would arise matters of
great importance on which a decision would have
to be made as to whether a procedural vote would
apply. Experience has shown that these optimis-
tic expectations have not been realized. It is hoped
therefore that the joint draft resolution may be of
genuine assistance to the Security Council.
Reference has been made to the fact that the
Four Power statement at San Francisco expresses
the view that should the question arise whether or
not a matter is procedural, that question should
be decided by a vote of seven, including the con-
curring votes of the permanent members. This
certainly does not preclude advance agreement as
to what questions are properly deemed procedural.
Nor does the statement attempt to deal with the
procedure which should be followed if the perma-
' BuLLErriN of June 10, 1&45, p. 1047.
762
neht members do not agree, as they should agree,
as to whether a question is procedural or nonpro-
cedural. The statement does not say that a ques-
tion should be deemed nonprocedural when only
one of the permanent members so regards it. Such
a position would be indefensible.
Tlie Four Power statement further said that it
was not to be assumed that the permanent mem-
bers would use their privileged vote "wilfully to
obstruct the operation of the Council". This is an
express recognition by the powers participating in
the statement that self-restraint on the part of the
permanent members may rightly be expected and
that such self-restraint is necessary if the Charter
is to function as it was intended. If this be true, as
the United States Delegation believes, it would
seem quite proper for the Assembly, in light of
experience, to recommend to the jiermanent mem-
bers that if they are unable to achieve unanimity
among themselves on certain matters not immedi-
ately involving their vital interests they should
agree among tliemselves not to exercise the veto
on these matters but to accept the decision reached
by not less than seven members of the Security
Council.
We believe that it is proper for the Assembly
to submit a list of such matters for the permanent
members to consider in reaching an agreement
among themselves as to the questions with respect
to wliich they might forego the exercise of their
right of veto. This part of the resolution does not
limit the rights of the permanent members of the
Security Council under the Charter; it is only a
recommendation to them as to how their rights
should be exercised by agreement among them-
selves. It certainly in no way amends the Charter
directly or indirectly.
If the smaller powers can, as they have, sub-
jected themselves to obey the decisions of the Se-
curity Council in matters which vitally concern
them without any right of veto, surely the larger
powers can agree not to use the veto on mere pro-
cedural matters or on matters which, though of
substantive character, do not involve their vital
interests.
The United States Delegation believed that it
was necessary to make these further explanations
of the joint draft resolution, and we hope that
they have served also to answer the question put
by the Representative of New Zealand.
Just a few more words on our preliminary re-
action to the draft resolution circulated by the
Soviet Union this morning. We find nothing in
substance in the Soviet proposal that is not in-
cluded in tlie third paragraph of our joint resolu-
tion regarding the need for continuing consulta-
tions among the permanent members. My Delega-
tion is in agreement with much of the statements
contained in the recitals to the draft. Certainly we
should strive further to strengthen the authority
of the United Nations in accordance with the prin-
Department of Sfafe Bulletin
ciples of the Charter. All of us a^ee that we
should combine our efforts for the development of
friendly relations among nations. We are also
opposed to unnecessary regulation and formalism
in the activities of the organs of the United Na-
tions. But if such expressions in the Soviet reso-
lution are intended to belittle the efforts of the
Interim Committee to develop standards and
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
practices which may be helpful as guides to the
Security Council, we cannot agree.
We regret that we cannot share the confidence
expressed in the Soviet resolution that the Security
Council will function better in the future than in
the past unless there is much better understand-
ing among the permanent members as to how it
should function.
The United States in the United Nations
[December 11-18]
Conciliation Commission
Tlie General Assembly in its closing session on
December 11 adopted an amended British resolu-
tion for establishment of a three-member Concilia-
tion Commission to assist Arabs and Jews in
negotiating a Palestine settlement. Vote on the
proposal was 35 to 15, with 8 abstentions.
A seven-nation amendment approved before the
final ballot eliminated all references in the resolu-
tion to both the original loartition plan and the
Bernadotte proposals as the basis for a boundary
agreement.
Tlie Soviet bloc, the Arab states, Cuba, and
Afghanistan opposed the Palestine resolution.
Xations abstaining were Bolivia, Burma, Chile,
Costa Rica, Guatemala, India, Iran, and Mexico.
The Commission, under the terms of a French
amendment adojited on December 11, will be ap-
pointed by the Big Five powers.
The Commission will take over the work of
acting Palestine mediator Bunche, and, if the
Security Council so requests, the truce machinery
in the Holy Land.
Israeli
Membership
Israel failed on December 17 in its effort to be-
come a member of the United Nations when its
application lacked two votes of getting the re-
quired majority of seven in the Security Council
in Paris.
Five nations voted for admission of the new
Jewish state. They were the United States, the
I U.S.S.R., the Ukrainian S.S.R., Argentina, and
Colombia. Onlj' Syria was ojjposed. Canada,
Belgium. France, China, and the United Kingdom
; abstained.
The vote came after Britain had proposed that
the Council postpone action on the application
indefinitely. This resolution was rejected.
A French suggestion that action on the admis-
. sion request be deferred for one month and a
' Syrian proposal that the Palestine partition prob-
lem be referred to the International Court of
Justice at The Hague for a ruling also were turned
down.
December 19, 1948
Ceylon
Ceylon's application for membership was vetoed
in the Security Council by the Soviet Union on
December 15 for the second time.
Vote on Ceylon's application was 9 to 2, with
the Ukrainian S.S.R. casting the other negative
vote. The same vote occurred at Lake Success on
August 18 when the Soviet Union first vetoed
Ceylon. This action resulted from a resolution ap-
proved by the 12 nations, among them Ceylon.
Soviet argument was that there was no reason to
single out Ceylon from among the nations whose
membership applications have been rejected.
Refugees
Tlie International Refugee Organization has
announced that during the 16 months ending
October 31, a total of 334,743 people made homeless
in World War II were returned to their native
lands or established in other countries in Europe
or abroad.
At the end of October, 551,761 refugees were
still receiving Iro care, most of them in Ibo as-
sembly centers, and an additional 153,406 refugees
living outside Iro camps were getting various de-
grees of Iro assistance, such as aid in repatriation
or resettlement and legal jDrotection.
Human Rights Declaration To Be Publisized
The U.N. Educational, Scientific and Cultural
Organization plans to give the widest possible
publicity to the Universal Declaration of Human
Rights, adopted at the recently concluded Paris
session of General Assembly.
UNESCO's effort will involve not only the press
and other mass means of communication, but also
schools in member countries in connection with
their teaching about United Nations activities.
The action was approved at the recent Unesco
conference at Beirut, Lebanon, after Assistant
Secretary Allen, head of the U.S. Delegation,
called attention to the Assembly's adoption of the
rights declaration and emphasized its tremendous
significance. Mr. Allen presented a motion urging
Unesco and its member states to help give the
763
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
widest possible dissemination of the text and to
encoTu-age publicity about the declaration's impli-
cations. The resolution was carried by acclama-
tion.
Indonesia
The (iood Offices Committee on Indonesia has
reported that the outcome of recent Netherlands-
Indonesian talks for settlement of their differences
has served to aggravate a situation which was
already grave.
In a special report from Batavia to the Security
Council, made public ou December 14. Goc sum-
marized both Dutch and Republican views of the
talks which led to the announcement of December
11 from The Hague that the Netherlands would
proceed with plans for establishment of an interim
federal government in Indonesia outside Republi-
can areas. The Netherlands also said at that time
that further negotiations under Goc auspices
would be futile.
The report said that such action would greatly
complicate any negotiated settlement in the Indies
and could create serious unrest. It also stressed
concern over the maintenance, in such circum-
stances, of even the present unsatisfactory level of
truce enforcement.
According to the report, the Netherlands in-
formed Goc that basis for agreement with the
Republic was fundamentally lacking. Further,
the Dutch held as fundamentally irreconcilable
Republican and Dutch views on Netherlands
sovereignty during the interim period as form-
ulated under last January's Renville agreements.
They further held that Republican refusal to
accept Dutch sovereignty had nullified Republican
acceptance of proposals for a basis for settlement
made last September by the Goc Delegation.
The Netherlands stated, therefore, that it would
proceed to set up a federal interim government
drafted on the basis of results of consultations
with repi'esentatives of federal territories. It
added, however, that it was leaving open the pos-
sibility of future admission of Republican-held
areas.
The report also sunnnarized Republican views
which charged the Netherlands with making no
serious attempt to negotiate a settlement as con-
trasted with Republican good will which had gone
to the limit in offering concessions.
The Republicans further held that Dutch at-
tempts to form an interim government without the
Rejniblic, together with their refusal to hold
further discussions under Goc, would ignore the
Renville agreements, the Goc, and statements the
Netherlands Government has made before the
Security Council.
The Republic also called upon the Goc to take
whatever measures possible to prevail upon the
Netherlands Government to come to a peaceful
settlement of the dispute, while reiterating Re-
publican willingness to consider reasonable terms.
The report, however, said that the Goc did not
foresee the possibility of its bringing the two par-
ties together in bonu fide negotiations, in light of
Netherlands statements, and added that "the com-
mittee has no confidence that even the presently
unsatisfactory level of truce enforcement can be
maintained as the possibility of political agree-
ment becomes more remote. The committee can
see in the present situation only an intensification
of factors already making for further economic
deterioration, general unrest and .social upheaval.
Widespread hostilities involving conflict or or-
ganized groups on a large scale might be the
outcome."
ILO
The International Labor Organization's Gov-
erning Body in Geneva has added partial revision
of four maritime labor conventions adopted at
Seattle in 1946 to the agenda of the next Ilo gen-
eral conference to be held at Geneva in June 1949.
By a vote of 23 to 8, it decided to reconsider the
conventions on accommodation of crews, wages,
hours, and manning.
Among the questions previously approved for
the agenda are equal pay for men and women do-
ing work of equal value ; minimum wages for ag-
ricultural labor; vocational training of adults, in-
cluding disabled pereons; industrial relations, in-
cluding collective agreements, conciliation, and
arbitration; and cooperation between public
authorities and organizations for workers and for
employers.
In other actions, the Governing Body estab-
lished a Committee of Social Security Experts to
meet first in New Zealand early in 1950; and
changed the opening date of Ilo's 1949 American
Regional Conference at Montevideo from March
28 to April 25, Avhile deferring British and French
requests for representation there until the next
Governing Body session.
An important development of the 107th session
of the Governing Body, which ended December 11,
was the decision to undertake international pro-
grams in the fields of job-training, and training
and moving workers from countries with man-
power excesses to those with shortages. David |
Morse, Ilo's director-general, stated that he would
immediately start drawing up programs of special
interest to member nations.
764
Department of State Bulletin
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES
Report on the First Session of the General Council of IRO
BY GEORGE L. WARREN
The first session of the Gener.al Council of the
International Refugee Orj^anization met at Geneva
from 8eptember lo through September 25, 1948.
Upon formal organization of the meeting, the
Council elected William Hallam Tuck, of the
United States, as Director-General of the Inter-
national Refugee Organization. Mr. Tuck had
previously served as Executive Secretary of the
Preparatory Commission for the Iko. During its
first session the General Council considered and
passed resolutions for the guidance of its Secre-
tariat on questions prepared by the Preparatory
Commission, which had operated since July 1,
1947, on behalf of the Iro.
Background
On February 12, 1946, the General Assembly
of the United Nations adopted a resolution rec-
ommending that the Economic and Social Council
establish a committee for the purpose of examin-
ing the problem of refugees and displaced per-
sons in all its aspects. Pursuant to this recom-
mendation the Economic and Social Cotmcil on
February 16, 1946, established by resolution a
Special Committee on Refugees and Displaced
Persons. The Committee met in London from
April 8 to June 1, 1946, to prepare a report and
draft a constitution for a United Nations special-
ized agency to be known as the International
Refugee Organization. Pursuant to a resolution
by the Economic and Social Council on June 21,
li)46, a Special Committee on the Finances of the
International Refugee Organization met in Lon-
don during July 1946, to prepare a draft provi-
sional budget for the first financial year of the
Iro. The Economic and Social Council gave final
approval of the constitution, the provisional
budget, an agreement for a Preparatory Com-
mission, and the transmittal of these documents
to the General Assembly under a resolution of the
Council at its thii'd session. The constitution, the
provisional budget for the first financial year, and
the agreement on interim measures to be taken in
respect of refugees and displaced persons were
approved by the General Assembly in December
1946. The agreement on interim measures au-
thorized a Preparatory Commission to lay the
groundwork for the Iro until the Organization
came into being, and to take over at its discretion
the functions of Unrra and the Intergovernmental
December 19, J948
Committee on Refugees with respect to refugees,
as these agencies were to cease activities on July
1, 1947. The following 24 govennnents, which
signed the Constitution with or without reserva-
tions, composed the Preparatory Commission:
Argentina
Australia ^
Belgium '
Bolivia
Brazil
Canada '
China "
Denmark^
Dominican Republic '
France '
Guatemala '
Honduras
Iceland '
Liberia
Luxemliourg '
Netherlands^.
New Zealand ^
Norway '
Panama
Peru
Philippine Republic
United Kingdom '
United States '
Venezuela
The constitution of the lito was not to come
into force until at least 15 states, whose required
contributions to part I of the operational budget
as set forth in annex II of the constitution totaled
not less than 75 percent of the total thereof, had
become parties to it. The Secretary-General of
the United Nations declared the entry into force
of the constitution of the Iko on August 20, 1948,
when the fifteenth government presented its ratifi-
cation of the Constitution. The total percentage
of the governments' contributions to the opera-
tional budget on that date was 75.96 percent. In
consequence, the Preparatory Commission at its
final meeting in Septemljer 1948 convened the first
session of the Iro on September 1.3, 1948, at Geneva.
Participation
The following member governments were rep-
resented at the first session of its General Council :
Australia
Belgium
Canada
China
Denmark
Dominican Republic
France
Guatemala
Luxembourg
Netherlands
New Zealand
Norway
United Kingdom
United States
Venezuela ^
' Each of these Governments had deposited its ratifica-
tion of the Constitution with the Secretary-General of
the United Nations as of Aug. 20, 1948.
' Word was received on Sept. 13, liHS. that Venezuela
had deposited its ratification of the constitution with the
Secretary-General of the United Nations, making that
Government the sixteenth member of Iro.
765
ACTIVITIES AND DBVEiOPMENTS
Not represented : Iceland.
Official observers representing Brazil/ Italy,
Ireland, Switzerland, the Holy See, the United
Nations, Ilo, and Who were present. Voluntary
agencies and the press were also represented.
The Council was addressed at its opening meet-
ings by Dr. Von Steiger, Chief of the Department
of Justice and Police, Bern, Switzerland ; Mr. H.
Laugier, Assistant Secretary of the United Nations
in Charge of Social Affairs; Mr. Boris Shiskin,
Labor Adviser of the Economic Cooperation Ad-
ministration in Europe ; Mr. Paul Ruegger, Presi-
dent of the International Committee of the Red
Cross ; the Honorable Humphrey Mitchell, Cana-
dian Federal Minister for Labor; and Mr. Ugo
Carusi, Chairman of the United States Displaced
Persons Commission.
Organization of tlie Session
Mr. Henri Ponsot (France) was elected Chair-
man of the Council. Dr. Wu Nan-Ju (China)
and Dr. P. J. de Kanter (Netherlands) were
elected First and Second Vice-Chairman respec-
tively. Mr. J. Schneider (Belgium) was elected
Rapporteur. Representatives of those states
signatories to the constitution which have not yet
ratified their signatures were invited to sit at the
Council table as observers and to take part, with-
out vote, in the debates of the Council. The ob-
servers from the Governments of Italy and Switz-
erland indicated the interest of their governments
in becoming members of the Iro.
The following nine member governments were
elected by the Council to membership on the Ex-
ecutive Committee for two years : Australia, Bel-
gium, Canada, China, France, Norway, United
Kingdom, United States, Venezuela.
The United States Delegation
Presidential appointments for the first session
of the Iro General Council were: Ambassador
Lewis W. Douglas, United States Representative;
Mr. Goldthwaite H. Dorr and Mr. George L. War-
ren, Alternate Representatives. In the absence of
Ambassador Douglas, who was unable to attend
the session, Mr. Dorr headed the Delegation. Mr.
Dorr and Mr. Warren were assisted by Mr. Robert
L. Fisher of the Department of the Army; Mr.
Alex E. Squadrilli of the Displaced Persons
Branch, Civil Affairs Division, EUCOM, Heidel-
berg; Colonel H. T. Brotherton, Chief, Internal
Affairs and Displaced Persons Division, USFA,
Vienna ; and Miss Eleanor A. Burnett, Adminis-
trative Assistant.
' The Government of Brazil is a signatory to the consti-
tution, but not a member of the organization. The Repre-
sentative of Brazil had been an active participant in the
deliberations of the Preparatory Commission.
766
Resolutions
The following decisions were among those ar-
rived at by the Council which adopted a total of
30 resolutions at its first session :
1. Repatriation: The Council instructed the Di-
rector-General to pursue his efforts to ensure the
speedy repatriation of all displaced persons who
expressed the wish to be repatriated. Each dis-
placed i^erson will continue to be given the op-
portunity to decide in complete freedom and after
receiving full knowledge of the facts, including
information supplied by the government of his
country of origin, whether or not he wishes to be
repatriated. Refugees and displaced persons
choosing to return to their countries of origin
from the Western zones of Germany and Austria
will be given a twenty-day supply of food by Iro
as an aid in reestablishment in their home coun-
tries.
2. Resettlement: In order to resettle approxi-
mately 725,000 displaced persons by June 30, 1950,
and reduce to a minimum the number of persons
wlio, at the end of the organization's operation,
will constitute the non-resettleable hard core,
w^hich will require special assistance, the Iro
Council instructed the Director-General to ap-
proach receiving countries again in order to secure
acceptance, not only of displaced persons who
will be economic assets, but also of the dependent,
aged, and physically handicapped members of
their families, and of orphans and other persons
without family ties. Stress was also laid on the
necessity for receiving intellectuals among the ref-
ugees and displaced persons and the importance of
permitting these groups to continue to follow their
professions in the country of reception.
3. IRO Budget: The Council adopted a budget
of $4,797,800 for administrative expenses and
$150,229,258 for operational expenses (except for
large-scale resettlement expenses) for the fiscal
year July 1, 1948-June 30, 1949. Governments
were asked to make every effort to provide volun-
tary contributions to large scale resettlement ex-
penses. For the succeeding fiscal year (July 1,
1949-June 30, 1950) the Council adopted a budget
of $4,500,000 for administrative expenses and
$150,060,500 for operational expenses (except for
large-scale resettlsment expenses). These budg-
ets were based on the assumption that by June 30,
1950, the Iro would have repatriated or resettled
825,000 persons. It was recognized that a non-
resettleable hard core estimated at 184,000 would
remain for whom provision must eventually be
made.
4. Limitations on Care and Maintenance: Iro
will admit new applicants for care and mainte-
nance only if hardship would result were the ap-
plicant denied care. This policy continues that
laid down by the Preparatory Commission's
Department of State Bulletin
"freeze order". Its continuance was considered
necessary by the General Council in view of the
limits of the budget of the Organization and the
Executive Secretary's estimate tliat 120,000 eli-
gible refugees and displaced persons would re-
quest care and maintenance from the Organiza-
tion if the freeze order were lifted. The Council
instructed the Director-General to accord the most
liberal interpretation feasible to the term "hai"d-
ship''.
5. Standards of Care and Maintenance : A res-
olution passed by the Council on standards of care
and maintenance directed that a diet "necessary
to maintain standards of health approved by
medical and nutritional authorities" be provided.
The Council considered that the diet of the local
population in countries where Iro camps are lo-
cated has now improved sufficiently to permit Iro
to maintain adequate food standards without pro-
viding a differential as between displaced persons
and the local population.
6. VoJksdeutxche: The Council, after study of
a report b}' its working committee, deferred for
future consideration the question of the accept-
ance as eligible for Iro assistance of several hun-
dred thousand Volksdeutsche in Austria.
7. International Tracing Service: The Council
asked the Director-General to continue the present
activities of the International Tracing Service and
instructed him to consider how the tracing of miss-
ing persons could be transferred to another organ-
ization after the termination of the Iro. The Coun-
cil also asked the Director-General to coordinate
the work of the International Tracing Service
with regard to tracing and search of children with
the child-welfare programs of the Organization
as a whole, and to take appropriate steps for the
issuance of notifications of death.
8. Arab Refugees from Palestine: One of the
most difficult problems facing the General Coun-
cil was that of the plight of Palestinian refugees.
Recognizing the necessity for assistance to such
refugees, but recognizing that the resources of the
International Refugee Organization are com-
pletely inadequate to permit it to relieve their
distress, the Council approved the action of the
Director-General in the loan of the services of the
Director of Supply and Transport to the United
Nations Mediator and requested the Director-Gen-
eral to inform the Executive Committee promptly
of any action taken by the General Assembly of
the United Nations pertaining to assistance to
refugees in the Middle East or of any request for
any other form of assistance which the Mediator
might make to Iro, with a view to enabling the
Executive Committee to consider whether any fur-
ther assistance might be practicable within the
December 19, 1948
>»CnWn£S AND DEVELOPMENTS
budgetary and constitutional limitations of the
Iro.
The Council also adopted resolutions which :
Established the headquarters of the organization
at Geneva ;
Adopted the rules of procedure as submitted by
the Preparatory Commission ;
Approved the draft agreement between the Iro
and the United Nations;
Transferred the property of the Preparatory
Commission to the Iro;
Adopted financial and staff regulations.
The Executive Committee of the International
Refugee Organization met again on December 7,
1948, in Rome. The next session of the General
Council is scheduled to convene on or about March
29, 1949, in Geneva.
IRO Preparatory Commission: Seventh Session
The Preparatory Commission for the Intei-na-
tional Refugee Organization met for the seventh
part of its first session on Friday, September 10,
1948, in Geneva, concluded its activities, and ad-
journed on September 11, 1948. Of the 24 member
governments the following 15 were represented at
the meeting :
Australia
Belgium
Brazil
Canada
China
Denmark
Dominican Republic
France
Guatemala
Luxembourg
Netherlands
New Zealand
Norway
United Kingdom
United States
The Secretary-General of the United Nations
had declared the entry into force of the constitu-
tion of the Iro on August 20, 1948. Fifteen gov-
ernments members of the United Nations had ad-
hered to the constitution of the Iro prior to that
date, and the total of their percentage contribu-
tions, 75.96 percent, to the operational budget
slightly exceeded the 75 percent requirement of
the constitution.
In consequence of the announcement of the Sec-
retary-General of the United Nations, the Prepara-
tory Commission convened the first session of the
General Council of the Organization for Septem-
ber 13, 1948, at Geneva. The Preparatory Com-
mission also approved staff and financial regula-
tions for the consideration of the General Council,
adopted a provisional agenda for the first session
of tlie Council, and took other necessary steps for
bringing the Organization into effective operation.
767
U.S. Suspends Consideration of Proposal for Japanese
Deconcentration of Finances and Industry
STATEMENT BY GENERAL FRANK R. McCOY '
U.S. Representative on the Far Eastern Commission
Some months ago, my Government suspended
its participation in discussions in the Far Eastern
Commission of a United States policy proposal
which was then under active consideration in the
Commission. This proposal, designated as Fec
230,- presented an extremely detailed plan for the
implementation of a general policy which already
had been stated in existing directives to the Su-
preme Commander. That policy, which called for
the dissolution of certain Japanese combines and
a widening in the distribution of the income and
ownership of Japanese industry, was then and con-
tinues to be, in the view of my Government, a
fundamental objective of tlie occupation.
The action of the United States in suspending
consideration of its proposal, however, has led to
certain questions among the members of this Com-
mission and among the Japanese people. The
purpose of this statement is to clarify the position
of the United States with respect to Fec 230.
Since the very first weeks of the occupation, the
Supreme Commander has devoted a considerable
part of the time and resources of his staff to the
problem of reorganizing the financial and indus-
trial institutions of Japan. This program which
has been based upon the Post-Surrender Directive
issued December 6, 1945, and on the Far Eastern
Commission's own Basic Post-Surrender Policy
for Japan, was designed to make possible the early
development of democratic and peacefully inclined
economic institutions in Japan. To bring about
that result, plans were immediately developed and
put into effect to dissolve the control of Japanese
finances ancl industry which rested in the hands of
a few powerful Japanese families.
As a part of this program, the Supreme Com-
mander directed the Japanese Government to
adopt various laws and to create certain govern-
mental bodies charged with the responsibility of
undertaking a major reorganization of the owner-
ship and control of Japanese industry. In the
brief span of three years substantial progress has
been made by these bodies. The assets of the 56
persons who comprised the heads of the 10 major
'■ Made to the Commission on Dec. 9, 1948, and released
to tlie press on the same date. General McCoy is chair-
man of the Commission.
^ Not printed.
768
Zaibatsu families and the assets of the 83 holding
companies controlled by these persons have been
acquired by the Government and are in process of
being sold to the Japanese public. A much larger
number of companies have been compelled to
divest themselves of holdings in and control over
smaller enterprises. Such control was exercised
tlirough intercorporate stockholdings, interlocking
directorates, and similar devices. Contractual ar-
rangements to which these Japanese enterprises
were parties which had the effect of placing the
control of i^roduction or trade in the liands of such
enterprises have been declared void. The innu-
merable control associations through which Japa-
nese enterprises exercised their collective authority
are being liquidated. Action is being taken and is
well-advanced toward reorganization of former
savings banks, trust companies, and governmental
banking institutions, making possible tlie einer-
gence of a significant number of new commercial
banks, to compete with and supplement the few
large banking combines which formerly dominated
Japanese credit sources. Finally, some scores of
Japanese companies whose present state may con-
stitute a threat to competitive enterprise are being
scrutinized, one by one. Where necessary, these
combines will be subjected to such reorganization
as may be required to remove the existing threat.
To insure that the dispersion of economic control
which is developing from these measures will not
likely be reversed in the years to come, substantial
revisions have been effected in the basic economic
legislation of Japan. To begin with, an antitrust
law has been adopted and a Fair Trade Commis-
sion set up to enforce the law. In general, the law
seeks to restrain the development of new combines,
excessively large or powerful, by outlawing agree-
ments which restrain production or trade, by
placing limitations upon intercorporate stockliold-
ings, interlocking directorates, and similar devices
for the concentration of corporate control, and by
setting up procedures and penalties for the en-
forcement of these provisions. Other legislation
now requires Japanese corporations to make con-
siderably more information available to their
stockholders and the public than heretofore has
been the case and generally requires the manage-
ment of corporations to adhere to much higher
Department of State Bulletin
standards of public responsibility in the manage-
ments of their entei'prise.
Moreover, many existing laws -which tended to
centralize the control of Japanese industry within
a small group have been abrogated outright.
Othci-s have been modified drastically. The Fair
Trade C\inunissiou and other Government agen-
cies are analyzing still other Japanese laws to
eliminate provisions which confer special privi-
lege or tend to restrain or eliminate competition.
Various laws relating to the conduct of Japanese
banking have been placed under particularly care-
ful scrutiny. One of the principal objectives of
the revision of Japanese banking laws is to create
a clinuite in which the undesirable prewar concen-
tration of Japanese credit in a few hands could
not recur.
In all this, the Japanese Government has dem-
onstrated a connnendable ability to comprehend
Allied objectives and has cooperatively fulfilled its
oliligations. The Japanese Fair Trade Commis-
sion has prosecuted a significant series of cases
against Japanese businessmen who were violating
one provision or another of the statutes which seek
to prevent new concentrations of Japanese indus-
try. The Japanese Holding Company Liquida-
tion Commission has made a careful study of
the structure of the larger Japanese combines and,
in close cooperation with the Supreme Com-
mander, is cuiTently developing plans for such
reorganization of these combines as may be needed.
As the occupation and the economic situation
have developed, there has been a corresponding
evolution in the deconcentration program. For
example, it has proved possible and desirable
to dissolve most of the wartime control associa-
tions. As new sources of credit have been created
through the conversion of other financial institu-
tions to commercial banks, it has been possible to
reconsider the need for the actual dissolution, once
believed necessaiy, of Japan's biggest banks which
inuler earlier circumstances had dominated the
credit structures of Japan. With the daily growth
of indication that the Japanese propose to enforce
their fair trade laws vigorously and effectively, it
has been possible to reconsider the standards to
be used in the dissolution of some of the combines
still existing. These changes in emphasis have
been responsive to changing circumstances and
have represented relatively minor alterations in a
program which basically remains vmchanged.
That program, adhering to the broad purposes of
the directive of the Far Eastern Commission,
seeks to achieve in Japan an economic climate con-
ducive to the development of a democratic society.
It seeks to prevent the resurgence of economic
power in the hands of a few who recognize no
December 7 9, 1948
ACTIVITIES AND DEVELOPMENTS
responsibility to the Japanese people or the world
at large.
When the United States suspended its partici-
pation in the discussion of Fec '230 in the Far
Eastern Commission, that decision was based upon
the growing realization that the guidance for the
Supreme Commander and the Japanese envisaged
therein had largely been overtaken by events. The
major points of procedure set out in that document
already had been implemented in Japan. Other
details believed necessary to the accomi)lisliing
of the major objectives either had been faithfully
adopted or had become umiecessary or inappro-
priate. Useful as the paper might have been at
an earlier stage of the occupation, that usefulness
no longer appeai'ed to exist.
That the paper has become outmoded in so brief
a period is a singular tribute to Scap and the
Japanese Government. Procedures which it was
thought would take years to carry out in many
cases have been accomplished in a matter of
months. Major technical obstacles have been
overcome ancl the demonstrated determination of
the Supreme Commander to carry the program
through has elicited a gratifying degree of co-
operation from the Japanese themselves. Ac-
cordingly, upon a careful resurvey of the decon-
centi'ation program now well-advanced in Japan,
the United States now believes that, as a practical
matter, there is no need to lay down policies for
the guidance of the Supreme Commander with
respect to any remaining significant aspect of
the program. Indeed, to do so in the outmoded
terms in which Fec 230 is cast might well do
more harm to the program than good. Hence, the
United States has withdrawn its support of Fec
2o0 as a proposal upon which the Far Eastern
Commission could act with benefit to the
occupation.
This does not mean that the deconcentration
program has been completed. Considerable
amounts of securities still remain in the hands
of the Government and must be disposed of. In-
genuity and vigor nuist be brought to this task.
Existing banking legislation will undoubtedly be
elaborated and refined in consonance with the ob-
jectives of this program. Those remaining Jap-
anese combines whose existence may constitute
a threat to competitive enterprise will, where
necessary, be reorganized as required to remove
such threat. But these programs no longer call
for the development of policy. They call largely
for a practical application of judgment, energy,
and enterprise in implementing a program whose
philosophy and objectives are clearly underetood
by the Supreme Commander and the Japanese
Government, as they have already convincingly
demonstrated.
769
Conduct of Trade With Japan
1. In so far as is compatible with the Basic Post
Surrender Policy for Japan (approved 19 June
1947, and forwarded to the Supreme Commander
on 26 June 1947) and other policy decisions of the
Far Eastern Commission, including this policy
decision, Japan's foreign trade should be so con-
ducted as to :
a. foster the development and balanced growth
of Jai^anese foreign trade to a level consistent with
Japan's peaceful needs as defined by the Far East-
ern Commission ;
6. encourage an increase in Japanese exports:
(1) in order that these exports may, as soon
as possible, pay for the imports required for the
prevention of disease and unrest within Japan,
and for the reestablishment of a self-sustaining
economy; and
(2) in order that Japan may participate in
providing goods for international trade ;
c. insure competitive conditions in trade free of
contracts or arrangements which limit access to
markets or foster monopolistic controls, and pre-
vent excessive concentration of economic power in
Japan and monopolies in Japanese foreign trade,
whether with the participation of Japanese or
foreign capital.
2. In addition to Allied trade representatives
whose entry into Japan has been or may be ap-
proved consequent upon policy decisions of the
Far Eastern Commission, persons in the following
categories should be permitted to enter and reside
in Japan in accordance with regulations estab-
lished by the Supreme Commander for the Allied
Powers :
a. Merchants and other traders ( including rep-
resentatives of commercial organizations. Govern-
mental or otherwise) who are prepared to purchase
or to make arrangements for future purchases of
potential exports, or to provide raw materials or
other commodities which Japan must import;
b. Eepresentatives of banks, insurance com-
panies, airlines, shipping and other companies
who are prepared to render necessary services in
connection with Japan's foreign trade either to
private non-Japanese businessmen, to the Supreme
'Policy decision approved by the Far Eastern Commis-
sion on Nov. 18, 1948, and released to the press by the
Fec on Dec. 6, 1948. A directive based upon this decision
has been forwarded to the Supreme Commander for the
Allied Powers for implementation.
770
Commander for the Allied Powers, or to Japanese
persons or agencies approved by him;
c. Representatives of companies or individuals
who had prewar property interests in Japan, the
renewed operation of wliicli would contribute to
the accomplisliment of the objectives in paragraph
d. Representatives of companies or individuals
who had substantial prewar property interests in
Japan, for the purpose of inspection of those in-
terests.
3. Nothing in this policy decision is to be under-
stood as requiring the reopening or operation of
factories in Japan.
4. There should be no discrimination against
any foreign trade representatives or businessmen
in Japan and all should be accorded equality of
opportunity to transact business. Accommoda-
tions should be allocated to such persons entering
Japan under the provisions of this policy decision
on an impartial basis.
5. Yen acquired by foreign nations through ac-
tivities envisaged in this policy should be useable
for local expenditures in accordance with laws
and regulations enforced in Japan.
6. The Supreme Commander for the Allied
Powers may impose port and service charges upon
foreign vessels entering Japanese ports for com-
mercial purposes with the exceptions enumerated
below :
a. No port charges should be imposed on ves-
sels entering Japanese ports in so far as they are
carrying occupation force cargo or are engaged in
the removal of reparations or restitution goods.
Where vessels are also engaged at the same time in
normal commercial operations, port charges should
be imposed in proportion to the bulk of commer-
cial cargo carried.
h. All port charges on commercial vessels as
well as the services rendered to commercial ves-
sels in Japanese ports should be subject to ap-
propriate and non-discriminatory payment in any
foreign exchange useful for the purchase of im-
ports for Japan or in local currency, in accord-
ance with laws and regulations enforced in Japan.
7. The persons referred to in paragraph 2
should be afforded opportunity for direct access
to individual Japanese firms of their own choosing,
and should have the opportunity to move freely in
Japan subject only to availability of transport
and accommodations. Any regulations pertain-
ing to the participation of firms or government
agencies, whether Japanese or foreign, in foreign
Departmenf of State Bulletin
trade should be noii-discriminatory in character
and confined to measures essential to achieving the
principles and objectives set forth in this policy
and should be based upon criteria established by
and under the supervision of Scap.
8. Foreign trade may be conducted by the Jap-
anese Government or agency thereof to the extent
ACTIVITIBS AND DEVELOPMBNTS
deemed by the Supreme Commander for the Allied
Powers to be necessary for the purpose of maxi-
mizing export proceeds or for other purposes, con-
sistent with the principles and objectives stated
in this policy.
9. An exchange rate for the yen should be
established as soon as practicable.
Travel Abroad of Japanese Commercial Representatives^
1. During the period of the occupation it is rec-
ognized that the operation of the private trade of
Japan with other countries must be conducted
largely through foreign nationals traveling or
residing in Japan. However, in order to widen
the scope of trade and to further the policy of
preventing Japanese monopolies in foreign trade,
a limited resumption of private trade contacts by
the travel of Japanese commercial representatives
abroad may, subject to the approval of the country
of destination, be permitted under the following
conditions :
a. Such travel should give Japanese no ad-
vantage over foreign nationals doing business with
or in Japan. To this end foreign nationals in
Japan should be given maximum freedom to
develop trade, subject only to the economic con-
trols required by reason of the occupation. Such
controls should apply equally to Japanese and
foreign nationals.
h. Japanese commercial representatives abroad
should not be the sole sales or purchasing medium
for Boeki Cho or for Japanese trade associations
nor should they be allowed to be official represent-
atives of ScAP.
c. The specific travel authorized herein and the
extent thereof should be only that essential to
raise Japan's foreign trade to a level consistent
with her peaceful needs as defined by the Far
Eastern Commission.
d. The activities of Japanese commercial repre-
sentatives abroad should be confined to trade.
They should not be a cover for other activities
such as for instance those of a political or propa-
ganda nature.
e. Japanese commercial representatives should
be carefully screened by the Supreme Commander
for the Allied Powers before they are allowed
to leave Japan.
2. Such Japanese travel abroad shall be under
such conditions and controls as may be specified
by the Supreme Commander for the Allied Powers
and the country of destination. Subject to over-
all supervision by the Supreme Commander for the
Allied Powers, the Japanese Government, or any
authorized agency thereof, will be responsible for
the conduct of any Japanese commercial represent-
atives permitted to travel abroad under this policy.
' Policy decision approved by tlie Far Eastern Commis-
sion on Oct. 21, 1948, and released to the press by the
Fec on Nov. 9, 1948. A directive based on this decision
has been forwarded to the Supreme Commander for the
Allied Powers for implementation.
December 19, 1948
771
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
America's Answer to Communist Propaganda Abroad
BY DOUGLAS SCHNEIDER'
Acting Chief, Public Affairs Overseas Program Staff
Between November 1918 and September 1939
most great powers in the world were, with rapidly
increasing momentum, organizing the machinery
for the all-out propaganda campaigns which were
to be carried on throughout the war. The Fascist
countries were in the vanguard, during the
thirties — the prewar period — but they were
rapidly joined and even overhauled by the Allies,
after the outbreak of war; and, at the cessation
of hostilities, almost every nation was in posses-
sion of a smoothly functioning, and in many cases
quite formidable, many-voiced propaganda ma-
chine.
The U.S.A. was late in joining the chorus, but
making up for lost time we too had in operation
in 1945 a widespread network of information out-
lets— call them propaganda outlets if you wish —
which, under different names really blanketed the
world: the "Ciaa", the so-called Nelson Rocke-
feller Committee on Inter-American Affairs, and
the Office of War Information for all areas other
than the Americas.
We and, in varying degi'ees, almost all other
countries had the instruments at hand for the
spreading of information. The propaganda ma-
chines of our enemies had collapsed with their
military establishments. But we were about to
reconvert our wartime organizations into peace-
serving activities. What was to be the "market",
if I may so call it, for our peacetime information
service 'i
This "market" was a paradoxical one. On the
one hand there was a vast demand for information
and on the other hand there had never been a
stronger I'esistance against propaganda as such.
Let me elaborate : The demand was great because
of the limitations imi^osed upon the free flow of
information during the war. Even in the areas
spared from occupation or battle, such as Latin
America and the British Commonwealth of
Nations, news and many of the other traditional
media for the dissemination of information had
been restricted by censorship and by lack of
physical facilities, such as newsprint or shipping
space for books. In many parts of the world,
'Addre.ss delivered at the Institute on World Affairs,
Eiverside, Calif., on Dec. 6, 1948, and released to the
press on the same date.
772
less favored, news and information had been re-
stricted to what the enemy, Germany, Japan, and
Italy, had been willing to allow to the occupied
areas and to what the Allies had been able to sup-
ply despite totalitarian bans, sometimes an im-
pressive amount, sometimes a tantalizing trickle.
Curiosity was excited by the years of darkness.
When the lights went on again people all over
the world wanted to know; they wanted to know
what had happened in the free nations during
the years they were cut off. They wanted to know
how the Great Powers lived, those Great Powers
which had brought about the downfall of their
oppressors. The flow of Allied armies round the
world increased that curiosity. After having
seen American G-I's by the hundreds and thou-
sands, people everywhere wanted to find out "what
made them run", what were the homes behind
those fun-loving, kind, rough, and generally mi-
predictable American soldiers and sailors. And
over and above the general interest there were the
specialists : doctors thirsted for information on the
latest techniques; scholars were eager to resume
their contacts with other scholars; writers with
other writers. Never had there been a more eager
audience.
The peoples of the world, in August 1945, were
on the one hand eager for infoi'mation but, on the
other hand, they had in almost every case been
surfeited with a glut of propaganda, often heavy-
handed and, in the case of enemy-occupied terri-
tories, generally resented. After four years of
Goebbels' outpouring, the Frenchman was hyper-
sensitive to anything which even smacked of
propaganda; tired of Mussolini's rantings, cynical
Romans shrugged off anything with a "message"
and in areas far less sophisticated than these, a
very keen sense of smell had been developed.
There, then, is the scene: a world avid for in-
formation, but very generally sceptical, hard to
persuade, easily "scared away". How, in particu-
lar, did the Communist movement throughout the
world seek to exploit the reservoir of good will
filled to overflowing by the victorious Soviet
armies and by the sacrifices of the Russian people?
First of all there were, to be sure, the tradi-
tional (if one may use the term for a relatively
modern activity) the traditional media of in-
formation open to any country: the press, radio,
Deparfmenf of State Bulletin
the motion picture. Soviet Tnformntion Bureiius
issued, and still issue, to the locul papers and
publications their news bulletins and editorial ex-
cerpts from the Soviet ])apers. Powerful trans-
mitters send out from Kussia short-wave radio
programs in many lanj^uatjes. Documentary
shorts and full-length feature films show the most
flattering picture of the Soviet Union. The scale
of these efforts is impressive and I wish that I
were able to give you some idea of the amount of
men and money involved in such output. This I
am. mifortunately, unalile to do. I think I can
tell you wliat British Infoi'mation Services spent
in France in a given year for information and cul-
tural activities. In l'.)4(), for instance, according to
my best estimate the British nuist have spent ap-
proximately $440,000 and engaged in such work
some 50 British subjects. I might add that when I
asked my "opposite number"' at the Soviet Embassy
what his government spent in France for infor-
mation and cultural relations. Mr. Vidiassov an-
swered with a wide grin, "Ah, ]\Iister Schneider,
it is no mystery but of couvkc I cannot tell you!"'
I might also add, as a parenthesis, that three or
four months after calculating that the British had
spent on information and cultural relations about
'$440,000 in 1946 and after having estimated that
the Russians must have spent ten times as much
(a wild guess to be sure) , I learned that our United
States appropriation for 1047/48 (Julv 1947 to
July 1948) was to be approximately $125,000.
But. in spite of the efforts of the Soviet Union,
in spite of the obviously large sums of money spent
by them in their overt, officially acknowledged
propaganda campaign, the results of these, in so
far as one may judge anything so intangible as
human reactions to propaganda, seem to be medi-
ocre. This type of Connnunist propaganda is
heavy-handed, and except among hardened party
members who need no convincing, it is often re-
sented.
Tlie Tass Agency's news files, the Moscow short-
wave radio outpourings, the magazines and dis-
plays and exhibits, however, were but one and
by no means the most skilful of the approaches
to the mind and to the emotions of man.
A more novel and more attractive device was
the national association known in France as
"France-U.S.S.R."' and in this country as ''Na-
tional Council of American-Soviet Friendship",
different names for different countries but always
essentially the same pattern.
ilay I give j'ou some idea of the association
"France-U.S.S.R.", with which I was quite
familiar. It is a local example which follows a
general plan. Its aim : to promote a better under-
standing of the Soviet Union in France. Its
directorate : geneials and professors, parliamen-
tarians, ex-ministers, scientists of world-wide rep-
utation. And its methods^ "Well you might say
"no holds barred". First there was what you
December 19, ?948
rHE RECORD OF THE WllK
might expect: lectures, screenings of Soviet docu-
mentaries, partici])ation in pro-Soviet demonstra-
tions such as "Stalingrad Day" or "Red Army
Day". But to such classical methods "France-
TT.S.S.R." added pretty neai-ly anything you could
imagine which woidtl attract and entertain. I
have seen announcements of country fairs, rod and
line fishing contests, dances, outdoor bowling
tournaments, picnics, and bicycle races organized
by "France-U.S.S.R.", all of these activities aimed
at recruiting Communist party members and
vaunting the glories of life in the Soviet Union.
IMost effectively of all perhaps, "France-U.S.S.R."
organized for the children of its adherents free
sununer camps: a fortnight on the Mediterranean
seashore. A mother who lives in the smoky suburb
of St. Denis or Ivry, who sees her son go off, pale,
and sees him come back all brown and toasted
after a fortnight in the Mediterranean sunshine —
well, you can guess for what party she and all her
family and friends will vote.
I dislike statistics but you should perhaps know
that "France-U.S.S.R." claims a membership of
some 150,000 to 175,000. With national head-
quarters in Paris and departmental offices in 57
of France's 90 departments, "France-U.S.S.R."
also runs 1,452 regional offices. To be sure these
vary in size f ronr large business suites open six
days a week to one room offices open on market
day. But don't forget that 1,452 offices consti-
tute a very impressive number of outlets for in-
formation about the great "friendly" power to
the East.
And in all the operations of "France-U.S.S.R."
you never meet a Russian. There are no Soviet
"members on the board of directors, no Russian
employees. They are all French. That is their
great strength.
I have gone into "France-U.S.S.R." at some
length because I followed its activities quite
closely in Paris, and because it is quite typical.
And its national character, its use of Frenchmen
only, bring us to the last and perhaps most for-
midal)le weapon in the Communist arsenal.
If the Soviet Union is the fount ainhead of Com-
munist proi)aganda, it is the Communist organi-
zation and the Communist press in each country
which, far better than the Soviet publications
themselves, publicize and advance the Communist
cause, all for the greater glory of the Soviet
Union.
The Communist papers are not Russian. They
are not spreading Russian propaganda. Perish
the thought! They are militant organs fighting
for the best interests of the Italian — or Swedish —
or French proletariat. And by this token their
acceptance is greater both when they extol the
virtues of the Soviet paradise and when they damn
the imperialist, the trust-ridden, the uncultured,
the utterly despicable capitalist country: the
U.S.A.
773
THE RECORD OF THB WBEK
Of other, more devious, methods such as "front"
groups, semipolitical groups, philanthropic socie-
ties, one could give hundreds of examples. At still
other more occult devices, the rumor campaign, the
whisper, the smear, one can guess. But they can
but add to the full-throated chorus of the Soviet
and non-Soviet Communist press, radio, lecturer,
loud-speaker; the big drums and the piccolo and
the throaty cello together form a mighty roar.
Well, what do we do about it? Wliat is
America's answer to Communist propaganda
abroad ?
I should not like this to sound like an attempt
at a paradox, but America is the answer to Com-
munist projDaganda abroad.
The existence of this country is the answer, in
so far as this country is known.
Wliat is the target of Communist propaganda ?
The hungry and the cold, the tired and the dis-
couraged people of the world are the natural
targets of Communist propaganda. To these men
and women, racked by war, weary and hopeless,
a new economic system is offered. The police-state
methods? Bah! Malicious lies ! Join the Com-
munist Party and you shall be led along the road
toward a morrow full of music. Can't you feel
the appeal of such slogans to those who cry : "it
will be a change", and "nothing could be worse
than the present"?
And yet to these same weary millions the word
America has long shone as a symbol of hope, as
a sun piercing the darkness of their frightened
night. Yes, to be sure, it is a very distant sun,
a far-off hope. The land of miracles is far, far
away, difficult to imagine, almost impossible to
reach. It is seen as through a glass, darkly. But
America stands for freedom. Wlio would not
like to know America ?
How do we Americans satisfy this desire for
knowledge, how do we answer the slurs and slan-
ders which are daily poured out against us?
First of all, I am glad to say, we don't answer
the slurs directly. Direct answers to hostile
propaganda put the answerer on the defensive.
They put him on to his adversaries' terrain. They
are a sign of weakness, not of strength.
During the war, at the request of the Allied
air forces, British and American propagandists
taunted the Germans: "TFo ht die Luftwaffe?
(Where is the Luftwaffe?)" The Allies wanted
them to come up and be destroyed before the
Normandy landings. The campaign aroused
such doubts among the German listeners that
Goebbels himself felt constrained to speak out, to
explain, as best he could, the Luftwaffe's absence
from the skies of battle. That day the broad-
casters of the BBC and of tlie Voice of America
knew that this campaign at least had been suc-
cessful. And the interrogations of prisoners of
war soon showed that Goebbels' retorts and denials
had reassured no one; that, on the contrary, they
774
had left the German listeners more persuaded than
before that all was not well with their air force.
Instructed by this and a dozen other such ex-
periences, we do not answer Communist slander,
tit for tat, we do not get involved in the vain argu-
ments— "true; not true; you lie; I don't". Our
aim ^and when I say "we" I am thinking of
Americans in Government or in private informa-
tion work; of Embassies and of American news-
paper offices abroad) , our aim is, broadly speaking,
to show the fair face of this country, of our peo-
ple, and to let the true picture of America tell the
story.
Who engages in such efforts? Wliat agencies
or groups contribute to our information work
abroad ?
News is, I suppose, the prime vehicle for such
information and American news does get abroad,
both in its written and in its visual forms. The
great American news agencies, the picture agen-
cies, the newsreel companies, certain American
magazines with overseas and in some cases foreign-
language editions, all these contribute to a projec-
tion of the American scene for foreign readers and
spectators. American books, too, the technical
books showing our progress in every field of human
endeavor, the books on our social, economic, and
political life, are a strong weapon in the conflict
of ideas. j
But all these media labor under difficulties, some
peculiar to the postwar world of 1948 and others
inherent in our very own way of life.
News agencies and magazines and papers and
newsreels and publishing houses in a free economy
must make money. And the currencies of many
countries are in such a weakened condition that
dollars cannot be found to buy American books or
to subscribe to American magazines. Yet these
commercial organizations have little use for large
balances in guilder or lire or francs. Moreover in
many countries, curtained off behind that iron
screen, these vehicles of American thought cannot
circulate regardless of whether there is or is not an
available dollar balance.
Furthermore the nature of the American press
and American publications is such that the very
idea of propaganda is foreign to them. In the
very long-term view this is, without doubt, sane
and healthy. But the short-term need for an im-
mediate reaction against Communist propaganda
is not readily met by agencies to which objectivity
and impartial news treatment are cardinal prin-
ciples.
Then there are the films. Are these the answer? •
I remember of what city I am today a guest and
I speak with circumspection. In other countries
millions of people every week see the American
films and for millions each one of the pictures is,
indeed, one of the rays of that sun of hope, Amer-
ica. I should hesitate to say that every American
film is a good ambassador. Some of them, in fact,
Department of State Bulletin
sow curious and regrettable misconceptions, chiefly
because tlie foreign audiences lack knowledge
about the U.S.A. and its ways. But the aggregate
impact of American films is certainly a contribut-
ing factor and one of no mean importance in the
total presentation of the life, thought, and activi-
ties of the United States. The films, however im-
portant as they are, are also subject to quota re-
strictions, to dollar currency shortages, and to
actual censorship here and there.
All these different diihculties at present attend-
ant upon private efforts to portray our way of life
abroad and thereby to destroy the myths and
stereotypes carefully fostered, when they are not
invented, by the Communist organizations will
explain why the United States Government has
felt it desirable to establish and maintain a service
devoted to the spreading of information about the
United States; to the exchange of people, of edu-
cators, students, technicians, physicians, and ad-
ministrators ; to spread the truth about our policies,
our national aims and our way of life, a service
complementary to the efforts of private enterprise.
Acts, of course, speak more eloquently than
words. The European Recovery Plan, Marshall
Plan, Economic Cooperation Administration, call
it what you like, has brought home to many mil-
lions the real aims of our foreign policy.
But even acts must be made known, and cor-
rectly known. To baptize the Marshall Plan as a
new and devilish device of "American Economic
Imperialism" designed to subjugate the countries
of Europe and to colonize them in favor of the
Wall Street barons was one of the first moves of the
Communists everywhere.
To combat this and all other attacks on the
United States and to destroy even among our
friends the misconceptions so prevalent about our
country is the task of U.S. Information and Edu-
cational Exchange Services throughout the world.
These services operate through what I earlier
described as the traditional or classical media of
press, radio, and films, through the exchange of
persons, and through the use of books and
exhibits.
My examples have, as I quite realize, been drawn
very largely if not exclusively from France, since
I had the honor of serving there myself so recently.
Let me once more describe the operation of our
services in France, with the remark that similar
operations, varying in size and scope and op-
portunity, are being conducted by the Department
of State at some 130 posts in 82 countries through-
out the world.
One of the essential tasks of the mission is to
obtain full and fair treatment of American news
in the local press. To this end a service of some
5,000 words daily is radioed from Washington to
Paris (as it is throughout the world). In Paris
it is taken "off the air", translated into French and
distributed in the form of a daily bulletin to 2,000
December 19, 1948
THE RECORD Of THE WEEK
French addressees, about half of them newspaper
and periodical editors, the other half being com-
posed of educators, members of Parliament, gov-
ernment officials, trade-union leaders, doctors,
lawyers — in short, the leaders of public opinion.
This radioed material is backed up by air-mailed
features and articles, reprints from American,
magazines, still pictures, exhibits, accounts of our
progress in every field, explanations of our na-
tional policy. Such output is used extensively by
the French press, particularly in the provinces.
It does not compete with the private American
news agencies, since the government output is not
geared for "spot news" but deals with either full
texts of American Government pronouncements
or with materials which no private agency would
find commercially profitable. ( I should like to add
that when I speak of American Government, I use
this term in its widest sense, and refer to coverage
of the activities of the Congress, of the Executive
Branch and, on occasion, of the individual States.)
Documentary motion pictures, bought or bor-
rowed from other Government agencies, from col-
leges and industry and other private groups are
shown throughout France. They are pictures of
American life, they show the American home, the
skills and techniques of our professional men and
women. And they show in France to some 750,000
people every month. World-wide audiences are in
the nature of 102 million yearly.
In Paris and, shortly, in five cities in the prov-
inces United States Information Service provides
a reference library on American matters. The
Paris library receives an average of 175 visitors
daily, and approximately 80 percent of these visi-
tors are scholars, government employees, physi-
cians, and research workers. I should add that
many points in the world outdo by far the Paris
record in this respect. In the Philippines, for
instance, the United States Library receives about
500 visitors daily.
A radio officer in Paris represents there the
Voice of America and has arranged for the local
rebroadcast of our New York produced show over
one of the French networks with 14 stations, cover-
ing the whole of France. In this respect we are
privileged, since we are the only country to enjoy
a regidar half-hour relay, seven days a week.
"France-U.S.S.R." has two quarter-hour shows,
weekly, against America's seven half-hour shows —
a proportion of 7 to 1. And beside his function of
liaison between the Voice of America and Radio
Diffusion Fran^aise, the radio officer produces
local shows himself on an average of 18 every
month, featuring American music, travelogues,
and aspects of our national folk ways.
Finally, on the educational side, a cultural offi-
cer and his assistants pursue the manifold duties
that his very title suggests: lectures, advice to
French professors, fellows, students en route for
775
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
the U.S.A.; assistance to American students,
painters, musicians arriving to study in France;
the organization of Franco- American seminars for
teachers of English. Tliese seminars, by the way,
reveal the most surprising areas of ignorance. At
one of them my wife, who was attending a round
table, was seriously told by a French teacher : "I
can't understand what American women can do
all day long! You all have laundry machines,
dishwashing machines, your children are never at
home. Since there is no family life, and you cook
everything out of cans, what do you do the rest
of the time?"
This was a picture of the operation of your
Government's information service in France.
With local differences similar activities are cai*-
ried out in the other countries of both hemispheres
and these activities are still being developed. For
instance. Public Law 402 authorizes in the Eastern
Hemisphere exchange-of -persons activities already
in effect in the Western Hemisphere. No funds
were voted for this in the Eastern Hemisphere in
the current fiscal year, but the program is foreseen
as a nearing possibility.
Tliere are two phases of the information work,
upon which my Paris outline could not touch and
which I must add to give you a rounded picture.
The Voice of America in New York broadcasts
in 14 languages and its programs are boosted by
relay points at Munich, at Manila and, by arrange-
ment with the BBC, in England. I suppose most
people have heard of the Voice. Whenever it has
had the misfortune, in the outpouring of its vast
daily output, to make a slip, the attendant public-
ity has been tremendous. Less, of course, was
said about 50 effective programs than about one
"off the beam." It is however comforting to us
to know from our colleagues of the American Em-
bassy at Moscow that the "Voice" in Russian, for
instance, is widely listened to in the Soviet Union
and that, again according to reports from the field,
we are striking just about the right note by not
taking pereonal issue with ai;^y of the Soviet
"great ones", by avoiding all name calling which
might provoke national pride and resentment but
by maintaining a truthful, cool, and slightly ironi-
cal attitude about Soviet institutions which seems
to appeal to the wr}' sense of humor of the Soviet
listener. I admit that the appraisal of the quality
of our output to Russia is based on the opinions
of a very few. But, you see, we cannot be scien-
tifically informed about our success in the U.S.S.R.
for there are no public-opinion polls available to us
in the Soviet Union.
The magazine Amenka is tlie last point I should
like to mention. This Russian-language magazine
published in New York by the State Department's
Office of International Information, is sold in the
U.S.S.R.; 60,000 copies monthly are distributed
through the Soviet News Agency. It is a large,
heavily illustrated, colorful magazine which deals
with noncontroversial aspects of American life.
Its 50,000 copies are a very small drop in a large
ocean but we know that many copies of the maga-
zine circulate from hand to hand until they drop
to pieces.
There is the picture : A Communist country and
Communist parties in many countries join in a
shrill, hysterical chorus : America is brutal, Amer-
ica is money-mad, America is standardized, uncul-
tured, imperialistic, war mongering, fickle, un-
stable, headed toward disaster.
With more restraint and with less ample re-
sources the Voices of America answer throughout
the world : America is peace-loving; America seeks
no aggrandizement; America is made up of 145
million people who hope, who fear, who struggle
and love and live and die much as you do. We
have common problems, but we have one inesti-
mable treasure, which we are willing to share but
for the defense of which (our history proves it)
we are willing to die. That treasure is our freedom.
Who is winning in this struggle for the minds
of men ? My opinion is that truth is on the march.
But America's answer will be convincing only if
that answer is steadfastly truthful. Ideas are not
defeated by the weight of arms or by material
resources. The Christian idea was triumphant
against the overwhelming might of the Roman
Empire because of faith. When appraising the
Commimist attack let us not forget that if among
its leaders there are rogues and self-seeking men
lusting for power, there are also in the ranks
men and women for whom that economic system
and that theory of social organization replace
God, fatherland, and family. It is in the measure
that we can match and surpass that fanatical faith
with an even more passionate belief in and sup-
port of our own f I'eedoms that America may find
the true answer to Communist propaganda.
Berlin Elections Demonstrate Civic Courage
Statement hy the Department of State
[Released to the press December 6] ,
The Berlin population has in recent months j
demonstrated a type of civic courage which has
won for it the admiration of the democratic peoples
of the world. The wliolehearted participation of
an overwhelming majority of the population of
the Western sectors of Berlin in fair and free
numicipal elections yesterday was a further
demonstration of the same civic courage. The
conduct of the people of Berlin is an encourage-
ment to all those devoted to the maintenance of
civil liberties and democratic processes.
776
Department of State Bulletin
Austrian Federal Government Asks for
Continuation of Peace Treaty Negotiations
[Iteloasi'il to till' press lJei'i'iiil>cr 7)
A note was reciMved from the Austrian Federal
Government on December G pointing out that no
jjrogress had been made in the preparation of the
Austrian treaty since the conference of the Depu-
ties of tlie Council of l''orei<rn Ministers was ad-
journed in London in May of this year. The note
stated that the Austrian Government, as well as
the Austrian jjeopie. are most anxious for the
speedy conclusion of the treaty, which would bring
about the withdrawal of the occupation forces of
the Four Powers and the elimination of the divi-
sion of Austria into four zones. The Austrian
Government considered that the Four Power
occupation was an impediment to Austria's eco-
nomic recoverv. The request was made of the
Government of the United States jointly with the
other Goveriunents i-epresented in the Council of
Foreign Ministers to resume their negotiations in
order to bring about an early conclusion of the
treaty. Similar notes have been aildressed to the
Governments of Great Britain, France, and the
Soviet Union.
The Department of State has replied to the
Austrian note welcoming the initiative which the
Austrian Federal Government has shown and ex-
pressing the hope that a suitable basis might be
found for the continuation of negotiations and the
early conclusion of the treaty. The Austrian Gov-
ernment was informed that the United States is
fully prepared to participate in renewed discus-
sions on the Austrian treaty. As soon as the replies
of the other Governments are received the United
States Deputy on the Council of Foreign Min-
isters, as chairman of the next meeting, will ad-
dress an appropriate communication to the Secre-
tar}' General of the Council of Foreign Ministers.
Participation in Venezuelan Political Affairs
by U.S. Petroleum Companies Denied
[Keleasi'd to the ine^s December 8]
Charges have appeared in the press that United
States petroleum companies backed the military
group which recently overthrew the Government
of President Romulo Gallegos in Venezuela.
At least two American petroleum companies are
reported by the press to have alrei'dy issued state-
ments denying any intervention in Venezuelan
internal affairs. The Department of State knows
of no evidence or indications of any kind which
would give the slightest support to such charges.
As far as is known to the Department American
companies and other entities represented in Vene-
zuela avoided participation of any kind in the
Venezuelan revolution of last month. Americans
residing abroad have repeatedly been warned that
December 19, J948
THE RECORD Of THE WEEK
interference in the domestic political affairs of
foreign states may result in the withdrawal of
United States Government protection, and the
Department takes this opportunity of reiterating
and emphiisizing this injunction.
U.S. Military Attache in Venezuela
Impartial in Domestic Situation
[Released to the press December 10]
A United Press report from Habana dated De-
cember 9, 1948, quotes Romvdo Gallegos, exiled
President of Venezuela, as "demanding" that the
United States Government explain the presence of
its military attache at the Caracas army barracks
during the military revolt of November 24. Senor
Gallegos is further quoted as having stated that
the military attache of the United States acted as
"cooperator or counselor'' for the revolutionists.
According to information received from the
American Ambassador in Caracas, the military
attache of the United States, Col. Edward F.
Adams, did visit the Ministry of National Defense
on November 24. The purpose of this visit was to
inquire if there was any news from our air attache
at Caracas who a few days earlier had left for a
sparsely populated region of Venezuela known as
the Gran Sabana to search for a lost United States
military plane. No word had been received fx'om
him, giving rise to serious concern.
Despite the political crisis it was not felt advis-
able to defer this inquiry because of the nature of
the emergency. Shortly after noon the same day
Colonel Adams visited the Presidential Palace,
Miraflores, on the same errand. There he met:
Venezuelan officers of his acquaintance who con-
firmed an earlier radio report that the Army had
taken over the Government. The American Am-
bassador has informed the Department that
Colonel Adams has stated categorically that in
none of his conversations did he indicate any par-
tiality for either side involved in the political
crisis or give any advice or express opinions which
could be interpreted as constituting intervention
in Venezuelan domestic affairs.
It is regretted that Seiior Gallegos, not knowing
the emergency reasons for the visits of Colonel
Adams to the Ministry of Defense and the Presi-
dential Palace on November 24. concluded that
they had some other purpose, even though Senor
Gallegos cannot but be aware of the record of this
Government in adhering strictly to its noninter-
vention commitments. Standing instructions of
tlie Department to all its missions prescribe that
oflicials of this Government must not intervene in
the internal political affairs of any foreign govern-
ment. There is no basis for belief that any mem-
ber of the Embassy staff failed to live up to this
standing injunction during the recent political
crisis in Venezuela.
777
THE RECORD OF THE WBEK
Conversations on Security Problems
of North Atlantic
[Released to the press December 10]
The Actinor Secretary of State this afternoon
conferred with the Ambassadors of Belgium. Can-
ada. France, the Netherlands, and the United
Kingdom, and the Minister of Luxembourg in a
continuation of the talks, begun in July, on se-
curity problems of common interest in relation
to the Senate Kesolution of June 11. 1948. The
conversations had been recessed in September to
give the Governments an opportimity to consider
the tentative views which had been developed.
The resumed conversations are expected to con-
tinue for some time and no information concern-
ing their substance will be made public until such
time as decisions may be reached.
President of Cuba Visits in the United States
Statement Upon Departure by Acting Secretary
Lovett
[Released to the press December 11]
The friendly relations between the United
States and Cuba have greatly benefited by the
visit of Dr. Carlos Prio. The President of Cuba
carries with him our best wishes as he returns
home.
In the course of President Prions visit it became
apparent that the two coimtries are seeking com-
mon objectives and that there exists a mutual de-
sire to cooperate in practical ways towards
achieving these common ideals.
The United States is prepared to do all that it
can to work with Cuba in reinforcing the social
and economic basis on which true cooperation must
rest.
Remarks hy President Truman^
I am very happy to welcome you, President Prio,
to the United States. Xo two countries of this
closely knit Hemisphere have been bound together
more closely than the Republic of Cuba and the
United States. The friendly bond between them
was forged in a common struggle for freedom, and
it has continued through all the trials of two world
wars and through the many other problems in the
political and economic growth of our two coun-
tries. There is no relationship which better typi-
fies the firm solidarity of the American States
than the traditionally cordial collaboration be-
tween Cuba and the United States.
' Made upon the arrival of the Cuban President at the
National Airport on Dec. 8, 1948, and released to the press
by the White House on the same date.
778
Mr. President, I have been looking forward to
your arrival, as have all the many friends of Cuba
in this country, and we sincerely hope that you
will thoroughly enjoy yoirr all too brief stay in
the United btates.
The President To Recommend
Relief for Palestine Refugees
[Released to the press by the White House December 7]
The President, following adoption by the
United Nations General Assembly on November
19 of a resolution for assistance to Palestine refu-
gees, will recommend to Congress that the United
States contribute 50 percent of the amount pro-
vided for in this resolution, but in no case more
than a total of $16,000,000 as the share of the
United States.
The resolution of the General Assembly, adopted
at its 16od plenary meeting on November 19, 1948,
considered that a sum of approximatelv 829,500,-
000 will be required to provide relief for 500.000
refusees for a period of nine months from De-
cember 1. 194S. to August 31. 1949, and that an
additional amount of approximately $2,500,000
will be required for administrative and local oper-
ational expenses.
The recommendation of the President to Con-
gress for an amount not to exceed $16,000,000 will
be made in the earnest hope that other countries
will meet the remainder of the total required.
The American Delegation to the United Na-
tions Assembly has emphasized that in accordance
with constitutional requirements the President's
recommendation for an appropriation of $16,000,-
000 for Palestinian refugee relief must be accepted
by the Congress before any funds become available.
The final decision rests with it. The recommenda-
tion will be transmitted to the Congress after it
convenes in January.
Economic Cooperation Agreement
With Korea Signed
Negotiators representing the Governments of
the United States of America and the Republic of
Korea signed an aid agreement at Seoul on De-
cember 10, 1948 (Seoul time).
Taking cognizance of the inauguration of the
Government of the Republic of Korea on August
15, 1948, and the termination on that date of
United States Army military government in
Korea, President Truman on August 23. 1948, an-
nounced that he had instructed the Economic
Cooperation Administrator to make preparations
to take over responsibility for the United States
economic aid program in Korea within a few
months.
Department of State Bulletin
The agreement signed at Seoul on December 10,
■which is being submitted to the Korean National
Assembly for ratification, provides the framework
within which the economic assistance recjuested of
the United States by the Republic of Korea will
be carried out by the Department of ihe Army
and by the Economic Cooperation Administration
when the latter assumes these responsibilities. By
strengthening the economy of Korea through the
economic aid to be furnished under this agree-
ment, the United States will be maintaining its
support for the independence of Korea which has
been furtliered by action of the United Nations.
The agreement was signed on behalf of the United
States by the Special United States Representa-
tive in Korea. Ambassador John J. Muccio, and on
behalf of the Republic of Korea by Prime Minister
Lee Bum Suk and Finance Minister Kim Do Yun.
For text of the aid agreement see press release 999
dated December 10, 1948, of the Department of
State and the Economic Cooperation Adminis-
tration.
Consular Convention Between U.S. and
Republic of the Philippines Proclaimed
• [Released to the press December 7]
On November 26, 1948, the President of the
United States proclaimed the consular convention
between the United States and the Republic of the
Philippines, signed at Manila on March 14, 1947.
This convention, which reaffirms the desire of both
coimtries to strengthen further relations between
them by facilitating the handling of consular mat-
ters, entered into force on November 18, 1948, by
virtue of the exchange on that date of the respec-
tive instruments of ratification.
The convention establishes a formal x-eciprocal
basis for the exchange of consular officers between
the two countries and defines their rights and
duties, covering such matters as privileges and
immunities with respect to taxation and import
duties, responsibilities and authority in the settle-
ment of decedents' estates, representation of na-
tionals, authentication and notarization of docu-
ments, and sliipping and merchant marine
problems such as salvage and personnel. The
rights of each country to acquire land for official
purposes is also covered.
THE FOREIGN SERVICE
Advisory Committee of the Foreign Service
Institute Established
[Released to the press December 8]
An advisory committee of leading American
citizens has been set up by the Secretary of State
to guide and advise the Foreign Service Institute
in its training of Department of State and Foreign
Service personnel overseas, the Department of
State announced on December 8.
December 19, 1948
THE FOKBIGN SERV/CE
This committee, known as the Advisory Com-
mittee of the Foreign Service Institute, will as-
semble in Washington for its first annual meeting
on December 17, at which time it will review the
program of the institute and its plans for the
future.
The Director General of the Foreign Service,
Christian M. Ravndal, will serve as chairman of
the committee. Other members are:
Senator Henry Cabot Lodge, Jr., of Massachusetts
Senator Carl A. Hatch, of Xew Mexico
Congressman Bartel J. Jonkman, of Michigan
Congressman John Kee, of West Virginia
Charles E. Bohlen, Counselor, Department of State
Joseph C. Grew, former Under Secretary of State
John S. Dickey, President of Dartmouth College
Gardner Cowles. President, Des Moines Register and
Tribune Company
Prof. Graham H. Stuart, Stanford University
Ralph T. Reed, President, American Express Company
The two senatorial members of the committee
were nominated by the President pro tempore of
the Senate, and the two House members by the
Speaker. Other members were named by the
Secretary of State.
The Foreign Service Institute was created by
the Foreign Service Act of 1946 "in order to
furnish training and instruction to officers and
employees of the Foreign Service and of the De-
partment of State and to other officers and employ-
ees of the Government for whom training and
instruction in the field of foreign relations is nec-
essary, and in order to promote and foster pro-
gi-ams of study incidental to such training."
The Institute was formally established on March
13, 1947. Dr. William P. Maddox is its Director.
It occupies a building at 2115 C Street, N^Y.
PUBLICATIONS
Department of State
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, Govern-
ment Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C. Address re-
quests direct to the Superintendent of Documents, except
in the case of free publications, ichich may be obtained
from the Department of State.
Health and Sanitation Cooperative Program in Haiti.
Treaties and Other International Acts Series 1801. Pub.
3294. 3 pp. 50.
Agreement Between the United States and Haiti ex-
tending the agreement of April 7, 1942, as amended,
until June 30, 1949 — Effected by exchange of notes
signed at Port-au-Prince June 25 and 30, 1948; en-
tered into force June 30, 1948.
United States Edncational Foundation in New Zealand.
Treaties and Other International Acts Series 1812. Pub.
3327. 7 pp. oc.
Agreement Between the United States and New Zea-
land— Signed at Wellington September 14, 1948 ; en-
tered into force September 14, 1948.
779
The United Nations and ^^ee
Specialized Agencies
General Assembly Adopts Declaration of Pas«
Human Rights:
Statement by Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt . 751
Text of the Universal Declaration of Hu-
man Rights 752
Closing of General Assembly. Statement by
Ambassador Warren R. Austin .... 754
Ad Hoc Political Committee Resolution on
Admission of New Members 754
General Assembly Adopts Convention on
Genocide:
Statement by Ernest A. Gross 755
Resolution of Approval and Text of Con-
vention 756
U.S. Urges Continuation of Temporary Com-
mission on Korea. Statement by John
Foster Dulles in Committee I . . . . 758
Text of Joint Resolution 760
U.S. Position on Unanimity Principle of the
Charter. Statement by Benjamin V.
Cohen in Ad Hoc Committee 761
The United States in the United Nations . . 763
Report on the First Session of the General
Council of Iro. Article by George L.
Warren 765
Ibo Preparatory Commission: Seventh Ses-
sion 767
Occupation Matters
U.S. Suspends Consideration of Proposal for
Japanese Deconcentration of Finances
and Industry. Statement by General
Frank R. McCoy 768
Conduct of Trade With Japan 770
Occupation Matters — Continued Fi^ee
Travel Abroad of Japanese Commercial
Representatives 771
Berlin Elections Demonstrate Civic Courage . 776
Austrian Federal Government Asks for Con-
tinuation of Peace Treaty Negotiations . 777
Treaty Information
Austrian Federal Government Asks for Con-
tinuation of Peace Treaty Negotiations . 777
Economic Cooperation Agreement With
Korea Signed 778
Consular Convention Between U.S. and Re-
public of the Philippines Proclaimed . . 779
International Information and
Cultural Affairs
America's Answer to Communist Propa-
ganda Abroad. Address by Douglas
Schneider 772
General Policy
Participation in Venezuelan Political Affairs
by U.S. Petroleum Companies Denied . 777
U.S. Military Attach^ in Venezuela Impar-
tial in Domestic Situation 777
Conversations on Security Problems of North
Atlantic 778
President of Cuba Visits in the United States:
Statement by Acting Secretary Lovett . . 778
Remarks by President Truman 778
Economic Affairs
The President To Recommend Relief for
Palestine Refugees 778
Tfie Foreign Service
Advisory Committee of the Foreign Service
Institute Established 779
Publications
Department of State 779
^{mJmMwlm^
Oeorgc L. Warren, author of the articles on the Iko, is Adviser
on Refugee.? and Displaced Persons, Office of the Assistant Secre-
tary for Occupied Areas, Department of State. Mr. Warren
served as Alternate U.S. Representative to the First Session of
the Council of the International Refugee Organization, and as
U.S. Representative to tlie Preparatory Commission.
U. 5. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1948
■^
f^S"^
/
^yne^ ^e^a^tmeni/ jO^ t/iate^
STATUS OF WORK OF THE THIRD REGULAR
SESSION OF THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY . . 783
PEACEFUL ADJUSTMENT SOUGHT THROUGH
PALESTINE CONCILIATION COMMISSION •
Statement by John Foster Dulles 793
ANNOUNCEMENT OF INTENTION TO ENTER
TARIFF NEGOTIATIONS 807
INTER-AMERICAN CONFERENCE ON REI?ABILI-
TATION OF THE CRIPPLED AND DISABLED •
By MichaelJ. Shortley 804
For complete contents see back cover
Vol. XIX, No. 495
December 26, 1948
■ates
^■^'^''^
JAN 10 1949
•»«T^ 0»
e>^<e
Qje/ia^^e^ ^/ y^i^ J3u.llOllll
Vol. XIX, No. 495 • Publication 3379
December 26, 1948
For Bale by the Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office
Washington 26, D.C.
Price:
62 issues, domestic $6, foreign $7.26
Single copy, 16 cents
Published with the approval of the
Director of the Bureau of the Budget
Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and Items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
OS STATE Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.
The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.
Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.
status of Work of the Third Regular Session of the General Assembly
as of December 12, 1948^
GENERAL ASSEMBLY, PLENARY
Item
Action
Meeting Date
Opening of session by Chairman of Delega-
tion of Argentina.
Appointment of Credentials Committee . .
Election of President . . .
Constitution of the Main
Election of Officers.
Committee and
5. Election of Vice Presidents
6. Notification by Stq under article 12, par.
of the Charter.
7. Adoption of agenda
8. Opening of general debate .
9. Report of Stq on work of Organization . . .
10. Election to Security Council
Election to Ecosoc
U. Election of five members of Icj (article
XVII, par. 1, of Statute).
12. Progressive development of International
law — election of members of Ilc.
Appointed Brazil, Burma, Canada, Ecuador,
France, Iran, Ukraine, Sweden, Yemen.
Report approved
2d Report approved
Evatt of Australia
Committee 1 — Spaak, Belgium
2 — Santa Cruz, Mexico
3 — Malik, Lebanon
4 — Entezam, Iran
6 — Wilgress, Canada
6 — Alfaro, Panama
China, France, Mexico, Poland, U.S.S.R., U.K.,
U.S.
Presented to plenary
Adopted after rejection of several proposals to
delete items 14, 16, 17, 19, 44.
Decided to delay item on treatment of Indians
in South Africa.
Added after report of General Committee: reso-
lution on prohibition of atomic weapons and
reduction of armaments (U.S.S.R.) referred
to Committee 1.
Resolution for great powers to renew efforts to
compose differences (Mexico) referred to
Committee 1.
39 countries spoke
Ended
Cuba, Norway, Egypt
China, France, India, Peru, Belgium, Chile . . .
Elected 5: Hsu Mo, China; Badawi, Egypt;
Read, Canada; Winiarski, Poland; Moricic,
Yugoslavia.
Elected 15 members: Alfaro, Panama; Amado,
Brazil; Brierly, U.N.; Cordoba, Mexico;
Francois, Netherlands; Hsu, China; Hudson,
U.S.; Kdratsky, U.S.S.R.; Rau, India; Scelle,
France; Spiropoulos, Greece; Yepes, Colom-
bia; Sandstrom, Sweden; El-Khouri, Syria;
Zourek, Czechoslovakia.
136
136
139
152-
136
142
56
84
50
104
61
138
139
142
146
147
150
139
148
149
149
-153
154-55
Sept. 21
Sept. 21
Sept. 23
Dec. 8
Sept. 21
Sept. 21
Sept. 22
Sept. 23
Sept. 24
Sept. 28
Sept. 28
Oct. 8
Sept. 23
Sept. 29
Oct. 8
Oct. 8
Oct. 23
Nov. 3
'Editob's Note: This document, an informal compilation, was prepared by the Reference and Research Branch of
the U.S. Mission to the United Nations from daily press reports and from reports of the International Broadcasting
Division of the Department of State.
December 26, 1948
783
THC UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
GENERAL ASSEMBLY, PLENARY— Continued
Item
Meeting
13
14
16
17
18
20
21
Recommendation of SC to GA regarding par-
ticipation of non-U. N. member, party to
Icj statute, in election of Icj judges.
Draft protocol to bring under control drugs
outside the scope of the Convention on
July 13, 1931, for limithig the manufacture
and regulating the distribution of narcotic
drugs, as amended by the protocol signed
at Lake Success on Dec. II, 1946: item
proposed by Ecosoc.
15. Financial report and accounts for the finan-
cial period ended Dec. 31, 1947, and report
of Board of Auditors.
Icef: annual audit of accounts of fund:
report of Syg.
Annual report of the Staff Benefit Com-
mittee on operation of pension fund.
Reports of Advisory Committee on Adminis-
trative and Budgetary Questions.
19. Organization of a U.N. postal service; re-
port of Syg.
Composition of Secretariat and principle of
geographic distribution: report of Syg.
Permanent invitation to Director General of
Organization of American States to assist
at sessions of the General Assembly:
proposed by Argentina.
22. Appointments to fill vacancies in member-
ship of subsidiary bodies of General
Assembly.
a) Advisory Committee on Administrative
and Budgetary Questions.
Committee on Contributions.
Board of Auditors.
Investments Committee.
23. Appointment to fill vacancy in membership
of Committee on Contributions in replace-
ment of Dr. Jan Papanek: item proposed
by Czechoslovakia.
24. Appointment to fill vacancy in membership
of Advisory Committee on AdminLstrative
and Budgetary Questions in replacement
of Dr. Jan Papanek: item proposed by
Czechoslovakia.
25. Appeal to great powers to renew their effort
to compose their differences and establish
lasting peace: item proposed by Mexico.
26. Registration and publication of treaties and
international agreements: report of Syg.
27. Information from non-self-governing terri-
tories :
a) Summary and analysis of information
transmitted under article 73e of
Charter: report of Syg.
b) Information transmitted under article
73e: report of Special Committee.
28. Reports of the Atomic Energy Commission:
resolution of Security Council.
b)
c)
d)
Adopted .
Approved
150
150
Approved
Approved
Approved
Approved report on travel and subsistence ex-
penses with modifications.
Approved Committee 5 recommendations . . ,
Approved Committee 5 recommendations . .
Approved
Approved Committee 5 recommendations on
all boaies.
Approved appointment of Hall (U. S.) to Abq
150
150
150
150
150
150
151
151
Approved Committee 5 report rejecting Czecho-
slovak resolution.
Approved Committee 5 report rejecting Czecho-
slovak resolution.
Adopted Mexican proposal
Approved Committee 6 report
Approved Committee 4 report
Approved Committee 4 recommendations on
composition of special committee.
Adopted Canadian resolution and rejected
U.S.S.R. proposal.
151
151
154
155
155
156-157
784
Department of State Bulletin
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIAUZBD AGENCIES
GENERAL ASSEMBLY, PLENARY— Continued
Item
Action
Meeting
Date
29. General Committee proposal to establish an
ad hoc political committee to consider six
items of Committee 1 agenda.
30. Committee 5 report on assessments scale . .
a) Assessments scale for 1949 budget.
b) U.S. proposal to establish a percentage
ceiling.
31. Plan for tax equalization for U.N. Secretariat.
32. Plan for U.N. telecommunications system. .
33. Transfer to U.N. of Unrra residual assets. .
34. Progress Report on U.N. Headquarters . . .
35. Provisions for verbatim records of Ecosoc,
TC.
36. Resolution on working capital fund advances
(including plan for financing International
Conference on Trade and Employment).
37. TC report
38. Transfer to U.N. of LN functions on econom-
ic statistics.
39. Finland's application for membership in
ICAO.
40. U.N. Agreement with Imco
41. U.N. Agreeijient with Iro
42. Ecosoc report:
a) Authorization to regional Economic
Commissions to hold two sessions in
1949 if necessary.
Recommendation that Ecosoc take
geographical distribution into con-
sideration in elections to subsidiary
organs.
Migration
b)
0
43
Invitation to member states to submit views
on possible need to increase Ecosoc
membership from 18 to 24.
Request to Stg to continue efforts to im-
prove coordination between U.N. and
specialized agencies.
45. Prohibition of atomic weapons and dis-
armament.
Palestinian refugee relief assistance . . . .
Discriminations practiced by certain states
in international trade obstructing normal
development of trade relations and con-
trary to purposes and principles of U.N.
Charter.
Report of the Government of Usaf on ad-
ministration of South West .Africa.
Threats to political independence and ter-
ritorial integrity of Greece.
44.
46.
47.
48.
49.
Adopted .
Approved Committee 5 recommendation.
Approved
Approved
Approved
Approved
Approved
Committee
Committee
Committee
Committee
Committee
5 recommendation
5 recommendation
5 recommendation
5 recommendation
5 recommendation
Approved Committee 5 recommendation .
Adopted 4 resolutions on TC rejiort
Committee 6 recommendations approved . . .
Joint Committee 2 and 3 recommendation ap-
proved.
Joint Committee 2 and 3 recommendation ap-
proved.
Joint Committee 2 and 3 recommendation ap-
proved.
Joint Committee 2 and 3 recommendation ap-
proved.
Joint Committee 2 and 3 recommendation ap-
proved.
Joint Committee 2 and 3 recommendation ap-
proved.
Joint Committee 2 and 3 recommendation
approved.
Joint Committee 2 and 3 and Committee 5
recommendation approved.
Adopted Committee 1 majority resolution and
rejected U.S.S.R. proposal.
Adopted Committee 3 recommendation . . . .
Confirmed Committee 2 decision
Adopted Committee 4 resolution
50. Advisability of establishing a permanent
committee of G.^, IC report.
Adopted U.S. resolution criticizing Albania,
Bulgaria, and Yugoslavia and continuing
Unscob.
Adopted Belgian proposal to return Greek
children now abroad to Greece.
Approved continuation of IC for another year .
158
159-160
159-160
159-160
159-160
159-160
159-160
159-160
159-160
160
159-160
159-160
161
161
161
161
161
161
164-165
164-165
166-167
166-167
Nov. 15
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 18
Nov, 18
Nov. 18
Nov. 19
Nov. 19
Nov. 26
Nov. 26
Nov. 27
Nov. 27
Dec. 3
December 26, 1948
785
THE UN/TED NATIONS AND SPECIAUZBD AGENCIES
GENERAL ASSEMBLY, PLENARY— Continued
Item
Action
Meeting
Date
51. Transfer to U.N. of functions exercised by
French Government under agreement of
May 18, 1904, and convention of May 4,
1919, for suppression of white slave traffic,
and under agreement of May 4, 1910, for
suppression of obscene publications; item
proposed by Ecosoc.
62. Permanent missions to U.N
53. Reparation for injuries incurred in service
of U.N.
54. Chap. II of Ecosoc report
55. Declaration of old age rights
56. Establishment of an international center for
training in public administration.
57. Problem of adjournment and unfinished
business.
58. Proposal for adoption of Spanish as vrorking
language of GA.
59. Report of Staff Benefit Committee submit-
ting draft resolutions for a permanent pen-
sion scheme.
60. Question of disposition of former Italian
Colonies.
61. Privileges and immunities of U.N
62. Admission of new members
63. Problem of wasting food in certain countries .
64.
65.
66.
Report of Executive Board of Icef . . . .
Question of continuing through 1949 the
Unac and question of modifying resolu-
tion adopted by Ecosoc in relation
thereto.
Advisory social welfare services
67. Genocide: draft convention and report of
Ecosoc.
68. International Declaration of Human Rights .
69. Palestine: progress report of U.N. mediator
in Palestine.
70. Approval of supplementary agreements with
specialized agencies concerning use of U.N.
laissez-passer.
Transfer of assets of League of Nations . . .
Budget estimates for financial year 1949 in-
cluding resolutions on working capital
fund, unforeseen expenditures.
Problem of independence of Korea
71
72,
73
Approved transfer of functions to U.N
Approved Committee 6 recommendation
Asked Icj for opinion
Adopted 4 Committee 2 resolutions aimed at
promoting economic development.
Approved Committee 3 proposal that Ecosoc
study Argentine Declaration.
Approved Committee 5 proposal to begin prepar-
atory work for establishment of an interna-
tional center.
Decided to adjourn Dec. 11, hold 2d part of ses-
sion in New York, Apr. 1, 1949.
Approved adoption of Spanish as working lan-
guage.
Approved Committee 6, recommended revised
rules of procedure to conform to decision.
Approved Committee 5 recommendations . .
Postponed until 2d part of session
Adopted Committee 6 recommendation . . .
Asked SC to reconsider 12 blocked applications
Called on all nations to take measures against
food wastage and condemned profiteering on
food.
Approved annual report
Continued Unac but merged it with Icep . .
Approved program of continued services for
1949.
Unanimously approved convention
Adopted Universal Declaration of Human Rights
(48-0, 8 abstentions).
Established Palestine Conciliation Commission
consisting of France, Turkey, U.S.
Approved Committee 6 recommendations . . .
Approved Committee 5 recommendations . . .
Approved figure of $43,487,128 for U.N. 1949
budget; $20,000,000 working capital fund;
$2,000,000 for unforeseen expenses.
Adopted Committee 1 recommendations . . .
Dec. 3
Dec. 3
Dec. 3
Dec.
4
Dec.
4
Dec.
6
Dec.
7
Dec.
11
Dec.
7
Dec. 8
Dec.
8
Dec.
8
Dec.
8
Dec.
8
Dec.
8
Dec. 8
Dec. 9
Dec. 10
Dec. 11
Dec. 11
Dec. 11
Dec. 11
Dec. 12
786
Department of State Bulletin
THE UNITED NATfONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
COMMITTEE 1
Item
Action
Meeting
Date
1.' Reports of the Atomic Energy Commission:
Discussion
153
Oct. 7
res. of Security Council.
Referred to Sub-Committee
166
Oct. 20
Adopted revised Canadian resolution.
(1) approval of Atomic Energy Committee
majority findings and proposals.
(2) concern at impasse in Aec resulting from
U.S.S.R. refusal to support majority.
(3) requests Five Powers plus Canada to con-
sult to determine basis for agreement
on international control.
(4) call for Aec to resume meetings to study
further subjects it considers practicable
and useful.
Passed 41-6.
2.' Prohibition of atomic weapons and reduction
Referred to Sub-Committee
160
Oct. 15
by Yi armaments and armed forces of per-
Rejected U.S.S.R. resolution for Yz reduction
198
Nov. 13
manent members of Security Council:
of arms by Big Five.
item proposed by U.S.S.R.
Sent majority resolution calling for establish-
ment of an armaments control organ, report
to 4th session of GA.
3.2 Palestine: progress report of U.N. mediator
Discussion commenced. Deferred
169
Oct. 23
on Palestine.
Resumed Palestinian debate
200
212-213
Nov. 15
Completed general debate
Nov. 25
Adopted draft resolution on Palestine establish-
Dec. 4
'
ing a conciliation commission.
4.> Appeal to great powers to renew their eflforts
to compose their differences and establish
lasting peace: item proposed by Mexico.
Referred to Sub-Committee
167
Oct. 21
AdoDted unanimouslv
168
Oct. 22
^ &v.A\.^ L,/ v^^*|.4 ti i4t*xj.A*-i* v.* i^kn" i^ •••••••••■■*
5.^ Threats to political independence and ter-
a) Adopted resolution finding Yugoslavia,
191-193
Nov. 10
ritorial integrity of Greece: report of
Albania, Bulgaria guilty of disturbing
Unscob.
Balkan peace; reestablishing Unscob.
b) Adopted Australian proposal for initiation of
new attempts in Paris at settlement by
representatives of Greece, Albania, Yugo-
slavia, Bulgaria, GA President, Sra.
c) Adopted resolution urging return of 195
Nov. 11
Greek children.
6.^ Problem of independence of Korea: report of
Voted against inviting representatives of Russian-
....
Nov. 15
Untcok; report of Interim Committee of
occupied Korea to participate in Korean debate.
GA.
Decided to invite representatives of South
Korean Government to participate in debate.
....
Dec. 6
Declared South Korea regime only lawful, freely
Dec. 8
elected government of country. Created new
Korean Commission to assist in unification of
country and in withdrawal of occupation
troops.
7.^ Question of disposal of former Italian Col-
onies: item proposed by U.S., France,
U.K., U.S.S.R.
8.^ Question of Franco Spain: implementation of
resolution and recommendation of GA of
Dec. 12, 1946, and Nov. 17, 1947: item
proposed by Poland.
9.' Treatment of Indians in Usaf.
• Plenary action.
• Postponed until second part ot Session.
December 26, 1948
787
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
AD HOC POLITICAL COMMITTEE
Item
Action
Meeting
Date
1. Election of officers
Romulo, Phil. (Chairman)
Prochazka, Czecho. (Vice Chairman).
1
Nov. 16
Lafronte, Ecua. (Rapporteur).
1) Creation of IC
1
Nov. 16
2) Admission of new members.
SC report last; decision on other items deferred.
3.' Advisability of establishing a permanent com-
mittee of GA, IC report.
2
Nov. 17
Voted to extend IC for another year
5
Nov. 20
4.2 Admission of new members
Began discussion
6
Nov. 22
Report of SC.
Decided to ask SC to reconsider applications of
Nov. 27
Icj Advisory opinion.
Italy, Finland, Transjordan, Ireland, Portu-
Admission to U.N. of Italy and all States
gal, and Austria.
whose applications have received 7 votes
Asked SC to reconsider Ceylon's membership
. . . .
Dec. 2
in SC; item proposed by Argentina.
application.
5.' U.N. Guard: item proposed by Stg.
6.' Problem of voting in SC
Adopted Four Power resolution providing for
Dec. 4
a) IC report.
voluntary limitation of veto on admission of
b) Convocation of general conference un-
new members and other classes of problems.
der art. 109 of Charter to study
question of veto in SC : item proposed
by Argentina.
7.' Study of methods for promotion of interna-
Adopted 2 resolutions on pacific settlement and
. . . .
Dec. 9
tional cooperation in political field: re-
disputes.
port of IC.
8.' Report of the Security Council.
COMMITTEE 2
1.' Chapter II of Ecosoc report
Discussion commenced
58
Oct. 4
1) Recommended expediting consideration of
> •
Nov. 15
establishment of Ecme and entire eco-
nomic development program.
2) Adopted resolution calling for technical
81
Nov. 19
assistance to underdeveloped areas, on
training of workers.
2.' Discriminations practiced by certain states in
Discussion commenced
69
Nov. 2
international trade obstructing normal
Decided not to take action on Polish charge . .
76
Nov.fl2
development of trade relations and con-
Adopted report on trade discrimination ....
82
Nov. 20
trary to purposes and principles of U.N.
Charter: item proposed by Poland.
3.2 Problem of wasting food in certain countries:
Ended general debate on food; referred 2 resolu-
82
Nov. 20
item proposed by Poland.
tions to Drafting Committee.
Completed action.
COMMITTEES 2 AND 3
1.2 Chapters I, IV, VI, V of Ecosoc report . . .
Discussion commenced
25
Oct. 5
Completed discussion of migration by referring
37
Nov. 11
record of debate to Ecosoc.
2.2 Agreements with specialized agencies:
a) Application of Finland for membership
Approved recommendation that GA tell Icao
30
Oct. 19
in IcAo: item proposed by Stg.
there is no objection to Finland as member of
IcAO.
' Plenary action.
' Postponed until second part of Session.
788
Department of State Bulletin
THE UNITBD NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGENCIES
COMMITTEES 2 AND 3— Continued
Item
Action
Meeting
Date
2." Agreements with specialized agencies — con.
b) Intergovernmental Maritime Consulta-
Approved agreement between Imco and Ecosoc
29
Oct. 18
tive Organization: item proposed by
but rejected Indian move urging states ratify
Ecosoc.
relevant convention.
c) International Refugee Organization:
Approved resolution asking GA to approve
30
Oct. 19
item proposed by Ecosoc.
agreement to bring Iro into relationship with
U.N. as specialized agency.
3.' Relations with and coordmation of specialized
Adopted resolution recommending Syg improve
35
Oct. 28
agencies: report of Syg.
coordination between U.N. and specialized
agencies.
4.' Increase to 24 of the number of member states
Proposal relating to increase in Ecosoc2,mem-
33
Oct. 23
represented in Ecosoc: item proposed by
bership (Peru) adopted.
Argentina.
COMMITTEE 3
1.- Draft protocol to bring under control drugs
outside the scope of the convention of
July 13, 1931, for limiting the manufac-
turing and regulatuig the distribution of
narcotic drugs, as amended by the protocol
signed at Lake Success on Dec. 11, 1946:
item proposed by Ecosoc.
2.2 International Declaration of Human Rights:
item proposed by Ecosoc.
3.^ Chapter III of Ecosoc report
4.- Report of the Exec. Board of International
Children's Emergency Fund: item pro-
posed by Ecosoc.
5.' Question of continuing through 1949 the
United Nations Appeal for Children and
question of modifying the resolution
adopted by Ecosoc in relation thereto:
item proposed by Australia.
6.' Freedom of Information: report of Ecosoc .
7. Refugees and displaced persons
a) Part III of progress report of U.N.
mediator on Palestine: assistance to
refugees.^
b) Problems of refugees and displaced
persons: item proposed by Poland.^
c) Repatriation, resettlement, and immi-
gration of refugees and displaced
persons: report of Ecosoc'
8.' Declaration of old age rights: item pro-
posed by Argentina.
9.' Discriminations practiced by certain states
against immigrating labor, and in partic-
ular against labor recruited from the
ranks of refugees: item proposed by
Poland.
Approved
Discussion commenced
Completed drafting
Began consideration of Drafting Sub-Committee
recommendations on form of Declaration.
Adopted final text
Took formal note of Ecosoc recommendations .
Approved report . .
Began debate
Decided to place Unac under Icef
Postponed until 2d part of session
Discussion
Referred to Sub-Committee . . .
Approved 9 month assistance plan
Item referred to Ecosoc for study
88
85
108
118
Sept. 30
Sept. 30
Nov. 30
Dec. 4
Dec. 6
Dec. 8
Dec. 2
Dec. 2
Dec. 3
Dec. 7
Oct. 20
Oct. 30
Nov. 13
Dec. 1
* Plenary action.
' Postponed until second part of Session.
December 26, 1948
789
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
COMMITTEE 3— Continued
Item
Action
Meeting
??'Date ■
10.^ Advisory social welfare services: item pro-
Recommended continuation of services on same
. . . .
1 i«. r 1
Dec. 3
posed by Ecosoc.
scale in 1949 as in 1948.
11.' Creation of a subcommission of the Social
Commission of Ecosoc on study of social
problems of the aboriginal populations of
the American continent.
COMMITTEE 4
1.2 Information from non-self-governing terri-
tories:
a) Summary and analysis of information
transmitted under article 73e of
Charter: report of Stg.
b) Information transmitted under article
Discussion.
73e of the Charter: report of the
Approved resolution to continue through next
59
Oct. 16
special committee.
year the special committee to study such
information.
Passed resolution requiring administering powers
58
Oct. 15
to submit information on political conditions
in areas under their control when important
changes on legal status of these territories
takes place.
60
Oct. 18
74
Nov. 8
2.2 Report of the Trusteeship Council
Di^f^iission commenced
61
Oct. 19
Adopted measure asking administering powers
71
Nov. 4
to intensify efforts to increase educational
possibilities.
Adopted resolution on administrative unions
73
Nov. 6
with prior consultation clause.
Completed consideration of TC report ....
75
Nov. 8
3.2 Report of the Government of Union of South
Africa on the administration of South
Nov. 9
Adopted resolution censuring Usap for not sub-
84
Nov. 9
West Africa: report of Trusteeship Council.
mitting a trust agreement on Swa; calling for
continued submission of administrative re-
ports.
Adopted report on Usaf's administration of Swa
85
Nov. 22
thereby completing Committee 4 work.
COMMITTEE 5
1. 2 Reports of the Advisory Committee on
Administrative and Budgetary Questions.
2.2 Financial report and accounts for the
iinancial period ended Dec. 31, 1947 and
report of board of auditors.
Recommended report on payment of travel and
subsistence expenses for GA approval, except
with respect to Commissions of inquiry or
concDiatiou.
Chap. VI adopted by plenary
Approved recommendation to maintain high
level of U.N. working capital fund at
$20,000,000.
Approved U.S. amendment to report providing
for per diem for alternate representatives.
Adopted
' Plenary action.
' Postponed until second part of Session.
117
Oct. 4
150
Oct.
8
156
Nov.
5
Nov.
22
109
Sept.
28
790
Department of State Bulletin
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
COMMITTEE 5— Continued
Item
Action
Meeting
Date
3.- International Children's Emergency Fund:
annual audit of accounts of the fund:
report of Stg.
4.' Annual report of the staff benefit com-
mittee on operation of the pension fund.
5.' Report of U.N. staff benefit committee
submitting draft resolutions for a perma-
nent pension scheme.
6.^ Appointments to fill vacancies in member-
ship of subsidiary bodies of GA:
a) Advisory Committee on Administrative
and Budgetary Questions.
b) Committee on Contributions
c) Board of Auditors
d) Investments Committee
7.^ Transfer of assets of League of Nations:
report of Stg.
8.- Report of Committee on Contributions . .
9.2 Amendment of rule 149 of Rules of Proce-
dure of GA to provide for recognition of
principle of percentage ceiling in scale of
assessments to meet expenses of U.N.:
item proposed by U.S.
10.- Tax equalization: proposed staff assessment
plan; report of Syg.
1 1.2 Proposal for adoption of Spanish as vi'orking
language of GA: report of Stg.
12.2 Verbatim records:
a) records of Ecosoc; item proposed by
Ecosoc.
b) records of Trusteeship Council . . . .
13.2 Organization of a U.N. postal service: re-
port of Stg.
14.2 U.N. telecommunications system: report of
Stg.
Recommended for approval Chairman's reso-
lution recommending GA approve financial
report ending Dec. 31, 1947.
Adopted several specific proposals
Approved general principles in staff benefit
committee report.
Recommended GA appointment of Aghnides,
Greece; Kabushko, U.S.S.R.; Hsia, China;
Asha, Syria.
Hall, U.S., elected to replace Stone, U.S. . . .
Recommended GA appomtment of Caganas,
Mexico; Chernyshev, U.S.S.R.; Jacklin,
Usaf; Charron, France; Saksena, India;
Kayfitz, Canada; Colbjornsen, Norway.
Agreed to recommend GA appointment of
Auditor General of Denmark to Board.
Recommended that GA approve appointment by
Syg of Leslie R. Rounds, U.S.
Agreed on liquidation, transfer, distribution of
LN assets.
Discussion commenced
Approved assessments scale.
Discussion commenced
Approved resolution.
Approved in principle LT.S. res. but par. 11 to be
voted on separately.
Adopted U.S. res. recommending approval in
principle of Staff Contr. plan and appointment
of special committee of tax experts.
Approved tax equalization plan
In effect rejected proposal concurring with
Syg on inadvisabDity.
Approved.
Approved Advisory Committee's report on
Trusteeship verbatim records (A/691).
Recommended to GA to take note of reports . .
Recommended to GA it approve principle of es-
tablishing U.N. postal Administration (Argen-
tine proposal).
Agreed to Canadian proposal that execution of
plan involve no financial loss for U.N.
Resolution adopted A/C.5/W.99
109
108
109
123
160
123
Sept. 28
Sept. 28
Sept. 28
Oct.
Nov. 15
Oct. ^7
123
Oct.
7
123
Oct.
7
• •
Dec.
8
111
Sept.
29
HI
Sept.
29
111
Sept
29
111
Sept.
29
136
Oct.
20
136-137
Oct.
20
150-51
Nov. 3
115
Oct. 1
114
Oct. 1
114
Oct. 1
148
Oct. 30
' Plenary action.
December 26, 1948
791
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
COMMITTEE 5— Continued
Item
Meeting
Date
15.^ Budget estimates for financial year 1949
16.^ Unforeseen and extraordinary expenses: re-
port of Syg.
17.' Composition of Secretariat and principle of
geographic distribution: report of Syg.
18.2 Relations with and coordination of specialized
agencies and work programs of U.N. and
specialized agencies: report of Syg.
19.2 Transfer to U.N. of residual assets and ac-
tivities of Unbba: item proposed by
Syg.
20.2 Headquarters of U.N.; report of Syg . . .
21.2 Supplementary estimates for financial year
1948: report of Syg.
22.2 Appointment to fill vacancy in membership
of committee on contributions in replace-
ment of Dr. Jan Papanek: item proposed
by Czechoslovakia.
23.2 Appointment to fill vacancy in membership
of advisory committee on administrative
and budgetary questions in replacement
of Dr. Jan Papanek: item proposed by
Czechoslovakia.
24.2 Establishment of an international center for
training in public administration.
25.2 Supplementary budget estimates for 1949 . .
a) Financial implications of assistance to
Palestinian refugees (referred to
Committee by Committee 3).
b) Budget implications of Unscob res-
olution.
c) Budget implications of Committee 2
resolution on technical assistance
for economic development.
d) Budget implications of continuance of
IC (as recommended by Ad Hoc
Political Committee).
e) Supplementary budget estimates for
India-Pakistan Commission Indo-
nesian Goc.
Discussion commenced
Approved budget estimates for U.N. public in-
formation program for 1949.
Approved new per diem allowances for Secre-
tariat.
Completed 2d readuig of 1949 budget and ap-
proved final figure of $38,692,578.
Approved unforeseen and extraordinary expenses
resolution.
Adopted drafting com. res. to recommend GA
note progress of Syg in field of geographic distri-
bution: recommends efforts be continued; re-
affirms GA res. 43 (1 1) of Nov. 15, 1947. Com-
bines Argentine res. and Brazilian amendment.
See under Committee 2 and 3.
Agreed to recommend GA approval of agreement
between Syg and Unrha Dir. Gen. (A/665).
Resolution on U.N. headquarters (A/C.5/W.98)
approved.
Approved
126
134
116
Oct. 11
Oct. 18
Nov. 29
Dec. 9
Oct. 2
Czechoslovak resolution on replacement of Dr.
Papanek rejected.
Czechoslovak resolution rejected
147
149
157
123
123
Discussion commenced .
Approved Syg resolution .
Concluded consideration;
appropriation reduction.
Decision taken
approved $126,990
Approved 1949 budget estimates for Unscob
at $1,347,300.
Approved increase in U.N. budget estimates by
$288,000.
Approved supplementary estimate
Approved .
Oct. 29
Nov. 2
Nov. 6
Oct. 7
Oct. 7
Nov. 17
Nov. 23
Dec. 1
Nov. 16
Nov. 22
Nov. 25
Nov. 29
Dec. 3
* Plenary action.
792
Department of Stale Bulletin
Peaceful Adjustment Sought Through Palestine Conciliation Commission
STATEMENT BY JOHN FOSTER DULLES IN THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY'
Acting Chairman, U.S. Delegation to the General Assembly
The United States supports the resolution on
Palestine -vsiiich has come from Committee 1 with
amendments proposed on wliich I shall comment in
a moment.
The present resolution reflects three weeks of in-
tensive consideration of our Political Committee.
After giving effect to the amendments referred to,
it is simple. It seeks first of all a peaceful adjust-
ment of the situation. In aid of that it establishes
a Conciliation Commission and calls upon the gov-
ernments and authorities concerned to seek agree-
ment by negotiations conducted either through
the Conciliation Commission or directly with a
view tx) final settlement of all outstanding ques-
tions. With respect to the Holy Places it seeks
protection and free access in accordance with exist-
ing rights and historical practice, and Jerusalem
would be given international status. With re-
spect to refugees, repatriation and resettlement
would be facilitated.
These, Mr. Chairman, are the outstanding
features of the resolution before us and we do not
see how any delegations can justifiably reject these
three basic features of the resolution. Its terms
may not be precisely what any single member state
would choose. Many proposals were submitted to
the Committee and the result is to an extent com-
posite. In so far as the United States Delegation
is concerned, there may be additions, subtractions,
and shifts of emphasis that we would like. But
because we are dedicated to the ends that are
sought, because we believe the means contemplated
are basically sound, we support the resolution.
We realize there are some who will find it more
difficult than we to follow that course. Their con-
cern is more immediate and imperative than our
own. But we hope even they will see the advan-
tage of orderly collective procedure and that they
will join to enable the Assembly to implement and
give impetus to it.
The United States Delegation had at one time
favored spelling out in more detail the principles
that should guide the Conciliation Commission and
parties in achieving a final settlement. Earlier
drafts did in fact contain more detailed recom-
mendations upon specific issues than does the draft
now before us. But on such important issues as
boundaries and disposition of Arab Palestine,
specific recommendations were deleted in Commit-
tee. By whom? It was the strongest supporters
of claims of Arab states and of claims of Israel
ADOPTION OF RESOLUTION ON
CONCILIATION COMMISSION
The resolution on the Palestine Concilia-
tion Commission was adopted by the General
Assembly on December 11, 1948.
Changes in the text of the resolution as
submitted to the General Assembly by Com-
mittee 1 and jjrinted in the Bulletin of
December 12, 1948, page 726, are as follow^s :
Delete first five paragraphs and substitute
the following:
"The General Assembly, having considered
further the situation in Palestine;". Con-
tinue with paragraph "1'".
Delete paragraph "2 (C)" and renumber
paragraph "2 (D)" to become paragraph
"2 (C)".
Change paragraph "3" to read : "A com-
mittee of the Assembly consisting of China,
France, Union of Soviet Socialist Republics,
United Kingdom and the United States of
America shall present for approval of the
Assembly a proposal concerning the names
of three states who will constitute the Con-
ciliation Commission ;".
Delete following clause from paragraph
"10": "in this connection, the conclusions
contained in part I, section VIII, paragraph
4 (E) and (F) of the progress report of the
U.N. Mediator should be taken into
account ;".
Delete first paragraph under number "11" ;
begin number "11" with paragraph starting
"Resolves that the refugees wishing", etc.
whose votes combined to produce that result.
Analysis of the voting shows we believe that the
parties interested have in effect told the Assembly
that the remaining issues in Palestine can be dealt
with only through the processes of conciliation or
negotiation and they do not want the Assembly at
this time to attempt to give shape to the settle-
ment. So althougli the United States had thought
it wiser that the Conciliation Commission's effort
should be directed into channels somewhat defined
'Made on Dec. 11, 1948, and released to the press on
Dec. 13.
December 26, 1948
793
THE UNITBD NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGENCIES
by the expression of the middle group within the
Assembly, we are content to leave out such indica-
tions since it seems the parties themselves prefer
it thus.
In two respects, however, the Palestine question
cannot be left entirely to the immediate parties
because important international interests are di-
rectly engaged. First, it is of international con-
cern that a settlement should be reached by peace-
ful means. There has already been too much
fighting ; there should be no more. The Security
Council has declared the Palestine situation a
threat to the peace. The interests of every member
of the United Nations are thereby directly and
urgently involved. Fighting must give way to a
truce, truce to armistice, and armistice to final
peace.
Secondly, the arrangements for Jerusalem and
the Holy Places must take account of the fact that
they are impressed with public interest that is
world-wide. The sacred shrines of three great
world religions should never be treated as though
they are of purely private or local concern. We
believe the resolution before us adequately recog-
nizes this international concern and that satisfac-
tory arrangements can be made along the lines sug-
gested. With respect to the demilitarization of
Jerusalem contemplated by paragraph 8, we under-
stand it to mean that the armed forces of the op-
posing sides should not use the Holy City as a
battlegi-ound. But that of course does not exclude
adequate police and security protection under de-
militarization which the Security Council is re-
quested to arrange.
I now turn to the amendments proposed by seven
members in A/189 — these amendments we shall
support. The preamble would be eliminated. The
rather vague injunction to the Commission "to
promote good relations" (paragraph 1 (C)) can
be eliminated in view of the more relevant direc-
tions contained elsewhere. We favor the election
of a Conciliation Commission by the General As-
sembly preferably on the basis of nominations as
proposed by the French amendment (A/800) to
paragraph 3.
The specific references to the progress report
of the mediator — which are for some psychological
obstacles — can be eliminated (paragraphs 10 and
11). The proposed amendments do not impair
the main objective, which is the resolution that
on the one hand deals adequately with essentials
and on the other hand attracts sufficiently broad
support so that not only will it be adopted but it
can be adopted by a vote which will from the
beginning endow our efforts with strong moral
authority.
We believe there is pending a great accomplish-
ment. Of course, the primary resiJonsibility de-
volves upon the parties directly concerned. The
General Assembly does not have the power to
command them or lay upon them precise injunc-
tions. The General Assembly can, however, ex-
press world judgment and if we do that intelli-
gently, considerately, and wisely, then we can
greatly influence the future course of events. Also
we can, through establishing a Conciliation Com-
mission, make it easier for the jDarties in interest
to come into agreement.
This matter of Palestine has thrown upon the
United Nations a very heavy burden. But we
should not complain because had it not been for
the United Nations a far more grievous burden
might have been thrown upon the world. We can,
however, now see the possibility of a final settle-
ment. We believe, if the proposed resolution is
adopted, it will enable the United Nations to make
an important contribution toward that end. We
urge, therefore, that the resolution be adopted.
Admission of New Members
STATEMENT BY BENJAMIN V. COHEN IN THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY'
U.S. Delegate to the General Assembly
Mr. President, Ten resolutions on the admission
of new members adopted by the Ad Hoc Committee
are now before the Assembly.^ These resolutions
were exhaustively discussed in that committee. It
' Made on Dec. 7, 1948, and released to the press by the
U.S. Delegation to the Third Regular Session of the Gen-
eral Assembly on the same date.
= U.N. doc. A/761, Nov. 27, 1948, approved by the Gen-
eral Assembly Dec. 18, 1948.
will only be necessary for me to say a few words
regarding the position of the United States.
Six of these resolutions are almost identical with
resolutions adopted by the Assembly last year.
Under these resolutions, the Assembly would re-
affirm its view that Italy, Portugal, Eire, Finland,
and Transjordan, whose admission continues to be
barred by the veto of the Soviet Union, are quali-
fied for membership and that the Security Council
should reconsider these applications in the light
794
Department of State Bulletin
of the Assembly's findings. The Assembly would
also reaffirm its view that Austria is a peace-loving
state and that her application should also be re-
considered by the Security Council. The United
States strongly supports these resolutions reailirm-
ing the General Assembly's view that the appli-
cants named in the resolution are being unwar-
rantably deprived of membership in the United
Nations.
Two of the resolutions submitted to the As-
sembly relate to the advisory opinion rendered by
tlie International Court of Justice on May 28 pur-
suant to a request made by the Assembly at its last
session. The Court's opinion was to the effect
that a state member of the Security Council was
not entitled juridically to vote against the admis-
sion of admittedly qualified applicants solely be-
cause other applicants were not admitted simul-
taneously. It will be recalled that this was the
ground given by the Soviet Union for voting
against the admission of Italy and Finland. The
two resolutions call the attention of the Assembly
to the advisory opinion of the Court, one recom-
mending that the Security Council and the As-
sembly should act in accordance with the opinion
of the Court in voting upon new members, and the
other specifically requesting the Security Council
to examine, in the light of the opinion, the question
of the admission of Italy and Finland. The
United States also supports these resolutions.
Our Delegation believes that organs of the United
Nations should be guided on these questions by the
opinion of the Court.
A resolution is also submitted to the Assembly
relating to the admission of Ceylon. The ap-
plication of Ceylon came before the Security Coun-
cil during the past year. Ceylon's admission, al-
though supported by nine members, was blocked
by the veto exercised by the Soviet Union which
alleged that the evidence of Ceylon's independence
was insufhcient. The United States considers the
establislmient of the sovereign govermnent of Cey-
lon to be an outstanding example of the orderly
progress of a great people from dependent status
to full independence. It is curious, to say the
least, that some members of the United Nations
who so loudly proclaim their solicitude for de-
pendent people should stand in the way of Cey-
lon's full participation in the life of the community
of nations. We hope that the Assembly will ex-
press itself in favor of the admission of Ceylon.
The United States will continue to support in the
General Assembly and the Security Council Cey-
lon's application for membership in the United
Nations.
When the matter of Ceylon was under discussion
in the Ad Hoc Committee, great efforts were made
to draft a resolution to which every member could
agree. The Committee postponed action on the
original Australian resolution. It appointed a
special committee to draft a resolution acceptable
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGlNCieS
to all. The representative of Poland sat on the
subcommittee and helped to draft a compromise
resolution. He advocated the passage of the com-
promise resolution and stated his delegation would
vote for it. But a few minutes later, after the
Soviet Representative had declared his delegation
would not accept the new di-aft, the Representative
of Poland indicated that he would have to abstain
from votino;. As a result of this astounding re-
versal, the Committee felt obliged to abandon fur-
ther efforts to agree on a compromise draft and re-
verted to the original Australian proposal. If, as
we are now advised, there is considerable feeling
that the admission of Ceylon may be facilitated by
the adoption of the compromise draft, the United
States Delegation is prepared to accept it in lieu of
the Australian proposal.
There is also submitted, to the Assembly a resolu-
tion introduced by Sweden requesting the Security
Council to reconsider all applications for member-
ship taking into account the circumstances in each
particular case. In the Ad Hoc Committee the
United States opposed this resolution. We did
so because its adoption was sought before the Com-
mittee had adopted the resolutions with regard
to the admission of qualified applicant states. We
feared that its adoption would result in a move-
ment to eliminate the specific resolutions with re-
gard to clearly qualified states unjustly excluded
f I'om membership. This movement did develop in
the Committee but fortunately was defeated.
Now that all the resolutions are before the As-
sembly, those specifically recommending the ad-
mission of clearly qualified states unjustly ex-
cluded, as well as the Swedish resolution recom-
mending a reconsideration of all applications
taking into account the circumstances in each par-
ticular case, the distinction between the general
Swedish resolution and the specific resolutions be-
comes clear. The United States therefore with-
draws its oi^position to the Swedish resolution and,
taking note of the general sentiment in favor of the
resolution, will vote for the resolution as evidence
of its willingness to cooperate in good faith in a
reexamination of all applications in light of the
particular circumstances of each case.
To avoid misunderstanding, however, we wish
to state that we do not regard the Swedish resolu-
tion as recommending the admission of applicants
without regard to Charter requirements. We
share the general sentiment expressed in the
Swedish resolution in favor of the universality of
the United Nations. We feel that the exclusion
of states justly entitled to membership under the
Charter seriously affects the moral right of the
United Nations to speak and act as it was intended,
in behalf of the world community of peace-loving,
law-abiding nations. But in passing upon the
qualification of states for membership we cannot
comjjletely ignore the Charter requirements.
D&cembsr 26, 1948
795
THB UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIAUZED AGENCIES
The United States has adequately explained the
basis for its doubts with regard to the applications
of the Mongolian People's Republic, Albania, Bul-
garia, Rumania, and Hungary. If we can be satis-
fied that the Mongolian People's Republic is in
fact an independent state, we shall certainly sup-
port its application for admission. If we can be
satisfied that Albania and Bulgaria are complying
with the terms of the General Assembly resolutions
on the Greek question, and are observing their
treaty obligations, we shall certainly support their
applications. If we can be satisfied that Bulgaria,
Rumania, and Hungary are loyally carrying out
the terms of their recent treaties of peace — par-
ticularly as regards the maintenance of fundamen-
tal human rights and freedoms — our objections to
their admission will be dispelled. In the Ad Hoc
Committee we had occasion to note the execution of
the Agrarian leader Nicola Petkov for doing no
more than to express his honest political convic-
tions and the imprisonment of Kosta Lutchev, the
Socialist leader, and his principal associates, for
exercising the right of free speech and free as-
sembly. This does not appear to us to evince a
particularly strong desire on the part of the Bul-
garian Government to demonstrate its right to
represent the people of Bulgaria in the United
Nations.
We cannot abdicate our own judgment, but we
will not on the matter of membership put our
judgment above the judgment of the world com-
munity of nations. We have indicated that we
will not exercise a veto in regard to the admission
of any state which secures the affirmative support
of seven members of the Security Council. We
have indicated that we will not exercise a veto in
regard to the admission of any state which
the Assembly determines to be qualified for
membership.
We shall not falter in our efforts to insure the
admission of every qualified state to this Organiza-
tion. The moral force and the effectiveness of the
United Nations depend on the actions of its mem-
bers. In the spirit of the Charter, the member
states have an obligation to welcome to their ranks
every eligible candidate. If they do so, the Or-
ganization will eventually achieve substantial uni-
versality. It will be, as it should be, a great world
community of law-abiding, peace-abiding states.
Discussion of Interim Committee's Report on Promotion
of International Political Cooperation
STATEMENT IN AD HOC COMMITTEE BY BENJAMIN V. COHEN'
U.S. Delegate to the General Assembly
The part of the Interim Committee's report
which we are now to consider relates to its study
of methods for the promotion of international
political coojieration.
Under the terms of its reference the Committee
was instructed to consider and report with its con-
clusions to the General Assembly on "methods to
be adopted to give effect to that part of Article 11
(paragraph 1) which deals with general prin-
ciples of cooperation in the maintenance of inter-
national peace and security and to that part of
Article 13 (paragraph 1 (a)) which deals with
the promotion of international cooperation in the
political field."
Article 13 of the Charter provides that the As-
sembly shall initiate studies and make recom-
mendations in various fields. Under paragraph b
of this article the Assembly has already in prog-
ress a number of progi-ams for promoting
' Made on Dec. 6, 1948, antl released to the press by the
U.S. Delegation to the Third Regular Session of the Gen-
eral Assembly on the same date.
796
international cooperation in the economic, social,
cultural, educational, and health fields and for
assisting in the realization of human rights and
fundamental freedoms. Under paragraph 1 (a) of
article 13 — the paragraph embraced in the study
of the Interim Committee — the Assembly has al-
ready launched a program for encouraging the
progressive development and codification of inter-
national law. But only with the adoption last
year of the resolution on the Interim Committee
has the Assembly turned its attention specifically
to the discharge of its responsibility of initiating
studies for the promotion of international coopera-
tion in the political field.
While history reveals a long record of interna-
tional political cooperation, the record is marred
by the tragic failure of international cooperation
in the past to avoid the calamitous test of right by
might through ordeal by battle. We have pledged
ourselves under the Charter to refrain from the
use of force or the threat of force except in de-
fense of law, except in defense of the principles of
Department of State Bulletin
the Charter. But if we are to eliminate force in
'internutioiuil relations, we must eliminate the
causes of war or tind other means than force for
dealing with the causes of war.
The Charter contains broad principles. Wliile
some of them are definite, some of them are vague.
The handling of specific disputes in the Security
Council may, case by case, give greater content and
detiniteness to these principles and may throw ad-
ditional light on the effectiveness of different pro-
cedures and techniques for resolving disputes and
facilitating international cooperation, but that is a
slow process in a rapidly moving world.
There is much to be gained, I think, from realis-
tic studies of the principles of international co-
operation in the political field in an atmosphere
that is not surcharged by the pressures, prejudices,
passions, and interests that cluster about highly
controversial disputes, even when the contro-
versies are of relatively minor importance. It is
for that reason that the work of the Interim Com-
mittee in this field started on a modest basis and ni
an unobtrusive way merits our interest and con-
tinued support.
The United States Delegation is pleased to note
that the Assembly in reestablishing the Interim
Conunittee has authorized it to consider system-
atically, using as a starting point the recommen-
dations and studies of the Interim Committee
which are now before us, the further implemen-
tation of article 11, paragraph 1, and article 13,
paragraph 1 (a) of the Charter.
We cannot of course predict in detail what the
results of such a comprehensive survey will be.
We do not expect that this survey and study should
provide definitive rules and principles which
should cover the whole field of pacific settlement
and be valid for all time and under all circum-
stances. Rather it is hoped that the survey and
study will make available facts and ideas which
will be helpful in the progressive and evolution-
ary development of pacific settlement within the
framework of the Charter.
In continuing its work on this study and survey
it is my understanding that the Interim Commit-
tee will avail itself of the assistance of the re-
search and scholarly contributions of public and
private gi'oups. It has already had valuable as-
sistance from certain studies made by the Sec-
retariat. It should also be able to request aid
from the International Law Commission of the
Assembly in important aspects of its work.
It is important in our view, however, that the
Interim Conunittee should continue to control the
survey and study as a wliole. Xaturally the In-
terim Committee, composed of a large body of
political representatives, has certain limitations
in a task of this sort. The Committee needs, and
should be in a position to avail itself of, expert
assistance. But nonetlieless a political committee
conscious of its political responsibilities is neces-
December 26, 1948
817638 — 48 3
THB UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIAUZBD AGENCIES
sary to give vitality to tlie work and to prevent the
study and survey becoming excessively theoretical
and impractical.
In addition to its general recommendation for
the continuance of the survey of tlie problems of
pacific settlement, the Interim Conunittee has rec-
onunended three specific proposals for adoption
by the Assembly.
One of them relates to the establishment of a
panel from which members of a connnission of
inquiry or conciliation may be drawn by states or
organs of the United Nations. This proposal orig-
inated from a joint suggestion of China and the
United States to the Committee and is in the form
of a draft resolution which may be found in annex
IV of the Committee's report. The establishment
of the panel would be a means of liaving readily
available a list of individuals of known com-
IJetence from which a commission could be chosen
on short notice. It is a flexible device involving
no substantive obligation on the part of any state
to use it. It embodies the principle of the unin-
structed commission, since members selected from
the pa_nel would be chosen on the basis of the con-
tribution which they as individuals might be ex-
pected to make and full biographical data would
be available to assist members or organs in the
selection of panel members. The planel itself would
in no sense be an organ — merely a list or registry
of names. The plan lends itself for use by the
Security Council and other organs of the United
Nations and would also be available at all times
to states desiring to use it. The employment of
the panel being fully voluntary, there would be
no conflict with existing treaties providing for
peaceful settlement and containing other panel
provisions.
Another proposal of the Interim Committee
originating from suggestions submitted by the
United Kingdom relates to the appointment of a
rapporteur or conciliator at an early stage in the
consideration of disputes or situations brought to
the attention of the United Nations. The pro-
posal is in two parts; one part relates to the Se-
curity Council and the other to the General
Assembly.
The draft resolution contained in annex III
recommends that the Security Council examine
the utility and desirability of the practice of
appointing a rapporteur or conciliator for a situa-
tion or dispute brought to the Council. This is a
practice which was successfully used in the Council
of the League of Nations and which the Security
Council has already found useful in some cases.
The proposal is flexible and involves the creation
of no machinery. We think the proposed resolu-
tion is a constructive suggestion and we urge that
this committee recommend its adoption.
Annex II proposes amendments to the rules of
the General Assembly so as to introduce a some-
what similar practice in the handling of disputes
797-
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGBNCIBS
or situations brought to the Assembly. Our Gov-
ernment concurred in these proposed amendments
when they were suggested in the Interim Com-
mittee. We agree with their objective whicli is to
introduce efforts towards conciliation at an early
stage in the consideration of disputes before the
Assembly. But on further thought we are in-
clined to believe that it would be premature to
attempt to incorporate any particular practice of
conciliation into the rules of procedure of the
Assembly at this time. The presentation of dis-
putes in the Assembly would not invariably con-
form with the method of presentation in the
Security Council. There would not necessarily be
opening statements by the parties in the General
Assembly, particularly where one of the parties
was not a member of the United Nations. We
would prefer to see this proposal put over for
further study by the Interim Committee in the
course of its "future systematic study.
The third specific proposal of the Interim Com-
mittee is designed to restore full effect to the gen-
eral act of 1928 for the pacific settlement of dis-
putes. It is contained in the draft resolution in
annex I of the Committee's report. It was intro-
duced by Belgium. The resolution provides a
convenient means by which those states which have
adhered to this act or may wish to adhere to it
may accept a revised act which will replace the
references to the League of Nations and its officers
with reference to appropriate United Nations or-
gans and officers. The United States, not being a
party to the general act, nonetheless supports this
proposal in that it will aid other states in render-
ing effective, between themselves, a pacific settle-
ment treaty. The act provides appropriate means
for the parties thereto to fulfil their obligation
under article 33 of the Charter to attempt to settle
their dis]3utes before coming to the United Nations.
Our Delegation, Mr. Chairman, believes that
the Interim Committee has made a commendable
start in the study of means of promoting interna-
tional cooperation in the political field.
The press has few headlines on this work of the
Interim Committee. It is the forum in which
ideas can be advanced and debated and then with-
drawn without involving the prestige of the mem-
ber or his government. It was the practice not
to take a vote which would draw the line sharply
upon issues where a substantial division of opinion
developed. But it would be a mistake to conclude
that these have been theoretical and academic dis-
cussions only very indirectly related to the issues
which press about us. Already we can see areas
in which the gap between the theoretical and the
practical will be closed. We can expect improve-
ment in United Nations procedures from practical
and objective study of their operation. We can
expect the channeling of the interests and abilities
of learned societies throughout the world into the
studies which are the material with which the
Interim Committee must work. Similarly, the
Secretariat will be afforded the opportunity for d
the type of analysis and compilation that will bring "
to bear the knowledge and experience of many
of its members upon these problems. The work
of the Interim Committee extends beyond the im-
mediate political dispute to the strengthening and
development of the Charter as an instrument of
peace and justice.
Discussion of Cliilean Proposal Relating to Soviet Wives of Foreigners
STATEMENT BY ERNEST A. GROSS IN LEGAL COMMITTEE i
Alternate U.S. Representative to the General Assembly
Mr. Chairman, the item proposed by Chile with
respect to the Soviet wives of foreigners is a good
illustration of the saying that history repeats it-
self. In the sixteenth century, the Danish Govern-
ment requested the Russian Foreign Office to allow
the wife of the Danish Ambassador, whom he mar-
ried in Moscow, to leave for Denmark. The Rus-
sian Foreign Office rejected this request with the
following observation :
' Made on Dee. 1, 1948, and released to the press by the
U.S. Delegation to the Third Regular Session of the Gen-
eral Assembly on the same date. Mr. Gross is Legal
Adviser for the Department of State.
798
"For it is not the custom in our domains for us
to give free men in bondage ; and this applies not
only to the people of our domains, but also to those
of others who reside in our domains ; that woman
is of our domain, and it would be unseemly to give
that woman in bondage to your man Sider."
In considering the problem of the prevention
by the Soviet Union of Russian wives of foreign
nationals from leaving Soviet territory, are we to
conclude that the Soviet Union still clings to this
sixteenth century conception ? To most of us the
right of a wife to accompany her husband wherever
he may go is so basic that we cannot understand
how any government could oppose it. Yet let me
Department of State Bulletin
outline briefly the record of the Soviet Union in
cases in which the United States has an interest.
From the time of the recognition of the Soviet
Government by the United States in November
1933 to the present time, no more than 50 Soviet
wives of American citizens have been permitted
to leave the Soviet Union and there now remain
350 Soviet wives and 65 Soviet husbands of Amer-
ican citizens who have applied for permission to
depart from the U.S.S.R. Of this group 97 are
wives of American war veterans.
Since 19-45, the United States Embassy in Mos-
cow has repeatedly taken up the question of the
Soviet wives of American citizens with officials of
the Soviet Foreign Oflice. A number of official
communications addressed by the United States
Government to the Soviet Government have re-
mained unanswered. In April and June of 1947,
the Embassy in Moscow requested from the Soviet
Foreign Office assistance in permitting the depar-
ture from the Soviet Union of the wives of Ameri-
can war veterans. In these cases almost all of
the individuals were married to American citizens
before World War II in territories which wei-e
not then incorporated in the Soviet Union. So-
viet citizenship was conferred on these wives with-
out their specific application by blanket decrees
which gave Soviet citizenship to persons residing
in those territories taken over by the So\"iet Union.
On June 11. 1947, Mr. Malik replied on behalf of
the Soviet Ministry of Foreign Affairs to the effect
that "The Ministry of Foreign Affaii-s of the
U.S.S.R. cannot render any assistance to the Em-
bassy in this matter". The last communication
which the United States Government has ad-
dressed to the Soviet Union on this subject was sent
on February 14, 1948, and to this date remains
unanswered.
It is known that within recent months the Soviet
authorities have advised many Soviet wives in
Moscow whose husbands have returned to the
United States that they should obtain divorces and
abandon any idea of joining their husbands in the
United States.
It is difficult to conceive of a violation of the
fundamental human rights of family and marriage
more flagrant than the action of a government in
preventing the unity of the family by prohibiting
the wife from departing from its territory and ad-
ditionally to advise divorce as the only alternative.
We find it moreover very difficult to reconcile
this record of the Soviet Government with the posi-
tion that Government has taken on the subject of
marriage in this General Assembly. The Soviet
Representative in Committee 3 only several weeks
ago introduced the following amendment to article
14 of the draft International Declaration of
Human Rights : '"Men and women shall enjoy equal
rights both during marriage and when divorced."
This amendment has been incorporated into article
tHB UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIALIZED AGENCIES
14, which Committee 3 has approved by a vote of
37 to 3, with 3 abstentions.
The Soviet Representative spoke eloquently and
at length in Committee 3 in support of his amend-
ment. In the meeting of Committee 3 on Novem-
ber 6, he said that "the Preamble to the Charter ex-
pressly declared the equality of the rights of men
and women. To achieve that equality is one of the
main aims of tlie United Nations. The U. S. S. R.
Delegation has always advocated the fullest and
most consistent equality between men and women."
On November S, the Representative of the Soviet
Union speaking in Committee 3 said, "that the
Committee must take all the necessary steps to in-
sure absolute equality between men and women."
He further said that "the purpose of his amend-
ments was not to encourage divorce but to insure
the equality of husband and wife during marriage
and in the case of divorce as well as the effective
l^rotection of the family by society and by the
state".
How can a wife enjoy equal rights with her hus-
band during marriage if she does not have the same
freedom as her husband to travel and to live where
they choose ? What is the Soviet concept of "effec-
tive protection of the family by the state"? That
a government should prevent a wife from joining
her husband and should advise her to get a divorce ?
The importance of the right of a wife to accom-
pany her husband has been emphasized by the
United Nations Commission on the Status of
Women. During its 1948 session, this Commission
forwarded to the Economic and Social Council an
observation noting with satisfaction that the draft
Declaration of Human Rights contained a provi-
sion declaring the right of freedom of choice of
one's spouse. In this connection, the Commission
suggested that this right cannot be fully guaran-
teed unless it is recognized that individuals have
the right to leave their country on marriage and
to reside with the other partner in any country
from which they cannot lawfully be excluded. In
consequence of these observations, the Economic
and Social Council adopted a resolution deplor-
ing "these legislative or administrative provisions
which deny to a womaif the right to leave her
country of origin and reside with her husband in
any country".
Mr. Chairman, I think the Committee should
know that the Soviet policy towards Soviet wives
of foreigners is but one aspect of the general Soviet
policy with respect to the right of travel and
residence. In order that the committee may fully
appreciate the gravity of the situation from the
standpoint of fundamental human rights, I sub-
mit the following facts for the record.
In September 1948, there were on record in the
U.S. Embassy in Moscow 5,481 cases of persons
who had expressed a desire to travel to the United
States from the Soviet Union since 1940. Of this
December 26, 1948
799
THE UNITED NATIONS AND SPBCIALIZBD AGENCIES
number, 3,481 were applicants for immigration
visas into the United States with no daim to
American citizenship. Only 27 persons in this
immigration category who were regarded as Soviet
citizens have been successful in obtaining exit visas
since July 1945.
Among the persons residing in the Soviet Union
and desirous of departing therefrom are many
with valid claims to American citizenship. Nev-
ertheless these persons have been refused Soviet
exit visas. Among them are 108 persons whose
American citizenship has been approved by the
Department of State and who have no claim what-
soever to Soviet citizenship. Another group of
89 are under detention in the Soviet Union. Of
this group the United States citizenship of 31 has
been verified and the cases of the remaining 58
who are believed on the basis of available evidence
to be American citizens are under investigation by
the Department of State. The Soviet Government
has refused to inform the United States Govern-
ment of the nature of the charges against these
persons and the United States diplomatic officers
have not been permitted to interview them. Other
persons desiring to leave the Soviet Union include
248 who possess both American and Soviet citizen-
ship, 439 whose claims to American citizenship are
considered valid but whose status under United
States and Soviet laws awaits final verification,
and 1,270 possessing dual nationality whose Amer-
ican citizenship clanns have not yet been verified.
Therefore, as of January 1, 1948, there were re-
siding in the Soviet Union 826 persons claiming
American citizenship who have been prevented
from proceeding to the United States by the action
or inaction of the Soviet Government. Since 1940,
a total of no more than 12 persons in dual national
status with claims to American citizenship have
been accorded exit visas by the Soviet Union.
It is well known that the attitude of the Soviet
Government toward individuals differs in marked
respect from that held by most other nations. The
Soviet citizen within his own country is subject to
innumerable controls. The system of internal
passports in effect in the Soviet Union prevents the
Soviet citizen from free choice of residence. At
the same time he is prevented from travel abroad ;
in almost no case is a Soviet citizen ever given an
exit permit to travel abroad for personal reasons.
Therefore the prevention of Soviet wives of for-
eigners from leaving the Soviet Union is con-
sistent with the conception of the state's absolute
control over the individual held in that country.
In this connection, I should like to refer again
to the draft Declaration of Human Rights. While
we know that this Declaration is not intended to
be a statement of rules of law binding upon mem-
bers of the United Nations, I think most of us agree
that all members of the United Nations should
strive to promote respect for the rights and free-
800
doms set forth in the Declaration and also should
strive to secure their universal and effective recog-
nition and observance. Now Committee 3 has
recently ajoproved by a vote of 37 to 0, with 3 ab-
stentions, an article 11, which reads:
"1. Everyone has the right to freedom of move-
ment and residence within the borders of each
State.
"2. Everyone has the right to leave any country,
including his own, and to return to his country."
We are very sorry indeed, Mr. Chairman, that
at this time, when the General Assembly is about
to proclaim the basic principles of human rights
and freedoms "as a common standard of achieve-
ment for all peoples and all nations", a member of
this organization is pursuing policies so com-
pletely inconsistent with these principles. In par-
ticular, we regard the Soviet policy toward the
Soviet wives of foreigners as showing the most
flagrant disregard of the fundamental human
rights of family and marriage.
The United States therefore condemns this vio-
lation by the Soviet Union of fundamental human
rights and hopes that the Government of the Soviet
Union will recognize its obligations under the
Charter to encourage respect for human rights and
for fundamental freedoms for all, by permitting
those Soviet wives of foreigners to join their hus-
bands.
The Soviet Union has argued that article 2,
paragraph 7, of the Charter precludes this Com-
mittee from considering the problem. It must be
clear to everyone that this provision of the Charter
could not possibly apply to the case of the Chilean
Ambassador's daughter-in-law. Every law stu-
dent knows that questions of diplomatic privileges
and immunities are among the most fundamental
in international law. From earliest times, rela-
tions between states have been founded on the
mutual recognition of certain rights and privileges
for those who represent a sovereign state. The
question of specifying those rights and privileges
is one for international and not national decision.
My Delegation deplores the fact that the Soviet
Government rejected proposals by the Chilean
Government that the case of the Ambassador's
daughter-in-law be submitted to the Arbitration
Tribunal or to the International Court of Justice,
of which both Chile and the Soviet Union are
members.
We also feel that article 2, paragraph 7, does
not preclude this Committee from considering the
many cases of Soviet wives prohibited from leav-
ing the Soviet Union. In our view, the General
Assembly has the right, under article 10, to discuss
this matter of violation of human rights. More-
over I should like to remind the Soviet Delegate
that his Govenmient has found no difficulty in
Department of State Bulletin
iliscussing the luim;m-rio;hts problems of other
t'oimtries on nmny occasions in the General As-
sembly.
I will reserve the right to speak again in connec-
tion with the detailed drafting of whatever resoln-
tion the Committee may decide to adopt. In con-
clusion, however, I should like to affirm that my
Delegation agrees in principle with the Delegation
of Chile that the acts of the Soviet Union in deny-
7HE UNITED NATIONS AND SPECIAilZBD AGENCIES
ing the right of the wives, botli of diplomats and
of foreign citizens, to depart from its territory
violate the fundamental princii)les of the Charter.
The international community will attain soli-
darity and strength on the basis of universal re-
spect for international law and the fundamental
human rights. I hope that the Soviet Union will
recognize its responsibilities under the Charter to
work toward the attainment of these objectives.
Adjournment of the General Assembly in Paris
STATEMENT BY JOHN FOSTER DULLES'
Acting Chairman, U.S. Delegation to the General Assembly
Historians will, I think, refer to this session as
the Human Rights Assembly. We have met in a
country where the Declaration of the Rights of
Man was inspired. We have met on a continent
which has seen mankind's greatest struggle against
tyranny. And we have met at a time when the
jjaramount issue is the preservation of human free-
dom. Time and place are combined to welcome
actions -which will give immortality to this Assem-
bly : adoption of the Universal Declaration of Hu-
man Rights. Furthermore we have given historic
support to this Declaration by approving a con-
vention on genocide and by taking many concrete
actions showing our fidelity to high principles of
the Charter.
Only one element is needed to make this moment
a source of great hope for all mankind : The loyal
fulfilment of the decisions which we together
make and the earnest respect for international
judgments here expressed. This element is abso-
lutely essential to orderly international life. Only
thus can we enhance the authority of international
decisions. Only thus can we build the authority
of the United Nations.
Most of the problems we have faced here have
been the direct result of the failure to hold to the
determination we jointly expressed in the Char-
ter to practice tolerance and live together as good
neighbors. That is the root cause of our failures.
It is the threat to our successes. Nevertheless, de-
bates here have revealed increasing unity among
the great majority of the member states. They
have also helped eliminate those dangers to peace
which arise from miscalculation. It is perfectly
clear an aggressor can no longer hope to vanquish
his victims one by one.
Any aggressor will have to count on solid and
not divided resistance. That is a detriment to war
and a fact that should dispel the fear that tends
to paralyze the will to i-ecovery and the determina-
tion to work for peace. Therefore, I say, let's stop
speculating about the next war.
I could not close these remarks without express-
ing my Delegation's deep appreciation for the
wiirm and generous hospitality extended to us by
the Government and by the people of France. I
feel also that a special word of gratitude is due also
to the members of the secretariat whose devoted
service is as unflagging as it is indispensable.
We adjourned tonight and we leave France.
But we leave with renewed determination to go
on to discharge our Charter obligations and fulfil
the aspirations of our peoples. Only by full col-
lective action can we obtain the strength, stability,
and unity which can make this era one of peaceful
production, of new intellectual achievement, and
universal respect for the fundamental rights of
freedom. Such an era is possible. History may
])rove it had its beginning here at this Human
Rights Asseiubly. The promise of the future is a
challenge to all men of good will.
' Made at the closing meeting of the General Assembly
on Dec. 12, 1948, and released to the press on Dec. 13.
CORRECTION: The Ad Hoc Political Committee's resolution on
admission of Austria to the United Nations is given in its entirety
in the Bullf.tix of December 19, 1948, page 754. Footnote 1 on this
page should read, "U.N. doc. A/AC.24/.30, Nov. 27, 1948 ; adopted by
Ad Hoc Political Committee on Nov. 27, 1948."
December 26, J 948
801
Two Years' Activity of the International Children's Emergency Fund
BY MRS. FRANKLIN D. ROOSEVELT IN COMMITTEE 111'
U.S. Representative to the General Assembly
As far back as a year ago, the Assembly passed
a resolution in which it expressed its satisfaction
with "the concrete work already accomplished by
the Fund". At its most recent session, the Eco-
nomic and Social Council likewise took favorable
action regarding the Children's Fund.
The General Assembly launched the Children's
Fund two years ago. But it was only about a year
ago — after the complicated business of buying,
shipping, and distributing of special supplies for
mass feeding of children — that the Fund began
actually to dispense milk and cod liver oil to chil-
dren in devastated countries of Europe. Since
then, the Fund has been bringing positive help
steadily to what we should perhaps consider the
most important part of the populations of those
countries.
Unicef — as the organization is now familiarly
called — has been providing nearly four million
children in Europe in the neediest ai-eas with a
daily supplement of protective food, composed
mainly of milk, special processed meat, and fish
oil rich in vitamins. Twenty-five countries have
contributed money, supplies, or services. Twenty
countries have already been the recipients of Chil-
dren's Fund benefits, and eleven others are actively
developing programs for Unicef assistance in ad-
dition to British territories in the Far East.
Twenty-six countries are on the Executive Board
of the Fund. Contributions have come in the form
of currency, cod-liver oil, wool, labor to make raw
hides or leather into children's shoes, transporta-
tion of supplies, and a thousand and one different
services. This has been a work of cooperation of
the fii'st importance, not only for its immediate
objectives, but as an example of the way we can all
work together once we agree on a purpose. Natu-
rally, the determination to help the coming genera-
tion in devastated areas through a time of acute
emergency has been a cause of great appeal.
More than 148 million pounds of powdered milk,
over 30 million pounds of fish oils and fats, 5^^
million pounds of canned meat and fish and 10
million pounds of other foods have moved through
Unicef channels for use in Albania, Austria, Bul-
garia, Czechoslovakia, Finland, France, Greece,
Hungary, Italy, Poland, Kumania, Yugoslavia,
and China.
Enlargement of the scope of Unicef activity
' Excerpts from a statement made on Dec. 2, 1948, and
released to the press by the U.S. Delegation to the General
Assembly on the same date.
802
has taken place recently in several ways. First,
the original feeding program has been augmented
by an antituberculosis campaign using in Europe
the new BCG serum now produced in quantity in
Denmark, a country which has donated large
amounts of serum to the Fimd. About 40 million
children in Europe are being tested, and all who
react negatively — estimated to be only about 15
million unfortunately — are receiving the innocu-
lation, which protects them for two or three years
as they go back to their families in areas where
tuberculosis has become practically epidemic as a
result of the war. Other medical campaigns are
directed against venereal disease in children and
against malaria, and the DDT used for malaria
control has been found — through a happy acci-
dent— to reduce infant mortality in a spectacular
degree.
Secondly, Unicef has been able to follow up its
policy that these emergency measures should uti-
lize and strengthen "permanent child health and
welfare programmes". For example, the Fund
accepted the offer of the French Government to
conduct for Unicef a child-health-and-welfare
training progi-am at the University of Paris, and
offers of other training jJrograms in Sweden and
Switzerland. It has allocated 2 million dollars for
equipment to increase production of milk powder
within countries where this step would provide
both emergency and long-term benefits for child
health.
In the third place, the Fund has been expanding
its geographical scope of operations to far-flung
regions of the East outside China — to include
Indonesia, Indochina, Siam, the Philippines,
United Kingdom territories, Burma, India, Pakis-
tan, Ceylon, and also North Africa. From Latin
America, two doctors have gone to Europe for
study on fellowships arranged by the Fund, in
order to apply the new antituberculosis methods
widely for the benefit of children in the Western
Hemisphere. A Unicef nutritionist has been act-
ing as consultant in Latin America on problems of
child nutrition and school feeding and has made a
survey tour and reported on child health and nutri-
tion in Paraguay, Chile, Bolivia, Peru, and Colom-
bia. About three weeks ago, the Executive
Director of the Fund wrote the governments of all
twenty Latin American Republics in response to a
request to explain in detail the medical and tech-
nical programs of Unicef which might be most
suitable and helpful for application in those
Deparfmenf of Sfofe Bulletin
countries. Mexico, among other countries, has
recently applied for assistance through a BCG
antituherculosis program. A new and unusual call
for help came last jUmist on behalf of Arab and
Jewish refugees in Palestine. Kesponding in-
stantly to this appeal, the Fund first made avail-
able ai)out half a million dollars of its resources for
a two-months' emergency program in Palestine.
Less than a month after the Executive Board acted,
the tirst Unicef supplies from overseas reached
Beirut for distribution through Palestine. Last
Sejitember the progress rejjort of the mediator on
Palestine already stated: "This allocation . . .
has served as the foundation for the program of
immediate relief." A few weeks ago, reviewing
the initial Unicef operations and the outlook for
the winter in Palestine, the Executive Board de-
cided to devote G million dollars more to this work.
The success of the Children's Fund has been
outstanding enough to justify an examination of
the kind of organization it is and the principles on
which it operates. In the original resolution,
whicli I have already mentioned, the Assembly
decided that "the Fund shall consist of any assets
made available by L^nrra, or any voluntary con-
tributions made available by governments, volun-
tary agencies, individuals or other sources." So
far, much of the greatest part of the Fund's re-
sources has been provided by Unrea and by gov-
ernments. At a recent meeting of the Executive
Board, it was reported that out of a total of more
than 100 million dollars of resources, actual or
reasonably to be anticipated, only about 8 million
dollars had not come from governments and from
Tjnrra.
L^xiCEF has maintained important principles.
First, supplies going to each country must, in a
general way, be matched by suj^plies or services
provided within that country itself, from its own
resources. Another principle is that distribution
of Unicef supplies or other assistance should be
"on the basis of need, without discrimination be-
cause of race, creed, nationality status, or political
belief." Tliat appears in the original resolution.
Again, receiving countries must submit satisfac-
tory reports on the use of Unicef aid, and the Fund
asks that due recognition be given within receiving
countries to the United Nations character of its
assistance. My Government holds that we should
recall and reaffirm these principles today. We are
gratified by the evidence that there has been a con-
certed attempt to follow them as closely as possible
in administering the trust of the Children's Fund.
This has been no easy task, requiring a far-flung
field staff to provide liaison with local authorities
and to work with both governmental and nongov-
ernmental groups having responsibility for distri-
bution of the Fund's resources.
Looking back to the day two years ago when
the Fund was created, it will be remembered that
at that time the work of most specialized agencies
THE DNIUD NATIONS AND SPECIAUZBD AGENCIES
now associated with tlic United Nations was to a
large extent in its infancy, or had not started at
all. Only in the last few months has the World
Health Organization formally come into existence.
It is natural, therefore, to consider means by which
the Children's Fund and the specialized agencies —
such as the Who and Fao and Unesco — can best
reinforce each other's work on behalf of children.
At the very beginning of the Unicef feeding pro-
gram, one notices the excellent example of joint
action with the Who and Fao to select particular
foods for needy groups of children to be assisted
in the distressed areas. This decision took into
account questions of nutrition, availability of
foods during the period of acute shortage, as well
as procurement, shipping, and distribution.
It may be well to point out that, while most of
the specialized agencies are principally advisory
in character and their funds are largely for ad-
ministrative purposes, the Children's Fund is a
supply organization with money to buy milk and
medicine, as well as to provide general adminis-
tration. The importance of keeping these dis-
tinctions clear and the operating relations as pre-
cise as possible explains why my Government
views with approval the establishment by the
Children's Fund and the Who of a Joint Health
Committee, and why we went so far as to intro-
duce the paragi'aph in the resolution of the Eco-
nomic and Social Council which "notes with
approval the arrangements for cooperation which
have been achieved by the World Health Organiza-
tion and the International Children's Fund".
While the United States has always taken the
closest interest in the work of the Fund, as shown
by its membership on the Executive Board and the
various committees, and has followed the day-to-
day operations with care, perhaps the greatest evi-
dence of supiDort has been the very definite fact
that we have appropriated 75 million dollars to the
Fund. Of this sum, about 48 million dollars has
already been made available to the Children's
Fund, according to the terms of the appropriation.
Roughly speaking, these terms provide that for
every $28 contributed by other countries, the
United States will contribute $72, up to the full
75 million dollars.
In order to engage the 27 million dollars or so
which has not yet been drawn on by the Fund,
some 10 million dollars are needed for other coun-
tries. However, the report of the Fund's Execu-
tive Board mentions, not 10 million dollars, but 20
million dollars in this connection. Undoubtedly,
this I'efers by implication to an additional 25 mil-
lion dollars which has already been authorized by
the United States Congress but has not been ap-
propriated. Just to avoid any possible misunder-
standing, I would like to explain that it would be
prejudging the action of Congress to assume that
this additional 25 million dollars will, in fact, be
appropriated..
December 26, 1948
803
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES
Inter-American Conference on Rehabilitation of the Crippled and Disabled
BY MICHAEL J. SHORTLEY
Chairman, United States Delegation
The First Inter-American Conference on Re-
habilitation of the Criijpled and Disabled was
held at Mexico City from July 18 to 21, 1948. It
was sponsored bv the International Society for
the Welfare of Cripples (formerly the Interna-
tional Society for Crippled Children) and was
under the auspices of the Mexican Government
through its Department of Public Health and
Welfare. The International Society for the Wel-
fare of Cripples, domiciled in the United States,
has for its purpose to promote, generally, the wel-
fare of the crippled throughout the world.
Although this was the first Inter-American Con-
ference, four World Congresses of the Society had
previously been held. The First World Congress
under the auspices of the Society took place at
Geneva in 1924, with subsequent Congi-esses at
The Hague (1932), Budapest (1936), and London
( 1939) . The convening of these World Congi-esses
was suspended during the war, but a fifth World
Congress is now being planned. Greece, Italy,
Sweden, and Czechoslovakia are being considered
by the Society as possible sites.
Several official and unofficial agencies in the
Americas participated in the Conference. Argen-
tina, Bolivia, Canada, Colombia, Costa Rica,
Cuba, the Dominican Republic, Ecuador, France
Guatemala, Honduras, Mexico, Nicaragua, Peru'
Puerto Rico, Spain, the United States, and Uru-
gua,y were among the nations represented. The
United Nations also sent representatives.^
The Opening Plenary Session
The introductory address was made by Dr. Juan
Farill, president of the International Society for
the Welfare of Cripples, who traced the history of
the founding of the International Society for the
Welfare of Crippled Children by Edgar" Allen in
the United States.
Dr. Farill made a strong plea for the prevention
of injuries and stated that prevention is more im-
portant than rehabilitation.
Dr. Farill pointed out that conditions in Latin
America, with the exception of a few nations, are
tragic. Some Latin American countries are with-
out a single specialist in orthopedic surgery, and
^ For a list of the United States Delegates to tliis meet-
ing, see Bulletin of July 25, 1948, p. 122.
others do not have this service in their hospitals.
In some, orthopedics is not taught in the univer-
sities.
Labor legislation, said Dr. Farill, should pro-
vide that all those workers who suffer a definite
incapacitation should be compensated mainly bj'
occupational rehabilitation. Besides this rehabil-
itation, there would or would not be granted, as
might be decided, a financial indemnification tak-
ing into consideration the time lost by the worker
and the economic disadvantage he might suffer in
this new employment in comparison with the old.
The speaker then called for legislation in each
country to provide for prevention of disabilities
and for the maximum physical recuperation, the
education, the vocational training, and remunera-
tive employment of every cripple without distinc-
tion not only as to race, nationality, or religion, but
also without distinction as to political partisanship
or the social or economic position of the invalid.
The aims of the Conference as stated by the So-
ciety were "(a) To initiate and promote rehabili-
tation services in Latin America; (b) To help
them organize in a modern way ; (e) To know the
real condition of the crippled in every country of
this Continent and the means which are available
for their rehabilitation ; {d) To adopt a minimum
five-year program for this purpose in Latin
America; (e) To promote official and public in-
Officers
President: Dr. Juan Farill, Mexico
President Elect: Dr. Henry H. Kessler, U.S.A.
Secretary-General: Bell Greve, U.S.A.
Treasurer: R. W. Hopper, Canada
rice Presidents:
Africa : Mrs. Andrew Kerr, Union of South Africa
Asia : Lady Abrahams, Ceylon
Europe : Sir Geoffrey K. Peto, K.B.E., England, and
r»r. Paul Guildal, Denmark
North America: Col. E. W. Palmer, U.S.A., and
R. W. Hopper, Canada
South America : Dr. J. M. Jorge, Argentina
804
Department of State Bulletin
tercst, cooperation of oflichil and private agencies
and improve institutional relationships among
countries of this Hemisphere."
The official inauguration address was g'iven by
Dr. Rafael C. Gambou. Secretary of Public Health
and Welfare of the Mexican Government, who
extended a hearty welcome to the delegates.
The Scope of the Conference
More than fifteen formal papers were i^resented
at the plenarv sessions. They covered varied as-
pects of the field of rehabilitation and included
addresses on the subjects of employment of the
liandicapped, the diagnostic clinic for rehabilita-
tion, vocational education and rehabilitation of
the disabled in Puerto Rico, social rehabilitation
of tlie crippled, rehabilitation centers in Latin
America, public understanding of work for
cripples, education for crippled children in the
United States, principles of administration of
programs for crippled children, convalescent care
for children, practical considerations on legisla-
tion for crippled children, and vocational rehabili-
tation.
The section meetings covered subjects such as
rehabilitation of the blind, labor accidents, ortho-
pedics, educational and vocational rehabilitation,
social service in rehabilitation, therapy rehabili-
tation, and orthopedic nursing.
The Closing General Assembly
On the last afternoon of the Conference, Dr.
Jose Luis Bado, of Uruguay, presented a series of
resolutions outlining a minimum five-year pro-
gram for adoption by the delegates. These reso-
lutions were presented in an address entitled
"Assistance to the Handicapped is an Obligation
Pertaining to the State".
The principal .theme of Dr. Bado's address was
that the care of the handicapped should be imposed
by law. He also made a strong plea for compul-
sory reporting of all handicapped cases by j^hysi-
cians, teachers, and parents to an institute created
for the rehabilitation of the disabled. He ad-
vocated that all employees of the government and
of private enterprises (industrial, commercial,
banking) be obliged to take part in an "accident
insurance" to the extent of 4 percent of their
salary.
Dr. Bado visualized also as a part of this mini-
mum five-year program a technical board con-
nected with the rehabilitation institute which
would organize recuperating and rehabilitating
centers, including :
(a) Diagnostic clinics;
(i) Specialized surgical services;
(c) Oifices for prosthesis;
(</) Clinics where the use of orthopedic ap-
pliances would be taught ;
(e) Workshops for rehabilitation and reeduca-
tion;
ACTtVITIBS AND DEVBLOPMBNTS
(/) Departments of social service which would
also have charge of finding places in the
community for the rehabilitated.
The resolutions as originally presented pro-
voked considerable discussion from delegates of
almost all the nations. After free discussion of
each of the resolutions, there was unanimous
agreement on 18 resolutions.
Resolutions Adopted
The work of the Conference culminated in these
resolutions, which constitute the final act:
1. Rehabilitation sliall not be considered a charity but
shall be regarded as the right of every disabled person in
the Americas.
2. The state as the highest authority of society has the
obligation to serve the disabled regardless of age, sex,
race, color, or religious or political affiliation.
3. The right of disabled persons to receive a complete
range of rehabilitation services shall be universal.
4. Nations not having a well developed plan for rehabili-
tation should create a comprehensive plan for a rehabili-
tation program, in accordance with national possibilities,
5. Specialized centers shall be established for the pur-
pose of rehabilitating disabled persons, and programs de-
signed to prevent disablement shall be initiated.
6. Concerning the establishment of specialized rehabili-
tation centers, it is recommended that such centers have
for their purpose physical and educational recuperation
and vocational and socio-economic rehabilitation, with
psychiatric care Included. Such centers shall be under
the jurisdiction of designated authority and shall have as
their aim the return of the rehabilitated individual to
society.
7. Each nation should initiate, organize, or intensify
accident prevention campaigns and establish a broad public
educational program as to the causes of disability.
8. In all industrial accidents, the insurance company or
agency, whether it is state or private, shall first provide
for the rehabilitation of the injured. Any money involved
.shall be to compensate for remaining disabilities and shall
be in the nature of a life-long retirement plan.
9. A system for the reporting of disabilities shall be
established in all nations.
10. Reports of disabilities shall be received by a Techni-
cal Board which shall have the responsibility of deter-
mining the possibility of rehabilitation.
11. For disabled persons who cannot be rehabilitated,
there shall be provided proper convalescent homes or
other such facilities or, if necessary, life-long aid in the
disabled individual's own home, if the home is suitable.
12. The exploitation of cripples is condemned and it is
urged that all legal means shall be used to discourage and
prevent such exploitation.
13. It is recommended that compulsory study in ortho-
pedic surgery and physical medicine, as well as special
courses for nurses, affiliated technicians, orderlies and
others necessary and needed in the program of rehabilita-
tion, be established in universities and teaching hospitals.
14. Each nation should provide workshops for the pro-
duction of prostheses and orthopedic braces according to
December 26, 1948
805
ACTIVITIES AND DEVBLOPMENTS
up-to-date and scientific standards and for the training of
mechanics and workers in such trades.
15. Nations are encouraged to foster the interchange of
specialists and technicians, with the hope that postgrad-
uate courses will be steadily developed for technical
advancement.
16. Nations shall establish fellowships and scholarships
for persons who desire to secure advanced training and
are equipped for additional study in any one of the special
services concerned with the entire welfare of the disabled
and crippled person.
17. Private national agencies shall cooperate with other
national organizations and it is recommended that they
seek affiliation with the International Society for the Wel-
fare of Cripples.
18. It is recommended that handicapped children be
educated under the usual school system and in regular
classes insofar as it is to the best advantage of the chil-
dren, or in special classes, when such classes meet most
adequately the needs of the child.
The Conference was adjourned after the pres-
entation of Dr. Henry Kessler, of the United
States, as the new president of the International
Society for the Welfare of Cripples.
Clarification of Press Policy Relating to FEC Deliberations
STATEMENT BY MAJOR GENERAL FRANK R. McCOY'
Chairman, Far Eastern Commission
The Soviet member of the Far Eastern Commis-
sion has issued a statement to the press concerning
action taken by the Commission on a Soviet pro-
posal regarding the level of economic life in
Japan. It is not the custom of the Commission to
publicize those measures which are proposed and
considered but fail of agreement among its mem-
bers. It was my understanding that this custom
would be followed in this case. The Soviet mem-
ber has nevertheless made public the fact that his
proposal was rejected and has commented on the
views of the opposing majority. Under these un-
usual circumstances, I feel it is my, duty as Chair-
man, with tlie express authorization of a majority
of the members, to clarify the situation to the
public on the basis of Commission records which
have been accepted by all members.
The Soviet proposal was tliat the Commission
should adopt the following policy :
1. No limitations should be imposed upon the
restoration and development of peaceful Japanese
industry wliich seeks to satisfy the needs of the
Japanese population, nor upon the development
of exports in accordance with the needs of Japan's
peaceful economy.
2. The revival and creation of Japanese war in-
dustry should be prohibited and there should be
established, for a period of several years, a control
over the fulfillment of this decision, to be exercised
by the powers most interested in preventing a new
Japanese aggression.
^ Made on Dee. 10, 1948, and released to the press by the
Commission on the same date. General McCoy is U.S.
Representative on the Commission.
" Bulletin of Mar. 17, 19-46, p. 431.
After extended deliberations in which all mem-
bers of the Commission participated, it developed
that a majority opposed this proposal for the fol-
lowing reasons :
1. The first paragraph of the Soviet proposal
was regarded by other members as vague or as
unnecessary since no limitations on the develop-
ment of Japanese peaceful industry had ever been
adojited or even considered by the Commission.
On the contrary, the effect of all established
policies of the Commission has been to permit such
development without hindrance.
2. The second paragraph of the Soviet proposal,
as interpreted by its author to call for interna-
tional control over war industries in Japan beyond
tlie conclusion of a Japanese peace treaty, was re-
garded by other members as falling outside the
jurisdiction of the Commission, which is not con-
cerned with the post-treaty period.
While the i^ress policy approved by the Far
Eastern Commission in 194:6 permits members of
tlie Commission to make individual statements to
the press,- it lias been the custom of members dur-
ing tlie ensuing two and one-lialf years to refrain
from exercising tliis privilege in the interests of
continuing cooperation. In view of the public
statement of the Soviet member of the Commis-
sion in which comment was made on the views of
other members, I consider it incumbent on me as
Chairman to suggest that other members need not,
in this instance, feel obliged to adhere to the cus-
tom of refraining from the issuance of individual
statements. Members of the Commission should
therefore feel at liberty to express their views pub-
licly on tliis important matter which has been con-
sidered by the Commission.
806
Department of State Bulletin
THE RECORD OF THE WEEK
Announcement of Intention To Enter Into Tariff Negotiations in April 1949
The liiteidi'partnientiil Trade Agreements Com-
mittee on December 17 issued formiil notice of in-
tention to negotiate with Colombia and Liberia
for reciprocal reduction of tariff and other trade
barriers and for accession of those coimtries to the
General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade con-
cluded by the United States and 2'2 other countries
at Annecy. France, on October 30, 19-i7. Colombia
and Liberia will join with 11 other countries in the
negotiations scheduled to begin at Geneva on April
11, 1949. The Trade Agreements Committee
notice was accompanied by publication of lists of
articles on which L^nited States tariff concessions
might be considered in the negotiations with
Colombia and Liberia.
The Trade Agreements Committee also pub-
lished on December 17 supplementary lists of
articles on which United States tariff concessions
might be considered in the forthcoming negotia-
tions with 9 of the 11 countries regarding which
notice of intention to negotiate was given and lists
were published by the Committee on November 5,
1948. Those countries are : Denmark, the Domini-
can Republic, Finland, Greece, Haiti, Italy, Peru,
Sweden, and Uruguay. No supplementary lists
have been issued for the remaining two countries,
El Salvador and Nicaragua.
No United States tariff concessions will be con-
sidered, in the forthcoming negotiations, on any
ai'ticle not appearing on one of the lists published
November o, or on one of the lists published on
December 17, unless it is subsequently included in
a future supplementary list. These lists are pub-
lished in advance of the negotiations, in accord-
ance with the provisions of Executive Order No.
10004 of October 5, 1948.^
In the case of articles with respect to which
imports from Cuba are entitled to preferential
treatment, a modification of the rate in the nego-
tiations will involve the elimination, reduction, or
continuation of the preference, perhaps with an
adjustment or specification of the rate applicable
to the Cuban product. The situation will be com-
parable in the case of products on which the United
States enjoj'S a preference in Cuba and with re-
spect to which Cuba might negotiate with any
other country.
The interdepartmental Committee for Reciproc-
ity Information also announced that public hear-
ings in connection with products appearing on the
lists published December 17 and with U.S. exports
to countries with which the U.S. intends to nego-
' 13 Fed. Reg. 5851.
December 26, 7948
tiate, will open January 25, 1949; applications to
appear at those hearings and written briefs and
statements will be received until January 18, 1949.
These hearings are held under section 4 of the
Trade Agreements Act of 1934, as amended, which
provides that any interested person shall have
opportunity to present his views on any proposed
trade agreement before its conclusion. Executive
Order No. 10004 designates the Committee for
Reciprocity Information as the agency to receive
these views and to transmit them to the interde-
partmental trade-agreements organization.
The lists of products made public have been
transmitted by the President to the Tariff Com-
mission as is required by the Trade Agreements
Extension Act of 1948. LTnder that act the Com-
mission must investigate, hold hearings, and report
to the President in not more than 120 days, with
regard to each item on the lists: (1) the extent to
which United States tariff or other import restric-
tions may be reduced without causing or threaten-
ing serious injury to a domestic industry producing
like or similar articles; and (2) what, if any, addi-
tional import restrictions are required in order to
prevent such injury.
The Tariff Commission has announced hearings
on the articles covered in the lists, to run concur-
rently with the hearings of the Committee for
Reciprocity Information. Information submitted
to the Tariff Commission, other than that accepted
by the Commission as confidential, will be made
available to the trade-agreements organization
through the Committee for Reciprocity Informa-
tion. Therefore, persons not wishing to present
any information in addition to that which they
present to the Tariff Commission may, but need
not, appear before the Committee for Reciprocity
Information. However, persons wishing to pre-
sent additional information concerning possible
import concessions, or views with respect to export
concessions to be obtained by the United States,
should appear before the Committee for Reciproc-
ity Information.
Inclusion of a given article on any of the lists
published November 5 or December 17 does not
necessarily mean that a concession will be made
on that article. The Trade Agi-eements Com-
mittee will make its recommendations to the Presi-
dent only after the trade-agreements organization
has studied all the information received from the
Tariff Commission and from the Committee for
Reciprocity Information, as well as all other avail-
(ContlnueA on page 809)
807
Exchange of Persons With Eastern European Countries
REPLY OF DEPARTMENT OF STATE TO THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE
UNITED STATES ADVISORY COMMISSION ON EDUCATIONAL EXCHANGE
December 10, 1948
Deai! Dr. Branscomb : ^
Tlie recommendations of the United States Ad-
visory Commission on Educational Exchange
concerning educational exchanges with the coun-
tries of eastern Europe have been referred to me
by the Secretary's office. We have studied the
reconnnendations carefully.^ The Commission's
views coincide with United States foreign policy
objectives. The Department will emphasize in its
operations the methods recommended by the Com-
mission for reaching these objectives. We are
taking immediate steps to put your recommenda-
tions into effect.
Specifically, the Department agrees that free
interchange of persons and ideas on a world-wide
basis must be the long range objective of this pro-
gram. We concur in your view that the effective-
ness of Government-supported exchanges under
Public Law 402 with certain eastern European
countries is highly questionable as long as their
governments remain unwilling to cooperate.
Therefore such exchanges will not be established
at this time. The Department keenly regrets that
it is impossible at present to establish world-wide
exchange programs on a reciprocal basis.
The Department will continue, however, to as-
sist reputable American state, local and private
organizations in promoting educational inter-
change with parts of the world where there is little
understanding of the principles which should un-
derlie such intellectual and cultural relations.
This decision follows the Commission's recom-
mendations.
The Department will maintain its vigilance in
safeguarding the public safety and the security
of our Government and free institutions, as you
urged. The Department is in complete agreement
with the Commission that it is desirable to restrict
the travel of individuals sponsored by organiza-
tions generally recognized as subversive. Aliens
whose intentions are deemed to be subversive, or
who are or have been members of organizations
professing such intentions, are considered inad-
missible to the United States under our immigra-
tion laws. Students and scholars who succeed in
'Dr. Branscomb is chairman of the United States Ad-
visory Commission on Educational Exchange.
' See Bulletin of Oct. 31, 1948, p. 560.
808
obtaining the permission of Communist-dominated
governments to visit the United States for bona
fde educational, cultural, and scientific purposes
will frequently be considered by the United States
consuls to be inadmissible uncler these laws. In
such a case, the Attorney. General of the United
States has the legal authority under the 9th proviso
of section 3 of the Immigration Act of February
5, 1917, to authorize temporary entry of an alien
otherwise excludable.
A sponsoring agency may petition the Attorney
General to exercise his discretionary authority iii
such cases. The Department will support such a
request made by a reputable sponsoring agency
in those meritorious cases where the Department
believes that the advantages to the United States
outweigh the possible disadvantages. Persons for
whom entry is requested, however, should furnish
evidence of their intent to participate only in ac-
tivities consistent with the stated purposes of their
visit. As the Commission suggests, such represen-
tations will be particularly appropriate in the case
of international conferences, congresses and other
meetings of an educational nature, which normally
last only a short time.
We shall support your recommendations of pre-
cautions that should be observed when American
students study in eastern Europe. The Depart-
ment will emphasize to sponsoring organizations
the desirability of limiting the exchanges to ma-
ture students who will be able to evaluate critically
their experience in such countries. Upon request,
the Department will also try to inform these spon-
soring organizations about the conditions in
countries to be visited.
The Department intends to make public this ex-
change of correspondence and to circulate it widely
among officers of the Department and the Foreign
Service who may be called upon to assist. Any
further instructions which are necessary for the
guidance of these officers will be issued promptly.
I do not wish to conclude this letter without
telling you and the members of the Commission
that your recommendations reflect the serious
thought you have given to the problems involved
in these exchanges. The Department appreciates
your advice.
Sincerely yours,
HOWLAND H. SaEGEANT
Deputy Assistant Secretary
for Public Affairs
Department of State Bulletin
Educational Exchange Agreement With Italy
[Ueleasi'ii to the press Decemlier IS]
The Republic of Italy and the United States
on December 18 si<inetl an agreement under the
Fulbright act, putting into operation the pro-
gram of educational exchanges authorized by
l*ublic Law 584, 7t)th Congress. The announce-
ment was made by the Department of State at a
meeting of the Board of Foreign Scholarships
appointed by the President to select persons to
receive awards under the act.
The agreement with Italy was signed in Rome,
with Ambassador James C. Dunn representing
the United States and Coimt Sforza, Italian For-
eign Minister, representing the Republic of Italy.
George V. Allen, Assistant Secretary of State for
public affairs, was present at the signing. The
agreement pi'ovides for a United States Educa-
tional Commission in Italy to assist in the admin-
istration of the educational program financed
from certain funds resulting from the sale of
United States surplus property to that country.
The present agreement provides for an annual
program of the equivalent of $1,000,000 in Italian
lire for educational purposes. The program will
include the financing of "studies, research, in-
struction, and other educational activities" for
U.S. citizens in Italy, and for payment of round-
trip travel for Italian nationals wishing to pursue
similar activities in the United States.
Information about specific opportunities for
American citizens to study, teach, or undertake re-
search in Italy will be made public after the Com-
mission in Italy lias held meetings and an initial
program can be formulated. Inquir'ies about these
opportunities and requests for application forms
should be addressed to the following three agen-
cies: Institute of International Education, 2 AVest
45th Street. New York 19, N. Y. (for graduate
study) ; United States Office of Education, Fed-
eral Security Agency, Washington 25, D. C. (for
teaching in Italian elementary and secondary
schools) ; and the Conference Board of Associated
Research Councils, 2101 Constitution Avenue,
NW., Washington 25, D. C. (for teaching at the
college level and for post-doctoral research).
Rumania Demands Recall of U.S. Officers;
U.S. Calls Charges Contrary to Fact
Rumanian Ministry of Foreign A fairs to Ameri-
can Legation at Bucharest
[Released to the press December 11]
December 7, 19J^8
The Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the People's
Republic of Rumania has the honor to bring the
following to the attention of the Legation of the
United States of America :
December 26, 7948
THf RECORD OF THE WEEK
In view of facts revealed during the trial of a
group of plottei-s, spies and saboteurs which took
place before a military tribunal of the capital from
October 27 to November 2, the Rumanian Govern-
ment informs the Legation of the United States
of America that it no longer desires the presence
in the country of Colonel John R. Lovell, Military
Attache, and Mr. Henry P. Leverich, Counselor
of Legation.
The Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the People's
Republic of Rumania consequently requests the
Legation of the United States of America to bring
to the attention of the Department of State that
the Rumanian Government desires their recall to
be effected in the shortest possible time.
V.S. Minister to Rumania {Rudolf E. Schoenfeld)
to Rumanian Ministry of Foreign Affairs
[Released to the press December 11]
December 10, 1048
The American Minister presents his compli-
ment.s to Her Excellency, the Minister for Foreign
Affairs and has the honor to acknowledge the re-
ceipt of the Ministry's note of December 7 request-
ing the recall of Colonel John R. Lovell, United
States Military Attache, and Mr. Henry P. Leve-
rich, Counselor of Legation. The Ministry asserts
that the request is based on "facts revealed" during
a recent trial of several Rumanians charged with
espionage and sabotage.
The American Minister has been instructed by
his Government to inform the Rumanian Govern-
ment that while, in conformity with usual inter-
national practice, it is acceding to this request and
arranging for the early departure from Rumania
of these two officers, it rejects as ridiculous and
entirely contrary to fact the grounds upon which
the Rumanian Government presumes to base its
request for their recall.
Tariff Negotiations— Con«i»we<i from page S07
able data. Actual making of concessions will de-
pend, of course, on the outcome of the negotiations.
The lists published November 5 and December
17 are based ujion the language of the Tariff Act
of 1930, but do not show existing rates of duty on
the listed products. These rates are shown in
United /States hnport Duties {19Jf8) and supple-
ment 1 thereto, published by the Tariff' Commis-
sion and oljtainable from the Tariff Commission,
the Department of State, or the Department of
Commerce and its regional and district offices.
For a list of products on which U. S. Tariff con-
cessions may be considered, see Department of
States press release 1015 of December 17, 1948.
809
Soviet Union Suspends Repatriation of
Japanese From Siberia '
The repatriation division of General Head-
quarters, ScAP, announced December 11 receipt of
a letter from the Soviet Member, Allied Council
for Japan, announcing that repatriation of Japa-
nese from Siberia and other Soviet-controlled
areas would be suspended until the resumption of
navigation in 1949 because of climatic and icing
conditions.
The spokesman for this division stated, "the
Supreme Commander for the Allied Powers was
profoundly disappointed to receive this notifica-
tion of the intended suspension of Japanese re-
patriation during the ensuing months by which
more than 400,000 hapless Japanese are con-
demned to a fourth winter in Siberia and other
Soviet-controlled areas. This action has been
undertaken in disregard of repeated offers macle
by ScAP of assistance in overcoming alleged navi-
gational, climatic, and icing conditions."
The spokesman reemphasized the previous
ScAP offers to provide :
(1) Adequate shipping for repatriation of
Japanese in increments up to 160,000 persons per
month.
(2) Icebreakers and other special facilities.
This latest offer was made by Scap in a letter on
October 20, 1948, in order to assist the Soviets in
overcoming difficulties allegedly presented by the
winter repatriation of Japanese. This letter was
never answered.
It was stated that the last regular monthly re-
patriation list in November realized the release of
37,929 repatriates, 12,071 below the 50,000 quota of
the ScAP-Soviet repatriation agreement, thus
marking the eighteenth consecutive month that the
Soviets have failed to fulfil subject quota.
Following is the Soviet suspension letter re-
ceived by ScAP on December 8, 1948, addressed to
General' Headquarters, Supreme Commander for
the Allied Powers, Chief of Staff, Major General
Mueller :
"Dear General: This is to confirm the declara-
tion of Captain second rank Yashin made Decem-
ber 3, 1948, to the representative of the Liaison
Section, General Headquarters, Scap, Captain
Senka, that repatriation of Japanese, in compli-
ance with paragraph four, section two. Agreement
of December 19, 1948, is discontinued due to heavy
climatic and icing conditions until navigation
season of 1949."
' Statement released to the press on Dec. 11, 1948, by Scap
Headquarters in Tokyo. Printed from telegraphic text.
810
Uprising Overtiirows President
of San Salvador
[Released to the press December 15]
Reports from the American Embassy in San
Salvador indicate that an uprising which occurred
in that city on the afternoon of December 14
ended in a few hours with the overthrow of Presi-
dent Salvador Castaneda Castro. The revolt
apparently was organized by yoimger army officers
under the leadership of Lt. Col. Manuel Cordova.
Martial law and a 10 o'clock curfew are in force.
Lt. Col. Cordova has stated that free elections will
be held. The Embassy states that no injury to
American citizens or damage to their property has
been reported.
Congressional Approval of U.S.-Canadian
Agreement on Seaway Project To Be Requested
The Acting Legal Adviser to the Chairman of
New York Power Authority
[Released to the press December 16]
December 15, 1948
Mt dear General Wilbt :
Reference is made to your call at the Depart-
ment and correspondence concerning the applica-
tion i^repared by tlie Power Authority of the State
of New York which it desired to have submitted
to the International Joint Commission.
After careful consideration of this matter, this
Government is of the opinion that in view of the
shortage of power and the need for additional
transportation facilities in the St. Lawrence re-
gion, it is desirable to renew the request to Congress
for approval of the 1941 Agreement between the
United States and Canada for construction of the
seaway and power projects. Consequently, it
would not be appropriate to take further action
with respect to the proposed reference of this
application to the International Joint Commission.
Sincerely yours,
For the Secretary of State :
Jack B. Tate
Acting Legal Adviser.
Letters of Credence
Uruguay
The newly appointed Ambassador of Uruguay,
Senor Dr. Don Alberto Dominguez Campora, pre-
sented his credentials to the President on Decem-
ber 15, 1948. For texts of the Ambassador's re-
marks and the President's reply, see Department
of State press release 1009 of December 15, 1948.
Department of State Bulletin
Continuation of Danger Area Surrounding
Eniwetoit Proving Ground
[Released to the press by tlie U.S. Atomic
Energy Coniinission Uecember 15]
The United States Atomic Energy Commission
on December 15 gave public notice that the clanger
area, described below, surrounding Eniwetok
Atoll will continue to exist until further notice.
The (lander area was previously prescribed for a
period begiiming January 31, 1948, to continue
throughout the calendar year 1948. Eniwetok
Atoll is the site of the Comm'ission's proving
gi'ound for routine experiments and tests of atomic
weapons.
The area designated as a danger area is bounded
as follows :
Beginning with a point at 10° 15' north latitude
and 160°35' east longitude, north along the me-
ridian of 160°35' east longitude, to a point at
12°45' north latitude, 160°35' east longitude
thence east along the parallel of 12°45' north lati-
tude to a point at 12°45' north latitude and
163°55' east longitude, thence south along the
meridian of 163°55' east longitude to a point at
10° 15' north latitude and 163°55' east longitude
thence west to the point of beginning.
Notice of the continued designation of the dan-
ger area is being made in air and marine naviga-
tional notices.
THE DEPARTMENT
Termination of Advisory Committee
on Occupied Areas Affairs
The Advisory Committee for Occupied Areas
Aifairs (Oac) has been abolished. Information
to interested agencies on occupied areas matters
and coordination of their advice on the formula-
tion of policy in occupied areas continues to be the
responsibility of the Department of State. These
relations are maintained through the office of the
Assistant Secretary for occupied areas and
through the regular liaison channels between de-
partments.
THE FOREIGN SERVICE
Consular Offices
The American Consulate at Bristol, England,
was closed to the public on November 30, 1948.
Until further notice the former Bristol consular
district will be divided as follows : Somersetshire
to Cardiff; Wiltshire and Berkshire to South-
ampton; (iloucestershire to Birmingham.
December 26, 1948
PUBLICATIONS
Department of State
For sale fi.v the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printimj Office, Wnshinr/ton 25, D.O. Address requests
direct to the Siipcrinlendcnt of Documents, except in the
ca^e of free publications, which may be obtained from the
Department of State.
Shipping: Arrangements and Recommendations of
United Maritime Executive Board. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 172.'5. Pub. 3124. 6 pp. 5«(.
Agreement Between the United States and Other Gov-
ernments—Dated at London February 11, 1946; en-
tered into force March 3, 1946.
Trade: Application of Most-Favored-Nation Treatment
to Areas Under Occupation or Control. Treaties and
Other International Acts Series 1829. Pub. 3231. 5 pp.
Agreement Between the United States and Italy-
Effected by exchange of notes signed at Rome June
28, 1948 ; entered into force June 28, 1948.
Trade: Application of Most-Favored-Nation Treatment
to Areas Under Occupation or Control. Treaties and
Other International Acts Series 1835. Pub. 3233. 4 pp.
5(f.
Agreement Between the United States and the United
Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland —
Effected by exchange of notes signed at Loudon July
6, 1948 ; entered into force July 6, 1948.
Claims Resulting From Activities of United Military
Forces in China. Treaties and Otlier International Acts
Series 177C. Pub. .3258. 10 pp. 5(f.
Agreement Between the United States and China —
Effected by exchange of notes dated at Nanking
October 13, 1947, and March 17, 1948; entered into
force March 17, 1948.
American Dead in World War II. Treaties and Other In-
ternational Acts Series 1777. Pub. 3259. 6 pp. 5^.
Agreement Between the United States and the Nether-
land.s — Effected by exchange of notes signed at The
Hague April 11, 1947 ; entered into force April 11, 1947.
Germany: Distribution of Reparation, Establishment of
Inter-Allied Reparation Agency, Restitution of Monetary
Gold. Treaties and Other International Acts Series 1797.
Pub. 3289. 8 pp. 50.
Protocol Between the United States and Other Gov-
ernments apportioning shares between India and
Pakistan under the Agreement of January 14, 1946 —
Signed at Brussels March 15, 1948; effective from
January 24, 1946.
Reciprocal Trade: Quantitative Import Restrictions and
Deferment of Payments. Treaties and Other Interna-
tional Acts Series 1800. Pub. 3293. 2 pp. 5«}.
Agreement Between the United States and Sweden
extending agreement of Juue 24, 1947, as modified,
after June 30, 1948— Effected by exchange of memo-
randums dated at Washington June 12, 1948 ; entered
into force June 12, 1948.
Trade: Application of Most-Favored-Nation Treatment to
Areas Under Occupation or Control. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 1820. Pub. 3330. 4 pp. 50.
Agreement Between the United States and Austria-
Effected by exchange of notes signed at Vienna July 2,
1948 ; entered into force July 2, 1948.
811
The United Nations
and Specialized Agencies Page
Status of Work of the Third Regular Session
of the General Assembly, as of December
12, 1948 783
Peaceful Adjustment Sought Through Pales-
tine Conciliation Commission:
Statement by John Foster Dulles in the
General Assembly 793
Adoption of Resolution on Conciliation
Commission 793
Admission of New Members. Statement by
Benjamin V. Cohen in the General
Assembly 794
Discussion of Interim Committee's Report
on Promotion of International Political
Cooperation. Statement by Benjamin
V. Cohen in Ad Hoc Committee . . . 796
Discussion of Chilean Proposal Relating to
Soviet Wives of Foreigners. Statement
by Ernest A. Gross in the Legal Com-
mittee 798
Adjournment of the General Assembly
in Paris. Statement by John Foster
Dulles 801
Two Years' Activity of the International
Children's Emergency Fund. Statement
by Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt in Com-
mittee III 802
Treaty Information
Announcement of Intention To Enter Into
Tariff Negotiations in April 1949 ... 807
Educational Exchange Agreement With Italy . 809
Congressional Approval of U. S. -Canadian
Agreement on Seaway Project To Be
Requested 810
International Information and
Cultural Affairs
Inter- American Conference on Rehabilitation
of the Crippled and Disabled. Article
by Michael J. Shortley 804
International Information and
Cultural Affairs — Continued
Exchange of Persons With Eastern European
Countries. Reply of Department of
State to the Recommendations of the
United States Advisory Commission on
Educational Exchange
Educational Exchange Agreement With Italy .
Page
808
809
General Policy
Rumania Demands Recall of U.S. Officers;
U.S. Calls Charges Contrary to Fact:
Rumanian Ministry of Foreign Affairs to
American Legation at Bucharest . . . 809
U.S. Minister to Rumania to Rumanian
Ministry of Foreign Affairs 809
Uprising Overthrows President of San
Salvador 810
Letters of Credence: Uruguay 810
Continuation of Danger Area Surrounding
Eniwetok Proving Grounds 811
Occupation Matters
Clarification of Press Policy Relating to Fec
Deliberations. Statement by Major
General Frank R. McCoy 806
Soviet Union Suspends Repatriation of
Japanese From Siberia 810
The Department
Termination of Advisory Committee on
Occupied Areas Affairs 811
The Foreign Service
Consular Offices 811
Publications
Department of State 811
Michael J. Shortley, author of the article on the First Inter-
American Conference on Rehabilitation of the Crippled and
Disabled, is Director of the Office of Vocational Rehabilitation,
Federal Security Agency.
U. S, GOVERNMENT PRINTrNG OFFICE: |94S
iL
mfllv!^ PUBLIC LIBRARY
3 9999 06352 743 4
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11